User Guide: Geomagic Verify - November, 2013

User Guide
Geomagic Verify | November, 2013

Copyright Notice
©1993-2013. 3D Systems, Inc. All rights reserved. Produced in the USA. 11/30/13
The content of this manual is furnished for informational use only, is subject to change without
notice, and should not be construed as a commitment by 3D Systems, Inc. Any names, places, and/or
events in this publication are not intended to correspond or relate in any way to individuals, groups
or associations. Any similarity or likeness of the names, places, and/or events in this publication to
those of any individual, living or dead, place, event, or that of any group or association is purely
coincidental and unintentional.
No warranties of any kind are created or extended by this publication. Any products and related
material disclosed in this publication have only been furnished pursuant and subject to the terms
and conditions of a duly executed agreement to license the Software. Any warranties made by 3D
Systems, Inc. with respect to the Software described in this publication are set forth in the License
Agreement provided with the Software and printed in this publication. As more definitively stated
and set forth in the License Agreement, 3D Systems, Inc. does not and will not accept any financial
or other responsibility that may result from use of the Software or any accompanying material
including, without limitation, any direct, indirect, special or consequential damages.
Individuals or organizations using the Software should ensure that the user of this information
and/or the Software complies with the laws, rules, and regulations of the jurisdictions with respect
to which it is used. This includes all applicable laws concerning the export of technology and the
protection of intangible or intellectual property rights. 3D Systems, Inc. asserts its rights in and will
endeavor to enforce all proprietary rights embodied in the Software and this publication including,
without limitation, all copyright, patent, trademark, and trade secrets or proprietary information.
The only rights given to an individual or organization purchasing the Software are those explicitly
set forth in the License Agreement. Other than as explicitly allowed in the License Agreement,
copying the Software or this material (including any format or language translation) is prohibited
absent the prior written consent of 3D Systems, Inc.
3D Systems, 3D Systems, Inc., Geomagic, Geomagic Capture, Geomagic Design, Geomagic Design X,
Geomagic Design Direct, Geomagic Studio, Geomagic Verify, Geomagic Control, Geomagic Wrap,
Geomagic Freeform, Geomagic Freeform Plus, Geomagic Sculpt, Geomagic Capture for SolidWorks ,
Geomagic Capture for SpaceClaim, and all product logos are either registered trademarks or
trademarks of 3D Systems, Inc. All other trademarks within this user guide & tutorial are the property
of their respective owners and are used for identification purposes only. Other than to identify this
Software and publication, individuals or organizations purchasing the software are not entitled to
use 3D Systems’s trademarks without 3D Systems’s prior written consent.
Correspondence regarding this publication should be directed to:

3D Systems, Inc. Geomagic Solutions.
E-mail:
geomagic.sales.americas@3dsystems.com
geomagic.sales.emea@3dsystems.com
geomagic.sales.japan@3dsystems.com
geomagic.sales.china@3dsystems.com
geomagic.sales.apac@3dsystems.com
geomagic.sales.korea@3dsystems.com
Web: www.geomagic.com/
Geomagic Verify | Table of Contents i

Table of Contents
1. INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................................1
1.1. Welcome to Geomagic Verify.........................................................................................2
1.2. Key Themes of Geomagic Verify ....................................................................................4
1.3. Features of Geomagic Verify..........................................................................................6
2. GETTING STARTED ................................................................................................ 14
2.1. System Requirements ................................................................................................. 14
2.2. Installation ................................................................................................................... 18
2.3. What Can Geomagic Verify Do? .................................................................................. 19
2.4. Basic Entity Terminology ............................................................................................ 20
2.5. Basic Concept of User Interface .................................................................................. 28

2.5.1. User Interface Overview ..............................................................................................................................28
2.5.2. Understanding User Interface Philosophy ...........................................................................................36
Dialog Tree Convention .............................................................................................................. 36
Selection Convention .................................................................................................................. 39
Mode Convention ......................................................................................................................... 40
Docking Bar Convention ............................................................................................................ 40
2.5.3. Navigating Entities ........................................................................................................................................41
2.6. Basic Inspection Overview.......................................................................................... 45

2.6.1. Importing Data ...............................................................................................................................................46
2.6.2. Aligning Scan Data to Nominal Data......................................................................................................47
2.6.3. Analyzing Scan Data .....................................................................................................................................50
2.6.4. Generating and Exporting Reports .........................................................................................................54
3. UNDERSTANDING SCAN DATA ............................................................................. 56
3.1. Why 3D Scanning? ....................................................................................................... 56

3.1.1. Power of 3D Scan Data.................................................................................................................................57
3.1.2. Applications of 3D Scan Data ....................................................................................................................58
3.2. Types of 3D Scan Data ................................................................................................. 59

3.2.1. Understanding Point Clouds .....................................................................................................................59
3.2.2. Understanding Mesh ....................................................................................................................................63
3.2.3. Mesh vs. Point Cloud ....................................................................................................................................67
4. UNDERSTANDING INSPECTION............................................................................ 68
Geomagic Verify | Table of Contents i

4.1. Inspection Scenario..................................................................................................... 69
4.2. Basic Knowledge for 3D Scan-based Inspection Process ......................................... 72

4.2.1. Preparing ...........................................................................................................................................................73
Working with Large Scan Data ................................................................................................ 73
Verifying Geometric Features .................................................................................................. 75
Alignment ........................................................................................................................................ 78
4.2.2. Analyzing ..........................................................................................................................................................83
Checking Deviations.................................................................................................................... 84
Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing (GD&T) ......................................................... 89
Simple Measuring ......................................................................................................................... 92
4.2.3. Reporting ..........................................................................................................................................................96
Visualizing Results with a Color Map .................................................................................... 96
Visualizing Results by Tagging .............................................................................................. 100
Adjusting the Color Bar and Checking Go / No Go Results ....................................... 102
Generating Reports................................................................................................................... 105
4.2.4. Inspection using Probe Measurement Devices............................................................................... 108
5. GETTING HELP ..................................................................................................... 111
6. USER INTERFACE ................................................................................................. 113
6.1. Title Bar ...................................................................................................................... 114
6.2. Menu Bar .................................................................................................................... 114
6.3. Tool Palette ................................................................................................................ 115
6.4. Toolbar ....................................................................................................................... 116
6.5. Docking Bars.............................................................................................................. 120

6.5.1. Tree ................................................................................................................................................................... 122
6.5.2. Display ............................................................................................................................................................. 129
6.5.3. Help .................................................................................................................................................................. 136
6.5.4. Viewpoint ....................................................................................................................................................... 137
6.5.5. Properties ....................................................................................................................................................... 138
6.5.6. Color Bar ......................................................................................................................................................... 159
6.5.7. Report .............................................................................................................................................................. 162
6.5.8. Support ........................................................................................................................................................... 184
6.5.9. Image Folder ................................................................................................................................................. 185
6.5.10. Console ........................................................................................................................................................... 187
6.5.11. Error List .......................................................................................................................................................... 187
6.5.12. Tabular View .................................................................................................................................................. 188
6.6. Model View ................................................................................................................ 189
6.7. Dialog Tree ................................................................................................................. 190
6.8. Monitoring Bars......................................................................................................... 193

6.8.1. Status Bar ....................................................................................................................................................... 193
6.8.2. Progress Bar ................................................................................................................................................... 193
6.8.3. Time Indicator .............................................................................................................................................. 193
6.8.4. Memory Usage Indicator ......................................................................................................................... 194
6.8.5. Cache Disk Indicator .................................................................................................................................. 194
Geomagic Verify | Table of Contents ii

6.9. Esc Key ........................................................................................................................ 194
6.10. Mouse Control ........................................................................................................... 194
6.11. Shortcut Keys ............................................................................................................. 196
6.12. Pop-up Menus............................................................................................................ 197
6.13. 3D Mouse ................................................................................................................... 200
6.14. Geomagic Verify Automation ................................................................................... 201

6.14.1. Components ................................................................................................................................................. 201
6.14.2. Benefits ........................................................................................................................................................... 202
6.14.3. Setting up Automation ............................................................................................................................. 204
Single Source Mode .................................................................................................................. 205
Multiple Source Mode.............................................................................................................. 211
6.14.4. Options in Detail ......................................................................................................................................... 217
Server ............................................................................................................................................. 218
Client............................................................................................................................................... 224
7. MENU ................................................................................................................... 224
7.1. File .............................................................................................................................. 225

7.1.1. File > New ...................................................................................................................................................... 227
7.1.2. File > Open .................................................................................................................................................... 228
7.1.3. File > Convert XDL ...................................................................................................................................... 230
7.1.4. File > Save ...................................................................................................................................................... 230
7.1.5. File > Save As ................................................................................................................................................ 232
7.1.6. File > TeamPlatform ................................................................................................................................... 233
7.1.7. File > Import Nominal Data .................................................................................................................... 237
7.1.8. File > PMI Import Wizard .......................................................................................................................... 241
File > PMI Import Wizard > CATIA ........................................................................................ 242
File > PMI Import Wizard > Siemens NX ........................................................................... 248
File > PMI Import Wizard > Creo(PRO/E) ........................................................................... 254
7.1.9. File > Import Scan Data ............................................................................................................................ 259
7.1.10. File > Replace Scan Data .......................................................................................................................... 265
7.1.11. File > Batch Process .................................................................................................................................... 269
7.1.12. File > Export .................................................................................................................................................. 271
7.1.13. File > Publish ................................................................................................................................................. 274
File > Publish > Point Stream ................................................................................................ 274
File > Publish > ICF .................................................................................................................... 278
7.1.14. File > Capture Screen................................................................................................................................. 283
7.1.15. File > Print ...................................................................................................................................................... 285
7.1.16. File > Print Preview ..................................................................................................................................... 286
7.1.17. File > Print Setup ......................................................................................................................................... 286
7.1.18. File > Preferences ........................................................................................................................................ 287
7.1.19. File > Summary Info ................................................................................................................................... 298
7.1.20. File > Recent Files........................................................................................................................................ 299
7.1.21. File > Exit ........................................................................................................................................................ 300
7.2. Select .......................................................................................................................... 301

7.2.1. Select > Mode .............................................................................................................................................. 303
7.2.2. Select > All ..................................................................................................................................................... 306
7.2.3. Select > None ............................................................................................................................................... 307
7.2.4. Select > Inverse ............................................................................................................................................ 308
Geomagic Verify | Table of Contents iii

7.2.5. Select > Custom Region ........................................................................................................................... 309
7.2.6. Select > Boundary Entities ...................................................................................................................... 311
7.2.7. Select > Entities Around Edges/Faces ................................................................................................. 312
7.2.8. Select > Enlarge ........................................................................................................................................... 314
7.2.9. Select > Shrink ............................................................................................................................................. 316
7.2.10. Select > Convert Current Selection...................................................................................................... 317
7.2.11. Select > By Criteria...................................................................................................................................... 319
7.2.12. Select > By Color ......................................................................................................................................... 320
7.2.13. Select > Exterior Poly-Face ...................................................................................................................... 322
7.3. Edit ............................................................................................................................. 323

7.3.1. Edit > Undo ................................................................................................................................................... 324
7.3.2. Edit > Redo .................................................................................................................................................... 325
7.3.3. Edit > Repeat Last Command ................................................................................................................. 326
7.3.4. Edit > Cut ........................................................................................................................................................ 326
7.3.5. Edit > Copy .................................................................................................................................................... 327
7.3.6. Edit > Paste .................................................................................................................................................... 328
7.3.7. Edit > Delete ................................................................................................................................................. 328
7.3.8. Edit > Rebuild ............................................................................................................................................... 329
7.3.9. Edit > Rebuild Current Mode Only ....................................................................................................... 330
7.3.10. Edit > Rollback ............................................................................................................................................. 331
7.3.11. Edit > Roll Forward ..................................................................................................................................... 332
7.3.12. Edit > Roll To Start ....................................................................................................................................... 332
7.3.13. Edit > Roll To Next Alignment ................................................................................................................ 333
7.3.14. Edit > Roll To End......................................................................................................................................... 334
7.3.15. Edit > Suppress ............................................................................................................................................ 334
7.3.16. Edit > Unsuppress ....................................................................................................................................... 335
7.3.17. Edit > Feature ............................................................................................................................................... 336
7.4. Insert .......................................................................................................................... 337

7.4.1. Insert > Align ................................................................................................................................................ 338
Insert > Align > Auto ................................................................................................................ 340
Insert > Align > Best Fit ........................................................................................................... 342
Insert > Align > RPS .................................................................................................................. 346
Insert > Align > Datum ............................................................................................................ 350
Insert > Align > 3-2-1................................................................................................................ 354
Insert > Align > Coordinate ................................................................................................... 356
Insert > Align > Transform ...................................................................................................... 360
Insert > Align > Adaptive ........................................................................................................ 364
Insert > Align > Homing ......................................................................................................... 366
7.4.2. Insert > Section ............................................................................................................................................ 369
7.4.3. Insert > Multiple Sections ........................................................................................................................ 377
7.4.4. Insert > Curve ............................................................................................................................................... 384
7.4.5. Insert > Ref. Geometry .............................................................................................................................. 385
Insert > Ref. Geometry > Point ............................................................................................. 387
Insert > Ref. Geometry > Simulated CMM Point ............................................................ 398
Insert > Ref. Geometry > Vector ........................................................................................... 407
Insert > Ref. Geometry > Plane............................................................................................. 418
Insert > Ref. Geometry > Circle ............................................................................................ 431
Insert > Ref. Geometry > Slot ................................................................................................ 441
Insert > Ref. Geometry > Rectangle ................................................................................... 449
Insert > Ref. Geometry > Regular Polygon ...................................................................... 458
Insert > Ref. Geometry > Cylinder ....................................................................................... 467
Insert > Ref. Geometry > Cone ............................................................................................. 474
Insert > Ref. Geometry > Sphere ......................................................................................... 480
Insert > Ref. Geometry > Torus ............................................................................................. 485
Geomagic Verify | Table of Contents iv

Insert > Ref. Geometry > Coordinate ................................................................................. 491
7.4.6. Insert > 3D GD&T ........................................................................................................................................ 496
7.4.7. Insert > Deviation ....................................................................................................................................... 497
Insert > Deviation > Whole Deviation ............................................................................... 498
Insert > Deviation > Comparison Point ............................................................................ 507
Insert > Deviation > Boundary Deviation ........................................................................ 515
Insert > Deviation > Curve Deviation ................................................................................ 521
Insert > Deviation > Silhouette Deviation ....................................................................... 527
Insert > Deviation > Virtual Edge Deviation .................................................................... 534
Insert > Deviation > Geometry Deviation ........................................................................ 540
7.4.8. Insert > Plot ................................................................................................................................................... 545
7.4.9. Insert > Active Scan Data ......................................................................................................................... 551
7.4.10. Insert > Scanner Direct Control ............................................................................................................. 553
Insert > Scanner Direct Control > Geomagic Capture................................................. 554
Insert > Scanner Direct Control > Creaform Portable 3D Scanners ....................... 559
Insert > Scanner Direct Control > Konica Minolta VIVID ............................................ 562
Insert > Scanner Direct Control > Breuckmann ............................................................. 567
Insert > Scanner Direct Control > KODEN OCM-A (32 bit only) ............................... 571
Insert > Scanner Direct Control > Roland LPX (32 bit only) ...................................... 571
Insert > Scanner Direct Control > Konica Minolta RANGE5/RANGE7 (64 bit only)574
Insert > Scanner Direct Control > Shining3D ................................................................. 574
Insert > Scanner Direct Control > Z Corporation ZScanner ...................................... 577
7.4.11. Insert > Note ................................................................................................................................................. 580
7.5. Tools ........................................................................................................................... 581

7.5.1. Tools > Nominal Tools ............................................................................................................................... 582
Tools > Nominal Tools > Sew................................................................................................. 583
Tools > Nominal Tools > Split Face ...................................................................................... 585
Tools > Nominal Tools > Transform ..................................................................................... 588
Tools > Nominal Tools > Offset ............................................................................................. 591
Tools > Nominal Tools > Thicken ......................................................................................... 594
Tools > Nominal Tools > Delete Faces................................................................................ 596
Tools > Nominal Tools > Mirror ............................................................................................ 598
Tools > Nominal Tools > Fix Normal ................................................................................... 599
Tools > Nominal Tools > Healing Wizard .......................................................................... 603
Tools > Nominal Tools > Find Defect .................................................................................. 605
Tools > Nominal Tools > Separate Thickened Body...................................................... 606
Tools > Nominal Tools > Convert to Mesh ....................................................................... 608
Tools > Nominal Tools > Assign Tolerance ....................................................................... 611
7.5.2. Tools > Scan Tools ....................................................................................................................................... 613
Tools > Scan Tools > Mesh Buildup Wizard ...................................................................... 617
Tools > Scan Tools > Align ...................................................................................................... 623
Tools > Scan Tools > Triangulate/Merge ........................................................................... 630
Tools > Scan Tools > Combine .............................................................................................. 634
Tools > Scan Tools > Transform ............................................................................................ 635
Tools > Scan Tools > Filter Noisy Poly Vertices................................................................ 639
Tools > Scan Tools > Sampling ............................................................................................. 641
Tools > Scan Tools > Generate Vertex Normal ................................................................ 644
Tools > Scan Tools > Find Defect ......................................................................................... 645
Tools > Scan Tools > Healing Wizard .................................................................................. 649
Tools > Scan Tools > Fix Normal ........................................................................................... 652
Tools > Scan Tools > Sew Boundaries ................................................................................ 654
Tools > Scan Tools > Edit Boundaries ................................................................................. 656
Tools > Scan Tools > Fill Holes............................................................................................... 665
Tools > Scan Tools > Defeature............................................................................................. 669
Tools > Scan Tools > Remove Marker ................................................................................. 672
Geomagic Verify | Table of Contents v

Tools > Scan Tools > Decimate ............................................................................................. 674
Tools > Scan Tools > Split ........................................................................................................ 677
Tools > Scan Tools > Offset .................................................................................................... 680
Tools > Scan Tools > Thicken ................................................................................................. 683
7.5.3. Tools > Region Tools .................................................................................................................................. 686
Tools > Region Tools > Auto Segment ............................................................................... 689
Tools > Region Tools > Resegment ..................................................................................... 692
Tools > Region Tools > Merge ............................................................................................... 694
Tools > Region Tools > Split ................................................................................................... 696
Tools > Region Tools > Insert ................................................................................................ 697
Tools > Region Tools > Separate .......................................................................................... 699
Tools > Region Tools > Enlarge ............................................................................................. 700
Tools > Region Tools > Shrink ............................................................................................... 702
7.5.4. Tools > Section Tools ................................................................................................................................. 703
Tools > Section Tools > Edit Section Deviation .............................................................. 707
Tools > Section Tools > Datum ............................................................................................. 708
Tools > Section Tools > Smart Dimension ........................................................................ 710
Tools > Section Tools > Linear Dimension ....................................................................... 716
Tools > Section Tools > Angular Dimension .................................................................... 723
Tools > Section Tools > Radial Dimension ....................................................................... 727
Tools > Section Tools > Elliptical Dimension ................................................................... 732
Tools > Section Tools > Position ........................................................................................... 736
Tools > Section Tools > Straightness .................................................................................. 741
Tools > Section Tools > Circularity ...................................................................................... 744
Tools > Section Tools > Concentricity ................................................................................ 747
Tools > Section Tools > Parallelism ..................................................................................... 753
Tools > Section Tools > Perpendicularity.......................................................................... 757
Tools > Section Tools > Angularity ...................................................................................... 761
Tools > Section Tools > Symmetry ...................................................................................... 764
Tools > Section Tools > Point................................................................................................. 769
Tools > Section Tools > Simulated CMM Point ............................................................... 780
Tools > Section Tools > Vector .............................................................................................. 789
Tools > Section Tools > Circle ................................................................................................ 798
Tools > Section Tools > Slot ................................................................................................... 805
Tools > Section Tools > Rectangle ....................................................................................... 811
Tools > Section Tools > Regular Polygon .......................................................................... 816
7.5.5. Tools > Curve Tools ..................................................................................................................................... 822
Tools > Curve Tools > Spline .................................................................................................. 825
Tools > Curve Tools > Section ............................................................................................... 830
Tools > Curve Tools > Intersection ...................................................................................... 835
Tools > Curve Tools > Surface UV Curves ......................................................................... 837
Tools > Curve Tools > Boundary........................................................................................... 838
Tools > Curve Tools > Fit From Points ................................................................................ 841
Tools > Curve Tools > Offset .................................................................................................. 846
Tools > Curve Tools > Project ................................................................................................ 848
Tools > Curve Tools > Mirror .................................................................................................. 850
Tools > Curve Tools > Convert Entities .............................................................................. 852
Tools > Curve Tools > Smooth .............................................................................................. 854
Tools > Curve Tools > Trim ...................................................................................................... 855
Tools > Curve Tools > Extend ................................................................................................ 858
Tools > Curve Tools > Split ..................................................................................................... 860
Tools > Curve Tools > Match .................................................................................................. 861
Tools > Curve Tools > Merge ................................................................................................. 864
Tools > Curve Tools > Insert Node....................................................................................... 867
Tools > Curve Tools > Remove Node.................................................................................. 868
Tools > Curve Tools > Remove Constraint ........................................................................ 869
7.5.6. Tools > GD&T Tools ..................................................................................................................................... 871
Geomagic Verify | Table of Contents vi

Tools > GD&T Tools > Datum ................................................................................................. 874
Tools > GD&T Tools > Smart Dimension ........................................................................... 876
Tools > GD&T Tools > Linear Dimension ........................................................................... 883
Tools > GD&T Tools > Angular Dimension ....................................................................... 893
Tools > GD&T Tools > Radial Dimension ........................................................................... 898
Tools > GD&T Tools > Elliptical Dimension ...................................................................... 905
Tools > GD&T Tools > Bore Depth ....................................................................................... 911
Tools > GD&T Tools > Counterbore..................................................................................... 915
Tools > GD&T Tools > Countersink ...................................................................................... 919
Tools > GD&T Tools > Thickness ........................................................................................... 923
Tools > GD&T Tools > Position .............................................................................................. 927
Tools > GD&T Tools > Flatness .............................................................................................. 935
Tools > GD&T Tools > Straightness ..................................................................................... 938
Tools > GD&T Tools > Circularity .......................................................................................... 945
Tools > GD&T Tools > Cylindricity ........................................................................................ 949
Tools > GD&T Tools > Concentricity ................................................................................... 952
Tools > GD&T Tools > Parallelism ......................................................................................... 959
Tools > GD&T Tools > Perpendicularity ............................................................................. 965
Tools > GD&T Tools > Angularity ......................................................................................... 970
Tools > GD&T Tools > Runout................................................................................................ 978
Tools > GD&T Tools > Total Runout ..................................................................................... 983
Tools > GD&T Tools > Line Profile ........................................................................................ 987
Tools > GD&T Tools > Surface Profile ................................................................................. 995
Tools > GD&T Tools > Symmetry ........................................................................................ 1001
7.5.7. Tools > Regroup 3D GD&Ts ...................................................................................................................1006
7.5.8. Tools > Organize Dimensions...............................................................................................................1008
7.6. LiveInspect............................................................................................................... 1012

7.6.1. LiveInspect > Play LiveInspect Process.............................................................................................1016
7.6.2. LiveInspect > LiveAlign...........................................................................................................................1019
7.6.3. LiveInspect > LiveCapture .....................................................................................................................1023
7.6.4. LiveInspect > LiveDimension ...............................................................................................................1027
7.6.5. LiveInspect > LiveGeometry .................................................................................................................1033
7.6.6. LiveInspect > Settings .............................................................................................................................1039
General Tab ................................................................................................................................ 1040
Probe Tab .................................................................................................................................... 1041
Scan Data Tab ............................................................................................................................ 1043
Inspect Tab ................................................................................................................................. 1045
Geometry Tab ............................................................................................................................ 1048
Device Tab .................................................................................................................................. 1050
Hotkey Tab .................................................................................................................................. 1051
7.6.7. LiveInspect > Position Device ..............................................................................................................1052
7.7. Report ...................................................................................................................... 1055

7.7.1. Report > Generate Report .....................................................................................................................1056
7.7.2. Report > Export 3D HTML Report.......................................................................................................1062
7.7.3. Report > Trend Report ............................................................................................................................1064
7.8. Measure.................................................................................................................... 1065

7.8.1. Measure > Distance..................................................................................................................................1066
7.8.2. Measure > Angle .......................................................................................................................................1070
7.8.3. Measure > Radius ......................................................................................................................................1074
7.8.4. Measure > Section ....................................................................................................................................1078
7.8.5. Measure > Area ..........................................................................................................................................1081
7.8.6. Measure > Volume ....................................................................................................................................1083
7.8.7. Measure > Mesh Deviations .................................................................................................................1085
Geomagic Verify | Table of Contents vii

7.8.8. Measure > Virtual Caliper .......................................................................................................................1087
7.9. View .......................................................................................................................... 1090

7.9.1. View > Visibility ..........................................................................................................................................1091
View > Visibility > Show Selected Only ........................................................................... 1093
View > Visibility > Show All .................................................................................................. 1094
View > Visibility > Hide All .................................................................................................... 1095
View > Visibility > Show Pass Only .................................................................................... 1096
View > Visibility > Show Fail Only ...................................................................................... 1097
View > Visibility > Show Warning Only ........................................................................... 1097
View > Visibility > Show No Result Only ......................................................................... 1098
View > Visibility > Show Pass & Warning Only .............................................................. 1099
View > Visibility > Show Fail & Warning Only ................................................................ 1099
View > Visibility > Point Clouds .......................................................................................... 1100
View > Visibility > Meshes .................................................................................................... 1101
View > Visibility > Surface Bodies ...................................................................................... 1102
View > Visibility > Solid Bodies ........................................................................................... 1103
View > Visibility > Curves ...................................................................................................... 1104
View > Visibility > Sections .................................................................................................. 1105
View > Visibility > Ref. Points ............................................................................................... 1105
View > Visibility > Ref. Vectors ............................................................................................ 1106
View > Visibility > Ref. Planes .............................................................................................. 1107
View > Visibility > Ref. Circles .............................................................................................. 1108
View > Visibility > Ref. Cylinders ........................................................................................ 1109
View > Visibility > Ref. Coordinates................................................................................... 1110
View > Visibility > GD&Ts ...................................................................................................... 1111
View > Visibility > Deviations .............................................................................................. 1112
View > Visibility > Measurements ..................................................................................... 1112
7.9.2. View > Zoom ...............................................................................................................................................1113
View > Zoom > Area ............................................................................................................... 1114
View > Zoom > Previous Area ............................................................................................. 1115
View > Zoom > Fit ................................................................................................................... 1116
View > Zoom > PIP .................................................................................................................. 1117
7.9.3. View > Navigate Sections ......................................................................................................................1119
7.9.4. View > Mesh Display Mode ...................................................................................................................1120
7.9.5. View > Body Display Mode....................................................................................................................1121
7.9.6. View > Viewpoint ......................................................................................................................................1123
7.9.7. View > Viewport ........................................................................................................................................1126
7.9.8. View > Light Properties ..........................................................................................................................1129
7.9.9. View > View Clip ........................................................................................................................................1131
7.9.10. View > Annotation Alignment .............................................................................................................1134
7.9.11. View > Annotation Display Control ...................................................................................................1135
7.9.12. View > Maximize View Area ..................................................................................................................1138
7.10. Add-Ins ..................................................................................................................... 1139

7.10.1. Add-Ins > Import Large Data................................................................................................................1140
7.10.2. Add-Ins > Import & Split.........................................................................................................................1141
7.10.3. Add-Ins > Global Register ......................................................................................................................1142
7.10.4. Add-Ins > Register Target.......................................................................................................................1144
7.10.5. Add-Ins > 2D Triangulate .......................................................................................................................1146
7.10.6. Add-Ins > 3D Triangulate .......................................................................................................................1149
7.10.7. Add-Ins > Triangulate/Merge Large Data ........................................................................................1151
7.10.8. Add-Ins > Surface Merge .......................................................................................................................1153
7.10.9. Add-Ins > Volume Merge .......................................................................................................................1155
7.10.10. Add-Ins > Combine ..................................................................................................................................1158
7.10.11. Add-Ins > Find Scan Direction .............................................................................................................1159
Geomagic Verify | Table of Contents viii

7.10.12. Add-Ins > Generate Vertex Normal ....................................................................................................1161
7.10.13. Add-Ins > Reverse Normal .....................................................................................................................1163
7.10.14. Add-Ins > Delete Poly-Faces .................................................................................................................1164
7.10.15. Add-Ins > Trim Mesh ................................................................................................................................1166
7.10.16. Add-Ins > Contour Curve From Whole Deviation ......................................................................... 1169
7.11. Help .......................................................................................................................... 1171
8. GLOSSARY ......................................................................................................... 1174
9. INDEX ................................................................................................................. 1188
Geomagic Verify | Table of Contents ix

1. Introduction
To see the main contents of the help guide, press the F1 key while using a command or while in any
mode. The F1 key by default will open the contents help guide. This will display the help document
for the particular command or mode that is being used.
Note:
You must be in an active command or in an activate mode to use the F1 function. Otherwise, either the
intro document page will be displayed if the F1 function is used for the first time, or the last help page
viewed.
Geomagic Verify | Introduction 1

1.1. Welcome to Geomagic Verify
The Most CAD Friendly Point-Cloud Inspection Software

Thank you for choosing Geomagic VerifyTM, world’s most CAD friendly inspection software for
Systematic Inspection Processing™ using dense point cloud data. 3D Systems, Inc., the leader in
providing technologies that make 3D scanning an extremely powerful tool for a variety of
applications including manufacturing, R&D, quality inspection, medical research, civil engineering
and more, is now presenting the future of 3D scanning software technology with its next generation
3D scan data processing platform, Rapidform XO. Geomagic Verify makes the inspection processing
faster and easier by utilizing a process and user interface that are instantly familiar to CAD users.
Compare Manufactured Parts to CAD Models in Minutes

Geomagic Verify™ is the only software of its kind that is built around the Customr inspection process
with detailed planning and fast and easy execution of inspection processing with no custom code
writing or macros. It offers CAD deviation analysis and geometric dimensioning & tolerancing(GD&T)
of 3D scanned parts. It has been verified to perform the most accurate & repeatable calculation of
any 3D scanning inspection software, and certified by the German PTB and has been tested by
American NIST and the British NPL. It is suited for professional metrology-level inspection
applications with a rich feature set to inspect any part from any CAD software.
• Compatible with Siemens NX, CATIA, Creo(Pro/ENGINEER) and SolidWorks

• Native GD&T Import from CAD – Truly 3D PMI-ready
• Easiest & Quickest Works through CAD-like Intuitive User Interface
• Easily Automate Every Inspection Job without Macro
• Feature-by-feature Parametric Inspection - All inspection features can be updatable and editable
• Industry-proven Accuracy in Use at Top Companies
• Automatic Scan Pair Search and Pair Geometry Display
• Intelligent Auto-Align Based on Feature Recognition
• CAD style GD&T definition, GD&T on 2D, Pattern and Projected Modifier
• Fully Support 2D type GD&T on 2D Drawing
• Available to use Mesh (Tessellated CAD & Scan Data) as Nominal like CAD

• Smart Dimension & Tolerance Table - Predefined tolerance table
• Fully supported for streamlined and efficient inspection processes using portable measurement
devices – LiveInspect™
• Convenient Reporting Tools
• Unicode and Multi-Language Support

1.2. Key Themes of Geomagic Verify
The Most CAD Friendly Point-Cloud Inspection Software

Geomagic Verify is the best tool for design validation. Geomagic Verify provides a rich set of features
for checking Scan-to-CAD comparisons and native GD&T annotation (Product Manufacturing
Information, PMI) analysis. With Geomagic Verify, a design engineer using a major CAD application
can check the quality of a part at his or her desk immediately to effectively analyze problems in the
early design stages. It also is useful for detecting flaws early to prevent further investment of time
and money in a flawed part. This allows for a product development cycle to continue unimpeded.
Geomagic Verify is a unique solution in the market. It is a fundamentally different product from all
other point cloud inspection software. The job processes and user interface in Geomagic Verify have
been developed to be instantly familiar to users of popular CAD applications such as SolidWorks,
Siemens NX, CATIA and Creo(Pro/ENGINEER), which can lead to incredible time savings over
traditional quality inspection software. Geomagic Verify also provides higher accuracy and
repeatability compared to traditional quality inspection software and is the world's first inspection
software to introduce a feature-based parametric inspection concept, which is already very popular
in the general CAD industry. All inspection targets and alignment strategies defined in Geomagic
Verify are managed by features that can be updated, deleted and inserted at any stage. It supports
every possible inspection workflow and is suited to both design validation and in-depth GD&T
quality inspection in design and production.
• Designed for CAD users who are unfamiliar with point cloud inspection and 3D scanning
• Can casually verify the quality of a part before it goes to the formal inspection
• Reduce the learning curve of inspection software through the use of a familiar CAD interface
and job process
• Used to freely update, delete or insert features at any stage of the inspection process, similar to
CAD applications
Inspection Process Simplification by Geomagic Verify™

1.3. Features of Geomagic Verify
Geomagic Verify is an innovative new software solution that allows design engineers to conduct
fully feature-based parametric inspection with a CAD-like intuitive user interface. Geomagic Verify is
a totally renovated solution that provides a new approach with a familiar process. It is used to check
part quality and native GD&T information. Geomagic Verify is not only a better product, but a
different product from other inspection products. Over the past year, we have received valuable
input and guidance from our users on how to refine and perfect this point-cloud inspection software
application. The newest release of Geomagic Verify by ongoing innovations is our answers to their
requests and suggestions.
The highlighted features are as follows:
• New User Interface – CAD - like Intuitive User Interface

• Drastically Simplified Process through Smart Automation
• Fully Compatible with Siemens NX, CATIA and Creo(Pro/ENGINEER) – Truly 3D PMI-ready
• Feature-by-feature Parametric Inspection
• Industry-proven Scan-to-CAD Alignment Enhancement
• Fully Compliant with ASME(ANSI) Y14.5M GD&T
• Truly Supports GD&T on 2D Draft
• Mesh Data as a Nominal Data
• Smart Dimension & Tolerance Table
• Complete Toolbox for CAD & Scan Data Optimization
• Streamlined and efficient inspection processes using portable measurement devices –
LiveInspect™
• Automatic Scan Pair Search and Pair Geometry Display
• Convenient Reporting Tools
• Rebuild Performance Enhancements
• Unicode and Multi-Language Support
• Enhanced Mesh Segmentation and Editing Tools
• Inspection Automation Tool
New User Interface - CAD-like Intuitive User Interface

The functionality, user interface and job processes of Geomagic Verify are similar to those of popular
history-based CAD systems. When it comes to scan data based inspection for CAD users, Geomagic
Verify is the one and only answer.
Drastically Simplified Process through Smart Automation

You can measure and tolerance parts with just a few clicks. Geomagic Verify requires 30% less mouse
traveling distance and clicks compared to other inspection software.
2. Whole 3. Sectional 4. Dimension 6. Replace Scan

1. Alignment 5. Reporting
Deviation Deviation on Section Data
Fully Compatible with Siemens NX, CATIA and Pro/ENGINEER –

Truly 3D PMI-ready
Geomagic Verify opens native files from Siemens NX, CATIA and Creo(Pro/E), and imports
dimensions and tolerances defined in a CAD part, preventing a user from having to redefine the
GD&T. Geomagic Verify is the first point cloud inspection software to truly read native GD&T
annotations (Product Manufacturing Information, PMI) from the most widely used CAD applications.
Feature-by-feature Parametric Inspection

Geomagic Verify is the only point cloud inspection software that works like a history-based CAD
system, allowing the modification of any part of an inspection job at any time with an instant update
of the results. Mistakes can be corrected or measurements can be re-taken without needing to
inspect the whole part all over again.
Industry-proven Scan-to-CAD Alignment Enhancement

When it comes to inspection, every calculation counts. Top manufacturers around the world trust
Verify to measure thousands of parts every day. In addition to its industry-proven accurate
alignment, Geomagic Verify introduces a new fully automated alignment feature based on geometry
feature recognition.
Fully Compliant with ASME(ANSI) Y14.5M GD&T

Many professional GD&T targets are supported in Geomagic Verify such as Patterns, Projected
modifiers, Simultaneous Requirements (SIMREQT), Symmetries, Lines and Surface Profiles,
Counterbores, Countersinks, Bore Depths, etc.

Truly Supports GD&T on 2D Draft
Geomagic Verify is the 1st software of its kind that fully supports GD&T in 2D. Various methods can
be used to define a sectional plane such as Full, Partial, Offset, Multiple and Revolved Section.
Mesh Data as a Nominal Data

In Geomagic Verify, mesh data (tessellated CAD or scan data) can be used as nominal data. GD&T
and +/- tolerances can easily be defined directly on mesh data and is similar with working with CAD
data because all geometrical features on the nominal mesh data are automatically recognized after
importing the mesh file.
Smart Dimension & Tolerance Table

Defining GD&T is much easier than ever through smart automation of UI. A predefined tolerance
table is available to drastically improve job efficiency.
Complete Toolbox for CAD & Scan Data Optimization

Error-free CAD and scan data is required to guarantee the reliability of accurate inspection results.
Geomagic Verify provides a complete toolset for the preparation of perfect CAD and scan data by
using CAD & Mesh healing features, CAD & Mesh de-noising features and CAD & Mesh editing
features.
Streamlined and efficient inspection processes using portable

measurement devices
LiveInspect is a new User Interface (UI) that is used to control various portable measurement devices
in an easy and integrated fashion. LiveInspect™ is flexible and powerful, enabling probing devices
to be used during the inspection process in addition to, or instead of a scanning device. The
LiveInspect™ toolbar contains all the tools necessary when physically touching a probing device to
a measurement part in a consolidated and accessible layout.
Automatic Scan Pair Search and Pair Geometry Display

Geomagic Verify’s new advanced algorithm searches 3D scan pair geometries automatically before

inspecting geometric features. It also searches for linear or circular boundary edges when inspecting
an opened CAD body model. Recognized scan pair geometries are displayed after scan data is
aligned or overlapped with nominal data. When a face, region, edge, or vertex is selected, searched
scan pair geometries will be highlighted. Hovering the mouse cursor on a nominal face or a region
will have the same result.
Convenient Reporting Tools

Geomagic Verify has its own report generation tool inside of the application and it is designed for
easy learning and usage. New functionalities can add more custom values for higher degrees of
freedom when making a customized layout and some performance enhancements have been made
while generating or modifying reports.
Rebuild Performance Enhancements

Since Geomagic Verify’s inspection process is parametric and creates a history, users can change
parameters or options and recalculate revised results at any time by rebuilding the inspection
history.
This enhancement is focused on rebuilding performance by removing redundant calculations. When

the options in the properties are modified, only inspection features influenced by the changed
options will be marked and they can be updated using the rebuild function.
Unicode and Multi-Language Support

Verify supports a Unicode environment and is compatible with any language. Users can import or
export files with country specific characters such as umlauts (ä, ö, ü, etc.) or two bytes characters
such as Korean and Japanese.
Users can choose their desired language within the application in the Preferences after a local
language pack has been installed.
Chinese
German
Korean
Supported languages are as follows:
• Japanese
• Chinese (Simplified)
• German
• Italian
• Korean
• Russian

• Polish
• Czech
Inspection Automation Tool

Geomagic Verify Automation supports for multiple simultaneous inspections. This Automation tool
deals with multiple inspections by assigning inspection jobs to multiple PCs on a network. The
Automation utility monitors the clients and assigns jobs to waiting clients. This process improves
productivity and maximizes inspection efficiency.

2. Getting Started
This section discusses the following topics:
• System Requirements
• Installation
• What Can Geomagic Verify Do?
• Basic Entity Terminology
• Basic Concept of User Interface
• Basic Inspection Overview
2.1. System Requirements

32-bit Edition 64-bit Edition
- Windows Vista (32-bit or 64-bit SP1 or above) - Windows Vista (64-bit SP1 or above)
OS - Windows 7 (32-bit or 64-bit) - Windows 7 (64-bit)
- Windows 8 (32-bit or 64-bit) - Windows 8 (64-bit)
- Intel® and AMD® processors
CPU - Recommended: Multiple core processors. Hyper-threading and clock speeds above 3ghz
can be beneficial but should be paired with a good balance of cores.
- Minimum: 2 GB
- Minimum: 1 GB
- Recommended: 8-16 GB (Based on version
- Recommended: 2 GB
of Windows used)
- Virtual Memory:
RAM - Virtual Memory:
Vista, Win7: recommended to use the default
Vista, Win7: recommended to use the
option; “Automatically manage paging file
default option; "Automatically manage
size for all drives”
paging file size for all drives"
- 30 GB or more recommended
- Temporary file cache requires about 3 GB free disk space for every 100 million points
- Recommended: a SSD with more than 256GB of space, or a 10,000RPM HDD
Hard Disk
- Recommended: using multiple hard drives and assigning one as a “cache” drive for
Geomagic temporary storage and paging files and assigning the other for the operating
system
- OpenGL 1.2 or above, 32 bit true color required
Display
- Recommended 24-inch wide screen monitor, 1920X1280 resolution
GPU - Recommended: NVidia GTX series with 1GB of RAM or more
Intel G45 Intel G45

Intel Intel G645GM Intel Intel G645GM
Certified
Intel G965 Intel G965
Graphics
Intel 945GM Intel 945GM
Card
Intel HD 2000/3000 Intel HD 2000/3000
Geomagic Verify | Getting Started 14

Rage XL Rage XL
AMD Radeon 7500 AMD Radeon X600SE
Radeon 9600 Radeon 7500
Radeon 9600 XT Radeon 9600
Radeon X600 Radeon X600
Radeon X600SE Radeon X1600
Radeon X700 Radeon X1800 GTO
Radeon X1650 Radeon HD 2600 XT
Radeon X1600 Radeon HD 3870
Radeon X1800 GTO Radeon HD 4770
Radeon HD 2600 XT Radeon HD 4800 1G
Radeon HD 3670M Radeon HD 5700
Radeon HD 3870 Radeon HG 5770
Radeon HD 4770 Radeon HD 5800
Radeon HD 4800 1G Radeon HD 6470M
Radeon HG 5770 Radeon HD 6870
Radeon HD 6470M Radeon HD 6970
Radeon HD 6950
Radeon HD 6970
Radeon HD 7850
Radeon HD 7770
FireGL Z1 FireGL V3100

AMD FireGL V3100 AMD FireGL V3600
FireGL V3600 FireGL V5600
FireGL V5600 FireGL V7300
FireGL V7300 FireMV V2250
FireMV V2250 FirePro 2260
FirePro 2260 FirePro V2450
FirePro V2450 FirePro V3750
FirePro V4800
GeForce2 MX 100/200 GeForce2 MX 100/200

NVIDIA GeForce4 Ti 4400 NVIDIA GeForce FX Go 5200
GeForce FX 5200 GeForce Go 5200
GeForce FX 5600XT GeForce 6200
GeForce FX 5700 GeForce 6600
GeForce FX Go 5200 GeForce 6800
GeForce FX Go 5700 GeForce 7600GS
GeForce Go 5200 GeForce 7600GT
GeForce Go 7400 GeForce 7900GS

GeForce Go 7600 GeForce 8300GS
GeForce 6200 GeForce 8400M
GeForce 6600 GeForce 8400GS
GeForce 6800 GeForce 8500
GeForce 7600GS GeForce 8500GT
GeForce 7600GT GeForce 8600
GeForce 7800GTX GeForce 8600GS
GeForce 640M GeForce 8600GTS
GeForce 8300GS GeForce 640M
GeForce 8400M GeForce 8600M
GeForce 8500 GeForce 8800GTS
GeForce 8500GT GeForce 9200M
GeForce 8500GTS GeForce 9300M
GeForce 8600 GeForce 9300GE
GeForce 8600GT GeForce 9500GT
GeForce 8600GTS GeForce 9800GT
GeForce 8600M GeForce 9800GTX
GeForce 8800GT GeForce G105M
GeForce 8800GTS GeForce GT 220
GeForce 9200M GeForce GT 630
GeForce 9300M GeForce GTS 250
GeForce 9300GE GeForce GTX 260
GeForce 9500GT GeForce GTX 285
GeForce 9600GT GeForce GT 310M
GeForce 9800GT GeForce GTS 335M
GeForce 9800GTX GeForce GT 360M
GeForce G105M GeForce GT 425M
GeForce GT 220 GeForce GTX 465
GeForce GT 630 GeForce GTX 485M
GeForce GTS 250 GeForce GT 520M
GeForce GTX 260 GeForce GT 525M
GeForce GTX 285 GeForce GT 540M
GeForce GTS 335M GeForce GT 550M
GeForce GT 310M GeForce GT 555M
GeForce GT 360M GeForce GT 8600M
GeForce GT 425M GeForce GS 8600M
GeForce GTX 485M GeForce GTX 550TI
GeForce GT 520M GeForce GTX 560TI
GeForce GT 525M GeForce GTX 560
GeForce GS 8600M
GeForce GTX 550TI

GeForce GTX 560TI
GeForce GTX 465
GeForce GTX 560
GeForce GTX 570
GeForce GTX 580
GeForce GTX 670
GeForce GTX 680
Quadro NVS 120M Quadro FX 350M
NVIDIA Quadro NVS 135M NVIDIA Quadro FX 360M
Quadro NVS 140M Quadro FX 570M
Quadro FX 350M Quadro FX 580
Quadro FX 360M Quadro FX 880M
Quadro FX 500 Quadro FX Go 1400
Quadro FX 540 Quadro FX 1400
Quadro FX Go 1400 Quadro FX 4500
Quadro FX 3500 Quadro 600
Quadro 600 Quadro 2000D
Quadro 1500 Quadro 3500
Quadro 2000D Quadro 4500
Quadro 3000 Quadro 3000M
Quadro 3500
Quadro 3800
Quadro 4000
Quadro 4500
Quadro 3000M
- Not Recommended - Not Recommended

ATI Mobility Radeon 7000 IGP DDR ATI Mobility Radeon 7000 IGP
ATI Radeon X800 GTO DDR
ATI Radeon X1600
- If you use the AMD Radeon series, the panning or rotation in the application might not
operate correctly. To solve this problem, uncheck the Use Custom Settings option under 3D
> Standard Settings in the Catalyst Control Center dialog box and move the slider to the left.
It is recommended to set the anti-aliasing value lower than 8. Otherwise, detection of 3D
edges may not work properly or there may be problems with panning or rotating within the
application. If anti-aliasing is disabled, the edges and boundaries of shaded objects can be
jagged if displayed at angles close to 0 or 90 degrees.

- DVD drive
- 3 button mouse with scroll
- Sound card
- Keyboard
- Network card
Other
- Internet Explorer version 7.x or higher
- Adobe Acrobat version 5.x or higher
- Microsoft Excel 2003, 2007, 2010, or 2013 for Verify report
- Microsoft .NET Framework 4.0
2.2. Installation
1. Insert the installation DVD into the DVD-ROM drive.
2. The installation program should appear automatically. If the autorun installation does not start
automatically, browse the DVD-ROM directory and then double-click on the autorun.exe file.
3. Follow the instructions provided by the installation program.
4. After installation is complete, run the application.
5. After activating a license, a dialog box will be displayed for setting the initial settings for Geomagic
Verify.
Enable Multi-thread – When set to True, multi-threading will be utilized to speed up the
calculation time of some functions. Enabling multi-threading is highly recommended. On a
single processor, multithreading generally occurs when the processor switches between
different process threads one at a time.
On a multiprocessor or multi-core system, threads will process simultaneously, with each
processor or core running a particular thread. Depending on how many cores the processor has,
the same number of progress bars will be displayed when multi-threading is enabled and
utilized.

User Name – The name of the PC.
Update Product Automatically – If it is set to True, whenever you launch the program, it will
check if there are any updates.
View Manipulation Style – You can select one of the view manipulation style (zooming,
panning, rotating); Rapidform, SolidWorks, Siemens NX, Creo(Pro/E), CATIA, PolyWorks, or
Geomagic.
Preferred Scanner File Format –Select a scanner formats that you frequently use, so that when
you import a scanner file, you will see only the chosen formats.
Preferred Scanner Direct Control –Set frequently used scanners as True to display them in the
Device pull down menu when using the Insert > Scanner Direct Control command. To apply
changes, close and rerun the application.
Unit – Selects default units to be used in the application.
Use Configurations Of Previous Version – Set options to True or False to enable or disable
configurations from previous versions of the application.
2.3. What Can Geomagic Verify Do?
Powerful Digital Inspection with Verify
Geomagic Verify is 3D inspection software, capable of handling both scan data and probe data.
Scan data is a representation of a real object that consists of millions of points and is called a point
cloud. Point clouds are created using a 3D scanner.
Probe data is discrete points taken with a contact measurement device, and is more of a traditional
inspection process. Probe data can be more accurate at the point level, but can give vague results
on problem areas of a model such as warped or stretched areas.
Scanning with a 3D scanner can capture these conditions quicker and more accurately than single
point measurements. Verify is compatible with any 3D scanner or digitizer and provides various
inspection tools to virtually inspect scanned objects based on nominal information.
The digital inspection process in Verify can quickly deliver pass or fail results. By preserving acquired
data, more in-depth measurements can be performed even though the physical object being
inspected might not be available in a metrology lab. Verify scan data processing automatically aligns

scan shots then generates inspection-ready scan data. A generated point cloud or mesh is then
aligned with nominal CAD data using alignment methods such as auto, best-fit, or geometry-based
alignment. Various inspection tools can generate deviation maps on CAD data, pass or fail GD&T
information, and sectional measurements. A MS Word-style reporting tool gathers all inspection
results and creates a customizable report complete with tables, histograms, and images. These
reports can then be exported into popular document formats.
2.4. Basic Entity Terminology

The application can handle many different types of entities ranging from scan data to CAD data. The
entities can be the target or result of a 3D scan-based inspection process, or the by-products of an
inspection process.
This chapter explains what kinds of entities are used in the application and the terminology
definitions for them.
Nominal Data
Nominal data is standard data for 3D scan-based inspections. 3D CAD data and mesh data can be
nominal data in the application. When checking deviation against target scan data, the results are
calculated based on the nominal data. Additionally, to use a point cloud as nominal data, it needs to
be constructed as a mesh through a process called triangulation.

Nominal CAD Data Nominal Mesh Data
Scan Data
Scan data is inspection target data. Point clouds and a mesh data can be scan data in the application.
When checking deviation based on nominal data, results are calculated by measuring projected
distances on the nominal data from the target scan data. To use CAD data as scan data, it needs to
be converted into a mesh or a point cloud through a process called tessellation.
Target Point Cloud Data Target Mesh Data
Point Cloud
A point cloud is a set of 3D points that represent a real object in 3D space. Each point is a digitized
point represented on an object in a X, Y, and Z coordinate system. A point cloud is usually scanned
from a physical part by using a 3D scanner or a coordinate measuring machine (CMM). A point cloud
is used for various purposes, such as scan data for creating 3D CAD models, a target for a 3D scan-
based inspection process, visualization, animation, rendering, and mass customization applications.

Point cloud data
Mesh
A mesh is a polygonal model consisting of vertices, edges, and faces. It represents the shape of a real
object in 3D space. A mesh can be constructed from a point cloud or CAD data by a process called
triangulation.
The mesh model is more useful than point clouds in various applications because it explicitly
represents both the surface and volume of a model. Mesh models are used for various purposes such
as scan data for creating detail 3D CAD models, a target or a reference for an accurate inspection
process, visualization, animation, and rendering.
Mesh from a point cloud of a real bottle
In the application, the following terminologies are used for a mesh entity:
• Poly-Face: triangles enveloped by three poly-edges.

• Poly-Edge: a connecting edge between two poly-vertices.
• Poly-Vertex: a point which represents a position in 3D space.
• Boundary: open boundaries in a mesh without triangles.
Terminology of a mesh
Region Group
Region segmentation is a unique process in Geomagic Verify. Geometric feature regions are

intelligently recognized and classified by colored region groups on a mesh model.
When a mesh model is used as nominal data in a 3D scan-based inspection process, geometric
regions on the mesh will be automatically classified.
The classified regions are used like faces of a CAD model for quickly selecting areas on features and
extracting geometric information.
Classified regions from a mesh
Surface / Solid Body

A surface body is a body that represents a part with a set of opened surfaces that has no volume. A
surface body consists of vertices, edges, faces, and boundaries.
Surface Body
A solid body is a body that represents a part with a set of closed surfaces that encloses a volume. A
solid body consists of vertices, edges, and faces.
Solid Body Solid Body with Hidden Line
Surface bodies and solid bodies both represent a model constructed by geometric features in 3D

space. They are usually used as nominal data in a 3D scan-based inspection process. They can be
used to not only check the deviation between target scan data in overall regions, but also check the
deviation on boundaries, sections, specific positions, and measuring 2D/3D GD&T.
Checking the deviation between Surface / Solid Body and Scan Data
In the application, the following terminologies are used for surface / solid body entities:
• Face: a single surface that represents a geometric shape.

• Edge: a boundary line in-between 2 adjacent faces.
• Vertex: a point at a corner of 3 adjacent faces.
• Boundary: an open outer boundary of a model.
Terminology of a Body
Entity Normals
A normal is typically called a normal vector or a normal direction. It is a perpendicular direction to
the tangent plane at a specific point on an entity. When a normal is used in a mesh, it represents a
positive direction on the surface of the mesh. A normal is used for not only representing a positive
direction on the surface of an entity, but also for aligning entities, optimizing the quality of faces,
calculating an angle using the projection direction of target measurement points, and defining a
position of mating geometries.

Mesh containing twisted normals Mesh containing corrected normals
Curves
Interpolating curves are spline curves created by interpolating points on the surface of an entity. A
curve can be used as a reference entity in various situations, such as a guide curve for defining
measurement positions, serving as a profile for measuring sections or boundaries between nominal
and scan data, and as a reference entity for extracting target geometries.
Curves used as Guide Curve Curves used as Section Profiles
Ref. Geometry
Ref. geometry is a reference geometric feature that consists of various geometric types including:
Points, Vectors, Planes, Slots, Rectangles, Polygons, Cylinders, Cones, Spheres, and Tori. They are used
as references for selecting, measuring, transforming, aligning, sectioning, and dimensioning in 3D
scan-based inspection.

Reference Geometries
Additionally, another Ref. geometry type, CMM Points, is provided in the application. CMM Points
are a special type of Ref. point. They are used for virtually simulating a contact point acquired in a
Coordinate Measuring Machine (CMM).
Simulating a CMM Point
Section
A section is a projected 2D view which shows a cross section of a measurement part along a specified
cutting plane. For a section, the section deviation can be checked, GD&T can be measured, and
reference geometries can be extracted. Additionally, the deviation trends of section profiles along a
specific direction can be analyzed by using multiple sections.
Technical Drawing (Section) GD&T in Section B-B
Nominal Section / Scan Section

When a section is created at a specific position, sectional profiles will be extracted from both
nominal and target scan data. A sectional profile extracted from nominal data is called a nominal
section and a sectional profile extracted from scan data is called a scan section. A nominal section
consists of section edges, and a scan section consists of section polylines. The section edges and
section polylines are constructed by line and arc type segments based on the geometric features of
the nominal and scan data. The resolution of section polylines can be manually adjusted.

Nominal Section Scan Section
Scan Pairs
When beginning an inspection process, the features and geometry information for each nominal
face is read directly from a CAD model or a mesh that has been classified into geometrical regions.
The geometry features in the nominal data are used in measurements and for finding correct scan
data pairs.
When finding corresponding geometry pairs from scan data, corresponding points are first searched
from scan data within a volumetric zone called the thickness zone that is constructed by user-
defined Min./Max.distances on nominal data. Searched points are qualified through filtering
operations. The qualified points are called scan pair points in the application. Using these scan pair
points, scan pair geometry is created.
Nominal and Scan Data Scan Pair Points and Scan Pair Geometry
Probe Point Data

Contact probe data also called Probe Point Data, is acquired when controlling portable
measurement devices with a probe in an inspection process. All probe point data is stored un-
compensated, based on the center position of the probe tip. The data also retains all possible
metadata, or additional information from the device. Some of the information included can be the
probe radius, temperature, probe vector, device type, calibration info, and time of capture. Probe
Points are grouped into Probe Sessions, based on each measurement session, or each time the
device is started and stopped. Probed point data is used as point data in the application for
inspection processes.

Acquired Probe Point Data
2.5. Basic Concept of User Interface

This guide is designed to help beginners understand the basic and essential design concepts of
Geomagic Verify’s user interface.
• User Interface Overview

• Understanding User Interface Philosophy
• Navigating Entities
2.5.1. User Interface Overview

The user interface of Geomagic Verify is designed to be easy to learn and use because it functions
similarly to other CAD software. It uses familiar tools for inspection with the addition of other unique
tools for an efficient and streamlined inspection process.
The following images shows elements which are frequently used in the application.

1. Menu Bar
All functions in the application are contained in the menu bar. These menus allow the easy creation
of a streamlined inspection process.
For more details, go to User Interface > Menu Bar chapter.
2. Tool Palette
The application features different modes that allows for the generation and editing of inspection
entities with only relevant functions displayed. Multiple modes are featured because the application
can handle and manipulate many different types of inspection entities. To simplify and streamline
the inspection process there are different modes that can be used to handle the types of entities
that are being worked with.

For more details, go to User Interface > Tool Palette chapter.
3. Toolbar
A group of icons is called a Tool Bar. When icons are dimmed, they are not available to use.
Toolbars can be customized by clicking Customize... in the menu that is displayed when right-
clicking the toolbar area.
Opening Customize Customized toolbar
For more details, go to User Interface > Toolbar chapter.
4. Inspection Feature Tree

Geomagic Verify uses a unique inspection method called parametric history-based inspection.
Parametric history-based inspection allows the creation of inspection entities by remembering the
operations used in an inspection process, the order of the operations, and their relationships to one
another.

For more details, go to User Interface > Docking Bar > Tree chapter.
5. Model Tree
The Model Tree shows all created entities by category. The Model Tree can be used for selecting and
controlling the visibility of entities.
Clicking the Show / Hide icon next to an entity will toggle between showing and hiding the entity.
If a parent entity is hidden, its child entities will not be displayed even if they are toggled to be shown.

Hiding the Solid Body entity
For more details, go to User Interface > Docking Bar > Tree chapter.
6. Display, Help, Viewpoint

The Display, Help, and Viewpoint tabs are located at the bottom of the same window as the Feature
and Model Trees.
Display – The Display pane is used to manage how entities are displayed. For example, it can be
used to set a model to be transparent or brightly lit. Different entities such as textures, normals,
faces, and boundaries can be shown or hidden as well.
Help – The Help pane shows the table of contents of the user guide. It can be navigated through
by selecting a title on the table of contents in the Help pane or by pressing the F1 key when a
command dialog tree is floating in the Model View.
Viewpoint – The Viewpoint pane can save view states that are currently being used. It works
much like taking a picture. When a viewpoint is taken, the visible state entities and viewing
direction are saved. The captured viewpoints can be used when an inspection report is
generated.
For more details, go to User Interface > Docking Bar chapter.
7. Selection Toolbar
When poly-faces and poly-vertices are to be selected, the application offers various selection
methods to use. For example, poly-faces can be chosen by dragging a line, circle, or rectangle.
Painting the desired area on the mesh is also possible, and can be expanded to connect all poly-

faces. The selection method can be changed in this toolbar.
For more details, go to Select > Mode chapter.
8. Dialog Tree
When a command name that includes an ellipsis “…” is selected, a corresponding dialog tree will be
displayed in the Model View. According to prerequisite conditions, some controls might be enabled
or disabled.
For more details, go to User Interface > Dialog Tree chapter.
9. Model View
The Model View is the main workspace. Models and entities are displayed and manipulated in the
Model View. It can support 4 different types of views. Four different three-window based views and
two different two-window based views are available.

For more details, go to User Interface > Model View chapter.
10. Properties
After an entity is selected, its properties can be viewed and changed. For example, after Nominal
Data is selected, its bounding box size can be checked in the properties pane. Options related to
Deviation and GD&T calculation can also be changed as desired.
For more details, go to User Interface > Docking Bars > Properties chapter.
11. Color Bar

The Color Bar is used to view deviation in created entities.
The Color Bar looks like the following image. The style of color bar can be easily changed by using
templates and its range can also be adjusted as desired.

For more details, go to User Interface > Docking Bars > Color Bar chapter.
12. Confirmation Button

The confirmation button confirms results. When running a command or entering a mode, this
button will be displayed. To accept all changes, click the confirm button . Clicking the cancel
button will discard all changes and the command or mode will be exited.
13. Tabular View

In the Tabular View, information for entities such as Comparison Points, Section Deviations, Curve
Deviations, Boundary Deviations, Whole Deviations, Ref. Positions, GD&Ts, Measurements, and Ref.
Geometries can be seen in a table.
For more details, go to User Interface > Docking Bars > Tabular View chapter.

14. Monitoring Bars
The Monitoring Bars show the current operation status, progress information, time information,
memory consumption information, and free space available in the cache folder.
For more details, go to User Interface > Monitoring Bars chapter.
2.5.2. Understanding User Interface Philosophy

The following chapters introduce general rules when using the application.
• Dialog Tree Convention

• Selection Convention
• Mode Convention
• Docking Bar Convention
Dialog Tree Convention

How to use a Dialog Tree
Selecting Entities to Actively Control
When a command is executed, a dialog tree will be displayed in the Model view. Some dialog
trees require the user to select entities in various fields in order to proceed. The active control
is a box highlighted in a yellow color by default. It indicates the currently selected control is
ready for the selection of entities. When an entity is selected the name will be registered under
the active control. To select entities for another control, click the desired control box to make it
active.
Below are examples of what a user might typically see in a dialog tree. Each command or tool

has its own set of options in its dialog tree so the images are used as a general guideline on the
layout and different functions.
The name of the command will be at the top of

the dialog tree. In this example there are
multiple stages and the first two buttons are the
Previous Stage and Next Stage buttons that
will go forward and backward through stages.
The next two buttons are the OK and Cancel
buttons to apply the command or exit out of it.
This second example shows a command that

has two more useful buttons. The first is the
Lock button. It is used when there are multiple
changes that need to be made using the same
tool. Clicking this button will set the OK button
to not quit the command when clicked. The
button with the magnifying glass is the Preview
button which allows the user to preview
changes made to a model in real-time without
actually applying the changes.
This dialog tree shows what stage a command

or tool is in. A command must have more than
one stage for this type of dialogue box to be
displayed. The first button is the OK button
which applies changes made in the current
stage without exiting the entire command, and
the second button is the Undo button which
will deselect the last selection made.
Some options will have selection buttons that

allow for the selection of different parameters.
This example has two selectable parameters,
but commands will vary in how many they
might have.
Option check boxes toggle different parameters

on or off.
Radio buttons are used in a dialog tree to select

an option. Only one radio button can be chosen
at a time.

This is a selection area. The input box is used to
make a selection in the viewing area. In this
example an entity labeled "teeth" has been
selected. There are two buttons next to the input
box. The first is the Select None button and it
will delete all selected entities. The second
button is the Undo button which will deselect
the last chosen entity.
Dialog Tree Controls

The dialog tree is designed intuitively to easily complete a task through the use of common
tools. All tools have icons and they are only shown if needed in a specific dialog tree. The
following icons can be found in the dialog tree.
Lock(Don’t Quit Command With OK) – When this icon is toggled, the dialog tree will
remain open even if the OK icon for the command is clicked. It is designed for
commands that are consecutively applied several times in a row.
Break – When an operation is executing, it can be stopped by using this button. The
keyboard shortcut is the Esc key.
Delete Selected Entities – This button will remove chosen entities.
Preview – When this button is clicked, the results of the command will be displayed
without executing it.
Enable Realtime Preview – When this button is toggled, the results of a command
will be displayed in real-time whenever an input condition is changed.
Measure Distance, Radius, and Angle – After clicking these icons, points on a model
can be picked to extract distance, radius, and angle, respectively. The measured value
is directly inputted into the text or spin box.
Estimate – When selected, the application will automatically recommend an

appropriate value.
Flip Direction – This button reverses the direction of a control.
Add – This button adds an additional entity set.
All – This button selects all entities which are available.

Auto – Some text boxes have the value of Auto. When the value is set as Auto, the
application will estimate and use an appropriate value by analyzing the size of
meshes and poly-faces. If the estimate button is selected, the estimated value can
be seen. A numerical value can be used instead of Auto. To reset to the Auto value,
enter “0” as a numerical value.
Selection Convention
How to Select Entities

Look at the Cursor Icon
In the Model View, the mouse cursor has two modes. One is for the selection mode , and the
other is for the viewing mode . These can be switched by clicking the middle mouse button.
Entities can only be selected when the mouse curse is in the selection mode.
How to select entities

Dragging Selection – Clicking the left mouse button then dragging it while holding it down
can be used to select a single entity or multiple entities.
Picking Selection – A single entity can be chosen by a single left-clicking on it.
From Feature, Model Tree – An entity or entities can be selected directly from the Feature
Tree or Model Tree.
Selecting Multiple Entities – Multiple entities can be chosen by using the Shift key during
selection. To de-select entities, use the Ctrl key and select them.
Using Select Modes

Selecting a specific area to edit or remove poly-faces or poly-vertices can be difficult because a
mesh can be complicated and can consist of thousands or millions of vertices and faces. The
Select Mode tool bar located at the bottom left of the application enables the selection of poly-
faces and poly-vertices in a variety of ways. This tool bar can accelerate working speeds while
managing mesh or point cloud data.
The last icon on the toolbar is the Visible Only selection mode that allows for only the

selection of visible poly-faces and poly-vertices in the model view. It is useful for avoiding the
selection of back-side poly-faces and poly-vertices.
Using the Select Filter

The application can create and manipulate various types of entities. For example, the
application can utilize meshes, regions, bodies, faces, edges, dimensions, etc. The Select Filter
command enables the selection of only desired entities and intelligently works within a
command or a chosen mode. For example, if the Defeature command is executed, only the
Regions and Poly-Faces filters will be offered in the Select Filter toolbar based on the selectable
entities for the current input condition.
Mode Convention
Understanding Mode Convention

Accept and Cancel a Mode
When a mode is entered, two buttons will be shown in the right bottom corner of the Model
view.
Confirm – This button applies all changes made in the current mode, and then exits
the mode.
Cancel – This button cancels all changes made in the current mode, and then exits the
mode.
Undo and Redo

Undo can be applied step-by-step in a mode but if the mode is exited, the undo history will be
reset.
Docking Bar Convention
Docking Bars

Docking bars are located at the left, right, and bottom sides of the application. Docking bars are
used to hide frequently used windows to make more room for the model view or if a user desires to
simply make the look of the program cleaner and more organized. These docking bars can be
repositioned by dragging and dropping a docking bar into that particular space or into another
docking area. There are icons that are located on the right top side of a docking bar that performs a
variety of functions.
Auto Hide – This button hides the docking bar to the side frame. When the cursor is hovered
over the name of a docking bar, it will automatically re-appear.
Close – This button closes the docking bar. To show the docking bar again, click the right
mouse button on any tool bar area, and then check the desired docking bar.
To hide all current docking bars, press the F12 key, which will maximize the Model View. It is a toggle
function, so if the F12 key is pressed again, all hidden docking bars will appear.
2.5.3. Navigating Entities
Rotate, Zoom, and Pan

In the Model View, the mouse cursor has two modes. One is the selection mode and the other is the
viewing mode. These modes can be switched by clicking the middle mouse button. Entities can only

be selected when the mouse curse is in selection mode. The Rotate, Zoom, and Pan functions will be
explained below for each mode.
In Selection Mode
Rotate – Right mouse button
Zoom – Shift + Right mouse button (or scroll wheel)
Pan – Ctrl + Right mouse button (or Left and Right mouse buttons together)
In Viewing Mode
Rotate – Left mouse button (or Right mouse button)
Zoom – Shift + Left or Right mouse button (or scroll wheel)
Pan – Ctrl + Left or Right mouse button (or Left and Right mouse buttons together)
Note:
The cursor operates similarly in viewing mode as it does in selection mode, except it does not have the
ability to select or make changes to any entities. The purpose of the viewing mode is to simply view the
model; and avoid making any selections, or unwanted alterations.
In the images below a model is shown being rotated with the cursor in selection mode.
1 In this image, the mouse is in selection

mode. Entities can be selected and
modified.
2 In this image, the right mouse button is

pressed and held down while the mouse is
moved; changing the cursor to the rotate
mode cursor.
3 In this image, the right mouse button has

been released, stopping the rotation of the
model, and returning the mouse cursor
back to its default selection state.
Using Zoom Functions

The Zoom functions are used to enlarge a display area in order to examine it more closely or to fit a
model to the screen. There are four types of zoom functions which can be accessed from the tool

bar, or by using the View > Zoom menu.
In the first image below, the model is open in the viewing area. In the second image the PIP zoom
function has been selected, as highlighted in red, allowing a portion of the model to be enlarged for
examination.
Below are the different Zoom commands and their functions:
Zoom Area – Zooms to a selected area. (Shift + Z)

Zoom Previous – Returns to a previous zoom state. (Shift + X)
Zoom Fit – Zooms to fit all shown entities. (Ctrl + F)
Zoom PIP – Shows a zoomed picture-in-picture window. (Ctrl + W)
Changing Viewpoints
Viewpoint functions are used to view the model from defined directions, based on the global
coordinate system. Different viewpoints can be selected from the tool bar or by using the View >
Viewpoint menu.
In the first image below, a model is shown in a random view orientation. Using the selected
viewpoint, highlighted in red in the second image, the model view is rotated and perfectly aligned
to the Front view, based on the global coordinate system.
Below are the different viewpoints and their functions:

Front Viewpoint – Changes the viewpoint to the front view. (Alt + 1)
Back Viewpoint – Changes the viewpoint to the back view. (Alt + 2)
Left Viewpoint – Changes the viewpoint to the left view. (Alt + 3)
Right Viewpoint – Changes the viewpoint to the right view. (Alt + 4)
Top Viewpoint – Changes the viewpoint to the top view. (Alt + 5)
Bottom Viewpoint – Changes the viewpoint to the bottom view. (Alt + 6)
Isometric Viewpoint – Changes the viewpoint to a standard isometric view. (Alt + 7)
Rotate Viewpoint CCW – Rotates the viewpoint counterclockwise by a quarter-turn (90

degrees).
Rotate Viewpoint CW – Rotates the viewpoint clockwise by a quarter-turn (90 degrees).
Flip Viewpoint – Flips the viewpoint horizontally along the vertical axis.
Showing and Hiding Entities

The application can handle many types of entities; but sometimes the need to filter out certain
entities is required. The Visibility toolbar can show and hide the most frequently used entities to
reduce the number of on-screen elements. Entities can quickly be shown or hidden by clicking icons
in the tool bar or by using the View > Visibility menu.
In the first image below, only surface bodies are enabling in the Visibility toolbar. In the second
picture, meshes have also been shown.
Below are the different visibility options and their functions:

Point Clouds – Show or hide point clouds. (Ctrl + 1)
Meshes – Show or hide meshes. (Ctrl + 2)
Surface Bodies – Show or hide surface bodies. (Ctrl + 3)
Solid Bodies – Show or hide solid bodies. (Ctrl + 4)
Curves – Show or hide curves. (Ctrl + 5)
Sections – Show or hide sections. (Ctrl + 6)
Ref. Points – Show or hide Ref. points. (Ctrl + 7)
Ref. Vectors – Show or hide Ref. vectors. (Ctrl + 8)
Ref. Planes – Show or hide Ref. planes.
Ref. Circles – Show or hide Ref. circles.
Ref. Cylinders – Show or hide Ref. cylinders.
Ref. Coordinates – Show or hide Ref. coordinates.
GD&Ts – Show or hide GD&Ts. (Ctrl + 9)
Deviations – Show or hide deviations. (Ctrl + 0)
2.6. Basic Inspection Overview

There are several methods available to inspect scan data, but the basic inspection process is
comparing scan data to nominal data.
When an inspection process is defined in Verify, it will be parametric and have an inspection history
which enables easy modification of inspection features, parameters and options. A defined
parametric inspection process replaces macros, which are a series of commands. No additional
programming or knowledge is required to create an in-depth inspection process.
The following diagram shows a basic inspection process supported by Verify.

Preparation
• Importing Data
• Aligning Scan Data to Nominal Data
• Assigning Tolerances
Analysis
• Analyzing Scan Data
Reporting
• Generating and Exporting Reports
2.6.1. Importing Data

The first step in the inspection process is importing necessary data.
Inspection data consists of two different data types: Nominal Data and Scan Data. Nominal data can
be CAD or mesh data with ideal geometry and values. Scan Data can be point clouds or mesh data
scanned from a physical part. When importing CAD data as nominal data, Product Manufacturing
Information (PMI) can also be imported. PMI can be used as measurement targets in the inspection
process.

Related command:
File > Import Nominal Data
File > PMI Import Wizard
File > Import Scan Data
2.6.2. Aligning Scan Data to Nominal Data

The second step in the inspection process is aligning scan data to nominal data.
The coordinate system for scan data may differ from the nominal coordinate system because the
scan data is scanned in real space based on the coordinate system of a 3D scanner. Before inspecting
nominal and scan data, alignment is needed to match the coordinate system between them. During
alignment, scan data is transformed to the nominal data by moving and rotating on the global
coordinate system.
Note:
After alignment is complete, Verify will automatically find geometry pairs between nominal and scan
data.
Initial Alignment and Best Fitting
Auto Alignment

Auto Alignment matches the coordinate system of scan data to nominal data automatically. If
only a portion of a nominal model has been scanned, the Auto Align command can use feature
recognition to find the best position.
Auto Alignment is normally done as an initial alignment, and other alignments are performed
afterwards.
Related command:
Insert > Align > Auto
Best Fit
Best Fit Alignment reduces error across a part to find the best overall alignment. There are fitting
options to control the results as well as constraint options to control how scan data can move
in space.
Related command:
Insert > Align > Best Fit
Note:
This command requires that nominal and scan data are roughly aligned. If they are not roughly
aligned, first use the Auto Align command.
Geometry Based Alignments
Note:
These commands require that nominal and scan data are roughly aligned. If they are not roughly aligned,
first use the Auto Align command.
RPS
RPS, or Reference Point System, is an alignment method using geometry pair points from
nominal and scan data. These points can be weighed or constrained to simulate physical
fixtures. Normally circle or slot center points are used with sheet metal bodies.
Related command:
Insert > Align > RPS

Datum
Datums are primitive geometric entities such as planes, cylinders, cones, spheres, etc. Datum
Alignment matches datum geometries between nominal and scan data.
Related command:
Insert > Align > Datum
3-2-1
3-2-1 Alignment matches coordinate systems by constraining degrees of freeform. In the most
common case, 3 points are used to define a plane, 2 points to define a vector, and a last point
to define the origin of a coordinate system.
The 3-2-1 Align command also allows for set XY, YZ, and ZX planes, and several geometry types
can be used, not just planes, vectors, and points.
Related command:
Insert > Align > 3-2-1
Adaptive
Adaptive alignment applies N-point alignment to scan data by matching corresponding points
to the pre-planned points on nominal data.
Related command:
Insert > Align > Adaptive
Manual Alignments
Transform
Scan data can be manually transformed to nominal data by picking pair points or using a
manipulator. This method is used to closely move scan data to nominal data when the Auto
alignment method does not produce desired results. The transform command also supports
the use of a transformation matrix if the user already knows specific transformation values.
Related command:
Insert > Align > Transform

2.6.3. Analyzing Scan Data
The third step in the inspection process is analyzing target scan data.
This step is the main inspection process for conducting an organized examination or formal
evaluation exercise. An Inspector’s main focus is for examining the geometry or shapes of physical
parts and for comparing the features with original design intent of an ideal part. Verify offers
advanced inspection methods for an efficient and streamlined inspection process.
Inspecting Overall Deviation
Deviation inspection is one of measurement methods in an inspection process used to compare the
overall shape between nominal and scan data.
Since real-world deviation inspection cannot be performed, this method is a unique and powerful
inspection tool in scan data inspection. Overall errors such as distortion, abrasion and machining
accuracy of a part can be analyzed because scan data represents the overall shape of a real-world
object. Deviation can be displayed as a color map, or with whiskers or color points. These display
methods enable a user to quickly find error distributions and examine details.
Related commands:
Insert > Deviation > Whole Deviation
Insert > Deviation > Comparison Point
Inspecting with Curves
Deviation inspection with Curves is a measurement method in an inspection process that is used to
compare feature curves extracted from nominal and scan data.
Characteristic feature curves can be extracted from scan data and compared with nominal data.
Characteristic curves can be boundary curves, silhouette curves, virtual edges or manually
generated spline curves. The deviation results between nominal curves and scan curves will be
displayed as whiskers or color points.

Related commands:
Insert > Deviation > Boundary Deviation
Insert > Deviation > Curve Deviation
Insert > Deviation > Silhouette Deviation
Insert > Deviation > Virtual Edge Deviation
Inspecting Geometry
Deviation inspection with relative geometries is a measurement method in an inspection process

used to compare geometry features extracted from nominal and scan data.
Reference Geometry such as planes, cylinders, and circles can be extracted from nominal and scan
data and compared between them. This method is useful when comparing geometric elements such
as normal, size, and axis of important features.
Related command:
Insert > Deviation > Geometry Deviation
Inspecting with GD&T
Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing (GD&T) Inspection is a measurement method in an

inspection process. It is a precise mathematical language that can be used to describe the size, form,
orientation, and location of part features on nominal and scan data. GD&T is also a design
philosophy on how to design and dimension parts.
Additionally, GD&T is used to inspect features that will mate with features on other parts within an

assembly.
The following are the GD&Ts provided in Verify:
Geometric Dimension Geometric Tolerance
Basic Dimension Form Type

– Linear Dimension – Flatness
– Angular Dimension – Straightness
– Radial Dimension – Circularity
– Cylindricity
Additional Dimension
– Bore Depth Orientation Type
– Counterbore – Parallelism
– Countersink – Perpendicular
– Thickness – Angularity
– Elliptical
Run-out Type
– Run-out
– Total Run-out
Profile Type
– Line profile
– Surface profile
Location Type
– Concentricity
– Symmetry
– Position
Related commands:
3D GD&T: Tools > GD&T Tools (works in the 3D GD&T mode)
2D GD&T: Tools > Section Tools (works in the Section mode)

Inspecting 2D Sections
Deviation inspection on sections is a measurement method in an inspection process used to

compare sectional shapes between nominal and scan data.
Since scan data represents the overall shape of a completely built object and exists in a digital
inspection environment, a section of a part can easily be inspected. A section plane can be specified
and used to cut scan and nominal data, allowing the deviation between them to be compared. GD&T
inspection can also be conducted on a cut section profile.
Related commands:
Insert > Section
Insert > Multiple Sections
Measurement of Scan Data
If the purpose of an inspection is not to compare scan data with nominal data and just simple
dimension measurements, such as area, volume, or sections of scan data, then the Measure tools
can be used. These functions are only for measurements and are not systematic.
Related commands:
Measure > Distance
Measure > Angle
Measure > Radius
Measure > Section

Measure > Area
Measure > Volume
Measure > Mesh Deviations
Measure > Virtual Caliper
Analyzing Scan Data
To analyze the quality of just a scan data, the Plot command can be used. The thickness, curvature
and angle plot of a part can be analyzed and displayed with a color map.
Related command:
Tools > Plot
2.6.4. Generating and Exporting Reports

The final step in the inspection process is generating an inspection report.
Inspection results are most commonly shared in 2D reporting formats for easy communication.
Verify supports the creation of a variety of customizable reports with an integrated reporting tool.
Reports can be generated automatically from pre-made templates that can be customized. In
addition, both 3D HTML reports and trend analysis reports can be generated.
Generating a report
Verify has report generation tools in the Report tab that are similar to a MS-Word style environment
so anybody can easily generate and edit a report without learning new tools. When generating a
report, inspection features created during the inspection process are automatically added into the
report.
Entities in a report are parametrically connected to inspection features in Verify. If inspection options
are changed and different results are calculated, then these results will also be updated in the report.
The entire inspection process from importing to generating a report can be automated using the

Batch Process function.
After generating a report, it can be exported into a commonly used document format such as Excel,
PowerPoint, PDF and txt. The exported report can then be modified in other software and shared.
Related command:
Report > Generate Report
Generating a 3D HTML report
A html web report can be generated from inspection results. The html file can be shared without
purchasing or installing other software. A HTML report includes a 3D viewer to view 3D results for
nominal and scan data.
Related command:
Report > Export 3D Html Report

Generating a Trend Analysis Report
A trend analysis report compares inspection results across multiple inspections. For example;
multiple parts of the same design can be analyzed to identify trends over time. It can also provide
consistency metrics of a process.
Related command:
Report > Trend Report
3. Understanding Scan Data

This guide is designed to help beginners understand the basic information about the characteristics
of scan data within the application.
• Why 3D Scanning?
• Types of 3D Scan Data
3.1. Why 3D Scanning?

3D scanning is popular in various fields, and its usage is different for each purpose. There are
different kinds of scan data, and many details to understand. This guide will give basic information
on 3D scan data.
Geomagic Verify | Understanding Scan Data 56

• Power of 3D Scan Data

• Applications of 3D Scan Data
3.1.1. Power of 3D Scan Data

A 3D scanner is a device that captures a real object or an environment as 3D shape data. The
collected 3D information is converted into digital data commonly called 3D scan data or scan data.
3D scan data is a set of points. A point represents a location on a real object and contains the X, Y,
and Z coordinates. Numerous points can be used to describe a real object. For example, a digital
photo with a high resolution pixel count can represent the detailed shape of a real object.
3D scan data by resolution
A point set, also known as a point cloud, can be converted into an informative digital model with
software operations and is used in various industrial fields. 3D scan data has the following strengths:
• Can quickly create digital versions of real objects

• Accurate
• Captures complex freeform surfaces
• Captures small to large scale objects (depending on the 3D
scanner used)
• Obtains color information (depending on the 3D scanner
used)
• Simulate environments and situations
• Changes to different scales and measurements easily
• Easily extracts length, height, width, volume and position
data
• Extracts sectional information
• Compatible in a general PC environment

3.1.2. Applications of 3D Scan Data
Since 3D scan data can represent a real object with high accuracy, it is used for various purposes.
The use of scan data is expanding to custom markets as scan technology becomes easier to use and
more intuitive. Currently, 3D scan data is used primarily for the following purposes:
3D Printing, Rapid Prototyping (RP)

The technology of 3D Printing or Rapid Prototyping (RP) can create a quick physical mock-up of
digital 3D data (generally .stl data is used) by laying down successive layers of material using
sectional information of a model. Using RP, product designers can make a mock-up faster than with
other conventional manufacturing technologies, such as NC machining. A mock-up can be used to
analyze a part, check collisions with other parts, decide ergonomic designs, and reduce design
iterations; amongst other uses.
Reverse Design
The process of making CAD data from a real object is called reverse designing. A real-world model is
not ideal to use in designing a CAD environment because it can be deformed by heat, stress and
abrasion, which would cause the 3D scan data of that model to also include those deformities.
Depending on the purpose, the decision to make a CAD file with a deformed shape or redesigning
it by extracting design intent is important to consider.
Measurement and Inspection

3D scan data is increasingly used for metrology or inspection. The more accurate points are that are
used to measure a feature, the more accurate an inspection will be. The scan data of a manufactured
part can be aligned with its CAD model (nominal data). It can then be compared to check for
differences and whether or not they pass or fail within set tolerances.
Medical
3D scan data is used in the medical field to make customized teeth, organs, and other vital parts. For
example, a 3D scanner can scan a patient's dental features and generate a digital model in order to
create a treatment and to simulate tooth movement. 3D scanners are changing traditional dental
treatment methods used to generate dental impressions and handmade artificial teeth.

Cultural Heritage
The cultural heritage domain also uses cutting-edge 3D scanning technology. 3D scanners can
generate accurate 3D files which can be used to restore historic buildings and objects. 3D scan data
is also used to simulate or visualize historic places.
Entertainment
The entertainment and video game industry also uses 3D scanners to reduce modeling time and
make more realistic 3D graphics. Scanning a real object or a human is much faster than modeling
them in 3D graphics software by hand.
Survey
Traditionally, the construction and civil engineering fields relied heavily on surveying, but it took too
much time and the workers would be exposed to the environment being surveyed. Even using these
methods there was often a lack of information, which caused delays in schedules and generated
additional costs. 3D scan technology is now used in these types of projects by removing uncertainty,
finishing a project quickly, and reducing costs.
3.2. Types of 3D Scan Data

3D scan data can be a point cloud or a mesh. A point cloud is a raw file type from a scanner but most
scanning software can convert it to mesh data. However, both data types can be used to reach a final
goal. This guide will give you detail information regarding a point cloud and mesh.
• Understanding Point Clouds

• Understanding Mesh
• Mesh vs. Point Cloud
3.2.1. Understanding Point Clouds

A point cloud is a representative data type which is composed of a group of vertices in a three-
dimensional coordinate system. Each vertex is defined by the X, Y, and Z coordinates; and
corresponds to one position on the surface of an object. While point clouds can be directly visualized

on a PC, they are not generally directly usable in most 3D applications.
Point Cloud by Data Type

The file type that a scanner creates will differ based on the type of scanner used. The following are
the different classifications for the internal structures of point clouds.
Random-type point cloud

This type of point cloud contains only random position
information (no relationship between points), and basic
information such as color and normal can be added. Generally,
neutral data (Ascii format) or CMM data belong to this group
type.
Grid-type point cloud

As measured points are extracted from a scanner's grid
pattern, points will also be extracted from the corners of the
grid. Points are marked with an X-Y index and each index has
a depth to the scanning direction. This type of scan data can
be a 2.5D image (image + distance on each pixel) using the
projection direction and the scanning position. Generally,
structured light and long range scanner produce this type of
point cloud. A grid type point cloud can easily be converted
into a mesh by projecting onto a planar, cylindrical, or
spherical coordinate used with the scanner.

Line-type point cloud
Generally, an arm-type device with a laser scanner or a hand
held scanner produces a line type point cloud. The device
emits dozens of lines of lasers every second and point clouds
are gathered from the scanning trace on the surface of an
object. The point density will be different depending on the
line direction and the scanning speed, therefore the post
processing required to generate a mesh from the point cloud
can be more difficult.
Point Cloud with Normal

The normal is a perpendicular vector to a plane. In the case of a rounded surface, the normal will be
a perpendicular vector to a tangential plane on a position of the rounded surface.
If a point cloud has normal information, it can be very helpful for visualizing a model. Normal
information is used for shading a model by analyzing the incidence angles and reflection angles of
light on a point. Normal information is also used to determine the front or back of a surface. This is
very important to accurately find and calculate face pairs between scan data and CAD data,
especially in the inspection software. The following image shows a shaded point cloud in the
software.
Display of Point Cloud with Normal Information
If a point cloud does not include normal information, the scan data will only be a group of points
displayed in a single color. Recognizing features and working with such scan data can be difficult
and tedious. The following image shows a point cloud without normal information.
Display of Point Cloud without Normal Information
A point cloud without normal information also can be visualized by the “depth shading” method,
but the effect is not as effective as a point cloud with normal information. The closer points are
displayed in black and the points farther away are display in gray in relation from the viewing
direction. This method cannot determine the front or back of a surface but is still more helpful for
feature recognition than displaying with no shading at all. The following image shows the depth
shading method on a point cloud which does not have normal information.
Display of Point Cloud without Normal Information

- Depth Shading
Point Cloud with Textures

A point cloud has not only three-dimensional coordinates, but also R, G, and B color information for
each point. Geomagic uses this color information as a texture. A point cloud with color information
can be used to generate realistic visuals and help users to recognize complex features. A textured
point cloud is very efficient and easy to use for a continuous work flow.

Point Cloud with Textures Point Cloud without Textures
3.2.2. Understanding Mesh

A mesh is polyhedron-based 3D digital data which consists of points, edges, and faces (usually
triangles). The mesh is frequently used in CAD/CAM/CAE and 3D computer graphics programs. A 3D
scanning application generally uses a mesh which is created from a scanned point cloud.
Modern graphic cards are not optimized for rendering point clouds but have advanced technology
to display meshes. Therefore meshes are often more advantageous in regards to a smooth
visualization of complex surfaces and structures of an object. Triangulation, or meshing, is a process
to connect 3 points and construct a surface. When connecting points, the edge length can be an
important parameter to make a correct object shape.

What is a Perfect Mesh?
Erroneous Data
A mesh represents a surface by successively connected triangles. However, erroneous triangles
such as non-manifold, redundant, crossing, and reversed triangles cannot make a complete mesh.
These errors should be removed because they will affect the downstream workflow, i.e. RP, NC
machining, FEM (finite element method), and fitting surfacing for reverse design. The following
examples show errors on a mesh.
• Non-manifold Triangle – A single edge shared by three or more triangles

• Redundant Triangle – Ignoring boundaries, a point must have an identical number of triangles
and connecting edges
• Crossing Triangle – Edges sharing a poly-vertex intersect with one another
• Reversed Triangle – Opposite normal direction to neighboring triangles
Non-manifold Triangle Redundant Triangle
Crossing Triangle Reversed Triangle
Proper Shape of Triangle

The shape of a triangle is important for quality results. The aspect ratio, or the width to height on
a single triangle, should not be large. A triangle with a high aspect ratio will appear as a very thin
and sharp triangle, and can produce errors when using a model for RP, NC machining, FEM and
fitting surfacing. The ideal shape for a triangle is an equilateral triangle.

Noise on Mesh
Scan data may have noise produced by a scanner. For example when a very shiny object is
scanned, the reflection generates noise. The noisy data generates a rough surface on the mesh.
Noise can be reduced by the smoothing algorithm in the software which removes spiky points by
averaging using surrounding points. However, strong smoothness may removes sharp edges and
change feature accuracy.
Removing noise by smoothing
Mesh and Resolution

A high resolution mesh generates a large file size and using it in software can be difficult.
Conversely, a low resolution mesh is easy to use in software but cannot adequately represent the
feature information of an object. An ideal mesh should sufficiently express features with the
minimum amount of triangles possible within a desired tolerance. A high curvature area will
usually have a dense triangles structure and a low curvature area will usually have a sparse triangle
structure. Noise and defects should also be removed from the mesh.

Resolution is too low, making the model lack information and causing uniformity issues.
Mesh and Texture

As a point cloud can include texture information, a mesh can also include texture information. In
the following image, the left example shows a mesh without texture and the right example shows
a mesh with texture. The image illustrates how a mesh with color information can generate realistic
visuals.
Mesh only and colored mesh
There are two methods to express colors on a mesh. The first is to use an image file (jpg, bmp, etc)
since each point has mapping information on a bit map, allowing color to be smoothly filled
between points. The second method is using the R, G and B color values of points or triangles. In the
case of a dense mesh, it can be sufficient for visualization, but for sparse areas color information will
be missing and the displayed output will not look natural. If a mesh has texture information, it can
be converted from an image to a point color, and vice versa.
What Can Generate a Mesh?

A mesh can be converted from scan data by the triangulation process that is commonly used in CAD,
CAM, CAE and computer graphics. The following software can generate and modify a mesh.
• Scan bundle software

• Special scan data software, such as Geomagic Design X and Geomagic XOS
• CAD, CAM, CAE software (.stl format file)
• 3D computer graphics software
3.2.3. Mesh vs. Point Cloud
Mesh
Scan data is basically a collection of 3D points (a point cloud). It can be converted into a mesh by
connecting adjacent points with triangles, which are the simplest unit of a face. Generally mesh
has the following advantages over using a point cloud:
• Can recognize features intuitively

• Can distinguish front and back faces
• Can measure the curvature of a surface
• Can apply environment mapping
• Can measure volume
• Can easily extract neighboring point and triangle information
• Can accurately calculate alignment between scan data
• Can be directly used in RP, FEM, and NC machining
• Can be used for reverse design
• Can be used for metrology or inspection
• Can be used for visualization and documentation
• Can be used for animation
Mesh for a complex model

Point Clouds
A point cloud can contain additional normal or color information for each point, or the information
can be omitted. Constructing a shape from a lower resolution point cloud may be difficult due to
the lack of data, however using a high resolution point cloud can actually aide in the visualization
of an object in comparison to using a mesh. Long range scan data is usually saved in a very large
file and triangulation can be very difficult. The processing time may be lengthy, and the results can
be difficult to predict. If the purpose of using long range scan data is for CAD modeling, it is more
efficient to do parametric CAD modeling with a point cloud instead of a mesh or partially
converted point cloud. The benefits of using point clouds are as follows:
• Can handle larger data files

• Can do simple measuring
• Can be used for reverse design
• Can be used for surveying
• Can be used for metrology or inspection
• Can be used for visualization and documentation
Visualization of Point Cloud
4. Understanding Inspection
This guide is designed to help beginners understand the basic information about the characteristics
of scan data when deal with in the application.
• Inspection Scenario
• Basic Knowledge for 3D Scan-based Inspection Process
Geomagic Verify | Understanding Inspection 68

4.1. Inspection Scenario
Verify offers various inspection scenarios for efficient and streamlined inspection process. The
following scenarios are supported in Verify.
Scenario I: Nominal vs. Scan Data Inspection
This scenario compares nominal data to scan data and is a basic inspection workflow. All options
and settings in the inspection features such as alignment tools, inspection tools and report tools
have been saved parametrically, and they have a history in the inspection feature tree. A user can
move back to a desired point to modify inspection features at any time.
1. Import nominal and scan data.

2. Align scan data to nominal data.
3. Inspect the data files based on inspection needs.
4. Generate a report from inspection results.
Scenario II: Repeating Inspection with Multiple Parts
This scenario nominal compares nominal data to multiple scan data files. The scan data has been
replaced after the first scenario, Scenario I.

4. Generate a report from the inspection results.
5. Import another scan data file. Steps 2-4 will automatically be calculated with the new scan data
file.
Scenario III: Scan Data vs. Scan Data Inspection
This scenario defines scan data as nominal data and compares it with another scan data file. If CAD
data does not exist or if a master scan data need to be set as the nominal data, this scenario can be
used. This scenario is similar to Scenario I, but the difference is that the scan data will be imported
as nominal data. After importing scan data as nominal data, a region segmentation step is added to
the process. Regions enable the selection of geometries on scan data like geometries on CAD data.
1. Import scan data as nominal data.

2. The application will ask to perform region segmentation.
3. Import target scan data.

Scenario IV: Scan Data Only Inspection
Scan data can be inspected without nominal data. Dimension and geometries can be measured on
features of scan data without comparing nominal data’s.
1. Import scan data.

2. Measure features. If necessary, generate ref. geometries then inspect with GD&T. (The GD&T value
is shown on the property panel of the created ref. geometry)
Scenario V: Inspection planning with only nominal data
This scenario generates an inspection plan with only nominal data. Scan data will be imported at a
later time. The basic process is the same as Scenario I, but defines inspection features without scan
data.
1. Import nominal data.

2. Run necessary align commands and set parameters.
3. Run necessary inspection commands and set parameters.

4. Generate a report. This report will not include inspection result values, but is used to set empty
tables, images to be captured, and variable texts.
5. Save the inspection document.
Note:
When importing scan data, it can be automatically analyzed based on the pre-planned inspection
process and the inspection results will be automatically populated into the report.
4.2. Basic Knowledge for 3D Scan-based

Inspection Process
3D scan-based inspection is technology that utilizes 3D scanning technologies to virtually analyze
and digitize the geometric features and shapes of a real object. Using this technology, the real world
object’s functionalities can be verified with a CAD design model or another scanned object.
Preparing
• Working with Large Scan Data
• Verifying Geometric Features
• Alignments
Analyzing
• Checking Deviations
• Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing(GD&T)
• Simple Measuring
Reporting
• Visualizing Results by Color Map
• Visualizing Results by Tagging
• Adjusting Color Bar and Checking Go / No Go Results
• Generating Reports
• Inspection using Probe Measurement Device

4.2.1. Preparing
This is a first step in the 3D scan-based inspection process.
• Working with Large Scan Data

• Verifying Geometric Features
• Alignments
Working with Large Scan Data
The biggest advantage of using Verify is that it can handle large numbers of scan data that cannot
be handled by other software.
32-bit vs. 64-bit
The terms 32-bit and 64-bit refer to the way a computer's processor, or CPU, handles information.
64-bit computers handle large amounts of random access memory (RAM) more effectively than a
32-bit system. The maximum RAM limitation in Windows 7 Ultimate is 192GB and the maximum
amount of memory available in a 32-bit computer is 4GB. Even if more RAM is present, it will not be
used. This amount of RAM can contain around 20 million polygons of scan data and can be equal to
roughly one hi-resolution scan file. To work with more data, changing to a 64-bit computing
environment is recommended.
Suppress / Unsuppress
Suppressing scan data is when all of the data from a point cloud file is saved to a hard disk
temporarily. Unsuppressing a point cloud file loads all the data back to physical memory. The
suppress / unsuppress mechanism manages data and memory by swapping data dynamically in-
between the physical memory and the hard disk. This enables large numbers of data sets to be dealt
with efficiently. When large numbers of point clouds are imported into the application, they are
automatically stored in the cache folder in smaller pieces. They are then efficiently loaded into the
application within the capability of the available physical memory when an operation is performed.
The swapping time for the suppress / unsuppress functionality is very short, so calculation overhead

is negligible. Setting the virtual memory to a physically separated hard disk rather than the hard disk
containing the operating system is ideal.
Some scan editing commands in the default mode are available when scan data is in a suppress state.
When entering the Mesh mode (in Design X) or Scan mode (in Verify) with suppressed scan data, a
message will be displayed asking if the scan data needs to be unsuppressed before entering the
mode. The available commands in a suppressed state are in the default mode such as Scan Tools or
Add-ins.
Available commands in a suppressed state in Geomagic Design X

The following commands under Tools > Scan Tools are available and a suppressed mesh must
not have child entities (features) to apply them.
 Mesh Buildup Wizard

 Align Between Scan Data
 Merge
 Combine
 Decimate Meshes
 Transform Scan Data
 Boolean
 Average Meshes
Available commands in a suppressed state in Verify

The following commands under Add-ins are available.
 Global Register
 Register Target
 2D Triangulate
 3D Triangulate
 Triangulate/Merge Large Data
 Surface Merge
 Volume Merge
 Combine
 Find Scan Direction
 Generate Vertex Normal
 Reverse Normal
Large Data Mode
When the Large Data Mode option is used on a large data set when applying a specific operation

that requires a lot of memory such as Merge, Decimate, 3D Triangulate (Verify add-in) and Volume
Merge (Verify add-in), the operation will be performed even if the model size exceeds the computer’s
memory limit. Normally when more than 20 million polygons, or 10 million points, are used in a PC
with 2GB of memory, it is recommended to use the Large Data Mode option.
Sampling
When reading a single point model with 40 million points, 2 GB of memory is necessary. Therefore,
to import large data sets that is beyond the memory limit of a PC, the data needs to be sampled.
When reading data using the Import command, one of the following sampling ratios can be used:
1/1, 1/4, 1/9, 1/16, 1/25, 1/36, 1/49, 1/64. If an imported file has a format specific to one scanner and
it is a grid type, sampling will skip several points in the X and Y directions; and if it is a line type,
sampling will simply skip points based on the chosen sampling ratio. When an imported file is in a
general format, sampling will be performed randomly according to the selected sampling ratio.
Any command with an option for “Sampling Ratio”, can dynamically sample scan data. Calculating
all data points in scan data can take a long time and has little effect on the final results, so sampling
data can be much more effective. The sampling ratio that is chosen can depend on the data itself,
and the shape of the part. Using the adaptive sampling ratio will automatically try to find the correct
sampling value, which can save time and effort.
Displaying
When working with large data sets, it is more efficient to use the smallest size of data possible to
display a rendered model in the viewing window.
In the Display tab, the "Dynamic Display Ratio" and "Static Display Ratio" settings can be controlled.
Setting these values lower will cause the display to refresh faster. When the Dynamic Draw option in
the Display tab is off, the Dynamic Display Ratio cannot be controlled and the application will draw
all entities when a model is being moving by a mouse. If the value is set to "Auto", the application
will automatically set an adaptable display ratio in relation to the size of the model and the number
of points. Sometimes, rotating, panning, and zooming with a very large model can become very slow
and unresponsive. If this occurs, reduce the amount of data being displayed.
Verifying Geometric Features
Verifying Geometric Features is a basic process for preparing 3D scan data based inspection.
Geometric features consist of various geometric types such as Points, Vectors, Planes, Slots,

Rectangles, Polygons, Cylinders, Cones, Spheres, and Tori. They are used for selecting, measuring,
transforming, aligning, sectioning, and dimensioning in 3D scan data based inspection.
Pairing Geometries between Nominal Data and 3D Scan Data
3D scan data based inspection in Geomagic Verify starts by verifying the geometric features of
nominal data and 3D scan data and creating a geometry pair set between them. After importing
nominal data, the geometric features are automatically detected from faces or regions of the
nominal data that represent feature shapes then geometric types are determined. Geometric
features verified from nominal data in this phase can be used for not only analyzing nominal feature
shapes directly, but also for finding scan pair geometries after importing 3D scan data and aligning
them. Geometric features are used to find scan points within a user-defined searching zone
expanded from the geometric features of nominal data along its normal direction. The detected
scan points are qualified by multiple criteria such as projection angles between the normal direction
of nominal faces, distribution rates, and densities. Finally, scan pair geometries are created by fitting
from the qualified scan points and connected to related normal geometric features as pair sets.
Geometric features extracted from faces or regions of nominal data are displayed by continuous
lines. Scan pair geometries are fitted from qualified scan pair points of 3D scan data that are
displayed by dotted lines on the 3D scan data.

Geometry pair relationships are used for aligning 3D scan data to nominal data based on datum
features or for analyzing scan feature shapes based on nominal feature shapes.
Using Geometry Pairs for Aligning

Geometry pairs are useful for aligning 3D scan data to nominal data by using advanced
alignment methods such as RPS (Reference Point System), Datums, and 3-2-1 alignments.
Geometric features selected on nominal data as target datums can be used to find scan pair
geometries by utilizing a variety of criteria on each geometry position. They can also be used
to construct coordinates on each data file. Constructed coordinates are related as a geometry
pair set and an alignment is performed to minimize them in 3D space.
Using Geometry Pairs for Dimensioning

Geometry pairs are useful for measuring dimensions of features on 3D scan data based on
feature information of nominal data as well as evaluating Pass/Fail dimension results.
Geometric features selected on nominal data can be used to find scan pair geometries by
utilizing a variety of criteria on each geometry position. Dimensions are matched and measured
between the geometries on each data set and the measured dimensions are used to Pass or Fail
the data sets.

Alignment
Alignment is a process for reorienting 3D scan data to coordinates of nominal data in 3D space. This
is a required process for comparing 3D scan data and nominal data. Various alignment methods such
as Auto & Best-Fit, RPS, Datum, and 3-2-1 can be used independently or mixed with other methods.
Note that the RPS, Datum, and 3-2-1 alignments require that 3D scan data is positioned with the
coordinates of the nominal data so that the geometric features defined on the nominal data can be
matched to scan pair geometries within a user-defined searching zone.
An alignment process can be pre-defined without 3D scan data. Once the alignment process is pre-
defined, it will be performed whenever 3D scan data is imported. While the inspection is being
maintained, the alignment results will be automatically updated. They can also be calculated using
another 3D scan data file.
Various Alignment Methods

Various alignment methods are available in the application in order to align scan data to nominal
data.
Auto Alignment
This alignment method brings 3D scan data to nominal data by using a rough best-fit alignment
algorithm that approximately matches the coordinates of the target data.
This method is useful for:
 Quickly aligning 3D scan data to nominal data by using geometric shape information
 Finding scan pair geometries from geometric features of nominal data
 Aligning 3D scan data that has no particular feature information to nominal data
The results of this alignment can be used as preparation for using advanced alignments such
as RPS (Reference Point System), Datum, or 3-2-1.
Related command:
Best Fit Alignment

This alignment method aligns 3D scan data to nominal data by using a best-fit alignment
algorithm that matches the coordinates of the target data to the deviation between geometric
shapes that is minimized within an allowable tolerance. This method assumes that the 3D scan
data is roughly positioned in the coordinates of the nominal data.

 Accurately aligning 3D scan data to nominal data by using geometric shape information
 Finding scan pair geometries from geometric features of nominal data
 Aligning 3D scan data that has no particular feature information to nominal data
The results of this alignment can be used for analyzing the deviation between 3D scan data and
nominal data and it also used as a basic preparation for using advanced alignments such as RPS
(Reference Point System), Datum, 3-2-1 alignments.
Related command:
RPS Alignment
This alignment method is called "Reference Point System" or "Reference Positioning System"
and matches 3D scan data to nominal data by aligning a set of reference position points with
constraints. Geometric features that have points with properties can be used for defining RPS
target pairs in this alignment method. This method assumes that 3D scan data is positioned
within the coordinates of the nominal data so that the pair geometries can be extracted from
the 3D scan data based on the geometric features of nominal data.

 Accurately aligning 3D scan data to nominal data based on their parts

 Aligning 3D scan data that has particular feature information (e.g. fixing positions,
coordinate criteria, constraints and etc.) to nominal data
nominal data and analyzing feature shapes and the relationships between geometric features
by measuring GD&T.
Related command:
Datum Alignment
This alignment method matches 3D scan data to nominal data using a prioritized list of datums.
N (N=1,2, or 3) pairs of planes, vectors and points, or a pair of coordinates can be used for
defining target datum pairs. This method assumes that 3D scan data is positioned in the
coordinates of the nominal data so that the pair geometries can be extracted from the 3D scan
data based on the geometric features of the nominal data.
This method is useful for;

 Aligning 3D scan data that has particular feature information (e.g. information for fixture,
coordinate criteria, and etc.) to nominal data
nominal data, and to analyze feature shapes and the relationship between geometric features
by measuring GD&T.
Related command:

3-2-1 Alignment
This alignment method matches 3D scan data to nominal data by constraining the 6 degrees
of freedom with 3 datum sets (plane, vector, and origin point) in 3D space.
Note:
A basic rule of 3-2-1 alignment is defined by the minimum number of contact points necessary to
set coordinates for reorientation of a part. For example, the primary datum requires three points,
the secondary datum two points, and the third datum one point.
A Ref. plane or a planar geometric feature that has normal direction and location information
can be a primary datum and a Ref. vector or a cylindrical geometric feature that has axis and
direction information can be a secondary datum. A Ref. point or circular geometric feature that
has position information can be a third datum. This alignment method assumes that 3D scan
data is positioned within the coordinates of the nominal data so that pair geometries can be
extracted from the 3D scan data based on the geometric features of the nominal data.

 Aligning 3D scan data that has particular feature information (e.g. information for fixture,
coordinate criteria, and etc.) to nominal data
The results of this alignment can be used to analyze the deviation between 3D scan data and
nominal data as well as analyzing feature shapes and the relationship between geometric
features by measuring GD&T.
Related command:
Adaptive Alignment
This alignment method is only for probe point data. It allows N-point alignment by matching
corresponding probe points to the pre-planned points on nominal data.

 Quickly aligning a hardware coordinate system to a nominal coordinate system while

controlling portable measurement devices in LiveInspect™
 Aligning a hardware coordinate system to a nominal data coordinate system that has no
particular features to be used for alignment
nominal data and for analyzing feature shapes and the relationship between geometric
features by measuring GD&T.
Related command:
4.2.2. Analyzing
• Checking Deviations
• Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing(GD&T)
• Simple Measuring

Checking Deviations
Deviation is a process for comparing 3D scan data to nominal data within a user-defined maximum
deviation value, and is based on a variety of criteria, such as size, thickness, the shape of a boundary
or curve, or the geometric features of a model. The comparison is performed by finding scan points
within the maximum deviation and measuring the distances projected from scan points onto a
nominal entity along a user-defined direction. The normal direction of a nominal entity is used as a
projection direction by default. To measure deviations, 3D scan data should be aligned to nominal
data.
Various Comparison Methods
Various comparison methods such as Whole Deviation, Comparison Point, Section Deviation,
Boundary Deviation, Curve Deviation, Silhouette Deviation, Virtual Edge Deviation, and
Geometry Deviation can be used to analyze entities independently or used in conjunction with
other methods.
Whole Deviation
Compares the deviation between 3D scan data and nominal data for all regions.
Related command:
Comparison Point
Compares deviations at specific positions.

Related command:
Section Deviation
Compares the section deviation between 3D scan data and nominal data in a 2D section view.
Related command:
Insert > Section
Boundary Deviation
Compares the deviation between boundaries extracted from 3D scan data and nominal data.

Related command:
Curve Deviation
Compares the deviation between curves extracted from 3D scan data and nominal data.
Related command:
Silhouette Deviation
Compares the deviation between outer boundaries extracted from 3D scan data and nominal
data that is projected to a specific position.

Related command:
Virtual Edge Deviation

Compares the deviation between virtual curves extracted from round corner areas of 3D scan
data and nominal data.
Related command:
Geometry Deviation
Compares the deviation between geometries extracted from 3D scan data and nominal data.
Related command:

Evaluating Comparison Results
After comparing 3D scan data to nominal data, the Pass and Fail deviation results that are calculated
are represented by a color map on the nominal entity. The comparison results can be intuitively
analyzed globally by the deviation color map or locally analyzed by tagging annotations at specific
positions. The "+" deviation results shows regions of the 3D scan data or entities extracted from the
3D scan data that have a larger size than that of the nominal data. The "-" deviation results shows
regions of the 3D scan data or entities extracted from the 3D scan data that have a smaller size than
that of the nominal data.
Replacing Target 3D Scan Data
Once 3D scan data has been compared to nominal data, the deviations are registered into the
Feature Tree as an inspection feature. The registered deviation features are managed by a Systematic
Inspection Process. If a 3D scan data file is replaced, the deviation results will be automatically
updated. The Deviation process can be pre-defined without any 3D scan data and inserted into a
report. When a 3D scan data file is imported, all the pre-defined inspection features as well as reports
will be automatically updated.

Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing (GD&T)
Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing (GD&T) is a process for analyzing the size, form,
orientation, and location of features in 2D or 3D space and for evaluating the Pass or Fail results of
features within a user-defined tolerance. The size of features can be analyzed by using geometric
dimensions such as Linear Dimensions, Angular Dimensions, or Radial Dimensions. The form,
orientation, and location of features can be analyzed by using geometric tolerances such as Flatness,
Circularity, Cylindricity, and Parallelism.
The following are the GD&Ts provided in Verify:
Geometric Dimension Geometric Tolerance

– Linear Dimension – Flatness
– Angular Dimension – Straightness
– Radial Dimension – Circularity
– Cylindricity
– Bore Depth Orientation Type
– Counterbore – Parallelism
– Countersink – Perpendicular
– Thickness – Angularity
– Elliptical
Run-out Type
– Run-out
– Total Run-out
Profile Type
– Line profile
– Surface profile
Location Type
– Concentricity
– Symmetry
– Position

GD&T Annotation
GD&T annotations consist of a combination of Dimensions and Geometric Tolerance Feature Control
Frames. The Dimension Feature Control Frame includes a dimension and tolerance limits. The GD&T
Feature Control Frame builds up a series of GD&T symbols, tolerances, material conditions and multi-
datums.
The following figure shows a GD&T Feature Control Frame used in Geomagic Verify containing
position tolerance with dimension. If a dimension is already defined on a feature, all the Geometric
Tolerance (GTol) objects except Flatness and Straightness can be attached to the dimension.
< Annotation with GD&T results >
The following figure represents the standard Geometric Tolerance Feature Control Frame.
Pass/Fail inspection
GD&T can be judged for pass and fail by using nominal and measured values within a user-defined
tolerance. When a measured value is in between the Nominal Value + High Tolerance and the
Nominal Value + Low Tolerance, it will pass. When scan pair geometry of a Geometric Tolerance
object is within the limits of a corresponding tolerance, it will pass.
The GD&T Feature Control Frame is displayed using the Green, Yellow, and Red default colors that

indicate if a current measurement is within a given tolerance, in a warning zone, or out of tolerance.
The color properties can be changed in the Pass/Warning/Fail section of the Display tab at File >
Preferences, and the Warning Ratio (%) can be changed in the Properties of the Nominal Data. For
more information, go to File > Preferences. In the Table View, either Pass or Fail will be displayed as
a Result value for each GD&T.
Visualization of GD&T objects
In the project tree, a popup menu is used to display properties as well as showing or hiding
annotations of a GD&T entity. It can be controlled in the Annotation Display Control.
The following figure illustrates GD&T objects with respect to Position and Cylindricity.
Tabular View of GD&T
When GD&T objects are computed, a table in the Tabular View will be automatically generated and
displayed.

Simple Measuring
Measuring is a process for analyzing distances, angles, and radii between features in 3D scan data.
Measuring can be performed with 3D scan data without nominal data. If geometries are needed
during measuring, those geometries can be extracted from the 3D scan data directly by fitting scan
points. Once geometries have been extracted from 3D scan data, the geometries can be reused for
other measurements during the inspection.
Various measurements such as Distance, Angle, Radius, Section, Area, Volume, Mesh Deviations,
and Virtual Caliper can be used to measure features independently, or used in conjunction with
other measurements.
Distance
Distance measures a distance between features in 3D scan data. Various methods can be used when
measuring distance, such as Point to Point, Vector to Point, Vector to Vector, Plane to Point,
Plane to Vector, and Plane to Plane. Once a distance between features is measured, the result is
registered into the Model Tree and displayed with an annotation on the 3D scan data in the Model
View. When the mouse cursor is hovered over measurement results, the resulting annotation and
features that have been used for measuring are highlighted. This measurement is useful for
analyzing the relationship between the features of 3D scan data by distances.
Related command:
Measure > Distance
Angle
Angle measures an angle between angled features in 3D scan data. Various methods can be used
when measuring an angle, such as Vector to 2 Points, Plane to Vector, Between 3 Points, Between
2 Vectors, and Between 2 Planes. Once an angle between features is measured, the result will be
registered into the Model Tree and displayed with an annotation on the 3D scan data in the Model
View. When the mouse cursor is hovered over measurement results, the resulting annotation and
features that have been used for measuring are highlighted. This measurement is useful for
analyzing the relationship between features of 3D scan data by angles.
Related command:
Measure > Angle
Radius
Radius measures the radius of a circular feature in 3D scan data. Various methods can be used when
measuring a radius, such as From Features and 3 Points. Once the radius of a feature is measured,
the result will be registered into the Model Tree and displayed with an annotation on the 3D scan
data in the Model View. When the mouse cursor is hovered over measurement results, the resulting
annotation and features that have been used for measuring are highlighted. This measurement is
useful for analyzing the relationship between features of 3D scan data by radii.
Related command:
Measure > Radius
Section

Section creates sections from 3D scan data and measures the distances between them. Sections can
be created by using various sectioning methods such as Draw Line On Screen, Select Plane, N-
Division Between Planes, N-Division Along Curve, and Radial. This measurement is useful for
analyzing a sectional difference between 3D scan data and nominal data after alignment. Note that
both creating sections and measuring distance on the sections can be performed in the command.
Related command:
Measure > Section
Area
Area measures an area selected by poly-faces on a mesh. This measurement is available when target
entities are either a mesh or poly-faces. Once the area of a mesh or poly-faces is measured, the result
will be registered into the Model Tree and displayed with an annotation on the 3D scan data in the
Model View. This measurement is useful for analyzing an area of 3D scan data or particular regions
on 3D scan data and for evaluating deformations on 3D scan data.
Related command:
Measure > Area
Volume
Volume measures the volume of a mesh or selected poly-faces on a mesh. Using advanced

calculation methods such as Projected Volume and Enclosed Volume, volume can be calculated
whether target entities are open or not. This measurement is available when target entities are
meshes or poly-faces. Once the volume of a mesh or poly-faces is measured, the result is registered
into the Model Tree and displayed with an annotation on the 3D scan data in the Model View. This
measurement is useful for analyzing the volume of 3D scan data or particular regions on 3D scan
data and evaluating deformations.
Related command:
Measure > Volume
Mesh Deviations
Mesh Deviations measures the overall deviation of 3D scan data within a user-defined maximum
deviation value. This measurement is useful for analyzing regional differences between 3D scan data
and nominal data after alignment. Note that deviations can be measured in the command.
Related command:
Virtual Caliper
Virtual Caliper measures the distance between features in 3D scan data by virtually using a caliper.
Various methods can be used while measuring distances with a virtual caliper such as Outside

Caliper, Inside Caliper, and Depth Caliper. After picking a point on a poly-face of 3D scan data,
candidates that can be measured along a user-defined measuring direction will be displayed and a
distance will be measured with a second picked position. Once the distance between features is
measured, the result will be registered into the Model Tree and displayed with an annotation on the
3D scan data in the Model View. When the mouse cursor is hovered over measurement results, the
annotation and features that have been used for measuring will be highlighted. This measurement
is useful for analyzing the relationship between features of 3D scan data by distance.
Related command:
4.2.3. Reporting
• Visualizing Results with a Color Map

• Visualizing Results by Tagging
• Adjusting Color Bar and Checking Go / No Go Results
• Generating Reports
Visualizing Results with a Color Map
A color map is a map that shows the deviations of an entire shape using colors. It is a good way to
check deviations when viewing an entire model.

Several colors are used to express deviations; Each color is related to a value in the color bar.
Display type
Deviation in a whole shape can be displayed using one of three different methods:
• Color map
• Color point
• Whisker
Color Map
A painted target is nominal data, also known as tessellated mesh data, when a color map is
made. Scan points cannot match exactly with points on tessellated mesh, so the deviation value
of a point on a tessellated mesh uses an interpolated value from projected scan points around
the generated nominal data point.
A color map can be useful for checking approximate deviation. When inspection results are
analyzed, a color map will be used to visualize deviation across an entire model.

Color Point
Expresses deviation as colored points. Colored points appear to be similar to a color map,
however, the target is a point of scan data and not nominal data.
The following figure shows the difference between a color map and color points. Color is
displayed on nominal data in the left figure and scan data in the right figure.
Color points are real results without compensation compared to a color map. When accurate
analysis is required, color point can be more accurate than a color map.
Whisker
Expresses deviation as colored lines. The color and length of a whisker is the distance between
scan data and nominal data. The wider the gap is, the darker the color of a line is.
Whiskers can be useful for:
 Closer examination of deviations

Multiplication of colored lines is possible. The function makes a closer examination of
deviations easy. By changing the amount of whiskers that are simultaneous displayed,
deviation can be easily checked by the color and length of the resulting whiskers.

 Checking incorrectly projected points
Some points might be projected onto an incorrect face on CAD data. The Whisker
function can be used to check for this type of error.
There is a incorrectly projected point displayed in red in the left figure below. When the
whisker function is used, the incorrectly projected point can be found easily as shown
in the right figure.
Color maps and tolerances
A color map will change depending on the tolerance values used.

Note:
Tolerance colors can be changed in the Properties panel. Select an item in the Inspection Feature tree to
check its properties then click the User Tolerance Color button.
Showing and hiding a color map
Showing or hiding color maps can be performed in the Properties panel. Select an item in the
Inspection Feature tree then click the Visibility button. False hides a color map including
corresponding tags and true shows the color map.
Visualizing Results by Tagging
A tag is another kind of display inspection result. Tags include several measured values, a name,
coordinate information, and statistical information.
The following figure is an example of a tag. When the comparison point function is used, the gap
between nominal data and scan data is shown on the tag as a value.
Changing the style and field of tags

The tag style and display fields can be modified in the Annotation Display Control. It is displayed
when the right mouse button is clicked on any empty area in the model view.

Style
The style and color of the font as well as the default style can be changed.
• Font
• Preset
• Fields
Aligning Tags
When many tags are created, it can be difficult to check the target position of each tag on nominal
data. The tag alignment command can be used to clearly arrange them by going to View >
Annotation Alignment.
There are three ways to align tags:
• Snapped: Aligns annotations without overlapping them and can be repositioned

• Automatic: Aligns annotations near the border of the Model View and cannot be repositioned
• Close To Object: Aligns annotations that cannot be repositioned near a model and may cause
overlapping
The following figure shows the result of each alignment type:
Showing and hiding tags
The visibility of tags can be controlled for inspection features in the Properties panel. When
Visibility is set to true, tags will be shown.
Adjusting the Color Bar and Checking Go / No Go Results
Color bar
The color bar is color range used to show how different scan data is from nominal data. The values
set in the color bar are the criteria used for drawing a color map.

The table below explains what each color represents in a default color bar:
Color Meaning
Shows scan data that is above nominal
data.
(Yellow to red)
The darker the color, the wider the gap
between scan data and nominal data.
Green is the ideal range. Data in the green
range is considered as “Pass”.
Shows scan data that is below nominal
data.
(Light blue to deep blue)

The darker the color, the wider the gap
between scan data and nominal data.
Modifying the color bar
Adjusting the color bar will change the color map. The color range and format can be changed.
Color Range
The limitation of the color bar determines the inspection range. If the range is too wide, it will be
difficult to notice small deviation changes. Normally the maximum range is set according to the max
deviation value or below.

Format
Verify provides various color bar templates. Color bar templates will be shown when the arrow icon
on the color bar is clicked.
• Default: The default color bar in the Model View

• Symmetry: Displays the color range with symmetrical colors
• Go/no go: Shows pass and fail statuses
• Signed: Shows whether scan data is above nominal data or not
• Inverse: Inverses the color range
Go/No Go
Displays whether a measured value is within set tolerance values or not.
There are three statuses based on tolerance.

• Pass: Displays that the gap between nominal data and scan data is within tolerance
• Warning: Displays that a value passes but that the results are close to failing
• Fail: Displays that the gap between nominal data and scan data is not within tolerance
Note:
The tolerance of nominal data can be set by going to Tools > Nominal Tools > Assign Tolerance. The
warning ratio value can be set in the properties panel of the nominal data.
Generating Reports
Verify contains advanced reporting functions for creating reports using custom or default templates.
Three kinds of reports can be selected based on the purpose of the report:
• Normal report: A report that is directly editable and interlocked with the Model View
• 3D HTML report: A report that creates inspection results in a .html file with a 3D display of the
model
• Trend report: A report that is useful for analyzing deviation trends over multiple scan data files
Standard Reports
Verify provides standard reporting functions. Various formats can be exported and all reports are
editable.
Available Formats for Exporting

• Microsoft® PowerPoint: A commonly used presentation-style format
• Microsoft® Excel: Useful for when there are many tables in a report
• Adobe® PDF: Strong security since PDF data cannot be directly edited
• TXT: Useful when a small file is desired. CSV files are used when there is a large amount of data

Interlocked Modification
Report entities are connected to the main inspection project. When inspection results are updated
a new report does not need to be generated. Instead, the Rebuild icon can be clicked in the
report tab to apply all changes from the inspection project to the report.
Layout
The report tab contains a layout editing function. If a layout is made once it can be used again
whenever a new report is needed. Many companies use their own templates for documentation and
the report tab can be formatted to a company's default template by using the Layout function.
Editing
The report tab is editable by changing the type of screen shots, adding or removing fields, or

creating charts from tables.
• Changing Screen Shots

Screen shots can be changed based on a view direction.
• Adding or Removing Fields on a Table

When a table is selected in the Report tab, the Format menu tab will be displayed. The Field
Chooser option can be used to add or remove fields.
• Creating a Chart from a Table

When a table is selected in the Report tab, a chart can be inserted using the selected table.
3D HTML Reporting
In addition to standard reporting features, Verify provides dynamic reporting in the form of 3D HTML
reporting. Inspection results are saved in the HTML file format and the model is displayed in 3D in

the internet explorer browser. This type of reporting is useful for sharing reports with co-workers,
because Verify does not need to be installed to see the model and the report.
Trend Reporting
When repetitive inspection is required between a single nominal data file and multiple different scan
data files, the trends for errors can be analyzed by utilizing the trend reporting tool.
The following example shows ten different scans that were inspected for cylindricity against a
nominal.
Three results in the trend report show errors outside of the set tolerance in red. The trend report
helps in finding problems during the manufacturing process as time passes.
4.2.4. Inspection using Probe Measurement

Devices
3D Scan-based inspection technology enables the virtual inspection of geometric features and
shapes of a physical part based on the 3D scan data scanned by a 3D scanner as well as probe
measurement devices. The 3D scan data created by using the probe measurement device is called
probe point data in the application. The probe point data can be used for inspecting geometric
features and shapes of a physical part without nominal data, with nominal data, and with a pre-
existing inspection project.

Inspect without Nominal Data
This process is useful for inspecting the geometric features and shapes of a physical part in the
following cases:
• When 3D CAD data that can be used as nominal data in an inspection job does not exist
• When 2D drafts or measurement introductions can only be used in an inspection job
While probing a physical part, probe point data is acquired and used for aligning a hardware
coordinate system to a global coordinate system, extracting geometries, and measuring dimensions.
The following diagram illustrates an inspection process without nominal data using a probe-based
measurement device.
1. Setup device.
2. Plan an alignment.
3. Probe to align the hardware coordinate system to the global coordinate system.
4. Extract geometries and measure dimensions.
For more information, refer to the tutorial, Inspect without Nominal Data.
Related command:
LiveInspect > LiveAlign

LiveInspect > LiveCapture
LiveInspect > LiveDimension
LiveInspect > LiveGeometry
Inspect with Nominal Data

This process is useful for inspecting the geometric features and shapes of a physical part when
nominal data exists. While probing on a physical part, probe point data is acquired and used for
aligning the hardware coordinate system to the nominal coordinate system, finding pair geometries,
and measuring dimensions.
The following diagram illustrates an inspection process with nominal data using a probe-based
measurement device.
1. Setup device.
2. Plan alignment.
3. Probe to align the hardware coordinate system to the nominal coordinate system.
4. Find pair geometries and measure dimensions.
For more information, refer to the tutorial, Inspect with Nominal Data.
Related command:
LiveInspect > LiveCapture
LiveInspect > LiveDimension
LiveInspect > LiveGeometry
Inspect with Pre-Existing Project

This process is useful for inspecting the geometric features and shapes of a physical part when a pre-
planned inspection project exists. While probing on a physical part, probe point data is acquired and
used for aligning the hardware coordinate system to the nominal coordinate system and finding pair
geometries. A pre-planned inspection project guides where probing is needed on the nominal data.
After finishing the probing, inspection results will be updated based on the inspection plans.
The following diagram illustrates an inspection process with nominal data using a probe-based
measurement device based on pre-planned inspection plans.
1. Import pre-planned nominal data.

2. Probe to align the hardware coordinate system to the nominal coordinate system.
3. Find pair geometries. (Results are automatically updated.)
For more information, refer to the tutorial, Inspect with Pre-Existing Nominal Data.
Related command:
LiveInspect > Play LiveInspect Process
5. Getting Help
To get technical support:

• If you have any problems or suggestions, you can contact support@rapidform.com.
To check the version of the application and its Product ID:

• Go to Help > About.
• When sending any technical support requests are sure to include this information.
To view the Quick Start Guide

• Go to Help > Quick Start Guide.
Geomagic Verify | Getting Help 111

To access all online help documentation:
• Look at the documentation in the Help subdirectory of the root directory.
• A PDF version of the documentation in the User Guide subdirectory of the root directory is also
available.
To activate a Product license:

• Go to Help > Activate License.
To Deactivate a Product license:

• Go to Help > Deactivate License.
To profile the performance of a system:

• Go to Help > Launch Performance Profiler.
To access documentation for a specific operation:

While using an operation, press the F1 key to display the documentation for that command in the
Help tab of the viewing window.
To access the FAQ, Technical Tips, and other resources:

Use the Support tab.
To obtain the latest information on the application:

Go to http://www.rapidform.com.
The available online resources include the latest product information, frequently asked questions
(FAQ’s), software downloads, and technical support contact information.
Geomagic Verify | Getting Help 112

6. User Interface
The user interface of Geomagic Verify is intuitive and easy to use. It is a flexible and dynamic interface
that is simple to learn. The user interface windows and toolbars can be modified via the right mouse
button menu in the toolbar area so that they are always shown, dynamically hidden, or never shown.
• Title Bar
• Menu Bar
• Tool Palette
• Toolbar
• Docking Bars
• Model View
• Dialog Tree
• Monitoring Bars
• Esc Key
• Mouse Control
• Shortcut Keys
• Pop-up Menus
• 3D Mouse
• Geomagic Verify Automation
Geomagic Verify | User Interface 113

6.1. Title Bar
The title bar shows the full path of the model currently being used at the top of the application. For
example, if the file “~<Product Installation Path>\Sample\xxx.xov” is imported, its name will be
displayed in the title bar, but only after it is saved.
6.2. Menu Bar

The menu bar shows the top level of all of the menus. These menus include File, Select, Edit, Insert,
Tools, Measure, View, Add-Ins and Help.
Moving Menu Bars

This pull-down menu bar can be freely docked anywhere and some commands have icons for
quicker referencing.
Menu Types
There are three types of objects in a menu:
• Arrow Buttons ( )
If there is an arrow button next to a menu option, there will also be a sub menu that can be
accessed by clicking the arrow button.
• Shortcut keys ( )
Frequently used commands also have shortcut keys to the right of the command name.

• Ellipsis ( )
If there is an ellipsis "..." next to a dialog box or dialog tree, the command name has been
shortened and will be shown after it is clicked.
6.3. Tool Palette

A Tool Palette is a group of tools used to generate and edit elements. The five modes in Geomagic
Verify are: Nominal, Scan, Section, 3D GD&T and Curve.
• Nominal mode
The Nominal mode enables the modification of nominal bodies, the healing of defected bodies,
the conversion of bodies to mesh and the separation of front and back faces by thickness.
Additionally there is a sub-mode within the Nominal mode named Mesh Region . The Mesh
Region mode enables the editing of segmented region groups and the addition of more region
groups into a nominal mesh.
• Scan mode
The Scan mode enables alignment between 3D scan data as well as the creation and editing of
new mesh from raw scan data.
• Section mode
The Section mode enables the comparison of deviation on sections between nominal data and
scan data, the measurement of GD&T on sectional profiles, and the creation 2D Ref.Geometries.
• 3D GD&T mode
The 3D GD&T mode enables the measurement of 3D GD&T for analyzing the size, form, orientation,
and location of features in 3D space, as well as evaluating the Pass/Fail status of features within a
user-defined tolerance.

• Curve mode
The Curve mode enables the creation and editing of splines, sections and offset curves that are
useful for an inspection process.
Activating and exiting a mode

• Activating a mode
Click a mode button. When a mode is activated, the corresponding toolbars will also be activated.
• Exiting a mode
To accept all changes in a mode click the confirm button or the mode button again. Clicking
the cancel button will discard all changes in the mode and exit it.
6.4. Toolbar
A toolbar contains menus or commands that are frequently used.
Customizing a Toolbar
To customize a toolbar, right-click on the toolbar and choose Customize.
The Customize menu has four tabs:
• Commands

• Toolbars
• Keyboard
• 3D Mouse
The Commands tab

All commands are listed in the commands tab. If a command is selected, there will be a short
description about it. Command in the Commands tab can be dragged and dropped into a toolbar.
The Toolbars tab

If the radio box next to a toolbar is clicked, that item will be shown immediately.

To add a new toolbar, click the New button and a prompt to name the new toolbar will be displayed.
Click OK button to create a new empty toolbar.
Drag and drop icons from the Commands tab to customize the toolbar.

Click Reset All to reset a toolbar to its default settings. Reset All does not immediately move the
position of a toolbar, however when the application is closed and re-launched, all toolbars will be in
their original states. To change the name of a toolbar, click the Rename button. To delete a toolbar,
click the Delete button. When the Show text option is checked, the names of icons will be displayed
at the bottom.
The Keyboard tab
In the Keyboard tab, keys can be bound to a command to create a shortcut. Select a category and a
command in it to create a new shortcut key. Click the Assign button and the shortcut key will be
bonded to the selected command. To remove an existing shortcut command, select it in the Current
Keys box, and click Remove. To return everything to the original default state, click the Reset All
button.
Note:
If a shortcut is already bonded to a command, it cannot be assigned to another command.
The 3D Mouse tab

In the 3D Mouse tab, shortcut keys can be set for the buttons of a 3D mouse. Click the number of the
button to be changed and double-click a command from the list box. To remove allocated shortcuts,
select the number and click the Delete button.
6.5. Docking Bars

The application includes property bars that can be docked for the following items:
• Tree
• Display
• Help
• Viewpoint
• Properties
• Color Bar
• Report
• Support
• Image Folder
• Console
• Error List
• Tabular View
Showing or Hiding Docking Bars

When a docking bar is not visible, right-click on the toolbar pane and a visibility panel will be
displayed.
Icon Status
(Checked) The docking bar is shown on screen.
Unchecked The docking bar is not shown.
Select docking bars without check marks to display them. Click the check box next to docking bars
to hide them or use the icon.
Folding or Unfolding Docking Bars

There are two ways to fold docking bars.
• F12 key
The F12 key hides all docking bars and only shows the model view. Pressing the F12 key again
restores all docking bars.
• Auto Hide icon

A window can be set to hide automatically by clicking the Auto Hide icon on its respective
title bar as shown in the bottom left image. An auto-hidden window will be shown when a mouse
cursor hovers over the appropriate tab for the window.

Floating or Docking Bars
Double-clicking on the title of a docking bar enables it to be moved. Double clicking it again will
dock it.
Note:
Right-clicking on any of the docking bars will display the following pop-up menu.
6.5.1. Tree
There are two trees in the application used for displaying features and entities: the Inspection
Feature Tree and the Model Tree.

Inspection Feature Tree
The Inspection Feature Tree enables the creation of inspection entities by storing the operations
used in an inspection process, as well as the order of the operations and their relationships to each
other.
Whenever a feature such as an alignment, curve, or 3D GD&T, is generated, it will be added to the
Inspection Feature Tree in the order in which it was created. The Inspection Feature Tree shows all
changes and created entities in the application in chronological order as well as the history for all
changes and creations. The order of features can be altered by dragging and dropping features. It is
also possible to go back to a certain point in the inspection history by using the Rollback, Roll
Forward, Roll To End commands. This management of the inspection process is called parametric
history-based inspection.
Changing the feature history by

dragging and dropping
Created features can be suppressed and unsuppressed from the Inspection Feature Tree by selecting
Suppress in the popup menu or unchecking the check box next to the feature. If a feature is not
being used in the current inspection process, it can be temporally removed from the Inspection
Feature. The suppressed features will be unloaded from the memory and loaded into cache space.
Whenever the features are necessary, it can be reloaded into the memory by using the unsuppress
command.

Suppressing by using the suppress menu Suppressing by unchecking a feature
Note:
Suppressed features will not be attached to an inspection report. To add an inspection feature into a
report it needs to first be unsuppressed.
Selecting Several Items in a Tree

A single feature or multiple features in a tree can be selected by clicking and using the Ctrl or
Shift buttons on the keyboard. The order of features can be changed if desired.
Note:
Entities in the Inspection Feature Tree and Model Tree can be tracked and selected by typing the name
of the entity on the keyboard.
Pop-Up Menu
Right-clicking on any entity in the Inspection Feature Tree will display the following pop-up
menu.

Add Nominal – Sets a Ref. geometry created from scan data to a nominal Ref.
gometry without using nominal data.
Note:
This menu is displayed in the pop-up menu when Ref. geometry created from scan data
without using nominal data is selected.
Edit – Enters a selected mode to edit.
Delete – Deletes a feature.
Make As Nominal – Make a selected mesh as nominal data.
Note:
This menu is displayed in the pop-up menu when a mesh that is registered under the Scan
Data inspection feature is selected. It is useful when inspecting another scan data using
nominal mesh.
Suppress – Suppresses a feature so a model can be manipulated with the selected

feature temporarily removed.
Rollback – Temporarily reverts a model to an earlier state. New features can be

added or existing features can be edited while a model is in the rollback state.
When a feature is in the rollback state, any feature created will be added above the
selected rollback feature. The RollForward command is used to roll forward and the

Roll To End command is used to go to the last feature in the feature tree.
Roll To Start – Temporarily reverts a model to the initial state.
Show/Hide – Shows or hides entities of a selected feature.
Show All Included In This – Shows all entities of a selected feature even if the
visibility of the entities in the Properties panel is set to false.
Show Pass Only – Shows only passing results from inspection results.
Show Fail Only – Shows only failed results from inspection results.
Show Warning Only – Shows only warning results from inspection result.
Show No Result Only – Shows inspection results as colors without tags.
Show Pass & Warning Only – Shows passing and warning results from inspection
results.
Show Fail & Warning Only – Shows failed and warning result from inspection
results.
Zoom To This – Zooms an entity to fit a screen.
Adjust Colorbar Range – Automatically calculates a value for maximum and

minimum deviation to improve displayed results.
Export… – Opens a dialog box used to specify the path and the type of file for
exporting features.
Report – Displays a dialog box for generating a report.
Note:
When the pop-up menu is opened, it may change appearance based on what type of feature has been
selected.
Model Tree
The Model Tree displays entities such as Point Clouds, Solid Bodies, Ref. Planes, and Ref. Coordinates
in a fixed order. Each entity is displayed under its corresponding group in the Model Tree and
features can be shown or hidden by enabling or disabling the entities in the Model Tree.

Showing or Hiding Entities in the Model View
When there is a closed eye icon next to an entity in the Model View it will not be visible.
If a parent node is made invisible, all of its child entities will be invisible irrespective of their
status. In the example tree below, the Front, Top and Right Ref. Planes are set to be visible.
However, the Ref. Planes parent node is invisible, rendering all Ref. Planes invisible in the Model
View.
Pop-Up Menu
Right-clicking on any feature will display the following pop-up menu:

Add Nominal – Sets a Ref. geometry created from scan data to a nominal Ref.
geometry without using nominal data.
Note:
This menu is displayed in the pop-up menu when Ref. geometry created from scan data
without using nominal data is selected.
Show This Only – Hides all features and shows the selected feature only.
Show/Hide – Shows or hides the selected feature.
Show All Included In This – Shows all entities of a selected feature even if the
visibility of the entities in the Properties panel is set to false.
Show Pass Only – Shows only passing results from inspection results.
Show Fail Only – Shows only failed results from inspection results.
Show Warning Only – Shows only warning results from inspection result.
Show No Result Only – Shows inspection results as colors without tags.
Show Pass & Warning Only – Shows passing and warning results from inspection
results.
Show Fail & Warning Only – Shows failed and warning result from inspection
results.
Zoom To This – Zooms an entity to fit a screen.

Delete – Deletes a selected feature.
Export… – Opens a dialog box used to specify the path and the type of file for
exporting features.
Report – Displays a dialog box for generating a report.
Properties – Shows properties
Note:
When the pop-up menu is opened, it may change appearance based on what type of feature has been
selected.
6.5.2. Display
In the Display tab, view and display settings can be changed.
All View – Set the viewport (View > Viewport) to display more than two viewing panes. If the All
View option is checked, all changes made to views and display settings will be applied to all views.
Current View – Set the viewport (View > Viewport) to display more than two viewing panes. If

the Current View option is checked, all changes made to views and display settings will be applied
only to current view.
World Axis & Scale – Displays a world axis at the bottom left corner of the Model View.
Scene Grid – Shows a scene grid in the Model View at the X-Z global coordinate planes. This
option will be automatically enabled when entering into the Section mode. This option is useful
for estimating the size of entities when measuring features on sections.
Enabled Scene Grid option Disabled Scene Grid option
Colorbar – Shows the colorbar in the Model View.
Gradient Background – Sets the background color of a workspace window as a gradient.
Label – Shows the labels of ref. geometries, such as planes and vectors, in the Model View.
Dynamic Draw – Simplifies a model when it is in motion.

Dynamic Draw option enabled Dynamic Draw option disabled
Front Face – Determines the surface material of meshes and bodies in the Model View. As Is
displays each entity as a separate color, and All The Same displays all of the entities in gray.
As Is All The Same
Back Face - Opens the Back Face Color drop-down box which contains 3 options.
Complement takes the color of the front face and sets the complimentary color for back faces.
As Is sets the color of front and back faces to the same color.
User Defined sets a user defined color for back faces. User Defined colors can be set in the Display
tab in File > Preferences.
Complement As is User Defined
Transparency – Sets transparency for an entity type in the Model View.
Transparency enabled Transparency disabled
Projection Method –Projects a model with perspective which makes the foreground of a part
appear bigger, while background will appear smaller. Parallel projects a model parallel to a
viewing plane.
Viewpoint – Sets the viewpoint mode as Front, Back, Left, Right, Top, Bottom and Isometric. They
are assigned to the following shortcut keys: Alt + 1, Alt + 2, Alt + 3, Alt + 4, Alt + 5, Alt + 6 and Alt +
7.
Lock – Locks the rotation of data in the Model View. If model data cannot be rotated, check to see
if this option has been activated.
Synchronize All View – Synchronizes all open view ports in the Model View to that of the current
view.

Light –Controls Lights 1, 2, 3 or 4, on or off. The Set button changes the properties for lighting
conditions. It can be accessed by going to: View > Light Properties.
View Clip – Shows clipped views of model data. To set clipping properties, click the Set button. It
can also be accessed by going to: View > View Clip.
Shading Method – Three methods for shading can be utilized:

Vertex – Shades only poly-vertices from a mesh.
Smooth Face – Shades poly-faces and blends them to connected poly-faces smoothly.
Flat Face – Shades each triangular face using one color and does not blend connected poly-
faces.
Vertex Smooth Face Flat Face
Point Shader – Defines shading methods for point clouds. These shading methods can be used
to effectively view scan data.
Shading Method: Vertex Normal Display: On
Depth Point Shading X-Ray Point Shading
None – The default shading method. When a point cloud has color or normal information
and the Texture or Normal options are checked, the point cloud will be shaded from the
direction of the light source. Turning off Texture or Normal will display all points as the same
color without shading.

None with Normal None without Normal
Depth – From the origin viewpoint, the closer a point is, the darker the color of the point
will be. When a point is located farther away, the color of the point will become lighter. The
Set button can be used to define the range of depth by using an adjustable slider. If points
are out of a specified range of depth, they will disappear from the Model View. The Depth
function can be used to focus on a particular area by removing other unwanted areas from
the range of depth.
None Depth
When a point cloud has normal information, depth shading is available along with vertex
shading. Depth shading and vertex shading display a point cloud with enhanced three-
dimensional effects to more easily distinguish the front of the solid body from the back.
Depth Shading without Vertex Depth Shading with Vertex Normal

Normal
Note:
To create normal information for point clouds when importing, check the Normal check
box in the Import dialog box.
Vertex shading can be enabled or disabled by checking or unchecking the Normal check
box in the Display tab.

X Ray – Helps focus on an area of interest by making closer and farther areas transparent.
To define transparent areas, click the Set button. The Near and Far areas will be transparent
and the Middle area will be clearly displayed.
For example, if a scanner scans a building, it can be difficult to see the inside because of the
outer walls. The X-Ray function can be used to make the outer walls transparent enabling
the viewing of the inside clearly.
X-Ray Default After Adjusting X-Ray Depth
The X-Ray shading method makes points transparent in a certain range. When trying to
select points, points nearer to the viewing direction are selected first even if they are
invisible. Therefore, this method should be only be used for data viewing purposes.
Vertex – Draws poly-vertices.
Edge – Draws poly-edges. This option will not be available when the Shading Method is set to
Vertex.
Face – Draws poly-faces. This option will not be available when Shading Method is set to Vertex.
Texture – Shades a point cloud from the direction of a light source when a point cloud has color.
Texture is combined with Point Shader. See Point Shader for detailed information.
Normal – Uses normal information enabling vertex shading.
Checked Unchecked
Normal is combined with Point Shader. Go to Point Shader for detailed information.

Boundary – Shows or hides the boundaries of meshes. User Defined displays boundary colors as
set in Preferences. This option is available only for open meshes.
Boundary Enabled Boundary Disabled
As Is User Defined
Suppressed – Show or hides suppressed scan data.
Vertex Size – Determines the display size of a vertex.
Vertex Size: 1 Vertex Size: 2
Static Display Ratio – Changes the amount of the data displayed when a model is static by
selecting a value in the Static Display Ratio box.
Display Mode – Determines how a body is displayed.

Wireframe – Draws only edges of faces.
Hidden Line – Draws all hidden lines.
Shaded – Draws shaded faces.
Shaded With Edges – Draws shaded faces with edges.
Hidden Line Wireframe

Shaded Shaded With Edge
Resolution – Sets the display resolution of bodies. The resolution level can be set from 0 to 10.
Resolution: 0 Resolution: 5 Resolution: 10
Cutting Plane – Shows cutting planes when a section is used.
Checked Unchecked
6.5.3. Help
In this tab, the online help file can be found and it is separated into two tabs for Contents and Index.
In the Contents tab, information on all of the menus in the application can be found. To quickly find
a menu, go to the Index tab, and input key words related to it.

Shortcut Key
The F1 key by default brings up the contents help guide. This will show the help document for the
command being using. The F1 function is available on commands that have a dialog tree.
Back to the Working Area

To go back to the working area, click the Model View tab at the bottom of the workspace window.
6.5.4. Viewpoint
Viewpoint manages viewpoints saved while viewing models and entities. It is useful for reusing
certain viewpoints. If a viewpoint is selected, all entities that existed in the selected viewpoint can
be seen in Model In Viewpoint. When Viewpoint1 is chosen in the Viewpoint panel, its entity state
will be shown in the Model In Viewpoint panel.
Add Viewpoint – Adds a new viewpoint to capture the current view state.
Apply Viewpoint – Changes the visibility and viewpoint to the selected viewpoint.
Double-clicking a viewpoint works same as this function.
Show Only Selected Viewpoint – Changes the visibility of entities to the selected
viewpoint.
Reassign Viewpoint – Reassigns the selected viewpoint from the current view state.

Zoom – Determines the size of the thumbnail image.
Show/Hide – Shows or hides inspection result.
Export Viewpoint – Exports the selected viewpoint to an image file.
Note:
Captured Viewpoints can be used as Custom Viewpoints when an inspection report is generated. For
more information, go to Docking Bars > Report.
6.5.5. Properties
The Properties panel can be found on the right side of the application by default. It shows the
properties of selected entities such as names, tolerances, calculation results, and sizes. Entity
properties can be manually changed and these changed settings will govern how the entities are
computed during an inspection.
Nominal Property
When nominal data in a tree is selected, its properties will be shown in the Properties panel.
Common
Name – Name of nominal data.
General Option
Warning Ratio – When a point is within the tolerance zone,
it will Pass. If it is near the border of the tolerance zone, it will
be displayed as a Warning. The warning ratio can be set from
a tolerance zone in this setting. If it is set to -50, 50 percent
of inside the tolerance will be marked as a warning zone.
Offset For Thickness Compensation – When nominal data is a one sided surface of a sheet metal
part but scan data is a whole part, the thickness difference can be compensated by offsetting scan
data. When an offset value is inserted, the Use For Alignments and Use For Deviations options
are shown below the Offset For Thickness Compensation option. Setting a value to True will use

the offset value for alignment and deviation.
Geometry Type Recognition

Outlier For Geometry Type Checking (%) – Sets the ratio of how much outlier data will be removed
when finding adaptable analytic geometry on scan data.
Geometry Type Checking Tol. – Sets the tolerance value that is used to judge an analytic shape. For
example, setting a larger value may analyze a non-circle feature incorrectly as a circle.
Max. Radius Of Analytic Shape – Sets the tolerance value to judge an arc or line. For example, if it
is set to 1300mm, an arc that has a radius bigger than 1300mm will be analyzed as a line.
Deviation Option
Min. Distance Sub-Method – Calculates a min. deviation distance using one of two methods:
Shortest or Normalize. Shortest defines deviation as the shortest distance from a nominal point
to scan data. Normalize defines deviation as the normal distance from a nominal point to scan
data.
Ignore Extreme Angle – When true is selected, an extreme angle is filtered for deviation and a
scan pair. An extreme angle is the angle difference between a nominal point and a scan point that
is over 60 degrees. This option is useful when inspecting thin close walls for correct scan pair walls.
When this option is not used, section deviation is carried out by searching for the point from the
scan data to the design data that has the shortest distance. A front face and rear face are not

distinguished during deviation so deviation results may not be correct.
When this option is used, the front and rear faces of scan data can be distinguished by checking
the normal difference between the nominal and the scan. The front and back faces of the nominal
data can then be used to find correct scan pair faces.
GD&T, Ref. Geometry Option

Scan Pair Option
Ignore Extreme Distance – When this field is set to True, only reliable data that excludes
noisy data is used for searching a counter part of a scan by fitting. When it is set to False,
calculation for removing an outlier is not made. When the difference of a part between a
designed model data and scan data is significantly large, set this value to False to search the
counterpart.
Ignore Extreme Angle – This is the same option as the Ignore Extreme Angle in the
Deviation Options.
Check Pair Geometry Axis/Normal – Specifies an angle value for checking the axis or
normal of scan pair geometries. If the normal of scan pair geometry is over a pre-defined
angle when comparing it to the normal of the nominal geometry, this geometry pair will be
ignored during calculation.
If the axis or normal of scan pair geometry that has been calculated from a target when
measuring GD&T does not satisfy the conditions of this option, scan pair points will be
displayed in red with a warning message that states: The max angle deviation condition is
not satisfied. Check entities whose scan points are red color.

Sharp Edge Recognition
Distance Tol. – Determines whether two features intersect or not. This option sets the
distance between two features until the application will consider them to be intersecting.
Angle Tol. – Ignores angles between two scan features that are bigger than the angle of the
nominal.
Deviation Limit – Ignores a sharp edge created by two pair features that has a bigger
distance value compared to the distance of the nominal.
Probe Compensation
Compensation Direction – Chooses a compensation direction. The Probe Direction and Face
Normal can be selected.
Scan Property
When scan data in a tree is selected, its properties will be shown in the Properties panel.
Common
Name – Name of the scan data
Result
Matrix – Transforms the matrix of an alignment. The Export
button will save its value in .trm file format.
Mesh Property
When mesh data in the Model tree is selected, its properties are shown in the Properties panel.

Common
Name – Name of the mesh
Appearance
Visibility – Shows or hides a mesh.
Material – The color of a mesh
Geometry
Volume – Calculates the volume of a mesh by clicking the
Calc. button.
Area – Calculates the area of a mesh by clicking the Calc.

button.
Mass Center – Calculates the mass center of a mesh using

the X, Y and Z coordinate values by clicking the Calc. button.
Scanner Type – Chooses a scanner type. Undefined, Planar and Spherical can be selected.
Body Property
When a body is selected, its properties will be shown in the Properties panel.
Common
Name – Name of the body
Appearance
Visibility – Shows or hides a body.
Material – Color of a body
Nominal Geometry
Volume – Calculates the volume of a solid body by clicking
the Calc. button.
The volume of surface body cannot be calculated.

Area – Calculates the area of a body by clicking the Calc.
button.
Mass Center – Calculates the mass center of a body using

the X, Y and Z coordinate values by clicking the Calc. button.
Face Property
When a face is selected, its properties will be shown in the Properties panel.
Common
Name – Name of a face
Geometry
Area – Calculates the area of a face when the Calc. button is
clicked.
Option
Tolerance – Sets the tolerance used when calculating
deviation such as whole deviations, section deviations,
comparison and deviations. Different tolerances can be set
for each face.
Scan Pair Option

Zone Thickness (+)/(-) – Sets the thickness when searching
scan data from a face.

Zone Shrinkage – Reduces a fitting zone by shrinking its boundary to acquire only desired scan
data.
Normal Difference – Creates ref. geometry but excludes noisy data or scan data out of a set value.
When this option is used, a ref. geometry pair is created using point data that has a normal
direction within the range of the setting value. Values out of the range are excluded from
calculation. The available range is from 0˚ to 180˚. When Do Not Use is selected, the option will
not be applied.
The following example shows the results of created ref. geometries that are different based on
Normal Difference.
[Case 1] Normal Difference: Do Not Use
When this option is not used, all scan data corresponding to the design data will be used for
creating ref. geometry. The sharply-sloped scan data will be used for calculating ref. geometry pairs
which will not create the desired ref. geometry.
[Case 2] Normal Difference: 30˚

When this option is used, scan data points out of the setting value are excluded from calculation
for creating ref. geometry. The sharply-sloped scan data will be excluded from calculating ref.
geometry pairs which will create the desired ref. geometry.
Pair Geometry Fitting Option

Geometry Type – Shows the geometry type of a selected face. The geometry type can be
manually specified regardless of nominal geometry.
Fitting Method – Chooses the fitting method for finding scan pair geometry.
Best Fit finds best-fitted geometry from scan pair points using the least squares fitting method.
Min. Bound finds minimum-fitted geometry that contacts the nearest scan pair points in the
normal direction from the center point of the best-fitted geometry that was found using the least
square fitting method.
Note:
When either of plane or cylinder is selected as target fitting geometry, the Min. Bound option is used for
finding maximum-inscribed geometry of a tube-like geometric volume that encloses scan pair points
using the minimum separation fitting method.
Max. Bound finds maximum-fitted geometry that contacts the farthest target entities in the
Note:
When either of plane or cylinder is selected as target fitting geometry, the Max. Bound option is used for
finding minimum-circumscribed geometry of a tube-like geometric volume that encloses scan pair
points using the minimum separation fitting method.

Use Nominal Axis – Changes the value of scan ref. geometry that has the same axis of a face when
finding scan ref. geometry.
Change the value to True or False by selecting multiple entities and selecting the desired value.
Use Nominal Position – Changes the value of scan ref. geometry that has the same position of a
face when finding scan ref. geometry.
Use Nominal Radius – Changes the value of scan ref. geometry that has the same radius of a face
when finding scan ref. geometry.
Outlier Removal Type/Value – Selects outlier removal types and values.

N*Sigma sets a fitting to exclude fitting data that has errors that are bigger than N times of the
standard deviation by inputting a N value into the Outlier Removal Value box.
Ratio sets a ratio to sort fitting data according to errors. The data that falls into the ratio will be
used in the fitting.
Absolute Distance sets a fitting by excluding fitting data outside of a set distance.
Sampling Ratio – Sets a fitting using sampled data points according to a specified value. When
Auto is set, the sampling ratio will be applied according to the size of a target face.
Region Property
Region properties are displayed when scan data is used as nominal data.
Appearance
Material – The color used to express a region.
Geometry
Area – Calculates the area of a region when the Calc. button
is clicked.
Option
Tolerance – Sets the tolerance used when calculating
deviation such as whole deviations, section deviations,
comparison deviations, etc. Different tolerances can be set
for each face.

Scan Pair Option
Zone Thickness (+)/(-) – Sets the thickness when searching
Zone Shrinkage – Reduces a fitting zone by shrinking the boundary of it to acquire only desired
scan data.
Normal Difference – Creates ref. geometry but excludes noisy data or scan data out of a set value.
When this option is used, a ref. geometry pair is created using point data that has a normal
direction within the range of the setting value. Values out of the range are excluded from
calculation. The available range is from 0˚ to 180˚. When Do Not Use is selected, the option will
not be applied.

Geometry Type – Shows the geometry type of selected face.
Fitting Method – Chooses the fitting method for finding scan pair geometry.
Best Fit finds best-fitted geometry from scan pair points using the least squares fitting method.
Min. Bound finds minimum-fitted geometry that contacts the nearest scan pair points in the
Note:
When either of plane or cylinder is selected as target fitting geometry, the Min. Bound option is used for
finding maximum-inscribed geometry of a tube-like geometric volume that encloses scan pair points
Max. Bound finds maximum-fitted geometry that contacts the farthest target entities in the
Note:
When either of plane or cylinder is selected as target fitting geometry, the Max. Bound option is used for
finding minimum-circumscribed geometry of a tube-like geometric volume that encloses scan pair
Use Nominal Axis – When finding scan ref. geometry, the scan ref. geometry will have the same
axis of the face.
Use Nominal Position – When finding scan ref. geometry, the scan ref. geometry will have the
same position of the face.

Use Nominal Radius – When finding scan ref. geometry, the scan ref. geometry will have the same
radius of the face.

Edge Property
When an edge is selected, its properties are shown in the Properties panel.

Geometry Type – Shows the geometry type of a selected
edge.
Fitting Method – Chooses the fitting method for finding

scan pair geometry.
Best Fit finds best-fitted geometry from target entities using
the least squares fitting method.
Min. Bound finds minimum-fitted geometry that contacts

the nearest scan pair points in the normal direction from the
center point of the best-fitted geometry that was found
using the least square fitting method.
Note:
When circle is selected as target fitting geometry, the Min.

Bound option is used for finding maximum-inscribed
geometry of a tube-like geometric volume that encloses scan
pair points using the minimum separation fitting method.
Max. Bound finds maximum-fitted geometry that contacts

the farthest scan pair points in the normal direction from the
center point of the best-fitted geometry that was found

Note:
When circle is selected as target fitting geometry, the Max.

Bound option is used for finding minimum-circumscribed
geometry of a tube-like geometric volume that encloses scan
Best Fit Min. Bound Max. Bound

Use Nominal Axis – When finding scan ref. geometry, the scan ref. geometry will have the same
axis as the face.
Use Nominal Position – When finding scan ref. geometry, the scan ref. geometry will have the
same position of the face.
Use Nominal Radius – When finding scan ref. geometry, the scan ref. geometry will have the same
radius of the face.
Project On Nominal – Projects scan points on to the nominal and fits them to find a pair.

Ref. Geometry Property

When Ref. Geometry is selected, its properties are shown in Properties panel.
Common
Name – Name of a Ref. Geometry
Appearance

Visibility – Shows or hides nominal Ref. geometry.
Pair Geometry – Shows or hides scan pair geometry.
Fitting Deviation – Is displayed when selected Ref.

Geometry is created from scan data using the Extract
method.
When this property is set to true, deviation of a selected Ref.

Geometry that has been fit using scan data is displayed on
the screen with a color map as shown in the image below.
The deviation display will use the current color map and
when the properties of the color map are changed, it will be
applied to the deviation update immediately. Fitting
statistics are presented by a numeric value in the Fitting
Statistics field. Once deviation is shown, changes to scan
data will be applied to the deviation. This property is not
applied to Points and Coordinates among Ref. Geometries.
Geometry Deviation
Shows the deviation between nominal Ref. Geometry and its
pair (Scan Ref. Geometry). To inspect the deviation of all
elements of a Ref. Geometry, use this option. Based on the
types of geometries, the items shown in this option may
vary.
Alignment Property
When an alignment in a tree is selected, its properties are shown in the Properties panel.
Common
Name – Name of an alignment
Result
6 Sigma – Statistical analysis of an alignment

Int. Sigma – Integral sigma value
Histogram – Statistical analysis of an alignment in a

histogram
Matrix – Shows the transformation matrix of an alignment. Clicking the Export button will save
the values in the .trm file format.
GD&T Property
When a GD&T on tree is selected, its properties are shown in the Properties panel.
Common
Name – Name of a GD&T
Appearance

Visibility – Shows or hides a GD&T.
Tolerance Zone – Shows or hides tolerance zones.
Pair Points – Show or hides points that are within the fitting
zone of a nominal.
Option
Tolerance – The value of tolerances
Section Property
When a section on a tree is selected, its properties are shown in the Properties panel.
Common
Name – Name of a section
Appearance
Visibility – Shows or hides a section entity.
Deviation Visibility – Shows or hides a section deviation.
Nominal Section – Shows or hides nominal sections.
Scan Section – Shows or hides scan sections.
Tag Visibility – Shows or hides tags on a section deviation.
Ref. Geometries Visibility – Shows or hides Ref. Geometries

on section deviation.
GD&T Visibility – Shows or hides GD&T results on a section

deviation.
Tolerance Zone Visibility – Shows or hides Tolerance Zone

on a section deviation.

Geometry
Length (Nominal) – Calculates the length of nominal data.
Length (Scan) – Calculates the length of scan data.
Area (Nominal) – Calculates the area of nominal data.
Area (Scan) – Calculates the area of scan data.
Centroid (Nominal) – Calculates the centroid of nominal

data.
Centroid (Scan) – Calculates the centroid of scan data.
Display Option
Whisker Multiplier – Determines the whisker size of
deviations.
Whisker Display Ratio – Determines the display ratio of

whiskers.
Use Tolerance Color – Displays tolerance color on a section

deviation.
Colorbar Owner – Shows the owner of a colorbar. Setting

the option to True and editing the colorbar will set the
colorbar ownership to the current deviation.
Result
6 Sigma – Statistical analysis of a deviation

Histogram – Statistical analysis of an alignment by using a histogram
Section Edge Property

When the edge of a section on a tree is selected, its properties are shown in the Properties panel.
Common
Name – Name of a section
Geometry
Length Of Loop – Calculates the length of a loop.
Area Of Loop – Calculates the area of a loop.
Centroid Of Loop – Calculates the centroid of a loop.
Scan Pair Option

Zone Thickness (+)/(-) – Shows thickness when searching
Zone Shrinkage – Reduces a fitting zone by shrinking the

boundary of the fitting zone to avoid unwanted scan data
from a fitting calculation.
Normal Difference – Creates ref. geometry but excludes

noisy data or scan data out of a set value. When this option
is used, a ref. geometry pair is created using point data that
has a normal direction within the range of the setting value.
Values out of the range are excluded from calculation. The
available range is from 0˚ to 180˚. When Do Not Use is
selected, the option will not be applied.

Geometry Type – The geometry type of a pair
Use Nominal Axis – Changes the value of scan ref. geometry

having the same axis of a face when finding scan ref.
geometry.
Change the value to True or False by selecting multiple
entities and selecting the desired value.
Outlier Removal Type/Value – Selects outlier removal

types and values.
N*Sigma sets a fitting to exclude fitting data that has errors
that are bigger than N times of the standard deviation by
inputting a N value into the Outlier Removal Value box.
Ratio sets a fitting to begin by sorting fitting data according
to errors. The data that falls into the ratio will be used in the
fitting.
Absolute Distance sets a fitting by excluding fitting data

outside of a set distance.
Sampling Ratio – Sets a fitting using sampled data points

according to a specified value. When Auto is set, the
sampling ratio will be applied according to the size of a
target face.
Deviation Property
When deviation in a tree is selected, its properties are shown in the Properties panel.
Common
Name – Name of a deviation
Appearance
Visibility – Shows or hides a deviation entity.
Tag Visibility – Shows or hides tags for a deviation.
Display Option
Display Type – Shows Display type. Color Map, Whisker, or
Color Point can be selected on a whole deviation, however,
only Whisker and Color Point can be used on a silhouette
deviation.
Use Tolerance Color – Displays tolerance color on a section

deviation.
Colorbar Owner – Shows the owner of a colorbar. Setting

the option to True and editing the colorbar will set the
colorbar ownership to the current deviation.
Show Contour Line – Shows or hides contour lines.
Result
6 Sigma – Statistical analysis of a deviation

Histogram – Statistical analysis of an alignment by using a

histogram
Tag Property
When a tag in a tree is selected, its properties are shown in the Properties panel.
Common
Name – Name of a tag
Appearance
Visibility – Shows or hides a tag entity. When Visibility is set
to True, click the button to hide the tag.

6.5.6. Color Bar
The Color bar is used to view deviation in created entities. The color bar looks like the following
image.
Editing a Color Bar

Color bars can be edited as necessary.
Changing Limits
A color segment is the area of the color scale between two cursors. Within a color segment,
numerical values are mapped linearly to colors. They are the color scale’s limits to define the
value range of colors used for deviation. These limits can be modified by double-clicking the
numerical values and entering new values through their related text boxes. New values are
made effective by pressing the Enter key.
Splitting a Color Segment

A color segment can be subdivided by selecting the Split pop-up menu on the color segment.
A new segment is then created on top of the current segment.
Deleting a Color Segment

A color segment can be deleted by selecting the Delete pop-up menu on the color segment.

Copying a Color Segment
A color segment can be copied by selecting it, right-clicking, selecting Copy and then Pasting.
Alternatively, a color segment can be copied and pasted by using the Ctrl + C and Ctrl + V
shortcut keys.
Inspect Color Picker

Select the Edit Color command from the pop-up menu on a color segment or double-click it to
display a Color Picker dialog box. Note that a tolerance color cannot be edited by the color picker.
Construction
The Color Picker consists of a color mode, a grayscale mode, Option, RGB and HSB. The color
mode and the grayscale modes can be changed by left-clicking in the appropriate control
sector.
Color mode
In the pinwheel-shaped color mode, the Hue, Saturation and Brightness properties can be
defined by moving two squares using the left mouse button and mapping them to the
currently-selected segment.
The Hue property is defined by choosing a color section. The Saturation property is defined by
moving the squares to the outside of the section from the center, and the Brightness property
is defined by moving the squares to the inside of the section from the center.

Grayscale mode
In the grayscale mode, the Brightness property is defined by positioning two squares by using
the left mouse button. After positioning, the white-black gradient will be mapped to the
currently-selected segment.
Option
In the Option section, the editable box next to the Colors option defines the number of colors
and gradients of the currently-selected segment. It can be edited by typing in a value and
confirming with the ENTER key or by dragging the slide bar. The maximum number is 100.
The Reverse check box makes the color gradient of the currently-selected segment inverse. The
first and last segments of the color bar can only use one color each, so they must be selected by
using the square selectors in both the color and grayscale modes.
RGB and HSB

The RGB and HSB sections show the current color properties. The properties can be changed

by editing the number boxes.
Making a Color Bar

For a single color gradient, position one of the squares to define the Hue and Saturation properties.
Moving the mouse cursor around the line of a selected color will automatically snap the other square
to the line. Position a snapped square on the line to define the Brightness property. Both squares
can then be moved along a created line to fine tune if necessary.
For a fixed brightness gradient, position a square to define the Hue and Saturation properties and
position the other square to define the Brightness property. Positioning the other square while
holding down the Shift key will change the color while keeping the brightness at a fixed value.
6.5.7. Report

The Report panel provides a page layout designer similar to Microsoft Word. The default layout can
be edited before reporting and used as a template for a new report. After generating a report, it can
be saved as PowerPoint, Excel, PDF or TXT file.
Default Tab
The Default Tab includes various tools for editing a created report.
The following table describes the functions that are included in the Default Tab.
Generate Generates a report. When the menu is clicked, the Generate Report dialog will be
Report displayed. Generated targets can be selected optionally.
Creates a new report or exports a report to another file format.
Opens an empty document for creating a new report.

File
Exports a report to a PDF file.
Exports a report to a PowerPoint file. MS Office 2000 to 2010 is

supported.
Exports a report to an Excel file. The report can be exported in the
Excel file format. MS Office 2000 to 2010 is supported.
Sets the page layout of the report.
Mode Sets the page layout of a report.

Click this button to move to the Layout Tab. The Layout Tab
is used to edit a template. For more details on the Layout
Tab, see the description for the Layout Tab.

Edits the header of a page.
Clicking this button enables a header to be edited.
Edits the footer of a page.

Clicking this button enables a footer to be edited.
Includes the cover page as the first page.
Copies, cuts, pastes or deletes objects such as a text box or image.

Pastes a cut or copied object to a desired location.
Place a cursor on a desired location on a page and click the paste
button to paste the copied object to that location. This button is
enabled only when there are cut or copied objects on the clipboard.
Clipboard The shortcut for the Paste function is Ctrl + V.
Copies a selected object.

Select an object and click the Copy button to copy it to the clipboard.
Copy
The shortcut for the Copy function is Ctrl + C.
Cuts a selected object.

Select an object and click the Cut button to remove the object and
Cut copy it to the clipboard. The shortcut for the Cut function is Ctrl + X.
Deletes a selected object.
Delete Select the object and click the Delete button to delete the object.
Undo steps back previously performed work to a previous state and Redo steps
forward from the Undo command.
Undo/Redo
Steps back previously performed work to a previous state.
Steps forward from the Redo command.
Use the Capture Image function in the Default Mode or the Layout Mode. Select
a desired page on the left Layout panel, and the image related to the selected
Capture
page title will be captured and inserted into the report. Placing the cursor on the
Image
Whole Deviation page and clicking the Capture Image button, will create an
image of a view that can be inserted. Select a view to insert the selected image.
The items included in the Capture Image, and Custom Viewpoint options allow
the creation of desired viewpoints and inserting captured images in the report.
For example, the whole deviation image captured in a desired view in the Default

Mode or Layout Mode can be inserted into a report.
This button is enabled under the Layout mode or a newly-created report. The
added image is automatically updated to the report by clicking the Rebuild
button.
How to Use:
1. First, select a desired view by moving the model in the Model View screen.
2. Select the Viewpoint tab on the left side of the screen and click the Add
Viewpoint button in Viewpoint panel. A viewpoint image will be added
including the inspection features that were displayed on the model.
3. Go to the Model In Viewpoint panel and right-click on the 3D GD&T entity. In

the pop-up menu, click the Use Custom Viewpoint in Report. This viewpoint is
linked to the layout image of the 3D GD&T.
4. Click the Report tab next to the Model View tab.

5. Click the Layout tab on the left side of the report.
6. Click the 3D GD&T on the selected Layout panel.
7. Click the Capture Image button and select Custom Viewpoint. The created
viewpoint image will be inserted in the report.
8. Adjust the inserted image as desired.
9. Save the report by clicking OK at the right-bottom corner of the screen and exit
the Layout mode.
10. Generate a report including the linked custom viewpoint.
Insert Inserts simple tables, fields, texts, images, rectangles, circles or charts into a report.
Inserts a simple table
Click the arrow on the right-side of the icon and select rows and
columns of the table.

Inserts a field
Click the arrow on the right-side of the icon and select the date and
time, page number, total page number, author, comment, keyword, file
full path, filename, measure unit and custom field.
Inserts text
Click the insert text button then hold down the right mouse button on
a desired area and drag it. A text box will be displayed in the desired
area. Type text in the Text field of the Format Tab; the typed text will be
entered into the text box. When the mouse pointer is on a report page,
directly type the text on the page and a text box will be automatically
created and typed text will be entered into the text box.
The default font, which has been set in the Default tab, is applied to the
text. Changing the font in the Default tab or the Format tab while
selecting a text object will apply the changed font to the selected
object only.
Inserts an image
Click this button and an Open window will be displayed for selecting a
desired file.
Inserts a rectangle
Click this button and hold down the right mouse button. Drag it to a
desired area and a rectangle will be drawn.
Inserts a circle
Click this button and hold down the right mouse button. A circle will be
drawn.
Shows the data in various types of charts

Click this button and a Chart window will be displayed. Select a chart
type from the window. This icon is only enabled when a table is selected
that contains values.
Font Sets and changes the font used for text.
Arrange Arranges the order or position of selected objects or text.

Click this button and a drop-down menu will be displayed that lists object
arrangement types. For a more detailed description on the Arrange button, see the
Format Tab.

Update Click the Rebuild button to update changes to a report.
Maximize/R Maximizes the report tab to the entire screen. Clicking the button again will restore
estore the screen size back to the previous size. The shortcut for the Maximize/Restore
function is F12.
File Tab
The File Tab includes the New/Open, Save, Export, Print and Page Setup functions.
The following table shows descriptions of the functions in the File Tab.
Creates new report or opens a created report.

New/Open
Creates an empty document for a new report.
Opens a previously created report.
Saves a created report.
Save
Saves a report in the xml file format.
Saves a report in one of many available formats.
Export Exports a created report. If selected, the Save As dialog will be displayed.

Exports a created report to a PowerPoint file.
Exports a created report to an Excel file.
Clicking the Excel button to generate a report in Excel will display the
Save As window. Check Save Export File in this window to save the
generated report while it is being created. If it is unchecked, the
report will be generated in the Excel file format but not saved as a
file.
When printing images in the saved file, the resolution of images will
be lowered.

Exports a created report to a PDF file.
Exports a created report to a TXT file.
Prints a created report.
Print
Prints a created report.
Previews a created report before printing it.
Sets a page format.
Page Switches pages between portrait and landscape layouts.

Setup
Chooses a page size from:

Sets margin sizes for a document.
Displays page borders.
Insert Tab
The Insert Tab includes the Capture Image, Table, Chart, Text, Field and Illustration functions.
The Following table shows the description of the functions in the Insert Tab.
Capture Selects a capture image type.

Image This function is described in the Capture Image section in the Default Tab.
Table Inserts a new simple table.

Click the arrow mark and select the number of rows and columns.
Chart Inserts a new chart. That displays data.

Click the button and a chart window will be displayed that can be used to select
a chart type. This icon is enabled only when selecting a table that contains values

Inserts new text. Click the button, right-click the mouse, and hold down the
Text
mouse .Drag on a report page and a text box will be displayed in the dragged
area. Type text in the Text of Format Tab; and the typed text will be entered into
the text box. When the mouse cursor is on a page, direct typing text on the report
page will automatically create a text box and the typed text will be entered into
the text box.
Inserts the fields required for a report.

Date and
Inserts the creation time and date of a report.
Time
Page
Inserts the page number.
Number
Total Page
Inserts the total number of report pages.
Number
Field
File Full Path Inserts the full path of a saved Geomagic Verify file.
Filename Inserts the name of a saved Geomagic Verify file.
Inserts a measurement unit set in Default Measure Unit of File

Measure Unit
> Preferences.
Enables the definition of information frequently used in a

report. Choosing the Edit Custom Field at the bottom of the
Custom Field custom field menu enables the definition of a custom field
name and its value. An Inserted custom field on a report page
will display its value when generating a report.
Inserts shapes and images.

Inserts a rectangle. Click the rectangle button, right-click, hold
Rectangle down the mouse button, and drag it. A rectangle will be drawn
Illustration in the dragged area.
Inserts a circle. Click the circle button, right-click, hold down

Circle the mouse button, and drag it. A circle will be drawn in the
dragged area.
Inserts an image. Click this button and an Open window will

Image
be displayed for selecting a desired image file.
View Tab
The View Tab includes the Slide Show, Show/Hide, Zoom and Background functions.

The following table shows descriptions of the functions in the View Tab.
Slide Show Shows a report as a slide show.
Clicking this button will change the screen to full screen mode and the report will
be fit to the top and bottom of the screen. Click the Esc key to exit the slide show.
Shows or hides gridlines, page lines and outlines of report pages.

Click this check box and gridlines will be shown on the page. To
hide the lines, uncheck the check box.
Click this check box and page lines will be shown on the page. To
Show/Hide hide the lines, uncheck the check box.
Click this check box and the outline panel will be displayed on the
left side of the window. The panel shows configuration options for
a report in text format.
Click this check box and the header and footer will be displayed on
the page. To hide the header and footer, uncheck the check box.
Zooms in or out of the report view.

Zoom in or out of a report view by clicking the arrow mark and
selecting one of the following view options: 50%, 66%, 100%, and
200%.
Zoom
Click this button and the screen will be changed to full screen and
a report will be fit to the top and bottom of the screen.
Zooms in or out of a report view. It is similar to the Zoom function;

however, it has a greater degree of control on the level of zoom.
The minus or plus icons can be used of the flag can be
positioned as desired .

Background Sets the background color of a report.
Click the arrow mark and a palette will be displayed. Select a desired color.
Maximize Maximizes the report tab to full screen. Clicking this button makes the screen size
return back to the previous size. The shortcut for this command is F12.
Format Tab
The Format tab is hidden until an object such as a text box, table, or image is inserted into a report
or an object in the report is selected. Select or insert an object and the Format tab will be displayed
on the right side of the View tab.
The image below shows the Format tab that is displayed when a text box is selected.
The image below shows the Format tab that is displayed when an image is selected.
Available functions vary according to selected objects. The following table shows the description of
the functions in the View Tab.
Insert Inserts objects such as Tables, Fields, Text, Images, Rectangles, Circles, and Charts.
More information for this function can be found in the Insert Tab.
Changes the properties of selected objects.

Default Select a shape and check the Default check box to set it as a default
Default shape. The following created shapes will have the same color and
outline as the default shape.
Overlay Overlays an object anywhere on a page.

Lock
Enlarges or reduces a shape by a fixed ratio.
Ratio
Used to place text in a report.
Text Click a text box and type. Clicking the arrow mark on the edge of the lower-right
side displays a settings window for changing the font, size, color, effect,
alignment and numbering of text.
Font Specifies the font, size and effects of text in the text box.
Specifies the color, line color and line weight of a selected object.
Specifies a selected object color. Clicking the arrow mark on the
Styles right side will display a color pallet.
Specifies the line color for a selected object. Clicking the arrow mark
on the right side will display a color pallet.
Specifies the line weight for a selected object. Clicking the arrow
mark on the right side will display a drop-down list.
Arranges objects or text.

Bring to Front: Brings a selected object in front of all other objects.
Bring to Forward: Brings a selected object in front of other objects.
Send to Back: Sends a selected object behind all other objects.

Bring to Backward: Sends a selected object behind other objects.
Group: Groups selected objects.
Arrange Ungroup: Ungroups a selected group.
Align Left In Line: Aligns text to the left in a line.

Align H Center In Line: Centers text horizontally in a line.
Align Right In Line: Aligns text to the right in a line.
Align Top In Line: Aligns text to the top in a line.
Align V Center In Line: Centers text vertically in a line.
Align Bottom In Line: Aligns text to the bottom in a line.
Align Left: Aligns objects to the left based on the left-most object.
Align Center: Centers objects horizontally based on the vertical
center line.

Align Right: Aligns an object to the right based on the right-most
object.
Align Distribute Horizontally: Aligns objects horizontally with
equal intervals between the left-most object and the right-most
object.
Align Top: Aligns objects to the top based on the top-most object.
Align Middle: Aligns objects to the middle between the top-most
object to the bottom-most object.
Align Bottom: Aligns text to the bottom based on the bottom-most
object.
Align Distribute Vertically: Aligns objects vertically with equal
intervals between the top-most object and the bottom-most object.
Size Adjusts the size of an object.
Adjusts the width of an object.
Adjusts the height of an object.
Activates when a captured image is selected.

Use Shown Shows only entities that are shown in the current view for
Entities selected images or tables. For example, hiding Whole Deviation
Only tags in the current view will not display them in a table.
Option
White
Makes the color of a selected image white.
Background
Transparent
Makes the color of a selected image transparent.
Background
Use Custom Replaces a default image to a custom image. This option is

Viewpoint activated when a custom image is already defined.
Inserts text information at the bottom or top of an image. This command is

Caption
activated when an image is selected.
Sets the brightness, contrast, and rotation of an image.

More
Image Increases the brightness of an image.
Brightness
Adjust
Less
Decreases the contrast of an image.
Contrast
Less Decreases the brightness of an image

Brightness
90° Left
Rotates an image 90° counterclockwise.
Rotate
More
Increases the contrast of an image.
Contrast
90° Right
Rotates an image 90° clockwise.
Rotate
Layout Tab
The Layout Tab is deactivated until the Layout button is clicked in the Default Tab.
Insert or select an object such as a text box or table and the Layout Tab will be activated and shown
on the right side of the View Tab.
Selects the default template of a report.

Selects a template to be modified and creates the report with
the selected template. The available templates are
A4_LandscapeA4_Landscape_ForProbe, A4_Portrait,
Template Legal_Landscape, Legal_Landscape_ForProbe,
Letter_Landscape, Letter_Landscape_ForProbe, and
Letter_Portrait.
Click the Manage button and the Edit Templates window will be
displayed. Add, load, duplicate, or rename the template
through this window.
This function is described in the Insert section in the Default Tab.

Insert
Automatically inserts necessary fields in a report.
Auto Text Date and Time Inserts the creation time and date of a report.
Page Number Inserts page numbers.

Total Page
Inserts the total number of report pages.
Number
File Full Path Inserts the full path of a saved Geomagic Verify file.
Filename Inserts the name of a saved Geomagic Verify file.
Inserts the measurement unit set as the Default Measure

Measure Unit
Unit at File > Preferences.
Inserts a custom field box. The Edit Custom Field is used

Custom Field for editing the custom field.
Capture This function is described in the Insert section in the Default Tab.
Image
Inserts a header and footer into a report.

Inserts a header into a report.
Header & Click this button to activate the header of a report to insert
Footer objects.
Inserts a footer into a report.

Click this button to activate the footer of a report to insert
objects.
Includes the cover page as a counted page number.
Page Setup Sets a page.
This function is described in the Page Setup in the File tab.
Saves the changes to the layout of each entity page. Clicking the button and
Confirm
moving to another entity page without clicking the Confirm button will save
changes automatically.
Customizing a Layout
A layout is a template that determines the location and size of tables, images, histograms and texts
in a report. Default layouts can be edited and saved for other inspection projects. To enter the layout
editing mode:

1. Click the Report tab.
2. Click the Layout button in the Default menu.
3. The Layout panel at the left side in the Report tab shows all feature lists. They can be selected to
edit them. Once a feature is selected its page structure will be displayed in the main window of
the Report tab.
4. To add an image such as a company logo, click the Image icon and import an image.
Align the image to the right by clicking the Set Align Object in Line icon and click the Align
Right In Line under the Format icon in the Report tab.
5. To add texts, click the Text button and drag a box where the text box should be created.
Write text directly into the text box or in the Format menu in the Report tab. Uncheck the
Overlay option to prevent the text box from being overlapped by a table.

Align the text to the left by using the left align button .
6. To add a field, click the Field button and choose a field. The Entity Properties field
enables the addition of values that will be drawn in a table automatically.
7. To add preset images of a model, click the Capture Image button.

8. After completing a customized layout, click OK at the right-bottom side of the Model View and
exit the Layout Mode.
9. When a Comparison Point report is generated, results can be obtained in the Layout.
Note:
All changes are automatically saved in the autoreporttemplate.xml file located at “C:\Documents and
Settings\user name\My Documents\Product Name\Configure”.
Saving and Loading a Layout Template

After editing a layout it can be managed in the Edit Template dialog box that is displayed by clicking
the Manage icon in the Layout menu. Type a name for a new template and click the Add
button to create it. Templates can also be imported into the application in the Manage Templates
dialog box. To edit a template and preserve the original one, use the Duplicate button and make a
copied template and edit it. To delete all template settings and restore the default template, click
the Restore Preset button.
To change the current template of the current report layout, select an existing template under
Select Template.
Editing a Table
To add or remove fields in a table, select a table and click the Field Chooser icon
under the Format menu. Check only the desired fields for the table and arrange the order of each
field.

To add a defined table, click the Tabular View icon in the Layout menu and add an additional
table.
Adding a Chart
1. First, select a table in the report.
2. Click Insert New Chart in the Default menu.
3. Select a chart type and check the values in the Legend to be drawn in the chart.

4. Click the OK button.
Editing a Image
Images can be dragged and dropped from the Viewpoint and Image Folder panels.
When selecting an image in a report, the Format menu will be displayed. The Format menu includes
various image editing tools.
For example, to align an image to the left, right or center, use the alignment icon . To place an
image freely in a report, check the Overlay option under the Format menu.

Editing Texts
Text can be added by using the Insert New Text icon . To change the font, size, color and other
parameters, use the tools under the Format menu.
For example, to align a text box to the left, right or center of a report, click the Arrange button and
use the alignment icon . To place an image freely in a report, check the Overlay option. To
change border thickness, use the Specify selected object line weight icon . To change border
color, use the Specify selected object line color icon .
For information about generating a report, go to Generate Report section.
6.5.8. Support
The Online Support Page of the Support panel provides most of the useful information that the
application website provides. Useful technical tips, tutorials, FAQs and other information can be
obtained by using the search box and the category list.
As well, feedback on Geomagic products can be left. Feedback and comments on our product will
be valuable information for enhancing the performance and functionality of future and existing
Geomagic products.
Web Contact
The Online Support Page can be accessed via web browser at:
http://rapidform.zendesk.com/home

Reporting a Log File
The log file records all actions while using the application. If an error happens, this file can be helpful
for the developers in troubleshooting. Sometimes it is necessary to send this file with a bug report.
To generate a log file:
1. Run the Log_rfXOVerifier.bat file located in the installation folder of the application.
2. Use the software and try to recreate the event.
3. Once finished, the log file will be generated in the Logs folder under C:\Documents and
Settings\system name\My Documents\product name.
Note:
To see the Support page when the application starts, go to the General tab in File > Preferences, and set
"Show Support At Startup" to True.
6.5.9. Image Folder

The Image Folder stores images that are captured in the application. Images can be captured by
going to File > Capture Screen.

Displaying Types
In the Image Folder, two display types are available: Thumbnail View and Filmstrip View.
Thumbnail View Filmstrip View
Images can be cycled forward or backward using the forward and backward buttons .
They can also be rearranged by dragging and dropping them between other images.
Right-clicking on a thumbnail will display the following pop-up menu.

Delete – Deletes a captured image.
Export –Exports a thumbnail to another format like jpg or bmp.
Copy to Clipboard – Copies an image to the clipboard.
Copy to Report – Copies an image to the Report tab.
6.5.10. Console
The Console panel shows the detailed results of an operation. The results with its histogram log
calculated by the Measure > Mesh Deviation and Add-Ins > Global Register commands will be
printed in the Console window.
Clicking the right mouse button on the Console window will enable the following commands:
Copy Selection Only – Copies a selected list.
Copy All – Copies all lists.
Clear – Clears all selections.
6.5.11. Error List

The Error List panel shows errors while rebuilding a feature history (Edit > Rebuild), converting

an .xdl file (File > Convert XDL) and importing nominal data with its PMI (File > PMI Import Wizard).
Erroneous features are shown with the icon.
6.5.12. Tabular View

In the Tabular View, information of entities such as Comparison Points, Section Deviations, Curve
Deviations, Boundary Deviations, Whole Deviations, Ref. Positions, GD&Ts, Measurements, and Ref.
Geometries can be seen in a table.
Clicking the drop down menu button at top-right of the Tabular View will display a pop-up menu
where the display of the Tabular View can be set and tables can be exported in the .txt and .csv file
formats.
Removing and Adding Items in the Tabular View

To remove a field item, drag the item and drop in outside of the Tabular View.

To add a field item, select Field Chooser in the pop-up menu by clicking the drop down menu
button and drag the item and drop it into the Tabular View.
Summary items can also be controlled by the Summary Chooser dialog box. Check summary items
to be displayed in the Tabular View.
Change the style of the Tabular View

The font and background color of the Tabular View can be changed by the Set Font… and Set
Background Color options that can be accessed by clicking the drop down menu button .
6.6. Model View

The Model View is the main workspace. Models and entities are displayed and manipulated in the
Model View. It supports 4 different types of views, four kinds of three-window based views and two
kinds of two-window based views by going to View > View Port.

How to Rotate
Use the right mouse button.
Single-click the wheel button and use the left mouse button.
Use the arrow button on the keyboard.
Note:
To fix the view direction and rotate the model, move the cursor near border of the Model View and the
cursor will change from to . Drag the mouse by following the border.
How to Pan
Ctrl + Right mouse button.
Single-click the Wheel button and use Ctrl + Left mouse button combination.
Left + Right mouse button.
How to Zoom
Shift + Right mouse button.
Single-click the Wheel button and use Shift + Left mouse button combination.
6.7. Dialog Tree

When a command name includes an ellipsis “…” is selected, a corresponding dialog tree will be
displayed in the Model View. According to prerequisite conditions, some controls might be enabled
or disabled.
Common Format
The following is the common format of a dialog tree.
Left side
The drop down arrow icon or the Tilde ( ~ ) button on the keyboard can be used to expand
or collapse a dialog tree.
If the pin button is enabled ( ), whenever the user moves the mouse cursor away from the
dialog tree, it will automatically collapsed. When the mouse cursor is near the dialog tree it will
automatically expand. This behavior is useful to maximize available space to view a model. If
the button is disabled, the dialog tree is always expanded irrespective of the mouse position.
Right side
The Preview button enables a user to preview the result of an operation before apply a
command to a model. After an operation is finished, the OK and Restore buttons will be
enabled. Directly clicking the OK button on some commands like Global Register will
automatically change it to the Break button so it can be stopped before calculation has finished.
The ESC key can also be used to stop a process. While a command is being performed, the dialog
tree will be disabled and options or parameters will not be able to be modified.
Folded Format
The plus and minus icons, and , allow a dialog tree to be folded or unfolded or to control various
parameters. Click the plus icon in front of More Options to access more options.
Click the Reset button to deselect all entities. If entities were already selected, they will be
automatically listed in the selection list. To remove entities from the selection list, select them again
while holding down the Ctrl key. To deselect the last selected entity only, click the undo icon .
Procedure Format

Click the Next Stage button to go to the next phase of a procedure. Click the Previous Stage
button to go to a previous phase.
Length
Click the Flip Direction icon to flip the direction of a parameter. Click the Measure Distance
icon to measure distance and input an alternate value if necessary. Click the radius Measure
Radius button to measure a radius and input an alternate value if necessary. The Measure
Distance and Measure Radius commands are the same as the Measure > Distance and Measure >
Radius commands in the top menu. To select a position on a line or plane, hold down the Ctrl key
and pick a point. To average a measured value, use the Shift key and measure.
Radius
Click the Calculate With Mesh Data icon to calculate values automatically from mesh data
rather than inputting a value manually.
Entity
Click the Add icon to add an additional instance of controls. Click the Remove icon to
remove an instance of controls.
Click the All icon to select all entities.
Operation

The Edit Control box for a floating-point number allows the input of a numerical value or a numerical
formula. The available symbols and functions are as follows:
- A numerical formula that starts with an equal “=”.

- plus(+), minus(-), multiplication(*), division(/), power(^), factorial(!), square root(sqrt), absolute
value(fabs), trigonometrical function(sin, cos, tan, sec, cosec, cot, sinh, cosh, tanh, asin, acos, atan),
exponential(exp), or logarithmic(log, ln) function.
- No distinction between capital letters and lowercase letters.
- Spacing is ignored.
6.8. Monitoring Bars

The Monitoring Bars show the current operation status, progress information, time information,
memory consumption information, and the free space available in the cache folder.
6.8.1. Status Bar
The Status Bar shows an explanation of a selected command and the progress of an executed
command.
6.8.2. Progress Bar
Progress of a current operation is shown in the Progress Bar. It will be displayed as a numerical
percentage.
6.8.3. Time Indicator

The Total Time, Operation Time, Current System Time, as well as the Reset Time for the
application can be viewed by right-clicking on the time indicator.

The total time is the time spent in a session. The Operation Time is the time spent on one specific
operation. The Current System Time is the computer clock time. When the Time Reset option is
chosen, the time will change to 0:0:0.
6.8.4. Memory Usage Indicator

The memory usage can be check in the Memory Usage Indicator. The graph on the Memory Usage
Indicator will be increased according to the memory usage. If the graph is getting higher, strongly
recommend that you suppress features so that it is unloaded into the cache folder. For more
information about suppressing features, go to User Interface > Docking Bars > Tree.
6.8.5. Cache Disk Indicator

The free space available in the cache disk can be check in the Cache Disk Indicator. The green mark
on the Cache Disk Indicator will be changed to the yellow and red according to reducing the free
space available. If the mark is changed to red, strongly recommend that you assign the cache folder
to another disk or increase the free space in the cache disk. For more information about assigning
the cache folder, go to Menu > File > Preferences.
6.9. Esc Key

To cancel a current operation, press the Esc key. It is same as clicking the Break button .
The Esc key cancels a command execution and deselects all currently selected entities.
6.10. Mouse Control

A mouse is the main device for controlling the application. Clicking buttons or objects with or
without certain keyboard “modifier” keys alters the way models on the screen are created, selected,
moved, edit or viewed. For simplicity, we have used specific instruction conventions within this
manual:

Left-click – Press and release the Left mouse button.
Middle-click – Press and release the Middle mouse button.
Right-click – Press and release the Right mouse button.
Double-click – Rapidly click the left mouse button twice.
Drag – Single-click and hold down the left mouse button while moving the mouse.
Mouse Button Action Usage

- selects a single item, button or icon.
Left-click
- run menus and select options.
- open the properties of the node in the model.
Double-click
- make a docking window float, or vice versa.
Shift + Left-click - select multiple items.

Left
Ctrl + Left-click - deselect items.
- rotate (in viewing mode after middle-clicking)

Drag - select multiple items.
- move toolbar, window, dialog tree or dialog box.
Shift + Drag - zoom (in viewing mode after middle-clicking)
Ctrl + Drag - pan (in viewing mode after middle-clicking)
- run the Pause command for switching selection

Middle Middle-click
mode to viewing mode, or vice versa.
Scroll wheel - dynamic zoom in/out
- access pop-up menus which contain a context-

Right-click
sensitive set of frequently used functions.
Right
Drag - rotate
Left + Right-click +
- pan
Drag
Ctrl + Drag - pan
If the mouse position is near a border in the Model View and the model can be rotated, the cursor
will change to the rotate icon .

6.11. Shortcut Keys
The shortcut keys provide quick access to the most commonly used commands. Keyboard shortcuts
offer an alternative method of performing actions for users who prefer the keyboard to the mouse.
Some of the commands in the application have default shortcut keys. Custom shortcut keys can be
defined by using the Customize menu on the toolbar.
The following is a list of default shortcut keys in the application:
File menu Shortcut Key

New Ctrl + N
Open Ctrl + O
Save Ctrl + S
Print Ctrl + P
Select menu Shortcut Key

All Shift + A, Ctrl + A
None Shift + N, Ctrl + D
Inverse Shift + I, Ctrl + Shift + I
Edit menu Shortcut Key

Undo Ctrl + Z
Redo Ctrl + Y
Repeat Last Command Ctrl + Space
Cut Ctrl + X
Copy Ctrl + C
Paste Ctrl + V
Delete Delete
View menu Shortcut Key

Zoom Area Shift + Z

Zoom Previous Area Shift + X
Zoom Fit Ctrl + F
Zoom PIP Ctrl + W
View > Mesh Display Mode > Point Set F5
View > Mesh Display Mode > Wireframe F6
View > Mesh Display Mode > Shaded F7
View > Mesh Display Mode > Shaded
F8
With Edges
View > Viewpoint > Front Alt + 1
View > Viewpoint > Back Alt + 2
View > Viewpoint > Left Alt + 3
View > Viewpoint > Right Alt + 4
View > Viewpoint > Top Alt + 5
View > Viewpoint > Bottom Alt + 6
View > Viewpoint > Isometric Alt + 7
View > Viewpoint > Align View Ctrl + Shift + A
View > Visibility > Point Clouds Ctrl + 1
View > Visibility > Meshes Ctrl + 2
View > Visibility > Surface Bodies Ctrl + 3
View > Visibility > Solid Bodies Ctrl + 4
View > Visibility > Curves Ctrl + 5
View > Visibility > Sections Ctrl + 6
View > Visibility > Ref. Points Ctrl + 7
View > Visibility > Ref. Vectors Ctrl + 8
View > Visibility > GD&Ts Ctrl + 9
View > Visibility > Deviation Ctrl + 0
Etc Shortcut Key

Auto Hide Docking Bar F12
Help Context F1
Break Command Esc
Apply Command Return
Shrink Dialog Tree `( Single Quote)
6.12. Pop-up Menus

In the application view, right-clicking will display pop-up menus. The pop-up menu that is displayed
is based on the current mode and view.
Viewing Mode ( )
When in the viewing mode ( ) and the mouse is right-clicked, the following menu will be displayed:
Zoom Fit – Fits a model to the entire viewing window.
Zoom Area – Zooms the viewing area in on a selected rectangular region.
Zoom PIP – Enlarges a view at the position of the mouse cursor.
Zoom To Selection – Fits selected entities in the graphic area.
Align View – Aligns the view respective to a selected planar entity.
Selection Mode ( )
When in the selection mode ( ) and the mouse is right-clicked in an empty area, the following
pop-up menu will be displayed.
Annotation Display Control… – Displays the Annotation Display Control dialog for changing
annotation styles.
Preset – Shows default tag format if Default is selected and shown simple tags if Simple is
selected.
Default Simple
Selection Mode – Shows possible modes using the sub menu.

All - Faces – Selects all faces.
None – Deselects all selections.
Inverse – Inverses current selections.
After Entity Selection

When selecting certain types of entities and accessing the pop-up menu, the command list might
be displayed differently. The following image is the menu for Faces.
Note:
Holding the Ctrl button and accessing a pop-up menu for the selection of an edge, will display the
Deselect Tangent Edges command instead of the Select Tangent Edges command.
Selection on Overlapped Entities

When there are overlapping entities in the Model View, it could be difficult to select an entity. In such

cases, hold a left-click on an entity and release and a pop-up menu will be displayed.
6.13. 3D Mouse
The application supports 3D hardware devices that can help in the inspection process.
(3Dconnexion, http://www.3dconnexion.com)
A 3D Mouse is a device similar to a joystick in purpose, but it also provides movement control
with 6 degrees of freedom. Pull up or push down to move your model. Push left or right to move
your model left or right. Pull towards you or push away to move your model nearer or farther
away. Orientate your model on the screen by simply twisting in any direction to rotate it around
the X, Y or Z axis (pitch, roll, and yaw). With this 3D motion controller, models can be intuitively
zoomed, panned and rotated, exploring and navigating designs as naturally as if they were
objects in the real world.
The Customize dialog box for a 3D mouse can be opened by using the RMB (Right Mouse Button)
on the toolbar. Commands can be assigned to each button on the device.

Configuration settings will be saved at the following location; C:\Documents and Settings\User
Name\My Documents\Product Name\Configure\configure\rfSpaceball.cfg
Note:
Depending on the device and the pre-set settings of some buttons, they may not be able to customize.
6.14. Geomagic Verify Automation

Geomagic Verify Automation is a stand-alone application. It is an automatic batch processing tool
that executes a series of inspection jobs without manual intervention.
This tool increases the efficiency of inspection operations through simultaneous and parallel job
processes between a server and clients. With this tool, inspection jobs are set up and ordered from
a server PC to client PC's. Clients that inspection jobs are assigned to automatically perform
inspection operations based on pre-defined job descriptions and return its results back to a shared
work space. Inspections can be performed not only with multiple scan data files and a single
inspection project, but also with multiple scan data files and multiple inspection projects
simultaneously.
When scanning for an inspection project is completed, the Geomagic Verify Automation can inspect
the scans instantly using multi-environments with servers and clients.
This chapter introduces the components of Geomagic Verify Automation and explains what the
benefits of Automation are.
6.14.1. Components
The Geomagic Verify Automation application is composed of server PC's and client PC's for multiple
batch processes.
A server monitors the working status of client PC's and orders batch jobs to waiting clients. Jobs are
described by the following files to perform inspection process:
• Scan files
Input data for performing inspection jobs
• Geomagic Verify files (.xov)

Predefined inspection projects that include inspection scenarios
• A matching file (.csv)

Describes which scan files are matched with what Geomagic Verify file for an inspection job
Note:
The server does not need to install Geomagic Verify. It just monitors the status of client PC's and orders
batch jobs to waiting clients.
The clients inspect scan files with Geomagic Verify files according to job descriptions and create
inspection results. When a job has been completed, the client returns the results back to the
shared working space, creating the following files:
• Reports
These are inspection results. A report can be generated in various file formats such as Verify Report
(XML), PPT, PDF, and Excel as defined in a server.
• Geomagic Verify files (.xov)

These are resulting Geomagic Verify files saved with inspected scans. After an inspection job has
been completed, the Geomagic Verify files are saved with the inspection results and returned back
to the shared working space.
6.14.2. Benefits
Geomagic Verify Automation offers various benefits:
• Automatic Inspection
• Parallel Processing
• Communication with Clients
Automatic Inspection

Inspection jobs automatically perform without manual intervention.
Once inspection jobs are ordered from a server to clients, the clients automatically perform the
inspection job according to a pre-defined job description. When an inspection job has been
completed, a client will create resulting inspection reports and returns them back to a shared work
space. If there are other jobs that have not been performed in the job list, waiting and available
clients will automatically perform the inspection job.
Note:
The difference between Geomagic Verify Automation from the Batch Process provided in Geomagic Verify
is that Geomagic Verify Automation is a simultaneous and parallel execution of a series of inspection jobs
with multiple Geomagic Verify files.
The Batch Process function inspects multiple scans within a single inspection project file only. Geomagic
Verify Automation offers more benefits and efficiency in an inspection process through simultaneous and
parallel job execution between a server PC and client PC's.
The existing Batch Process Automation
Parallel Processing
An Automation server monitors the status of client PC's continuously and orders batch jobs to
waiting and available clients. Geomagic Verify Automation can handle multiple scan data files and
inspection jobs simultaneously and in parallel.

Communication with Clients
Geomagic Verify Automation provides two communication types between a server and clients:
• TCP/IP
• File sharing
Users can select a communication type between a server and clients depending on the working
environment. TCP/IP is the default communication type, but some users may have trouble with
TCP/IP due to the security policy of a company. Due to this, Geomagic Verify Automation supports a
file sharing alternative communication method.
6.14.3. Setting up Automation

Automation has two modes. These modes can be used depending on the status of scan data:
• Single Source Mode

This mode can be used when target scan data consists of a single fully scanned scan data file of
an object.
• Multiple Source Mode

This mode can be used when target scan data consists of multiple scan data files of a partially
scanned object.

Single Source Mode
What
The Single Source mode inspects scans automatically using multiple predefined Geomagic Verify
files when a scan covers the entire shape of a target. When a server orders inspection between
matching scan data and predefined Geomagic Verify files, multiple clients receive the job and
inspect the scan data. The clients then report the inspection results to the server depending on the
server’s request.
Note:
Individual scans are used for an inspection, so output is based on individual scan data.
Why
The Single Source mode is useful for:
• Inspecting multiple scans automatically with multiple predefined Geomagic Verify files
• Inspecting multiple scans simultaneously using multiple clients
• Inspecting a scan that covers the entire shape of a target
How to Use
A. How to use a server on Single Source mode using TCP/IP
1. Double click Geomagic Verify Automation (Server).exe to execute the
Automation Server.

2. Click the Single Source mode option then the OK button to select a mode.
3. Click the OK button to set the communication type, path for input data, and other
initialization options.
4. Set Connect by to TCP/IP.
5. Click the buttons to set a Monitoring Folder to monitor incoming scan data for
inspection, a Template Folder for including predefined Geomagic Verify files, and a
Communication Folder as a backup.
Note:
For example, the following folders can include these files:
Monitoring Folder:

\Template_1\Template11.stl and Template12.stl
\Template_2\Template21.stl and Template22.stl
Template Folder:
Template_1.xov and Template_2.xov
6. Click the Edit Identification Rule button to set a mapping rule between predefined
Geomagic Verify files and corresponding scan data.
7. Insert the name of Geomagic Verify files and a wild card to search the corresponding
scan data for batch inspection.
Note:
For example, when Template_11.stl and Template_12.stl are used for Template_1.xov, insert the
Template File and Wildcard Keywords like this:
8. Save the .CSV file and close the file.
9. Check the Save Model File and PDF options.
10. Set an Output Destination to save output model files and reports.
11. Click the Apply button after reviewing all options.

12. Inspection items will be displayed in the Inspection List with a Ready status.
13. Click the Start Server button to start server.
14. A Server’s name and IP address will be displayed as the Server information.

B. How to use a client on Single Source mode using TCP/IP
1. Before executing an Automation Client, check that the User Account Control settings
is set to Never notify in the Control Panel.
If the User Account Control Settings is not set to Never notify, the OS will display
permission messages for making changes whenever Geomagic Verify opens for batch
inspection.
Note:
When using the Windows VISTA or Win7 operating systems, the User Account Control (UAC)
must be turned off.
For more information, go to the Technical Support Center.
2. Double click the Geomagic Verify Automation (Client).exe to execute the

Automation Client.
3. Set the Geomagic path to the path of Geomagic Verify when the dialog is displayed.

Note:
For example, set the path to ~<Product Installation Path>\GeomagicVerify.exe.
4. Set Connect by to TCP/IP.
5. Set Server and Port to the server’s name or IP address, and port number to connect.
6. Click the Connect button to connect to the server after reviewing the options.
7. Inspection will start automatically.
Note:
Check the inspection status in Geomagic Verify Automation (Server).

8. When completing an inspection, the “Inspection Complete” message will be displayed
in the Log.
9. Review the reports in the output folder.
Multiple Source Mode

What
The Multiple Source mode inspects scans using multiple predefined Geomagic Verify files when
several scans create the shape of a target. When a server receives scan data and predefined .XOV
files that match, multiple clients will receive a job and inspect the scan data. The clients will then
report the inspection result to the server depending on the server’s request.
Note:
Multiple scans depending on a matching rule during inspection because each individual scan is only a
partial scan data of a target. The server makes users confirm an inspection list among candidates manually.
Why
The Multiple Source mode is useful for:
• Inspecting scans automatically with multiple predefined Geomagic Verify files
• Inspecting scans simultaneously using multiple clients

• Inspecting several scans that create the entire shape of a target
How to Use
A. How to use a server in the Multiple Source mode using file sharing
1. Double click the Geomagic Verify Automation (Server).exe file to execute an
Automation Server.
2. Enable the Multiple Source mode option and click the OK button to select a mode.
3. Click the OK button to set the communication type, path for input data, and other
initialization options.
4. Set Connect by to Shared File Comm.
5. Set the Monitoring Folder to include scan data for inspection, the Template Folder
to include predefined Geomagic Verify files, and the Communication Folder for
backup.

Note:
For example, the following folders include these files:
Monitoring Folder:
\Template_1\Template11.stl, Template12.stl, and Template12.stl
\Template_2\Template21.stl, Template22.stl, and Template23.stl
Template Folder:
Template_1.xov and Template_2.xov
6. Click the Edit Identification Rule button to set a mapping rule between predefined
Geomagic Verify files and corresponding scan data.
7. Insert the name of Geomagic Verify files and wild cards to search the corresponding
scan data for batch inspection.
Note:
For example, when Template_11.stl, Template_12.stl and Template_13.stl are used for
Template_1.xov, insert Template File and Wildcard Keyword like this:
8. Save the .CSV file.
9. Enable the Save Model File and PDF options.
10. Set the Output Destination to save output model files and reports.

11. Click the Apply button after reviewing options.
12. Inspection candidates will be displayed as Inspection Candidates.
13. Click a candidate to inspect it and click the Add to list button to add the candidate to

the Inspection List.
14. Repeat the Step 13 to add another candidate to the Inspection List.
15 Click the Start Server button to start server.
B. How to use a client in the Multiple Source mode using file sharing
1. Before executing an Automation Client, check that the User Account Control settings
is set to Never notify in the Control Panel.
If the User Account Control Settings is not set to Never notify, the OS will display
permission messages for making changes whenever Geomagic Verify opens for batch
inspection.
Note:
When using the Windows VISTA or Win7 operating systems, the User Account Control (UAC)

must be turned off.
For more information, go to the Technical Support Center.
2. Double click the Geomagic Verify Automation (Client).exe to execute the

Automation Client.
3. Set the Geomagic path to the path of Geomagic Verify when the dialog is displayed.
Note:
For example, set the path to ~<Product Installation Path>\GeomagicVerify.exe.
4. Set Connect by to Shared File Comm.
5. Set a Communication Folder.

Note:
The communication folder path must be same with Communication Folder setting in the
Server’s Option.
6. Click the Connect button to connect to the server after reviewing the options.
7. Inspection will start automatically.
Note:
Check the inspection status in Geomagic Verify Automation (Server).
8. When completing an inspection, the “Inspection Complete” message will be displayed

in the Log.
9. Check reports in the output folder.
6.14.4. Options in Detail

Automation is composed of a server and client PC's:
• Server
The Server UI changes depending on whether Single or Multiple Source mode is used. This
chapter explains the options.
• Client

This chapter explains options available in a client UI.
Server
When a server application is executed first, the option dialog displays basic settings.
1. Mode
Single Source – Enables the Single Source mode.
Multiple Source – Enables the Multiple Source mode.
Connect by – Selects either the TCP/IP or Shared File Comm. communication method for
communicating with clients.
2. Folder Settings
Monitoring Folder – Includes scan data to inspect.
Note:

Options with an asterisk in the dialog need to be filled in to use the server.
Note:
The Geomagic Verify Automation application currently supports the same formats that the
Replace Scan Data command in Geomagic Verify supports:
Extension Application
xdl, xrl, rwl, xov XO Model
xpc Rapidform Extreme Point Cloud
mdl Rapidform2006
asc, xyz, txt Ascii Points
pts Geomagic Point
fcs Geomagic Polygon
stl Stereolithography
obj OBJ
ply CyberWare
3ds 3D Studio
wrl VRML 1.0/97
icf INUS Compression File Format
igs, iges IGES
stp, step STEP
dxf AutoCAD DXF
scn NextEngine
ac Steinbichler
Bre, ctr Breuckmann
vvd, cdm, cdk VIVID
rgv, rvm Range7
pix PICZA (Roland)
g3d, cloud, surf GOM
pmj, pmjx 3D Digital Corp.
pts, ptx, ptg Leica
fls, fws FARO
iqscan iQvolution
3dd, rxp, rsp Riegl
xyz, crs, lin, smh, bin Opton

soi MENSI
Template Folder – Includes predefined Geomagic Verify files to inspect.
Identification Rule – Includes .CSV files for mapping scan data and Geomagic Verify files.
Communication Folder – When starting an inspection this folder will be empty. After an
inspection, backup folders will be displayed under the Communication Folder.
Completed Inspections (Folder) – Includes completed scan data. Scan data is moved to
This folder from the Monitoring Folder after an inspection.
Deleted Inspections (Folder) – Includes deleted scan data when deleting from an
Inspection List.
3. Batch Option
Save Model File – Saves Geomagic Verify files including target scan data after an inspection.
Print Report – Prints reports.
Report – Determines reporting formats.
4. Output Destination
Output Destination – Sets a folder for saving output data.
File Name – Determines the name of output data.
Scan Data File – Saves output data with the same name as scan data.
User Defined – Saves output data with a defined name and prefix.
5 Operation Option
Set Time Out Limit Per Inspection (min) – Limits inspection time. If Verify inspects scans over the
set time the inspection process will terminate.

Single Source Mode
1. Server
Server – Shows a server’s name and IP address when TCP/IP is selected. (e.g. CBJ-PC 192.168.1.1)
When Shared File Comm. is selected, the status of a server will be displayed from: Running and
Stop.
Port – Shows the port number for communicating with clients when TCP/IP is selected. (e.g. 2000)
2. Inspection List
Template File / Scan Data – Shows template files and corresponding scan data files in the
Monitoring Folder.
Status – Shows the status of an inspection from: Ready, Pause, and Complete. During an
inspecting process, the name of working clients will be displayed.
Time – Shows total inspection time.
Start Time – Shows the time an inspection was started.
3. Buttons for Inspection List

Clear Complete – Removes all completed items from an inspection list.
Resume – Individually resumes a paused inspection.
Pause – Individually pauses a processing inspection.

Remove – Individually removes a completed inspection.
All Pause – Pauses all inspections in an inspection list.
4. Clients Info
Client – Shows connected clients.
Status – Shows the status of a connected client from: Wait, Processing, and Disconnected.
5. Buttons
Open Log – Opens a log of server-client communications.
Option – Modifies settings for modes, monitoring paths, monitoring outputs, etc. See Server for
more details.
Close – Closes the server application.
Multiple Source Mode
1. Server
Server – Shows a server’s name and IP address when TCP/IP is selected. (e.g. CBJ-PC 192.168.1.1)
When Shared File Comm. is selected, the status of a server will be displayed from: Running and
Disconnected.
Port – Shows the port number for communicating with clients when TCP/IP is selected. (e.g. 2000)

2. Inspection Candidates
Inspection Candidates – Shows inspection candidates.
3. A button for Inspection Candidates

Add to list – Moves candidates to Inspection List.
4. Inspection List
Template File / Scan Data – Shows template files and corresponding scan data files in the
Monitoring Folder.
Status – Shows the status of an inspection from: Ready, Pause, and Complete. During an
inspecting process, the name of working clients will be displayed.
Time – Shows total inspection time.
Start Time – Shows the time an inspection was started.
5. Buttons for Inspection List

Clear Complete – Removes all completed items from an inspection list.
Resume – Individually resumes a paused inspection.
Pause – Individually pauses a processing inspection.
Remove – Individually removes a completed inspection.
All Pause – Pauses all inspections in an inspection list.
6. Client Info
Client – Shows connected clients.
Status – Shows the status of a connected client from: Wait, Processing, and Disconnected.
7. Buttons
Open Log – Opens a log of server-client communications.
Option – Modifies settings for modes, monitoring paths, monitoring outputs, etc. See Server for
more details.
Close – Closes the server application.

Client
Geomagic Path – Sets a path including the Geomagic Verify application. (e.g. ~<Product
Installation Path>\GeomagicVerify.exe)
Connect by – Determines the method of communication with a server between: TCP/IP and
Shared File Comm.
TCP/IP – A Server and a Port are required to connect to a server.
Server – Sets the name of a server when using the TCP/IP protocol. (e.g. CBJ-PC)
Port – Sets a port number to communicate with a server through TCP/IP.
Shared File Comm. – A folder shared with a server.
Communication Folder – Selects a folder to share with a server.
Log – Shows a client’s log.
7. Menu
The topmost menus in Geomagic Verify are: File, Select, Edit, Insert, Tools, Measure, View, Add-
Ins and Help.
Click on one of the menus. Some of the menu choices may be grayed-out and unable to be selected
rather than in black and selectable. There are two possible reasons for this:
-That particular command is not available for the current operation.

Geomagic Verify | Menu 224
-The appropriate prerequisite operations to access the command have not been performed. It is
sometimes necessary to perform operations in a certain order.
7.1. File
The File menu is the first menu on the menu bar and includes commands to open new or existing
files, import additional files into the application, save files, and take screen captures of models and
the application. In the File menu, the default model settings and global options that affect all the
objects in the viewing window can be altered. The Exit command, which closes the application, is
also located in the File menu.
New Files
• New
Creates a new file.
Open Files
• Open
Opens an existing Geomagic Verify file.
• Convert XDL
Converts and imports the legacy XOV file format, .XDL.
Save Files
• Save
Saves an existing Geomagic Verify file.
• Save As
Saves a copy of an existing Geomagic Verify file.
Share Files via TeamPlatform

• TeamPlatform
Shares Geomagic Verify files via TeamPlatform, Web Collaboration System.

Import Files
• Import Nominal Data
Imports a model file or scan data to use as reference data during inspection.
• PMI Import Wizard

Imports Product and Manufacturing Information, also known as PMI.
• Import Scan Data

Imports scan data to compare to nominal data.
Replace Files
• Replace Scan Data
Repeats an inspection project using different scan data but with the same inspection parameters
used in a previous project.
Batch Process
• Batch Process
Executes a series of programs or “jobs” on a computer without manual intervention.
Export and Publish

• Export
Saves selected entities and deviation results in various formats and exports them to other
programs.
• Publish
Publishes mesh through Internet Explorer by using the Point Stream and ICF publishing
commands.
Capture Screen
• Capture Screen
Creates a screen shot using a variety of methods.

Print Files
• Print
Prints an active document.
• Print Preview
Previews an active document before printing.
• Print Setup
Sets printer settings.
Settings
• Preferences
Manages global options that affect all objects in the viewing window.
Summary Information
• Summary Info
Allows for the input of summary information for a model.
Recent Files
• Recent Files
Lists recently used files in the application.
Exit
• Exit
Closes the application.
7.1.1. File > New
What
The New command creates a new file to use within the application.

Why
The New command is useful for:
• Creating a new file for a new project
How to Use
How to create a new file
1. Go to File > New, click the icon in the toolbar, or use the Ctrl + N keyboard shortcut.
2. A save file confirmation dialog box will appear for any existing open models that have
been changed. A save confirmation box will not appear for models that had only simple
changes made to it such as a view rotation.
3. Click Yes to save any open models. To proceed without saving any open models, click
No. To cancel the New File operation, click Cancel.
See Also
File > Exit
7.1.2. File > Open
What
The Open command opens an existing Geomagic Verify file.
Why
The Open command is useful for:
• Opening files native to the application

• Opening files compatible with the application
How to Use
How to open a file
1. Go to File > Open or click the icon in the toolbar, or use the Ctrl + O keyboard shortcut.
Note:
The application cannot open a .xov file that was created in a newer version of the software.
2. A save file confirmation dialog box will appear for any existing open models that have
been changed. A save confirmation box will not appear for models that had only simple
changes made to it such as a view rotation.
3. Click Yes to save any open models. To proceed without saving any open models, click
No. To cancel the New File operation, click Cancel.
4. The Open dialog box will appear. Select the path of the file in the File Name box.
5. Click Open to open the selected file or click Cancel to quit the command.
Options in Detail
Include Display Preference – Includes the display preferences stored with a .xov file that can
also be accessed by going to File > Preferences.
Show Preview & Info. – Shows a thumbnail preview of the last saved view of a selected .xov file.
Summary Information – Displays all entity information for a model being opened.
Note:
The summary information for a file can be set in the File Summary information box.
See Also
File > Save
File > Save As
File > Recent Files
File > Exit
7.1.3. File > Convert XDL
What
The Convert XDL converts and imports the legacy XOV file format, .XDL.
Why
The Convert XDL command is useful for:
• Opening files created in older versions of Geomagic Verify that used the .XDL file format
How to Use
How to open and convert a .xdl file
1. Go to File > Convert XDL.
2. Select a .xdl file. The Summary Information window will show information about the file.
3. Click Open to open and convert the file or Cancel to exit the Convert XDL command.
Options in Detail
Show Preview & Info. – Shows a thumbnail preview of the last saved view of a selected .xdl file.
See Also
File > Save
File > Save As
File > Recent Files
File > Exit
7.1.4. File > Save

What
The Save command saves an existing Geomagic Verify file.
Why
The Save command is useful for:
• Saving files native to the application

• Saving files compatible with the application
How to Use
How to save a file
1. Go to File > Save or click the icon in the toolbar, or use the Ctrl + S keyboard shortcut.
Note:
To save a copy of the current model use the File > Save As command.
2. A dialog box will appear for any existing open models that are a format other than
the .xov format. This dialog box will not appear if the model was originally created in
the .xov.
Note:
The directory of the last saved file will be remembered and shown when the Save File
command is executed.
3. Input a name for the file and click Save to save the model or click Cancel to quit the
command.
Note:
If a command is not finished, a rollback is being executed, or the model is in any mode, a
prompt box will appear asking if the changes for that command want to be discarded. Finish
the current command, rollback or exit the current mode to save, or click Cancel to cancel the
save command.
See Also
File > Save As
7.1.5. File > Save As
What
The Save As command saves a copy of the existing Geomagic Verify file.
Why
The Save As command is useful for:
• Saving a file without closing it

• Saving a file as a different file type
How to Use
How to save a file using the Save As command
1 Go to File > Save As or click the icon in the toolbar.
.
Note:
To save the current model without a copy use the File > Save command.
2 A save as dialog box will be displayed.

.
3 Input a name for the file and click Save to save the model or click Cancel to quit the
. command.
Note:
The directory of the last saved file will be remembered and shown when the Save File command
is executed.
See Also
File > Save

7.1.6. File > TeamPlatform
What
The TeamPlatform command allows users to upload and download .xov files to TeamPlatform,
Geomagic’s web collaboration system.
Why
The TeamPlatform command is useful for:
• Saving a project to the TeamPlatform system for sharing with other team members
• Allows collaboration on projects independent of time and space restrictions
How to Use
How to upload a project to the TeamPlatform
1. Go to File > TeamPlatform > Upload.
Note:
To upload a project file to the TeamPlatform, the file requires to be saved in the local PC. If it
is a new project, a Save Model File dialog box will be displayed. Input a name for the project.
2. Enter a valid e-mail address and password then click Sign In.

Note:
If it is the first time signing into TeamPlatform, click the Sign Up link to create a new account.
3. After logging in, a dialog box will be displayed for selecting a workspace to upload to.
Navigate available workspaces and their sub folders using the left-hand pane.
4. If necessary, click the To… button and select workspace members to send a comment
to.
Note:

By default, all people in the workspace will receive any comments made.
5. If necessary, input a comment in the text field.
6. Click the Upload button to upload the project file to the selected workspace.
Note:
If necessary, the uploading can be stopped by clicking the Cancel button.
Note:
If the same file already exists in the TeamPlatform workspace and you try to upload the file
saved in the different location, a dialog box asking to overwrite the file will be displayed .
How to download a file from TeamPlatform and open it in the

application
1. Go to File > TeamPlatform > Download.
2. Enter a valid e-mail address and password then click Sign In.

Note:
If it is the first time signing into TeamPlatform, click the Sign Up link to create a new account.
3. After logging in, a dialog box will be displayed for selecting a Local Working Folder and
parts from a workspace. Select a Local Working Folder.
Note:
All files in the Local Working Folder will have an accompanying .TP file with the same name
that is used to maintain the TeamPlatform association. If the file is moved to another location
it is important to also move the .TP file with it.
4. After selecting a Local Working Folder, navigate to the TeamPlatform workspace on the
left pane of the dialog box and select the file to be downloaded.
5. Click the Download button.
Note:
If a file with the same name exists in the specified local folder, a dialog box asking to overwrite
the local copy will be displayed.

6. The file will be saved in the Local Working Folder then opened in the application.
See Also
File > Save
File > Save As
7.1.7. File > Import Nominal Data
What
The Import Nominal Data command imports a CAD model file or meshes to use as nominal data
during inspection. Nominal data is typically a CAD model but mesh data can also be used. An
imported data will be registered under Nominal Data in the Inspection Feature Tree.

Supported Importable file extensions are listed in the following table:
Extension Application Import Export Texture Property
Point Cloud, Polygon,
xdl, xrl, rwl XO Model Yes Yes
Curve, Surface, Solid
mdl Rapidform2006 Yes Yes Yes
Curve, Surface, Solid
fcs Rapidform Polygon Yes Yes Polygon (ASCII)
Polygon (ASCII or
stl Stereolithography Yes Yes
Binary)
Point Cloud (Import
obj OBJ Yes Yes Yes
only), Polygon
Polygon (ASCII or
ply CyberWare Yes Yes
Binary)
3ds 3D Studio Yes Yes Yes Point Cloud, Polygon
wrl VRML 1.0/97 Yes Yes Yes Point Cloud, Polygon
INUS Compression File
icf Yes Yes Yes Polygon
Format
Point Cloud, Curve,
igs, iges IGES Yes
Surface
Point Cloud, Curve,
stp, step STEP Yes
Surface
x_t, x_b Parasolid Text/Binary Yes Surface, Solid
sat, sab, asat, ACIS Text/Binary Point Cloud, Curve,
Yes
asat Part/Assembly Surface, Solid
Point Cloud, Curve,
model CATIA V4 Yes Yes
Surface, Solid
catpart, CATIA V5 Point Cloud, Curve,
Yes Yes
catproduct Part/Assembly Surface, Solid
prt, prt.*, asm, Creo(Pro/E) Point Cloud, Curve,
Yes
asm.* Part/Assembly Surface, Solid
Point Cloud, Curve,
prt Siemens NX Yes
Surface, Solid
Point Cloud, Curve,
sldprt, sldasm SolidWorks Yes
Surface, Solid
dxf AutoCAD DXF Yes Yes
Curve
dat, nas NASTRAN Yes Polygon
ans ANSYS Yes Polygon
iv Inventor Yes Yes Point Cloud, Polygon
vda VDA-FS Yes Curve, Surface
3dm OpenNURBS(Rhino) Yes Curve, Surface

Note:
To import scan data file that includes point data and use it as nominal data in an inspection project, in first,
the data must be imported as scan data using File > Import Scan data, and then a mesh needs to be
generated to use as nominal data by using Tools > Scan Tools > Mesh Buildup Wizard or Tools > Scan
Tools > Triangulate/Merge command. The created mesh will be used as nominal data. For more
information about how to use a created mesh as nominal data, go to User Interface > Docking Bars >
Tree.
Note:
The application supports standard CAD file formats (IGES, STEP, VDA-FS, ACIS and Parasolid) without any
licenses, but to import the other CAD file formats listed in the table below, a Geomagic Exchange™ License
is required.
CAD File Extension Default Export Version Comments
CATIA V4 .model CATIA 4.1.9 to CATIA 4.2.4 - Geometry Only

- Geometry Only
.CATPart, CATIA V5 R2 through R23(V5-6 - Unsupported non-ASCII
CATIA V5
.CATProduct R2013) character in the file name
- PMI Import is supported
Creo .prt, .prt.*, - Geometry Only
PRO/E 16 to Wildfire 5, Creo 1.0 to 2.0
(PRO/E) .asm, .asm.* - PMI Import is supported
- Geometry Only
Unigraphics 11 to 18 and NX1 to - PMI Import is supported
Siemens NX .prt
NX8.5 (PMI in NX8.5 files is not
supported)
.sldprt,
SolidWorks SolidWorks 98 to 2013 Geometry only
.sldasm
Why
The Import Nominal Data command is useful for:
• Importing a model file or scan data as a reference file for inspection
How to Use
A. How to import CAD data as nominal data
1. Go to File > Import Nominal Data or click the icon in the toolbar. The application
supports the standard file formats IGES, STEP, VDA-FS, and Parasolid without the need
for additional licenses.
2. Click the Open button to import the model.

B. How to import a mesh as nominal data
1. Go to File > Import Nominal Data or click the icon in the toolbar.
2. Choose a mesh and then click the Open button to import the model.
3. The Auto Segmentation Option dialog will be displayed. This procedure will classify a
mesh into geometric regions.
Select how the mesh is created:

Mesh From CAD Model – If a mesh is converted from a CAD model, use this option.
Mesh From Scanning – If a mesh is generated from a 3D scanner, use this option.
4. Click the Make button to see the nominal data with regions.
Note:
To set a mesh scan that has already been imported as scan data as nominal data, select Make
As Nominal in the popup menu in the Inspection Feature tree.
Options in Detail
Precision – Indicates how many decimal places a position in space will carry with it throughout
calculations. The float precision is the default setting and is appropriate for most cases, but
double precision can be used with large data files such as mesh from a long range scanner.
Unit – Sets the unit for a model in among mm, cm, m, km, in, ft, and mi.
Fix Erroneous Data – Tests for non-manifold faces, coincident vertices and degenerate faces
and fixes them.
Include Texture – Includes texture information when importing scan data.

Include Texture Exclude Texture
Import Hidden Body – Imports bodies which state is hidden from other CAD software.
Include Body – Includes bodies when importing scan data.
Include Curve – Includes curve information when importing scan data.
Include Ref. Geometry – includes ref. geometry such as ref. circles, ref. slots, and ref. cylinders
when importing scan data.
See Also
File > PMI Import Wizard
7.1.8. File > PMI Import Wizard
What
The PMI Import Wizard command imports Product and Manufacturing Information, also known as
PMI, that is used is 3D computer-aided design and collaborative product development systems to
convey information on the design of a product’s components for manufacturing. This includes data
such as geometric dimensioning and tolerancing, 3D annotation and dimensions, surface finish, and
material specifications. CAD applications may also refer to PMI as Geometric Dimensioning and
Tolerancing (GD&T) or Functional Tolerancing and Annotation (FT&A).
Note:

To use the PMI Import Wizard, a 3D PMI license is required. The supported files are listed below.
File
CAD Version Supported Comments
Extension
CATIA V5 R2 through R23(V5- Unsupported assembly file and non-
CATIA V5 .CATPart
6 R2013) ASCII character in the file name
Creo PRO/E 16 to Wildfire 5, Creo
.prt, .prt.* Unsupported assembly file
(PRO/E) 1.0 to 2.0
Unigraphics 11 to 18 and Unsupported assembly file
SIEMENS NX .prt
NX1 to NX8.5 (PMI in NX8.5 files is not supported)
Why
The PMI Import Wizard command is useful for:
• Importing PMI information
How to Use
How to import nominal data
1. Go to File > PMI Import Wizard.
2. Select an appropriate PMI file to import.
See Also
File > PMI Import Wizard > CATIA
What
The CATIA PMI Import Wizard command is used to import a CATIA part file with the .CATPart file
extension that has PMI data into the CATIA application.
CATIA Compatibility Table

Type Body Face Body Edge Boundary 3D Ref.
Edge Geom.
Linear OK OK OK OK
Dimension
(Exception: (Exception: (Exception: (Exception:

single plane) ellipse) ellipse) single plane,
circle)
Angular OK OK OK OK
(Exception: (Exception:
cone’s apex ellipse)
angle)
Radial OK OK OK OK
torus’s ellipse) ellipse) circle,
inscribed vector)
diameter)
Counterbore OK OK
(Exception: - -
circle)
Countersink OK - - -
Bore Depth OK OK - -
Thickness OK OK OK OK
Flatness OK OK OK
- (Exception: (Exception:
line) plane)
Straightness OK OK OK OK
torus) line) circle) plane,
vector)
Form
Circularity OK OK OK OK
(Exception: (Exception: (Exception:
sphere, circle) circle)
torus)
Cylindricity OK OK
- (Exception: -
circle)
Parallelism OK OK OK OK
line) circle) plane)
Perpendicularity OK OK OK OK
Orientation (Exception: (Exception: (Exception:
torus) line, circle) plane)
Angularity OK OK OK OK
torus) line, circle) plane, circle)
Line Profile OK OK OK OK
Profile (Exception: (Exception: (Exception:
line, circle, line, circle, plane, circle,

ellipse) ellipse) vector)
Surface Profile OK OK OK OK
line, circle, line, circle, plane, circle,
ellipse) ellipse) vector)
Runout OK OK OK OK
torus) circle) circle) plane, circle)
Runout
Total Runout OK OK OK OK
torus) circle) circle) plane, circle)
Position OK OK OK OK
plane pair) line, circle) line pair) plane, circle)
Location Concentricity OK OK OK
(Exception: (Exception: -
line, circle) line)
Symmetry OK - OK -
Datum Datum OK OK OK OK
sphere, vertex, line) vertex, point, circle,
torus) ellipse, pair plane,
type) vector)
Note:
The linear dimension of a cylinder height in CAD will be replaced by the length of the axial ref. vector in
Geomagic Verify.
• The angular dimension between circles in CAD will be replaced by the angle between planes in
Geomagic Verify.
• The linear dimension on a vector in CAD will be replaced by the distance of two ref. points at the start
and end of the vector in Geomagic Verify.
• The linear dimension on an ellipse in CAD will be replaced by elliptical dimension in Geomagic Verify.
• The linear dimension between un-parallel entities will generate ref. points on a corresponding position.
Geomagic Verify Limitations

• Custom Planes (View Direction) are not available.
• Composites / Compounds are not available.
• Projected Modifiers are not available.
• Sketch entities are not available.
• Arc lengths are not available.
• Supports only LMC/MMC/RFS from TZS and TZM.
• The shortest linear dimension between surfaces is not available.

• A circle from Constructed Geometry is not available.
• Datums on constructed geometries are not available.
• Flag Note names are used as the content of a Note.
Why
The CATIA PMI Import Wizard tool is useful for:
• Importing PMI data into the CATIA application
How to Use
How use the CATIA PMI Import Wizard command
1. Go to File > PMI Import Wizard > CATIA. Select a file and click the Open button.
Note:
When a CAD file is imported using the PMI Import Wizard, the file name will be displayed
between parentheses next to the name of the top project in the Model Tree. When multiple
files have been loaded, file names will be listed by inserting a plus sign between the
parentheses.
2. The first stage will display statistics on imported results.
3. Click the Next Stage button. An alignment method can be chosen.

4 Click the Next Stage button. Groups of GD&T can be organized. To add a group, click the
Add New GD&T Feature button and select GD&T’s.
5 Click OK to complete the command. The model with the defined GD&T groups will be
displayed.
Options in Detail
Open Dialog Box
Set Default Tolerance for nominal values (dimensions) whose tolerances are not defined –
Allocates GD&Ts that do not have defined tolerances as the definition of the Tolerance Table

that can be accessed in File > Preferences.
Import Hidden Bodies – Imports bodies that are hidden in CAD applications.
Actual Mating – Defines a mating method to find a scan pair geometry from scan pair points.
In Space – Finds minimum-fitted geometry that contacts the nearest scan pair points in
the normal direction from the center point of the best-fitted geometry that was found
Note:
In planar and cylindrical faces or in circular edges, the In-Space mating option is used for finding
maximum-inscribed geometry of a slab-like or a tube-like geometric volume that encloses scan
In Material – Finds maximum-fitted geometry that contacts the farthest scan pair points
in the normal direction from the center point of the best-fitted geometry that was found
Note:
In planar and cylindrical faces or in circular edges, the In-Material mating option is used for finding
minimum-circumscribed geometry of a slab-like or a tube-like geometric volume that encloses
selected entities using the minimum separation fitting method.
As Nominal – Finds scan pair geometry based on the fitting method that is defined in the
properties of a target face or edge.
Best Fit, Min. Bound, and Max. Bound can be used as the fitting method. For more
information, go to User Interface > Docking Bars > Properties.
The following image illustrates how Actual Mating can be applied to scan data:
<Actual Mating>

Stage1: Import Results
Number Of Datum Features – Shows the results of imported datums.
Number Of Dimension Features – Shows the results of imported dimensions.
Number of GT Features – Shows the results of imported Geometric Tolerances.
Stage 2: Add Align

Add Align Features – Predefines alignments. To add an alignment, click the Add Alignment
button .
Stage 3: Grouping GD&Ts

GD&Ts – Groups GD&Ts by the Top, Front, and Right default viewpoints. To add a new group,
click the Add New Group button and select GD&Ts on the screen. To merge a group to the
group above it, click the Merge This Feature And Upper Feature button .
GD&Ts To Exclude – Shows the result of imported dimensions.
See Also
File > PMI Import Wizard > Siemens NX
File > PMI Import Wizard > Creo(PRO/E)
What
The Siemens NX PMI Import Wizard command is used to import a Siemens NX part file with the .prt
file extension that has PMI data into the Siemens NX application.
SIEMENS NX Compatibility Table

Edge Geom.
Linear OK OK OK OK
Angular OK OK OK -
Dimension Radial OK OK OK -
Counterbore OK - - -
Countersink No No No No

Bore Depth No No No No
Thickness OK OK OK -
(Exception:
cylinder)
Flatness OK No No -
Straightness OK No No -
Circularity OK No No
Form
(Exception: -
sphere, torus)
Cylindricity OK No No -
Parallelism OK No No
(Exception: -
torus)
Perpendicularity OK No No
Orientation (Exception: -
torus)
Angularity OK No No
(Exception: -
torus)
Line Profile OK No No -
Profile
Surface Profile OK No No -
Runout OK No No -
Total Runout OK No No
Runout
(Exception: -
sphere)
Position OK No No
(Exception:
-
plane pair,
sphere)
Concentricity OK No No
Location
(Exception: -
sphere)
Symmetry OK No No
(Exception: -
plane)
Datum Datum OK No No OK
pair type, plane, vector)
freeform,
sphere, torus)
Note:

Geomagic Verify.
Geomagic Verify.
• The linear dimension on an ellipse in CAD will be replaced by the elliptical dimension in Geomagic
Verify.
• The linear dimension between entities that are not parallel will generate ref. points on a corresponding
position.

• Custom Plane (View Direction) is not available.
• Composite / Compound are not available.
• Projected Modifier is not available.
• Arc length is not available.
• Supported only LMC/MMC/RFS from TZS and TZM.
• URL Note is not available.
• Coordinate Note is not available.
• The title of a note is not available.
• 3D Ref. geometry for a plan and a vector is not available.
Why
The Siemens NX PMI Import Wizard tool is useful for:
• Importing PMI data into the Siemens NX application
How to Use
How use the Siemens NX PMI Import Wizard command
1. Go to File > PMI Import Wizard > Siemens NX. Select a file and click OK.
Note:
parentheses.

3. Click the Next Stage button and choose an alignment method.
4 Click the Next Stage button. Groups of GD&T can be organized. To add a group, click
the Add New GD&T Feature button and select GD&T’s.
displayed.

Options in Detail
Open Dialog Box
Note:
Note:

<Actual Mating>
Stage 1: Import Results

Number Of Datum Features – Shows the result of imported datums.
Number Of Dimension Features – Shows the result of imported dimensions.
Number of GT Features – Shows the result of imported Geometric Tolerances.
Stage 2: Add Align

button .

GD&Ts To Exclude – Shows the results of imported dimensions.
See Also

What
The Creo(PRO/E) PMI Import Wizard command is used to import a Creo(PRO/E) part file with
the .prt file extension that has PMI data into the Creo(PRO/E) application.
Creo(PRO/E) Compatibility Table

Edge Geom.
Linear OK OK OK OK
(Exception:
vector)
Angular OK OK OK
(Exception: OK
circle)
Dimension Radial OK OK OK
(Exception: -
sphere)
Counterbore OK OK OK OK
Countersink OK OK OK OK
Bore Depth OK OK OK OK
Thickness OK OK OK OK
Flatness OK - - OK
(Exception:
plane)
Straightness OK OK OK OK
line) vector)
Form Circularity OK - -
(Exception:
-
sphere,
torus)
Cylindricity OK - -
(Exception: -
cone)
Parallelism OK - - OK
(Exception:
plane,
Orientation
vector)
Perpendicularity OK - - OK
(Exception:

plane,
vector)
Angularity OK - - OK
(Exception:
plane,
vector)
Line Profile - OK OK
(Exception: (Exception: -
Profile
line, circle) line, circle)
Surface Profile OK OK - -
Runout OK - -
(Exception: -
sphere)
Runout
Total Runout OK - -
(Exception: -
sphere)
Position OK OK OK OK
single plane, plane,
freeform) vector)
Location
Concentricity OK - - OK
(Exception:
vector)
Symmetry OK OK OK OK
Datum Datum OK OK OK OK
(Exception:
vector)
Note:
Geomagic Verify.
Geomagic Verify.
• The linear dimension on an ellipse in CAD will be replaced by the elliptical dimension in Geomagic
Verify.
• The linear dimension between entities that are not parallel will generate ref. points on a corresponding
position.
• Custom Plane (View Direction) is not available.

• Composite / Compound are not available.
• Projected Modifier is not available.
• Arc length is not available.
• Supported only LMC/MMC/RFS from TZS and TZM.
• URL Note is not available.
• Coordinate Note is not available.
• The title of a note is not available.
• 3D Ref. geometry for a plan and a vector is not available.
Why
The Creo(PRO/E) PMI Import Wizard tool is useful for:
• Importing PMI data into the Creo(PRO/E) application
How to Use
How use the Creo(PRO/E) PMI Import Wizard command
1. Go to File > PMI Import Wizard > Creo(PRO/E). Select a file and click OK.
Note:
parentheses.

3. Click the Next Stage button. An alignment method can be chosen.
4 Click the Next Stage button. Groups of GD&T can be organized. To add a group, click the
Add New GD&T Feature button and select GD&T’s.
displayed.
Options in Detail
Open Dialog Box

Note:
Note:
As Nominal – Finds a scan pair geometry based on the fitting method that is defined in the
<Actual Mating>

Stage 1: Import Results
Number Of Datum Features – Shows the result of imported datums.
Number Of Dimension Features – Shows the result of imported dimensions.
Number of GT Features – Shows the result of imported Geometric Tolerances.
Stage 2: Add Align

button .

GD&Ts To Exclude – Shows the result of imported dimensions.
See Also
7.1.9. File > Import Scan Data
What
The Import Scan Data imports target scan data to compare to nominal data. An imported data will
be registered under Scan Data in the Inspection Feature tree.
Supported Importable file extensions are listed in the following table:

Extensio Application Import Export Color Texture Property

n
Point, Polygon,
xdl, xrl,
XO Model Yes Yes Yes Curve, Surface,
rwl
Solid
Rapidform Extreme
xpc Yes Yes Yes Point
Point Cloud
Point, Polygon,
mdl Rapidform2006 Yes Yes Yes Yes Curve, Surface,
Solid
asc, xyz, Point (ASCII), xyz
Ascii Points Yes Yes Yes
txt or xyzrgb
pts Geomagic Point Yes Yes Point file (ASCII)
Polygon file
fcs Geomagic Polygon Yes Yes Yes
(ASCII)
Polygon (ASCII or
stl Stereolithography Yes Yes
Binary)
Point (Import
obj OBJ Yes Yes Yes Yes
only), Polygon
Polygon (ASCII or
ply CyberWare Yes Yes Yes
Binary)
3ds 3D Studio Yes Yes Yes Point or Polygon
wrl VRML 1.0/97 Yes Yes Yes Yes Point or Polygon
INUS Compression
icf Yes Yes Yes Yes Polygon file
File Format
Point, Curve,
igs, iges IGES Yes Yes
Surface
Point, Curve,
stp, step STEP Yes Yes
Surface
Parasolid
x_t, x_b Yes Yes Solid or Surface
Text/Binary
Point, Polygon,
dxf AutoCAD DXF Yes Yes
Curve
Polygon, Curve,
scn NextEngine Yes Yes
Surface
ac Steinbichler Yes Yes Point or Polygon
Bre, ctr Breuckmann Yes Yes Point
vvd,
cdm, VIVID Yes Yes Polygon
cdk
rgv, rvm Range7 Yes Point, Polygon
pix PICZA (Roland) Yes Point, Polygon
g3d Yes Yes Point or Polygon
cloud GOM Yes Yes Point
surf Yes Yes Point
pmj,
3D Digital Corp. Yes Point
pmjx
pts, ptx,
Leica Yes Yes Point
ptg
fls Yes Yes Point
FARO LS
fws Yes Yes The information

of corresponding
fls files
iqscan iQvolution Yes Yes Point
3dd, rxp Riegl Yes Yes Point or Polygon
xyz, crs,
lin, smh, Opton Yes Point
bin
soi MENSI Yes Yes Point
btx Surphaser Yes Yes Point, Polygon
stb Scantech Yes Point
3pi ShapeGrabber Yes Point
sab, sab2 Nikon Metrology Yes Yes Point or Polygon
swl, swb,
Perceptron Yes Point
bin
rtpi, xyzi,
DeltaSphere Yes Yes Point
xyzrgb
psl, scn,
LDI Yes Point
pcn
cbk, grk,
Kreon Yes Point
cwk
icv Yes Yes Polygon
Solutionix
snx Yes Polygon
tfm Wicks and Wilsons Yes Yes Point
m3d Steintek Yes Point, Polygon
hym Hymarc Yes Point
xyz, xyzn Cognitense Yes Point, Polygon
opd Optimet Yes Yes Point, Polygon
mpc Mantis Vision Yes Yes Point, Polygon
dat, nas NASTRAN Yes Polygon
ans ANSYS Yes Polygon
iv Inventor Yes Yes Yes Point, Polygon
vda VDA-FS Yes Curve, Surface
3dm OpenNURBS(Rhino) Yes Curve, Surface
cls Topcon Yes Yes Point
ptc Kubit Yes Yes Point
lsf LiveScan Yes Point
i3d Imetric Yes Yes Point, Polygon
rge Shining 3D Yes Point, Polygon
csd Fujifilm Yes Yes Point, Polygon
Note:
The .icv and .snx Solutionix file formats are supported in the 32-bit version of Geomagic Verify only

Note:
The following point cloud formats can be converted into polygons with its grid information or 2D
triangulation processes during the importing process: Ac, Bre, cloud, surf, opton, 3pi, stb, pmj/pmjx, grk,
tfm, m3d.
Note:
It is possible to import multiple files at once. To do so, hold down Ctrl or Shift key while selecting files in
the importing dialog box.
Note:
The following formats can be imported without loss of color information:
WRL, OBJ, PLY, Geomagic files (fcs, icf, mdl, xdl).
Note:
If the Import dialog box is opened to import files, all of the supported files may not be listed under “File
Format” because of the limitations of the OS. Favorite file formats can be shown by choosing True next to
the file format in the File I/O tab in File > Preferences and only these formats will be shown in the Import
dialog box. For more information, go to File > Preferences.
Why
The Import Scan Data command is useful for:
• Importing scan data as meshes or point clouds to compare to nominal data
How to Use
How to import scan data
1. Go to File > Import Scan Data. Multiple scans can be selected in the Import Scan Data
dialog box or scans can be imported one by one. When multiple scans are imported the
following message will be displayed.
2. If Yes is selected, Tools > Scan Tools > Align command will execute to register scans

and align them. If No is selected, scans will be imported without any other actions.
Options in Detail
and fixes them.
Use ASCII Convert – Selects columns and rows to import. Clicking on a column will produce a
pull-down menu used to define the property for that column.
X, Y, and Z are coordinate information.

R, G, and B are color information.
I, J, and K are normal information.
Ignore will ignore contents in the selected column.
A file normally contains X, Y, Z or X, Y, Z, R, G, B information. When only one R, G, B, color

information field has value it signifies an intensity value. When two or more R, G, B, color
information fields have values it signifies color information.
White Character (space, tab) – Treats space and tab inputs as separators.
Other Character – Treats user defined characters as separators.
Color Value – Manually specify a numerical color value. A color range is normally between 0
and 255. When Auto is selected the application will automatically analyze the minimum and
maximum color values and multiply a proper value to create a range within the normal range
of 0 to 255.
Template – Selects a predefined template. To add current user defined settings as a template
click Edit Template and type the template name and click the Add button. The Delete button
removes selected templates from the list. The Default button returns to a default template
status.
Use Custom Setting

Use Custom Setting – Specifies sub-options that will be preserved until changed again.

Precision – Indicates how many decimal places a position in space will carry with it
throughout calculations. Float precision is the default setting and is appropriate for most
cases but double precision can be used with data of large size such as meshes from long
range scanners.
Sampling Ratio – Samples data points by a specified value. When the ratio is 100%, all
selected data will be used. When the ratio is 50%, half of the selected data will be used.
Points Only – Imports point clouds without poly faces.
Mesh Data Points Only
Include Texture – Imports texture information.
Include Texture Exclude Textures
Include Vertex Normal – Imports vertex normal information.
Without Vertex Normal With Vertex Normal
Combine Point Clouds – Merges point clouds to make a single point cloud.
Triangulation Cutoff Angle – Filters noise during triangulation that has a scan direction
larger than a specified value.
Import Only – Imports scan data without further procedures.

See Also
7.1.10. File > Replace Scan Data
What
The Replace Scan Data command repeats an inspection project using different scan data but with
the same inspection parameters used in a previous project.
Note:
The import dialog box and options are the same as the ones found at File > Import Scan Data.
Note:
When replacing existing scan data with a new scan data, the Select Scan For Replacement command
automatically runs if several scan data files existed. This command allows choosing target scan data for
replacement by using entity name, importing order, and center of mass.

Why
The Replace Scan Data command is useful for:
• Importing scan data using the parameters set in another project
How to Use
How to replace scan data
1. Go to File > Replace Scan Data or click on the icon in the toolbar. To replace multiple
scans with other scans, pairs need to be made between the defined inspection project
and the replacement scans.

2. The pair dialog tree will be displayed when multiple scans are placed. The Name option
will make pairs by naming the order of the scans. The Import Order option makes pairs
by the import order. The Mass Center option makes pairs by judging the position of the
mass center of each scan.
Pairs can also be made manually by moving the thumbnail of an imported scan in the
Matching Thumbnail panel.
Options in Detail
and fixes them.
Use ASCII Convert – Selects columns and rows to import. Clicking on a column will produce a
pull-down menu used to define the property for that column.
X, Y, and Z are coordinate information.

R, G, and B are color information.
I, J, and K are normal information.
Ignore will ignore contents in the selected column.
A file normally contains X, Y, Z or X, Y, Z, R, G, B information. When only one R, G, B, color

information field has value it signifies an intensity value. When two or more R, G, B, color
information fields have values it signifies color information.

White Character (space, tab) – Treats space and tab inputs as separators.
Other Character – Treats user defined characters as separators.
Color Value – Manually specify a numerical color value. A color range is normally between 0
and 255. When Auto is selected the application will automatically analyze the minimum and
maximum color values and multiply a proper value to create a range within the normal range
of 0 to 255.
Template – Selects a predefined template. To add current user defined settings as a template
click Edit Template and type the template name and click the Add button. The Delete button
removes selected templates from the list. The Default button returns to a default template
status.
Use Custom Setting

Use Custom Setting – Specifies sub-options that will be preserved until changed again.
Precision – Indicates how many decimal places a position in space will carry with it
throughout calculations. Float precision is the default setting and is appropriate for most
cases but double precision can be used with data of large size such as meshes from long
range scanners.
Points Only – Imports point clouds without poly faces.
Mesh Data Points Only
Include Texture – Imports texture information.
Include Texture Exclude Textures

Generate Vertex Normal – Shows the result of imported Geometric Tolerances.
Without Vertex Normal With Vertex Normal
Combine Point Clouds – Merges point clouds to make a single point cloud.
Triangulation Cutoff Angle – Filters noise during triangulation that has a scan direction
larger than a specified value.
Import Only – Imports scan data without further procedures.
See Also
7.1.11. File > Batch Process
What
The Batch Process commands execute a series of programs or “jobs” on a computer without manual
intervention by taking a set of scan data files as input, processing the data, and outputting a set of
data files.

Note:
When multiple scan data files are opened and scan data files are specified as Active Scan Data, the Batch
Process menu will be unavailable.
Why
The Batch Process commands are useful for:
• Processing jobs when computer resources are less busy

• Avoiding idling computing resources with minute-by-minute intervention and supervision
• Sharing optimized processing with others
• Fully utilizing computing resources, helping to amortize the cost of the machine
Options in Detail
Add Files – Selects scan data files as input.
Add Folders – Groups files in folders while importing scan data files. The Import Each Folder
as a Group option groups files in a folder together and if it is not used files in a selected folder
will not be grouped during the import process.
Delete – Removes selected scan data from the list box. Using this option after selecting a group
will delete all files in the group.
List UP/DOWN – Changes the calculation order of selected scan data. Using this option after
selecting a group will move all files in the group as a single unit.

Replace Scan Pair Option – Determines pairing when replacing a scan file that contains
multiple scans.
Group – Groups selected files internally to work as one mesh or point cloud. A group name will
be created based on the folder where the top file among the selected files is located.
Ungroup – Ungroups a selected group.
Rename – Renames a group. When Scan Data File Group is selected in the File Name option
the created result will be named based on the group name.
Auto Group – Groups folders based on the files in the groups.
Save Model File – Saves resulting files in the .xov file format.
Print Report – Prints a report.
Export Report – Exports results as .xov report, .pdf, .ppt, or Excel files.
Folder – Saves files at the same location as the original file or defines another folder to save files
to.
File Name – Determines a file name for a file to be saved.
7.1.12. File > Export
What
The Export command saves selected entities and deviation results in various formats and exports
them to other programs.
Why
The Export command is useful for:
• Exporting a file into a different file type

• Exporting a file into another program
How to Use
How to export a file

1. Go to File > Export or click the icon in the toolbar. The application will show the default
extension automatically in the Export dialog box which can be changed. Entities can be
first selected then exported.
Note:
Supported extensions for selected entities are listed in the following table:
Export File Entity
Geometry
Extension
Deviation
Section
Format
Cloud
Curve
Mesh
Point
Body
Ref.
xdl XO Model Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes
(Except Slot,
Rapidform
mdl Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Rectangle,
Model 4.0
Polygon, Cone,
Torus)
Geomagic
pts Yes Yes
Points
Geomagic
fcs Yes
Polygons
INUS
icf Compression Yes Yes
File
asc Ascii Points Yes Yes
stl Binary STL Yes
stl Ascii STL Yes
obj OBJ Yes
dxf AutoCAD DXF Yes Yes Yes
3ds 3D Studio Yes Yes
wrl VRML 1.0 Yes Yes
wrl VRML 97 Yes Yes
CyberWare
ply Yes Yes
Binary
CyberWare
ply Yes Yes
Ascii
ptc Kubit Yes Yes
igs IGES Yes Yes Yes Yes
stp STEP Yes Yes Yes Yes
x_t Parasolid Text Yes Yes Yes
Parasolid
X_b Yes Yes Yes
Binary
Yes
sat ACIS Text Yes Yes Yes (Point, Vector,
Plane only)
Yes
sab ACIS Binary Yes Yes Yes (Point, Vector,
Plane only)
model CATIA V4 Yes Yes Yes Yes
catpart CATIA V5 Yes Yes Yes Yes
txt Text Yes

Comma
csv Separated Yes
Value
Note:
To export the file formats listed in the table below a Geomagic Exchange™ License must be
installed:
Default
CAD File Extension Export Comments
Version
CATIA V4 .model CATIA 4.1.9
Unsupported assembly non-ASCII
CATIA V5 .CATPart, .CATProduct CATIA V5 R6
character in the file name
Note:
Ref. geometries exported from the application will be imported into the downstream
application in different feature types according to the geometric type:
• 2D ref. geometries – curves

• 3D ref. geometries – surface bodies or solid bodies
2. Click the OK button to export the selected entities or click the Cancel button to quit the
command.
Options in Detail
Geometry – Exports geometry entities such as bodies, meshes, and ref. geometries as common
file formats.
Deviation – Exports deviation results such as whole deviations and section deviations in the .csv
or .txt file formats. Comparison points can be exported in the .cmpt file format by clicking the
button in the Comparison Point dialog tree.
See Also

7.1.13. File > Publish
The Publish menu publishes mesh through Internet Explorer by using the Point Stream and ICF
publishing commands.
File > Publish > Point Stream

What
The Publish Point Stream command publishes selected meshes and point clouds as a stream of
points that can be viewed using the Internet Explorer browser. The RPS internet explorer viewer
plug-in is automatically installed when a PC is connected to the internet.
Why
The Publish Point Stream command is useful for:
• Publishing a file into a Point Stream to be viewed in an Internet Explorer web browser
How to Use
A. How to publish a file as a point stream
1. Go to File > Publish > Point Stream or click the icon in the toolbar and select a mesh

or a point cloud to publish.
2. Click the OK button to publish the mesh. An .html and .rps file will be created that is
viewable in an Internet Explorer browser window. The same mouse and keyboard
controls used to rotate, pan and zoom in the application are also used in the browser.
3. To see the saved file, open the .html file.
If this file is being used for the first time a dialog box used to install the RPS viewer plug-
in will be displayed. Click Install to install and proceed.
Note:
This plug-in is not supported on 64-bit Internet Explorer.
4. To control viewing:
• Rotate: Left mouse button

• Pan: Ctrl + Left mouse button
• Zoom: Shift + Left mouse button or mouse wheel
B. How to share a generated file

Uploading on a website
The simplest way is to upload both the RPS and HTML files to a webhost, usually with an FTP
client, in the same folder. Then link to the HTM file's location.
To store the RPS and HTML file in a different folder, open the HTML file with a text editor and
change the RPSFilePath parameter’s value to correct location (Relative path from the directory

of the HTML file is in).
Inserting into another html file

To insert the RPS view of your model into another web page, just copy tags everything in the
HTML file from "<OBJECT>" to "</OBJECT>", and paste them into another HTML source file.
Options in Detail
Plug-in – Shows the download path for the plug-in.
Version – Shows the current version of the RPS viewer.
Width and Height – Shows the width and height of the viewing area of a file.
HTML File Path – Specifies the name and directory of a HTML document to be generated.
Background – Specifies the background color of the RPS viewer. The RGB value can be between
0 and 255. The Use Texture option assigns a specific image as the background.
Without Texture With Texture
Antialiasing – Enables or disables anti-aliasing when a model is in a static state in the RPS
viewer.
Zoom Limit – Controls the range of zoom-in. No Limit allows infinite zoom, Bounding Sphere
allows zooming up to the boundary of a boundary sphere, Nearest Distances allows zooming
to a nearest distance and Limit Factor scales zooming distance for the Bounding Sphere and
Nearest Distance options.
Launch Internet Explorer – Specifies if a .html file will be opened in Internet Explorer upon
publishing.
Using the Point Stream Viewer

Shader Mode – Sets various shader mode settings. For more information, go to Display tab
page.
Point Size – Defines the drawing size of points.
Reset View – Resets the view to the default view.
Model Information – Displays the Number Of Points and Size Of Model.
Help – Displays the help panel.
About RPS Viewer – Displays the RPS Viewer information.
See Also
File > Publish > ICF

File > Publish > ICF
What
The Publish ICF command publishes selected entities (point cloud, mesh, surface or solid body) in
the .icf file format, enabling them to be viewed by the Internet Explorer browser. The ICF internet
explorer viewer plug-in is automatically installed when a PC is connected to the internet.
Why
The Publish ICF command is useful for:
• Publishing a file into a .icf file to be viewed in the Internet Explorer web browser
How to Use
A. How to publish a file as an .ICF file
1. Go to File > Publish > ICF or click the icon in the toolbar and select point cloud, mesh,
surface or solid body to publish.

2. Click the OK button to publish the mesh. A .html and .icf file will be created that is
viewable in an Internet Explorer browser window. The same mouse and keyboard
controls used to rotate, pan and zoom in the application are also used in the browser.
Display properties of the web browser can be altered by changing the .html file that is
created.
The following table shows the parameter list you can use in the html code.
PARAM NAME VALUE Default Value
IcfPath Location of ICF file
BackgroundColor Three real values between 0 Gray color, the default
and 1, for example "0.5 1.0 0.5" color of xo
ShowGrid "true" or "false" "true"
ShowWorldAxis "true" or "false" "true"
EnableGradientBackgr "true" or "false" "true"
oud
EnableDynamicDraw "true" or "false" "true"
DynamicDisplayRatio "100", "50", "25", "10", "5", "1", "25"
"0.5", "0.1", “auto” (identical
with the value of xo)
StaticDisplayRatio "100", "50", "25", "10", "5", "1", "100"

"0.5", "0.1" (identical with the
value of xo)
ShadingMode One among "point shading", "smooth shading"
"smooth shading", "smooth
shading with point", "smooth
shading with point", "flat
shading", "flat shading with
edge ", and "flat shading with
edge"
(“with point” means whether
or not to show the vertex and
“with edge” means whether or
not to show the edges.)
Light Multiple choice among "light1"
"light1", "light2", "light3" and
"light4" , or "lightall"
ProjectionMode "perspective" or "parallel" "perspective"
ViewOrientation One among "front", "back", "front"
"left", "rignt", "top", "bottom",
"isometric"
EnableViewportLock "true" or "false" "false"
EnableTransparency "true" or "false" "false"
DrawBackface "true" or "false" "true"
BackfaceMode One among "complement "complement color"
color", "as is", and “user
defined”
AnnotAlignMode One among "free" , "snap", and "snap"
"automatic"
DelayLoad true" or "false" “false”
If it is "true", automatic icf
loading and drawing is not
carried out until
LoadDelayedIcf() method is
called.
PointSize Size of vertex point, it should “2”
be integer value and bigger
than 0
ShowModelTree "true" or "false" “false”
(Specifies whether or not to
show Model Tree when
ICFViewer is initially
executed.)
AutoShowHideModelT "true" or "false" “true”

ree (Specifies whether or not to
show Model Tree when
ICFViewer is initially
executed.)
ShowFPS "true" or "false" “false”
(Displays the number of
frames per second)
SHowColorBar "true" or "false" “true”
3. To see the saved file, open the .html file.
If this file is being used for the first time a dialog box used to install the ICF viewer plug-
in will appear. Click Install to install and proceed.
Note:
This plug-in is not supported on 64-bit Internet Explorer.
4. To control viewing:
• Rotate: Right mouse button

• Pan: Right + Left mouse button
• Zoom: Right + Left mouse button or mouse wheel
B. How to share a generated file

Uploading on a website
The simplest way is to upload both the ICF and HTML files to a webhost, usually with an FTP
client, in the same folder. Then link to the HTM file's location.
To store the ICF and HTML file in a different folder, open the HTML file with a text editor and
change the "IcfPath" parameter’s value to correct location (Relative path from the directory of
the HTML file is in).
Inserting into another html file

To insert the ICF view of your model into another web page, just copy tags everything in the
HTML file from "<OBJECT>" to "</OBJECT>", and paste them into another HTML source file.
Options in Detail
Plug-in – Shows the location of the plug-in codebase.

Version – Shows the current version of the .icf viewer.
Width and Height – Shows the width and height of the viewing area of the file.
Fit Screen Size to Window on Resize – Fits the viewer size to the Explorer window size when
the Explorer window size is adjusted.
HTML File Path – Specifies the name and directory of a HTML document to be generated.
Enable Dynamic Draw – Enables the Dynamic Display Ratio.
Dynamic Display Ratio – Changes the amount points drawn while a model is in motion.
Static Display Ratio – Changes the amount points drawn while a model is static.
Geometry Compression Ratio – Defines the resolution of a saved model. When Lossless is set,
geometry will be preserved as it is but will create a larger file size.
Launch Internet Explorer – Specifies if an .icf file will be opened in Internet Explorer upon
publishing.
Using the ICF Viewer
Reset View – Resets the view to the default view.
Fit Zoom – Fits the view to the screen.
Show Model Tree – Shows the model tree.
Auto Show / Hide Model Tree – Shows the collapsible model tree at left side. When the mouse
cursor is hovered over the Show Model Tree, the tree will be displayed.
Viewpoint – Changes the viewing direction of the model.
Point Size – Defines the drawing size of points.
About ICFViewerXO2 Control – Displays the ICF Viewer information.

See Also
File > Publish > Point Stream
7.1.14. File > Capture Screen
What
The Capture Screen command creates a screen shot using a variety of methods. Captured images
are registered in the Image folder.
Why
The Capture Screen command is useful for:
• Capturing a model in its current state

• Capturing an image of a model to use in another program
How to Use
How to capture a file
1. Go to File > Capture Screen or click the icon in the toolbar. The Capture Screen dialog
box will be displayed.
Note:

The captured images saved to the Image Folder can be set to be shown as thumbnails or
filmstrip view.
2. Select Current View as the Target method.
3. Click the OK button to save the image to the Image Folder.
Options in Detail
Current View – Captures the current view.
Entire Model View – Captures the entire model view.
Mouse Dragging Area – Captures the area defined by dragging the mouse drag.
Selected Window – Captures a selected window.
Application Window – Captures an entire application window.
White Background – Sets the background of the capture to white and is available if the Target
is Current View, Entire Model View, or Mouse Dragging Area.
Transparent Background – Sets the background of the capture to transparent and is available
if the Target is Current View, Entire Model View, or Mouse Dragging Area. Transparent
background is preserved when the exported image format is .tiff or .png.
Custom Resolution – Sets a custom resolution with values between 20 and 8192 and is
available if the Target is Current View, Entire Model View, or Mouse Dragging Area.

Show Dialog Tree – Captures the dialog tree and is available if the Target is Current View,
Entire Model View, or Mouse Dragging Area.
Copy To Windows Clipboard – Copies a captured image to the windows clipboard, allowing
pasting into other applications.
See Also
Docking Bars > Image Folder
7.1.15. File > Print
What
The Print command prints the active document.
Why
The Print command is useful for:
• Printing a current project
How to Use
How to print a file
1. Go to File > Print or click the icon in the toolbar, or use the Ctrl + P keyboard shortcut.
2. Select the Printer, Print range and Number of copies.
3. Click OK to complete the command.
See Also
File > Print Preview
File > Print Setup

7.1.16. File > Print Preview
What
The Print Preview command previews an active document before printing.
Why
The Print Preview command is useful for:
• Previewing what a print-out will look like before printing
How to Use
How to print preview a file
1. Go to File > Print Preview or click the icon in the toolbar.
2. A preview of the active document will be shown.
3. Click Print to print the document or Close to exit without printing.
See Also
File > Print
File > Print Setup
7.1.17. File > Print Setup
What
The Print Setup command sets printer settings.
Why
The Print Setup command is useful for:
• Changing printers
• Changing printer properties
• Changing paper size
How to Use
How to use print setup
1. Go to File > Print Setup or click the icon in the toolbar.
2. A preview of the active document will be shown.
3. Change settings and click OK to accept or Cancel to exit Print Setup.
See Also
File > Print
File > Print Preview
7.1.18. File > Preferences
What
The Preferences commands manage global options that affect all objects in the viewing window.
Options are saved to each .xov file and can be used later.
Note:

After updating the application, customized settings files from older versions of the application such as
the Template, MaterialInfo.xmt.rfPreference.xpf, rfSpaceball.cfg, and rfToolBarInfo.cfg can be used again.
These files are located at: ~\Users\User Name\Documents\Product Name
Why
The Preferences commands are useful for:
• Changing general settings

• Changing colors
• Changing line, point, and edge sizes
• Changing hardware settings
• Changing input/output settings
• Changing global tolerances
• Changing general scan pair search options
• Changing locale and language settings
How to Use
How to set up Preferences
1. Note:
When starting the application for the first time the Initial Setup Dialog box will be displayed.
True or False can be selected for the option to Use Previous Version of customized settings.
To enable the option make sure the setting file is located at: C:\Documents and Settings\User
Name\My Documents\Product Name.
The settings for toolbars and customized toolbars can be imported, however the
position of customized toolbars cannot be imported and will be in a hidden state by
default.
Go to File > Preferences.
2. The Preference dialog box will be displayed. Change the Background color to light
green in the Dialog Tree section in the Display tab.

3. Click Apply to apply changes without closing the dialog box. The color of the dialog
tree will become green.
4. Change preferences as desire and click OK to accept or Cancel to exit Preferences.

Preferences can be exported as a .xpf file by using the Export button, and can also be
imported by using the Import button. The Reset button will return the Default
Decimal Place, Default Measure Unit, Thousand Separators preferences as well as all
entities in the display tab to their default states.
Options in Detail
General Tab
Enable Multi-thread – Enables multiple core or multiple thread enabled processors to utilize
multiple threads, speeding up the inspection process.
Pair Geometry Background Generation – Enables the searching of scan pair geometries
automatically in the background. This option is useful for lowering calculation time when

extracting geometries from scan data and inspecting geometric features.
Note:
When this option is set to True, the scan pair geometry search process is automatically performed when
the application assumes that the alignment between scan data and nominal data is satisfied in internal
tolerance criteria.
Template XOV File – Specifies the xov file that is used as the template.
Update Product Automatically – Updates the application automatically when the option is set
to True and the program is launched.
Cache Folder For Unloading And Backup – Specifies a directory for temporary file caching and
is located in the user's temporary directory assigned by the system environment variables by
default.
Note:
When working with large files it is recommended that the cache folder is set to a separate dedicated
hard disk drive. Setting the virtual memory to a separate dedicated hard disk drive can also improve
performance, especially when using Microsoft Windows Vista OS.
Default Folder for User Documents – Specifies a directory for user documents such as logs,
report templates, and presetting information.
Show Support At Startup – Show the Support tab whenever the application is launched when
set to True.
Auto Save Reminder In Every X Minutes – Sets the amount of time in-between save dialog box
reminders.
View Manipulation Style – Selects a view manipulation style (zooming, panning, and rotating)
from either Rapidform, SolidWorks, Siemens NX, Creo(Pro/E), CATIA, PolyWorks, or Geomagic.
Zooming Center Of Mouse Wheel Scroll – Sets the zooming center to the position of the mouse
cursor or the center of the screen.
Rotation Angle Of Down/Up Arrow Key (degree) – Sets the rotation angle in the model view
when using the arrow keys on the keyboard.
Undo Depth (times) – Sets the maximum amount of actions saved for the Undo command.
Default Decimal Place – Sets the number of digits displayed after a decimal point.
Default Input (Scanner) Unit – Sets a default input unit for scanner files loaded into the

application.
Note:
When importing scan files that have a different data unit from the Default Input (Scanner) Unit specified
in the application, a prompt will be displayed to confirm what data unit will be used. The proper unit
for imported files can also be manually changed.
Default Measure Unit – Sets the default measurement units for models.
Thousand Separators – Separates thousands from hundreds for Real Value and Integer Value
numbers that have four or more places to the left of the decimal separator when set to True.
Sound – Specifies the sounds used when the command completes, breaks, or sends a message
and can be either the default application sound or a user-specified sound.
Display Tab
Draw Properties – Sets the color, size, width, backgrounds, and other draw properties of entities
used in the application.
< Model View>

<Section View>
Color Mesh – Determines the color properties of a mesh. The Ambient, Diffuse, and Specular
parameters of a mesh can be set. This option can only be used for mesh with color information.
Dialog Tree – Sets the color, font, and transparency for dialog trees.
Body – Sets the default body material colors.
LiveInspect – Sets the colors that target measurement entities used in LiveInspect represent.

Probe Points – Sets the color that probe point entity acquired in LiveInspect represents.
Ref. Geometry – Sets the default properties for ref. geometry.
3D Sketch – Sets the default properties for sketches.
Manipulator – Sets the default properties for manipulators.

Widget – Sets the font of text in widgets.
Annotation – Sets the color of annotations
GD&T – Sets the colors and size that measurement entities that are used for measuring GD&T
represent.
OpenGL – Sets the default properties for OpenGL.
Triangle Offset – Displays the offset value of triangles when overlapping with other
entities.
Line Offset – Displays offset values of lines when overlapping with other entities.
Point Offset – Displays offset values of points when overlapping with other entities.
When the range value is set as -1.0, the entities will be displayed closer to the viewer. When

the range value is set as 1.0, entities will be displayed farther from the viewer. Using this
option can define the overlapping order of entities.
Hardware Tab
Processor Feature Support – Sets processor feature support properties. SSE2 (Streaming SIMD
Extensions), SSE3 or SSSE3 can be enabled which are provided by a CPU for higher processes.
These optimized settings are automatically set by the application after installing or running the
Performance Profiler (Help > Launch Performance Profiler).
OpenGL Renderer Setup – Sets OpenGL rendering properties.
Use Trackball Depth Average – Calculates the rotation center in the Model View.
Trackball Depth Average Resolution – Sets the panning depth for a trackball in the
Model View.
Frame Buffer Save/Restore – Optimizes rendering and speed settings and are
automatically set by the application after installing or running the Performance Profiler
(Help > Launch Performance Profiler).
Off-Screen Rendering Mode – Determines graphic acceleration by Software or Hardware.

If a graphic device supports hardware acceleration, it is recommended setting this option
as Hardware.
Hardware Multi-thread Rendering Support – Sets multi-threaded rendering support

when Hardware is selected in the Off-Screen Rendering option by selecting true or false.
Set to false when hardware cannot support this option.
Use Video RAM For Rendering Acceleration – Improves mesh rendering performance
higher to easily handle large mesh data using VBO functionality of OpenGL. It is
recommended to turn on this option for most graphic cards when handling millions of
meshes to prevent any abnormal display problems.
Note:
VBO is a functionality that uploads data into the video memory so that the data resides in the
video memory rather than the system memory for direct rendering from graphic cards.
Use Shader Programs For Rendering Acceleration - Enhances the clarity of shading

when a point cloud is shaded on a body.
Scanner Direct Control – Sets frequently used scanners so when the LiveInspect™ command is
used only those scanners will be displayed in the Devices pull down menu.
File I/O Tab

Default Import File Formats – Sets True/False values for importing commonly used file formats.
Only commonly used formats will be displayed in the Import dialog box.
Tolerance Tab
Min. Angle For Linear Dimension (Degree) – Sets the minimum angle for recognizing whether
measured features are parallel or non-parallel. When measuring the linear dimension between
target features using the Smart Dimension command in the 3D GD&T or Section modes, the
minimum angle value is used as criteria for feature recognition.
Note:
When the angle between measured features is smaller than a specified minimum angle value, the
application assumes that the features are parallel and allows the measurement of the linear dimension
on the features.
Use Tolerance Table – Determines whether the pre-defined tolerance table is used to
automatically set a tolerance according to the size of feature while measuring GD&T on features.
Nominal Option Tab

Override Property Values When Importing Nominal Data – Determines whether specified
nominal property values are overridden when importing nominal data regardless of whether
property values were predefined on nominal data or not.
Scan Pair Option – Sets the option for searching scan pairs.
Auto Thickness (+) – Determines whether to apply a zone thickness automatically
constructed to the size of feature along a positive direction of the normal on target face.
Note:

The thickness is a geometric volume constructed from nominal target face along its normal
direction. It is used to search scan pair points during an inspection process.
Thickness Value (+) (mm) – Sets the thickness value. The value must be set by
millimeter (“mm”) unit.
Auto Thickness (-) – Determines whether to apply a zone thickness automatically

constructed to the size of feature along a negative direction of the normal on target face.
Thickness Value (-) (mm) – Sets the thickness value. The value must be set by
millimeter (“mm”) unit.
Shrinkage (mm) – Sets the shrinkage value to ignore the outlier of target face when
constructing a zone thickness on the face.
Use Normal Difference – Determines whether to search scan pair points comparing
normal difference between target face and scan points.
Normal Difference – Sets the angle in order to compare the difference of normal
directions between target face and scan points.
Locale Tab
Language – Sets the desired language within the application. Installed languages will be listed.
Note:
Language packs are used to enable functionalities with specific languages and locales within the
application.
When installing Geomagic product, the English language pack will be installed by default and a
language pack will be installed based on the language of the OS system. The installed language pack
based on the OS will be the default language for the application but it can be easily changed.
To use other languages instead of the default installed languages, additional language packs need to
be installed.
How to install language packs
1) Insert the installation DVD into the DVD-ROM drive.

2) Browse the DVD-ROM directory and then go to the Language folder, double-click on the setup.exe
file within the desire language pack folder.
3) After installation is complete, run the application.
4) Go to File > Preferences, click the Locale tab, and choose desire language in the Language option.
5) Close the application then restart it.
How to download language packs
If the Geomagic product is installed using the Auto Update function, language packs will need to be
downloaded to use another language within the application.
1) Go to website: http://www.rapidform.com/softwareupdate
2) Download the language pack zip file in the Geomagic Verify list.
3) Unzip the zip file.
4) Double-click the setup.exe file and follow the instructions.
Locale Format – Sets the display format of numbers and time.
See Also
Docking Bars > Display
7.1.19. File > Summary Info
What
The Summary Info command allows for the input of summary information for a model.
Note:
While opening a saved file, the summary information shows if the Show Preview & Info Box option is
checked in the Open dialog box.
Why
The Summary Info command is useful for:
• Changing basic file summary information

How to Use
How to change summary information
1. Go to File > Summary Info.
2. The Summary Information dialog box is displayed.
3. Change summary information as desire and click OK to accept or Cancel to exit the
Summary Information command.
7.1.20. File > Recent Files
What
The Recent Files command lists the recently used files in the application.
Why
The Recent File command is useful for:
• Conveniently viewing recently used files
How to Use
How to view and open recent files
1. Go to File > Recent Files. Mouse-over the command and a black arrow pointing to the

right will be displayed showing recently opened files.
2. Select a file to open it.
See Also
File > Open
7.1.21. File > Exit
What
The Exit command closes the application.
Why
The Exit command is useful for:
• Closing the application after a project is finished

• Closing the application when the system is not in use to free computing resources
How to Use
How to exit the application
1. Go to File > Exit.
2. If there are unsaved changes a dialog box will be displayed.
3. Save files as desire and click OK to accept or Cancel to exit the Exit command.
See Also
File > Save
File > Save As

7.2. Select
When most of commands are executed, the selection mode is automatically activated. The Select
menu features advanced selection tools, which allows the selection of various entities in the Model
View.
Overall
• Mode
Configures the shape of a selection tool.
• All
Selects all entities.
• None
De-selects all entities.
• Inverse
Selects the inverse of selected entities.
Specific Entities
• Custom Region
Selects an area by user selected vertices.
• Boundary Entities
Selects poly-vertices or poly-faces around selected boundaries.
• Entities Around Edges/Faces

Selects poly-vertices or poly-faces around selected entities.
Area
• Enlarge
Enlarges a selection by a specified depth or angle.
• Shrink
Shrinks selected poly-faces by a specified depth.
Convert Selection
• Convert Current Selection
Converts entities to another entity type.
Selection Standard
• By Criteria
Selects components of a face, boundary, curve, or poly-face entities based on edge length, area
or angle, as well as other components.
• By Color
Selects poly-faces or poly-vertices by color.
Exterior selection
• Exterior Poly-Face
Selects exterior regions of poly-faces on mesh data.
Filters can help make selections of entities easier.
Select Filter
Select various kinds of entities within in the application.
(Filter Bodies) - Allows the selection of bodies only.
(Filter Meshes/Point Clouds) - Allows the selection of meshes and point clouds only.
(Filter Faces/Regions) - Allows the selection of faces and regions only.
(Filter Boundaries) - Allows the selection of boundaries only.
(Filter Edges) - Allows the selection of edges and curves only.
(Filter Vertices) - Allows the selection of vertices and points only.
(Filter Poly-Faces) - Allows the selection of poly-faces only.
(Filter Poly-Vertices) - Allows the selection of vertices and points only.
(Filter Sections) - Allows the selection of sections and section edges only.
(Filter Mesh Boundaries) - Allows the selection of mesh boundaries only.
(Filter Ref. Geometries) - Allows the selection of ref. geometries only.
(Filter GD&Ts) - Allows the selection of GD&Ts only.

(Filter Tags) - Allows the selection of tags only.
(Clear All Filters) - Clears all selection filters (Shift + F).
Note:
When a selection filter is on but the cursor is over an empty area, an icon ( ) beside the cursor will
appear.
When the Mode is changed, the Selection Filters will be reset.
7.2.1. Select > Mode
What
The Select Mode command configures the shape of the selection tool.
Why
The Select Mode command is useful for:
• Changing the shape of the selection tool to provide flexibility in selecting entities
How to Use
How to use the selection tool
1. Go to Select > Mode or click the icon in the toolbar.
2. Choose the selection mode type.
3. Drag the selection tool over entities to select. To add a current selection to selections
already made, use the Shift button. To remove a current selection from selections
already made, use the Ctrl button.

Options in Detail
Note:
All selection modes are able to select poly-vertices and poly-faces. The Rectangle selection is the
default selection mode in the application and can select any entities.
Line – Selects a straight line by clicking at one end of a supposed line and dragging to another.
Note:
The width of a line can be edited by using Alt + left mouse buttons together.
Rectangle – Selects a region by dragging from one corner of an imaginary box to the opposite
diagonal corner.
Circle – Selects a circular region by clicking in the center of a supposed circle and dragging
outward.
Note:
The radius of a circle can be edited by using Alt + left mouse buttons together.
Polyline – Selects the inside of a polygon by picking points in the viewing window and clicking
the RMB or double-clicking the LMB to finalize.

Freehand – Selects an irregularly shaped region by tracing a perimeter with the mouse while
dragging.
Paint Brush – Selects regions that the mouse cursor covers during the dragging.
Note:
The range of the paint brush can be edited by using Alt + left mouse buttons together.
Flood Fill – Selects poly-faces within same boundary.
Extend To Similar – Select areas that consist of similar features.
Extend To Sudden Change – Selects areas that have similar curvatures.

Box – Configures the shape of the selection tool as a box.
Cylinder – Configures the shape of the selection tool as a cylinder.
Sphere – Configures the shape of the selection tool as a sphere.
Visible Only – Decides whether selecting can take place on a visible area only or in space.
Position Snap – Snaps to meshes or bodies when an object is picked. The snap distance and
snap plane can be defined in the bottom toolbar.
7.2.2. Select > All
What
The Select All command selects all entities.

Why
The Select All command is useful for:
• Selecting all entities in the model view
How to Use
How to select all entities
1. Go to Select > All – Poly-Faces in the Scan mode, click the icon in the toolbar, or use
the Shift + A keyboard shortcut. All poly-faces can also be selected by using the RMB
(Right Mouse Button) and selecting all in the pop-up menu.
2. All poly-faces will be selected.
See Also
Select > None
Select > Inverse
7.2.3. Select > None
What
The Select None command de-selects all entities.

Why
The Select None command is useful for:
• Selecting all entities in the model view
How to Use
How to de-select all entities
1. Select poly-faces in the model.
2. Go to Select > None – Poly-Faces, click the icon in the toolbar, or use the Shift + N
keyboard shortcut. All poly-faces can also be de-selected by using the RMB (Right
Mouse Button) and selecting none in the pop-up menu.
3. No poly-faces will be selected.
See Also
Select > All
Select > Inverse
7.2.4. Select > Inverse
What
The Select Inverse command selects the inverse of selected entities.

Why
The Select Inverse command is useful for:
• Selecting the inverse of already selected entities
How to Use
How to select the inverse of entities
1. Select poly-faces in the model.
2. Go to Select > Inverse – Poly-Faces, click the icon in the toolbar, or use the Shift + I
keyboard shortcut. The inverse can also be selected by using the RMB (Right Mouse
Button) and selecting the inverse in the pop-up menu.
3. The inverse of the originally selected poly-faces will be selected.
See Also
Select > All
Select > None
7.2.5. Select > Custom Region
What
The Select Custom Region command selects an area made by user selected vertices.

Why
The Select Custom Region command is useful for:
• Selecting or de-selecting complex regions
How to Use
How to select a custom region
1. Go to Select > Custom Region or click the icon in the toolbar.
Note:
The Custom Region command can only be used in the Scan mode.
2. Select the Add option. Pick poly-vertices to form a region.
3. Click on the starting node or use the Close Path button to close the path.
4. Click OK to finish the command.
Options in Detail
Custom Path – Creates a custom path.
Note:
A custom path drawn in a counterclockwise direction selects an inner region, but creating a custom
path in a clockwise direction selects an outer region. The Undo Last Path button is used to cancel the
last selection made, the Close Path button to close and finalize the custom path, and the Reset

button to discard all selections made.
Add – Adds a selected region to existing selections.
Remove – Removes a selected region from the existing selections.
Inverse – Selects the inverse regions of existing selections.
See Also
Select > All
Select > None
Select > Inverse
7.2.6. Select > Boundary Entities
What
The Select Boundary Entities command selects poly-vertices or poly-faces around selected
boundaries.
Why
The Select Boundary Entities command is useful for:
• Selecting complex regions around a boundary
How to Use
How to select boundary entities
1. Go to Select > Boundary Entities or click the icon in the toolbar.
2. Change the Type To Select to Poly-Faces and select the boundary.

3. Click OK to finish the command. Poly-faces around the boundary will be selected.
Options in Detail
Type To Select – Chooses whether to select poly-faces or poly-vertices around a boundary.
Seed Boundaries – Selects boundaries on a mesh in the model view.
See Also
Select > All
Select > None
Select > Inverse
7.2.7. Select > Entities Around Edges/Faces
What
The Select Entities Around Edges/Faces command selects poly-vertices or poly-faces around
selected entities.
Why
The Select Entities Around Edges/Faces command is useful for:
• Selecting entities around created edges and faces

How to Use
How to select entities around poly-faces
1. Go to Select > Entities Around Edges/Faces or click the icon in the toolbar.
Note:
The Entities Around Edges/Faces command can only be used in Scan modes when scan data
is mesh.
2. Select a face on a body for the Seed Entities. Change the option to Poly-Faces.
3. Click OK to finish the command. Poly-faces around the face will be selected.
Options in Detail
Seed Entities – Selects entities (curves, edges, faces) that will be used to find poly-vertices or
poly-faces in the model view.
Options – Chooses Poly-Faces or Poly-Vertices are the final selected entity type.
See Also
Select > All
Select > None

Select > Inverse
7.2.8. Select > Enlarge
What
The Enlarge command enlarges a selection by a specified depth or angle. Depending on the type
of selected entity, the options in the dialog tree will be shown differently. The command will not be
available until entities have been selected.
Why
The Enlarge command is useful for:
• Selecting areas that would be difficult to select manually
How to Use
How to select entities using the Enlarge command
1. Select faces. Poly-faces, Poly-vertices, Faces, Edges and Regions can be selected for the
Enlarge command.
2. Go to Select > Enlarge or click the icon in the toolbar. Change the Angle to 15 degrees.
3. Click OK to finish the command. Poly-faces around the face will be selected.

Options in Detail
Type To Select – Chooses entity type to select.
Poly-Faces/Poly-Vertices/Faces/Edges/Region – Shows currently selected entities.
Depth – Expands the selection of entities by a specified depth.
Depth 2
Angle – Enlarges regions by a specified angle for poly-faces and poly-vertices.
Initial Selection Angle: 25 Angle: 60
Angle Tolerance – Limits the angle tolerance when comparing other neighboring entities
when an edge or face has been selected.
Forward Depth – Selects more edges when an edge or face is selected.
Forward Depth from the Initial Selection
Backward Depth – Selects more edges in the opposite direction from Forward Depth when
an edge or face is selected.

Forward Depth from the Initial Selection
See Also
Select > All
Select > None
Select > Inverse
Select > Shrink
7.2.9. Select > Shrink
What
The Shrink command shrinks selected poly-faces by a specified depth. The command will not be
available until entities have been selected.
Why
The Shrink command is useful for:
• Shrinking a selected area that might otherwise be difficult to do manually
How to Use
How to select shrink entities
1. Go to Select > Shrink or click the icon in the toolbar. The pop-up menu can also be used
after selecting poly-faces.

2. Change Depth to 1.
Options in Detail
Type To Select – Chooses entity type to select.
Poly-Faces/Poly-Vertices – Shows currently selected entities.
Depth – Shrinks the selection of entities by a specified depth.
See Also
Select > All
Select > None
Select > Inverse
Select > Enlarge
7.2.10. Select > Convert Current Selection
What
The Convert Current Selection command converts entities to another entity type. The command
will not be available until entities have been selected.
Why
The Convert Current Selection command is useful for:

• Converting one type of entity to another quickly and effectively
How to Use
How to convert entities
1. Select an edge to convert to a vertex.
2. Go to Select > Convert Current Selection or click the icon in the toolbar. The pop-up
menu can also be used after selecting poly-faces or poly-vertices.
3. Click OK to complete the command. The edge will be changed to a vertex.
Options in Detail
From – Shows selected entity type.
To – Shows entity type for conversion.
Conversion List
From To
Poly-Vertex Poly-Face
Poly-Faces Poly-Vertex
Region Poly-Face
Boundaries Poly-Face
Body Face Body Edge
Body Edge Body Vertex
3D Curve 3D Node Point

7.2.11. Select > By Criteria
What
The Select By Criteria command selects components of faces, edges, boundary entities based on
tolerance, and zones, as well as other components.
Why
The Select By Criteria command is useful for:
• Selecting large amounts of components based on type quickly
How to Use
A. How to select components by criteria in the Scan mode
1. Go to Select > By Criteria or click the icon in the toolbar.
2. Set Type To Select as Faces.
3. Select Sphere as the Pair Geometry Type.
4. Click OK to complete the command. Spherical entities will be selected.
Options in Detail
Type To Select – Chooses selection criteria. Faces, Edges, and Boundaries of a body can be
chosen.
Tolerance – Selects entities by tolerance. The value will be changed depending on the
tolerance set in the color bar.

Zone – Selects entities by zones. When a face on a nominal data is selected, the Properties
shows Zone Thickness(+), Zone Thickness(-), Zone Shrinkage and Normal Difference. This
option selects entities based on the following sub options:
+Thickness – Selects entities by values From and To along a Zone Thickness(+).
-Thickness – Selects entities by values From and To along a Zone Thickness(-). This
option is only activated when Type To Select is set to Faces.
Shrinkage – Selects entities by values From and To along a Zone Shrinkage.
Angle Exclusion – Selects entities by values From and To along a Normal Difference. This
option is only activated when Type To Selected is set to Faces.
Pair Geometry Type – Selects entities by pair geometry type.
See Also
Select > By Color
7.2.12. Select > By Color
What
The Select By Color command selects poly-faces or poly-vertices by color. The command is enabled
when poly-faces or poly-vertices include color or texture information and can be used in the Scan
mode.
Why
The Select By Color command is useful for:
• Selecting poly-faces or poly-vertices by color
How to Use
How to select entities by color
1. Enter Scan mode.

2. Go to Select > By Color or click the icon in the toolbar.
3. Change the Type To Select option to Poly-Faces. Click the Pick Color button and
extract a color from the mesh. Change the Fuse option to 200.
4. Click the Add Color button to extract similar colors on the mesh.
Options in Detail
Type To Select – Selects a type of entity to be selected.
Color – Selects colors allows the use of the Pick Color, Add Color, and Remove Color buttons
to select colors.
Fuse – Selects the level of diffusion when selecting similar colors.
Add – Adds a selection when Poly-Faces or Poly-Vertices are selected before using the Select
By Color command.
Remove – Removes a selection when Poly-Faces or Poly-Vertices are selected before using the
Select By Color command.
Replace – Replaces a current selection when Poly-Faces or Poly-Vertices are selected before

using the Select By Color command.
See Also
Select > By Criteria
7.2.13. Select > Exterior Poly-Face
What
The Select Exterior Poly-Face command selects exterior regions of poly-faces on mesh data. It can
be used on volume reconstructed mesh or mesh with multiple layers.
Why
The Select Exterior Poly-Face command is useful for:
• Separating exterior poly-faces from interior poly-faces
How to Use
How to select exterior poly-faces
1. Enter the Scan mode. Go to Select > Exterior Poly-Face or click the icon in the toolbar.
Mesh that has poly-faces inside and outside such as a model captured by a CT scanner
can be used.
2. Set Initial Radius to 10, Expand Radius to 5, and Tolerance to 0.3.

Options in Detail
Initial Radius – Changes the initial radius value used to detect exterior poly-faces.
Expand Radius – Changes the expanded radius value from a seed region, which is an initially
selected point or face.
Tolerance – Changes the interruption areas caused by noise on mesh.
See Also
Select > All
Select > None
Select > Inverse
7.3. Edit
The Edit menu features commands to handle entities and operation.
Repeating Operation
• Undo & Redo
Cancels a previously applied operation. To restore an operation after using the Undo command,
use the Redo command.
• Repeat Last Command

Applies the last operation used.

Editing Entities
• Cut, Copy, Paste and Delete
Cuts, Copies, Pastes, and Deletes selected entities.
Navigating Inspection History

• Rebuild, Rebuild Current Mode Only
Rebuilds a model with the current version of the application based on its inspection history.
• Rollback, Roll Forward, Roll To Start, Roll To Next Alignment, and Roll To End
Navigates an inspection history to return to a certain point of an inspection feature.
Showing or Hiding Features in History

• Suppress and Unsuppress
Temporarily removes and brings back features from a model.
Editing Feature
• Feature
Edits a selected feature.
7.3.1. Edit > Undo
What
The Undo command undoes previous operations.
Why
The Undo command is useful for:
• Reversing mistakes made

• Going back to a previous point

How to Use
How to undo an action
1. Go to Edit > Undo or use the Ctrl + Z keyboard shortcut.
Note:
The depth of the Undo command can be changed by going to File > Preferences. The default
depth is 50.
See Also
Edit > Redo
7.3.2. Edit > Redo
What
The Redo command reverses the Undo command or advances operations to a more current state
step-by-step. This command is opposite of the undo command.
Why
The Redo command is useful for:
• Advancing operations to a more current state

• Reversing the Undo command
How to Use
How to undo an action
1. Go to Edit > Redo or use the Ctrl + Y keyboard shortcut.
See Also
Edit > Undo

7.3.3. Edit > Repeat Last Command
What
The Repeat Last Command command repeats the previously used command.
Why
The Repeat Last Command command is useful for:
• Repeating the last command made if it is going to be used often in a row
How to Use
How to repeat the last command
1. Go to Edit > Repeat Last Command or use the Ctrl + Space keyboard shortcut.
See Also
Edit > Undo
Edit > Redo
7.3.4. Edit > Cut
What
The Cut command deletes an entity and copies it, saving it to the clipboard to be pasted.
Why
The Cut command is useful for:
• Removing an entity to use for another time or place

How to Use
How to cut an entity
1. Select an entity to cut.
2. Go to Edit > Cut or use the Ctrl + X keyboard shortcut.
See Also
Edit > Paste
Edit > Copy
7.3.5. Edit > Copy
What
The Copy command copies a selected entity, saving it to the clipboard to be pasted.
Why
The Copy command is useful for:
• Creating a copy of an existing entity to be used at a later time or place
How to Use
How to copy an entity
1. Select an entity to copy.
Note:
3D curves and Ref. Geometries can be copied in the default mode.
2. Go to Edit > Copy or use the Ctrl + C keyboard shortcut.
See Also

Edit > Cut
Edit > Paste
7.3.6. Edit > Paste
What
The Paste command copies a selected entity, saving it to the clipboard to be pasted.
Why
The Paste command is useful for:
• Pasting a cut or copied entity
How to Use
How to paste an entity
1. Select an entity and use the Cut or Copy command.
2. Go to Edit > Paste or use the Ctrl + V keyboard shortcut.
See Also
Edit > Cut
Edit > Copy
7.3.7. Edit > Delete
What
The Delete command deletes selected entities.
Why
The Delete command is useful for:

• Removing unnecessary entities
How to Use
How to delete an entity
1. Select an entity.
2. Go to Edit > Delete or use the Delete key on the keyboard.
See Also
Edit > Undo
Edit > Redo
7.3.8. Edit > Rebuild
What
The Rebuild command rebuilds an inspection project using changed options and inspection
parameters.
Why
The Rebuild command is useful for:
• Rebuilding an inspection project and updating inspection results using changed options or
inspection parameters
How to Use
How to rebuild an inspection project
1. Go to Edit > Rebuild or use the icon in the toolbar.
Note:
When the Rebuild command performs, only the features that have a rebuild mark will be
influenced by the rebuilding and their results will be updated.

See Also
Edit > Rebuild Current Mode Only
7.3.9. Edit > Rebuild Current Mode Only
What
The Rebuild Current Mode Only command rebuilds inspection features only relative to the current
mode using changed options and inspection parameters.
Why
The Rebuild Current Mode Only command is useful for:
• Rebuilding inspection features relative to the current mode and updating the results using
changed options or inspection parameters
How to Use
How to rebuild a model in the current mode
1. In the current mode, go to Edit > Rebuild Current Mode Only or use the icon in the
toolbar.

See Also
Edit > Rebuild
7.3.10. Edit > Rollback
What
The Rollback command temporarily reverts a model to an earlier state. New features can be added
or existing features can be edited.
Why
The Rollback command is useful for:
• Going back to previous step in the inspection process
How to Use
How to rollback a model
1. Select an entity in the feature tree.
2. Go to Edit > Rollback or use the icon in the toolbar. All entities after the rollback entity
will be dimmed in the model tree.
3. Add a new feature such as a Plane1.
4. Select the bottom feature and go to Edit > Roll To End to roll to the end of the
inspection history with the added Datum Alignment in the model.
See Also

Edit > Roll Forward
Edit > Roll To End
7.3.11. Edit > Roll Forward
What
The Roll Forward command rolls a model forward step-by-step after executing the Rollback
command. New features can be added or existing features can be edited.
Why
The Roll Forward command is useful for:
• Going forward step-by-step after using the Rollback command to see changes
How to Use
How to Roll Forward a model
1. After executing the Rollback command, select an entity in the feature tree.
2. Go to Edit > Roll Forward or use the icon in the toolbar.
See Also
Edit > Rollback
Edit > Roll To End
7.3.12. Edit > Roll To Start
What
The Roll To Start command rolls a model to the starting state of nominal and scan data. New
features can be added or existing features can be edited in this state.

Why
The Roll To Start command is useful for:
• Going to the starting feature of a model
How to Use
How to roll a model to the beginning
1. Select a feature in the Inspection Tree.
2. Go to Edit > Roll To Start or click the icon in the toolbar.
See Also
Edit > Roll To End
7.3.13. Edit > Roll To Next Alignment
What
The Roll To Next Alignment command rolls a model to the next alignment state in an inspection
history after executing the Rollback command.
Why
The Roll To Next Alignment command is useful for:
• Going to the next alignment state in a inspection history after using the Rollback command
How to Use
How to roll a model to the next alignment
1. After executing the Rollback command, go to Edit > Roll To Next Alignment or click
the icon in the toolbar.

See Also
Edit > Rollback
Edit > Roll Forward
7.3.14. Edit > Roll To End
What
The Roll To End command rolls a model to the end of the inspection history after executing the
Rollback command.
Why
The Roll To End command is useful for:
• Going to the end of the inspection history after using the Rollback command
How to Use
How to roll a model to the end
1. After executing the Rollback command, go to Edit > Roll To End or use the icon in the
toolbar.
See Also
Edit > Rollback
Edit > Roll Forward
7.3.15. Edit > Suppress
What
The Suppress command suppresses a feature, temporarily removing it from the model.

Why
The Suppress command is useful for:
• Seeing and working with a model without a specific feature
How to Use
How to suppress a feature
1. Select an inspection feature in the Inspection Feature tree.
2. Go to Edit > Suppress, or click the icon in the toolbar.
3. Suppressed entities will be dimmed in the Model Tree.
See Also
Edit > Unsuppress
7.3.16. Edit > Unsuppress
What
The Unsuppress command unsuppresses a feature after using the Suppress command.
Why
The Unsuppress command is useful for:
• Unsuppressing a feature

How to Use
How to unsuppress a feature
1. Select a suppressed entity in the feature tree.
2. Go to Edit > Unsuppress, or click the icon in the toolbar.
See Also
Edit > Suppress
7.3.17. Edit > Feature
What
The Feature command allows the editing of a selected feature.
Why
The Feature command is useful for:
• Selecting and editing a feature
How to Use
How select a feature
1. Select an inspection feature in the Inspection Feature tree.
2. Go to Edit > Feature, or click the icon in the toolbar. The Whole Deviation dialog tree
will be displayed, enabling the editing of parameters of the entity.

7.4. Insert
The Insert menu features various commands used to generate or import entities and register them
as features with a generation history in the Inspection Feature.
Alignment
• Align
Aligns nominal data and scan data.
Section
• Section
Computes sections of design data and scan data.
• Multiple Sections
Computes multiple sections of design data and scan data.
Curve
• Curve
Enters the Curve mode to generate and edit curves.
Ref. Geometry
• Ref. Geometry
Creates Ref. Geometry such as cylinder axes, circle centers, and lines that intersect two planes.

3D GD&T
• 3D GD&T
Enters the 3D GD&T mode to generate GD&Ts and datums.
Inspection result
• Deviation
Inspects deviation on 3D digital data.
• Plot
Analyzes the thickness, curvature and angle of scan data and displays the results as a color map.
Active Scan Data

• Active Scan Data
Activates specific scan data to calculate GD&Ts and deviation.
Scanner Control
• Scanner Direct Control
Enables the use of various scanning devices directly within the application.
Note
• Note
Adds tags with custom text.
7.4.1. Insert > Align
The Align command aligns nominal data and scan data.

Initial Alignment and Best Fitting
• Auto
Aligns scan data to nominal data automatically using features on a part, and applies the best fit
algorithm for a finer alignment.
• Best Fit
Aligns scan data to nominal data using the overlapping regions between them.
Geometry Based Alignments

• RPS
Aligns scan data to nominal data by matching pairs of reference positions under specified
constraint conditions.
• Datum
Aligns scan data to nominal data by matching geometric features.
• 3-2-1
Aligns scan data to nominal data using vertices, a planar entity, and a linear entity to lock six
degrees of movement.
Manual Alignments
• Coordinate
Aligns an existing scan data or the coordinates of measurement device to a desired coordinate
system by using 3-2-1 method or defining X-Y-Z coordinates.
• Transform
Roughly aligns scan data to nominal data or transforms a matrix.
• Adaptive
Aligns scan data to nominal data by picking N points on a physical part based on pre-planned
measurement requirements.
• Homing
Aligns scan data to nominal data by picking N points on a physical part based on pre-planned
measurement requirements and minimizes the deviation in the same positions by repeated
measurements.

What
The Auto Alignment command aligns scan data to nominal data automatically using features on a
part, and applies the best fit algorithm for a finer alignment. This command is frequently used for an
initial alignment before using other alignment methods.
Nominal data uses the world coordinate system, but the origin of scan data is very different from
those coordinates. The first step of alignment is to roughly align scan data to nominal data. When a
scan data file is only a partial scan of a part or is symmetrical in shape, the size between the scan
data and nominal data can be very different and rough alignment may fail.
Nominal and Scan After Auto Alignment
Why
The Auto Align command is useful for:
• Initial alignment of distant scan data

• Aligning fully scanned data automatically
• Aligning partially scanned data automatically
How to Use
A. How to use the auto alignment to align scan data to nominal data
2. Go to Insert > Align > Auto or click the icon in the toolbar.

Note:
After alignment is completed, the statistical deviation values for parameters such Min., Max.,
Avg., RMS, and Std. Dev. will be displayed in the tabular view.
B. How to align scan data by feature recognition

2. Go to Insert > Align > Auto or click the icon in the toolbar.
3. Check the Enhance Alignment Accuracy With Feature Recognition option.
Options in Detail
Methods

Enhance Alignment Accuracy With Feature Recognition – Intelligently analyzes features on
scan data and matches them to nominal data. This option may take more time than a rough
alignment for larger files. If this option fails, the application will still internally perform
alignment. For scan data that covers an entire nominal data or has enough features, it is not
necessary to use this option.
Apply To Active Scan Data Only – Aligns only active scan data. For more detail about active
scan data, go to Insert > Active Scan Data.
See Also
What
The Align Best Fit command aligns scan data to nominal data using the overlapping regions
between them. This command is most effectively used after a rough alignment using the Insert >
Align > Auto or Insert > Align > Transform command.
Nominal and Scan After Best Fit Alignment
Why
The Align Best Fit command is useful for:
• Aligning scan data to minimize deviation in overall shape

• Precise alignments

• Aligning scan data by constraining rotation and translation
• Aligning scan data using only partial area calculation
How to Use
A. How to align scan data to nominal data by using best fit alignment
1. Import nominal and scan data. Use rough alignment methods such as Insert > Align >
Auto and Insert > Align > Transform.
2. Go to Insert > Align > Best Fit or click the icon in the toolbar.
Note:
B. How to align scan data to nominal data by using best fit alignment
with partial selections
1. Import nominal and scan data. Use a rough alignment method such as Insert > Align >
Transform to overlap them.

2. Go to Insert > Align > Best Fit or click the icon in the toolbar.
3. Check the Use Selected Data Only option and select faces to use for the best fit
calculation.
Options in Detail
Default Options
Sampling Ratio – Samples data points by a specified value. When the ratio is 100%, all selected
data will be used. When the ratio is 50%, half of the selected data will be used.
Max Iteration Count – Determines a value that will limit the number of times a registration
iterates.
Max Average Deviation – Determines a value as deviation criteria used to judge if a

registration result is satisfactory. The application will attempt to make the average deviation of
a final model less than this value within the Max. Iteration Count. The Estimate button on
the right side automatically calculates a value.
Constraint Option
Global Coordinate – Selects a reference direction for the translation and rotation of scan data.
User Defined Coordinate – Selects a ref. coordinate that will serve as the reference direction
of a translation and rotation of scan data.

Lock Translation – Locks a direction of movement during best fit alignment.
Lock Rotation – Locks a direction of rotation during best fit alignment.
More Options
Use Only Reliable Scan Data – Ignores poly-vertices that have been classified as noise during
alignment. Noisy data is unfiltered data that is away from the average deviation between
nominal and scan data.
Use Selected Data Only – Aligns only using a selected faces or regions on nominal data.
See Also

What
The Align RPS aligns scan data to nominal data by matching pairs of reference positions under
specified constraint conditions. RPS stands for Reference Point System. It is defined by points such
as centers of circles, slots, spheres, or other canonical geometric shapes.
Nominal and Scan After RPS Alignment
Why
The Align RPS command is useful for:
• Aligning sheet metal parts that have holes or slots

• Aligning parts that do not have clearly defined geometric features
How to Use
How to align a sheet metal part using the center of circles
1. Import nominal and scan data. Use a rough alignment using Insert > Align > Auto.
Three circles on the model will be used for RPS alignment.

2. Use the Align RPS command by going to Insert > Align > RPS or by clicking the icon
in the toolbar. Select the first circle on the nominal data and set X, Y, and Z to the Strong
Minimize option.
3. Select the second circle and set the Tolerance to 0.5 and X, Y, and Z to Default
Minimize to minimize the deviation between nominal and scan points along the axis.
4. Select the third and set the Tolerance to 0.5 and X, Y, and Z to Default Minimize.

The result will be displayed with annotations on each position. Pass and Fail will be
displayed in green or red based on the specified tolerance value. The names of tags can
be changed in Properties and Tabular View panels.
Note:

The deviations in all coordinate directions are displayed in annotations. The deviations
in a constrained coordinate direction will be highlighted in bold type. The red circle in
the following image shows that the X and Y directions are not constrained but Z is.
Options in Detail
Select Entities
RPS Pairs – Selects an entity to be used as RPS.
RPS Pair Options

Weight – Specifies a value used to attract a registration solution towards a reference position.
The bigger the value, the more a registration will be attracted towards a corresponding
reference position.
Tolerance – Specifies an allowable deviation amount.
Ref. Coordinate – Specifies a ref. coordinate for reference points that can be used as a local
coordinate instead of world coordinates to constrain a direction. If no coordinate is specified
the world coordinate will be used.
Additional Constraints – Sets a matching condition for a reference position point.

The None option will ignore a value. This value may be changed by constraint conditions from

other points connected on a rigid body.
The Default Minimize option will move to minimize the deviation of a direction.
The Strong Minimize option will maintain the position of a scan point to the nominal position.
The Preserve Scan Pos. option will fix the position of a scan point.
Note:
Examples of RPS Constraints are shown in the cases below:
Case1: X Axis= None, Y Axis= None
A scan point will not be joined in a calculation and there will be no change.
Case 2: X Axis= None, Y Axis= Default Minimize
The X position will not be joined in a calculation; however the Y deviation will be minimized to the
nominal point.
Case 3: X Axis= Default Minimize, Y Axis= Default Minimize
Both the X and Y deviations will be minimized.

Case 4: X Axis= Strong Minimize, Y Axis= Default Minimize
The X position will be same as the nominal point and the Y deviation will be minimized.
Case 5: X Axis= Preserve Scan Pos., Y Axis= Default Minimize
The X position of a scan point will be fixed and the Y deviation will be minimized.
More Options
Max Iteration Count – Specifies a maximum number of calculations used to find a proper
alignment solution.
See Also

What
The Align Datums command aligns scan data to nominal data by matching geometric features.
Nominal and Scan After Datum Alignment
Why
The Align Datums command is useful for:
• Aligning scan data to nominal data by matching datums

• Aligning scan data to nominal data by matching geometric features
How to Use
How to align scan data to nominal data using geometries
1. Import nominal and scan data. Use a rough alignment such as Insert > Align > Auto.
2. Use the Datum Align command by going to Insert > Align > Datum or by clicking the
icon in the toolbar.

3. Select a cylinder on the nominal data.
Note:
The manipulators for constrained axis and rotation will become gray whenever geometric
features are selected.
4. If the scan data is reversed use the Flip button.
5. Select a side plane on the nominal data.
6. Select the top plane on the nominal data.

Options in Detail
Select Entities
Datum Pair – Selects an entity from the nominal data to be used make a datum pair.
Datum Options
Type – Shows datum type when an entity in a datum pair is selected.
Flip – Reverses the direction of scan data.
More Options
alignment solution.
Show Manipulator – Shows model manipulators on-screen. A gray manipulator means it has
been constrained.
Check Orthogonal – Inputs an angle value inside the Angle Tolerance box. The application
will check if a picked datum pair is orthogonal to an existing datum pair within the specified
angle tolerance. Any non-orthogonal datum pairs will generate an error message.

See Also
What
The Align 3-2-1 command aligns scan data to nominal data using vertices, a planar entity, and a
linear entity to lock six degrees of movement. 3-2-1 alignment is the minimum number of contact
points necessary to locate a rectangular part in three different planes. 3 points are used to define a
primary plane, 2 points define a secondary plane perpendicular to the primary plane, and the last
single point defines the last plane that is perpendicular to both the primary and secondary plane.
Nominal and Scan After 3-2-1 Alignment
Why
The Align 3-2-1 command is useful for:
• Aligning a rectangular part using a vertex, a planar entity and a linear entity
How to Use
How to use 3-2-1 alignment to align scan data to nominal
1. Import nominal and scan data. Use a rough alignment such as Insert > Align > Auto.
2. Use the Align 3-2-1 command by going to Insert > Align > 3-2-1 or by clicking the icon
in the toolbar.
3. Select the Plane button and select a plane on the nominal data to define the Z
direction.
4. Click the Vector button and select a cylinder on the nominal data to define the Y
direction. Use the Reverse Direction button if the scan direction is flipped.
5. Click the Position button and select a sphere on the nominal data to define the X
direction.
Options in Detail
Select Entities
Plane – Selects a planar entity.

Vector – Selects a linear entity or an entity that has an axis.
Position – Selects a point or an entity which has a center point.
More Options
alignment solution.
Show Manipulator – Shows model manipulators on-screen. A gray manipulator means it has
been constrained.
See Also
Insert > Align > Coordinate
What
The Align Coordinate command enables to align an existing scan data or the coordinates of
measurement device to a desired coordinate system by using 3-2-1 method or defining X-Y-Z
coordinates.

X-Y-Z Alignment Method After Alignment
Why
The Align Coordinate command is useful for:
• Manually aligning a scan data to a specific coordinate system by using 3-2-1 or X-Y-Z method.
• Repeatedly measuring a physical part at the same position in LiveInspect.
How to Use
How to manually align target scan data to the global coordinate
system
Note:
To align a scan data to a specific coordinate system, reference entities that are necessary for
the alignment should be prepared in advance.

1.
Go to Insert > Align > Coordinate or click the icon in the toolbar.
2. Change the Moving method to X-Y-Z and select the predefined ref. geometry to define
the Position and each axis of scan coordinate system.
3. Check the target coordinate system if it says “Origin.”
4. Check the preview results in the Transform Entity window.
5. Click OK to complete the command. The scan data will be aligned to the global
coordinate system.

Options in Detail
Moving
3-2-1 – Moves scan coordinate system to a desired coordinate system by using 3-2-1 alignment
method. Select predefined entities as a Plane, Vector, and Position. The chosen Plane will define
the Z axis. The Vector will define the Y axis, and the Position will define the origin of the scan
coordinate.
Note:
The color of all axis and rotation circles of scan coordinate system will become gray when the moving
coordinate system is fixed by the defined coordination conditions.
X-Y-Z – Moves scan coordinate system to a desired coordinate system. Select predefined entities
as a Position, X Axis, Y Axis, and Z Axis.
Target
Coordinate – Select a target coordinate system.
X-Y-Z – Defines target coordinate system by selecting predefined entities as a Position, X Axis, Y
Axis, and Z Axis.
More Options

Apply To Active Scan Data Only – Applies the alignment to an active scan data only when
several scan data exist. For more detail about active scan data, go to Insert > Active Scan Data.
See Also
What
The Align Transform command aligns roughly aligns scan data to nominal data or transforms a
matrix using the N Point, Rotate and Transform, or By Matrix methods. It can help with alignment
problems that the standard alignment methods cannot support.
N Point Method After Alignment
Why
The Align Transform command is useful for:
• Manually aligning using the N Points method when auto alignment fails
• Manipulating scan data position using the Rotate and Transform method
• Reapplying previously used alignment displacement to another scan data using the By Matrix
method

How to Use
How to manually transform scan data to nominal data by picking
corresponding positions
2. Use the Transform command by going to Insert > Align > Transform or by clicking the
icon in the toolbar. Select the N Points method. The Model View will be divided into
three different views.
3. Pick a point on the nominal data and a corresponding point on the scan data.
4. Create two or more pairs using the same method in Step 3.

5. Click OK to complete the command. The scan data will be roughly aligned by the chosen
matching points. The Best Fit alignment method can be used to further align the scan
data.
Options in Detail
Methods
N Points – Aligns scan data using manually chosen pair points.
Refine Alignment – Applies best fit alignment for more accurate results.
Rotate And Translate – Manually rotates and moves scan data using manipulators in the
Model View. The Use Local Coordinate option will rotate and transform using selected
coordinates.

By Matrix – Registers scan data using a 4X4 transformation matrix. Values can be directly input
into the Transform Value boxes. A transformation matrix file can be imported using the Matrix
File Open button .
Set – Applies an imported transformation matrix to scan data.
Multiply – Multiplies an imported matrix to a pre-defined transformation matrix.
Inverse – Inverses an imported matrix and multiplies it to a pre-defined transformation

matrix.
Transpose – Determines whether to apply the transposed transformation matrix to a

pre-defined transformation matrix.
Calculate Principal Axis Transform – Finds transformation matrix to move scan data to
a principal axis. It is useful for quickly aligning the coordinate system of scan data to the
global coordinate system.
Note:
To export a transformation matrix from within the application, select an alignment inspection feature
in the Inspection Feature tree and click the Export button next to the Matrix in the
Properties panel.
More Options
Apply To Active Scan Data Only – Applies a transformation to an active scan data only when

several scan data exist. For more detail about active scan data, go to Insert > Active Scan Data.
See Also
What
The Adaptive Align command aligns scan data to nominal data by picking N points on a physical
part based on pre-planned inspection requirements.
Why
The Adaptive Align command is useful for:
• Aligning scan data to nominal data while using LiveInspect, in real-time.
How to Use
How to align a measurement device coordinates to nominal data
2. Go to Insert > Align > Adaptive or click the icon in the toolbar.
3. Pick points on the nominal data that will be used as reference points.

5. Click the LiveInspect button to enter the LiveInspect mode.
6. Select a device.
7. Click the Connect button.
8. Go to LiveInspect > Play LiveInspect Process or click the icon in the toolbar.
9. Probe points on a physical part by following the Automatic measurement feature

guidance functionality.
10. Probe points on the physical part again to validate alignment.
11. Press the B button on the device to confirm the validation.

12. Select the Exit LiveInspect option.
Options in Detail
Select Points
Pick the Nominal Points for Reference – Selects nominal points to be considered as reference
points.
More Options
Max. Iteration Count – Specifies a maximum number of calculations used to find a proper
alignment solution.
See Also
Insert > Align > Homing
What
The Homing Align command aligns scan data to nominal data by picking N points on a physical
part based on pre-planned measurement requirements and minimizes the deviation in the same
positions by repeated measurements.
Why
The Homing Align command is useful for:
• Aligning a measurement device coordinates to nominal data while using LiveInspect, in real-
time.
• Aligning a measurement device coordinates to nominal data minimizing the deviation, in real-
time.

How to Use
How to align a measurement device coordinates to nominal data
minimizing the deviation between them
2. Go to Insert > Align > Homing or click the icon in the toolbar.
3. Pick points on the nominal data that will be used as reference points.
4. Set the Tolerance Zone to 1mm and click OK to complete the command.
Note:
The specified tolerance zone will be Pass/Fail criteria for the deviation of alignment on each
position.
6. Select a device.
7. Click the Connect button.
8. Go to LiveInspect > Play LiveInspect Process or click the icon in the toolbar.
9. Probe points on a physical part by following the Automatic measurement feature

guidance functionality while checking the deviation results on each position.

Note:
When the probe tip is closer onto pre-defined position within the specified tolerance zone,
the color of probe ball will be changed to Green. This is useful to recognize how close the
probe tip is on pre-defined position in real-time.
10. Continue to probe points on the positions where the deviation is not satisfied.
11. Press the B button on the device when all points are satisfied within the specified
tolerance zone.
Note:
Even if all points are not satisfied within a specified tolerance zone, the alignment process
can be finished by pressing the B button on the device.
12. Probe points on the physical part again to validate alignment.
12. Press the B button on the device to confirm the validation.

Options in Detail
Select Points
Pick the Nominal Points for Reference – Selects nominal points to be considered as reference
points.
More Options
Tolerance Zone – Specifies a tolerance zone value that is used as Pass/Fail criteria for the
deviation of alignment on each position.
Note:
Any points that do not pass within this tolerance zone can be re-probed.
See Also
7.4.2. Insert > Section
What
The Section mode computes sections of design data and scan data. The section mode supports 2D
environments like 2D drafting for easy section deviation analysis between nominal and scan data as
well as inspecting section profiles using GD&T.
Section Inspection
Why
The Section command is useful for:
• Checking deviation between sectional profiles

• Inspecting a section profile using GD&T
How to Use
How to define a section position and inspect a section profile
1. Align scan data. Go to Insert > Section or click the icon in the toolbar.
2. Select the Offset method and select a planar face as a Base Plane.
3. Set an offset distance or move the arrow on the screen to define the location of a

sectional plane.
4. Click the Next Stage button .

Choose Min. Distance for the projection direction.

Select the Picking method under Manual under Tag Options and pick points on the
section where deviation values are desired.
6. Click OK to complete the command and enter the Section mode. In this mode
additional 2D inspections can be performed on a section. To hide deviation results and
tags, set them as False in the Properties panel.

7.
Click the Smart Dimension button on the toolbar to inspect dimensions.
Pick an arc on a section and pick a space where the annotation will be located.
8. Pick two lines to inspect a distance and pick a space where the annotation will be
located.
Click OK to complete the command.
9.
To exit the Section mode, click the Section button on the tool palette or the
Confirm icon at bottom right corner.
Options in Detail
[Stage 1: Set Position]
Methods
Offset – Creates a section by offsetting a base plane. Select a planar entity as a Base Plane
and set a value as an Offset Distance, or move the arrow on the screen.

Rotation – Creates a section by rotating a base plane. Select a planar entity as a Base Plane
and a linear entity or an entity that has an axis as a Rotation Axis. Set a value as an Offset
Angle or rotate the arrow on the screen.
Along Curve – Creates a section that follows a curve. Pick a point on a curve as a Seed
Position and select a curve as a Path Curve.
Local Coordinate
Origin – Defines a local coordinate to serve as the origin in the second stage of the Section
command. The local coordinate settings affect the location of a model.
X Axis Direction – Selects the X direction of the origin by selecting a linear entity or an entity
that has an axis.
Flip Viewing Direction – Reverses the viewing direction in the 2D view.

Multiple Cutting Plane
This option changes a view and prepares for the addition of cutting lines.
It also positions a cutting line by moving it up or down and resizes it by dragging the end
points.
The values can be changed by clicking the existing values on the screen.
[Stage 2: Set Deviation Options]

Calculation Option
Projection Distance – Sets a projection distance.
Min Distance – Projects scan points to a minimum distance on nominal data that will
become deviation.
Custom – Projects scan points in a custom direction by selecting a linear entity as the
direction or by inputting a direction value.

Min Distance – Limits the maximum deviation. Scan points over the given distance will
be ignored in calculation and treated as noise.
More Options
Apply Single Component – Analyzes deviation in a specific direction. When a component
direction is X, only the distance of the X component will be displayed.
[Stage 3: Set Display Options]

Display Option
Use Tolerance Color – Displays defined tolerance color (default in green) on the color map
to display pass or fail result.
Whisker Multiplier – Adjusts whisker size by setting a value or using the Whisker Multiplier
slider.
Whisker Multiplier: 1 Whisker Multiplier: 2
Whisker Display Ratio – Adjusts whisker size by setting a value or using the Whisker Display

Ratio slider.
Whisker Display Ratio: 30 Whisker Display Ratio: 100
Local Average Tagging

Automatic – Sets automatic local average tagging settings.
Over Tol. Count – Sets a limit for the highest points on mountains of deviation and any
value over the tolerance will be marked.
Over Tol. Count: 3
Under Tol. Count – Sets a limit for the lowest points on mountains of deviation and any
value under the tolerance will be marked.
Manual – Sets manual local average tagging settings.
Picking – Marks deviation tags on chosen positions of the section profile.
Along Curve – Marks deviation tags along selected curves. A start position needs to be
defined by a Seed Position on a curve. Use the No. Of Instances (total tags) and
Distance (interval) options to make multiple tags. When the Equal Spacing is checked,
a curve will be equally divided by the number of instances.

[Section Tool Palette]
Segment Scan Section – Determines the resolution of scan section segments. Moving the
slider to the left will create fewer segments, and lines and arcs will be segmented with a loose
tolerance. Moving the slider to the right will create more segments, and lines and arcs will be
segmented with a tight tolerance. Moving the slider will display classified lines and arcs in
real-time.
Low Resolution High Resolution
See Also
Insert > Multiple Sections
7.4.3. Insert > Multiple Sections
What
The Multiple Sections command computes multiple sections of design data and scan data. The
section mode supports 2D environments like 2D drafting for easy section deviation analysis
between nominal and scan data as well as inspecting section profiles using GD&T. It is similar in
function to the Section command, but supports multiple section creation.

Multiple Sections
Why
The Multiple Sections command is useful for:
• Generating several sections with the same interval spacing
How to Use
How to define a section position and inspect a section profile
1 Go to Insert > Multiple Sections or click the icon in the toolbar.
.
2 Select the Offset method and select a plane or planar face as a Base Plane.
.

3 Set the No. Of Instance option to 5 and the Distance option to 40 mm. Click the Next
. Stage button .
Note:
To change the starting position of a section plane, drag the arrow in the Model View.
4 Edit instances by selecting unnecessary instances and pressing the Delete key on the
. keyboard. Click the Next Stage button .
5 Choose the Min. Distance method as the projection direction. Click the Next Stage
. button .
6 Click OK to complete the command. Multiple sections will be generated.

.

Note:
Double-click a section inspection feature in the Inspection Feature tree or select a section
and click Edit > Feature to edit it.
Options in Detail
[Stage 1: Set Initial Position]
Methods
Offset – Creates a section by offsetting a base plane. Select a planar entity as a Base Plane
and set a value as an Offset Distance, or move the arrow on the screen. To make multiple
sections set the No. Of Instances option which controls the total number of sections as well
as the Distance option which controls the intervals between sections.
Rotation – Creates a section by rotating a base plane. Select a planar entity as a Base Plane
and a linear entity or an entity that has an axis as a Rotation Axis. To make multiple sections
set the No. Of Instances option which controls the total number of sections as well as the
Distance option which controls the intervals between sections.
Along Curve – Creates a section that follows a curve. Pick a point on a curve as a Seed
Position and select a curve as a Path Curve. To make multiple sections set the No. Of

Instances option which controls the total number of sections as well as the Distance option
which controls the intervals between sections.
Local Coordinate
Origin – Defines a local coordinate to serve as the origin in the second stage of the Section
command. The local coordinate settings affect the location of a model.
that has an axis.
[Stage 2: Set Detail Options]

Position
Distance – Sets a detailed position of a selected instance.
Local Coordinate
Local Coordinate – Redefines the local coordinate of a selected instance. For more details
see the Local Coordinate option under the first stage.
[Stage 3: Set Deviation Options]

Calculation Option
Projection Direction – Sets a detailed position of a selected instance.
Min Distance – Projects scan points to a minimum distance on nominal data that will

become deviation.
Custom – Projects scan points in a custom direction by selecting a linear entity as the
direction or by inputting a direction value.
Min Distance – Limits the maximum deviation. Scan points over the given distance
will be ignored in calculation and treated as noise.
More Options
Apply Single Component – Analyzes deviation in a specific direction. When a component
direction is X, only the distance of the X component will be displayed.
[Stage 4: Set Display Options]

Display Option
Use Tolerance Color – Displays defined tolerance color (default in green) on the color map
to display pass or fail result.

Whisker Multiplier – Adjusts whisker size by setting a value or using the Whisker Multiplier
slider.
Whisker Display Ratio – Adjusts whisker size by setting a value or using the Whisker
Display Ratio slider.

Automatic – Sets automatic local average tagging settings.
Over Tol. Count – Sets a limit for the highest points on mountains of deviation and
any value over the tolerance will be marked.
Over Tol. Count: 3
Under Tol. Count – Sets a limit for the lowest points on mountains of deviation and
any value under the tolerance will be marked.
Manual – Sets manual local average tagging settings.
On Specific Section – Separates a window into two sections and is used to display a
section in a 2D view. Tags can be added to selected sections in the 2D environment.

Picking – Marks deviation tags on chosen positions of the section profile.
Along Curve – Marks deviation tags along selected curves. A start position needs to
be defined by a Seed Position on a curve. Use the No. Of Instances (total tags) and
Distance (interval) options to make multiple tags. When the Equal Spacing is
checked, a curve will be equally divided by the number of instances.
See Also
Insert > Section
7.4.4. Insert > Curve
What
The Curve command enters the Curve mode which features commands for the generation and
editing of curves. When a curve is generated it will be added as a new inspection feature named
Curve[#] in the Inspection Feature tree. For more information about the Curve mode, go to Tools
> Curve Tools.
Why
The Curve command is useful for:
• Comparing nominal and scan curves to assess curve deviation

• Generating guide curves for multiple tags
• Generating sectional curves of a model
7.4.5. Insert > Ref. Geometry

The Ref. Geometry menu features various commands used to inspect feature elements such as
cylinder axes, circle centers, and lines that intersect two planes. Ref. Geometry can be used for
measuring, transforming, aligning, sectioning, dimensioning, etc.
Ref. Geometries
• Point
Creates a point that defines a position in three-dimensional space
• Simulated CMM point

Simulates a point generated by a Coordinate Measuring Machine (CMM)
• Vector
Creates a linear line with a direction
• Plane
Creates a planar two-dimensional surface with a normal direction
• Circle
Creates a ref. circle on a plane that consists of a center and radius
• Slot
Creates a ref. slot on a plane that consists of two lines and two arcs
• Rectangle
Creates a ref. rectangle on a plane that consists of four lines with four right angles

• Regular Polygon
Creates a ref. regular polygon on a plane that consists of several equal lines
• Cylinder
Creates a ref. cylinder, which is a three-dimensional shape consisting of an axis, a radius, and a
height value
• Cone
Creates a ref. cone, which is a three-dimensional shape consisting of an axis, two different radii,
and a height value
• Sphere
Creates a ref. sphere, which is a three-dimensional shape that consists of a center and a radius
• Torus
Creates a ref. torus, which is a three-dimensional shape created by revolving a circle and consists
of a center, a major axis, and a minor radius
• Coordinate
Creates a ref. coordinate that determines the position of a point or other geometric elements
Note:
After generating ref. geometries, they can be exported by using the File > Export command or the pop-
up menu on selected ref. geometry in the Model Tree.
Note:
When ref. geometry is defined on scan data without using the definition of nominal ref. geometry, dot-
lined ref. geometry will be created. The dot-lined ref. geometry which is called as a scan ref. geometry is
used when measuring dimensions or geometric tolerance of features without nominal data.

If necessary, the scan ref. geometry can be set as nominal ref. geometry by using the Add
Nominal command in the pop-up menu. For more information, go to User Interface > Docking Bars >
Tree.
Insert > Ref. Geometry > Point
What
The Ref. Point command creates a reference point. A reference point is a zero dimensional entity. A
reference point is used to mark a specific position on a model or in space.
Ref. Point on Mesh Intersection between curve and plane
Why
The Ref. Point command is useful for:

• Defining a point that can be used as nominal geometry in a automatic and systematic
inspection process
• Extracting a point from scan data based on the definition of nominal geometry
• Creating a point on scan data without using the definition of nominal data
• Finding a center point from other geometric entities
• Finding points that can divide a target entity into multiple parts
• Finding an intersection point from crossing entities
• Finding a point on the highest position of a target entity
• Creating points by Importing pre-defined positions
How to Use
How to find and add a point on a circle center
1. Prepare aligned scan and nominal data. Go to Insert > Ref. Geometry > Point or click
2. Change the Method to Find Circle Center.
3. Select circular edges on a model.
4. Click OK to complete the command. Nominal geometry will be created with its pair
geometry.
The deviation between nominal geometry and pair geometry is displayed in its
property pane. Inputting a tolerance value will color each deviation element in pass, fail,
or warning colors.

Options in Detail
[Stage 1]
Target Entities
Entities – Selects target entities. Required target entities can differ depending on the
method.
Methods
The following methods are available in this command:
• Definition
• Extract
• Find Circle Center
• Find Slot Center
• Find Rectangle Center
• Find Polygon Center
• Find Sphere Center
• Projection
• Pick Multiple Points
• Convert
• N Division
• Between 2 Points
• Intersect 2 Lines
• Intersect Line & Face
• Intersect 3 Planes
• Find Cone Vertex
• Extreme Position
• Import
• Probe Points
Note:
When creating a ref. point by defining its position on scan data or by using a fitting algorithm from
a specific area of scan data, the ref. point can be created without defining a scan pair geometry in
the second stage. A created ref. point is called a scan ref. point and can be used for measuring the
size of a model without using nominal data or creating another ref. geometry as a reference.
The methods that can create a ref. point from scan data directly are:
• Definition – When the position of a point is defined by picking a point on scan data
• Extract

• Find Circle Center / Slot Center / Rectangle Center / Polygon Center / Sphere Center
• Convert
• Probe Points
When entering the editing mode by double-clicking a created ref. point, scan points that were used
for creating the ref. point will be highlighted. To change target scan points, click the Select None
button .
If necessary, a ref. point that was created from scan data can be added into nominal data by using
the Add Nominal command in the pop-up menu.
For more information, go to User Interface > Docking Bars > Tree.
Definition – Creates a point by using the geometric definition of a point. The value can be
input numerically or interactively picked by a point in the Model View.
Extract – Creates a point from selected entities by using a fitting algorithm.
Remove Outlier – Removes outlier data to achieve more accurate fitting results.
The N*Sigma method requires an N value and excludes data that is larger than N times
the standard deviation, also known as the sigma.
The Ratio method requires a ratio value and only data that falls into the selected value
will be used.
The Absolute Distance method requires a distance and the fitting will be done by
excluding any data outside of that distance.
N Sigma

Find Circle Center – Creates a circle center point from selected entities.
Fitting Type – Chooses a fitting type to create geometry from target entities. If
geometry is created from nominal data, the defined fitting type in the first stage can be
used as a fitting method for finding scan pair geometry from scan pair points.
Note:
This option is available when the geometry type of selected entity is different from target
geometry.
Best Fit – Finds best-fitted geometry from target entities using the least squares
fitting method.
Min. Bound – Finds maximum-inscribed geometry of a geometric volume that

encloses target entities using the minimum separation fitting method.
Max. Bound – Finds minimum-circumscribed geometry of a geometric volume

that encloses target entities using the minimum separation fitting method.
Best Fit Min. / Max. Bound from

Minimum Separation Fitting
Remove Outlier, Sampling Ratio – Identical to the Extract method.
Project On Plane – Projects a created vector onto a selected planar entity such as a
plane, face, region, or sketch.
Fix Radius – Specifies the value of the radius of a cylinder if it is already known.
Find Slot Center – Extracts the center point of a slot from selected entities using a fitting
algorithm. The sub-options are the same as the Find Circle Center method under Ref. Point.

Find Rectangle Center – Extracts the center point of a rectangle from selected entities using
a fitting algorithm. The sub-options are the same as the Find Circle Center method under
Ref. Point.
Rounded Corner – Finds the center point of a rounded corner rectangle.
Find Polygon Center – Extracts the center point of a polygon center from selected entities
using a fitting algorithm. The sub-options are the same as the Find Circle Center method
under Ref. Point.
Rounded Corner – Used for polygon corners that are round.
Num. Of Edges – Specifies the number of edges of a polygon.
Find Sphere Center – Extracts the center point of a sphere from selected entities using a
fitting algorithm. The sub-options are the same as the Find Circle Center method under Ref.
Point.
Use Normal – Excludes points that have a normal angle larger than the normal of fitted
ref. geometry. After removing points, the application will internally generate fitted ref.
geometry again from the refined points.
Projection – Extracts a point by projecting onto another entity.

To make a point using the Projection method:
1. Select points such as ref. points, curve points or vertices.
2. Select a target entity that selected points will be projected onto.
3. Click OK.
Pick Multiple Points – Creates an average point by choosing one or more points.
To make a point using the Pick Multiple Points method:
1. Pick points on scan data or select points such as ref. points, vertices or circles.
2. Click OK.
Convert – Creates a center point from a selected entity.

To make a point using the Convert method:
1. Select a circle or an arc.
2. Click OK.
N Division – Creates multiple points by dividing a selected curve, vector, or mesh data.
To make a point using the N Division method:
1. Select a curve.
2. Click OK.
Uniform – Creates planes by evenly dividing a selected entity by a specified number.
Offset – Creates planes by a specified offset distance and total number on a selected
entity.

Uniform Offset
Between 2 Points – Creates a point between two points using a Ratio value to decide the
position.
To make a point using the Between 2 Points method:
1. Select two points.
2. Set the ratio of position between two selected points.
3. Click OK.
Ratio: 0.2 Ratio: 0.5 Ratio: 0.8
Intersect 2 Lines – Creates a point from the intersection of two linear entities.
To make a point using the Intersect 2 Lines method:
1. Select two linear entities such as a line, edge, or vector.
2. Click OK.
Intersect Line & Face – Creates a point from the intersection of a linear entity and a face.
To make a point using the Intersect Line and Face method:
1. Select a linear entity such as a line, linear edge, vector, 2D or 3D linear curve.
2. Select a face.
3. Click OK.
Intersect 3 Planes – Creates a point from the intersection of three selected planar entities.
To make a point using the Intersect 3 Planes method:
1. Select three planar entities such as a face, region, or plane.
2. Click OK.

Check Orthogonality – Allows the creation of a point only if three planes are
orthogonal.
Find Cone Vertex – Creates a point at the apex position of a conical entity.
Extreme Position – Creates a point at an extreme position from selected entities. A target
entity and a linear entity need to be selected for a Direction to define an extreme direction.
Import – Creates points by importing an ASCII file. A text file containing X,Y, and Z coordinates
separated by tabs or commas can be imported with the ASCII converter.
When a text file is opened, the ASCII Converter will be displayed. Column definition,
separators such as white space or user defined characters, and commas for decimal point in
the ASCII Convert dialog box can be set.

Probe Points – Creates a point using a probed point.
Probe Compensation – Compensates the center position of measured probe points

by the direction of the X, Y, and Z global axes or the probe axis.
Note:
The direction of probe compensation can be specified by user definitions. Select the Custom
Direction in the Probe Compensation option.
[Stage 2: Define Scan Pair]

Note:
The second stage can be used to define methods for extracting scan pair geometry from scan data.
If a ref. point is created from scan data without using the definition of the nominal geometry from
the first stage, the second stage will not be used.
Make Scan Pair – Creates a scan pair.
As Nominal – Automatically creates a pair of ref. geometries from scan data as created
in the first stage.
Manual – Manually creates a pair of ref. geometries from scan data.

Note:
The utilization of methods for manual definition is the same as the methods in the first stage
except for the Simulated CMM method. For information about creation methods, refer to the
first stage.
Simulate CMM – Creates a pair point by simulating CMM in a real world

environment. Scan data can be treated as a real part and the CMM can be
virtually controlled as a real CMM.
Ray Intersection – Finds a pair point by intersecting a virtual ray and

poly vertices.
The Search Radius and Search Depth options define the size of a
searching zone.
The Direction option defines the projection direction of a ray.
The Fitting Type option is the fitting method used for detected poly-
vertices. When scan data is mesh it can be easy to find pair points on
the mesh surface, however for point clouds poly-vertices in a search
area must be fitted and a surface must be generated internally.
The Auto option fits poly-vertices in a search area to an identical

geometry type of a picked nominal face. If no nominal face exists,
poly-vertices will be fit to a freeform surface.
The Plane / Sphere / Cylinder / Cone / Torus / Surface Fitting

options fits poly-vertices in a searching zone to a specified geometry
type.
Rod Contact – Finds a pair point by the contact position of a rod. The
Search Radius and Search Depth define the size of a searching zone.
The Direction option defines the contact direction of the rod to poly-
vertices. The U-Axis defines the direction of the rod.

Disk Contact – Finds a pair point by the contact position of a disk. The
Search Radius and Search Depth define the size of a searching zone.
The Direction option defines the contact direction of the disk to poly-
vertices.
Find Closest Point – Finds the closest pair point within a given search
radius. The Search Radius option defines a searching zone from a
nominal point.
See Also
Insert > Ref. geometry > Simulated CMM point
Insert > Ref. Geometry > Simulated CMM Point
What
The Simulated CMM Point command simulates a Coordinate Measuring Machine, or, CMM, as it
would function in the real world. Within the application, scan data will be treated as a real part and
the CMM Point command can be used to acquire measure points with a virtual probe device that
acts like a real-world probing device.

This method is available when both nominal and scan data exist as well as when inspecting scan
data only without any nominal data.
When a CMM point is picked on a model the direction of probing will be automatically defined by
the normal of the nominal data. However if only scan data is used, the probing direction will be
defined by a plane’s normal which will be internally made by fitting scan points within a searching
zone.
Why
The Simulated CMM Point command is useful for:
• Finding a contact point by simulating CMM
Ray Intersection
This method is similar to a ball-type probing device. The Ray-Intersection method can find a
contact point on scan data but does not consider any physical conflicts between the virtual probe
and scan data.
Ray-Intersection finds pair points by intersecting a virtual ray and scan data. The Direction option
defines the approaching direction of the ball probe to scan data. The Search Radius and Search
Depth options define the size of a searching zone. Poly-vertices in the searching zone will be
candidate poly-vertices used to find the intersection with the virtual ray.
The specified depth is a total of the frontward and backward depth of a picked point on the direction
of measurement. If the Search Depth is set to 10mm, 5mm will be the search depth in both
directions as shown in the image below:

How to Use Ray Intersection
How to find a contact point using the Ray Intersection method
1. Prepare aligned scan and nominal data. Go to Insert > Ref. Geometry > Simulated
CMM Point or click the icon in the toolbar.
2. Choose the Ray-Intersection method.
3. Pick a point on a nominal face and set the search radius and depth.
4. Click OK to complete the command. A CMM point will be created on the nominal data
and its pair point will be found on the scan data.
or warning colors.
Options in Detail for Ray Intersection

Reference Position – Defines the probing position on nominal or scan data. A specific value
can be entered or a point on a model can be manually chosen.
Search Radius / Search Depth – Defines a searching zone size. Poly-vertices in the searching
zone will be candidate points for a CMM point.

Fitting Type – Selects the fitting method used for detecting poly-vertices. When scan data is
mesh it can be easy to find pair points on the mesh surface, however on point clouds pair points
cannot be found and one of the following fitting type options need to be used.
Auto – Fits poly-vertices in a search zone identically to the geometry on a nominal face.
If no nominal face exists the fitting will be performed on a freeform face.
Plane Fitting – Sets a CMM point to a place. Pair points are found by fitting poly-vertices
in a search area to a plane.
Sphere Fitting – Sets a CMM point to a sphere. Pair points are found by fitting poly-
vertices in a search area to a sphere.
Cylinder Fitting – Sets a CMM point to a cylinder. Pair points are found by fitting poly-
vertices in a search area to a cylinder.
Cone Fitting – Sets a CMM point to a cone. Pair points are found by fitting poly-vertices
in a search area to a cone.
Torus Fitting – Sets a CMM point to a torus. Pair points are found by fitting poly-vertices
in a search area to a torus.
Surface Fitting – Sets a CMM point to a surface. Pair points are found by fitting poly-
vertices in a search area to a surface.
Direction – Defines the approaching direction to an object. The direction for measuring a CMM
point is displayed as a blue arrow. Four direction options are available: Auto, Nominal Normal,
Nominal Tangent, and Manual.
Auto – Sets the approaching direction to an object as tangential if a point is selected on

a boundary and normal to the surface if a point is selected on a surface.
Nominal Normal – Sets the approaching direction to an object normal to a nominal face.

Nominal Tangent – Sets the approaching direction to an object tangent to a nominal
face.
Manual – Manually sets the approaching direction to an object.
Rod Contact
This method is similar to a rod-type probing device. The Rod Contact method can find a contact
point on scan data but does not consider any physical conflicts between the virtual probe and scan
data. The virtual rod defines the searching zone on scan data and is useful for measuring boundaries
or features on sheet metal parts.
Rod Contact finds pair points by intersecting a virtual rod and scan data. The Direction option
defines the approaching direction of the rod probe to scan data. The Rod Radius and Search Depth
options define the size of a searching zone. The Rod Axis option defines the direction of the rod.
How to Use Rod Contact

How to find a contact point using the Rod Contact method

2. Choose the Rod Contact method.
3. Pick a point on a boundary of the nominal data and set the rod radius, search depth and
rod length.
or warning colors.
Options in Detail for Rod Contact

Reference Position – Defines the probing position on nominal or scan data. A specific value can
be entered or a point on a model can be manually chosen.
Rod Radius / Search Depth / Rod Length – Defines a searching zone size. Poly-vertices in the
searching zone will be candidate points for a CMM point.

Direction – Selects the Measuring Direction and Rod Axis for the Rod Contact method.
Measuring Direction – Sets the approaching direction to an object as tangential if a point

is selected on a boundary and normal to the surface if a point is selected on a surface. Four
direction options are available: Auto, Nominal Normal, Nominal Tangent, and Manual.
Auto – Sets the approaching direction to an object as tangential if a point is

selected on a boundary and normal to the surface if a point is selected on a
surface.
Nominal Normal – Sets the approaching direction to an object normal to a

nominal face.
Nominal Tangent – Sets the approaching direction to an object tangent to a

nominal face.
Rod Axis – Defines the direction of the rod axis. Four direction options are available: Auto,
Nominal Normal, Nominal Tangent, and Manual.

Auto – Sets the rod axis direction to an object as tangential if a point is selected
on a boundary and normal to the surface if a point is selected on a surface.
Nominal Normal – Sets the rod axis direction to an object normal to a nominal
face.
Nominal Tangent – Sets the rod axis direction to an object tangent to a nominal
face.
Manual – Manually sets the rod axis direction to an object.
Disk Contact
This method is similar to a disk-type probing device. The Disk Contact method can find a contact
data. The virtual disk defines the searching zone on scan data.
Disk Contact finds pair points by intersecting a virtual rod and scan data. The Direction option
defines the approaching direction of the disk probe to scan data. The Search Radius and Search
Depth options define the size of a searching zone. The Direction option defines the contacting
direction of the disk. Using the flat surface of the disk probe can find a maximum point within the
search zone.
How to Use Disk Contact

How to find a contact point using the Disk Contact method
2. Choose the Disk Contact method.

or warning colors.
Options in Detail for Disk Contact


Direction – Selects the Measuring Direction for the Disk Contact method.


surface.

nominal face.

nominal face.
See Also
Insert > Ref. geometry > Point
Tip & Tutorial

Simulating a CMM to create Reference Points for RPS Alignment
Insert > Ref. Geometry > Vector
What
The Ref. Vector command creates a reference vector. A reference vector is a virtual axis with a
direction and infinite size. A ref. vector is used for adding assisting geometry for inspection.

Why
The Ref. Vector command is useful for:
• Defining a vector that can be used as nominal geometry in a automatic and systematic
inspection process
• Extracting a vector from scan data based on the definition of nominal geometry
• Creating a vector on scan data without using the definition of nominal data
• Finding the axis of a target entity
• Finding the intersection line of two crossing planar or linear entities
• Finding the average vector of two linear entities
• Finding a vector that is positioned by a specific distance and direction from a target entity
• Inspecting the straightness of a section of scan data without using the definition of nominal
data
How to Use
A. How to create a vector that can be used as a nominal geometry
This method can be used to create a vector according to the definition of a pre-defined
2D draft or measurement instruction. A created vector can be used as nominal geometry
in an automatic and systematic inspection process that replaces scan data or for probing
a real part.
1. Go to Insert > Reg. Geometry > Vector or click the icon in the tool bar.
2. Set the Method to 2D Numerical Input.
3. Specify the Input method as Position & Direction.
3. Set a projection plane that a vector can be projected on by clicking the Plane button
and selecting a plane.
4. Define X and Y positions and the direction of the vector by clicking the Position and the
Direction buttons and manually entering values.

5. Click the OK button to complete the command.
B. How to find a vector from two intersecting planes

1. Prepare an aligned scan and nominal data. Go to Insert > Reg. Geometry > Vector or
click the icon in the tool bar.
2. Change the Method to Intersect 2 Planes.
3. Select two faces on the nominal data.
4. Click OK to complete the command. Vector1 will be created by intersecting two planes.
Its pair geometry will also be calculated.
The deviation between nominal geometry and pair geometry is displayed in its property
pane. Inputting a tolerance value will color each deviation element in pass, fail, or
warning colors.
Options in Detail
[Stage 1]
Target Entities
Entities – Selects target entities. Required target entities can differ depending on the method.
Methods
• Definition
• Extract
• Find Slot Axis
• Find Cylinder Axis
• Find Cone Axis
• Projection
• Pick Point & Line
• Convert
• Average
• Tangent
• Cross 2 Lines
• Probe Points
• 2D Numerical Input
Note:
When creating a ref. vector by defining its position on scan data or by using a fitting algorithm from
a specific area of scan data, the ref. vector can be created without defining scan pair geometry in the
second stage. A created ref. vector is called a scan ref. vector and it can be used for measuring the
size of a model without using nominal data, inspecting a straightness on scan data, or creating
another ref. geometry as a reference.
The methods that can create a ref. vector from scan data directly are:
• Definition – When the position of a vector is defined by picking points on scan data
• Extract
• Find Slot Axis / Cylinder Axis / Cone Axis
• Probe Points
When entering the editing mode by double-clicking a created ref. vector, scan points that were used
for creating the ref. vector will be highlighted. To change target scan points, click the Select None
button .
If necessary, a ref. vector that was created from scan data can be added into nominal data by using

Definition – Creates a vector using the geometric definition of a vector. A numeric value can
be input or a point can be picked manually in the Model View.
Position & Direction – Creates a ref. vector with Position and Direction values.
Position – Selects a point in the Model View or allows the manual input of specific
values for X, Y and Z.
Direction – Selects a linear or planar entity to acquire a directional value or allows

the manual input of a specific numerical value. The X, Y or Z buttons align the
direction to a selected direction.
Start & End – Creates a vector by defining the Start Position and the End Position.
Start Position and End Position – Creates a vector by connecting two positions.
The positions can be selected in the Model View or manually input into the X, Y, Z
boxes.

Extract – Extracts a vector from selected entities by using a fitting algorithm.
When a ref. vector is created by fitting a section of scan data, its straightness can be measured.
To inspect Pass or Fail of a ref. vector, set the Tolerance value in the Properties panel of the
vector. It can be useful for calculating the GD&T in a scan-only inspection process.
will be used.
N Sigma
Project On Plane – Projects a created vector onto a selected planar entity.
Find Slot Axis – Creates a vector of a slot on a selected entity using a fitting algorithm. The
fitting option is the same as the Extract method.

fitting method.
Min. Bound – Finds minimum-fitted geometry that contacts the nearest target
entities in the normal direction from the center point of the best-fitted geometry
that was found using the least squares fitting method.
Max. Bound – Finds maximum-fitted geometry that contacts the farthest target
Find Cylinder Axis – Creates a cylinder axis from a selected entity by using the fitting
algorithm. The fitting option is same as the Extract method.
Use Normal – Excludes points that have a normal angle larger than the normal of
fitted ref. geometry. After removing points, the application will internally generate
fitted ref. geometry again from the refined points.
Axis Constraint – Constrain the direction of an axis.

Use Specified Direction As Initial Guess – Defines an initial axis that can be used
for finding the direction of a fitting shape.
Use Specified Direction As It Is – Manually define the direction of an axis. The

direction of an axis can be defined by selecting an entity that has a vector
property or manually typing the values.
Find Cone Axis – Creates a cone axis from selected entities by using a fitting algorithm. The
fitting option is same as the Find Cylinder Axis method.
Projection – Creates a vector by projecting a planar entity onto a linear entity.

To make a vector using the Projection method:
1. Select a planar entity such as a plane, face, or region.
2. Select a linear entity such as a line, vector, or edge.
3. Click OK.
Pick Multiple Points - Creates a vector by picking two or more points.

To make a vector using the Pick Multiple Points method:
1. Pick two or more points.
2. Click OK.
Pick Point & Line – Creates a vector by picking a point as the position and a linear entity as
the direction.
To make a vector using the Pick Point & Line method:

1. Select a linear entity for the direction of a vector.
2. Pick a point for the position of the vector.
3. Click OK.
Convert – Creates a vector as an axis of a selected entity or on a selected entity.

To make a vector using the Convert method:
1. Select a cylindrical entity such as a face or a region, or a linear entity such as a line or an
edge.
2. Click OK.
Intersect 2 Planes – Creates a vector from intersecting two planes.

To make a vector using the Intersect 2 Planes method:
1. Select two planar entities such as planes, faces, regions.
2. Click OK.
Average – Creates a vector by averaging two linear entities.

To make a vector using the Average method:
1. Select two linear entities such as lines, edges, vectors.
2. Click OK.

Tangent – Creates a vector that is tangent to a selected entity.
To make a vector by using the Tangent method:
1. Pick a point on an entity such as a curve, edge, or poly-vertex.
2. Click OK.
Cross 2 Lines – Creates a vector from crossing two linear entities.

To make a vector using the Cross 2 Lines method:
1. Select two linear entities such as lines, edges, or vectors.
2. Click OK.
Probe Points – Creates a vector using probed points.
Project On Plane – Projects a vector created by compensated probe points on a

selected plane.
Flip Compensation – Flips the direction of compensation. For example, when the
Compensation Direction of nominal data in the Properties is set to Probe
Direction, compensation will correspond as shown in the figures below:
Unchecked Checked
2D Numerical Input – Creates a ref. vector using the geometric definition of a vector and a
defined projection plane. Numeric values can be manually input or defined by picking points
in the Model View. A ref. vector will be created at a defined position along the direction of the
defined projection plane.
Position & Direction – Creates a ref. vector with position and direction values.

Plane – Selects a plane that can be used as a projection plane.
Note:
To align the viewpoint along the normal direction of a selected plane entity, click the
Align Viewpoint button located next to the Plane button. This button helps to
easily define the position and direction values of a vector by aligning the viewpoint.
Position – Specifies the starting position of a vector. The position can be defined
by selecting a point in the Model View or manually specifying numerical values
for the X, Y, and Z positions.
Note:
The X, Y and Z position input boxes will be displayed differently according to the
direction of a selected plane. For example, when selecting a plane parallel to the X-Y
base plane as a projection plane, which has Z normal direction (X: 0, Y: 0, Z: 1), only the
X and Y input boxes will be displayed.
Direction – Specifies the direction of a vector. The direction can be defined by

selecting a linear or planar entity or manually entering numerical values for X, Y,
and Z axises.
Start & End Position – Creates a ref. vector by defining the Start Position and the End
Position.
Start Position / End Position – Specifies position values for a starting position
and ending position. The position values can be specified by selecting points in
the Model View or manually entering numerical values in the X, Y, Z boxes.

Note:
normal direction of a selected plane. For example, when selecting a plane parallel to
the X-Y base plane as a projection plane, which has Z normal direction (X: 0, Y: 0, Z: 1),
only the X and Y input boxes will be displayed.
[Stage 2]
Note:
The second stage can be used when defining methods to extract scan pair geometry from scan data.
When a ref. vector is created from scan data without using the nominal geometry definition from
As Nominal – Automatically creates a pair of ref. geometries from scan data as

described in the first stage.
Manual – Manually creates a pair of ref. geometries from scan data.
See Also
Insert > Ref. geometry > Plane
Insert > Ref. Geometry > Plane
What
The Ref. Plane command creates a reference plane. A reference plane is a virtual plane that has a
normal direction but an infinite size. A ref. plane is used for adding assisting geometry for inspection.
Why
The Ref. Plane command is useful for:

• Defining a plane that can be used as nominal geometry in a automatic and systematic
inspection process
• Extracting a plane from scan data based on the definition of nominal geometry
• Creating a plane on scan data without using the definition of nominal data
• Creating planes that can divide target entity into multiple parts
• Finding a plane that is positioned a specific distance and direction from target entity
• Finding an average plane from two planar entities
• Finding a plane that has a specific angle from a target entity
• Finding a symmetry plane from a target entity
• Inspecting a flatness on scan data without using the definition of nominal data
How to Use
How to extract a plane from a nominal face
1. Prepare aligned scan and nominal data. Go to Insert > Geometry > Plane or click the
2. Select the Extract Method.
3. Select a face on the model.
4. Click OK to complete the command. Nominal geometry will be created and its pair point
will be found on the scan data.
or warning colors.

Options in Detail
[Stage 1]
Target Entities
method.
Methods
• Definition
• Extract
• Projection
• Pick Point & Normal
• Pick Point & Coplanar Axis
• Convert
• N Division
• Offset
• Rotation
• Average
• View Direction
• Tangent
• Orthogonal
• Draw Line
• Mirror
• Probe Points
Note:
When creating a ref. plane by defining its position and normal on scan data or by using a fitting
algorithm from a specific area of scan data, the ref. plane can be created without defining scan pair
geometry in the second stage. A created ref. plane is called a scan ref. plane and it can be used for
measuring the size of a model without using nominal data, inspecting a flatness on scan data, or
creating another ref. geometry as a reference.
The methods that can create a ref. plane from scan data directly are:
• Definition – When the position and normal of a plane are defined by picking points on scan
data
• Extract

• Tangent
• Probe Points
When entering the editing mode by double-clicking a created ref. plane, scan points that were used
for creating the ref. plane will be highlighted. To change target scan points, click the Select None
button .
If necessary, a ref. plane that was created from scan data can be added into nominal data by using
Definition – Creates a ref. plane by using the geometric definition of the plane. The value
can be input numerically or interactively picked by a point in the Model View.
Position & Normal – Creates a ref. plane using Position and Normal values.
Position – Specifies the values of X, Y and Z, or manually selects a point where

the normal value will be automatically acquired.
Normal – Selects a point on the model to acquire a normal value of a picked

object or used to specify a numerical value. By clicking the X, Y, or Z buttons, a
normal can be aligned to a selected direction.
3 Positions – Creates a plane which intersects with three positions.
Position 1 and Position 2 and Position 3 – Chooses a position on the model

or directly inputs a X, Y and Z value.

Coefficient - Creates a plane using specified A, B, C and D values which are coefficients
of the plane equation (Ax + By + Cz + D = 0).
A, B, C, D – Inputs the numerical value of coefficient of a plane.
Extract – Extracts a plane from selected entities by using a fitting algorithm.
When a ref. plane is created by fitting a section of scan data, its flatness can be measured. To
inspect Pass or Fail of a ref. vector, set the Tolerance value in the Properties panel of the
plane. It can be useful for calculating the GD&T in a scan-only inspection process.
geometry is created from nominal data, the defined fitting type in the first stage can
be used as a fitting method for finding scan pair geometry from scan pair points.
Note:
This option is available when the geometry type of a selected entity is different from target
geometry.

fitting method.
Min. Bound – Finds maximum-inscribed geometry of a slab-like geometric

volume that encloses s target entities using the minimum separation fitting
method.
Max. Bound – Finds minimum-circumscribed geometry of a slab-like geometric

volume that encloses target entities using the minimum separation fitting
method.
will be used.
N Sigma
Use Normal – Excludes points that have a normal angle larger than the normal
of fitted ref. geometry. After removing points, the application will internally
generate fitted ref. geometry again from the refined points.

Use Specified Direction As Initial Guess – Defines an initial axis that can be
used for finding the direction of a fitting shape.

Projection – Creates a plane by projecting a planar entity onto a linear entity.

To make a plane using the Projection method:
3. Click OK.
Pick Multiple Points – Creates a plane by picking three or more points.

To make a plane using the Pick Multiple Points method:
1. Pick three or more points.
2. Click OK.
Pick Point & Normal Axis – Creates a plane by picking a point (position) and selecting a
normal axis.
To make a plane using the Pick Point & Normal method:
1. Select a linear entity for normal of the plane.
2. Pick a point for the position of the plane.
3. Click OK.

Pick Point & Coplanar Axis – Creates a plane on a coplanar axis.
To make a plane using the Pick Point & Normal method:
1. Select a linear entity for coplanar axis.
2. Pick a point for the position of the plane.
3. Click OK.
Convert – Creates plane on a selected planar entity.

To make a plane using the Convert method:
1. Select a planar entity (plane, face, region, etc).
2. Click OK.
N Division – Creates planes by dividing selected entities. Multiple planes will be created
evenly and perpendicularly to the selected entity.
To make a plane using the N Division method:
1. Select a line, curve, edge or etc.
2. Define sub option.
3. Click OK.
Uniform – Creates planes by evenly dividing a selected entity by specified number.

entity.
Offset – Creates a specified number of planes by offsetting them from a selected planar
entity.
To make a plane using the Offset method:
2. Set distance.
3. Click OK.
Note:
A ref. plane can be offset by using the Ctrl key and mouse dragging an existing ref. plane.
Rotation – Creates multiple planes by rotating a planar entity.

To make a plane using the Rotation method:
2. Select a linear entity such as a line, vector, or edge which will be the rotation axis.
3. Set the rotation angle.
4. Click OK.

Average – Creates a plane by averaging two selected planar entities. The planar entities do
not need to be parallel.
To make a plane using the Average method:
1. Select two planar entities such as a plane, face, or region.
2. Click OK.
View Direction – Creates a plane in the current view direction.

To make a plane using the View Direction method:
1. Pick a point also known as a position, on the Model View.
2. The plane normal will be the viewing direction.
3. Click OK.
Tangent – Creates a plane that is tangent to a picked entity.

To make a plane using the Tangent method:
1. Pick a point also known as a position, on a curve point, poly-vertex, vertex, face, or ref.
point.
2. Click OK.

Orthogonal – Creates an orthogonal plane from a selected point (point-element entity) on
a mesh. A point and two body faces can also be used.
To make a plane using the Orthogonal method on a mesh:
1. Pick a point on a mesh.
2. Click OK.
To make a plane using the Orthogonal method on a body:

1. Pick a vertex on a body.
2. Select two body faces.
3. Click OK.
Draw Line – Creates a plane by drawing a line on the screen.

To make a plane using the Draw Line method on a body:
1. Draw a linear line on the screen.
2. Click OK.

Mirror – Finds and creates a symmetrical plane of a mesh automatically. An initial plane
which roughly indicates the normal direction of the plane is necessary.
Lock Normal Direction Of Mirror Plane As Selected Planes’ uses the normal of the initial
plane as it is.
To make a plane using the Mirror method:
1. Select an initial plane.
2. Select a mesh.
3. Click OK.
Extreme Position – Creates a plane at a maximum or minimum position of a selected entity

in a specified direction.
To make a plane using the Extreme Position method:
1. Click the Direction button and select a linear entity such as a line, or vector.
2. Select a target entity.
3. Click OK.
The following images show generated planes at the extreme position to the Z direction on
an entity.
Probe Points – Creates a plane using probed points.
Flip Compensation – Flips the direction of compensation.
Fitting Type – Chooses a fitting type for creating geometry from probe points.

Best Fit – Finds best-fitted geometry from probe points using the least squares
fitting method.
Min. Bound – Finds maximum-inscribed geometry of a slab-like geometric

volume that encloses selected probe points using the minimum separation
fitting method.
Max. Bound – Finds minimum-circumscribed geometry of a slab-like geometric

fitting method.

[Stage 2]
Note:
The second stage can be used when defining methods to extract scan pair geometry from scan
data. When a ref. plane is created from scan data without using the nominal geometry definition
from the first stage, the second stage will not be used.
As Nominal – Automatically creates a ref. geometry pair from scan data as described
in the first stage.

Manual – Manually creates a ref. geometry pair from scan data as described in the first
stage.
See Also
Insert > Ref. geometry > Vector
Insert > Ref. Geometry > Circle
What
The Ref. Circle command creates a reference circle. A reference circle is a two-dimensional entity
that has a center and a radius. A ref. circle is used for adding assisting geometry for inspection.
Why
The Ref. Circle command is useful for:
• Defining a circle that can be used as nominal geometry in a automatic and systematic inspection
process
• Extracting a circle from scan data based on the definition of nominal geometry
• Creating circles that can divide a revolved target entity into multiple parts
• Creating a circle on scan data without using the definition of nominal data
• Inspecting a circularity on scan data without using the definition of nominal data
How to Use
A. How to create a circle that can be used as a nominal geometry
This method can be used to create a circle according to the definition of a pre-defined
2D draft or measurement instruction. A created circle can be used as nominal geometry
in an automatic and systematic inspection process that replaces scan data or for probing
a real part.
1. Go to Insert > Reg. Geometry > Circle or click the icon in the tool bar.

3. Specify the Input method as Center & Radius.
4. Set a projection plane that a circle can be projected on by clicking the Plane button and
selecting a plane.
5. Define the X and Y positions of a circle by clicking the Center button and specify its
radius.
B. How to extract a circle from a nominal face

1. Prepare aligned scan and nominal data. Go to Insert > Geometry > Circle or click the
2. Choose the Find Circle Center Method and select a circular edge.
or warning colors.

Options in Detail
[Stage 1]
Target Entities
method.
Methods
• Definition
• Extract
• Projection
• N Division
• Pick Plane & Surface
• Probe Points
Note:
When creating a ref. circle by defining its position and normal on scan data or by using a fitting
algorithm from a specific area of scan data, the ref. circle can be created without defining scan pair
geometry in the second stage. A created ref. circle is called a scan ref. circle and it can be used for
measuring the size of features on a model without using nominal data, inspecting a circularity on
scan data, or creating another ref. geometry as a reference.
The methods that can create a ref. circle from scan data directly are:
• Definition – When the center position and normal of a circle are defined by picking points on
scan data
• Extract
• Probe Points
When entering the editing mode by double-clicking a created ref. circle, scan points that were used

for creating the ref. circle will be highlighted. To change target scan points, click the Select None
button .
If necessary, a ref. circle that was created from scan data can be added into nominal data by using
Definition – Creates a ref. circle by using the geometric definition of a circle. The value can be
Center, Normal & Radius – Creates a circle using Position, Normal, and Radius values.
3 Positions – Creates a circle by three specified positions.
Extract – Extracts a circle from selected entities by using a fitting algorithm.
When a ref. plane is created by fitting a section of scan data, its circularity can be measured.
To inspect Pass or Fail of a ref. circle, set the Tolerance value in the Properties panel of the

Note:
This option is available when the geometry type of a selected entity is different from the
target geometry.
fitting method.
Min. Bound – Finds maximum-inscribed geometry of a tube-like geometric

method.
Max. Bound – Finds minimum-circumscribed geometry of a tube-like geometric

method.

will be used.
N Sigma

Project On Plane – Projects a circle onto a selected plane.
The following options are available in the second stage. When a hole on sheet
metal is scanned the hole boundary may be positioned below the sheet metal
surface because the thickness of the sheet metal is also scanned. The following
options are used to correctly project scan pair ref. geometry onto the surface of
a sheet metal part.
Specify Plane – Projects scan pair ref. geometry onto a fitting plane by fitting
scan data around the specified nominal face.
Fit Plane From Scan Pair – Projects scan pair ref. geometry onto a fitting plane
by fitting scan data around the initial scan pair ref. geometry.
Specify Plane
Fit Plane From Scan Pair
Fix Radius – Specifies the value of the radius of a circle if it is already known.
Projection – Creates a circle by projecting onto a planar entity. A circle and a planar entity
must be selected.
To make a circle using the Projection method:
2. Select a circular entity such as a ref. circle or edge.
3. Click OK.

Pick Multiple Points – Creates a circle by picking three or more points.
To make a circle using the Pick Multiple Points method:
2. Click OK.
N Division – Creates circles by dividing selected cylindrical or conical entities. Multiple circles
will be created evenly and perpendicularly to the selected entity.
To make a circle using the N Division method:
1. Select a cylindrical or conical entity.
2. Define a division method and a total number.
3. Select two points for a Start Point and End Point.
4. Click OK.
Offset – Creates planes by a specified offset distance and a total number on a selected
entity.
Uniform Offset
Pick Plane & Surface – Creates a circle on an intersection between a planar entity and an
entity that has a circular section such as a cylinder, cone, sphere, or torus.
Check Orthogonality – Allows the creation of a circle only if two planes are
orthogonal.
To make a circle using the Pick Plane & Surface method:

1. Select a circular section entity.
2. Set a plane.
3. Click OK.
Probe Points – Creates a circle using probed points.
Project On Plane – Projects a circle created by compensated probe points on a

selected plane.
Bolt Circle – Determines to make a bolt circle using single-probed circles.
Note:
Bolt circle is the notional circle determined by the center positions of the bolts
(circles). This circle can be created by selecting probe points that were used for
creating single-probed circles. It is useful for measuring circle diameter defined by
center points of patterned circles. If this option is checked, the Flip Compensation
option will be disabled.
Fitting Type – Chooses a fitting type to create geometry from probe points.
fitting method.

fitting method.

Max. Bound – Finds minimum-circumscribed geometry of a tube-like geometric
fitting method.
2D Numerical Input – Creates a ref. circle using the geometric definition of a circle and a
in the Model View. A ref. circle will be created with a specified radius value at a defined
position on the projection plane.
Center & Radius – Creates a ref. circle with a center position and radius values.
Note:
easily define position values of a circle by aligning the viewpoint.
Center – Specifies the center position of a circle. The center position can be
defined by selecting a point in the Model View or manually specifying numerical
values for the X, Y, and Z positions.
Note:
base plane as a projection plane, which has Z normal direction (X: 0, Y: 0, Z: 1), only
the X and Y input boxes will be displayed.
Radius – Specifies the radius of a circle.

Note:
The radius of a circle can be specified by measuring a distance or a radius from other
entity. To measure the radius from other entity, use the Measure Distance button
or the Measure Radius button .
3 Positions – Creates a ref. circle through three positions.
Position 1 / Position 2 / Position 3 – Specifies position values for each position.

The positions can be defined by selecting points on the Model View or manually
specifying numerical values in the X, Y, and Z boxes.
Note:
[Stage 2]
Note:

If a ref. circle is created from scan data without using the definition of the nominal geometry from
in the first stage.
stage.
See Also
Insert > Ref. geometry > Slot
Insert > Ref. Geometry > Slot
What
The Ref. Slot command creates a reference slot. A reference slot is a two-dimensional entity that has
two lines and two arcs. A ref. slot is used for adding assisting geometry for inspection.
Why
The Ref. Slot command is useful for:
• Defining a slot that can be used as nominal geometry in a automatic and systematic inspection
process
• Extracting a slot from scan data based on the definition of nominal geometry
• Creating a slot on scan data without using the definition of nominal data
How to Use
A. How to create a slot that can be used as a nominal geometry
This method can be used to create a slot according to the definition of a pre-defined 2D
draft or measurement instruction. A created slot can be used as nominal geometry in an
automatic and systematic inspection process that replaces scan data or for probing a real
part.

1. Go to Insert > Reg. Geometry > Slot or click the icon in the tool bar.
3. Specify the Input method as Coordinates & Size.
4. Set a projection plane that a slot can be projected on by clicking the Plane button and
selecting a plane.
5. Define the X and Y positions and the U axis of a slot by clicking the Center and U Axis
button then specify its width and length.
B. How to extract a slot from a nominal edge

1. Prepare aligned scan and nominal data. Go to Insert > Geometry > Slot or click the
2. Choose the Extract Method and select slot edges.
will be found on the scan data
or be displayed in warning colors.

Options in Detail
[Stage 1]
Target Entities
method.
Methods
• Definition
• Extract
• Projection
• Probe Points
Note:
When creating a ref. slot by defining the center positions of the side arcs and the normal on scan
data or by using a fitting algorithm from a specific area of scan data, the ref. slot can be created
without defining scan pair geometry in the second stage. A created ref. slot is called a scan ref. slot
and it can be used for measuring the size of a model without using nominal data or creating
The methods that can create a ref. slot from scan data directly are:
• Definition – When the center positions and normal of a slot are defined by picking points on
scan data.
• Extract
• Probe Points
When entering the editing mode by double-clicking a created ref. slot, scan points that were used
for creating the ref. slot will be highlighted. To change target scan points, click the Select None

button .
If necessary, a ref. slot that was created from scan data can be added into nominal data by using
Definition – Creates a slot by using the geometric definition of a slot. The value can be input
numerically or interactively picked by a point in the Model View.
Coordinate & Size – Creates a slot by specifying a Center, Normal, Width, and
Radius.
2 Centers, Normal & Radius – Creates a slot by specifying a Center1, Center2,

Normal, and Radius.
Extract – Extracts a circle from selected entities by using a fitting algorithm.

When a ref. plane is created by fitting to a section of scan data, its circularity can be measured.
To inspect the Pass or Fail status of a ref. circle, set the Tolerance value in the Properties
panel of the plane. It can be useful for calculating the GD&T in a scan-only inspection process.
fitting method.
entities in the normal direction from the center point of the best-fitted

geometry that was found using the least squares fitting method.
Best Fit Min. / Max. Bound from Least Squares

Fitting
will be used.
N Sigma
Sampling Ratio – Samples data points by a specified value. When the ratio is 100%,
all selected data will be used. When the ratio is 50%, half of the selected data will be
used.
Project On Plane – Projects a slot onto a selected plane.
a sheet metal part.

Specify Plane
Projection – Creates a slot by projecting onto a planar entity. A slot and a planar entity must
be selected.
To make a slot using the Projection method:
2. Select a slot entity such as a ref. slot or edge.
3. Click OK.
Pick Multiple Points – Creates a slot by picking six or more points.

To make a slot using the Pick Multiple Points method:
1. Pick six or more points.
2. Click OK.
Probe Points – Creates a slot using probed points.

Project On Plane – Projects a slot created by compensated probe points on a selected
plane.
fitting method.
Min. Bound – Finds minimum-fitted geometry that contacts the nearest probe
points in the normal direction from the center point of the best-fitted geometry
Max. Bound – Finds maximum-fitted geometry that contacts the farthest probe

Fitting
2D Numerical Input – Creates a ref. slot using the geometric definition of a slot and a
in the Model View. A ref. slot will be created at a defined position along the direction of the
defined projection plane.
Coordinate & Size – Creates a ref. slot with coordinates and geometric feature size.
Note:
easily define the position and direction of the U axis values of a slot by aligning the
viewpoint.
Center – Specifies the center position of a slot. The center position can be
defined by selecting a point in the Model View or manually specifying numerical
values for the X, Y, and Z positions.

Note:
U Axis – Specifies the direction of the longer axis of a slot.
Width – Specifies the width of a slot.
Length – Specifies the length of a slot.
Note:
The geometric values for each axis of a slot can be specified by measuring a distance
or a radius from another entity. To measure the geometric values from another entity,
use the Measure Distance button or the Measure Radius button .
2 Centers & Width – Creates a ref. slot with two Center positions and a Width value.
Center 1 / Center 2 – Specifies the position values for each center position of
the circular features of a slot. The positions can be defined by selecting points
on the Model View or manually specifying numerical values in the X, Y, and Z
boxes.

Note:
[Stage 2]
Note:
The second stage can be used to define methods for extracting scan pair geometry from scan data. If a
ref. slot is created from scan data without using the definition of the nominal geometry from the first
stage, the second stage will not be used.
As Nominal – Automatically creates a ref. geometry pair from scan data as described in
the first stage.
stage.
See Also
Insert > Ref. geometry > Circle
Insert > Ref. Geometry > Rectangle
What
The Ref. Rectangle command creates a reference rectangle. A reference rectangle is a two-
dimensional entity that has four lines and four right angles. A ref. rectangle is used for adding
assisting geometry for inspection.
Why
The Ref. Rectangle command is useful for:

• Defining a rectangle that can be used as nominal geometry in a automatic and systematic
inspection process
• Extracting a rectangle from scan data based on the definition of nominal geometry
• Creating a rectangle on scan data without using the definition of nominal data
How to Use
A. How to create a rectangle that can be used as a nominal geometry
This method can be used to create a rectangle according to the definition of a pre-
defined 2D draft or measurement instruction. A created rectangle can be used as
nominal geometry in an automatic and systematic inspection process that replaces scan
data or for probing a real part.
1. Go to Insert > Reg. Geometry > Rectangle or click the icon in the tool bar.
3. Specify the Input method as Coordinates & Size.
4. Set a projection plane that a rectangle can be projected on by clicking the Plane button
and selecting a plane.
5. Define the X and Y positions and the U axis of a rectangle by clicking the Center then U
Axis buttons and specify its width, height, and corner radius.
B. How to extract a rectangle from a nominal edge

1. Prepare aligned scan and nominal data. Go to Insert > Geometry > Rectangle or click
2. Choose the Extract Method and select edges on the rectangle.

The deviation between nominal geometry and pair geometry will be displayed in its
or warning colors.
Options in Detail
[Stage 1]
Target Entities
method.
Methods
• Definition
• Extract
• Projection
• Probe Points

Note:
When creating a ref. rectangle by defining its center positions and normal on scan data or by using
a fitting algorithm from a specific area of scan data, the ref. rectangle can be created without
defining scan pair geometry in the second stage. A created ref. rectangle is called a scan ref.
rectangle and it can be used for measuring the size of features on a model without using nominal
data or creating another ref. geometry as a reference.
The methods that can create a ref. rectangle from scan data directly are:
• Definition – When the center position and normal of a rectangle are defined by picking points
on scan data.
• Extract
• Probe Points
When entering the editing mode by double-clicking a created ref. rectangle, scan points that were
used for creating the ref. rectangle will be highlighted. To change target scan points, click the
Select None button .
If necessary, a ref. rectangle that was created from scan data can be added into nominal data by
using the Add Nominal command in the pop-up menu.
Definition – Creates a rectangle by using the geometric definition of a rectangle. The value
Coordinate & Size – Creates a rectangle by specifying a Center, Normal, Width,

Height, and Corner Radius.
3 Positions – Creates a rectangle by specifying three positions. Position1 and

Position2 define an edge of a rectangle and Position3 defines the height of the
rectangle.

Extract – Extracts a rectangle from selected entities by using a fitting algorithm.
Fitting Type – Chooses a fitting type to create a geometry from target entities. If a
fitting method.
Best Fit Min. / Max. Bound from Least

Squares Fitting
will be used.
N Sigma

Project On Plane – Projects a rectangle onto a selected plane.
a sheet metal part.
Specify Plane
Rounded Corner – Creates a rectangle with rounded corners.
Projection – Creates a rectangle by projecting onto a planar entity. A rectangle and a planar
entity must be selected.
To make a rectangle using the Projection method:
2. Select a rectangular entity such as a ref. rectangle or edge.
3. Click OK.

Pick Multiple Points – Creates a rectangle by picking six or more points.
To make a rectangle using the Pick Multiple Points method:
2. Click OK.
Probe Points – Creates a rectangle using probed points.
Project On Plane – Projects a rectangle created by compensated probe points on a

selected plane.
Fitting Type – Chooses a fitting type to create a geometry from probe points.
fitting method.

Squares Fitting

2D Numerical Input – Creates a ref. rectangle using the geometric definition of a rectangle
and a defined projection plane. Numeric values can be manually input or defined by picking
points in the Model View. A ref. rectangle will be created at the defined position on the
projection plane.
Coordinate & Size – Creates a ref. rectangle with coordinates and geometric feature
size.
Note:
To align a viewpoint along the normal direction of a selected plane entity, click the
easily define the position and direction of the U axis of a rectangle by aligning the
viewpoint.
Center – Specifies the center position of a rectangle. The center position can be
defined by selecting a point on the Model View or manually specifying numerical
values for X, Y, and Z positions.
Note:
U Axis – Specifies the direction of the U axis of a rectangle.
Width – Specifies the width of a rectangle.
Height – Specifies the height of a rectangle.

Corner Radius – Specifies the radius of the rounded corners of a rectangle.
Note:
The geometric values for each axis of a rectangle and the radius at each corner can be
specified by measuring a distance or a radius from another entity. To measure the
geometric values from another entity, use the Measure Distance button or the
Measure Radius button .
3 Positions – Creates a ref. rectangle using three positions.
Position 1 / Position 2 / Position 3 – Specifies values for each position. The

positions can be defined by selecting points in the Model View or manually
specifying numerical values in the X, Y, and Z boxes.
Note:
[Stage 2]
Note:

If a ref. rectangle is created from scan data without using the definition of the nominal geometry
the first stage.
stage.
Insert > Ref. Geometry > Regular Polygon
What
The Ref. Polygon command creates a reference polygon. A reference polygon is a two-dimensional
entity that has several equal lines. A ref. polygon is used for adding assisting geometry for inspection.
Why
The Ref. Polygon command is useful for:
• Defining a regular polygon that can be used as nominal geometry in a automatic and systematic
inspection process
• Extracting a regular polygon from scan data based on the definition of nominal geometry
• Creating a regular polygon on scan data without using the definition of nominal data
How to Use
A. How to create a regular polygon that can be used as nominal
geometry
This method can be used to create a regular polygon according to the definition of a pre-
defined 2D draft or measurement instruction. A created regular polygon can be used as
nominal geometry in an automatic and systematic inspection process that replaces scan
data or for probing a real part.
1. Go to Insert > Reg. Geometry > Regular Polygon or click the icon in the tool bar.

3. Specify the Input method as 2 Segment & Rounded Radius.
4. Set a projection plane that a regular polygon can be projected on by clicking the Plane
button and selecting a plane.
5. Define the X and Y positions of segments of a regular polygon by clicking the Start
Segment and End Segment buttons and specifying the number of edges and their
corner radii.
B. How to extract a regular polygon from a nominal edge

1. Prepare aligned scan and nominal data. Go to Insert > Geometry > Regular Polygon
or click the icon in the toolbar.
2. Choose the Extract Method and select polygon edges.

or warning colors.
Options in Detail
[Stage 1]
Target Entities
method.
Methods
• Definition
• Extract
• Projection
• Probe Points
Note:
When creating a ref. polygon by defining its start and end segments and normal on scan data or

by using a fitting algorithm from a specific area of scan data, the ref. polygon can be created
without defining scan pair geometry in the second stage. A created ref. polygon is called a scan ref.
polygon and it can be used for measuring the size of features on a model without using nominal
The methods that can create a ref. polygon from scan data directly are:
• Definition – When the start and end segments and normal of a regular polygon are defined by
picking points on scan data.
• Extract
• Probe Points
When entering the editing mode by double-clicking a created ref. polygon, scan points that were
used for creating the ref. polygon will be highlighted. To change target scan points, click the Select
None button .
If necessary, a ref. polygon that was created from scan data can be added into nominal data by
Definition – Creates a polygon by using the geometric definition of a polygon. The value
Coordinate & Size – Creates a polygon by specifying the Center, Normal, U Axis, No.
of Edges, and Rounded Corner.
2 Segment & Rounded Radius – Creates a polygon by specifying the Start Segment,
End Segment, Normal, Number of Edges and Corner Radius. The Start and End
Segments define an edge of a polygon and the Normal defines the direction of a
polygon.

Extract – Extracts a polygon from selected entities by using a fitting algorithm.
fitting method.

Squares Fitting
will be used.
N Sigma

used.
Project On Plane – Projects a rectangle onto a selected plane.
The following options are available in the second stage. When a hole in
sheetmetal is scanned the hole boundary may be positioned below the sheet
metal surface because the thickness of the sheet metal is also scanned. The
following options are used to correctly project scan pair ref. geometry onto the
surface of a sheet metal part.
Specify Plane
Rounded Corner – Creates a polygon with rounded corners.
No. Of Edges – Sets the number of edges for a polygonal feature shape.
Projection – Creates a polygon by projecting onto a planar entity. A polygonal entity and a
planar entity must be selected.

To make a polygon using the Projection method:
2. Select a polygonal entity such as a ref. polygon or edge.
3. Click OK.
Pick Multiple Points – Creates a polygon by picking seven or more points.

To make a polygon using the Pick Multiple Points method:
1. Pick seven or more points.
2. Click OK.
Probe Points – Creates a polygon using probed points.
Project On Plane – Projects a polygon created by compensated probe points on a

selected plane.
fitting method.

Squares Fitting
No. Of Edges – Sets the number of edges for a polygonal feature shape.
2D Numerical Input – Creates a ref. polygon using the geometric definition of a regular
polygon and a defined projection plane. Numeric values can be manually input or defined
by picking points in the Model View. A ref. polygon will be created at a defined position
along the direction of the defined projection plane.
Coordinate & Size – Creates a ref. regular polygon with coordinates and geometric
feature size.
Note:
To align a viewpoint along the normal direction of a selected planar entity, click the
easily define the position and direction of the U axis values of a regular polygon by
aligning the viewpoint.
Center – Specifies the center position of a regular polygon. The center position
can be defined by selecting a point in the Model View or manually specifying
numerical values for the X, Y, and Z positions.
Note:
U Axis – Specifies the direction of the U axis of a regular polygon.

Radius – Specifies the radius of circumscribed circle of a regular polygon.
No. Of Edges – Specifies the numbers of edges of a regular polygon.
Corner Radius – Specifies the radius of rounded shapes located at the corners
of a regular polygon.
Note:
The geometric values for a regular polygon and radius at each corner can be specified
by measuring a distance or a radius from another entity. To measure the geometric
values from another entity, use the Measure Distance button or the Measure
Radius button .
2 Segment & Rounded Radius – Creates a ref. polygon by defining the Start Position
and the End Position on a segment of a regular polygon.
Start Segment / End Segment – Specifies the position values for a start
position and end position of a segment of a regular polygon. The position values
can be specified by selecting points in the Model View or manually specified
numerical values in the X, Y, and Z boxes.

Note:
[Stage 2]
Note:
If a ref. polygon is created from scan data without using the definition of the nominal geometry
in the first stage.
stage.
Insert > Ref. Geometry > Cylinder
What
The Ref. Cylinder command creates a reference polygon. A reference cylinder is a three-dimensional
entity that has an axis, radius, and a height value. A ref. cylinder is used for adding assisting geometry
for inspection.
Why
The Ref. Cylinder command is useful for:
• Defining a cylinder that can be used as nominal geometry in a automatic and systematic
inspection process
• Extracting a cylinder from scan data based on the definition of nominal geometry
• Creating a cylinder on scan data without using the definition of nominal data

• Inspecting a cylindricity on scan data without using the definition of nominal data
How to Use
How to extract a cylinder from nominal faces
1. Prepare aligned scan and nominal data. Go to Insert > Geometry > Cylinder or click
2. Choose the Extract Method and select cylinder faces.
or warning colors.
Options in Detail
[Stage 1]
Target Entities
method.
Methods

• Definition
• Extract
• Pick Axis & Radius
• Convert
• Probe Points
Note:
When creating a ref. cylinder by defining its position and normal on scan data or by using a fitting
algorithm from a specific area of scan data, the ref. cylinder can be created without defining scan
pair geometry in the second stage. A created ref. cylinder is called a scan ref. cylinder and it can
be used for measuring the size of features on a model without using nominal data or creating
The methods that can create a ref. cylinder from scan data directly are:
• Definition – When the position and normal of a cylinder are defined by picking points on scan
data
• Extract
• Probe Points
When entering the editing mode by double-clicking a created ref. cylinder, scan points that were
used for creating the ref. cylinder will be highlighted. To change target scan points, click the Select
None button .
If necessary, a ref. cylinder that was created from scan data can be added into nominal data by
Definition – Creates a cylinder by using the geometric definition of a cylinder. The value can
be input numerically or interactively picked by a point in the Model View.
Position, Normal & Radius – Creates a cylinder by specifying a Position, and a

Normal which define the axis of the cylinder, and a Radius.

Note:
The radius of a cylinder can be specified by measuring a distance or a radius from another
entity. To measure geometric values from another entity, use the Measure Distance button
or the Measure Radius button .
Axis Points & Radius – Creates a cylinder by specifying a Start Position and an End
Position which define the axis of the cylinder, and a Radius.
Extract – Extracts a cylinder from selected entities by using a fitting algorithm.

When a ref. cylinder is created by fitting to a section of scan data, its cylindricity can be
measured. To inspect the Pass or Fail status of a ref. cylinder, set the Tolerance value in the
Properties panel of the vector. It can be useful for calculating the GD&T in a scan-only
inspection process.
Note:
target geometry.
fitting method.

method.

Max. Bound – Finds minimum-circumscribed geometry of a tube-like
geometric volume that encloses target entities using the minimum separation
fitting method.

Minimum Separation
will be used.
N Sigma
used.
Axis Constraint – Constrains the direction of an axis.
Use Specified Direction As It Is – Manually defines the direction of an axis. The

property or by manually typing values.
Pick Multiple Points – Creates a cylinder by picking seven or more points.

To make a cylinder using the Pick Multiple Points method:
2. Click OK.
Pick Axis & Radius – Creates a cylinder by picking a linear or axial entity as an axis and the
radius of the cylinder.
To make a vector using the Pick Axis & Radius method:
1. Select a linear or axial entity to define the cylinder axis.
2. Input the cylinder radius or click the Circular Entity button and pick a circular entity.
3. Click OK.
Convert – Creates a cylinder by selecting a circular entity.

To make a cylinder using the Convert method:
1. Pick a circular entity such as an edge or ref. circle.
2. Click OK.
Probe Points – Creates a cylinder using probed points.

fitting method.

fitting method.
Max. Bound – Finds minimum-circumscribed geometry of a tube-like

geometric volume that encloses selected probe points using the minimum
separation fitting method.


[Stage 2]
Note:
The second stage can be used to define methods for extracting scan pair geometry from scan
data. If a ref. cylinder is created from scan data without using the definition of the nominal
geometry from the first stage, the second stage will not be used.
in the first stage.

stage.
See Also
Insert > Ref. geometry > Cone
Insert > Ref. geometry > Sphere
Insert > Ref. geometry > Torus
Insert > Ref. Geometry > Cone
What
The Ref. Cone command creates a reference cone. A reference cone is a three-dimensional entity
that has an axis, two different radii, and a height value. A ref. cone is used for adding assisting
geometry for inspection.
Why
The Ref. Cone command is useful for:
• Defining a cone that can be used as nominal geometry for an automatic and systematic
inspection process
• Extracting a cone from scan data based on the definition of nominal geometry
• Creating a cone on scan data without using the definition of nominal data
How to Use
How to extract a cone from nominal faces
1. Prepare aligned scan and nominal data. Go to Insert > Geometry > Cone or click the
2. Choose the Extract Method and select cone faces.

or warning colors.
Options in Detail
[Stage 1]
Target Entities
method.
Methods
• Definition
• Extract
• Probe Points
Note:
When creating a ref. cone by defining its apex position and axis on scan data or by using a fitting
algorithm from a specific area of scan data, the ref. cone can be created without defining scan pair
geometry in the second stage. A created ref. cone is called a scan ref. cone and it can be used for
measuring the size of features on a model without using nominal data or creating another ref.
geometry as a reference.
The methods that can create a ref. cone from scan data directly are:

• Definition – When the apex position and axis of a cone are defined by picking points on scan
data
• Extract
• Probe Points
When entering the editing mode by double-clicking a created ref. cone, scan points that were used
for creating the ref. cone will be highlighted. To change target scan points, click the Select None
button .
If necessary, a ref. cone that was created from scan data can be added into nominal data by using
Definition – Creates a cone by using the geometric definition of a cone. The value can be
Apex Point & Apex Angle – Creates a cone by specifying an Apex Position, an Axis
and an Apex Angle.
Axis Points & Radii – Creates a cone by specifying a Top Position, a Bottom Position,
and a Bottom Radius.
Bottom, Radii, Axis & Height – Creates a cone by specifying an Axis, a Top Radius, a
Bottom Position, a Bottom Radius and a Height.

Note:
The geometric values of a cone can be specified by measuring a distance or a radius from
another entity. To measure geometric values from another entity, use the Measure Angle
button , Measure Distance button , or the Measure Radius button .
Extract – Extracts a cone from selected entities by using a fitting algorithm.
Note:
target geometry.
fitting method.

Squares Fitting

will be used.
N Sigma
used.
Fix Radius – Specifies the value of the radius of a cone if it is already known.
Use Specified Direction As It Is – Manually defines the direction of an axis. The

Pick Multiple Points – Creates a cone by picking eight or more points.

To make a cone using the Pick Multiple Points method:
1. Pick eight or more points.
2. Click OK.

Probe Points – Creates a cone using probed points.
fitting method.

Squares Fitting

[Stage 2]
Note:
If a ref. cone is created from scan data without using the definition of the nominal geometry from

in the first stage.
stage.
See Also
Insert > Ref. geometry > Cylinder
Insert > Ref. Geometry > Sphere
What
The Ref. Sphere command creates a reference sphere. A reference sphere is a three-dimensional
entity that has a center and a radius. A ref. sphere is used for adding assisting geometry for
inspection.
Why
The Ref. Sphere command is useful for:
• Defining a sphere that can be used as nominal geometry for an automatic and systematic
inspection process
• Extracting a sphere from scan data based on the definition of nominal geometry
• Creating a sphere on scan data without using the definition of nominal data
How to Use
How to extract a sphere from nominal faces
1. Prepare aligned scan and nominal data. Go to Insert > Geometry > Sphere or click the
2. Choose the Extract Method and select sphere faces.

will be found on the scan data
or warning colors.
Options in Detail
[Stage 1]
Target Entities
method.
Methods
• Definition
• Extract
• Convert
• Probe Points
Note:

When creating a ref. sphere by defining its center position on scan data or by using a fitting
algorithm from a specific area of scan data, the ref. sphere can be created without defining scan
pair geometry in the second stage. A created ref. sphere is called a scan ref. sphere and it can be
used for measuring the size of features on a model without using nominal data or creating another
ref. geometry as a reference.
The methods that can create a ref. sphere from scan data directly are:
• Definition – When the center position of a sphere are defined by picking a point on scan data
• Extract
• Probe Points
When entering the editing mode by double-clicking a created ref. sphere, scan points that were
used for creating the ref. sphere will be highlighted. To change target scan points, click the Select
None button .
If necessary, a ref. sphere that was created from scan data can be added into nominal data by using
Definition – Creates a sphere by using the geometric definition of a sphere and specifying
a Center and Radius values. The value can be input numerically or interactively picked by a
point in the Model View.
Note:
The radius of a sphere can be specified by measuring a distance or a radius from another entity. To
measure geometric values from another entity, use the Measure Distance button or the
Extract – Extracts a sphere from selected entities by using a fitting algorithm.

Note:
target geometry.
fitting method.

Squares Fitting
will be used.
N Sigma

used.
Fix Radius – Specifies the value of the radius of a sphere if it is already known.
Pick Multiple Points – Creates a sphere by picking four or more points.

To make a sphere using the Pick Multiple Points method:
1. Pick four or more points.
2. Click OK.
Convert – Creates a sphere by selecting a circular entity.

To make a sphere using the Convert method:
1. Pick a circular entity such as an edge or ref. circle.
2. Click OK.
Probe Points – Creates a sphere using probed points.
fitting method.

Squares Fitting
Fix Radius – Specifies the value of the radius of a sphere if it is already known.
[Stage 2]
Note:
If a ref. sphere is created from scan data without using the definition of the nominal geometry from
in the first stage.
stage.
See Also
Insert > Ref. Geometry > Torus
What
The Ref. Torus command creates a reference torus. A reference torus is a three-dimensional entity
created by revolving a circle that has a center, axis, and major and minor radii. A ref. torus is used for
adding assisting geometry for inspection.

Why
The Ref. Torus command is useful for:
• Defining a torus that can be used as nominal geometry in an automatic and systematic
inspection process
• Extracting a torus from scan data based on the definition of nominal geometry
• Creating a torus on scan data without using the definition of nominal data
How to Use
How to extract a sphere from nominal faces
1. Prepare aligned scan and nominal data. Go to Insert > Geometry > Torus or click the icon
in the toolbar.
2. Choose the Extract Method and select torus faces.
or warning colors.

Options in Detail
[Stage 1]
Target Entities
method.
Methods
• Definition
• Extract
• Probe Points
Note:
When creating a ref. torus by defining its center position and axis on scan data or by using a fitting
algorithm from a specific area of scan data, the ref. torus can be created without defining scan pair
geometry in the second stage. A created ref. torus is called a scan ref. torus and it can be used for
measuring the size of features on a model without using nominal data or creating another ref.
The methods that can create a ref. torus from scan data directly are:
• Definition – When the center position and axis of a torus are defined by picking points on scan
data
• Extract
• Probe Points
When entering the editing mode by double-clicking a created ref. torus, scan points that were used
for creating the ref. torus will be highlighted. To change target scan points, click the Select None
button .
If necessary, a ref. torus that was created from scan data can be added into nominal data by using
Definition – Creates a torus by specifying a Center, Axis, Major Radius and Minor Radius
of a torus.

Note:
The radius of a torus can be specified by measuring a distance or a radius from another entity. To
measure the geometric values from another entity, use the Measure Distance button or the
Extract – Extracts a sphere from selected entities by using a fitting algorithm.
Note:
target geometry.
fitting method.

Squares Fitting

will be used.
N Sigma

property or by manually typing the values.
Pick Multiple Points – Creates a torus by picking seven or more points.

To make a torus using the Pick Multiple Points method:
2. Click OK.
Probe Points – Creates a torus using probed points.

fitting method.

Squares Fitting
used for finding the direction of a fitting geometry.

[Stage 2]
Note:
If a ref. torus is created from scan data without using the definition of the nominal geometry from
in the first stage.
stage.

See Also
Insert > Ref. Geometry > Coordinate
What
The Ref. Coordinate command creates a reference coordinate. A reference coordinate is a local
coordinate system that a user can use to define additional coordinates.
Why
The Ref. Coordinate command is useful for:
• Defining coordinates that can be used as nominal geometry in a automatic and systematic
inspection process
• Defining local coordinates on scan data
• Transforming scan data to a specific coordinate system
How to Use
How to generate a coordinate using three planes
1. Go to Insert > Ref. Geometry > Coordinate or click the icon in the toolbar.
2. Change the method to Intersect 3 Planes.
3. Select three perpendicular faces.

Options in Detail
[Stage 1]
Target Entities
Entities – Selects target entities.
Methods
• Definition
• Extract
• Pick Point & 2 Lines
• Pick Point & Coordinate
• Insert 3 Planes
• Tangent
• Convert
Note:
When creating a ref. coordinate by defining its origin position and axises on scan data or by using
a fitting algorithm from a specific area of scan data, the ref. coordinate can be created without
defining a scan pair geometry in the second stage. The created ref. coordinate is called as a scan
ref. coordinate. It can be used for measuring the size of features of a model without using a nominal
The methods that can create a ref. coordinate from scan data directly are:
• Definition – When the origin position and axises of a coordinate are defined by picking points
on scan data.
• Extract
• Tangent
When entering the editing mode by double-clicking a created ref. coordinate, scan points that were
used for creating the ref. coordinate will be highlighted. To change target scan points, click the
Select None button .
If necessary, a ref. coordinate that was created from scan data can be added into nominal data by

Definition – Creates a ref. coordinate by the geometric definition of the coordinate.
Origin & Axis – Creates a coordinate using the Origin and Axis1 value.
Origin – Selects a point in the Model View or allows the manual input of the X,
Y and Z values.
Axis1 / Axis2 – Selects a point on the model to acquire the direction of an object
or by specifying a numerical value. The X, Y or Z buttons align the normal to the
selected direction.
Order – Defines the order of Axis1 and Axis2 as X, Y or Z. If the order is XY,
Axis1 will be set to the X direction and Axis2 will be set to the Y direction.
Origin & Rotation – Creates a coordinate with Origin and Rotation values.
Origin – Selects a point in the Model View or allows the manual input of the X,
Y and Z values.
Rotation – Specifies the degree of an angle of an axis that a coordinate will

rotate around.
Extract – Extracts a coordinate from selected entities using a fitting algorithm.
will be used.

N Sigma
used.
Pick Multiple Points – Creates a coordinate by picking two or more points. For more
information about the Order option, see the Definition method.
To make a coordinate using the Pick Multiple Points method:
2. Click OK.
Pick Point & 2 Lines – Creates a coordinate from a point used for an origin and two lines
used for directions. The direction of the coordinate on the first and second line will follow
the settings in the Order option. For more about the Order option, see the Definition
method.
Pick Point & Coordinate – Creates a coordinate from a point used for an origin and another
coordinate.

Intersect 3 Planes – Creates a coordinate from three planar entities.
Check Orthogonality – Allows the creation of a coordinate only when three planes
are orthogonal.
Tangent – Creates a coordinate tangent to a manually picked entity using a point on a mesh
or a body face.
Convert – Creates a coordinate by selecting a ref. slot or a ref. rectangle.
[Stage 2]
Note:
If a ref. coordinate is created from scan data without using the definition of the nominal geometry

in the first stage.
stage.
7.4.6. Insert > 3D GD&T
What
The Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing, or GD&T menu features processes for analyzing the
size, form, orientation, and location of features in 3D spaces as well as evaluating the Pass/Fail status
of features within a user-defined tolerance. The size of features can be analyzed using geometric
dimensions such as Linear Dimension, Angular Dimension, and Radial Dimension. The form,
orientation, and location of features can be analyzed using geometric tolerances such as Flatness,
Circularity, Cylindricity, and Parallelism.
The following are the GD&Ts provided in Geomagic Verify:
Geometric Dimensions Geometric Tolerances

- Linear Dimension - Flatness
- Angular Dimension - Straightness
- Radial Dimension - Circularity
- Cylindricity
- Bore Depth Orientation Type
- Counterbore - Parallelism
- Countersink - Perpendicular
- Thickness - Angularity
- Elliptical
Run-out Type
- Run-out
- Total Run-out
Profile Type
- Line profile
- Surface profile
Location Type
- Concentricity
- Symmetry
- Position

The Insert > 3D GD&T command enters the 3D GD&T mode where GD&Ts and datums can be
generated. When GD&Ts are created, new inspection features named 3D GD&T1, 3D GD&T2… will
be created in the Inspection Feature tree.
For information about 3D GD&T, go to Tools > GD&T Tools.
Note:
2D GD&T are supported in the section mode.
7.4.7. Insert > Deviation

The Deviation menu features processes for comparing 3D scan data to nominal data within a user-
defined maximum deviation value based on a variety of criteria, such as size, thickness, a shape of a
boundary or curve, or the geometric features of a model. The comparison is performed by finding
scan points within the maximum deviation and measuring distances projected from scan points
onto a nominal entity along a user-defined direction. A normal direction of a nominal entity is used
as the projection direction by default. This process assumes that 3D scan data is aligned to nominal
data.
The Deviation menu provides various deviation methods to inspect 3D digital data. After executing
a deviation, it is registered as inspection features in the Inspection Feature Tree with its history.
Deviation parameters can be edited at another time to get the result again.
History Tree of Deviation Features
Overall Deviation
• Whole Deviation

Calculates a gap distance by projecting all scan points onto nominal data.
• Comparison Point
Expresses the deviation of a point on nominal data and a point on scan data.
Deviation with Curve

• Boundary Deviation
Performs comparisons on the boundary regions between design data and scan data and displays
the results with colored lines or points.
• Curve Deviation
Performs comparisons between a nominal curve and a scan curve and displays the deviation
results with colored lines or points.
• Silhouette Deviation
Compares a silhouette of scan data to nominal data and displays the results with colored lines or
points.
• Virtual Edge Deviation

Analyzes the deviation at sharp edges of scan data and nominal data.
Geometry Deviation
• Geometry Deviation
Compares analytic geometries such as cylinders, circles, and planes between nominal and scan
data.
What
The Whole Deviation command calculates gap distance by projecting all scan points onto nominal
data. Deviation is displayed using color mapping which helps to analyze negative and positive
deviation flow through a whole part.

Nominal and Scan Whole Deviation
Why
The Whole Deviation command is useful for:
• Analyzing the overall deviation flow of a part

• Analyzing freeform surfaces
• Analyzing deformations during manufacturing
How to Use
How to the deviation of a whole part
1. Import and align nominal and scan data. Go to Insert > Deviation > Whole Deviation
2. The first stage will define the calculation method. Choose the Shape option for the
Method, and the Min. Distance option for the Projection Direction.
3. Click the Next Stage button . The deviation between the nominal and scan parts will
be calculated and displayed using a color map.

4. To analyze gap distance values on specific positions, select the Picking method for Local
Average Tagging and select desired points on the model. The gap distance will be
displayed in tags that will be colored as pass or fail based on the tolerance range.
Note:
A display of the deviation tag color follows the deviation color defined in colorbar by default
and its result value is displayed by Go/NG (No Go) color.
5. Click OK to complete the command. The display properties of boundary deviation

entities can be changed in the Properties panel.
The Tabular View displays tags and statistical values.

Options in Detail
[Stage 1]
Calculation Options
Scan Data Sampling Ratio – Samples scan data points by a specified value. When the ratio
is 100%, all selected data will be used. When the ratio is 50%, half of the selected data will be
used. When using large data sets sampling with a smaller ratio will not sacrifice registration
results but will decrease processing time.
Calculation Methods
Shape – Compares the deviation between nominal and scan surfaces.
Max. Deviation – Specifies the maximum distance used to ignore scan points when
deviation is over a specified value. Any scan points over the maximum distance will be
treated as outlier data.
Thickness – Compares the thickness between nominal and scan thickness. This command is
useful for inspecting the wall thickness of a part such as a plastic part or blade part.
Two methods are available to detect the thickness on a point.

The By Ray Firing method shoots a ray and detects the thickness when the ray meets the
opposite side.

The By Intact Sphere method internally generates a sphere and detects the thickness when
the sphere meets another scan area.
When scan data is noisy it can cause incorrect calculations in thickness as displayed in the
following image. In this situation, moving the slider of the Ignore Neighboring Noise option
to More can help to provide a correction calculation.
Max. Thickness specifies a maximum thickness to be reported.
Projection Direction
Min. Distance – Projects scan points to a minimum distance to express deviation.
When the Apply Single Component option is checked, deviation will be analyzed in a
specific direction. If the component direction is X, only the X direction value of the deviation
will be displayed.

Custom – Projects scan points in a specific direction to express deviation.
[Stage 2]
Display Options
Color Map – Displays results as a color map using a defined color range.
Show Contour Line – Displays black curves between color boundaries to clearly
distinguish a range when neighboring colors are similar.
Show Contour Line Hide Contour Line
Whisker – Displays deviation results as displacement vectors with colors defined by a

deviation color range. Whiskers also serve to check the projection direction of each scan point.
To adjust the whisker size, set the value manually or use the slider next to Whisker Multiplier.

To adjust the amount of whiskers, set the value manually or use the slider next to Whisker
Display Ratio.
Color Point – Displays deviation results on all scan points with colors as defined by a deviation
color range.
Use Tolerance Color – Uses the tolerance color to color a model based on a user
defined range. The tolerance colors can be changed in the display tab in the preferences
or can be manually edited in the color bar.
With Tolerance Color Without Tolerance Color

Over Tol. Count – Marks the highest positions of deviation groups over a specified tolerance.

Over Tol. Count: 3
Under Tol. Count – Marks the lowest positions of deviation groups under a specified
tolerance.
Picking – Marks deviation values on selected positions of a model.
Linear Pattern – Marks deviation points by using the linear pattern method. A start position
needs to be specified using the Seed Position function. Set Direction1 and Direction 2 by
picking a linear entity or an entity that has an axis. Set the No. Of Instances and Distance to
make multiple points.
Direction 1: Direction 2:
Interval: 10 Interval: 5
Instances: 5 Instances: 3
Circular Pattern – Marks deviation points by using a circular method. A start position needs
to be specified using the Seed Position function. Set the Rotation Axis by picking a linear
entity or an entity that has an axis. Set the No. Of Instances and Interval Angle to make
multiple points. When Equal Spacing is checked, a circle will be equally divided by a specified
number of instances.

No. Of Instances: 10 Equal Spacing
Interval Angle: 15
Along Curve – Marks deviation points on selected curves. A start position needs to be
specified using the Seed Position function. Select curves or edges as Path Curve. Set No. Of
Instances and Distance to make multiple points. When Equal Spacing is checked, a curve
will be equally divided by a specified the number of instances.

Distance: 5
Cylindrical Pattern – Marks deviation points on a cylindrical face by using a cylindrical

pattern method. A start position needs to be specified using the Seed Position function. Set
the Rotation Axis by picking a linear entity or an entity that has an axis. Set No. Of Instances
and Interval Angle to make multiple points. When Equal Spacing is checked, a circle will be
equally divided by a specified number of instances. To offset the pattern to the axis direction,
set No. Of Offset and Distance.
Spherical Pattern – Marks deviation points on a spherical face by using a spherical pattern
method. A start position needs to be specified using the Seed Position function. Set the
Sphere Center and Polar Axis by selecting an entity. Set the Sphere Theta Option and
Sphere Phi Option to make multiple points.

Theta Option: Phi Option:
No. Of Instance: 6 No. Of Instance: 3
Interval Angle: 15 Interval Angle: 30
See Also
What
The Comparison Point command expresses the deviation of a point on nominal data and a point
on scan data. The mean value of the distance between each nominal and scan point are used to
calculate a comparison point. Each comparison point consists of an x, y, and z location point and the
normal, radius, max. angle, and max. distance criteria values.
Comparison Points Result Detail View of Comparison Point

Why
The Comparison Point command is useful for:
• Analyzing the accurate mean value on a small area

• Analyzing the deviation on specific positions
• Managing critical positions for a part
How to Use
How to compare deviation on specific CAD positions
1. Import and align nominal and scan data. Go to Insert > Deviation > Comparison Point
2. Change the distance of the Position Snap option to 10.
3. Change the view to top of the model. When the mouse cursor is hovered is over the
model, its position coordinates will be displayed.

4. Select multiple points on the model using the snap function. When a point is selected its
deviation and pass/fail color will be displayed.

Note:
The preview function is available only in the Pick Points method. When comparison points
are added on a model while the Preview function is enabled, the deviation result will be
calculated in real-time. When the option values of the comparison points on the dialog tree
are changed, they will be applied to calculation result in real-time and the result will be
changed. If a radius being searched has many poly-vertices or if the options are frequently
changed, the calculation speed may be slower; so it may be helpful to disable this option.
Options in Detail

Methods
Pick Points – Marks deviation points on selected positions on a model. To reuse exported
comparison points or other position data, use the Create Comparison Points From File
button . Points in the .cmpt, .igs, .iges, .step, or ascii text file format can be imported.
To export comparison points:

1. Go to File > Export.
2. Choose a Deviation type.
3. Select a comparison point feature from an Inspection Feature or the Model tree.
4. Click OK.
5. Choose a file type and click the Save button.
Note:
When using the ASCII Converter in the Comparison Point From File function to import
comparison points, the projection direction on the nominal data is decided by normal information
(I, j, k) in the file and each comparison point will use the face normal of the projected position. If all
points have the same normal information in the file, a message box will be displayed that displays:
“The points in the file have the same normal information. Do you want to change normal in criteria
option?” If yes is clicked, the Normal option under the criteria of the comparison point will be
changed to the Custom direction. This custom direction can be modified.
If a file does not contain normal information or ignores normal information during the
import process, points will be projected to the minimum distance and each comparison
point will use the face normal of the projected position.
Pick Probe Point – Marks deviation points by using probed points.

Note:
The projection direction of linear patterned comparison points will be defined by an orthogonal
direction constructed by Direction1 and 2. The deviation between nominal data and scan data will
be measured at the projected positions on a nominal face.
Circular Pattern – Marks deviation points by using a circular method. A start position needs to
be specified using the Seed Position function. Set the Rotation Axis by picking a linear entity
or an entity that has an axis. Set the No. Of Instances and Interval Angle to make multiple
points. When Equal Spacing is checked, a circle will be equally divided by a specified number
of instances.

Interval Angle: 15
Along Curve – Marks deviation points on selected curves. A start position needs to be specified
using the Seed Position function. Select curves or edges as Path Curve. Set No. Of Instances
and Distance to make multiple points. When Equal Spacing is checked, a curve will be equally
divided by a specified the number of instances.

Distance: 5

To offset comparison points from a curve, input an Offset value. This option is useful for directly
generating comparison points by offsetting distances from the boundary of nominal data.
Offset from a boundary
Cylindrical Pattern – Marks deviation points on a cylindrical face by using a cylindrical pattern
Rotation Axis by picking a linear entity or an entity that has an axis. Set No. Of Instances and
Interval Angle to make multiple points. When Equal Spacing is checked, a circle will be
Spherical Pattern – Marks deviation points on spherical face using the spherical pattern
method. You need to pick or type a start position using Seed Position. Set Sphere Center and
Polar Axis by selecting an entity. Set Sphere Theta Option and Sphere Phi Option to make
multiple points.

Criteria
The following image displays how to judge correct scan points.

• Projected scan points within a comparison point radius can be candidates
• Scan points over a maximum distance will be ignored
• Scan points over a maximum angle will be ignored
Nominal Value – Specifies a standard deviation value that judges the deviation result as a go
or no-go status. When deviation results are between the combination of Nominal Value and
Low Tolerance and Nominal Value and High Tolerance, they will show as Pass or Warning.
Otherwise, it will Fail. When scan data if offset by a constant distance, the offset distance can
be specified as a nominal value.
Normal – Decides the normal vectors of a comparison point. A normal vector is used to classify
whether scan points are normal within a Max. Angle. The Auto method automatically gets the
normal vectors from the face of nominal data. The Custom method allows manually
specification of the X, Y, and Z vectors for a custom normal direction.
Radius – Specifies a spherical radius of a comparison point. Scan points projected onto a
sphere will be averaged and the application will calculate the deviation between the
comparison points on the nominal data and scan data.
Max. Angle – Specifies the maximum normal angle difference between a comparison point

and scan points. When a projected scan point has a normal direction is over a given angle
compared to the normal direction of a comparison point, it will be ignored during calculation.
Scan points with a similar normal direction to a specific position of normal data can be used for
accurate calculations.
Max. Distance – Specifies the maximum deviation between scan and nominal data. Scan
points over a given distance will be ignored during calculation.
Apply Single Component – Analyzes deviation in a specific direction. If the component

direction is X, all X direction values of the deviation will be displayed.
Calculation Options
Shape – Compares the deviation between nominal surfaces and scan surfaces.
Thickness – Compares the thickness between nominal and scan thickness. This command is
useful for inspecting the wall thickness of a part such as a plastic part or blade part.
Same As Comparison Point – Projects scan points along the normal direction of comparison
points that are set in the Normal option under Criteria.
Custom – Projects scan points in a specific direction to express deviation.
Use Specific Tolerance – Sets the default tolerance that

See Also
What
The Boundary Deviation command performs comparisons on the boundary regions between
design data and scan data and displays the results with color lines or color points. A boundary is the
border between a model and space and can be shown on an open model such a sheet metal part.
Boundaries Boundary Deviation
Why
The Boundary Deviation command is useful for:
• Analyzing an outer shape

• Analyzing holes in sheet metal
• Trim line inspection
How to Use
How to analyze a boundary
1. Prepare aligned scan and nominal data. Go to Insert > Deviation > Boundary Deviation

2. Pick a boundary on the nominal data.
3. Click the Next Stage button . Deviation will be calculated and shown in a color map.
4. Select the Picking method under Local Average Tagging and select points on a
boundary to check specific deviation results.
Note:

Options in Detail
[Stage 1]
Boundaries – Selects a single or multiple boundaries on nominal data.
Note:
Scan boundaries can be shown by checking Boundary in the Display tab.

Apply Single Component – Analyzes deviation in a specific direction.
Normal – Displays deviation along the normal direction from nominal data.
Tangent – Displays deviation along the tangent direction of nominal data.
The following image shows Normal and Tangent components on a boundary point:
User Define – Defines a custom component direction of a deviation. Specify direction

values by selecting a linear entity or an entity that has an axis.
Max. Deviation – Limits the maximum deviation. Scan points over the given distance will
Compensate Boundary For Side Wall Or Bending Shape – Compensates boundaries

positioned below a sheet metal surface due to the sheet metal thickness also being scanned,
by projecting onto a scan surface.
The results of a boundary deviation will be different based on whether this option is used or
not.
Boundary Deviation Boundary Deviation

Without Compensation With Compensation
Search Distance – Finds a scan surface by specifying the distance value from a
nominal boundary.

[Stage 2]
Display Options
deviation color range. Whiskers also serve to check the projection direction of each scan
point.
To adjust the whisker size, set the value manually or use the slider next to Whisker
Multiplier.
Display Ratio.
Show Single Component Whisker – Displays the defined direction of whiskers when
the Apply Single Component option is applied in the first stage.
Minimum Distance Whisker – Displays the minimum distance of whisker and is

available when the Apply Single Component option is applied in the first stage.
Single & Minimum Whisker – Displays the defined direction of whiskers and the
minimum distance of whisker and is available when the Apply Single Component
option is applied in the first stage.
Color Point – Displays deviation results on all scan points with colors as defined by a
deviation color range.
Use Tolerance Color – Uses the tolerance color to color a model based on a user
defined range. The tolerance colors can be changed in the display tab in the
preferences or can be manually edited in the color bar.

Over Tol. Count: 3

tolerance.
specified using the Seed Position function. Select curves or edges as Path Curve. Set No.
Of Instances and Distance to make multiple points. When Equal Spacing is checked, a
curve will be equally divided by a specified the number of instances.
See Also
What
The Curve Deviation command performs comparisons between a nominal curve and a scan curve,
and displays the deviation results as a colored line or point.

Curve Deviation Display Result using Whiskers
Why
The Curve Deviation command is useful for:
• Analyzing freeform shapes

• Analyzing character lines
• Analyzing section curves
How to Use
How to analyze curves between nominal and scan data
1. Prepare aligned scan and nominal data. Create two curves using the Tools > Curve Tools
command, one on the nominal data and one on the scan data. Go to Insert > Deviation
> Curve Deviation or click the icon in the toolbar.
2. Select and designate each curve as a Nominal Curve and a Scan Curve.
3. Click the Next Stage button . Curve deviation results will be displayed.

4. Moves the slider for the Whisker Multiplier option to the right to increase the whisker
distance.
5. Select the Picking method under Local Average Tagging and select points on the
model to display specific deviation values used to analyze gap distances.
Gap distances will be displayed with a pass or fail color in the tags based on a defined
tolerance range.
Note:


Options in Detail
[Stage 1]
Nominal Curve – Selects a nominal curve that serves as a reference curve.
Scan Curve – Selects a scan curve that serves as a comparison curve.
Apply Single Component – Analyzes deviation in a specific direction.
Max. Deviation – Limits the maximum deviation. Scan points over the given distance will
[Stage 2]
Display Options
point.

Multiplier.
Display Ratio.
Use Tolerance Color - Uses the tolerance color to color a model based on a user


Over Tol. Count: 3
tolerance.

See Also
What
The Silhouette Deviation command compares a silhouette of scan data to nominal data and
displays the results with color lines or color points.
Silhouette Deviation
Why
The Silhouette Deviation command is useful for:
• Analyzing an outer profile of a plastic part

• Analyzing trim lines for sheet metal parts
How to Use
How to analyze a silhouette between nominal and scan data
1. Prepare aligned scan and nominal data. Go to Insert > Deviation > Silhouette Deviation

2. Choose Straight Silhouette and select nominal faces as Reference faces.
3. Select a linear entity or an entity that has an axis as a Direction. This example uses a ref.
plane.
4. Click the Next Stage button . Deviation results will be displayed as a color map.
boundary to display specific deviation values.

Note:
The display properties of boundary deviation entities can be changed in the Properties
panel.

Options in Detail
[Stage 1]
Display Options
Straight Silhouette – Creates a silhouette by projecting a nominal body or faces on a plane.
Reference – Selects a nominal body or faces of a body as a reference.
Direction – Defines the direction of a light. Using the direction a silhouette will be
created on a virtual plane.
Revolving Silhouette – Creates a silhouette by revolving a nominal body or faces on a plane.

Entities can be selected for Reference, Rotation Axis, and Direction.
Reference – Selects a nominal body or faces of a body as a reference.

Rotation Axis – Defines a revolving axis. A linear entity or an entity that has an axis
can be selected.
Direction – Defines a projection plane by selecting a planar entity.
Calculation Options
Scan Search Radius – Defines a searching zone size to find a scan point around a selected
reference.
Use Specific Tolerance – Sets a default tolerance for faces of nominal data and is used to in
inspection of comparison points.
Max Deviation – Specifies a maximum deviation between scan and nominal data. Scan
Local Coordinate
Origin – Defines a local coordinate to serve as an origin. The local coordinate settings affect
the location of a model.

that has an axis.
[Stage 2]
Display Options
Use Specific Tolerance – Sets a default tolerance for faces of nominal data and is used to in
inspection of comparison points. The Flip Sign of Deviation Result button reverses
positive and negative results.

point.
Multiplier.
Display Ratio.


Over Tol. Count: 3
tolerance.

See Also
What
The Virtual Edge Deviation command analyzes deviation at sharp edges of scan data and nominal
data. Many real world parts edges are rounded by filleting or abrasion caused by the movement of
a related mechanical part. The Virtual Edge Deviation command can calculate a virtual edge from
rounded edges and compare the deviation.

Virtual Edge Virtual Edge Deviation Result
Why
The Virtual Edge Deviation command is useful for:
• Trim line inspection

• Analyzing abrasion on edges
How to Use
How to analyze a virtual edge between nominal and scan data
1. Prepare aligned scan and nominal data. Go to Insert > Deviation > Virtual Edge
Deviation or click the icon in the toolbar.
2. Choose the By Common Edge method to use sharp edges without fillets on CAD data.
Select shared edges.
3. Click the Next Stage button . Deviation results will be displayed as a color map.

boundary to display specific deviation values.
Note:
panel.

Options in Detail
[Stage 1]
Methods
By Common Edges – Selects a common edge that has two adjacent faces. When edges do
not have a fillet or chamfer, use this method.
By Edge Groups – Selects a group of two edges of faces that are apart from each other. Left
Edges and Right Edges must be chosen to find the intersection of the two groups adjacent
faces. The order of edges is not important. When edges have a fillet or chamfer, use this
method.
Calculation Options
Extend Length – Defines an extension distance of faces used to intersect two face groups
and to find sharp edges from intersections.

Good Bad

Max. Deviation – Specifies a maximum deviation between scan and nominal data. Scan
[Stage 2]
Methods
point.
Multiplier.
Display Ratio.


Over Tol. Count: 3
tolerance.

See Also
What
The Geometry Deviation command compares analytic geometries such as cylinders, circles, and
planes between nominal and scan data.
Geometry Deviation (i.e. Cylinders)
Why

The Geometry Deviation command is useful for:
• Analyzing important geometries on a part

• Comparing the size of geometries
How to Use
How to extract and compare geometries
1. Go to Insert > Deviation > Geometry Deviation or click the icon in the toolbar.
2. To extract cylinders, choose Cylinder as the Geometry Type.
3. Nominal data is automatically selected as the Target. The application will search
cylinders from a selected target. Set the Position, Diameter, and Angle tolerances and
click the Next Stage button .
4. Deviation results will be attached to all cylinders in the model.
Note:
Display properties in an annotation may be difference from the image above. Annotation
display properties can be changed by using the Annotation Display Control in the pop-up
menu.

5. Select unnecessary annotations and click the Delete Tag button .
panel.
Options in Detail
[Stage 1]

Geometry Type
Geometry Type – Chooses a type of geometry to inspect.
Target – Selects nominal body or faces. When the command runs, an entire nominal body
will be automatically set as the Target and prepared to automatically find geometries. To
find geometries only for some faces, unselect the whole body and then select faces.
Auto-Generation Options
Merge Separated Part Of Same Shape – Extracts separated partial areas from a single
geometry as a single geometry. The following images show what happens when three
cylindrical faces are selected.
Selected targets
Result with the Geometry Deviation Result without the Geometry Deviation
option option
Create Only When Whole Shape Is Covered – Extracts only a perfect shape of a geometry
type. If a half face of a cylinder is selected as a target, it will not be regarded as a cylinder. To
extract a shape with only partial parts of a geometry type, do not use this option.
With this option, it cannot be a cylinder With this option, it can be a cylinder
[Stage 2]

Manual Create – Enforces features as a desired geometry type by fitting select faces
manually if desired features are not extracted as a selected geometry type in the previous
stage. This option is useful when using a mesh as nominal data.
To manually extract a geometry:

1. Click the button.
2. Select faces.
3. Click the Accept button.
To release the selection of Target, push the Esc button on the keyboard.
To remove unnecessary annotation

1. Select annotations.
2. Click The Delete Tag button or push the Delete button on the keyboard.
Note:
If a tag is selected in the second stage, all information of selected geometry deviation is displayed
in the Properties panel. Visibility, tolerance, scan pair search option, nominal fitting options and
nominal constraint options of selected tag can be individually controlled.
See Also

7.4.8. Insert > Plot
What
The Plot command analyzes the thickness, curvature and angle of scan data and displays the results
as a color map. This function can be applied only to scan data that is a point cloud or a mesh, making
nominal data unnecessary.
Thickness Plot Curvature Plot Angle Plot
Why
The Plot command is useful for:
• Analyzing the thickness plot of a part

• Analyzing the surface curvature or fillet radius of a part
• Analyzing the draft angle of a part
How to Use
How to analyze a blade thickness plot
1. Import scan data.
2. Go to Insert > Plot or click the icon in the toolbar.
3. Select the scan data as the Target and choose the Thickness method with the By Ray
Firing option. Specify the Max. Thickness as 50mm.

5. Click the icon in the color bar and choose Adjust Colorbar Range to automatically
get the proper min/max range for the model.
6. Choose the Picking method under Local Average Tagging and pick points on a
boundary to check specific deviation values.
panel.

Options in Detail
[Stage 1]
Geometry Type
Target – Selects a point cloud or a mesh as target data.
Thickness – Displays the thickness map of scan data. It is useful for inspecting wall thickness
of a part such as a plastic part or a blade part.
Two methods are available to detect the thickness on a point.

The By Ray Firing method shoots a ray and detects the thickness when the ray meets the
opposite side.
The By Intact Sphere method internally generates a sphere and detects the thickness when
the sphere meets another scan area.
When scan data is noisy it can cause incorrect calculations in thickness as displayed in the
following image. In this situation, moving the slider of the Ignore Neighboring Noise
option to More can help to provide a correction calculation.

Max. Thickness specifies a maximum thickness to be reported.
Curvature – Displays a curvature map of scan data. Curvature is the amount by which a
geometric object deviates from being flat. It is useful for inspecting round or freeform
shapes.
The position of a 2D curve has a single curvature value. However, the position of a 3D surface
has many curvature values as shown in the figure below.
Curvature on 2D Curvature on 3D
In the Next Stage, if the Min. option is selected, the minimum curvature value at each poly-
vertex will be displayed.
If the Max. option is selected, the maximum curvature value at each poly-vertex will be
displayed.
If the Mean option is selected, the mean value of the Min. and Max. curvature value at each
poly-vertex will be displayed.
If the Gaussian option is selected, the multiplication of the Min. and Max. will be displayed.
Angle – Displays an angle map by analyzing angle differences between each normal of a
poly-vertex and a reference direction.

This command is useful when inspecting a parting line, which is the place where two or more
parts or undercut areas of a model meet.
[Stage 2]
Circular Pattern – Marks deviation points by using a circular method. A start position needs
to be specified using the Seed Position function. Set the Rotation Axis by picking a linear

entity or an entity that has an axis. Set the No. Of Instances and Interval Angle to make
multiple points. When Equal Spacing is checked, a circle will be equally divided by a
specified number of instances.

Interval Angle: 15

Distance: 5
Cylindrical Pattern – Marks deviation points on a cylindrical face by using a cylindrical

pattern method. A start position needs to be specified using the Seed Position function. Set
the Rotation Axis by picking a linear entity or an entity that has an axis. Set No. Of Instances
and Interval Angle to make multiple points. When Equal Spacing is checked, a circle will be
Spherical Pattern – Marks deviation points on a spherical face by using a spherical pattern
Sphere Center and Polar Axis by selecting an entity. Set the Sphere Theta Option and

Sphere Phi Option to make multiple points.

See Also
Insert > Deviation
7.4.9. Insert > Active Scan Data
What
Used to select target active scan data for inspection when multiple scans are imported.
Why
The Active Scan Data command is useful for:
• Inspection using scan data of varying accuracy

• Using multiple scan data files
• Using alignment or GD&T for a particular scan data file
How to Use
How to activate scan data for alignment
1. Import a nominal data file and multiple scan data files.

2. Choose the Specific Scan Data option and select scans to be used for alignment.
3. Click OK.
4. Go to Insert > Align > Auto to align scan data. Do not check the Apply To Active Scan
Data Only option. Click OK. Alignment will be completed using activated scan data.
Note:
Checking Apply To Active Scan Data Only will only move the two activated scans and other
leave other scans without translating them.
5. To activate all scans, go to Insert > Active Scan Data and select All Scan Data. Click OK.

Options in Detail
All Scan Data – Selects a point cloud or a mesh as target data.
Specific Scan Data – Activates only selected scans.
See Also
Insert > 3D GD&T
Insert > Deviation
7.4.10. Insert > Scanner Direct Control

The Scanner Direct Control menu enables the use of various scanning devices directly within the
application.
A preferred scanner device can be set in the Initial Setup Dialog that will be displayed when the
application is initially started or in the Device list in the Hardware table at File > Preferences.
Scanner Direct Control

The following scanners can be used directly within the application:
• Geomagic Capture
• Creaform Portable 3D Scanners
• Konica Minolta VIVID
• Breuckmann
• KODEN OCM-A (32 bit only)
• Roland LPX (32 bit only)
• Konica Minolta RANGE5/RANGE7 (64 bit only)
• Shining3D
• Z Corporation ZScanner

Insert > Scanner Direct Control > Geomagic Capture
The Geomagic Capture 3D scanner is a structured-light scanning system that uses a blue LED light
system. When using the Geomagic Capture command the scanner should be installed in advance.
Supported devices
Device 32-bit 64-bit
Geomagic Capture Yes Yes
Note:
Geomagic Capture is not supported on Microsoft Windows XP.
Scanner Specifications
Scan Speed 0.3 seconds per scan
Field of View (diagonal) / Near End 172 – 260 mm
– Far End
Field of View (X-Y) / Near End – Far 124 x 120 mm – 192 x 175 mm
End
Clearance Distance 300 mm
Depth of Field 180 mm
Resolution Average Points 985,000 per scan
Average Polygons 1.97 million per scan
Point to Point 0.162 mm (At center of
Distance measurement volume)
Accuracy / Near End – Far End 60 microns – 118 microns (µm)
Calibration Pre-calibrated
How to Use
How to Create a Scan Using Geomagic Capture
1. Connect a Geomagic Capture 3D scanning device to the PC.
2. Go to Insert > Scanner Direct Control > Geomagic Capture.
3. The command will initiate. Click the Connect button to connect to the Geomagic
Capture 3D scanning device.
4. If it’s the first time using the scanner it must be configured to the network so a dialog

box asking to Auto-Configure the network will be displayed. Click Yes to auto-
configure or click No to manually configure.
5. Adjust the Exposure setting to get an ideal scan. A scan that shows a lot of red is over-
exposed, and a scan that shows a lot of blue and black is under-exposed.
Under-Exposed Over-Exposed Optimal
Note:
Scan quality can vary by the following factors:
• Scanner calibration
The more calibration scans you take, the better the accuracy of the scanner.
• Environmental conditions
Light and vibration can cause inaccuracies. Ensure the system is stable and the exposure
is set to the conditions.
• Stability of the scanner and the object

If either the scanner or the object move during the scan, the data will be inaccurate.
Ensure both are stable and secure.
• Shape and size of the object

If the part you want to scan has limited features, you must use markers or spheres to align
the data.
6. The red crosshairs show the centerpoint of the camera and the gray cross-section on
the object shows the structure pattern. Align the structure pattern to the centerpoint
of the camera.
Note:
An exact alignment is not necessary. As long as the structure pattern and the centerpoint
of the camera are close to each other a satisfactory scan can be created.

7. Then click the Scan button. A scan will be taken and imported in the application.
8. Reposition the model and click the Scan button again to take another scan.
Note:
If a scan was made using the Best Fit alignment method, make sure at least 30% of the
original scan area is in the next scan. If the Target alignment method was used, make sure
that at least three targets from the first scan area are visible in the next scan.
9. The second scan will be imported into the application and shown in a magenta color.

Note:
During the scanning process, when a new scan is made, the previous scan will change from
magenta to blue and the new scan will be shown in magenta.
10. Continue scanning until the project is completed and click the Accept button. The
Mesh Buildup Wizard will initialize.
Options in Detail
Options
Scan – Takes a scan shot and sends it to the
Geomagic application.
HDR – Scans multiple times at varying

exposure levels in order to capture objects
with large contrast variances.
High Sensitivity – Special scanning mode

that allows for the capture of noisy surfaces
that would otherwise be difficult to capture.
Auto Exposure – Automatically controls

the exposure setting of the 3D scanner.
Exposure – Changes the level of light that is

sent and received by the scanner.
Settings – Goes to the settings menu.
Status – Shows the current working status.
Help – Shows the Help document.
Settings

Auto Align – Automatically aligns scans
using either the Best Fit or Target methods.
Best Fit – Aligns a current scan shot

to the previous scan shot. All other
scan shots will be ignored.
Target – Uses targets on a real part to

align.
Note:
When using the Auto Align method, refer to

the tips below:
• Prevent the scan floor from being

captured in a scan
• Apply white scanning spray or powder
evenly and make sure the object is
adequately covered
• Dim the lights
• Use proper sized target markers
Resolution – Changes the resolution of the

scanner.
High – Constructs a high-density

mesh (1/1 capture ratio).
Medium – Constructs a medium-

density mesh (1/4 capture ratio).
Low – Constructs a low-density mesh

(1/9 capture ratio).
Scanner Setup
Auto Connect – Connects the scanning
device by automatically configuring a
network.
Manual Setup – Connects the scanning

device by manually setting a network
configuration.
Firmware Version
Update Firmware – Checks for new
firmware and updates the current firmware
if a newer version exists.
Scanner Setup

Use DHCP – Uses the DHCP IP protocol
instead of a static IP address.
IP Address – Used to manually set a static IP

address.
Subnet Mask / Default Gateway – Used to

manually set a subnet mask and a default
gateway.
Apply Settings – Applys changes made to

the Use DHCP radio box as well as changes
made to the IP Address, Subnet Mask, and
Default Gateway input fields.
Insert > Scanner Direct Control > Creaform Portable 3D

Scanners
VXscan or VXelements should be installed in advance to directly control Creaform Portable 3D

Scanners.
Supported devices
Creaform Portable 3D Scanners Yes Yes
Options in Detail
1. Configure

Session
New – Starts a new session.
Open – Opens an existing session file (.CSF).
Save – Saves the current session (.CSF).
Positioning Features
Open – Opens a positioning target file (.TXT).
Copy - Copies positioning targets to a new scan.
Save - Saves positioning targets in a file (.TXT).
Scan List - Shows existing scans of the current session and

highlights the current scan.
Add – Adds a scan to the current session.
Rename Scan - Changes the name of the current

scan in the Current Scan box.
Remove Scan - Removes the current scan.
Sensor
Configuration - Shows the Sensor Configuration

dialog box for Portable 3D Scanners.
Calibration – Shows the Sensor Calibration dialog

box for Portable 3D Scanners.
Scan Backup Path – Sets the backup folder for scan data.
2. Scan

Scan
Start – Starts scanning.
Stop – Stops scanning.
Reset – Clears the scan data for the current scan.
Surface – Gathers surface data and positioning

features during scanning.
Positioning Features – Gathers only positioning

Show Current Scan Only – Shows only the scan data

of a selected scan.
Hide Positioning Features When Surface Scanning

– Hides positioning features during scanning.
Show VxScan Entity Only – Shows only meshes and

ref. point entities related to scan data.
Open VxScan Window – Opens the VxScan window

and enables users to access all functions that VxScan
provides.
Surface Parameter - Sets scanning volume size or resolution.
Volume Size – Adjust surface reconstruction settings and sets the scanning volume.
Changing the volume size directly affects the voxel size of each resolution level.
Resolution – Select High, Medium or Low resolution.
Apply - Confirms settings.
Cancel – Restores a previous setting.
Center Volume - Centers the volume on an object being scanned.
Refine - Performs an operation on a surface that decreases the impact of possible

positioning errors that may occur during scanning.
Facet Parameter
Spike Filter – Determines the level of spike filtering.

Fill Positioning Features – Fills holes created by the positioning features on an object.
Apply – Confirms settings.
Insert > Scanner Direct Control > Konica Minolta VIVID
Supported devices
VIVD 910 Yes Yes
VIVD 9i Yes Yes
Options in Detail
1. General
Scan
Name – Used to input the name of a scan

shot and its suffix.
Auto Align – Automatically aligns

captured scan shots.
Rotary Axis is used for a rotary table
device, and Geometry performs auto
alignment with an application algorithm.
The With Only Last Scan option performs
alignment between the last scan shot and
a previous one.
Save Raw Data – Saves raw scan data to a

desired directory.
Preview – Shows a preview image with a

color map. Red represents near distances
from a scanner and blue represents far
distance. Anything displayed in black will
not be seen by a scanner, because it is out
of range. When a preview is satisfactory,
click Accept.

Scan – Starts scanning.
Auto Scan – Starts auto scanning using a rotary table. Parameters can be set in the Rotary
Table tab in the Auto Scan option.
Digitizer Parameter – Applies parameters from the Standard and Advanced tab to a
scanner device when the Set button is clicked. The Get button retrieves the parameters
from a scanner device to the Standard and Advanced tab.
Mode – Select the Standard, Extend or User mode provided by a scanner device.
2. Standard Tab
Focus – Sets a focusing distance. Clicking Auto
Focus, will set a scanner to find the best
focusing distance automatically. Checking the
Auto Focus Before Scan option will allow a
scanner to Auto Focus whenever it scans.
Exposure – Sets the exposure of scanner

device.
LD - LD (Laser Diode) Power.
Gain - CCD Gain.
Auto Exposure Before Scan – Sets

exposure values automatically before
starting a scan.
Auto Exposure – Finds the best

exposure for scanning. Checking the
Auto Exposure Before Scan option
allows a scanner to use Auto Exposure
whenever it scans.
Scan
No Polygon – Gathers only point clouds.
Multi-Pass – Determines the number scans.
Import Raw Data – Imports .cdk and .cdm file formats.
Texture
Use Texture – Gathers textures. To correct a texture color, use the Dark Correct or Log
Correction options.

Dark Correction - Applies dark correction to color data. Use for striation-type noise
in images.
Log Correction - Applies logarithmic correction to color data. Used to brighten

neutral colors.
Brightness – Corrects texture brightness.
Overlap Texture - Uses the texture of a current model and overlaps it onto previously
scanned data. A non-textured model can overlap another texture in different illumination
conditions.
3. Advanced Tab
Raw Data Process
Reduction Rate – Decides the sampling

ratio used to import scan data.
Filter - Decides the filtering method for

poly-vertices.
The None method will not filter any
poly-vertices.
The Noise Filter method will filter noisy
poly-vertices.
The High Quality method will filter
unreliable data but is only effective for
importing scan data obtained using a
Vivid910.
The Noise Filter & High Quality method
uses both the Noise Filter and High
Quality methods and is also only
effective for importing scan data
obtained using a Vivid910.
Remove – Chooses a method to remove unnecessary parts while importing scan data.
The Don't Remove method will not remove any parts
The Bound method removes boundary points.
The Bound & xx Degree method removes boundary points and polygons within a
corresponding angle range between 5, 10, 15, and 20 Degrees to a view vector.
Fill Holes – Fills small holes in a mesh.
Multi-Depth Scan

Multi-Depth Scan – Executes multiple scans while changing distances.
For example, setting Spacing to 20 and Scan Num to 3 when the distance is 600, will scan
at the 580, 600, and 620 positions and create three meshes in the working window with
the names “Default - 000deg: 01”, “Default - 000deg: 02” and “Default - 000deg: 03”.
Direction – Selects the direction for multi scanning.
Forward – Starts scanning in the forward direction from a current focus length.
Backward – Starts scanning in the backward direction from a current focus length.
Both – Starts scanning in the forward and backward direction from a current focus
length.
No. of Scan – Defines how many scan shots will be captured.
Spacing – Defines distance increments for focus length.
VIVID 9i Calibration – Calibrates a VIVID 9i scanner which requires a calibration jig.
4. Rotary Table Tab

Connection
Auto Connect On Startup –

Automatically communicates with a
rotary table upon startup.
Model – Selects a rotary table which you

want to connect.
PORT – Selects the port used to

communicate with a rotary table.
Connect – Starts communication with a

rotary table.
Disconnect – Stops communication

with a rotary table.
Single Scan
Use Angle As Name Suffix – Uses a specified angle for the file name suffix.
Auto Rotate – Automatically turns a rotary table by a specified angle after scanning.
Rotary – Manually turns a rotary table.

The Move button starts to turn a rotary table.
The Origin button moves a rotary table to its origin position.
Auto Scan – Sets the parameters used for an automated scan.
No. of Scan – Sets the number of rotations.
Total Angle – Sets the entire angle of scanning.
Equal Spacing – Applies scanning with an equal angle decided by the No. of Scan and
Total Angle options.
Interval Waiting – Sets the value for scanning after a rotary table has been turned. A time
can be set to prevent a model from shaking by the sudden stop of a rotary table.
5. Calibration Tab
The Calibration tab contains parameters for
calibration of a rotary table.
Calibration State shows the calibration status
or if a stored calibration has been successfully
loaded. If it is not lit a calibration is necessary.
Calibration Types chooses the method of
calibration. The default is Plate for plates
provided by Konica Minolta. When a
calibration ball provided by 3D Systems is used
the Sphere type needs to be used.
Scan For Calib uses a jig used for calibration
that can be scanned. The axis vector of the
rotary table can automatically be found by
processing the scan data of a part in the
application.
If the results of an axis vector are not satisfactory, it can be manually re-assign by selecting scan
areas using the Upper Sphere, Lower Sphere, Left Plate, and Right Plate buttons. The new axis
vector will be recalculated from the manual selection of areas.

When scan data contains noise, the application may fail to calibrate and the scan data may need
to be edited by making a reference vector in the application. After editing scan data, the Pick
Rot Vector option can be used to set a rotation vector. Click the Pick Scan & Calib. Option and
select a scan data to perform calibration.
Calibration Info. shows the current calibration information.
Load Calib Data will load calibration information previously stored in a file.
Save Calib. Data will save the current calibration information to a file.
Manual Clustering Criterion can be used to classify clusters for calibration purposes and if it is
not checked, the value will be automatically calculated.
Insert > Scanner Direct Control > Breuckmann
To execute the Breuckmann command, previously, Optocat should be installed on your machine.
Supported devices
Breuckmann 3D Scanner Yes Yes
Options in Detail
1. System

Breuckmann Optocat
Version – Chooses an installed version of

Optocat.
Launcher Path – Chooses the file path of the

Optocat .exe file.
Connect & Initialization – Connects a scanner

and defines the initial setup preferences
supported by Optocat. The color of ‘Breuckmann
Connection’ will change from red to green when
successful.
Rotary Table Setting
Model – Chooses a type of a rotary table.
COM Port – Chooses a port for the application to

communicates with a rotary table. If a rotary table
is connected by USB, this option will be disabled.
Connect – Connects a selected rotary table. The

color of ‘Breuckmann Connection’ will change
from red to green when successful.
Test – Tests to verify that a rotary table is working

correctly.
Data Option
Including Color – Imports color information.
Triangulation – Starts triangulation when scan

data is acquired.
Scanner Waiting Time – Sets the time between

scanning intervals.
2. Calibration

Home – Rotates a rotary table to a default position.
Move Rotary Table – Rotates a rotary table by a specific

angle.
Set Scan Parameter – Opens the option dialog box of

Optocat.
Incremental Angle– Specifies an angle between scans.
Scan for Calibration – Calibrates by scanning three

times by a specified angle.
Start Calibration – Opens the Calibration Window

dialog box and calculates the rotational axis of a rotary
table by picking markers or spheres on three images
and clicking the Start Calibration button.
Image Size – Selects an image size in the Calibration

Window dialog box.
Reverse Axis Direction – Flips a rotation axis.
Show Axis – Displays an axis.
3. Single

Home - Rotates a rotary table to a default position.
Move Rotary Table – Rotates a rotary table by a specific

angle.
Set Scan Parameter - Opens the option dialog box of

Optocat.
Auto Align – Automatically aligns scan shots.
Geometry – Aligns scan data using a feature-to-

feature recognition alignment algorithm.
Rotary Axis – Aligns scan data using the axis of a

rotary table that can be found in the Calibration
tab.
With Only Last Scan – Performs alignment with

the last scan.
4. Batch
Auto Filling – Displays the Auto Filling dialog box
where the Start / End Angle and Count options can be
utilized. Angles will be displayed in the Scan List box.
Clear – Removes all angles in the Scan List box.
Set Scan Parameter - Displays the scan parameters

option dialog box for Optocat.
Batch Scan – Starts scanning.
Geometry – Aligns scan data using a feature-to-feature

recognition alignment algorithm.
Rotary Axis – Aligns scan data using the axis of a rotary

table that can be found in the Calibration tab.

Insert > Scanner Direct Control > KODEN OCM-A (32 bit
only)
The default setting of KODEN OCM-A devices are included in OCM-A_Info.ini.file. The file is located
in ~<Product Installation Path>\bin\KODEN OCM-A.
Supported devices
KODEN OCM-A Yes No
Options in Detail
Connect – To communicate with KODEN OCM-A devices, click this button. When connected
to the device, the button will change to Disconnect.
Auto – Automatically applies the Zoom fit function while scanning is in progress.
ZoomFit – Displays and refreshes an entire model during scanning.
Insert > Scanner Direct Control > Roland LPX (32 bit only)
Supported devices
LPX Series Yes No
Options in Detail
Connect – Communicate with a Roland LPX scanner.
Port – Selects a port.
Rotational Scan – Set scanning options for scanning a model while it is rotating.

A scanning area is defined by the Height and Circumferential input boxes. If a scanning size
cannot be initially defined, click the Preview button and an approximate height will be
generated for a Height value.
Scanning pitch is defined in the Circumferential Pitch and Height-direction Pitch input boxes.
After scan settings are define scanning time can be estimated by using the up arrow button. To
start scanning, click the Scan button.
Planar Scan – Makes a square of the scanning area and scans a model in several rotational
directions.

A total number of scans can be defined in the Surfaces to Scan input box. If 3 is input, a model
will be scanned 3 times.
To change an initial scanning direction, click the button. A scanning area is defined by the
Height and Width input boxes. If a scanning size cannot be initially defined, click the Preview
button and an approximate height will be generated for a Height value.
Scanning pitch is defined by the Circumferential Pitch and Width-direction Pitch input boxes.
After scan settings are define scanning time can be estimated by using the up arrow button. To
start scanning, click the Scan button.
Points Only – Imports scan data as a point cloud.
Cutoff Angle - Specifies an angle between a scan direction and a normal direction of poly-face
mesh to be generated. If the angle is larger than a user defined value, a poly face mesh will not
be generated. This option is useful for preventing scan data from containing unwanted spikes.

Insert > Scanner Direct Control > Konica Minolta
RANGE5/RANGE7 (64 bit only)
To execute the RANGE5 and RANGE7 command, previously, RangeViewer should be installed on
your machine.
Supported devices
Range5 / Range7 No Yes
Options in Detail
Connect – Connects to a RangeViewer after setting a Path.
Points Only – Imports only point data from RangeViewer.
Suppress – Used to suppress data when acquiring point cloud or mesh data of large sizes from
a scanner. The suppressed data will be imported and loaded on the hard disk.
RangeViewer Path – Automatically sets a default installation path when the application is first
installed. If the installation folder is changed or move, this option can be used to set the correct
path for RANGEVIEWER.exe.
Insert > Scanner Direct Control > Shining3D
To directly control a Shining 3D scanner, Shining 3D’s application should be installed in advance.
Supported devices

Shining3D Yes Yes
Note:
If the application cannot find a Shining 3D application, a dialog box will be displayed to manually choose
the Shining 3D’s application execution file (.exe) when the Insert > Scanner Direct Control > Shining3D
command is executed.
Options in Detail
1. Run Application
Manually choose the directory where the Shining 3D application execution file (.exe) and
configuration files are located. Once the directory is set, it will be preserved for when the
application is run again.
2. General

Ini Path – Shows the path where the configuration file
(.ini) is located.
– Manually chooses the location of the

configuration file (.ini).
View – Shows the view of the Left Camera or the Right

Camera.
Camera Settings – Specifies camera settings.
Exp. Time – Specifies the exposure time of

camera.
Both – Applies camera settings to both the Left

Camera and the Right Camera.
Gain – Adjusts camera sensitivity to capture more

or less points on the surface of an object. Darker
objects will need higher gain settings so that the
laser will appear brighter to the camera.
Projector Settings – Specifies projector settings.
Stripe Test – Projects stripes on a target object.
Cross – Projects a crossed center on a target

object.
Stripe Width – Sets the width of projected stripes

by adjusting a slider.
Min. / Max. Bright – Sets the range of brightness

by adjusting a slider. (0~255)
Calibration – Shows the Sensor Calibration dialog box

for Shining 3D.
Scan and Align – Scans and aligns scan data.
Align – Aligns scan data.
Maker – Aligns scan data by using detected markers used during scanning.
Feature – Aligns scan data by using feature information. The application uses the
Local Based On Auto Guess method for quick and accurate alignment.

Import Marker Info. – Imports pre-defined markers information.
Export Marker Info. – Exports detected marker information during the scanning.
Insert > Scanner Direct Control > Z Corporation ZScanner
ZScan should be installed in advance to directly control a ZScanner 700 scanner.
Supported devices
ZScanner Yes Yes
Options in Detail
1. Configure

Session
New – Starts a new session.
Open – Opens an existing session file (.CSF).
Save – Saves the current session (.CSF).
Positioning Features
Open – Opens a positioning target file (.TXT).
Copy - Copies positioning targets to a new scan.
Save - Saves positioning targets in a file (.TXT).
Scan List - Shows existing scans of the current session and

highlights the current scan.
Add – Adds a scan to a current session.
Rename Scan - Changes the name of the current

scan in the Current Scan box.
Remove Scan - Removes the current scan.
Sensor
Configuration - Shows the Sensor Configuration

dialog box for ZScan.
Calibration – Shows the Sensor Calibration dialog

box for ZScan.
Scan Backup Path – Set the backup folder for scan data.
2. Scan

Scan
Start – Starts scanning.
Stop – Stops scanning.
Reset – Clears the scan data for the current scan.
Surface – Gathers both surface data and positioning

Positioning Features – Gathers only positioning

Show Current Scan Only – Shows only the scan data

of a selected scan.
Hide Positioning Features When Surface Scanning

– Hides positioning features during scanning.
Show ZScan Entity Only – Shows only meshes and

ref. point entities related to scan data.
Open ZScan Window – Opens the ZScan window

and allows users to access all functions that ZScan
provides.
Surface Parameter - Sets scanning volume size or resolution.
Volume Size – Adjust surface reconstruction settings and sets the scanning volume.
Changing the volume size directly affects the voxel size of each resolution level.
Resolution – Select High, Medium or Low resolution.
Apply - Confirms settings.
Center Volume - Centers the volume on an object being scanned.
Refine - Performs an operation on a surface that decreases the impact of possible

positioning errors that may occur during scanning.
Facet Parameter
Spike Filter – Determines the level of spike filtering.

Fill Positioning Features – Fills holes created by the positioning features on an object.
Apply – Confirms settings.
7.4.11. Insert > Note
What
The Note command adds tags with custom text. It is used to add comments onto a model.
Added Notes
Why
The Note command is useful for:
• Adding comments
• Sharing information with co-workers
How to Use
How to add notes to a model
1. Go to Insert > Note or click the icon in the toolbar.

2. Pick a position on a model. An empty note will be added.
3. Type text in the note dialog box and click Add.
7.5. Tools
The Tools menu features commands to generate and edit features such as curves, sections, regions,
GD&Ts, nominal data, and scan data.
• Nominal Tools
Modifies nominal data using commands such as Sew and Split Face in the Nominal mode.
• Scan Tools
Edits scan data for inspect in the Scan mode.
• Region Tools
Creates and edit region groups depending on geometry types in the Mesh Region of the
Nominal mode.
• Section Tools
Measures dimensions and creates ref. geometries in the Section mode.
• Curve Tools
Draws and edits curves in the Curve mode.
• GD&T Tools
Measures GD&Ts such as flatness, straightness, and position in the 3D GD&T mode.
• Regroup 3D GD&Ts
Makes groups of measured GD&Ts.

7.5.1. Tools > Nominal Tools
The Nominal Tools menu features commands that can be used to modify bodies, convert bodies to
mesh, and separate front, and back faces by thickness in Nominal mode. These functions give more
freedom to the inspection process by editing nominal data.
The Nominal mode is divided into six tool groups for creating and editing nominal data
Each group is used for:
1. Creating and Editing Mesh Regions

• Mesh Region
Creates region groups on nominal mesh or edites existing mesh regions.
2. Importing Nominal Data

• Import Nominal Data
Imports a CAD model file or meshes to use as nominal data during inspection.
3. Editing Nominal Data

• Sew
Combines two or more faces into a single surface body by sewing together boundaries.
• Split Face
Splits a target face.
• Transform
Moves, rotates or scales a solid or surface body.
• Offset
Enlarges or shrinks a surface body by a constant distance.
• Thicken

Offsets a surface body and generates a solid body with a constant thickness.
• Delete Faces
Removes faces on a solid or surface body.
• Mirror
Copies and mirrors the nominal CAD body.
4. Healing Defects from Nominal Data

• Fix Normal
Fixes the normal information of nominal body or poly-faces in a nominal mesh.
• Healing Wizard
Detects abnormal poly-faces in a mesh and automatically heals them.
• Find Defect
Detects self-Intersections and face continuity defects.
5. Converting Entities
• Separate Thicken Body
Classifies the upper, lower, and side faces of a solid body that has a consistent thickness.
• Convert to Mesh
Converts a selected solid or surface body to a mesh.
6. Assigning Tolerances on Nominal Data

• Assign Tolerance
Sets multiple tolerances onto the faces and edges of nominal data.
Tools > Nominal Tools > Sew
What
The Sew command combines two or more faces into a single surface body by sewing together
boundaries.

Two surface bodies Apply Sew
Why
The Sew command is useful for:
• Combining faces
• Matching faces
How to Use
How to sew faces with the tangent constraint
1. Prepare faces and click the Nominal button to enter the Nominal mode.
2. Go to Tools > Nominal Tools > Sew or click the icon in the toolbar.
3. Select faces as Surface Bodies.
4. Click OK to complete the command. Faces will be tangentially connected to form a

single surface body.

Options in Detail
Surface Bodies – Selects independent surfaces to sew.
See Also
Tools > Scan Tools > Sew Boundaries
Tools > Nominal Tools > Split Face
What
The Split Face command splits a target face by using the projection, silhouette and intersection
methods. After splitting a face, a target entity will have several faces but will still be a single entity.
Body and Curve Split Face
Why
The Split Face command is useful for:
• Adding edge faces

• Adding parting lines

How to Use
How to split a body face by using a curve
1. Prepare a curve and a body and click the Nominal button to enter the Nominal mode.
2. Go to Tools > Nominal Tools > Split Face or click the icon in the toolbar.
3. Choose the Projection method. Select a curve for Tool Entities and a face for Target
Entities.
4. Click Preview. If the face cannot be split then change the projection direction by using
the Flip Direction button.
Options in Detail
Select Entities
Projection – Determines the projection method.

Single Direction – Projects a split line in one direction. To reverse the direction, click the
Flip Direction button .
Bidirection – Projects a split line in both directions.
Silhouette – Creates a silhouette in a pull direction and splits target entities with the silhouette
lines.
Pull Direction - Defines a silhouette direction.
Target Entities – Selects faces on a solid or surface body.
Pull Direction & Target Entities Split Result
Draft Angle – Sets the angle between pull direction and tangential direction on a point
of a face.
Draft Angle: 0 Draft Angle: 30 Draft Angle: 60
Intersection – Divides target entities by intersecting them with other faces.
Pull Direction & Target Entities The Split Result
See Also

Tools > Nominal Tools > Delete Faces
Tools > Nominal Tools > Transform
What
The Transform command moves, rotates or scales a solid or surface body. It can also be used to align
a body to another body or mesh by using datum pairs.
Body Apply Transform
Why
The Transform command is useful for:
• Copying and moving a body

• Repositioning a body
• Aligning a body to another body or a mesh
How to Use
How to move and rotate a body
1. Prepare a solid or surface body and click the Nominal button in the Tool Palette to enter
the Nominal mode.

2. Go to Tools > Nominal Tools > Transform or click the icon in the toolbar.
3. Select a body and check the Duplicate box to copy it. Click the Next Stage button.
4. Select the Rotate And Translate method and input a Rotate and Translate value or
drag the manipulator on the screen.
Options in Detail
[Stage 1]
Select Entities
Target – Selects solid or surface bodies.
Duplicate – Copies selected bodies.
[Stage 2]
Methods
Rotate And Translate – Applies rotation and translation to a body in the X, Y and Z direction
and axis. You can interactively use the manipulator on the screen or input specific values.
Scale - Scales a solid or surface body along its center, a coordinate system, or a custom
position.
Uniform Scale – Scales a body based on the X, Y and Z directions concurrently. If this
option is not used, scale can be applied individually in the X, Y and Z directions.

Uniform Scale: X, Y, & Z=3 Non-uniform Scale: X=2, Y=3, Z=3
Unit Converter – Converts scale values by using unit conversion. Changing unit types
in From and To, will automatically apply the changes to the scale value. Changing the
scale value directly will set the Unit Converter as default.
Scale Center – Selects a position of a scale origin. Global Origin, or the global
coordinate, Body Center, or the center of a body, and Custom, or the custom origin,
can be chosen.
By Matrix – Allows for the direct input of values into a transformation matrix. After using the
Rotation And Translate and Scale options the transformation matrix will be calculated and
filled. If a value in the matrix is modified, the corresponding Rotate, Translate, Scale values
will reflect those changes.
A transformation matrix file can be imported by using the Matrix File Open button .
If Set is selected the imported matrix is applied as it is.
If Multiply is selected the imported matrix will be multiplied from the current position.
If Inverse Multiply is selected the imported matrix will be inversed and multiplied from the

current position.
If Transpose is select the imported matrix will be transposed from the current position.
Datum Alignment – Aligns a body to another body or a mesh by using datum pairs. Select
a face that can be a datum such as a cylinder, sphere, plane, or edge on the original body and
then select a pair of datum on another body.
Datum Pairs – Type(Moving – Target, Flip) – Defines datum pairs in Moving and
Target order.
Note:
A moving datum can be flipped by using the Flip button when datum pairs are defined.
Interactive Alignment – Aligns a body to a desired location in a scan data.
Moving – Selects the 3-2-1 or X-Y-Z alignment methods.
3-2-1 – Aligns using entities on a mesh as a moving plane, moving vector, and
moving position. The Flip button reverses the direction of the selection.
X-Y-Z – Aligns using entities as moving points and X, Y, and Z axes. The Flip
button reverses the direction of the selection.
Target – Sets a Coordinate or X-Y-Z Target.
Coordinate – Sets target coordinates for an alignment.
X-Y-Z – Alignment using entities as points and X, Y, Z axes. The Flip button
reverses the direction of a selection.
Tools > Nominal Tools > Offset
What
The Offset command enlarges or shrinks a surface body by a constant distance.

Why
The Offset command is useful for:
• Creating a model in a different size

• Offsetting faces on a surface or solid body
• Copying faces on a surface or solid body
How to Use
A. How to offset faces on a surface or a solid body
1. Prepare a solid or surface body and click the Nominal button to enter the Nominal
mode.
2. Go to Tools > Nominal Tools > Offset or click the icon in the toolbar.
3. Select faces on a body and specify the Offset Distance.

B. How to copy faces on a body
1. Enter the Nominal mode. Go to Tools > Nominal Tools > Offset or click the icon in the
toolbar.
2. Set the Offset Type to Surface Body, Body Face. Select a face to copy.
3. Change the offset distance to 0.
4. Click OK to complete the command and then hide the body. A copied face can be seen.
Options in Detail
Bodies / Faces – Selects bodies to offset when the Solid Body option is selected. When the
Surface Body, Body Face option is selected, faces on a body or an entire surface body can be
selected.
Offset Distance – Specifies the distance to offset from a solid body. To reverse the offset
direction, use the Flip Direction button .
Make Side Wall – Creates side walls between an offset face and a body.

Disable Option Enable Option
Remove Original Faces – Removes original faces used to offset.
Disable Option Enable Option
See Also
Tools > Scan Tools > Offset
Tools > Nominal Tools > Thicken
What
The Thicken command offsets a surface body and generates a solid body with a constant thickness.
Why
The Thicken command is useful for:
• Creating an object with constant thickness

• Creating a sheet metal part

How to Use
How to generate a constant wall thickened feature from a surface
body
1. Prepare a surface body and click the Nominal button to enter the Nominal mode.
2. Go to Tools > Nominal Tools > Thicken or click on the icon in the toolbar.
3. Select a surface body to thicken. Enter 3 mm as the Thickness and set the offset
direction.
Options in Detail
Select Entities
Surface Bodies – Selects a surface body.
Note:
When a surface body is comprised of multiple adjacent faces, the surfaces must be sewn together
before applying the Thicken command.
Thickness – Specifies a thickness value.
Direction
Direction 1 – The default positive direction to thicken.

Direction 2 – The opposite, negative direction from Direction1.
Both – Thickens in both directions.
Tools > Nominal Tools > Delete Faces
What
The Delete Faces command removes faces on a solid or surface body.
Body Remove Face
Why
The Delete Faces command is useful for:
• Reconstructing features

How to Use
How to remove a body face
1. Prepare a solid or surface body and click the Nominal button to enter the Nominal
mode.
2. Go to Tools > Nominal Tools > Delete Faces or click the icon in the toolbar.
3. Select a face to delete.
Options in Detail
Faces – Selects faces on a solid or surface body to remove.
See Also
Tools > Nominal Tools > Split Face

Tools > Nominal Tools > Mirror
What
The Mirror command enables users to copy and mirror the nominal CAD body and makes it
complete.
Original CAD Body Mirrored Body
Why
The Mirror command is useful for:
• Creating a whole body shape from a half of CAD body
How to Use
How to create a whole body shape from a half of CAD body
1. Go to Tools > Nominal Tools > Mirror to copy the nominal body and make it complete.
2. Select target body.
3. Click the Symmetry Plane button and select a ref. plane.

4. Check the preview results and click the OK button.
Options in Detail
Bodies – Selects solid or surface bodies.
Symmetry Plane – Selects a ref. plane or a planar face as a mirroring plane.
See Also
Tools > Nominal Tools > Fix Normal
What
The Fix Normal command enables users to fix the normal information of nominal body or poly-faces
in a nominal mesh.

Why
The Fix Normal command is useful for:
• Fixing the normal information of CAD bodies imported from neutral file formats such as IGES or
STEP
• Fixing the normal information of poly-faces to create an optimized nominal mesh
• Fixing the normal information of poly-faces in tessellated CAD mesh that has been imported
from neutral file formats such as IGES or STEP
How to Use
A. How to fix normal information of CAD bodies
1. Click the Nominal button to enter the Nominal mode. Go to Tools > Nominal Tools > Fix
Normal or click the icon in the toolbar.
2. Select target bodies to fix their normal information.
3. Check the results then click the OK button.

Note:
While the Enable Realtime Preview button is working, the preview results will be
displayed in real time when target bodies are selected. To reverse the normal direction, click the
Reverse Normal button .
B. How to fix normal information of poly-faces in a mesh

1. Click the Nominal button to enter the Nominal mode. Go to Tools > Nominal Tools >
Fix Normal or click the icon in the toolbar.
2. Choose the Automatic method and check the Propagate Topologically option. To
reverse the normal direction manually, choose the Interactive method and pick a seed
poly-face on the mesh.
3. Pick a seed poly-face on a mesh and check the results.

Options in Detail
Note:
The options can be changed depending on the type of target source data.
[CAD Data]
Bodies – Shows selected target bodies.
[Mesh Data]
Methods
This tool features 3 methods:
• Automatic
Automatically fixes the normal information of poly-faces in a mesh
• Interactive
Reverses the normal information of connected poly-faces
• Entire Mesh
Reverses the normal information of entire poly-faces in a mesh
Automatic – Fixes the normal information of poly-faces in a mesh by propagating

topologically, propagating geometrically, or repairing tangled poly-faces.
Propagate Topologically Propagate Geometrically Tangled Poly-Face
Propagate Topologically – Fixes the normal information of poly-faces inside of its

boundary.
Note:
Check the Propagate Topologically option if the mesh has no non-manifold poly-faces and
the boundaries exist in the mesh.
Propagate Geometrically – Fixes the normal information of poly-faces regardless of

its boundaries. Check the Propagate Geometrically option of a mesh that has
disjoined poly-edges and non-manifold poly-faces and boundaries that do not exist in
the mesh.
Repair Tangled Poly-Faces – Repairs twisted and tangled topology and fixes the
normal information of poly-faces. The Repair Tangled Poly-Faces option is used to
correct the twisted topology that may occur when triangulating 3D scan data which
has thin walls.
Interactive – Reverses the normal information of connected poly-faces.
Entire Mesh – Reverses the normal information of entire poly-faces in mesh.
See Also
Tools > Scan Tools > Fix Normal
Tools > Nominal Tools > Healing Wizard
What
The Healing Wizard command detects abnormal poly-faces in a mesh and automatically heals them.
When 3D scan data that has been scanned in different directions by using a 3D scanner are aligned
and merged into a single mesh, some abnormal poly-faces such as folded poly-faces, dangling poly-
faces, and small noisy clusters may occur. To optimize the mesh, the defects on the mesh need to be
healed.
Why

The Healing Wizard command is useful for:
• Creating an optimal mesh model without any abnormal poly-faces

• Healing defects
How to Use
How to heal abnormal poly-faces and clean defects from a mesh
Healing Wizard or click on the icon in the toolbar.
2. Abnormal poly-faces will be automatically detected in a mesh and the results will be
displayed with different colors. Check detected abnormal poly-faces and click the OK
button to heal them at all the same time.
3. Check that all detected defects are healed from the mesh.
Options in Detail
[Stage 1]
Bodies – Select bodies to heal.
[Stage 2]
Heal Selected Gaps – Is filled with selected gaps in the Gap List box.
Try To Heal All Gaps – Tries to fill all gaps on the body. For the complex shape of holes may
not be filled completely.
Restore The Healed Bodies – Cancels applied gaps by the above buttons.

See Also
Tools > Nominal Tools > Find Defect
Tools > Nominal Tools > Find Defect
What
The Find Defect command detects two types of defects: Self Intersection, Face Continuity.
Why
The Find Defect command is useful for:
• Finding and removing defects in nominal data

• Determining the quality of nominal data
How to Use
How to Find and delete defects in a mesh
Find Defect or click the icon in the toolbar.

2. Select a body and check the Self Intersection Test and Face Continuity Test option.
Click the Next button .
3. Defected faces will be highlighted.
Options in Detail
[Stage 1]
Bodies – Selects bodies to find defects in.
Self Intersection Test - Detects intersecting faces.
Face Continuity Test – Detects discontinuous faces.
[Stage 2]
Abnormal Bodies – Displays the number of erroneous bodies.
Abnormal Faces – Displays the number of erroneous faces.
Abnormal Edges – Displays the number of erroneous edges.
See Also
Tools > Nominal Tools > Healing Wizard
Tools > Nominal Tools > Separate Thickened Body
What
The Separate Thicken Body command classifies upper, lower, and side faces of a solid body that
has a consistent thickness.

Why
The Separate Thickened Body command is useful for:
Separating a thickened body
Comparing 3D scan data files that has been scanned in either the top or bottom directions of the part
• Creating nominal data to use for measuring deviation of boundaries
How to Use
How to separate thickened solid bodies into top, bottom, and side
faces
Separate Thickened Body or click the icon in the toolbar.
2. Select a solid body for target Bodies and click the Next Stage button .
3. Turn off the side and lower options and click the OK button .
4. Check that the side and lower faces are removed and that only the upper faces remain.

Options in Detail
Select Entities
Bodies – Selects surface or solid bodies.
Results
Upper – Shows faces classified as upper faces on a target body.
Side – Shows faces classified as side faces on a target body.
Lower – Shows faces classified as lower faces on a target body.
Note:
When a target body can be classified by upper, side, and lower faces, these options are checked by default.
To remove classified faces from a target body, uncheck these options.
See Also
Tools> Nominal Tools > Offset
Tools> Nominal Tools > Delete Faces
Tools > Nominal Tools > Convert to Mesh
What
The Convert to Mesh command converts a selected solid or surface body to a mesh.

Why
The Convert to Mesh command is useful for:
• Converting a solid body into mesh
How to Use
How to convert bodies into mesh
1. Prepare a body and click the Nominal button to enter the Nominal mode.
2. Go to Tools > Nominal Tools > Convert Body or click the icon in the toolbar.
3. Select the body to convert to mesh.

Options in Detail
Quality – Determines the accuracy of a mesh. Moving the slider towards High, will produce
a more accurate mesh that contains more poly-faces.
Quality: Low Quality: Medium Quality: High
Advanced – Displays sub-options used to precisely limit the size of poly-faces.
Max. Chord Height – Specifies how accurately a mesh represents a surface by setting
the distance between the mesh and the part of the surface it represents.
Max. Edge Length – Specifies the value of the maximum edge length of a poly-face.
Min. Edge Length – Specifies the value of the minimum edge length of a poly-face.
More Options
Sew Boundary – Removes small gaps along boundaries.

See Also
Tools > Scan Tools
Tools > Nominal Tools > Assign Tolerance
What
The Assign Tolerance command sets multiple tolerances onto faces and edges of nominal data.
Why
The Assign Tolerance command is useful for:
• Setting multiple tolerances onto faces or edges of nominal data

• Comparing nominal data according to tolerance criteria
How to Use
How to set multiple tolerances onto faces of nominal data

Assign Tolerance or click the icon in the toolbar.
2. Click the Add Group button to make a new group and check that a new dialog tree named
Group 2 is generated.
3. Click the Group 2 button to select faces and assign a new tolerance to the selected faces.
Specify the minimum tolerance as -0.1mm and the maximum tolerance to +0.1mm and
change the color to red. Select faces.
4. Click the Add Group button to make a new group and check that a new dialog tree named
Group 3 is generated.
5. Click the Group 3 button to select faces and assign a new tolerance to the selected faces.
Specify the minimum tolerance as -0.5mm and the maximum tolerance to +0.5mm and
change the color to yellow. Select faces.

6.
Turn off the side and lower options and click the OK button . Check assigned tolerance
ranges in the color bar.
Options in Detail
Add Group – Creates a new group.
Group Using Driven Tolerance – Lists all boundary edges automatically that will have the same
tolerances of adjacent faces when target nominal data is a surface body. Boundary edges follow
tolerances from neighboring faces by default. However, tolerances can be specified to follow
boundary edges by selecting them in a group when target nominal data is a surface body or mesh
with boundaries.
Group X – Lists faces or edges that have identical tolerances. To add faces or edges to the group,
click the Group X button and select entities. When assigned faces or edges need to be moved into
another tolerance group, click another Group X button and select the entities. To delete a group
click the Remove Group button . To preserve selected entities in a group, click the Preserve
Selection From Other Group button .
7.5.2. Tools > Scan Tools

The Scan Tools menu features various commands that can be used for creating new meshes from
raw scan data as well as editing existing 3D scan data in Scan mode.
The Scan mode is divided into seven tool groups for creating and editing scan data.

1. Finding Holes and Defects from Meshes

• Find
Enables the search for holes or defects from meshes and the selection or the deletion of the
searched hole or defect.
2. Importing Scan Data

• Import Scan Data
Imports target scan data to compare to nominal data.
3. Creating a Mesh
• Mesh Buildup Wizard
A wizard style interface for creating defect-free and watertight mesh models from raw 3D scan
data.
• Align
Aligns two or more 3D scan data sets scanned in different scanning directions based on geometric
feature shape information.
• Triangulate/Merge
Creates poly-faces by connecting points within 3D scan data to construct a mesh and merges
multiple point clouds or meshes to create a single mesh.
• Combine
Combines selected point clouds or meshes as a single point cloud or mesh without reconstructing
entities.
• Transform
Rotates, translates, scales or uses a transformation matrix to transform 3D scan data.
4. Qualifying Scan Data

• Filter Noisy Poly Vertices
Cleans noisy clusters from point clouds.
• Sampling
Reduces the number of poly-vertices in a point cloud.
• Generate Vertex Normal

Creates normal information for a point cloud without creating polygonal meshes.
5. Healing Defects from Scan Data

• Find Defect
Finds four types of defects: Non-Manifold Poly-Faces, Crossing Poly-Faces, Redundant Poly-Faces
and Tangled or Reversed Poly-Faces.
• Healing Wizard
Detects abnormal poly-faces in a mesh and automatically heals them.
• Fix Normal
Harmonizes normal information of poly-faces in a mesh.
• Sew Boundaries
Sews narrow line type holes in boundaries.
• Edit Boundaries
Edits the boundaries of a mesh.
6. Editing Scan Data

Fill Holes
Fills in missing holes with poly-faces based on the feature shapes of a mesh.
• Defeature
Removes feature shapes and regenerates poly-faces on a mesh.
• Remove Marker
Removes scanned markers from a mesh.
• Decimate
Reduces the number of poly-faces by merging poly-vertices while preserving geometric feature
shapes.
7. Modifying Scan Data

• Split
Divides a mesh into multiple parts by using various tool entities such as Ref. planes, curves, faces,
surface bodies, solid bodies, and polylines.
• Offset
Creates a new mesh that has a constant distance from an original mesh.
• Thicken
Changes the volume of a mesh by giving a constant thickness to each face to create a completely
closed mesh with no boundaries.
How to Use
A. How to find holes from meshes using the Find Tool Palette
1. Click the Scan icon in the Tool Palette or double-click existing scan data to enter Scan
mode. Click the Find Next button to navigate the finding holes. To go to the
previous searched hole, Click the Find Previous button .
Note:
The Find Tool Palette can be used when meshes exist in the Scan Data inspection feature and
holes that can be searched exist in the meshes. When there are no holes that can be searched
from the meshes, this tool palette will be deactivated.
2. Click the Select button to select a searched hole. The selected hole will be
highlighted as shown in the image below. The Find Tool Palette is useful for automatically
searching holes from meshes and selecting the hole.

B. How to find defects from meshes using the Find Tool Palette
1. To find defects from meshes, go to Tools > Scan Tools > Find Defect or click the Find
Defects icon in the toolbar. Searched defects, such as Non-Manifold Poly-Faces, Crossing
Poly-Faces, Redundant Poly-Faces, and Tangled or Reversed Poly-Faces, will be listed in
the list box.
2. Click the Find Next button to navigate the finding defects. To go to the previous
searched defect, Click the Find Previous button .
Note:
The Find Tool Palette can be used when meshes exist in the Scan Data inspection feature and
defects that can be searched exist in the meshes. When there are no defects that can be
searched from the meshes, this tool palette will be deactivated.
2. Click the Delete button to delete a searched defect.
Tools > Scan Tools > Mesh Buildup Wizard
What
The Mesh Buildup Wizard command is a wizard style interface for creating defect-free and
watertight mesh models from raw 3D scan data. The command consists of 5 stages that can be
quickly executed, enabling the speedy creation of optimized mesh for use in an inspection process.
Why
Mesh Buildup Wizard command is useful for:
• Creating a watertight mesh from raw 3D scan data

• Managing large amounts of 3D scan data and generating high quality mesh from it
• Applying proper 3D scan data processing methods to 3D scan data based on its type
• Reducing tedious and time consuming 3D scan data processing tasks
How to Use
How to create mesh from unaligned raw point clouds
1. Click the Scan button to enter the Scan mode. Go to Tools > Scan Tools > Mesh
Buildup Wizard or click the icon in the toolbar.
2. Edit Tools: Removes unnecessary areas or reverses normals.

Set Max. Poly-Vertices/Faces Count Per Noise Cluster to 100 under Edit Tools, and
click the Auto Select button to remove small clusters that are not necessary to create a
mesh. Click the Delete button to delete selected entities.

Note:
You can see all shots of scan data in the Entity Thumbnails panel. To show or hide an individual
scan shot in the Model View, uncheck it or use the Popup menu. If you click a thumbnail, a
small model view will be displayed. It can be rotated, zoomed and panned similar to the Model
View. The properties for each scan shot can be shown in the Properties panel by clicking on it.
3. Step 2 –Merge: Merges scans as a single mesh.

Click the Apply button using default options.
Click the Next Stage button .
5. Step 3 – Finalize: Enhances triangle size, sharpness, smoothness and fills holes to
create a complete mesh.
Check the Global Optimize and Enhance Shape options. Click the Apply button
next to Finalize.

6. To complete the Mesh Buildup Wizard, click the OK button .
Options in Detail
Stages
This command consists of the following stages:
• Edit Tools
Edits scan data. Can be found in every step.
• Align
Aligns imported scan data to make a single scan data.
• Triangulate/Merge
Generates poly-faces from point clouds and merges the aligned scan data.
• Retriangulate
Retriangulates polygons for better mesh quality.
• Finalize
Finalizes a scan. Global optimize is used to generate regular triangle sizes and Enhance Shape is used
to adjust the sharpness on edges and smooth surfaces.
Editing Tools
This stage prepares data by selecting target 3D scan data and setting its type and alignment status.
Depending on the settings selected in this stage, options in future stages may be different.
Remove Unwanted Data – Removes unnecessary poly-vertices and faces such as small clusters
and the base surface that is generated during a scanning process. After selecting entities, click the
Delete button or press the Delete key on the keyboard to delete them.

Manual Select – Manually selects poly-vertices or faces.
Reset – Resets all selections.
Detect Floor – Automatically searches and selects a base floor of a model by selecting
a seed poly- vertex or face on the model.
All Boundaries – Selects all of the boundaries of a scan. If they are deleted, the poly-
faces adjacent to the selected boundaries will also be removed.
Auto Select – Specify a number for the Max. Poly-Vertices/Faces Count Per Noisy Cluster
option then click the Auto Select button to automatically select clusters of poly-vertices or faces
less than the given value.
Reverse Normal – Flips the normal of a scan shot by clicking the Reverse Normal button and
selecting a scan shot.
Align
Aligns and integrate two or more scan shots to complete larger models that must be captured in
multiple scans. This stage is the same as Tools > Scan Tools > Align.
For more information, go to Tools > Scan Tools > Align.

Triangulate/Merge
Generates poly-faces from point clouds and merges them as a single mesh. If point clouds are
used, the name will be displayed as Triangulate/Merge. However if meshes are used, the title will
be displayed as Merge. This stage is the same as Tool > Scan Tools > Triangulate/Merge.
For more information, go to Tools > Scan Tools > Triangulate/Merge.
Retriangulate
After generating a single mesh, it can be further optimized in the Retriangulate stage.
Finalize
Generates regular triangle sizes using the Global Optimize option and adjusts the sharpness of
edges and the smoothness of surfaces using the Enhance Shape option.
Global Optimize – Creates fine triangles. Using the Extend Boundary option can create a
watertight mesh.
Approx. Poly-Face Count – Determines the accuracy of the Global Optimize option.
Moving the slider towards More will regenerate a mesh with more poly-faces.
Overall Smoothness – Creates a smooth mesh when a mesh includes a lot of noise.
Min Max
Extend Boundaries – Extends boundaries and fills large holes using a wrapping algorithm.
The wrapping shape can be adjusted by moving the slider that determines the tension
tightness. Moving the slider towards Flat will tighten the filling shape.
Original Shape Without an Extend With an Extend Boundary

Boundary
Enhance Shape – Regenerates sharp edges and round areas.

Sharpness – Controls the sharpness of a mesh. Min will create a less sharp mesh while Max
will create a more sharp mesh.
Original Shape Min Max
Overall Smoothness – Controls the smoothness of a mesh. Min will create a less smooth
mesh while Max will create a smoother mesh.
Enhance Level – Determines the strength of the Enhance Shape option.
See Also
Tools > Scan Tools > Align
Tools > Scan Tools > Triangulate/Merge
What
The Align command aligns two or more 3D scan data sets scanned in different scanning directions
based on geometric feature shape information.

Why
The Align command is useful for:
• Completing a model from multiple 3D scan data files scanned in different scanning directions
• Effectively managing a large amount of 3D scan data and re-arranging them
How to Use
A. How to align multiple 3D scan data files automatically
1. Click the Scan button to enter the Scan mode. Go to Tools > Scan Tools > Align or click
Note:
To apply this command to 3D scan data, the target 3D scan data should not have child entities.
2. Check the Local Based On Auto Guess option, and then select all scans for Moving.
3. Click the Apply button and check the results.

B. How to align multiple 3D scan data manually
1. If scans fail during auto guessing, manually align them using the Local Based On Picked
Point method.
Check the Local Based On Picked Point option and select aligned scans for Reference
and select failed scan shots for Moving.
2. Manually pick corresponding points on 3D scan data in the Reference and Moving
window. To cancel the last picking point, go to Edit > Undo or use the Ctrl + Z keyboard
shortcut.
3. Click the Apply button to apply manual alignment.

C. How to align multiple 3D scan data files accurately
1. Accurately align roughly aligned scans by using the Local Based On Auto Guess or
Local Based On Picked Point methods.
Check the Global And Fine option and select all scans for Moving.
2. Click the Apply button.
Options in Detail

Methods
This command features three methods:
• Local Based On Auto Guess

Automatically aligns scans based on geometric feature shape information
• Local Based On Picked Point

Manually aligns scans by using corresponding points
• Global And Fine

Aligns scans based on geometric feature shape information with the lowest amount of deviation
possible in overlapping areas
Local Based On Auto Guess – Automatically aligns scans.
Reference – Selects scans to define as reference entities.
Moving – Selects scans to define as moving entities. One or more scans should be
registered for Moving to execute the command.
More Options
Preference – Adjusts operation preferences. To quickly align scans, move the slider
towards Speed, and if it fails, move the slider towards Quality.
If Features Are Sufficient In Overlapped Regions – Used when scans have

sufficient features in overlapped areas. If overlapped areas are flat or smooth
without features, do not use this option.
Alignment Order – When target scans are scanned in a certain scanning order, use
this option for more accurate alignment.
By Name aligns by naming order.
By Selection aligns by selection order. The selection order can be changed in the
list box under Moving using the Up and Down buttons .

Do Not Align Between Moving Object – Applies alignment by scan groups.
Reference Group Moving Group – aligned scans
Local Based On Picked Point – Manually aligns scans. Select scans for Reference and for
Moving, and pick corresponding points in the Reference and Moving windows.
The corresponding points are required to be defined for Reference and Moving entities to apply
this method. This method can be used when scans fail in the Local Based On Auto Guess
method or when scans are needed to be aligned manually.
Refine Alignment – Applies best-fit alignment to areas around defined corresponding

points after the Local Based On Picked Point method is applied.
Global And Fine – Aligns scans based on geometric feature shape information with the lowest
amount of deviation possible in overlapping areas. This method can be used after the Local
Based On Auto Guess or Local Based On Picked Point methods are applied to scans for more
accurate alignment.
Partial – Selects scans to define as partial entities.

Note:
Poly-vertices selected from at least two different 3D scan data files are need as Partial to apply
this command. The partially selected poly-vertices are used to calculating the fine alignment.
Statistical results such as average, standard deviation, RMS for Global And Fine
alignment are listed in the Console panel after alignment.
Global Options
all selected data will be used. When the ratio is 50%, half of the selected data will
be used.
Max. Iteration Count – Specifies a maximum iteration value.
Max. Average Deviation – Specifies a maximum average deviation.
Note:
The Max.Iteraction Count and Max.Average Deviation options interactively affect

each other. For example, if both options are applied to the alignment, it performs until
the defined maximum average deviation is satisfied within the maximum iteration
count.
Apply Only Small Transform – Applies small transform only if overlapped areas
are assumed to be well aligned or if alignment is difficult to be performed due to
lack of feature shapes that can be referred to on the overlapped areas.
Use Only Reliable Scan Data – Uses only reliable 3D scan data or only effective
overlapped scan areas for better alignment.
Constraint Options – Fixes the translation or rotation of the X, Y, or Z axes for Moving
entities.
Update View & Histogram – Used to view the alignment process in the Model View and
to update the histogram in real-time.

See Also
Tools > Scan Tools > Transform
What
The Triangulate/Merge command creates poly-faces by connecting points within 3D scan data to
construct a mesh and merging multiple point clouds or meshes to create a single mesh. During the
merging process, overlapped areas will be removed efficiently and neighboring boundaries will be
stitched together. A target can be entire point clouds or individually selected poly-vertices in a point
cloud.
Point clouds scanned and produced by 3D scanners can be used directly for measuring and
visualizing. Using only a point cloud can be difficult to represent a shape and lacks information for
further design stages. Triangulation is a typical process used for creating geometric shape
information from a raw point cloud.

Why
The Triangulate/Merge command is useful for:
• Converting point cloud to 3D mesh models with geometric shape information

• Creating basic geometric shape information used for creating CAD model
• Creating basic geometric shape information used for evaluating the shape of a model
• Creating basic geometric shape information used for modifying an original feature shape
• Merging multiple 3D scan data into a single mesh
How to Use
A. How to triangulate a mesh model from a point cloud that has side-
wall shapes
1. Click the Scan button to enter the Scan mode. Go to Tools > Scan Tools >
Triangulate/Merge or click the icon in the toolbar.
2. Click the Mesh / Point Cloud button and select a point cloud.
Note:
This example assumes that a target point cloud is a single point cloud combined by multiple
scans that have been scanned in different scanning directions and that it cannot be projected
onto any virtual plane.
3. Click OK button with the default values. Check the results.

B. How to merge multiple 3D scan data into a single mesh
1. Click the Scan button to enter the Scan mode. Go to Tools > Scan Tools >
Triangulate/Merge or click the icon in the toolbar.
Note:
To apply this command to 3D scan data, a target 3D scan data should not have child entities.
2. Click the Mesh / Point Cloud button and select entities to merge them.
Options in Detail
Mesh / Point Cloud – Selects meshes, point clouds or poly-vertices.
Note:
This option allows the selection of not only multiple point clouds, but also poly-vertices. Selected point
clouds and poly-vertices can be used to create a polygonal mesh on partial areas of point clouds.
Mesh Density – Determines the density of a mesh when creating poly-faces.

Sparse Dense
Remove Original Data – If checked, removes original data.
More Options
Reduce Noise – If checked, removes noise poly-faces.
Disable Reduce Noise Enable Reduce Noise
Remove Redundant Points – If checked, removes redundant poly-vertices. Therefore a uniform

mesh will be generated.
Create More Dense Mesh Around Boundary – If boundary area is flat (low curvature area),
some missing poly-faces may exist after calculation. If checked, these poly-faces can be
prevented from missing.
See Also
Add-Ins > 2D Triangulate
Add-Ins > 3D Triangulate

Tools > Scan Tools > Combine
What
The Combine command combines selected point clouds or meshes as a single point cloud or a
mesh without reconstructing entities.
Why
The Combine command is useful for:
• Combining multiple point clouds into a single point cloud

• Combining multiple meshes into a single mesh
How to Use
How to combine multiple meshes into a single mesh
1. Click the Scan button to enter the Scan mode. Go to Tools > Scan Tools > Combine or
click the icon in the toolbar.
Note:
2. Select meshes.

Options in Detail
Target Entities
Target – Selects point clouds or meshes.
Remove Overlap Region – Removes overlapped areas.
Before Combining Combine Without Remove Combine With Remove

Overlapped Areas Overlapped Areas
See Also
Add-Ins > Combine
What
The Transform command transforms 3D scan data by rotating, translating, scaling or using a
transformation matrix.

Why
The Transform command is useful for:
• Transforming scan data to a specific position

• Scale scan data up or down
How to Use
How to transform 3D scan data to a specific position
1. Click the Scan button to enter the Scan mode. Go to Tools > Scan Tools > Transform or
Note:
2. Select point clouds or meshes.
3. Click the Next Stage button.

4. Transform the scan data using the manipulator on the screen.
Options in Detail
Target Entities
Target – Selects a point cloud or mesh.
Methods
• Rotate And Translate

Transforms 3D scan data by rotating and translating.
• Scale
Transforms 3D scan data by scaling.
• By Matrix
Transforms 3D scan data by using a transformation matrix.
Rotate And Translate – Transforms target 3D scan data by rotating and translating with
manipulators for the X, Y and Z coordinates.

Use Local Coordinate – Uses an existing Ref. coordinate as a local coordinate.
Rotate – Selects rotational values for the X, Y and Z coordinates.
Translate – Selects translation values for the X, Y and Z coordinates.
Scale – Scales scan data from its center, global origin, or by a custom position.
Uniform Scale – Scales target scan data along the X, Y and Z directions concurrently.
Uniform Scale Non-uniform Scale
Unit Converter – Converts scale value using the From and To options.
Note:
When the Uniform Scale is manually defined, the Unit Converter will be changed by
default. The default unit follows the Default Measure Unit defined in the General Tab within
Preferences (File > Preferences).
Scale Center – Selects a center position of scale.
Note:
Global Origin, the global coordinate, Mesh Center, the center of mesh, or Custom, the custom
origin, can be defined.
By Matrix – Defines the transformational values in a transformation matrix.

Apply Matrix File – Import a transformation matrix file using the Matrix File Open button and
applies it to the current coordinates of a model.
Set – Applies an imported matrix.
Multiply – Multiplies an imported matrix.
Inverse Multiply – Inverses and multiplies an imported matrix.
Transpose – Transposes an imported matrix.
See Also
Tools > Scan Tools > Filter Noisy Poly Vertices
What
The Filter Noisy Poly Vertices command cleans noisy clusters from point clouds.
Why
The Filter Noisy Poly Vertices command is useful for:
• Cleaning noisy clusters from point clouds

• Removing unnecessary clusters of points

How to Use
How to filter noisy clusters from point clouds
1. Go to File > Import Scan data.
2. Check Use Custom Setting to check Points Only. Click Import Only button with the
Points Only option.
3. Click Scan button to enter scan mode.
4. Go to Tools > Scan Tools > Filter Noisy Poly Vertices or click the icon in the toolbar.
Set the Max. Poly-Vertex Count Per Noisy Cluster to 100.
5. Click the OK button to complete the command. Small noisy clusters will be removed
from the point cloud.
Options in Detail
Max. Poly-Vertex Count Per Noisy Cluster – Specifies the maximum poly-vertices number per
noisy cluster that can be removed.
Note:
Noisy clusters are determined by the average distance between poly-vertices and will be removed when
the number of poly-vertices contained in noisy clusters is smaller than a specified value.
See Also
Tools > Scan Tools > Sampling
Tools > Scan Tools > Sampling
What
The Sampling command reduces the number of poly-vertices in a point cloud. It can be used to
remove redundant poly-vertices.
Why
The Sampling command is useful for:
• Reducing the number of poly-vertices in a point cloud
How to Use
How to reduce the number of poly-vertices
1. Import a point cloud.

2. Click the Scan button to enter the Scan mode.
3. Go to Tools > Scan Tools > Sampling. When multiple scan data exists the Target
option will be displayed.
4. Select the Curvature method. Set the Sampling Ratio to 40 %.
Options in Detail
Target Entities
Target – Selects a point cloud or mesh.
Methods
• Curvature
Samples a point cloud based on its curvature flow.
• Uniform Ratio
Reduces the number of poly-vertices uniformly by specific ratio.
• Uniform Distance
Reduces the number of poly-vertices uniformly by a specific distance.
Curvature – Samples a point cloud based on its curvature flow. With this option, poly-vertices in
a high curvature area are sampled less than poly-vertices in a low curvature area in order to
maintain the accuracy of a curvature flow.

Uniform Ratio – Reduces the number of poly-vertices uniformly by the ratio of poly-vertices.
Uniform Distance – Reduces the number of poly-vertices so that poly-vertices are uniformly
arranged by average distance. This method removes redundant poly-vertices and constructs a
grid-type point cloud.
Options
Target Poly-Vertex Count – Specifies a target number of poly-vertices to remain after sampling.
Average Distance Between Poly-Vertices – Specifies an average distance between poly-vertices.

This option will be displayed when the Method is set to Uniform Distance.
To estimate an average distance, click the Estimate button.
To manually set the distance or radius, use the Measure Distance or Measure Radius buttons.

To measure distance between poly-vertices, click the Measure Distance button and pick two
poly-vertices.
To measure a radius of a hole, click the Measure Radius button and pick three poly-vertices.
More Options
Do Not Modify Boundaries – Preserves poly-vertices around boundaries.
Tools > Scan Tools > Generate Vertex Normal
What
The Generate Vertex Normal command creates normal information for a point cloud without
creating polygonal meshes.
Why
The Generate Vertex Normal command is useful for:
• Creating normal information
How to Use
How to create normal information
1. Import a point cloud.

2. Click the Scan button to enter the Scan mode.
3. Go to Tools > Scan Tools > Generate Vertex Normal. When multiple scan data exists,
the Target option will be displayed.
Options in Detail
Except Point Clouds Which Have Vertex Normal – Excludes point clouds that have normal
information. This option is only activated when two or more point clouds exists.
Reverse – Reverses generated normals by clicking the Point Clouds button and selecting
entities.
Tools > Scan Tools > Find Defect
What
The Find Defect command detects four types of defects: Non-Manifold Poly-Faces, Crossing Poly-
Faces, Redundant Poly-Faces and Tangled or Reversed Poly-Faces.

Why
The Find Defect command is useful for:
• Finding defects in a mesh and deleting them

• Determining the quality of a generated mesh
How to Use
How to Find defects in a mesh and delete them
1. Click the Scan button to enter the Scan mode. Go to Tools > Scan Tools > Find Defect
2. Check that detected defects have different colors and how many defects exist in the
mesh.
Note:
To navigate defects, click the left or right buttons.
3. Click OK to complete the command. All defective abnormal poly-faces will be selected.

4. Delete the poly-faces by pressing the Del key or go to Edit > Delete.
Options in Detail
Non-Manifold Poly-Faces – Shows the total number of detected Non-Manifold Poly-Faces and
enables the changing of their displayed colors.
Crossing Poly-Faces – Shows the total number of detected Crossing Poly-Faces and enables
the changing of their displayed color.
Redundant Poly-Faces – Shows total number of detected Redundant Poly-Faces and enables
the changing of their displayed color.
Tangled Or Reversed Poly-Faces – Shows total number of detected Tangled or Reversed Poly-
Faces and enables the changing of their displayed color.
Note:
Non-manifold Poly-Faces, Redundant Poly-Faces, Crossing Poly-Faces and Tangled Or Reversed Poly-Faces
are defined as below:
Non-manifold Poly-Face – When poly-faces share three or more poly-edges, it is referred to as non-
manifold topology. In a pure geometric term, to be a manifold topology, only two poly-faces can
constitute a poly-edge. However, a poly-edge with only one poly-face is classified as a boundary poly-
edge in the application and considered to be normal.
Non-manifold poly-faces may cause severe errors in various calculations, and even fatal errors in other
applications such as NC machining.
The right picture shows an example of the non-manifold topology, where poly-faces (V1 V2 V4), (V2 V4
V3), and (V2 V4 V5) share poly-edges (V2 V4).
Redundant Poly-Face – A redundant poly-face is a type of abnormal poly-face from the viewpoint of a
poly-vertex. Ignoring boundaries, a poly-vertex must have an identical number of poly-faces and

connecting poly-edges.
A poly-face violating this rule is called a redundant poly-face.
The following picture shows an example of a redundant poly-face (V1 V2 V3).
Crossing Poly-Face – When poly-edges sharing a poly-vertex intersect with one another, they are
geometrically incorrect and their poly-faces are called crossing poly-faces.
The following image displays a crossing poly-face. The poly-edge (V2 V3) of poly-face (V1 V2 V3) is
crossed with the poly-edge (V1 V4).
Although crossing poly-face is neither a topological definition nor a possible cause of serious problems,
it may cause errors in geometrical calculations.
Tangled Or Reversed Poly-Face – Every poly-face has normal information. If the normal direction of
poly-face is opposite to neighboring poly-face, it is a tangled or reversed poly-face.
See Also
Tools > Scan Tools > Healing Wizard

Tools > Scan Tools > Healing Wizard
What
The Healing Wizard command detects abnormal poly-faces in a mesh and automatically heals them.
When 3D scan data that has been scanned in different directions by using a 3D scanner are aligned
and merged into a single mesh, some abnormal poly-faces such as folded poly-faces, dangling poly-
faces, and small noisy clusters may occur. To optimize the mesh, the defects on the mesh need to be
healed.
Why
The Healing Wizard command is useful for:
• Creating an optimal mesh model without any abnormal poly-faces

• Healing defects
How to Use
How to heal abnormal poly-faces and clean defects from a mesh
1. Click the Scan button to enter the Scan mode. Go to Tools > Scan Tools > Healing
Wizard or click on the icon in the toolbar.
2. Abnormal poly-faces will be automatically detected in a mesh and the results will be
displayed with different colors. Check detected abnormal poly-faces and click the OK
button to heal them at all the same time.

3. Check that all detected defects are healed from the mesh.
Options in Detail
Folded Poly-Faces – Automatically checks if poly-faces have been folded in the same place on a
mesh and that the angle between poly-faces is smaller than a specified value.
Angle Is Smaller Than – Specifies angle criteria to detect folded poly-faces.
Angle Between Poly-faces
Note:
When the angle criteria are changed, the number of detected folded poly-faces will be
automatically updated.
Dangling Poly-Faces – Automatically checks if 2 or 3 sided opened poly-faces exist on the

boundaries of a mesh.
2 Side Open 3 Side Open
Small Clusters – Checks if a group of connected poly-faces, known as small clusters, have less
poly-faces than a specified value exist on a mesh.

Small Clusters
Poly-Face Count In A Cluster – Specifies count criteria used to detect small clusters.
Small Poly-Faces –Checks if small poly-faces exist that have a smaller area than specified area
criteria.
Small Poly-faces
Area Is Smaller Than – Specifies area criteria used to detect small poly-faces.
Non-Manifold Poly-Faces – Checks if non-manifold poly-faces and redundant poly-faces exist

on a mesh.
Crossing Poly-Faces – Checks if crossing poly-faces exist in a mesh.
Method – Contains 3 methods used to heal crossing poly-faces.
Smooth – Smooths poly-faces around crossing poly-faces.
Merge Poly-Vertices – Merges poly-vertices of crossing poly-faces.
Delete And Fill Hole – Deletes crossing poly-faces and fills the deleted area.
Small Tunnels – Detects poly-faces shaped like a tunnel or handle, known as small handles. This
option is automatically checked if small tunnels that have lesser poly-faces than the count criteria
exist on the mesh.
Tunnel Shape
Poly-Face Count In Tunnel – Specifies the count criteria used to detect small tunnels.
See Also

Tools > Scan Tools > Find Defect
What
The Fix Normal command harmonizes normal information of poly-faces in a mesh.
Why
The Fix Normal command is useful for:
• Correcting the normal information of poly-faces to create an optimal mesh

• Fixing the normal information of poly-faces in tessellated CAD mesh that has been imported
from neutral file formats such as IGES or STEP
How to Use
How to correct normal information of poly-faces in a mesh
1. Click the Scan button to enter the Scan mode. Go to Tools > Scan Tools > Fix Normal or
2. Choose the Automatic method and check the Propagate Topologically option. To
reverse the normal direction manually, choose the Interactive method and pick a seed

poly-face on the mesh.
3. Pick a seed poly-face on a mesh and check the results.
Options in Detail
Methods
This tool features four methods:
• Automatic
Automatically fixes the normal information of poly-faces in a mesh.
• Interactive
Reverses the normal information of connected poly-faces.
• Entire Mesh Or Point Cloud

Reverses the normal information of entire poly-faces in a mesh.
• Reference Nominal Data

Fixes the normal of scan data based on the normal of the nominal data.
Automatic – Fixes the normal information of poly-faces in a mesh by propagating topologically,

propagating geometrically, or repairing tangled poly-faces.
Propagate Topologically Propagate Geometrically Tangled Poly-Face
Propagate Topologically – Fixes the normal information of poly-faces inside of its

boundary.
Note:
Check the Propagate Topologically option if the mesh has no non-manifold poly-faces and the

boundaries exist in the mesh.
Propagate Geometrically – Fixes the normal information of poly-faces regardless of its

boundaries. Check the Propagate Geometrically option of a mesh that has disjoined
poly-edges and non-manifold poly-faces and boundaries that do not exist in the mesh.
Repair Tangled Poly-Faces – Repairs twisted and tangled topology and fixes the normal
information of poly-faces. The Repair Tangled Poly-Faces option is used to correct the
twisted topology that may occur when triangulating 3D scan data which has thin walls.
Interactive – Reverses the normal information of connected poly-faces.
Entire Mesh Or Point Cloud – Reverses the normal information of entire poly-faces in mesh.
Reference Nominal Data – Fixes the normal of scan data based on the normal of the nominal
data.
What
The Sew Boundaries command sews narrow line type holes in boundaries.
Why
The Sew Boundaries command is useful for:
• Creating an optimal mesh model without any torn boundaries

• Sewing torn boundaries in tessellated CAD mesh that have been imported from neutral file
formats such as IGES or STEP

How to Use
How to sew the boundaries of a mesh
1. Click the Scan button to enter the Scan mode. Go to Tools > Scan Tools > Sew
Boundaries or click the icon in the toolbar.
Note:
To check the boundaries of a mesh in the Model View, check the Boundary option in the Display
tab.
2. Click the Find Distance button in the Sew If Gap Is Smaller Than option to calculate an
estimated distance from boundaries.
Options in Detail
Sew If Gap Is Smaller Than – Specifies a distance for sewing gaps.

More Options
Merge Close Poly-Vertices – Merges poly-vertices in close proximity to each other using
Within Distance.
Before Merged After Merged
Repair Spike Poly-Faces – Repairs spiky poly-faces.
Spike Poly-Faces Repaired Spike Poly-

Faces
See Also
Tools > Scan Tools > Edit Boundaries
Tools > Scan Tools > Fill Holes
What
The Edit Boundaries command edits the boundaries of mesh. This command features multiple
boundary editing methods such as Smooth, Shrink, Fit, Extend, Extrude, and Fill.

Why
The Edit Boundaries command is useful for:
• Reducing the effect of noise and roughness on mesh boundaries

• Modifying the feature shapes of mesh
• Creating a CAD-like mesh
How to Use
How to edit mesh boundaries
1. Click the Scan button to enter the Scan mode. And go to Tools > Scan Tools > Edit
Boundaries or click the icon in the toolbar.
2. Choose the outer boundary of a mesh as the target Boundaries.
3. Choose the Fit method and define the Fitting Shape as Rectangle.
4. Click the OK button and check the results.

5. Run the Edit Boundaries command again.
6. Choose the fitted outer boundary as the target Boundaries.
7. Choose the Extrude method and set the Distance to -10mm and then check the Cap
option to close the bottom of the mesh.
Options in Detail
Target Entities
Boundaries – Selects boundaries of mesh. The Split Boundary button splits a boundary at
selected positions. This button is useful for partially editing boundaries of a mesh.
Before splitting boundary After splitting boundary

Methods
This command features six methods:
• Smooth
Reduces the effects of roughness on a boundary.
• Shrink
Removes poly-faces from boundary.
• Fit
Fits a boundary to a specific feature shape.
• Extend
Extends a boundary by a specific distance.
• Extrude
Extrudes a boundary by a specific distance.
• Fill
Fills poly-faces in a boundary.
Smooth – Reduces noises and effect of roughness in boundary of mesh.
Original Boundary Smooth Boundary
Select N-Depth From Boundary – Specifies the influence range of the smoothing effect
from a target boundary. The influence range will be highlighted on a mesh interactively
with this option.
Shrink – Removes poly-faces from a boundary.
Original Boundary Shrink Boundary
Note:
3D scan data may have roughness and noise in the area near a boundary caused by shadows or

vibrations during the scanning process. These defects may adversely affect the alignment between
scan data as well as the merging process. To get better results in scan data processing, defects in the
boundaries of mesh should be cleaned.
Select N-Depth From Boundary – Specifies the influence range of the shrinking effect
from a target boundary. The influence range will be highlighted on a mesh interactively
with this option.
Fit – Fits a boundary to specific feature shapes such as Circle, Slot, Rectangle, Polygon and
Freeform.
Fitting Shape – Defines specific features for a boundary to be fit to.
Auto – Automatically recognizes a feature shape within an allowable tolerance.
Circle – Defines a boundary fitted feature shape as a circle.
Slot – Defines a boundary fitted feature shape as a slot.
Rectangle – Defines a boundary fitted feature shape as a rectangle.
Polygon – Defines a boundary fitted feature shape as a polygon.

Freeform – Defines a boundary fitted feature shape as a freeform shape.
Allowable Tolerance – Specifies allowable tolerance for extracting a feature shape from
a boundary. If any feature shape cannot be matched with a boundary a freeform shape
will be chosen.
Note:
This option can be used only when the Fitting Shape option is set to Auto. Click the Estimate
button and the best tolerance will be automatically calculated based on the shape of the
selected target boundaries.
Fitting Type – Chooses a fitting type to create a geometric boundary shape from
boundary poly-vertices.
Best Fit – Finds best-fitted geometric boundary shape from boundary poly-vertices
using the least squares fitting method.
Min. Bound – Finds minimum-fitted geometric boundary shape that contact the
nearest boundary poly-vertices in the normal direction from the center point of the
best-fitted geometry that was found using the least squares fitting method.
Note:
When circle is selected as target fitting shape, the Min. Bound option is used for finding
maximum-inscribed geometric shape of a tube-like geometric volume that encloses
boundary poly-vertices using the minimum separation fitting method.
Max. Bound – Finds maximum-fitted geometric boundary shape that contact the
farthest boundary poly-vertices in the normal direction from the center point of the
best-fitted geometry that was found using the least squares fitting method.
Note:
When circle is selected as target fitting geometry, the Max. Bound option is used for

finding minimum-circumscribed geometric shape of a tube-like geometric volume that
encloses boundary poly-vertices using the minimum separation fitting method.
Hole – This option is only used for finding a circle fitting shape. It finds minimum-
fitted geometric shape that contacts the nearest boundary poly-vertices in the
normal direction from the center point of the best-fitted geometry that was found
Note:
The Hole method is available when the fitting type is set to Auto or Circle.
Best Fit Min Boundary & Max Hole

Boundary
will be used.
N Sigma
Use Only Effective Data – Uses only effective data when fitting. Effective data is the
actual data points used in fitting after sampling and outlier removal.
Rounded Corner – Fits a boundary to a specific feature shape with rounded corners and
is available when the fitting type is set to Auto, Rectangle or Polygon.

Non-Rounded Corner Rounded Corner
No. Of Edges – Decides the number of edges for a polygonal feature shape and is
available when the fitting type is set to Auto or Polygon.
Number of edges: 3 Number of edges: 5
Extend – Adds poly-faces around a boundary and extends the shape. The extending distance of
poly-faces can be controlled using Distance under Extend Options.
Distance – Specifies an extending distance.
Refine And Smooth Extended Mesh – Refines poly-faces in an extended area by

removing crossing poly-faces that can be generated during an extension, and smooths
poly-faces.
No. Of Smoothing Iterations – Specifies the number of smoothing iterations.
Extrude – Extrudes a boundary by a specified distance or up to a specified plane. The Blind, Up

To Plane, and Custom extrusion methods are available.
Method – Defines extrusion methods.
Blind – Extrudes a boundary by a specified distance.

Cap – Closes a boundary at the end of an extrusion.
Up To Plane – Extrudes a boundary up to a specified plane. Ref. plane, and planar

face can be selected as a target plane.
Custom – Extrudes a boundary up to a specific position. The specific position can

be defined by using a manipulator for the X, Y, and Z coordinates.
Fill – Fills poly-faces in a boundary. This option is similar to the Fill Hole command.
Flat – Fills a boundary by using flat poly-faces.
Curvature – Fills a boundary by following the curvature flow of poly-faces around a

boundary.
Merge Splitted Boundaries – Merges split boundaries into a single boundary.
’
Original Boundary Uncheck ‘Merge Split Check ‘Merge Split
Boundary Boundary’
Smooth Boundary – Refines a boundary for better filling results.
Flatness Of Filled Holes – Adjusts the flatness of a resulting shape in a filled boundary.

Curved Flat
See Also
What
The Fill Holes command fills in missing holes with poly-faces based on feature shapes of a mesh.
This command also offers advanced editing commands to modify or remove feature shapes from
boundaries.
Why
The Fill Holes command is useful for:
• Manually filling in holes with poly-faces based on geometric feature shapes
How to Use
How to fill missing holes in mesh

1 Click the Scan button to enter the Scan mode. Go to Tools > Scan Tools > Fill Holes or
. click the icon in the toolbar.
2 Select holes and choose the Curvature method.

.
3 Click the OK button to complete the command.
.
Options in Detail
Target Entities
Boundaries – Selects boundaries. To select all boundaries at one time, Go to Select > All –
Boundaries in the menu, use the pop-up menu, or use the Shift + A keyboard shortcut.
Editing Tools
This command features six editing commands:
• Add Bridge
Adds bridges in between boundaries.
• Fill Gulf
Fills poly-faces on indented boundaries.
• Remove Peninsula
Removes poly-faces on indented boundaries.
• Remove Island
Removes small clusters.

• Smooth Boundary
Applies smoothing to boundaries.
• Delete Poly-Face
Removes poly-faces.
Add Bridge – Adds bridges between target boundaries by connecting two poly-edges. To
add a bridge, drag a poly-edge from one side to the other.
Note:
If a hole is too large and complex to fill with poly-faces, use the Add Bridge editing command to make
the hole smaller and simpler.
Fill Gulf – Fills poly-faces on an indented boundary. To fill poly-faces on a gulf-like

boundary, pick points for a starting point and ending point.
Remove Peninsula – Removes poly-faces on an indented boundary. To remove peninsula-

like poly-faces on a boundary, draw a trimming path by picking two points.
Note:
The X symbol marked in the tool button indicates that it is used for removing detected poly-
faces.
Remove Island – Removes small clusters. To remove small clusters, pick a point in the
cluster.

Smooth Boundary – Applies smoothing to a boundary.
Delete Poly-Face – Removes poly-faces. To remove poly-faces, click this button and select
poly-faces, and then press the Delete key.
Note:
Using the Delete Poly-Face command to delete poly-faces will not exit the Fill Holes command.
Methods
Flat – Fills target boundaries with flat poly-faces.
Curvature – Fills poly-faces in target boundaries using the curvature flow around the boundary.
More Options
Hole Size Measure

Boundary Edge Count – Limits filling holes by the boundary edge count.
Perimeter – Limits filling holes by the length of boundaries.
Do Not Fill N-Biggest Holes – Preserves large holes. The biggest holes will be preserved in order
of size according to a specified value. If the value is set to zero, the option will be ignored.
Do Not Fill If Hole Is Bigger Than – Preserve large holes. Holes with a boundary edge count or
length of a boundary less than a specified value will not be filled.
Smooth Boundary – Applies smoothing to target boundaries. This option is useful for reducing
noise and the effect of roughness in a target boundary and allows easy filling of poly-faces in
complex boundaries.
Original Data Disable Smooth Boundary Enable Smooth Boundary
Flatness Of Filled Holes – Adjusts the flatness of filled areas.
See Also
Tools > Scan Tools > Defeature
What
The Defeature command removes feature shapes and regenerates poly-faces on a mesh. Defeature
removes selected areas first and applies the Fill Holes operation to the removed areas.

Why
The Defeature command is useful for:
• Removing feature shapes from a target mesh

• Removing unnecessary feature shapes and filling in poly-faces in empty areas to smoothly
connect with adjacent feature shapes
How to Use
How to delete feature shapes and recreate poly-faces on a mesh
1. Click the Scan button to enter the Scan mode. Go to Tools > Scan Tools > Defeature
2. Choose the Fill method. Select poly-faces to remove feature shapes.

Options in Detail
Target Feature Shape
Fill – Removes feature shapes and fills poly-faces in the removed areas.
Bridge – Removes feature shapes on cylindrical areas and fills poly-faces in the removed areas
by connecting with bridges.
Methods
Flat – Fills removed areas using flat poly-faces.
Curvature – Fills removed areas using the curvature flow around a boundary.
More Options
Smooth Boundary Of Defeatured Area – Applies smoothing to boundaries. This option is
useful for reducing the effect of roughness around boundaries that have been manually
selected and removed, and easily fills in poly-faces in boundaries.

Disable Smooth Boundary Enable Smooth Boundary
See Also
Edit > Delete
Tools > Scan Tools > Remove Marker
What
When scanning an object in different directions, markers are used to recognize feature shapes of 3D
scan data and align scans accurately. After aligning and merging scans to mesh, the markers are
required to be removed for creating an optimal mesh. The Remove Marker command removes
scanned markers from a mesh.
Why
The Remove Marker command is useful for:
• Finding and removing scan markers
How to Use

How to remove scan markers from a mesh
1. Click the Scan button to enter the Scan mode. Go to Tools > Scan Tools > Remove
Marker or click the icon in the toolbar.
2. Manually specify the marker radius as 10 mm and then click the Find Markers button.
3. Check the detected markers. If markers cannot be located by using Find Marker button
with a specified marker radius, pick the boundary of a marker on the mesh to select them
manually.
Options in Detail
Marker Radius – Specifies the radius of a target marker. Click the Find Markers button to find
markers with the specified radius.
Markers – Shows detected markers in a list. Click the From File button to import an AICON file
(.obc) that contains center coordinates of markers. This information will be used to find markers
in a mesh.

See Also
Edit > Delete
Tools > Scan Tools > Defeature
Tools > Scan Tools > Decimate
What
The Decimate command reduces the number of poly-faces by merging poly-vertices while
preserving geometric feature shapes. This command can be applied to multiple 3D scan data at one
time.
Why
The Decimate command is useful for:
• Reducing the number of poly-faces

• Increasing the size of poly-faces from meshes
• Dealing with a large number of meshes in follow-up inspection processes while maintaining an
original shape
How to Use
How to reduce the number of poly-faces of a mesh
1. Click the Scan button to enter the Scan mode. Go to Tools > Scan Tools > Decimate or

Note:
To apply this command to meshes, the target meshes should not have child entities.
2. Check the Poly-Face Count option and set the Reduction Ratio to 70 %.
Options in Detail
Methods
This command features two methods:
• Poly-Face Count
Reduces the number of poly-faces by controlling the target poly-face count.
• Allowable Deviation
Reduces the number of poly-faces within an allowable deviation.
Poly-Face Count – Reduces the number of poly-faces by using parameters specified by the
Target Poly-Face Count or Reduction Ratio options.
Target Poly-Face Count – Determines the target number of poly-faces. This option can
be used only when a single mesh is selected.
Original Face Count: 14,703 Target Face Count: 5,228

Reduction Ratio – Determines reduction ratio.
Original Data Reduction Ratio: 70% Reduction Ratio: 30%
High Curvature Area Resolution – Determines resolution in high curvature areas of a

target mesh.
Original Data
High Curvature Area Resolution: Sparse
High Curvature Area Resolution: Dense
Allowable Deviation – Reduces the number of poly-faces within an allowable deviation

between an original shape and decimated results.
More Options
Do Not Move Poly-Vertices – Preserves the original position of poly-vertices during
decimation.
Do Not Modify Boundaries – Preserves the original shape of boundaries during decimation.

Original Data Check Option Uncheck Option
Regularize Poly-Faces – Regenerates poly-faces with uniform poly-edge lengths.
Note:
The calculation time for this command may be highly increased with this option.
Large Data Mode – Internally divides target 3D scan data into sub models by unloading and
loading between the physical memory and the hard drive during the calculation. This option is
useful when dealing with huge numbers of meshes.
See Also
Tools > Scan Tools > Split
What
The Split command divides a mesh into multiple parts by using various tool entities such as a Ref.
plane, curve, face, surface Body, solid Body, or polyline.
Why
The Split command is useful for:

• Splitting a mesh into multiple parts
How to Use
How to split a mesh with a tool entity
1. Click the Scan button to enter the Scan mode. Go to Tools > Scan Tools > Split or click
2. Choose the By Entity method and select a Ref. Plane.
3. Click the Next Stage button to continue and select a remaining area.
Options in Detail
Methods

• By Entity
Splits a mesh by using a tool entity.
• By Drawing Polyline On Screen

Splits a mesh by drawing a polyline on the screen.
• By User Defined Plane

Splits a mesh by a user defined plane.
By Entity – Splits a mesh by using a plane, curve, or a body face.
Tool Entity – Selects tool entities.
By Drawing Poly-Line On Screen – Splits a mesh by drawing a polyline on the screen.
Note:
Hold the Shift key while drawing to create a horizontal or vertical polyline.
Node Num. Of Poly Line – Shows the number of nodes on a polyline to split.
By User Defined Plane – Splits a mesh by using user-defined virtual plane that can be
manipulated by dragging or rotating manipulator handles.
Base Plane – Splits a mesh by a selected base plane.

Position – Specifies X, Y, or Z as a base position.
Normal – Specifies X, Y, or Z as a base normal.
More Options
Cap Section Ends – Fills an open boundary to create a closed mesh.
Disable Capping Enable Capping
Result
Remaining Region – Selects remaining regions.
What
The Offset command creates a new mesh that has a constant distance from an original mesh using
either the Surface or Volume method.
Why
• Increasing or decreasing the size of a mesh
How to Use
How to increase the size of mesh by using distance
1. Click the Scan button to enter the Scan mode. Go to Tools > Scan Tools > Offset or click
2. Set the Distance to 3 mm.
Options in Detail
Methods
Surface – Creates a new mesh that is offset from the original mesh. Although the operation
appears to expand or contract the faces, it actually defines new offset faces at a specific
distance from the original mesh.
Original Data Surface Offset
Distance – Specifies an offset distance.
Volume – Calculates the distance from a voxel node to a poly-vertex and makes a new offset

polygon using the distance.
Original Data Volume Offset
Output Resolution Control – Determines the resolution of poly-faces after an offset by

specifying a multiplier of the current poly-edge length. This option is available for the
Volume method.
Current Average Edge Length – Shows the resolution of the current average
edge length.
Edge Length Multiplier – Multiplies the average edge length by a specified value.
Target Average Edge Length – Defines average edge length by a specified value.
More Options
Preview Offset Result – Displays an offset result as a point cloud.
Preview
Remove Crossing Region – Automatically verifies and cleans crossing regions. This option is
available for the Surface method.
Make Closed Mesh – Closes and offset an open mesh. This option is available for the Volume
method.

Original Data With Closed Mesh Option Without Closed Mesh
Option
See Also
Tools > Scan Tools > Thicken
Tools > Scan Tools > Thicken
What
The Thicken command changes the volume of a mesh by giving a constant thickness to each face
to create a completely closed mesh with no boundaries.
Why
The Thicken command is useful for:
• Giving faces with no volume thickness

• Creating constant thickness parts
How to Use
A. How to create thickness
1. Click the Scan button to enter the Scan mode. Go to Tools > Scan Tools > Thicken or
2. Set the Thickness to 3 mm.
Options in Detail
Methods
Surface – Defines new offset poly-faces that are a specific distance from an original mesh.
Thickness – Specifies an offset distance. To change an offset direction, use the

Direction1 or Direction2 options. To offset both directions at the same time, use Both.
Direction 1 – Thickens in the default positive direction.
Direction 2 – Thickens in the opposite, negative direction from Direction1.
Both – Thickens using both Direction 1 and Direction 2 at the same time.
Volume – Calculates the distance from a voxel node to a poly-vertex and makes a new
thickened polygon using the distance.
Output Resolution Control – Determines the resolution of poly-faces after an offset by

specifying a multiplier of the current poly-edge length. This option is available for the
Volume method.

Current Average Edge Length – Shows the resolution of the current average
edge length.
Edge Length Multiplier – Multiplies the average edge length by a specified value.
Target Average Edge Length – Defines average edge length by a specified value.
More Options
Preview Thicken Result – Displays a thickened result as a point cloud.
Remove Crossing Region – Automatically verifies and cleans crossing regions. This option is
available for the Surface method.
Make Closed Mesh – This option is available when you select the Volume method. If a mesh
is not closed, the application will close and thicken a mesh.
Original Data Check the Option Uncheck the Option
See Also

7.5.3. Tools > Region Tools
The Region Tools menu features various commands that can be used for generating and editing
feature regions on a nominal mesh in Mesh Region mode. Feature regions can be classified with
geometric types such as Plane, Cylinder, Cone, Sphere, and Tours and created feature regions can be
used for creating ref. geometries and measuring GD&T.
The Mesh Region mode is divided into four tool groups for creating and editing feature regions.
1. Controlling Geometry Classification Criteria

• Geometry Classification Option
Controls options for geometry classification criteria.
2. Creating and Reorganizing Feature Regions

• Auto Segment
Automatically segments feature regions on a mesh.
• Resegment
Resegments previously segmented feature regions.
3. Editing Feature Regions

• Merge
Merges multiple feature regions into a single feature region.
• Split
Divides feature regions into multiple parts.
• Insert
Inserts a new feature region.

4. Managing Feature Regions
• Separate
Separates a feature region into multiple feature regions.
• Enlarge
Enlarges feature regions.
• Shrink
Shrinks feature regions.
How to Use
A. How to change a geometric type of existing feature regions by
using the Geometry Classification Option Tool Palette
1. Enter the Mesh Region mode by clicking the Mesh Region button in the Tool Palette to
edit geometric types of existing feature regions.
Note:
Geometric types of feature regions can be classified with tolerance and outlier values
specified in the Geometry Classification Option Tool Palette.
When a mesh data is set to nominal data, a tolerance for geometry classification will be
automatically determined according to the size of target mesh and feature regions will be
automatically classified by using the automatically defined geometry classification criteria. If
necessary, the criteria can be manually adjusted and applied to existing feature regions.
Note:
The Outlier option determines the ratio how many percentage of outliers needs to be
removed from the geometric standard deviation to get reliable information for better results
of geometry classification.

2. Check geometry types of feature regions on target mesh.
3. Change the tolerance value to 0.1mm and click the OK button to classify the geometry
types of feature regions with the changed geometry classification criteria. Check the
geometry type again.
B. How to shrink and expand feature region without invading the

boundary of adjacent feature regions
1. Click the Filter Faces/Regions button in the Select Filter to select feature regions only.
2. Uncheck the Allow Invasion option to prevent from invading the boundary of adjacent
feature regions.
3. Select a feature region and modify the size of feature region by clicking the Enlarge or
the Shrink buttons.

Note:
Feature regions will not be allowed the invasion of the boundary of adjacent feature regions
while the Allow Invasion option is unchecked.
Tools > Region Tools > Auto Segment
What
The Auto Segment command automatically classifies feature regions by recognizing 3D features
from raw scan data. Classified feature regions have geometric feature information that can be used
for creating features quickly.
Why
The Auto Segment command is useful for:
• Classify feature regions on a mesh

• Using geometric feature information for easily and quickly creating features
How to Use

How to automatically segment feature regions on a mesh
1
Click Nominal button in the toolbar to enter Nominal mode.
.
2 Click Mesh Region button to enter Mesh Region mode.

.
3 Go to Tools > Region Tools > Auto Segment or click the icon in the toolbar.
.
4 Click the OK button with default values.
.
Options in Detail
CAD Tessellated Mesh – Segments regions more specifically when segmenting target mesh
converted from CAD data.
Unchecked Checked
Sensitivity – Specifies search sensitivity for feature regions.
Note:
When the slider is moved towards More, search sensitivity will increase. Higher search sensitivity may
generate many particle regions if a mesh is rough.

Sensitivity: 100 Sensitivity: 20
Mesh Roughness – Adjusts the roughness of a mesh depending on the noise level. If you click
the Estimate button , the application analyzes the mesh and recommends a proper value.
Rough Mesh Smooth Mesh
Merge Same Primitives Shapes – Generates a single region if one certain primitive region
(Plane, Cylinder, Corn, Sphere or Box) is separated into several regions.
Unchecked Checked
See Also
Tools > Region Tools > Resegment
Tools > Region Tools > Merge
Tools > Region Tools > Split
Tools > Region Tools > Insert
Tools > Region Tools > Separate
Tools > Region Tools > Enlarge
Tools > Region Tools > Shrink

What
The Resegment command removes selected regions then classifies them again. Generally the
Resegment command is useful for resegmenting smaller irregular areas after Auto Segmenting,
which classifies overall areas.
Why
The Resegment command is useful for:
• Accurately classifying geometries on a region
How to Use
How to resegment feature regions on a mesh
1. Click Nominal button in the toolbar to enter Nominal mode.
2. Click Mesh Region button to enter Mesh Region mode.
3. Go to Tools > Region Tools > Resegment or click the icon in the toolbar.
4. Select regions to resegment.

5. Set the Sensitivity and Mesh Roughness options. In this example, regions should be
simplified. So move the Sensitivity slider to Less.
Options in Detail
Sensitivity – Specifies the search sensitivity of feature regions.
Note:
When the slider is moved towards More, search sensitivity will be increase. Higher search sensitivity
may generate many particle regions if a mesh is rough.
Sensitivity: 100 Sensitivity: 20
Mesh Roughness – Adjusts the roughness of a mesh depending on the noise level.

Rough Mesh Smooth Mesh
See Also
What
The Merge command merges multiple feature regions into a single feature region. This command
performs the opposite function of the Separate command.
Why
The Merge command is useful for:
Merging multiple feature regions into a single feature region
• Managing separated feature regions as a single feature region
How to Use

How to merge multiple feature regions into a single feature region
1. Click the Nominal button in the toolbar to enter the Nominal mode.
2. Click the Mesh Region button to enter the Mesh Region mode.
3. Select two regions to merge.
Note:
Poly-faces of regions can be selected and merged with regions.
4. Go to Tools > Region Tools > Merge or click the icon in the toolbar. The regions will
be merged.
See Also

What
The Split command divides a feature region into multiple parts.
Why
The Split command is useful for:
• Manually dividing feature regions

• Separating multiple parts of feature region
How to Use
How to divide feature regions into multiple parts
1 Click the Nominal button in the toolbar to enter the Nominal mode.
.
2 Click the Mesh Region button to enter the Mesh Region mode.
.
3 Go to Tools > Region Tools > Split or click the icon in the toolbar.
.
4 Drag areas by using the Paint Brush Section Mode to divide a region into two parts.
.

3 The feature region will be divided into two separated parts.
.
4 Click the OK button.

.
See Also
What
The Insert command manually adds new feature regions.
Why
The Insert command is useful for:
• Manually adding new feature regions

• Making interesting areas by grouping feature regions
How to Use
How to insert a new feature region
3. Select areas by using the Paint Brush Selection Mode. Insert a new region.
4. Go to Tools > Region Tools > Insert or click the icon in the toolbar. A new feature
region will be inserted on the existing feature region.
Before Insert After Insert
See Also

What
The Separate command creates independent feature regions. This command performs the opposite
function of the Merge command.
Why
The Separate command is useful for:
• Separating a feature region into multiple feature regions
How to Use
How to separate a feature region into multiple feature regions
3. Select a feature region to separate. Feature regions that have been distributed in
separate areas can be a target feature region for this command.

4. Go to Tools > Region Tools > Separate or click the icon in the toolbar. The feature
regions will be individually separated.
See Also
What
The Enlarge command expands a feature region. This command performs the opposite function of
the Shrink command.

Why
The Enlarge command is useful for:
• Expanding an existing feature region
How to Use
How to enlarge the size of feature regions
2. Click Mesh Region button to enter Mesh Region mode.
3. Select a feature region to expand.
4. Go to Tools > Region Tools > Enlarge or click the icon in the toolbar. The feature
region will be enlarged.
See Also

What
The Shrink command shrinks a feature region. This command performs the opposite function of the
Enlarge command.
Why
The Shrink command is useful for:
• Shrinking a feature region

• Reducing the roughness of feature regions around boundaries
• Correcting geometry properties of automatically classified feature regions
How to Use
How to shrink the size of feature regions
3. Select a feature region to shrink.

4. Go to Tools > Region Tools > Shrink or click the icon in the toolbar. The feature region
will be shrunk.
See Also
7.5.4. Tools > Section Tools

The Section Tools menu features commands to inspect a section of a part in Section mode.
The Section mode is divided into four tool groups for checking the deviation between scan data
and nominal data and measuring GD&T on section.
Note:
Section inspection feature is not supported in LiveInspect.
1. Controlling Scan Section Segment

• Segment Scan Section
Determines the resolution of scan section segments.
2. Checking Section Deviation

• Edit Section Deviation
Edits the definition of existing section deviations.
3. Measuring Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing (GD&T)

• Smart Dimension
Inspects the distance, radius, and angle of target entities on a section.
• Linear Dimension
Inspects the linear distance between target entities.
• Angular Dimension
Inspects angles between target entities.
• Radial Dimension
Inspects angles between target entities.
• Elliptical Dimension
Inspects the longest distance and the shortest distance between elliptical features.
• Datum
Adds datums to the geometric profiles of a model.
• Position
Verifies portions of a feature whether they relate to datums or not.
• Straightness
Verifies the straightness of a linear geometric shape in a sectional entity.
• Circularity
Verifies the circularity of a sectional entity that has a circular geometric shape.
• Concentricity
Verifies the concentricity of a sectional entity that has a circular geometric shape.
• Parallelism
Verifies the parallelism of a sectional entity that has a linear geometric shape.
• Perpendicularity
Verifies the perpendicularity of a sectional entity that has a linear geometric shape.
• Angularity
Verifies the angularity of a sectional entity that has a linear geometric shape.
• Symmetry
Verifies the symmetry of sectional entities that face each other.
4. Creating Ref. Geometry

• Point
Creates a reference point on a section.
• Simulated CMM Point

Simulates a Coordinate Measuring Machine, or, CMM, as it would function in the real world on
a section.
• Vector
Creates a reference vector on a section.
• Circle
Creates a reference circle on a section.
• Slot
Creates a reference slot on a section.
• Rectangle
Creates a reference rectangle on a section.
• Regular Polygon
Creates a reference polygon on a section.
How to Use
How to enter the Section mode
1 Go to Insert > Section or click the Section icon in the toolbar. In this mode sections can
. be created to find deviation. Section mode provides a 2D environment to work with and
inspect a model.

Note:
The Segment Scan Section Tool Palette determines the resolution of scan section segments.
Moving the slider to the left will create fewer segments, and lines and arcs will be segmented
with a loose tolerance. Moving the slider to the right will create more segments, and lines
and arcs will be segmented with a tight tolerance. Moving the slider will display classified
lines and arcs in real-time.
Low Resolution High Resolution
How to edit existing section features

1. To edit existing sections in the Section mode, double-click a section feature or right-click
on a section inspection feature in the Inspection Feature tree and choose the Edit
command.
How to rotate a 2D section view to select a 3D entity

1. While in the Section mode, the rotation of the view is essentially locked into a 2D view.
To select a 3D entity, go to the General section in the Display tab and uncheck the Lock
option to freely rotate the 2D section view.

Tools > Section Tools > Edit Section Deviation
What
The Edit Section Deviation command edits the definition of existing section deviations.
Why
The Edit Section Deviation command is useful for:
• Editing the definition of existing section deviations
How to Use
How to edit the definition of an existing section deviation
1. Select an existing section deviation, in this example, SEC1 inspection feature in the
Inspection Feature tree.
2. Go to Tools > Section Tools > Edit Section Deviation. Section deviation can also be

directly edited by right clicking a section inspection feature in the Inspection Feature
tree and choosing the Edit Section Deviation command from the pop-up menu.
3. The Edit Section Deviation dialog box will be displayed. Parameters can be changed as
desired.
For information about the definition of Section Deviation: Insert > Section.
See Also
Insert > Section
Tools > Section Tools > Datum
What
The Datum command adds datums on the geometric profiles of a model. A datum is a theoretical
exact point or line derived from specific geometric feature profiles. They are the origin from which a
location or geometric characteristics of feature profiles are established.
The name of a datum is automatically assigned in alphabetical order from A to Z. Letters can be
unrestrictedly combined to form characters such as AA or ZZZ.

Note:
Datums created in a section are available to use only in that section.
Why
The Datum command is useful for:
• Defining geometric feature profiles as standard feature profiles for inspection

• Inspecting feature profiles that have three degrees of constraints in a section
How to Use
How to edit the definition of an existing section deviation
1. Double click a section inspection feature in the Inspection Feature tree to enter the
Section mode.
2. Go to Tools > Section Tools > Datum or click the icon in the toolbar.
3. Define datum A by selecting a section edge, then place the resulting annotation in the
Section View.
4. Define datum B by selecting a section edge, then place the resulting annotation in the

Section View.
Options in Detail
Target – Selects a target entity to measure a distance, an angle, or a radius.
Note:
A Ref. vector, Ref. circle, Ref. slot, Ref. rectangle, Ref. polygon, Section Edge, or Composite
Selection can be a target entity and applicable entities will be determined according to the geometry
type of the target entity.
The following table shows where datum can be applied:
Geometric Feature Type

Target Entity Line Regular
Circle Slot Rectangle
(Vector) Polygon
Section OK OK OK OK
Ref. geometry OK OK OK OK OK
Tools > Section Tools > Smart Dimension
What
The Smart Dimension command inspects the distance, radius, and angle of target entities on a
section. The type of dimension is automatically determined by the combination of selected target
entities.

Why
The Smart Dimension command is useful for:
• Measuring the distance, radius, and angle of target entities on a section at one time
How to Use
How to measure distance, radius and angle at the same time
Section mode.
2. Go to Tools > Section Tools > Smart Dimension or click the icon in the toolbar.
3. Measure a distance by selecting two parallel section edges then place the resulting
annotation in the Section View.
4. Measure an arc radius by selecting an arc section edge then place the resulting
annotation in the Section View.

Options in Detail
Dimension Type
Type – Shows dimension types such as Linear, Radial and Angular.
Note:
A dimension type is intelligently determined according to a selected entity. For example, when two
parallel lines are selected as target entities, the dimension type will automatically become Linear. When
arcs are selected as target entities, the dimension type will automatically become Radial. For more
information, go to Tools > Section Tools > Linear Dimension, Angular Dimension, or Radial
Dimension.
Target Entities
Target – Selects a target entity to measure a distance, an angle, or a radius.
Note:
A Ref. point, Ref. vector, Ref. circle, Ref. slot, Ref. rectangle, Ref. polygon, Section Vertex, Section
Edge, or Composite Selection can be a target entity and applicable entities will be determined according
to the geometry type of the target entity.
The following table shows where smart dimension can be applied:

L: Linear Dimension, A: Angular Dimension, R: Radial Dimension
*) Available for a single entity
Target Entity Point Line Regular
(Vertex) (Vector) Polygon
Section L L*, A L, R L* L*
Ref. geometry L L*, A L, R L* L* L
Options

Tolerance – Specifies features and tolerance ranges by typing values into an input box such as:
0.8
-0.8~0.8
-0.8, 0.8
-0.8/0.8
-0.8:0.8
Nominal – Shows a nominal size that is used as a designation value for general feature identification. This
value is automatically extracted from Nominal data. It can also be manually modified if desired. When the
default nominal value is manually changed, the Estimate button will be displayed next to the nominal
input box. To calculate the nominal value from selected target entities, click the Estimate button . After
calculation, the button will be disabled.
Note:
Based on the type of dimension, measuring icons ( ) that can manually measure distance,
angle, or radius, will be displayed next to the Nominal input box. To manually set a nominal value by
measuring the distance between features, click the Measure Distance button , then pick a point on
a feature profile. To manually set a nominal value by measuring the radius of a feature, click the Measure
Radius button , then pick a point on a feature profile. To manually set a nominal value by measuring
the angle between features, click the Measure Angle button , then pick a point on a feature profile.
In Space – Finds minimum-fitted geometry that contacts the nearest scan pair points in the
normal direction from the center point of the best-fitted geometry that was found using the
least square fitting method.
Note:
In circular section edges, the In-Space mating option is used for finding maximum-inscribed
geometry of a ribbon-like geometric volume that encloses scan pair points using the minimum
In Material – Finds maximum-fitted geometry that contacts the farthest scan pair points in
the normal direction from the center point of the best-fitted geometry that was found using
the least square fitting method.
Note:
In circular section edges, the In-Material mating option is used for finding minimum-circumscribed
geometry of a ribbon-like geometric volume that encloses selected entities using the minimum
properties of a target section edge.

Best Fit, Min. Bound, and Max. Bound can be used as a fitting method. For more information,
go to User Interface > Docking Bars > Properties.
<Actual Mating>
Note:
When measuring a Dimension, a calculation will simulate measuring with a caliper in the real-world.
The following images show how each mating method (In Space and In Material) is applied for
measuring the size of concave and convex features.
In Space
In Material
Alignment – Aligns a measuring direction and is only available for Linear dimensions.

Without Alignment X Alignment Y Alignment
(Shortest Distance)
Arc Condition – Specifies arc conditions by choosing either center, minimum or maximum. This
option is displayed when the dimension type is Linear and target entities are circular section
edges.
Center - Center Min - Min
Max - Max Between Line - Circle
Pattern – Measures the radius from multiple patterned feature profiles at the same time. This
option is displayed only when the dimension type is Radial.

Radius – Changes the display of radius values from a Radius to a Diameter. This option is displayed
only when the dimension type is Radial.
See Also
Tools > Section Tools > Linear Dimension
Tools > Section Tools > Angular Dimension
Tools > Section Tools > Radial Dimension
Tools > Section Tools > Elliptical Dimension
Tools > Section Tools > Linear Dimension
What
The Linear Dimension command inspects the linear distance between target entities.

Why
The Linear Dimension command is useful for:
• Measuring the linear distance between target entities
How to Use
How to measure a linear distance between target entities
Section mode.
2. Go to Tools > Section Tools > Linear Dimension or click the icon in the toolbar.
3. Select two section edges then place the resulting annotation in the Section View.
4. Measure the distance between the remaining circles by selecting circular section edges
as explained in Step3. Click the OK button to complete the command.

How to Measure Linear Dimensions for Section Edges

The following cases explain how linear dimensions are measured according to target entity type.
• Point/Point Distance – The geometry type of target entities can be:

 Point Geometry Type – Vertex, Circle, Ref. Point, Ref. circle, Ref. slot, Ref. rectangle, Ref.
polygon
Linear dimension measures the direct distance between selected entities and defines the
distance as a nominal value. When scan pair points exist, the linear dimension inspects the
deviation between a nominal value and the actual value, which is the direct distance
between scan pair geometries extracted from a target 3D scan data according to the Actual
Mating Envelop Rule.
• Point/Line Distance – The geometry type of target entities can be:

 Point Geometry Type – Vertex, Circle, Ref. Point, Ref. circle, Ref. slot, Ref. rectangle, Ref.
polygon
 Line (Vector) Geometry Type – Line, Ref. vector
Linear dimension measures the projection distance along the normal direction of a selected
target entity that has a vector geometry type, and defines the distance as a nominal value.
When scan pair points exist, the linear dimension inspects the deviation between a nominal
value and the actual value, which is the projection distance between scan pair geometries
extracted from target 3D scan data according to the Actual Mating Envelop Rule.
• Line/Line Distance – The geometry type of target entities can be:

 Line (Vector) Geometry Type – Line, Ref. vector
The firstly selected entity is used as the standard for dimensioning. The nominal value is
defined by an average distance calculated between two perpendicular distances from the
start and end points of the secondly selected entity to the firstly selected entity. If the first
selected entity is size-limited and the second selected entity is unlimited, the calculation
method will be calculated in the opposite direction, first from the unlimited entity to the size-
limited entity. When scan pair points exist, the linear dimension inspects the deviation
between the nominal value and the actual value, which is an average perpendicular distance
between scan pair geometries extracted from target 3D scan data according to the Actual

Note:
Actual Mating Envelop
An Actual Mating Envelop is theoretically defined as a form perfect, maximum inscribed, minimum
circumscribed or tangent, inverse representation of an actual feature. Mating Envelopes can be specified
as “In-Material” and “In-Space”, or as “unconstrained”, “orientation constrained” and “location constrained”
relative to a Datum Reference Frame. It defines a mating method to find scan pair geometry in the
application.
• In Space
Finds minimum-fitted geometry that contacts the nearest scan pair points in the normal direction from
the center point of the best-fitted geometry that was found using the least square fitting method. If the
In-Space mating envelop is used in circular section edges, it will be used for finding maximum-inscribed
• In Material
Finds maximum-fitted geometry that contacts the farthest scan pair points in the normal direction from
In-Material mating envelop is used in circular section edges, it will be used for finding minimum-
circumscribed geometry of a ribbon-like geometric volume that encloses scan pair points using the
minimum separation fitting method.
<Actual Mating Envelop Rule>
Options in Detail
Methods
Individual – Individually measures linear dimensions by selecting target entities one by one.

Continue – Continually measures a linear dimension from a previous target entity to another
target entity. The first target is automatically set from the last target in the previous dimensioning.
Baseline – Measures a linear dimension from a target baseline entity to other entities.
Target Entities
Target – Selects a target entity to measure a distance.
Note:
A Ref. point, Ref. vector, Ref. circle, Ref. slot, Ref. rectangle, Ref. polygon, Section Vertex, Section
Edge, or Composite Selection can be a target entity and applicable entities will be determined according
to the geometry type of the target entity.
The following table shows where linear dimension can be applied:

Section OK OK* OK OK* OK*
Ref. geometry OK OK* OK OK* OK* OK
Options

0.8
-0.8~0.8
-0.8, 0.8
-0.8/0.8
-0.8:0.8
Nominal – Shows a nominal size that is used as a designation value for general feature
identification. This value is automatically extracted from Nominal data. It can also be manually
modified if desired. When the default nominal value is manually changed, the Estimate button
will be displayed next to the nominal input box. To calculate the nominal value from selected
target entities, click the Estimate button . After calculation, the button will be disabled.
Note:
normal direction from the center point of the best-fitted geometry that was found using
Note:
In circular section edges, the In-Space mating option is used for finding maximum-inscribed
Note:
In circular section edges, the In-Material mating option is used for finding minimum-circumscribed
geometry of a ribbon-like geometric volume that encloses selected entities using the minimum

Note:
When measuring a Dimension, the calculation will simulate measurement with a caliper in the
real-world. The following images show how each mating method (In Space and In Material) is
applied for measuring the size of concave and convex features.
In Space
In Material
Alignment – Aligns a measuring direction.

(Shortest Distance)
option is displayed when target entities are circular section edges.

See Also
Tools > Section Tools > Angular Dimension
What
The Angular Dimension command inspects angles between target entities.

Why
The Angular Dimension command is useful for:
• Measuring angles between target entities
How to Use
How to measure angles between target entities
Section mode.
2. Go to Tools > Section Tools > Angular Dimension or click the icon in the toolbar.
3. Select two section edges then place the resulting annotation in the Section View.
Specify a Tolerance value.

How to Measure Angular Dimensions for Section Edges
The geometry type of target entities can be:
• Line (Vector) Geometry Type – Line, Ref. vector

The angle between two lines is calculated after a second parallel line is selected and moved
parallel to the first selected line so that the target entities can be intersected. When scan pair
points exist, angular dimension inspects the deviation between the nominal value and the actual
value, which is the angle between scan pair geometries extracted from a target 3D scan data
according to the Actual Mating Envelop Rule.
Note:
application.
• In Space
In-Space mating envelop is used in circular edges, it will be used for finding maximum-inscribed
• In Material
In-Material mating envelop is used in circular edges, it will be used for finding minimum-circumscribed

Options in Detail
Target Entities
Target – Selects target entities to measure a distance.
Note:
A Ref. vector, Section Edge, or Composite Selection can be a target entity and applicable entities will
be determined according to the geometry type of the target entity.
The following table shows where angular dimension can be applied:

Target Entity
Line (Vector)
Section OK
Ref. geometry OK
Options
0.8
-0.8~0.8
-0.8, 0.8
-0.8/0.8
-0.8:0.8
Note:
During the first angular dimension measurement no default tolerance values are provided. After
defining tolerance values, they will be preserved when the command is used again.

Note:
See Also
Tools > Section Tools > Radial Dimension
What
The Radial Dimension command inspects angles between target entities.
Why

The Radial Dimension command is useful for:
• Measuring the radius of a target entity
How to Use
How to measure the radius of a target entity
Section mode.
2. Go to Tools > Section Tools > Radial Dimension or click the icon in the toolbar.
3. Select a circular section edge then place the resulting annotation in the Section View.
4. Measure the radius of a second circular edge then place the resulting annotation in the
Section View. Click the OK button to complete the command.
How to Measure Radial Dimensions for Section Edges

• Circle Geometry Type – Circle, Ref. circle

Radial dimension measures the radius of selected entities and defines the radius as a nominal

value. When scan pair points exist, radial dimension inspects the deviation between the nominal
value and the actual value which is the radius of the scan pair geometries extracted from target
3D scan data according to the Actual Mating Envelop Rule.
Note:
application.
• In Space
In-Space mating envelop is used in circular edges, it will be used for finding maximum-inscribed
• In Material
In-Material mating envelop is used in circular edges, it will be used for finding minimum-circumscribed
Options in Detail

Target Entities
Target – Selects a target entity to measure a radius. A ref. point, ref. vector, ref. circle, ref. slot, ref.
rectangle, ref. polygon, section vertex, section edge, region edge, GT, dimension, datum and
composite selection can be a target entity.
Note:
A Ref. circle, Section Edge, or Composite Selection can be a target entity and applicable entities will be
determined according to the geometry type of the target entity.
The following table shows where radial dimension can be applied:

Target Entity
Circle
Section OK
Ref. geometry OK
Options
0.8
-0.8~0.8
-0.8, 0.8
-0.8/0.8
-0.8:0.8
Note:

In Space – Finds maximum-inscribed geometry of a ribbon-like geometric volume that
encloses scan pair points using the minimum separation fitting method.
In Material – Finds minimum-circumscribed geometry of a ribbon-like geometric volume

that encloses selected entities using the minimum separation fitting method.
Note:
In Space
In Material
Radius – Changes the display of radius values from a Radius to a Diameter.

Pattern - Measures the radius from multiple patterned feature profiles at the same time. This
See Also
Tools > Section Tools > Elliptical Dimension
What
The Elliptical Dimension command inspects the longest distance and the shortest distance
between elliptical features.
Why
The Elliptical Dimension command is useful for:
• Measuring the longest distance and the shortest distance between elliptical features

How to Use
How to measure the size of an elliptical feature
Section mode.
2. Go to Tools > Section Tools > Elliptical Dimension or click the icon in the toolbar.
3. Select an elliptical section edge and enable the Radius and Major Axis options. Place
the resulting annotation in the Section View.
Options in Detail
Target Entities
Target – Selects target entities to measure an elliptical dimension.
Note:
A Section Edge, or Composite Selection can be a target entity and applicable entities will be
The following table shows where elliptical dimension can be applied:
Target Entity Geometric Feature Type

Freeform (Ellipse)
Section OK
Options
0.8
-0.8~0.8
-0.8, 0.8
-0.8/0.8
-0.8:0.8
Note:

<Actual Mating>
Note:
When measuring a Dimension, the calculation will simulate measuring with a caliper in the real-
world. The following images show how each mating method (In Space and In Material) is applied
for measuring the size of concave and convex features.
In Space
In Material
Radius – Measures half the distance of an elliptical feature.
Alignment – Aligns a measurement direction to the X, Y, Z Axis or a User Defined Axis.
Major / Minor Axis – Chooses either the Major Axis or the Minor Axis to measure the longest or

shortest distance of an elliptical feature profile.
Major Axis Minor Axis
See Also
Tools > Section Tools > Position
What
The Position command verifies how much the location of a feature can deviate from its exact true
position in relation to datums or not. Position tolerance is a geometric dimensioning and
Tolerancing (GD&T) location control used to describe a perfect or exact location of a feature in
relation to datum references or other features.
Symbol:
Why
The Position command is useful for:
• Verifying how much a feature profile can deviate from its exact true position
• Controlling the location of a feature in relation to datum references or other features

How to Use
How to verify the location of feature profiles from its exact true
position
Section mode.
3. Define datums A and B by clicking section edges.
5. Go to Tools > Section Tools > Position in the menu. Select circular section edges then
place the resulting annotations in the Section View. Specify a Tolerance value for
Datum A and Datum B.
How to Inspect Pass / Fail Results

A position tolerance controls how much the location of a feature can deviate from its exact true
position with relating to datums or not. It can be applied to two mating linear section edges as well
as circular features that have a center point.
Note:
A datum is not required for this measurement. When datums are defined, scan pair geometry is extracted
from scan pair points and aligned according to the Datum Reference Frame on a section. Otherwise, scan
pair geometry will be aligned so that the deviation is minimized to the nominal section. This measurement
can also be done without the internal optimization and re-orientation of searched scan pair geometry.
How to inspect position tolerance for a circular section edges

For circular section edges, position tolerance is inspected by the deviation between the
position of the center point of a nominal circular section and the position of the center point of
scan pair geometry created from scan pair points in relation to datums or not. The pass/fail
inspection judges whether the deviation is within a given tolerance.
How to inspect position tolerance for two parallel linear section edges
For two parallel linear section edges, a tolerance zone is formed with bidirectional ribbon-like
range at a middle line of the two parallel edges on a nominal section. The pass/fail inspection
judges whether an averaged line of two linear scan pair geometries created scan pair points
belongs into the tolerance zone.
Options in Detail
Target Entities
Target – Selects target entities to verify a position tolerance.
Note:
A Ref. Point, Ref. Vector, Ref. Circle, Ref. Slot, Ref. Rectangle, Ref. Polygon, Section Vertex, Section
Edge, or Composite Selection can be a target entity and applicable entities will be determined
according to the geometry type of the target entity.
The following table shows where position can be applied:
*) Not available for a target entity that is extracted from scan data without using nominal data
**) Available for a size-limited entity only
Section OK OK OK OK OK

Ref. geometry OK* OK*, ** OK* OK* OK* OK*
Options
Tolerance – Specifies a tolerance value.
Display Projection Distance – Determines how projection distance is displayed within an

annotation.
Pattern – Verifies the position of multiple patterned feature profiles at the same time.
SEPREQT – Separates a feature from a requirement group and evaluates the feature regardless
of other geometric tolerances.
Use Datum Reference Frame - Calculate a position tolerance by optimizing and re-orientating
searched scan pair geometry per the datum reference frame.
Note:
This option is used when defining a specific Datum condition and using it as a Datum Reference Frame
for the measurement.
Datum Actual Mating – Defines a mating method to find a scan pair geometry from scan
pair points.
In Space – Finds minimum-fitted geometry that contacts the nearest scan pair
points in the normal direction from the center point of the best-fitted geometry that
was found using the least square fitting method.
Note:
In circular section edges, the In-Space mating option is used for finding maximum-
inscribed geometry of a ribbon-like geometric volume that encloses scan pair points
In Material – Finds maximum-fitted geometry that contacts the farthest scan pair

Note:
In circular section edges, the In-Material mating option is used for finding minimum-
circumscribed geometry of a ribbon-like geometric volume that encloses selected
entities using the minimum separation fitting method.
As Nominal – Finds scan pair geometry based on the fitting method that is defined
in the properties of a target section edge.
The following image illustrates how the Actual Mating can be applied to scan data:
<Actual Mating>
Datum – Specifies datums.
Material Condition For Datum – Defines a material condition for datums.
Note:
When a circular feature profile has been defined as a datum feature with size, a position
tolerance can be used on the datum and a material condition can be set.
Material Condition Type – Chooses a material condition type, from either

MMC also known as a Maximum Material Condition, or LMC, also known as
Least Material Condition.
Use Current Alignment – Calculate a position tolerance as the scan data is positioned, without
optimizing and re-orientating searched scan pair geometry per the datum reference frame.
Material Condition
Defines the material condition of the target feature.
Note:

When a Geometric Tolerance is defined on a feature profile that can be controlled by size, the Material
Condition can be defined onto the feature within a Geometric Tolerance together with the Dimension.
Material Condition Type – Chooses a material condition type, from either MMC also
known as a Maximum Material Condition, or LMC, also known as Least Material
Condition.
Note:
Maximum Material Condition (MMC) is the condition in which a feature with size contains the
maximum amount of material within stated limits of size, for example a minimum hole diameter
or maximum shaft diameter.
Least Material Condition (LMC) is the condition in which a feature with size contains the least
amount of material within stated limits of size, for example a maximum hole diameter or
minimum shaft diameter.
Dimension Tolerance – Specifies features and tolerance ranges by typing values into an
input box such as:
0.8
-0.8~0.8
-0.8, 0.8
-0.8/0.8
-0.8:0.8
See Also
Tools > Section Tools > Straightness
Tools > Section Tools > Circularity
Tools > Section Tools > Concentricity
What
The Straightness command verifies the straightness of a linear geometric shape in a sectional entity.
Straightness is a condition where a section element is a straight line.
Symbol:

Why
The Straightness command is useful for:
• Verifying how far a feature profile can deviate from a straight line
How to Use
How to verify the straightness of a feature profile
Section mode.
2. Go to Tools > Section Tools > Straightness or click the icon in the toolbar.
3. Select a section edge then place the resulting annotation in the Section View. Specify a
Tolerance value.


A straightness tolerance controls how much a feature profile can deviate from a straight line. It can
be applied to a linear section edge and does not require datums to use.
How to inspect straightness tolerance for section edges

When straightness is measured on a section feature profile, scan pair points are gathered within
a ribbon-like thickness zone that is formed by a Min. and Max. size on a target entity. Two
parallel lines that can enclose scan pair points are constructed and its minimum thickness is
defined as an actual value.
The pass/fail inspection judges whether a minimum thickness is within a given tolerance.
Options in Detail
Target Entities
Target – Selects target entities to measure the straightness of a feature profile.
Note:
The following table shows where straightness can be applied:

Target Entity
Line (Vector)
Section OK
Ref. geometry OK
Options
Pattern – Verifies the straightness of multiple patterned feature profiles at the same time.
See Also
What
The Circularity command verifies the circularity of a sectional entity that has a circular geometric
shape. Circularity is the condition where all points are equidistant from a center point.
Symbol:

Why
The Circularity command is useful for:
• Verifying how much a feature profile can deviate from a perfect form of a circle
How to Use
How to verify the circularity of a feature profile
Section mode.
2. Go to Tools > Section Tools > Circularity or click the icon in the toolbar.

A circularity tolerance controls how much a feature profile can deviate from a perfect form of a circle.
It can be applied to a circular section edge and does not require datums to use.
How to inspect circularity tolerance for section edges

When circularity is measured on a circular section edge, scan pair points are gathered within a
ribbon-like thickness zone that is formed by a Min. and Max. size on target entity. Two
concentric circles that can enclose scan pair points are constructed and its minimum thickness
is defined as an actual value.
Options in Detail
Target Entities
Target – Selects target entities to measure the circularity of a feature profile.
Note:
A Ref. circle, Section Edge, or Composite Selection can be a target entity and applicable entities will
The following table shows where circularity can be applied:

Target Entity
Circle

Section OK
Ref. geometry OK
Options
Pattern – Verifies the circularity of multiple patterned feature profiles at the same time.
See Also
What
The Concentricity command verifies the concentricity of a sectional entity that has a circular
geometric shape. The measurement must have one circular datum. Concentricity is the condition
where the median points of all diametrically opposed elements of the features of a revolution or
correspondingly located elements of two or more radically disposed features are congruent with the
center point of a datum feature.
Symbol:

Why
The Concentricity command is useful for:
• Verifying how much the median points of multiple diameters can deviate from a center point of
a specific datum
How to Use
How to verify the concentricity of a feature
Section mode.
3. Define datum A by selecting an outer circular section edge.

4. Go to Tools > Section Tools > Concentricity or click the icon in the toolbar.
Specify a Tolerance value and set datum A for the measurement.

A concentricity tolerance controls how much the median points of multiple diameters can deviate
from the center point of a specific datum. It can be applied to a circular section edge or a ref. circle.
This measurement requires one circular datum.
How to inspect concentricity tolerance for sectional edges

When concentricity is measured on a feature profile, scan pair points are gathered within a
ribbon-like thickness zone that is formed by a Min. and Max. size on a target entity. Scan pair
points are used as scan pair geometry.
The location of scan pair geometry is optimized to the normal geometry according to the
Optimizing Position and Orientation methods so that the deviation between them can be
minimized. The deviation between the center point of scan pair geometry and the center point
of a datum feature is defined as an actual value.
The pass/fail inspection judges whether the deviation is within a given tolerance.

Note:
Optimizing Position and Orientation method
When Geometric Tolerance is measured with specific datums on a feature in 3D scan-based inspection,
corresponding scan pair geometry is extracted from qualified scan pair points and its location is optimized
to the position and the orientation of the nominal geometry so that the deviation between them is
minimized to accurately analyze features based on specified datums. This is referred to as the Optimizing
Position and Orientation method. This method is used when Orientation-type Geometric Tolerances
(Perpendicularity, Angularity, and Parallelism) and Location-type Geometric Tolerances (Position Tolerance,
Concentricity, and Symmetry) are measured.
The following figures show how the position and orientation of extracted scan pair geometry are optimized
while measuring Orientation-type Geometric Tolerances and Location-type Geometric Tolerances.
Step State Operation
Coordinates of a Datum Reference Frame (DRF) of

nominal geometry and scan pair geometry are
composed of datums.
1 Pn : Position of Nominal Geometry
Ps : Position of Scan Pair Geometry
Tn : Nominal DRF
Ts : Scan DRF

The coordinates of scan pair geometry defined by DRF
moves to the coordinate of nominal geometry.
2
Pn : Position of Nominal Geometry
Ps’ : Moved Position of Scan Pair Geometry
Degrees of freedom with no constraints (residual DOF)

is defined according to a combination of datums, and
the position and the orientation of scan pair geometry
is optimized using the residual DOF so that the
deviation between them can be minimized.
3 The deviation between the positions of those
geometries is calculated as actual value.
Ps” : Optimized Position of Scan Pair Geometry
If the Material Condition for a Datum has been defined

in a datum, the position and the orientation of nominal
geometry will be optimized according to the Material
Condition for the Datum and the deviation between the
positions of those geometries will be calculated as an
4
actual value.
Pn’ : Optimized Position of Nominal Geometry
Options in Detail
Target Entities
Target – Selects target entities to measure the concentricity of a feature profile.

Note:
A Ref. circle, Ref. slot, Ref. rectangle, Ref. polygon, Section Edge, or Composite Selection can be a
target entity and applicable entities will be determined according to the geometry type of the target
entity.
The following table shows where concentricity can be applied:

Target Entity Regular
Polygon
Section OK
Ref. geometry OK OK OK OK
Options
Material Condition For Datum – Defines the material condition for a datum.
Note:
When a circular feature profile has been defined as a datum feature with size, concentricity can
be used the datum as well as set material condition for the datum.
Material Condition Type – Choose either MMC (Maximum Material Condition) or

LMC (Least Material Condition) types for datum.
Note:
Maximum Material Condition (MMC) – The condition in which a feature of size contains
the maximum amount of material within the stated limits of size (e.g., minimum hole
diameter, maximum shaft diameter).
Least Material Condition (LMC) – The condition in which a feature of size contains the
least amount of material within the stated limits of size (e.g., maximum hole diameter,
minimum shaft diameter).

See Also
Tools > Section Tools > Parallelism
What
The Parallelism command verifies the parallelism of a sectional entity that has a linear geometric
shape. Parallelism is a condition of a line that is equidistant at all points from a datum line.
Symbol:
Why
The Parallelism command is useful for:
• Verifying how much a feature profile can deviate from an orientation parallel to a specific datum
line

How to Use
How to verify the parallelism of a feature from a specific datum
Section mode.
3. Define datum A by selecting a linear section edge.
4. Go to Tools > Section Tools > Parallelism or click the icon in the toolbar.
5. Select a linear section edge then place the resulting annotation in the Section View.

Parallelism controls how much a feature profile can deviate from an orientation parallel to a specific
datum line. It can be applied to a linear section edge or a ref. vector and requires one datum.
How to inspect parallelism tolerance for section edges

If a ref. vector is measured as a target entity, only its size can be applied.
When parallelism is measured on a section profile, target scan points are constrained by a
defined datum, then scan pair points are gathered within a ribbon-like thickness zone that is
formed by a Min. and Max. size on a target entity. Two parallel lines that can enclose scan pair
points are constructed and its minimum thickness is defined as an actual value.
The pass/fail inspection judges whether the minimum thickness is in a given tolerance.
Options in Detail
Target Entities
Target – Selects target entities to measure the parallelism of a feature profile.

Note:
The following table shows where parallelism can be applied:
*) Available for a size-limited entity only

Target Entity
Line (Vector)
Section OK
Ref. geometry OK*
Options

annotation.
Pattern – Verifies the parallelism of multiple patterned feature profiles at the same time.
Note:

Note:
diameter, maximum shaft diameter)

minimum shaft diameter)
See Also
Tools > Section Tools > Perpendicularity
Tools > Section Tools > Angularity
Tools > Section Tools > Symmetry
What
The Perpendicularity command verifies the perpendicularity of a sectional entity that has a linear
geometric shape. Perpendicularity is a condition of a line that is at a 90 degree right angle from a
datum line.
Symbol:
Why
The Perpendicularity command is useful for:
• Verifying how much a feature profile can deviate from a 90 degree angle

How to Use
How to verify the perpendicularity of a feature from a specific datum
Section mode.
4. Go to Tools > Section Tools > Perpendicularity or click the icon in the toolbar.

Perpendicularity controls how much a feature profile can deviate from a 90 degree angle. It can be
applied to a linear section edge or a ref. vector and requires one datum.
How to inspect perpendicularity tolerance for section edges

When perpendicularity is measured on a section profile, target scan points are constrained by
a defined datum, then scan pair points are gathered within a ribbon-like thickness zone that is
The pass/fail inspection judges whether the minimum thickness is within a given tolerance.
Options in Detail
Target Entities
Target – Selects target entities to measure the perpendicularity of a feature profile.
Note:
be determined according to the geometry type of a target entity.
The following table shows where perpendicularity can be applied:

Target Entity
Line (Vector)
Section OK
Ref. geometry OK*

Options

annotation.
Pattern – Verifies the perpendicularity of multiple patterned feature profiles at the same time.
Note:

Note:
See Also

What
The Angularity command verifies the angularity of a sectional entity that has a linear geometric
shape. Angularity is a condition of a line that is at a specified angle other than 90 degrees from a
datum line.
Symbol:
Why
The Angularity command is useful for:
• Verifying how much a feature profile can deviate from an angle described in nominal
specifications
How to Use
How to verify the angularity of a feature from a specific datum
Section mode.

4. Go to Tools > Section Tools > Angularity or click the icon in the toolbar.

Angularity controls how much a feature profile can deviate from an angle described in nominal
specifications, but cannot be equal to 90 degrees. It can be applied to a linear section edge or a ref.
vector and requires one datum.
How to inspect angularity tolerance for section edges

When angularity is measured on a section profile, target scan points are constrained by a
defined datum, then scan pair points are gathered within a ribbon-like thickness zone that is

Options in Detail
Target Entities
Target – Selects target entities to measure the angularity of a feature profile.
Note:
The following table shows where angularity can be applied:
Target Entity
Line (Vector)
Section OK
Ref. geometry OK*, **
Options

annotation.
Pattern – Verifies the angularity of multiple patterned feature profiles at the same time.

Note:

Note:
See Also
What
The Symmetry command verifies the symmetry of sectional entities that face each other. Symmetry
is a three-dimensional geometric tolerance that controls how much the median points between two
feature profiles deviate from a specific datum.
Symbol:

Why
The Symmetry command is useful for:
• Verifying how much a feature profile can deviate from an angle described in nominal
specifications
How to Use
How to verify the symmetry of a feature from a specific datum
Section mode.
2. Go to Tools > Section Tools > Vector or click the icon in the toolbar.
3. Select feature profiles and change the Method to Find Slot Axis. Click the OK button
to complete the command.

6. Go to Tools > Section Tools > Symmetry or click the icon in the toolbar.

Symmetry controls how much a feature profile can deviate from the orientation, location, and form
of a derived median line of a slab or slot-like feature profile relative to a nominally co-linear datum
line. It can be applied to a linear section edge and requires one datum.
How to inspect symmetry tolerance for section edges

The actual value is the thickness of the thinnest slab-like zone whose center line coincides with
a referenced datum line and contains all of scan pair points in a derived median line.
The pass/fail inspection judges whether the minimum thickness of two parallel lines is within a
given tolerance.

Options in Detail
Target Entities
Target – Selects target entities to measure the symmetry of a feature profile.
Note:
The following table shows where symmetry can be applied:

Target Entity
Line (Vector)
Section OK
Ref. geometry OK
Options

<Actual Mating>
Note:
from scan pair points and aligned according to the Datum Reference Frame, or DRF, on a sectional profile.
Otherwise, scan pair geometry will be aligned so that the deviation is minimized to the nominal feature.
See Also

Tools > Section Tools > Point
What
The Ref. Point command creates a reference point on a section. A reference point is a zero
dimensional entity. A reference point is used to mark a specific position on a section.
Note:
Ref. geometry entities created using both Insert > Ref. Geometry and Tools > Section Tools have the same
creation methods. The difference between creating Ref. geometry using Ref. Geometry and Section Tools
is that Section Tools will project onto the current section.
Note:
Ref. geometries created in the Section mode will be integrated into a section feature and they will be
treated within the section feature. To edit the created ref. geometries, double-click the ref. geometry or enter
the editing mode of the section feature.
Why
The Ref. Point command is useful for:
• Defining a point that can be used as nominal geometry in a automatic and systematic
inspection process
• Extracting a point from a section of scan data based on the definition of nominal geometry
• Creating a point on a section of scan data without using the definition of a nominal data
• Finding a center point from another geometric entity
• Finding points that can divide a target entity into multiple parts
• Finding an intersection point from crossing entities
• Finding a point on the highest position of target entity

• Creating points by Importing pre-defined positions
How to Use
How to find and add a point on a circle center
1. Prepare aligned scan and nominal data. Go to Tools > Section Tools > Point or click the
2. Change the Method to Find Circle Center.
3. Select circular edges on a model.
4. Click the OK button to complete the command. Nominal geometry will be created with
its pair geometry.
or warning colors.
Options in Detail
[Stage 1]
Target Entities
method.

Methods
• Definition
• Extract
• Find Circle Center
• Find Slot Center
• Find Rectangle Center
• Find Polygon Center
• Find Sphere Center
• Projection
• Convert
• N Division
• Between 2 Points
• Intersect 2 Lines
• Intersect Line(Curve, Axis) & Face
• Import
Note:
When creating a ref. point by defining its position on a section of scan data or by using a fitting
algorithm from section segments of scan data, the ref. point can be created without defining scan
pair geometry in the second stage. A created ref. point is called a scan ref. point and it can be used
for measuring the size of features on a model without using nominal data or creating another ref.
The methods that can create a ref. point from scan data directly are:
• Definition – When the position of a point is defined by picking a point on a section of scan data
• Extract
• Find Circle Center / Slot Center / Rectangle Center / Polygon Center / Sphere Center
• Convert
When entering the editing mode by double-clicking a created ref. points, scan points that were used
for creating the ref. points will be highlighted. To change target scan points, click the Select None
button .
If necessary, a ref. points that was created from scan data can be added into nominal data by using

Definition – Creates a point by using the geometric definition of a point and projects it on a
section. The value can be input numerically or interactively picked by a point in the Model
View.
Extract – Creates a point from selected entities by using a fitting algorithm and projects the
point on a section.
will be used.
N Sigma
Find Circle Center – Creates a circle center point from selected entities and projects the point
on a section.

Fitting Type – Chooses a fitting type to create a geometry from target section
segments. If a geometry is created from nominal data, the defined fitting type in the
first stage can be used as a fitting method for finding scan pair geometry from scan pair
points.
Note:
This option is available when the geometry type of the selected entity is different from the
target geometry.
Best Fit – Finds best-fitted geometry from target section segments using the
least squares fitting method.
Min. Bound – Finds maximum-inscribed geometry of a ribbon-like geometric

zone that encloses selected section segments using the minimum separation
fitting method.
Max. Bound – Finds minimum-circumscribed geometry of a ribbon-like

geometric zone that encloses selected section segments using the minimum

Remove Outlier, Sampling Ratio – Identical to the Extract method.
Find Slot Center – Extracts the center point of a slot from selected entities using a fitting
algorithm and projects the point on a section. The sub-options are the same as the Find Circle
Center method under Ref. Point.
Find Rectangle Center – Extracts the center point of a rectangle from selected entities using
a fitting algorithm and projects the point on a section. The sub-options are the same as the
Find Circle Center method under Ref. Point.

Rounded Corner – Finds the center point of a rounded corner rectangle.
Find Polygon Center – Extracts the center point of a polygon center from selected entities
using a fitting algorithm and projects the point on a section. The sub-options are the same as
the Find Circle Center method under Ref. Point.
Rounded Corner – Used for polygon corners that are round.
Num. Of Edges – Specifies the number of edges of a polygon.
Find Sphere Center – Extracts the center point of a sphere from selected entities using a
fitting algorithm and projects the point on a section. The sub-options are the same as the
Find Circle Center method under Ref. Point.
Projection – Extracts a point by projecting onto another entity and projects the point on a
section.
To make a point using the Projection method:
1. Select points such as ref. points, curve points or vertices.
2. Select a target entity that selected points will be projected to a section.
3. Click OK.

Pick Multiple Points – Creates an average point by choosing one or more points and projects
the point on a section.
To make a point using the Pick Multiple Points method:
1. Pick points on scan data or select points such as ref. points, vertices or circles.
2. Click OK.
Convert – Create a center point from a selected entity and projects the point on a section.
To make a point using the Convert method:
1. Select a circle or an arc.
2. Click OK.
N Division – Creates multiple points by dividing a selected curve, vector, or mesh data and
projects the point on a section.
To make a point using the N Division method:
1. Select a curve.
2. Click OK.
entity.
Uniform Offset
Between 2 Points – Creates a point between two points using a Ratio value to decide the
position and projects the point on a section.

To make a point using the Between 2 Points method:
1. Select two points.
2. Set the ratio of position between two selected points.
3. Click OK.
Ratio: 0.2 Ratio: 0.5 Ratio: 0.8
Intersect 2 Lines – Creates a point from the intersection of two linear entities.
To make a point using the Intersect 2 Lines method:
1. Select two linear entities such as a line, edge, or vector.
2. Click OK.
Intersect Line (Curve, Axis) & Face – Creates a point from the intersection of a curve and a
face and projects the point on a section.
To make a point using the Intersect Axis and Face method:
1. Select a curve such as a line, edge, vector, 2D or 3D curve.
2. Select a face.
3. Click OK.
Intersect 3 Planes – Creates a point from the intersection of three selected planar entities
and projects the point on a section.
To make a point using the Intersect 3 Planes method:
1. Select three planar entities such as a face, region, or plane.
2. Click OK.

Check Orthogonality – Allows the creation of a point only if three planes are
orthogonal.
Find Cone Vertex – Creates a point at the apex position of a conical entity and projects the
point on a section.
Extreme Position – Creates a point at an extreme position from selected entities and projects
the point on a section. A target entity and a linear entity need to be selected for a Direction
to define an extreme direction.
Import – Creates points by importing an ASCII file and projects the point on a section. A text
file containing X, Y, and Z coordinates separated by tabs or commas can be imported with the
ASCII converter.
When a text file is opened, the ASCII Converter will appear. Column definition, separators such
as white space or user defined characters, and commas for decimal point in the ASCII Convert
dialog box can be set.

[Stage 2: Define Scan Pair]
Note:
The second stage can be used when defining methods to extract scan pair geometry from scan
data. When ref. point is created from scan data without using the definition of nominal geometry
in the first stage, the second stage will not be used.
As Nominal – Automatically creates a pair of ref. geometries from scan data as created
in the first stage.
Manual – Manually creates a pair of ref. geometries from scan data as created in first
stage but with the addition of CMM simulation.
Simulate CMM – Creates a pair point by simulating CMM in a real world

environment. Scan data can be treated as a real part and the CMM can be virtually
controlled as a real CMM.
Ray Intersection – Finds a pair point by intersecting a virtual ray and poly
vertices.
The Search Radius and Search Depth options define the size of a
searching zone.
The Direction option defines the projecting direction of the ray.
The Fitting Type option is the fitting method used for detected poly-
vertices. When scan data is mesh it can be easy to find pair points on the

mesh surface, however on point clouds poly-vertices in a search area must
be fitted and a surface must be generated internally.
The Auto option fits poly-vertices in a search area to an identical geometry

type of a picked nominal face. If no nominal face exists poly-vertices will
be fit to a freeform surface.
The Plane / Sphere / Cylinder / Cone / Torus / Surface Fitting options fits
poly-vertices in a searching zone to a specified geometry type.
Rod Contact – Finds a pair point by the contact position of a rod. The
Search Radius and Search Depth define the size of a searching zone. The
Direction option defines the contact direction of the rod to poly-vertices.
The Rod Axis defines the direction of the rod.
Disk Contact – Finds a pair point by the contact position of a disk. The
Search Radius and Search Depth define the size of a searching zone. The
Direction option defines the contact direction of the disk to poly-vertices.
Find Closest Point – Finds the closest pair point within a given search
radius. The Search Radius option defines a searching zone from a nominal
point.

See Also
Tools > Section Tools > Simulated CMM Point
What
The Simulated CMM Point command simulates a Coordinate Measuring Machine, or, CMM, as it
would function in the real world on a section. Within the application, scan data will be treated as a
real part and the CMM Point command can be used to acquire measure points with a virtual probe
device that acts like a real-world probing device.
This method is available when both nominal and scan data exist as well as when inspecting scan
data only without any nominal data.
When a CMM point is picked on a model the direction of probing will be automatically defined by
the normal of the nominal data. However if only scan data is used, the probing direction will be
defined by a plane’s normal which will be internally made by fitting scan points within a searching
zone.
Note:
Note:

Why
The Simulated CMM Point command is useful for:
• Finding a contact point by simulating CMM
Ray Intersection
This method is similar to a ball-type probing device. The Ray-Intersection method can find a
contact point on scan data but does not consider any physical conflicts between the virtual probe
and scan data.
Ray-Intersection finds pair points by intersecting a virtual ray and scan data. The Direction option
defines the approaching direction of the ball probe to scan data. The Search Radius and Search
Depth options define the size of a searching zone. Poly-vertices in the searching zone will be
candidate poly-vertices used to find the intersection with the virtual ray.
The specified depth is a total of the frontward and backward depth of a picked point on the direction
of measurement. If the Search Depth is set to 10mm, 5mm will be the search depth in both
directions as shown in the image below:
How to Use Ray Intersection

How to find a contact point using the Ray Intersection method
1. Prepare aligned scan and nominal data. Go to Tools > Section Tools > Simulated CMM
Point or click the icon in the toolbar.
2. Choose the Ray-Intersection method.

or warning colors.
Options in Detail for Ray Intersection

Reference Position – Defines the probing position on nominal or scan data. A specific value
can be entered or a point on a model can be manually chosen.

Fitting Type – Selects a fitting method used for detecting poly-vertices. When scan data is
mesh, it can be easy to find pair points on the mesh surface, however on point clouds pair points
cannot be found and one of the following fitting type options need to be used.
Auto – Fits poly-vertices in a search zone identically to the geometry on a nominal face.
If no nominal face exists the fitting will be performed on a freeform face.
Plane Fitting – Sets a CMM point to a place. Pair points are found by fitting poly-vertices
in a search area to a plane.
Sphere Fitting – Sets a CMM point to a sphere. Pair points are found by fitting poly-
vertices in a search area to a sphere.
Cylinder Fitting – Sets a CMM point to a cylinder. Pair points are found by fitting poly-
vertices in a search area to a cylinder.
Cone Fitting – Sets a CMM point to a cone. Pair points are found by fitting poly-vertices
in a search area to a cone.
Torus Fitting – Sets a CMM point to a torus. Pair points are found by fitting poly-vertices
in a search area to a torus.
Surface Fitting – Sets a CMM point to a surface. Pair points are found by fitting poly-
vertices in a search area to a surface.
Direction – Defines the approaching direction to an object. The direction for measuring a CMM
point is displayed as a blue arrow. Four direction options are available: Auto, Nominal Normal,
Nominal Tangent, and Manual.
Auto – Sets the approaching direction to an object as tangential if a point is selected on

a boundary and normal to the surface if a point is selected on a surface.
Nominal Normal – Sets the approaching direction to an object normal to a nominal face.
Nominal Tangent – Sets the approaching direction to an object tangent to a nominal

face.

Rod Contact
This method is similar to a rod-type probing device. The Rod Contact method can find a contact
data. The virtual rod defines the searching zone on scan data and is useful for measuring boundaries
or features on sheet metal parts.
Rod Contact finds pair points by intersecting a virtual rod and scan data. The Direction option
defines the approaching direction of the rod probe to scan data. The Search Radius and Search
Depth options define the size of a searching zone. The Rod Axis option defines the direction of the
rod.
How to Use Rod Contact

How to find a contact point using the Rod Contact method
2. Choose the Rod Contact method.
3. Pick a point on a boundary of the nominal data and set the rod radius, search depth and
rod length.

or warning colors.
Options in Detail for Rod Contact

Rod Radius / Search Depth / Rod Length – Defines a searching zone size. Poly-vertices in the
searching zone will be candidate points for a CMM point.

Direction – Selects the Measuring Direction and Rod Axis for the Rod Contact method.


surface.

nominal face.

nominal face.
Rod Axis – Defines the direction of the rod axis. Four direction options are available: Auto,
Nominal Normal, Nominal Tangent, and Manual.
Auto – Sets the rod axis direction to an object as tangential if a point is selected
Nominal Normal – Sets the rod axis direction to an object normal to a nominal
face.
Nominal Tangent – Sets the rod axis direction to an object tangent to a nominal
face.

Manual – Manually sets the rod axis direction to an object.
Disk Contact
This method is similar to a disk-type probing device. The Disk Contact method can find a contact
data. The virtual disk defines the searching zone on scan data.
Disk Contact finds pair points by intersecting a virtual rod and scan data. The Direction option
defines the approaching direction of the disk probe to scan data. The Search Radius and Search
Depth options define the size of a searching zone. The Direction option defines the contacting
direction of the disk. Using the flat surface of the disk probe can find a maximum point within the
search zone.
How to Use Disk Contact

How to find a contact point using the Disk Contact method
2. Choose the Disk Contact method.

or warning colors.
Options in Detail for Disk Contact

Search Radius / Search Depth– Defines a searching zone size. Poly-vertices in the searching
Direction – Selects the Measuring Direction for the Disk Contact method.

Auto – Sets the approaching direction to an object as tangential if a point is selected

Nominal Normal – Sets the approaching direction to an object normal to a nominal

face.

nominal face.
See Also
Insert > Ref. geometry > Simulated CMM Point
Tools > Section Tools > Vector
What
The Ref. Vector command creates a reference vector on a section. A reference vector is a virtual axis
with a direction and infinite size. A ref. vector is used for adding assisting geometry for inspection.
Note:
Note:
Why

The Ref. Vector command is useful for:
• Defining a vector that can be used as nominal geometry in a automatic and systematic
inspection process
• Extracting a vector from a section of scan data based on the definition of nominal geometry
• Creating a vector on a section of scan data without using the definition of nominal data
• Finding an axis from a target entity
• Finding an intersection line from two crossing linear entities
• Finding an average vector from two linear entities
• Finding a vector that is positioned with a specific distance and direction from a target entity
• Inspecting a straightness on a section of scan data without using the definition of nominal data
How to Use
How to find a vector from two intersecting planes
1. Prepare aligned scan and nominal data. Go to Tools > Section Tools > Vector or click
the icon in the tool bar.
2. Change the Method to Intersect 2 Planes.
3. Select two faces on the nominal data.
Note:
When two faces are perpendicular to a section plane, it is impossible to create a Ref. Vector
because the projection of the intersection becomes a point instead of a vector.

4. Click OK to complete the command. Vector1 will be created by intersecting two planes
and projecting the intersection.
The deviation between nominal geometry and pair geometry is displayed in its property
pane. Inputting a tolerance value will color each deviation element in pass, fail, or
warning colors.
Options in Detail
[Stage 1]
Target Entities
Entities – Selects target entities. Required target entities can differ depending on the method.
Methods
• Definition
• Extract
• Find Slot Axis
• Find Cylinder Axis
• Find Cone Axis
• Projection
• Pick Point & Line
• Convert

• Average
• Tangent
• Cross 2 Lines
Note:
When creating a ref. vector by defining its position and normal on a section of scan data or by using
a fitting algorithm from section segments of scan data, the ref. vector can be created without defining
scan pair geometry in the second stage. A created ref. vector is called a scan ref. vector and it can be
used for measuring the size of features on a model without using nominal data or creating another
ref. geometry as a reference.
The methods that can create a ref. vector from scan data directly are:
• Definition – When the position and normal of a vector are defined by picking points on a section
of scan data
• Extract
• Find Slot Axis / Cylinder Axis / Cone Axis
When entering the editing mode by double-clicking a created ref. vector, scan points that were used
for creating the ref. vector will be highlighted. To change target scan points, click the Select None
button .
If necessary, a ref. vector that was created from scan data can be added into nominal data by using
Definition – Creates a vector using the geometric definition of a vector and projects the vector
on a section. A numeric value can be input or a point can be picked manually in the Model
View.
Position & Direction – Creates a ref. vector with Position and Direction values.

Position – Selects a point in the Model View or allows the manual input of specific
values for X, Y and Z.
Direction – Selects a linear entity to acquire a directional value or allows the

manual input of a specific numerical value. The X, Y or Z buttons align the direction
to a selected direction.
Start & End Position – Creates a vector by defining the Start Position and the End
Position.
Start Position and End Position – Creates a vector by connecting two positions.
The positions can be selected in the Model View or manually input into the X, Y, Z
boxes.
Extract – Extracts a vector from selected entities by using a fitting algorithm and projects the
vector on a section.
When a ref. vector is created by fitting a section of scan data, its straightness can be measured.
To inspect the Pass or Fail status of a ref. vector, set the Tolerance value in the Properties panel
of the vector. It can be useful for calculating the GD&T in a scan-only inspection process.
will be used.

N Sigma
Find Slot Axis – Creates a vector of a slot on a selected entity using a fitting algorithm and
projects the vector on a section. The fitting option is the same as the Extract method.
Fitting Type – Chooses a fitting type to create a geometry from target section segments.
If geometry is created from nominal data, the defined fitting type in the first stage can
Best Fit – Finds best-fitted geometry from target section segments using the least
squares fitting method.
section segments in the normal direction from the center point of the best-fitted

Fitting
Find Cylinder Axis – Creates a cylinder axis from a selected entity by using the fitting

algorithm and projects the vector on a section. The fitting option is same as the Extract
method.
Use Specified Direction As Initial Guess – Defines an initial axis that can be used
for finding the direction of a fitting shape.

Find Cone Axis – Creates a cone axis from selected entities by using a fitting algorithm and
projects the axis on a section. The fitting option is same as the Find Cylinder Axis method.
Projection – Creates a vector by projecting a linear entity onto a section.

To make a vector using the Projection method:
2. Click OK.

Pick Multiple Points - Creates a vector by picking two or more points and projects the vector
on a section.
To make a vector using the Pick Multiple Points method:
2. Click OK.
Pick Point & Line – Creates a vector by picking a point as the position and a linear entity as
the direction and projects the vector on a section.
To make a vector using the Pick Point & Line method:
1. Select a linear entity for the direction of a vector.
2. Pick a point for the position of the vector.
3. Click OK.
Convert – Creates a vector as an axis of a selected entity or on a selected entity and projects
the vector on a section.
To make a vector using the Convert method:
1. Select a cylindrical entity such as a face or a region, or a linear entity such as a line or an
edge.
2. Click OK.

Intersect 2 Planes – Creates a vector from intersecting two planes and projects the vector on
a section.
To make a vector using the Intersect 2 Planes method:
1. Select two planar entities such as planes, faces, regions.
2. Click OK.
Average – Creates a vector by averaging two linear entities and projects the vector on a
section.
To make a vector using the Average method:
1. Select two linear entities such as lines, edges, vectors.
2. Click OK.
Tangent – Creates a vector that is tangent to a selected entity and projects the vector on a
section.
To make a vector by using the Tangent method:
1. Pick a point on an entity such as a curve, edge, or poly-vertex.
2. Click OK.

Cross 2 Lines – Creates a vector from crossing two linear entities and projects the vector on a
section.
To make a vector using the Tangent method:
1. Select two linear entities such as lines, edges, or vectors.
2. Click OK.
[Stage 2]
Note:
If a ref. vector is created from scan data without using the definition of the nominal geometry from
in the first stage.
stage.
See Also
Insert > Ref. geometry > Vector
Tools > Section Tools > Circle
What
The Ref. Circle command creates a reference circle on a section. A reference circle is a two-
dimensional entity that has a center and a radius. A ref. circle is used for adding assisting geometry
for inspection.

Note:
Note:
Why
The Ref. Circle command is useful for:
• Defining a circle that can be used as nominal geometry in a automatic and systematic inspection
process
• Extracting a circle from a section of scan data based on the definition of nominal geometry
• Creating circles that can divide a revolved target entity into multiple parts
• Creating a circle on scan data without using the definition of nominal data
• Inspecting a circularity on scan data without using the definition of nominal data
How to Use
How to extract a circle from a nominal face
1. Prepare aligned scan and nominal data. Go to Tools > Section Tools > Circle or click the
2. Choose the Pick Plane & Surface and click a plane and a face of a cylinder.
3. Click OK to complete the command. Nominal geometry will be created and projected on
a section.

or warning colors.
Options in Detail
[Stage 1]
Target Entities
method.
Methods
• Definition
• Extract
• Projection
• N Division
• Pick Plane & Surface
Note:
When creating a ref. circle by defining its center position and normal on a section of scan data or by using
a fitting algorithm from section segments of scan data, the ref. circle can be created without defining
scan pair geometry in the second stage. A created ref. circle is called a scan ref. circle and it can be used

for measuring the size of features on a model without using nominal data, inspecting circularity on a
section of scan data, or creating another ref. geometry as a reference.
The methods that can create a ref. circle from scan data directly are:
• Definition – When the center position and normal of a circle are defined by picking points on a
section of scan data
• Extract
When entering the editing mode by double-clicking a created ref. circle, scan points that were used for
creating the ref. circle will be highlighted. To change target scan points, click the Select None button
.
If necessary, a ref. circle that was created from scan data can be added into nominal data by using the
Add Nominal command in the pop-up menu.
Definition – Creates a ref. circle by using the geometric definition of a circle and projects the
circle on a section. The value can be input numerically or interactively picked by a point in the
Model View.
Center & Radius – Creates a circle using Position, and Radius values.
Note:
The radius of a circle can be specified by measuring the distance or radius from another entity.
To measure the radius from another entity, use the Measure Distance button or the
3 Positions – Creates a circle using three specified positions.

Extract – Extracts a circle from selected entities by using a fitting algorithm and projects the
circle on a section.
Fitting Type – Chooses a fitting type to create geometry from target section segments.
Note:
target geometry.
Min. Bound – Finds maximum-inscribed geometry of a ribbon-like geometric

zone that encloses selected section segments using the minimum separation
fitting method.
Max. Bound – Finds minimum-circumscribed geometry of a ribbon-like

geometric zone that encloses selected section segments using the minimum


will be used.
N Sigma
Projection – Creates a circle by projecting an existing circular entity onto a section.

To make a circle using the Projection method:
1. Select an existing circular entity such as a ref. circle or edge.
2. Click OK.
Pick Multiple Points – Creates a circle by picking three or more points and projects the circle
on a section.
To make a circle using the Pick Multiple Points method:
2. Click OK.

N Division – Creates circles by dividing selected cylindrical or conical entities and projects
the circle on a section. Multiple circles will be created evenly and perpendicularly to the
selected entity.
To make a circle using the N Division method:
1. Select a cylindrical or conical entity.
2. Define a division method and a total number.
3. Select two points for a Start Point and End Point.
4. Click OK.
Offset – Creates planes by a specified offset distance and a total number on a selected
entity.
Uniform Offset
Pick Plane & Surface – Creates a circle on an intersection between a planar entity and an
entity that has a circular section such as a cylinder, cone, sphere, or torus. And projects the
circle on a section.
To make a circle using the Pick Plane & Surface method:
1. Select a circular section entity.
2. Set a plane.
3. Click OK.

[Stage 2]
Note:
If a ref. circle is created from scan data without using the definition of the nominal geometry from
in the first stage.
stage.
See Also
Insert > Ref. geometry > Circle
Tools > Section Tools > Slot
What
The Ref. Slot command creates a reference slot on a section. A reference slot is a two-dimensional
entity that has two lines and two arcs. A ref. slot is used for adding assisting geometry for inspection.
Note:
Note:

Why
The Ref. Slot command is useful for:
• Defining a slot that can be used as nominal geometry in a automatic and systematic inspection
process
• Extracting a slot from a section of scan data based on the definition of nominal geometry
• Creating a slot on a section of scan data without using the definition of nominal data
How to Use
How to extract a slot from a nominal edge
1. Prepare aligned scan and nominal data. Go to Tools > Section Tools > Slot or click the
2. Choose the Extract method and select a slot edges.
3. Click OK to complete the command. Nominal geometry will be created and projected
onto a section.
or warning colors.

Options in Detail
[Stage 1]
Target Entities
method.
Methods
• Definition
• Extract
• Projection
Note:
When creating a ref. slot by defining its center position of side arcs and normal on a section of scan
data or by using a fitting algorithm from section segments of scan data, the ref. slot can be created
without defining scan pair geometry in the second stage. A created ref. slot is called a scan ref. slot
and it can be used for measuring the size of features on a model without using nominal data,
inspecting circularity on a section of scan data, or creating another ref. geometry as a reference.
The methods that can create a ref. slot from scan data directly are:
• Definition – When the center positions and normal of a slot are defined by picking points on a
section of scan data
• Extract
When entering the editing mode by double-clicking a created ref. slot, scan points that were used
for creating the ref. slot will be highlighted. To change target scan points, click the Select None
button .
If necessary, a ref. slot that was created from scan data can be added into nominal data by using

Definition – Creates a slot by using the geometric definition of a slot and projects the slot on
a section. The value can be input numerically or interactively picked by a point in the Model
View.
Coordinate & Size – Creates a slot by specifying a Center, Width, and Radius.
Note:
The geometric values for each axis of a slot can be specified by measuring the distance or
radius from another entity. To measure geometric values from another entity, use the
Measure Distance button or the Measure Radius button .
2 Centers & Width – Creates a slot by specifying a Center1, Center2, and Width.
Extract – Extracts a circle from selected entities by using a fitting algorithm and projects the
slot on a section.


Fitting
will be used.
N Sigma

Projection – Creates a slot by projecting an existing slot entity on a section.

To make a slot using the Projection method:
1. Select an existing slot entity such as a ref. slot or edge.
2. Click OK.
Pick Multiple Points – Creates a slot by picking six or more points and projects the slot on a
section.
To make a slot using the Pick Multiple Points method:
2. Click OK.
[Stage 2]
Note:
If a ref. slot is created from scan data without using the definition of the nominal geometry from
in the first stage.
stage.
See Also

Insert > Ref. geometry > Slot
Tools > Section Tools > Rectangle
What
The Ref. Rectangle command creates a reference slot on a section. A reference rectangle is a two-
dimensional entity that has four lines and four right angles. A ref. rectangle is used for adding
assisting geometry for inspection.
Note:
Note:
Why
The Ref. Rectangle command is useful for:
• Defining a rectangle that can be used as nominal geometry in a automatic and systematic
inspection process
• Extracting a rectangle from a section of scan data based on the definition of nominal geometry
• Creating a rectangle on a section of scan data without using the definition of nominal data
How to Use
How to extract a rectangle from a nominal edge
1. Prepare aligned scan and nominal data. Go to Tools > Section Tools > Rectangle or click
2. Choose the Extract method and select edges on a rectangle.

3. Click OK to complete the command. Nominal geometry will be created and projected
onto a section.
or warning colors.
Options in Detail
[Stage 1]
Target Entities
method.
Methods
• Definition
• Extract
• Projection

Note:
When creating a ref. rectangle by defining its center position and normal on a section of scan data
or by using a fitting algorithm from section segments of scan data, the ref. rectangle can be created
without defining scan pair geometry in the second stage. A created ref. rectangle is called a scan ref.
rectangle and it can be used for measuring the size of features on a model without using nominal
The methods that can create a ref. rectangle from scan data directly are:
• Definition – When the center position and normal of a rectangle are defined by picking points
on a section of scan data
• Extract
When entering the editing mode by double-clicking a created ref. rectangle, scan points that were
used for creating the ref. rectangle will be highlighted. To change target scan points, click the Select
None button .
If necessary, a ref. rectangle that was created from scan data can be added into nominal data by
Definition – Creates a rectangle by using the geometric definition of a rectangle and projects
the rectangle on a section. The value can be input numerically or interactively picked by a
point in the Model View.
Coordinate & Size – Creates a rectangle by specifying a Center, Width, Height, and
Corner Radius.
Note:
The geometric values for each axis of a rectangle and the radius at each corner can be
specified by measuring a distance or a radius from another entity. To measure geometric
values from another entity, use the Measure Distance button or the Measure Radius

button .
3 Positions – Creates a rectangle by specifying three positions. Position1 and

Position2 define the width of a rectangle and Position3 defines the height of a
rectangle.
Extract – Extracts a rectangle from selected entities by using a fitting algorithm and projects
the slot on a section.

Squares Fitting
will be used.

N Sigma
Projection – Creates a rectangle by projecting an existing rectangular entity onto a section.

To make a rectangle using the Projection method:
1. Select an existing rectangular entity such as a ref. rectangle or edge.
2. Click OK.
Pick Multiple Points – Creates a rectangle by picking six or more points and projects the
rectangle on a section.
To make a rectangle using the Pick Multiple Points method:
2. Click OK.

[Stage 2]
Note:
If a ref. rectangle is created from scan data without using the definition of the nominal geometry
the first stage.
stage.
See Also
Insert > Ref. geometry > Rectangle
Tools > Section Tools > Regular Polygon
What
The Ref. Polygon command creates a reference polygon on a section. A reference polygon is a two-
dimensional entity that has several equal lines. A ref. polygon is used for adding assisting geometry
for inspection.
Note:
Note: Ref. geometries created in the Section mode will be integrated into a section feature and
they will be treated within the section feature. To edit the created ref. geometries, double-click the
ref. geometry or enter the editing mode of the section feature.
Why
The Ref. Regular Polygon command is useful for:
• Defining a regular polygon that can be used as nominal geometry in a automatic and systematic
inspection process
• Extracting a regular polygon from a section of scan data based on the definition of nominal
geometry
• Creating a regular polygon on a section of scan data without using the definition of nominal
data
How to Use
How to extract a regular polygon from a nominal edge
1. Prepare aligned scan and nominal data. Go to Tools > Section Tools > Regular Polygon
2. Choose the Extract method and select polygon edges.
3. Click OK to complete the command. Nominal geometry is created and projected on a

section.
or warning colors.

Options in Detail
[Stage 1]
Target Entities
method.
Methods
• Definition
• Extract
• Projection
Note:
When creating a ref. polygon by defining its start and end segments and normal on a section of scan
data or by using a fitting algorithm from section segments of scan data, the ref. polygon can be
created without defining scan pair geometry in the second stage. A created ref. polygon is called a
scan ref. polygon and it can be used for measuring the size of features on a model without using
nominal data or creating another ref. geometry as a reference.
The methods that can create a ref. polygon from scan data directly are:
• Definition – When the start and end segments and normal of a regular polygon are defined by
picking points on a section of scan data
• Extract
When entering the editing mode by double-clicking a created ref. polygon, scan points that were
used for creating the ref. polygon will be highlighted. To change target scan points, click the Select
None button .
If necessary, a ref. polygon that was created from scan data can be added into nominal data by using

Definition – Creates a polygon by using the geometric definition of a polygon and projects
the polygon on a section. The value can be input numerically or interactively picked by a point
in the Model View.
Coordinate & Size – Creates a polygon by specifying a Center, U Axis, No. of Edges,
and Radius of Rounded Corner.
Note:
The geometric values for a regular polygon and the radius at each corner can be specified by
measuring a distance or a radius from another entity. To measure geometric values from
another entity, use the Measure Distance button or the Measure Radius button .
2 Segment & Rounded Radius – Creates a polygon by specifying Start Segment, End
Segment, Number of Edges and Corner Radius. The Start and End Segments define
the length of an edge of a polygon and Corner Radius defines the radius of each
rounded corner of a polygon.
Extract – Extracts a polygon from selected entities by using a fitting algorithm and projects
the polygon on a section.
Fitting Type – Chooses a fitting type to create a geometry from target section
segments. If geometry is created from nominal data, the defined fitting type in the first

stage can be used as a fitting method for finding scan pair geometry from scan pair
points.

Squares Fitting
will be used.
N Sigma

Projection – Creates a polygon by projecting an existing polygonal entity onto a section.

To make a polygon using the Projection method:
1. Select an existing polygonal entity such as a ref. polygon or edge.
2. Click OK.
Pick Multiple Points – Creates a polygon by picking six or more points and projects the
polygon onto a section.
To make a polygon using the Pick Multiple Points method:
2. Click OK.
[Stage 2]
Note:
If a ref. polygon is created from scan data without using the definition of the nominal geometry

in the first stage.
stage.
See Also
Insert > Ref. geometry > Regular Polygon
7.5.5. Tools > Curve Tools

The Curve Tools menu features various command, such as Spline, Section, and Offset that can be
used for creating and editing curves in Curve mode.
The Curve mode is divided into menu provides five tool groups for creating and editing curves
1. Joining Curves
• Join
Joins curves at the ending point or intersecting point.
2. Rebuilding Curves
• Rebuild
Rebuild curves with defined number of interpolation points.
3. Deforming Curves
• Deform Smoothness
Adjusts the smoothness level for the curve deformation.

4. Creating Curves
• Spline
Creates curves on nominal data, scan data or in free 3D space.
• Section
Creates section curves on nominal data and scan data.
• Intersection
Creates intersection splines between bodies.
• Surface UV Curves
Creates curves on a face along its U and V directions.
• Boundary
Extracts curves from the boundary of a mesh.
• Fit From Points

Creates curves from points or region boundaries by fitting to them.
5. Editing and Modifying Curves

• Offset
Offsets existing curves or lines.
• Project
Projects curves or nodes onto a selected entity.
• Mirror
Creates a mirrored copy of a 3D curve.
• Convert Entities
Converts other entities into curve entities.
• Smooth
Smoothes curves.
• Trim
Trims curves.
• Extend
Extends curves.
• Split
Splits a curve into multiple parts.
• Match

Matches tangencies and curvatures between a curve and another entity.
• Merge
Merges separated curves to form a single curve.
• Insert Node
Creates a node on a curve or line.
• Remove Node
Removes a node from a curve or line.
• Remove Constraint
Removes existing constraints on curves and nodes.
Options in Detail for Curve Tool Palette

Join
Automatically joins disconnected splines and create intersection points. Set a value and click the
OK button and the application will apply the value to all splines or selected splines.
Curve Ends – Joins curve ends that have a distance smaller than a given value.
Before Applying After Applying
Intersection – Creates intersection points between splines.
Before Applying After Applying
Rebuild
Regenerates splines by controlling node points and deviations between splines and a mesh. This
tool palette is available after selecting splines.

No. Of Interpolation Pts. – Sets the total number of interpolation points. Select splines and
specify the total number of nodes and click the OK button.
Number: 4 Number: 7
Deform Smoothness
Deform Smoothness – Determines the smoothness strength when editing splines.
Original Curve Smoothness: Min Smoothness: Max
Tools > Curve Tools > Spline
What
The Spline command is used to create a curve on nominal data, scan data or in free 3D space.
Example of Splines on scan data Example of a spline in 3D space
Why
The Spline command is useful for:

• Creating a curve network for a boundary fitted surface
• Creating a path for a swept or lofted body
• Creating an original user-designed shape from scratch instead of copying the shape of an
existing object
• Working with highly curved 3D features such as a corkscrew feature
• Working with freeform shapes that require more manual control than an automated tool can
provide
• Splitting a section made out of lines and splines to create new enclosed sections
How to Use
A. How to create a Spline and alter it in Curve mode
1. Click the Curve button to enter the Curve mode.
2. Go to Tools > Curve Tools > Spline, or click the icon in Curve mode.
3. Select a point on a mesh to place a spline. Create extra nodes to further define the shape
by adding a node with a left mouse click.
4. To finish a spline you can either right-click, double left-click, or press the Enter button
on the keyboard. Click OK when the spline has been completed.
5. When the mouse cursor is hovered over a node the selection area will be shown in a red
circle. Hold down the Alt key on the keyboard and move the mouse from left to right to
change the size of the selection area.

6. If further altering of the spline is desired, select a node by left-clicking on it and dragging
it to a desired located then release the mouse button.
7. When more or less interpolation points are desired for the spline use the Rebuild
command found in the toolbar. In this example the number of interpolation points has
been set to 30.
B. How to create a Spline in Curve mode

2. Go to Tools > Curve Tools > Spline, or click icon in the Curve mode.
3. Select a base plane. For this example use the Top base plane.
4. Left-click to begin drawing a spline. The first click will create the first node of the spline.

5. Without clicking anywhere else in the model view, click the Base Plane option again
and select a perpendicular base plane, in this case, the Front base plane.
6. Click again to place another node of the spline on the perpendicular plane. Doing this
allows the spline to first be aligned to the Top plane and then aligned to the Front plane
mid-spline.
7. Finish the spline by switching back to the Top base plane and double-left click, right
click, or press the Enter key on the keyboard to finish the spline. The spline will curve
based on where the nodes were placed. Click OK to finish the command.

Note:
When a spline is drawn on a scan data in Curve mode the snap function will automatically
be enabled. If snapping to mesh is not desired, use the Alt key while creating the spline.
Options in Detail
Base Plane – Select base planes.
Join At Intersection Points – Automatically creates intersection points between intersecting

curves. The Tolerance range can be set to determine if curves intersect or not.
Enable Option Disable Option
Tolerance – Sets the tolerance range.
Snap On Assistance Vector – Enable to snap a point of curve on an assistance vector that is
automatically extracted from target body entity when drawing a curve in the Model View. Dot-
lined assistance vectors will be displayed when hovering the mouse curser on body faces or
edges.

Note:
The Snap On Assistance Vector option is useful for creating a curve that has a specific directional
property, such as perpendicular, parallel, and tangent, from a target entity.
See Also
Tools > Curve Tools > Section
Tools > Curve Tools > Intersection
Tools > Curve Tools > Surface UV Curves
Tools > Curve Tools > Boundary
Tools > Curve Tools > Fit From Points
What
The Section command is used to create section curves on nominal data and scan data.
Why
• Creating a curve network for a boundary fitted surface

• Making a profile of a model to simplify in making a lofted body
How to Use
How to create a model profile in Curve mode
1. Enter Curve mode and go to Tools > Curve Tools > Section or click on the icon in the

toolbar.
2. Click on the mesh to select the entire model as the Target Entity. This will select all
entities available. Click the Next Stage button to proceed.
3. Go to the N-Division Between Planes method and select the Right plane as the
reference plane for the Base Plane input box. Set the No. Of Sections option to 7 and
click OK.
4. The model will be sectioned into seven sections of equal length.
5. Exit the Curve mode and hide the mesh to see the created sections.
Options in Detail
Methods
The following methods are available:

• Draw Line On Screen
Creates sections from a line.
• Select Plane
Creates sections from an intersecting plane.
• N-Division Between Planes

Creates sections based on a chosen base plane.
• N-Division Along Curve

Creates sections based on a chosen curve.
• Radial
Creates sections based radial segments.
• Cylindrical
Creates sections based on cylindrical segments.
• Conical
Creates sections based on conical segments.
Draw Line On Screen – Creates sectional curves by drawing lines on the screen.
Cutting Line Resulting Section Spline
Note:
The Shift key can be used to draw horizontal or vertical lines. Multiple cutting lines can be created at
one time by using the Draw Line On Screen method. The Undo command or Ctrl + Z keyboard shortcut
will delete the last created cutting line.
Select Plane – Creates sectional curves by selecting Base Planes.
N-Division Between Planes – Creates a specified number of sections based on chosen base
planes.
N-Division Resulting Section Spline

Distance Between Sections – Sets the distance between sections.
Equal Spacing – Creates an equal amount of space between all sections.
No. of Sections – Sets the total number of sections to be created which includes the
two base planes selected for the option.
Show Section Base Geometry – Shows the base geometry of the section.
N-Division Along Curve – Creates the specified number of sections with respect to the curve.
Uniform – Creates multiple sections by either a total number of sections or by equal

distances.
No. of Sections – Uses a set number of sections as the criteria.
Equal Spacing – Uses equal spacing as the criteria.
Curvature – Creates more sections in areas of higher curvature.
No. of Sections – Uses a set number of sections as the criteria.
Pick Points – Creates sections manually by picking points on a curve. To cancel the last
picked point the Undo keyboard shortcut Ctrl + Z can be used.
Radial – Creates virtual radial sections and generates section curves from them.
Axis – Chooses an axis.
Base Plane – Chooses a base plane.
Flip Start Plane – Flips the starting plane the opposite direction.
No. of Sections – Sets the number of sections.
Interval Angle – Sets the interval angle value between sections.
Equal Spacing – Sets equal spacing between sections.
Show Section Base Geometry – Shows the base geometry of a section.

Cylindrical – Creates cylindrical sections and generates section curves.
No. of Sections – Sets a number of sections.
Total Angle – Sets a total angle value.
Radius Interval – Sets the distance between sections.
Base Radius – Sets the base radius of a starting section.
Height – Sets the height of a cylindrical area.
Section Inside – Sets the creation direction from the base radius.
Conical – Creates conical sections and generates section curves from them.
Base Position – Specifies X, Y, or Z as a base position.
No. of Sections – Sets the number of sections.
Total Angle – Sets a total angle value.
Radius Interval – Sets a radius interval.
Bottom Radius – Sets a value for a bottom radius.
Top Radius – Sets a value for a top radius.
Apex Angle – Sets a value for a slope.
Height – Sets a value for height.
Section Inside – Sets the value for a creation direction.

Show Section Base Geometry – Shows section cylinders.
See Also
What
The Intersection command is used to create intersection splines between bodies. It can only be
used in Curve mode.
Why
The Intersection command is useful for:
• Finding the boundaries where two entities meet
How to Use
How to find an intersection for two entities
2. Go to Tools > Curve Tools > Intersection, or click on the icon in Curve mode.

3. Select target Tool Bodies and Target Bodies. The Tool Bodies will be the bodies that
are used as the base bodies and the Target Bodies will be the bodies that the
intersections using the Tool Bodies are found on.
4. Click OK to complete the command. The intersection between the bodies will be
created.
Options in Detail
Tool Bodies – Selects tool bodies.
Target Bodies – Selects target bodies.
See Also

What
The Surface UV Curves command is used to create 3D curves on a face along its U and V directions.
Why
The Surface UV Curves command is useful for:
• Creating 3D curve networks on curved faces that are relatively uniform and follow the U and V
directions
How to Use
How to find set a UV Curves
2. Go to Tools > Curve Tools > Surface UV Curve or click on the icon in the Curve mode.
3. Select a position on a face.

Options in Detail
Parameter Direction – Chooses the U, V, or both the U and V directions for creating curves.
Make Curve Editable – Created curves will have node points that are editable.
Make Node At UV Curves Intersection – Creates intersection nodes at the intersection

point of the U and V curves.
See Also
What
The Boundary command is used to extract curves from the boundary of a mesh.

Why
The Boundary command is useful for:

• Finding the boundary of a model that is irregularly shaped
How to Use
How to find boundary for an entity
2. Go to Tools > Curve Tools > Boundary, or click on the icon in Curve mode.
3. Select the Curves From Boundaries option and choose an outside boundary on the
model for the Boundaries input box.
4. Click OK to extract the selected boundary as a spline. If only a part of the boundary is
desired to be extracted then the Interactively Split Curve Segments From a Single
Boundary option can be used to manually pick the starting and ending points of the
boundary.

Boundary as a spline Split curve segment from a boundary
Options in Detail
Curves From Boundaries – Creates 3D spline curves on selected mesh boundaries.
Interactively Split Curve Segments From a Single Boundary – Creates a partial boundary
curve by picking a starting and ending point on a boundary.
Boundaries – Selects boundaries on a mesh.
Smoothness – Defines the smoothness of a boundary curve by using a value between a Min
and Max limits.
Min. Smoothness Max. Smoothness
Offset – Creates an offset curve from a boundary.
See Also

What
The Fit From Points command is used to create 3D curves from points or region boundaries by
fitting to them.
Why
The Fit From Points command is useful for:
• Generating analytic curves such as circles, slots and rectangles from point data
• Generating freeform curves from point data
• Generation of curves on region boundaries and character lines of a model
How to Use
How to extract feature shapes using the Fit From Points command
1. Go to File > Import Scan Data to import a scan file.
3. Go to Tools > Curve Tools > Fit From Points.
4. Set the Fitting Shape to Circle and the Fitting Type to Hole.
5. Click the Circle Selection Mode button on the bottom-left corner of the application
window to select a target.

6. Select a circle on the scan data.
7. Click OK to complete the command. Curves will be extracted from the circle.
Options in Detail
Target – Selects poly-vertices or region boundaries for fitting curves.
Fitting curve from points
Fitting curve from region boundaries
Split Target – Splits a fitting curve by picking the starting and ending points of a splitting
position on a preview curve.

Fitting Options
Fitting Options – Generates a fitting curves from several shapes: Auto, Circle, Slot, Rectangle
Polygon, Line and Freeform.
Fitting Shape – Chooses the type of shape for a fitting curve.
Auto
Circle
Slot
Rectangle
Polygon

Line
Freeform
Allowable Tolerance – Fits a curve to a shape within a given value. The Auto Estimate button
computes the value automatically.
More Options
Fitting Type – Chooses a fitting type to create a geometric curve from points or edges.
Best Fit – Finds best-fitted geometric curve from points or edges using the least squares
fitting method.
Min. Bound – Finds minimum-fitted geometric curve that contacts the nearest selected
points or edges in the normal direction from the center point of the best-fitted geometry
that was found using the least square fitting method.
Note:
When circle is selected as target fitting shape, the Min. Bound option is used for finding
maximum-inscribed geometric shape of a tube-like geometric volume that encloses selected
points or edges using the minimum separation fitting method.
Max. Bound – Finds maximum-fitted geometric curve that contacts the farthest selected
points or edges in the normal direction from the center point of the best-fitted geometry
Note:
When circle is selected as target fitting geometry, the Max. Bound option is used for finding
minimum-circumscribed geometric shape of a tube-like geometric volume that encloses
selected points or edges using the minimum separation fitting method.

Best Fit Min. / Max. Bound
from Minimum Separation Fitting
Hole – This option is only used for finding a circle fitting shape. It finds minimum-fitted
circular curve that contacts the nearest selected points or edges in the normal direction
from the center point of the best-fitted geometry that was found using the least square
fitting method.
Remove Outlier – Removes outlier data from the fitting type using the N*Sigma, Ratio (%), or
Absolute Distance algorithms.
Use Only Effective Data – Uses only effective data when fitting. Effective data is the actual data
points used in fitting after sampling and outlier removal.
Rounded Corner – Rounds corners of rectangular shapes.
No. Of Edges – Sets the number of edges created.
Smoothness – Controls the smoothness of extracted curves.
See Also

Tools > Curve Tools > Offset
What
The Offset command is used to offset existing curves or lines.
Why
• Offsetting a line or a curve to create lines or curves with the same properties and shape.
How to Use
How to offset a curve on a mesh
2. Go to Tools > Curve Tools > Offset, or click the icon in the toolbar.
3. Select a curve to offset.
4. Specify the distance desired for the offset curve. Direction1 creates a curve in a
direction from the existing curve. Direction2 creates a curve in the other direction. Both
Directions creates both curves.
Offset curve in Direction1 Offset curve in Both Directions

Options in Detail
Base Entity – Selects base entities.
Curves – Selects curves to offset.
Distance – Sets the distance of the offset.
Direction1 – Creates a curve in a first direction from the original curve.
Direction2 – Creates a curve in a second direction from the original curve.
Both Directions – Creates two curves in both directions from the original curve.
More Options
Remove Original Curves – Removes the original curve after the offset is completed.
Offset Curve Deviation – Connects curves within a given deviation value.
Tolerance: 0.01 Tolerance: 0.1
See Also
Tools > Curve Tools > Project
Tools > Curve Tools > Mirror
Tools > Curve Tools > Convert Entities
Tools > Curve Tools > Smooth
Tools > Curve Tools > Trim
Tools > Curve Tools > Extend
Tools > Curve Tools > Split
Tools > Curve Tools > Match
Tools > Curve Tools > Merge

What
The Project command is used to project curves or nodes onto a selected entity.
Why
The Project command is useful for:
• Creating a copy of a line onto an entity
How to Use
How to project a curve onto a surface
1. Click Curve button to enter Curve mode.
2. Go to Tools > Curve Tools > Project or click the icon in the toolbar. This command can
only be used in Curve mode.
3. Select a target curve and a body as the target entity.

4. Change the Projection Method option to Along Vector and select a reference plane.
Options in Detail
Curves / Nodes – Selects curves or nodes to project.
Target Entity – Selects target entity to project the target curve onto.
Project Duplicated Curve – Retains an original curve.
Projection Method
Min. Distance – Projects a curve to a minimum distance.
Along Vector – Projects a curve in a selected direction. A ref. plane, vector, curve or edge can
be used.

Allowable Deviation – Sets a deviation value between a projected curve and a target entity.
See Also
What
The Mirror command is used to mirror 3D curves.
Why
The Mirror command is useful for:
• Creating a mirrored copy of a 3D curve
Note:
A curve mirrored in Curve mode will be projected onto the mesh.
How to Use
How to mirror a curve
2. Go to Tools > Curve Tools > Mirror, or click the icon in the toolbar.
3. Select a Symmetry Plane and Curves as the entities that will be mirrored.
Options in Detail
Symmetry Plane – Selects a ref. plane or planar face as a Symmetry Plane.
Curves – Select curves to mirror.
Remove Original Curves – Removes original curves after mirroring.
See Also
What
The Convert Entities command is used to convert entities such as edges and polylines into 3D
curves.
Why
The Convert Entities command is useful for:
• Creating a 3D curve out of a 2D entity
How to Use
How to convert an entity
2. Go to Tools > Curve Tools > Convert Entities, or click the icon in the toolbar.

3. Select edges to convert.
4. Click OK to complete the command. A 3D curve will be generated.
Options in Detail
Entities – Selects entities to convert. Entities can be polylines and curves on edges.
Note:
A spline that is black contains constraints. To remove constraints use the Remove Constraints
command.
Note:
The Smooth command regenerates intersection points between curves. The parameters for
intersection points can be set in the Join tool palette.

See Also
What
The Smooth command is used to smooth curves.
Why
The Smooth command is useful for:
• Smoothing irregular curves

• Smoothing a portion of a curve
• Saving time over smoothing curves manually
How to Use

How to smooth a curve
2. Go to Tools > Curve Tools > Smooth or click the icon in the toolbar.
3. Select a curve and adjust the Smoothness setting. Click OK to complete the command.
Before Smoothing After Smoothing
Options in Detail
Methods
All Range – Applies smoothing to a selected curve.
Partial Range – Determines the strength of the smoothing procedure.
Sub Options
Curves – Selects curves to smooth.
Smoothness – Sets a level of smoothness from Min. to Max.
See Also

What
The Trim command is used to trim curves.
Why
The Trim command is useful for:
• Trimming away unwanted sections of a curve

• Combining curves
How to Use
How to trim curves
2. Go to Tools > Curve Tools > Trim, or click the icon in the toolbar.
3. Select curves. Click OK to complete the command.
Options in Detail

Methods
Pick Curve Portion To Trim – Trims selected curves.
Trim Short Portion Of Curves – Trims the short portions from selected curves.
Curves – Selects curves to trim.
Portion Rate – Sets the ratio of short curves compared to an original curve length.
Intersection Tolerance – Determines whether curves intersect or not by setting the tolerance
for gaps between curves.
See Also

What
The Extend command is used to extend 3D curves and lines.
Why
The Extend tool is useful for:
• Extending a 3D curve or line
Note:
Extending a curve in Curve mode will follow mesh data. To extend a curve in a tangential direction
without following the mesh, copy the curve in the Curve mode into the Curve mode and then apply the
Extend command.
How to Use
How to extend a curve
2. Go to Tools > Curve Tools > Extend or click the icon in the toolbar.
3. Select a curve to extend and click-drag the arrow on the screen. To extend a curve in
both directions click on the curve itself, or to extend in only one direction click on the

end of the curve in the desired direction.
Options in Detail
Curves – Selects curves to extend.
Options
Shape – Selects the shape of an extension.
Tangent – Extends a curve in a tangential direction from a starting position.
Curvature – Extends a curve in a curvature direction from a starting position.
Reflective – Extends a curve as a reflection of the original shape.
Distance – Sets a distance to extend.
See Also

What
The Split command is used to divide a curve.
Why
The Split command useful for:
• Dividing a curve by creating a node if one does not exist
How to Use
How to use the Split command to create nodes on a curve
2. Go to Tools > Curve Tools > Split or click the icon in the toolbar.
3. Pick points on the curve to split and click OK. The curve will now have nodes where the
split command was used.
Note:

The Split command can move the seam position of a closed curve. A split position on a closed
curved will become the new seam point.
Original Seam Point Changed Seam Point
Options in Detail
Pick Point – Splits a curve at a picked point.
Curves At Intersection Points – Splits a curve at an intersecting point.
Plane Or Face Intersection Points – Splits a curve on intersecting positions with other planes
or faces.
Curves – Selects curves to split.
Intersection Tolerance – Sets the tolerance for splitting curves at an intersection point.
Tool Entity – Selects tool entities.
See Also
What
The Match command is used to match tangencies and curvatures between a curve and another
entity.
Why
The Match command is useful for:
• Creating areas that a scanner might not be able to get data for
How to Use
How to extract a curve from two solid faces
2. Go to Tools > Curve Tools > Match or click the icon in the toolbar.
3. Select a Curve to match and a body edge as the Target Entity.
4. Click OK to match the selected curves.

5. Apply the matching process in steps 2-4 again on the other side of the model to
complete the match.
Options in Detail
Curve – Selects a curve to match.
Target Entity – Selects an entity to use as a matching reference. The target entity can be a ref.
vector, ref. plane, curve, edge, or face.
Curve to Ref. Vector Curve to Ref. Plane
Curve to Curve Curve to Edge
Curve to Face
Tangent – Makes a tangency (G1) connection to the target entity.
Curvature – Makes a curvature (C2) connection to the target entity.
Orthogonal – Makes an orthogonal connection to the target entity. Only reference planes and
faces can be used for this method.

Average – Modifies a target curve to create a smooth connection.
Disable Average Enable Average
Note:
A matched constraint will be shown with blue arrows. To remove constraints, click the Remove
Constraint button on the toolbar and select the constraints in the list box.
See Also
What
The Merge command is used to merge separate curves to form a single curve.

Why
The Merge command is useful for:
• Merging separate lines into one line
How to Use
How to merge curves
2. Go to Tools > Curve Tools > Merge or click the icon in the toolbar.
3. Select curves to merge.
4. Click OK to complete the command and merge the selected curves.

Options in Detail
Methods
2 Curve Ends – Connects the ends of two curves.
Average Multiple Curves – Combines neighboring curves to generate a single averaged curve.
More Options
Curves – Selects curves to merge.
Fix Shape – Preserves the original shape of curves. This option can be used to preserve a sharp
edge after merging and is available only in Curve mode.
Original Curves Disable Option Enable Option
Smoothness – Sets the smoothness when averaging multiple curves.
Merge Range – Merges the values between curves.
See Also

Tools > Curve Tools > Insert Node
What
The Insert Node command is used to insert a node onto a curve or line.
Why
The Insert Node command is useful for:
• Creating a break in a line

• Creating a node to connect another line to
How to Use
How to insert a node
1. Click the Curve button to enter Curve mode.
2. Go to Tools > Curve Tools > Insert Node or click on the icon in the toolbar.
3. Click on a curve to insert nodes. Click OK to finish the command.

Note:
A node can be added onto a line or curve by dragging an existing node while holding down
the Ctrl key on the keyboard.
See Also
Tools > Curve Tools > Remove Node
Tools > Curve Tools > Remove Node
What
The Remove Node command is used to remove a node from a curve or line.
Why
The Remove Node command is useful for:
• Removing nodes in a line
How to use
How to remove a node

2. Go to Tools > Curve Tools > Remove Node or click on the icon in the toolbar.
3. Select nodes to remove.
Before Node Removal After Node Removal
Note:
A node can be removed by pressing the Delete key on the keyboard.
See Also
Tools > Curve Tools > Insert Node
Tools > Curve Tools > Remove Constraint

What
The Remove Constraint command is used to remove existing constraints on curves and nodes.
Why
The Remove Constraint command is useful for:
• Removing constraints on curves and nodes
How to Use
How to remove constraints on a curve

2. Go to Tools > Curve Tools > Remove Constraint or click the icon in the toolbar.
3. Select a curve and all constraints on the curve will be displayed.
4. Select constraints to be removed and click OK to complete the command. Constraints

will be removed and the converted curve will be displayed in blue.
Options in Detail
Curve / Nodes – Selects curves or nodes to remove constraints.
Constraints To Remove – Shows a list of constraints that can be removed by selecting the
constraint in the list box and clicking the Delete button on the keyboard.
Note:
Constraints can also be removed by using the Trash Can icon that will appear next to a constraint when
selected.
No. Of Interpolation Points – Sets the number of interpolation points and regenerates the curve
when removing constraints from an imported curve.

7.5.6. Tools > GD&T Tools
The GD&T Tools menu features various commands that can be used to inspect GD&T, such as
Position, Flatness, Straightness, and so on, in the GD&T mode.
The GD&T mode is divided into four tool groups for measuring GD&T and creating reg. geometries.
1. Dimensioning
• Smart Dimension
Inspects a distance, radius, or an angle of a target entity.
• Linear Dimension
Inspects a distance between selected target entities.
• Angular Dimension
Inspects an angle between target entities.
• Radial Dimension
Inspects the radius of a target entity.
• Elliptical Dimension
Inspects the longest and shortest distance of an elliptical feature.
• Bore Depth
Inspects the depth of holes or pockets.
• Counterbore
Inspects the diameter of holes and pockets.
• Countersink
Inspects the maximum diameter and the apex angle of conical pockets.
• Thickness
Inspects the thickness of a cylindrical tube or planar slab.
2. Creating Datums
• Datum

Adds datums to the geometric profile of a model.
3. Geometric Tolerancing
• Position
Verifies the position of a feature.
• Flatness
Verifies the flatness of a planar entity.
• Straightness
Verifies the straightness of an entity that is a cylindrical, conical, or planar geometric shape.
• Circularity
Verifies the circularity of an entity that is a cylindrical or conical geometric shape or a circular hole.
• Cylindricity
Verifies the cylindricity of an entity that is a cylindrical geometric shape.
• Concentricity
Verifies the concentricity of an entity that is a cylindrical or conical geometric shape.
• Parallelism
Verifies the parallelism of an entity that is a planar or cylindrical geometric shape.
• Perpendicularity
Verifies the perpendicularity of an entity that is a planar or cylindrical geometric shape.
• Angularity
Verifies the angularity of an entity that is a planar or cylindrical geometric shape.
• Runout
Verifies the runout of an entity that is a planar or cylindrical geometric shape.
• Total Runout
Verifies the total runout of an entity that is a planar or cylindrical geometric shape.
• Line Profile
Verifies the line profiles of entities.
• Surface Profile
Verifies the surface profiles of entities.
• Symmetry
Verifies the symmetry of entities that face each other.
4. Creating Ref. Geometries

• Point
Creates a point that defines a position in three-dimensional space
• Simulated CMM point

Simulates a point generated by a Coordinate Measuring Machine (CMM)
• Vector
Creates a linear line with a direction
• Plane
Creates a planar two-dimensional surface with a normal direction
• Circle
Creates a ref. circle on a plane that consists of a center and radius
• Slot
Creates a ref. slot on a plane that consists of two lines and two arcs
• Rectangle
Creates a ref. rectangle on a plane that consists of four lines with four right angles
• Regular Polygon
Creates a ref. regular polygon on a plane that consists of several equal lines
• Cylinder
Creates a ref. cylinder, which is a three-dimensional shape consisting of an axis, a radius, and a
height value
• Cone
Creates a ref. cone, which is a three-dimensional shape consisting of an axis, two different radii,
and a height value
• Sphere
Creates a ref. sphere, which is a three-dimensional shape that consists of a center and a radius
• Torus
Creates a ref. torus, which is a three-dimensional shape created by revolving a circle and consists
of a center, a major axis, and a minor radius
• Coordinate
Creates a ref. coordinate that determines the position of a point or other geometric elements

Tools > GD&T Tools > Datum
What
The Datum command adds datums on the geometric profiles of a model. The Datum is a theoretical
exact axis, or plane derived from the true scan pair geometry of a specified datum feature. They are
the origin from which a location or geometric characteristics of features of a part are established. It
is usually used for generating GD&T inspection features.
The name of a datum is automatically assigned in alphabetical order from A to Z. Letters can be
unrestrictedly combined to form characters such as AA or ZZZ. The creation and the use of datum
can be shared between the 3D GD&T inspection features.
Why
The Datum command is useful for:
• Defining geometric features as standard features for inspection

• Inspecting features with constraints on six degrees of freedom
How to Use
How to add datums onto geometric features
1. Go to Insert > 3D GD&T or click the icon in the toolbar in the 3D GD&T mode.

2. Go to Tools > GD&T Tools > Datum or click the icon in the toolbar.
3. Define datum A by selecting a body face then placing the resulting annotation in the
Model View.
Options in Detail
Target Entities
Target – Selects target entities to set datums features.
Note:
A Ref. vector, Ref. circle, Ref. plane, Ref. cylinder, Ref. cone, Ref. slot, Ref. rectangle, Ref. polygon,
Boundary, Edge, Section Edge, or Composite Selection can be a target entity and applicable entities will
The following table shows where datum can be applied:

Line (Vector)
Rectangle
Cylinder
Polygon
Target Entity
Sphere
Regular
Torus
Plane
Circle
Cone
Slot
Face of Body OK OK OK OK OK
Edge of Body OK
Boundary Edge of Body OK OK OK OK

Feature Region OK OK OK OK OK
Boundary Edge of
OK OK OK OK
Feature Region
Ref. Geometry OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK
More Options
Rotate Annotation Plane – Click the Rotate Annotation Plane button to rotate an annotation
plane.
See Also
Tools > GD&T Tools > Smart Dimension
What
The Smart Dimension command inspects a distance, radius, or an angle of target entities. The type
of dimension is automatically determined by the combination of selected target entities.
Aligned Nominal and Scan Measured Dimensions of Features
Why

The Smart Dimension command is useful for:
• Measuring a distance, radius, or an angle of target entities with a single command
How to Use
How to measure a distance, radius, or angle using Smart Dimension
2. Go to Tools > GD&T Tools > Smart Dimension or click the icon in the toolbar.
3. Measure a distance by selecting two parallel faces then place the resulting annotation
onto the Model View.
4. Measure a radius of a hole by selecting a cylindrical face then place the resulting
annotation onto the Model View.
5. Measure an angle by selecting two angular faces then place the resulting annotation
onto the Model View.

Options in Detail
Dimension Type
Type – Displays the type of dimension as Linear, Radial, or Angular.
Note:
A display type is intelligently determined based on a selected entity. For example, if two parallel faces
are selected as target entities, the type will automatically become Linear. If an arc edge is selected as a
target entity, the type will automatically become Radial. For more information, go to Tools > GD&T
Tools > Linear Dimension, Angular Dimension, or Radial Dimension.
Target Entities
Type – Selects target entities to set smart dimensions features.
Note:
A Ref. point, Ref. vector, Ref. circle, Ref. slot, Ref. rectangle, Ref. polygon, Ref. plane, Ref. cylinder, Ref.
cone, Ref. sphere, Ref. torus, Vertex, Boundary, Edge, Section Vertex, Section Edge, Region Edge, Face,
Region, or Composite Selection can be a target entity and applicable entities will be determined
The following table shows where smart dimension can be applied:
L: Linear Dimension, A: Angular Dimension, R: Radial Dimension


Point (Vertex)
Line (Vector)
Rectangle
Cylinder
Polygon
Regular
Sphere
Plane
Circle
Torus
Cone
Slot
Face of L, A,
L, A L, A L, R L
Body R
Edge of
L L*, A L, R
Body
Boundary
Edge of L L*, A L, R L* L*
Body
Feature L, A,
L, A L, A L, R L
Region R
Boundary
Edge of
L*, A L, R L* L*
Feature
Region
Ref. L, A,
L L, A L, A L, R L L, A L, R L* L* L
Geometry R
Options
0.8
-0.8~0.8
-0.8, 0.8
-0.8/0.8
-0.8:0.8
Note:

Note:
maximum-inscribed geometry of a slab-like or a tube-like geometric volume that encloses scan pair
Note:
properties of target face or edge.
Best Fit, Min. Bound, and Max. Bound can be used as a fitting method. For more information,
go to User Interface > Docking Bars > Properties.
<Actual Mating>
The As Nominal option follows the Fitting Option's definition of a face’s property. When
selecting an entity for measuring GD&T, the As Nominal’s sub-option uses a fitting method

predefined in the target entity’s properties for finding scan pair geometry.
Note:
When measuring a Dimension, a calculation will simulate measurement with a caliper in the real-
In Space
In Material
Alignment – Aligns a measuring direction and is only available for Linear dimensions.

(Shortest Distance)
Arc Condition – Specifies arc conditions by choosing either center, minimum or maximum
conditions. This option is displayed when the dimension type is Linear and target entities are
circular section edges.

Note:
Even if entities to be measured are not located on the same plane, the Arc Condition parameter can still
be applied. To apply Arc Condition to the entities that are not located on the same plane, the Alignment
option must be applied in advance.
Pattern – Measures the radius from multiple patterned feature profiles at the same time. This

More Options
Rotate Annotation Plane – Click the button to rotate an annotation plane.
See Also
Tools > GD&T Tools > Linear Dimension
Tools > GD&T Tools > Angular Dimension
Tools > GD&T Tools > Radial Dimension
Tools > GD&T Tools > Elliptical Dimension
Tools > GD&T Tools > Linear Dimension
What
The Linear Dimension command inspects a distance between selected target entities.
Aligned Nominal and Scan Measured Distance of Features
Why
The Linear Dimension command is useful for:
• Measuring a distance between target entities

How to Use
How to measure distance between target entities
2. Go to Tools > GD&T Tools > Linear Dimension or click the icon in the toolbar.
3. Select two cylindrical faces then place the resulting annotation onto the Model View.
4. Measure a distance between holes by selecting cylindrical faces and click the OK button.
Note:
After measuring a dimension, if the axis/normal direction of the scan pair geometries is out of
a given range while the Check Pair's Axis/Normal option is applied in the Properties of the
Nominal Data, a notice message will be displayed in the Error List that says “The max angle
deviation condition is not satisfied. Check entities whose scan points are red in color”.

Scan pair points are highlighted in red when the mouse cursor hovers over a resulting
annotation.
Note:
After measuring a dimension check scan pair points that are used for finding scan pair
geometries by selecting a resulting annotation and switching the Scan Points option from
“False” to “True” in the Appearance section within its Properties.
How to Measure Linear Dimension for 3D Features

The following cases explain how linear dimensions are measured according to target entity type.
• Point/Point Distance – The geometry type of target entities can be:

 Point Geometry Type – Vertex, Circle, Sphere, Torus, Ref. Point, Ref. circle, Ref. slot, Ref.
rectangle, Ref. polygon, Ref. sphere, Ref. torus
Linear dimension measures the direct distance between selected entities and defines the
distance as a nominal value. When scan pair points exist, the linear dimension inspects the
deviation between a nominal value and the actual value, which is the direct distance
between scan pair geometries extracted from a target 3D scan data according to the Actual
• Point/Line Distance – The geometry type of target entities can be:

rectangle, Ref. polygon, Ref. sphere, Ref. torus
 Line (Vector) Geometry Type – Line, Cylinder, Cone, Ref. vector, Ref. cylinder, Ref. cone
• Point/Plane Distance – The geometry type of target entities can be;

rectangle, Ref. polygon Ref. sphere, Ref. torus
 Plane Geometry Type – Plane, Ref. plane
• Line/Line Distance – The geometry type of target entities can be:

defined by an average distance calculated between two perpendicular distances from the
start and end points of the secondly selected entity to the firstly selected entity. If the first
selected entity is size-limited and the second selected entity is unlimited, the calculation
method will be calculated in the opposite direction, first from the unlimited entity to the size-
limited entity. When scan pair points exist, the linear dimension inspects the deviation
between the nominal value and the actual value, which is an average perpendicular distance
between scan pair geometries extracted from target 3D scan data according to the Actual
• Line/Plane Distance – The geometry type of target entities can be:

A linear dimension between Line and Plane is differently measured depending on which

geometry type of entity is firstly selected:
 When selecting linear entity first

The firstly selected linear entity is used as the standard for dimensioning. The nominal
value is defined by a projected distance from the center point of the secondly selected
planar entity perpendicular to the linear entity. If the first selected entity is size-limited
and the second selected entity is unlimited, the calculation method will be calculated in
the opposite direction, first from the unlimited entity to the size-limited entity. When
scan pair points exist, the linear dimension inspects the deviation between the nominal
value and the actual value, which is a perpendicularly projected distance between scan
pair geometries extracted from target 3D scan data according to the Actual Mating
Envelop Rule.
 When selecting planar entity first

The firstly selected planar entity is used as the standard for dimensioning. The nominal
value is defined by an average distance calculated between two perpendicular
distances from the start and end points of the second selected linear entity to the first
selected entity. If the first selected entity is size-limited and the second selected entity
is unlimited, the calculation method will be calculated in the opposite direction, first
from the unlimited entity to the size-limited entity. When scan pair points exist, the
linear dimension inspects the deviation between the nominal value and the actual value,
which is an average perpendicular distance between scan pair geometries extracted
from target 3D scan data according to the Actual Mating Envelop Rule.
• Plane/Plane Distance – The geometry type of target entities can be:

defined by a projected distance from the center point of the secondly selected entity
perpendicular to the first entity. If the first selected entity is size-limited and the second
selected entity is unlimited, the calculation method will be calculated in the opposite
direction, first from the unlimited entity to the size-limited entity. When scan pair points exist,
the linear dimension inspects the deviation between the nominal value and the actual value,
which is a perpendicularly projected distance between scan pair geometries extracted from
target 3D scan data according to the Actual Mating Envelop Rule.
Note:

application.
• In Space
In-Space mating envelop is used in planar and cylindrical faces or in circular edges, it will be used for
finding maximum-inscribed geometry of a slab-like or a tube-like geometric volume that encloses scan
• In Material
In-Material mating envelop is used in planar and cylindrical faces or in circular edges, it will be used for
finding minimum-circumscribed geometry of a slab-like or a tube-like geometric volume that encloses
scan pair points using the minimum separation fitting method.
Options in Detail
Methods
Individual – Individually measures linear dimensions by selecting target entities one by one.
Continue – Continually measures a linear dimension from a previous target entity to another
target entity. The first target is automatically set from the last target in the previous dimensioning.

Baseline – Measures a linear dimension from a target baseline entity to other entities.
Target – Select target entities to measure a distance.
Note:
A Ref. point, Ref. vector, Ref. circle, Ref. slot, Ref. rectangle, Ref. polygon, Ref. plane, Ref. cylinder, Ref. cone,
Ref. sphere, Ref. torus, Vertex, Boundary, Edge, Section Vertex, Section Edge, Region Edge, Face, Region,
or Composite Selection can be a target entity and applicable entities will be determined according to
the geometry type of the target entity.
The following table shows where linear dimension can be applied:

Point (Vertex)
Line (Vector)
Rectangle
Cylinder
Polygon
Regular
Target Entity
Sphere
Plane
Circle
Torus
Cone
Slot
Edge of Body OK OK* OK
Boundary Edge
OK OK* OK OK* OK*
of Body

Boundary Edge
of Feature OK OK OK* OK*
Region
Ref. Geometry OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK* OK* OK
Note:
To change a selection order, click the Change Order Of Targets button .
0.8
-0.8~0.8
-0.8, 0.8
-0.8/0.8
-0.8:0.8
target entities, click the Estimate button. After calculation, the button will be disabled.
Note:
Based on the type of dimension, measuring icons ( ) that can manually measure
distance, angle, or radius, will be displayed next to the Nominal input box. To manually set a
nominal value by measuring the distance between features, click the Measure Distance button
, then pick a point on a feature profile. To manually set a nominal value by measuring the radius
of a feature, click the Measure Radius button , then pick a point on a feature profile. To
manually set a nominal value by measuring the angle between features, click the Measure Angle
button , then pick a point on a feature profile.
Note:

Note:
Note:
In Space

In Material
Alignment – Aligns a measuring direction.
Without Alignment (Shortest X Alignment Y Alignment

Distance)
option is displayed when target entities are circular section edges.

Note:
Even if entities to be measured are not located on the same plane, the Arc Condition parameter can still
be applied. To apply Arc Condition to the entities that are not located on the same plane, the Alignment
option must be applied in advance.
More Options
See Also
Tools > GD&T Tools > Angular Dimension
What
The Angular Dimension command inspects an angle between target entities.
Aligned Nominal and Scan Measuring Distance of Features
Why
The Angular Dimension command is useful for:
• Measuring an angle between target entities
How to Use
How to measure angles between target entities
1 Go to Insert > 3D GD&T or click the icon in the toolbar in the 3D GD&T mode.
.
2 Go to Tools > GD&T Tools > Angular Dimension or click the icon in the toolbar.
.
3 Select two planar faces and click the OK button.
.
Note:
The angle consist two sides of complementary angle in the 180 degree standard. When the
result is calculated, one of the complementary angles is chosen for measurement according to
the position of mouse.
Note:

annotation.
Note:
“False” to “True” in the Appearance section within its Properties.
How to Measure Angular Dimensions for 3D Features

The following cases explain how angular dimensions are measured according to target entity type.
• Line/Plane Angle – The geometry type of target entities can be;

An angle between a line and a plane is calculated with a line and a vector which is internally
projected onto a plane and defined as a nominal value. When scan pair points exist, the

angular dimension inspects the deviation between the nominal value and the actual value
which is the angle between scan pair geometries extracted from target 3D scan data
according to the Actual Mating Envelop Rule.
• Line/Line, Plane/Plane Angle – The geometry type of target entities can be;
When measuring an angle between lines, the angle is calculated after a second selected
parallel line is moved to a first selected Line so that target entities can be intersected. When
measuring the angle between planes, the angle is calculated with the normal vectors of two
planes as a nominal value. If scan pair points exist, the angular dimension inspects the
deviation between the nominal value and the actual value which is the angle between the
scan pair geometries extracted from the target 3D scan data according to the Actual Mating
Envelop Rule.
Note:
application.
• In Space
In-Space mating envelop is used in planar and cylindrical faces or in circular edges, it will be used for
finding maximum-inscribed geometry of a slab-like or a tube-like geometric volume that encloses scan
• In Material
In-Material mating envelop is used in planar and cylindrical faces or in circular edges, it will be used for
finding minimum-circumscribed geometry of a slab-like or a tube-like geometric volume that encloses
scan pair points using the minimum separation fitting method.

Options in Detail
Target Entities
Target – Selects target entities to set smart dimensions features.
Note:
A Ref. vector, Ref. plane, Ref. cylinder, Ref. cone, Boundary, Edge, Section Edge, Region Edge, Face,
The following table shows where angular dimension can be applied:

Target Entity Line
Plane Cylinder Cone
(Vector)
Face of Body OK OK OK
Edge of Body OK
Boundary Edge of Body OK
Feature Region OK OK OK
Boundary Edge of Feature Region OK
Ref. Geometry OK OK OK OK
Options
0.8
-0.8~0.8
-0.8, 0.8
-0.8/0.8

-0.8:0.8
Note:
More Options
See Also
Tools > GD&T Tools > Radial Dimension
What
The Radial Dimension command inspects the radius of a target entity.

Aligned Nominal and Scan Measuring Distance of Features
Why
The Radial Dimension command is useful for:
• Measuring the radius of a target entity
How to Use
How to measure the radius of a target entity
2. Go to Tools > GD&T Tools > Radial Dimension or click the icon in the toolbar.
3. Select a cylindrical face then place the resulting annotation onto the Model View.
Measure radius of holes by selecting cylindrical faces and click the OK button.
4.

Note:
annotation.
Note:
“False” to “True” in the Appearance section within its Properties

How to Measure Radial Dimensions for 3D Features
• Circle Geometry Type – Circle, Cylinder, Sphere, Ref. circle, Ref. cylinder, Ref. sphere
A radial dimension measures the radius of selected entities and defines it as a nominal value.
When scan pair points exist, the radial dimension inspects the deviation between the nominal
value and the actual value which is the radius of the scan pair geometries extracted from target
3D scan data according to the Actual Mating Envelop Rule.
Note:
An Actual Mating Envelop is theoretically defined as a form perfect, maximum inscribed,

minimum circumscribed or tangent, inverse representation of an actual feature. Mating
Envelopes can be specified as “In-Material” and “In-Space”, or as “unconstrained”, “orientation
constrained” and “location constrained” relative to a Datum Reference Frame. It defines a
mating method to find scan pair geometry in the application.
• In Space
Finds minimum-fitted geometry that contacts the nearest scan pair points in the normal
direction from the center point of the best-fitted geometry that was found using the least
square fitting method. If the In-Space mating envelop is used in planar and cylindrical faces or
in circular edges, it will be used for finding maximum-inscribed geometry of a slab-like or a
tube-like geometric volume that encloses scan pair points using the minimum separation
fitting method.
• In Material
Finds maximum-fitted geometry that contacts the farthest scan pair points in the normal
direction from the center point of the best-fitted geometry that was found using the least
square fitting method. If the In-Material mating envelop is used in planar and cylindrical faces
or in circular edges, it will be used for finding minimum-circumscribed geometry of a slab-like
or a tube-like geometric volume that encloses scan pair points using the minimum separation

fitting method.
Options in Details
Target Entities
Target – Selects target entities to set smart dimensions features.
Note:
A Ref. cylinder, Ref. sphere, Ref. circle, Boundary, Edge, Section Edge, Region Edge, Face, Region,
or Composite Selection can be a target entity and applicable entities will be determined according to
the geometry type of the target entity.
The following table shows where radial dimension can be applied:

Target Entity
Cylinder Sphere Circle
Face of Body OK OK
Edge of Body OK
Feature Region OK OK
Ref. Geometry OK OK OK
Options
0.8
-0.8~0.8

-0.8, 0.8
-0.8/0.8
-0.8:0.8
Note:
Note:
In cylindrical faces or in circular edges, the In-Space mating option is used for finding maximum-
inscribed geometry of a tube-like geometric volume that encloses scan pair points using the
Note:
In cylindrical faces or in circular edges, the In-Material mating option is used for finding minimum-
circumscribed geometry of a tube-like geometric volume that encloses selected entities using the

The As Nominal option follows the Fitting Option’s definition of a face’s property. When
Note:
In Space
In Material
Pattern - Measures the radius from multiple patterned feature profiles at the same time. This

More Options
See Also
Tools > GD&T Tools > Elliptical Dimension
What
The Elliptical Dimension command inspects the longest and shortest distance of an elliptical
feature.
Aligned Nominal and Scan Measuring Elliptical Dimensions of Features
Why
The Elliptical Dimension command is useful for:

• Measuring the longest and shortest distance of an elliptical feature
How to Use
How to measure the size of an elliptical feature
2. Go to Tools > GD&T Tools > Elliptical Dimension or click the icon in the toolbar.
3. Select an edge on an elliptical feature with the Radius and Major Axis options enabled.
Options in Details
Target Entities
Target – Selects target entities to measure an elliptical dimension.
Note:

A Boundary, Edge, Section Edge, Region Edge, or Composite Selection can be a target entity and
applicable entities will be determined according to the geometry type of the target entity.
The following table shows where elliptical dimension can be applied:

Target Entity
Freeform (Ellipse)
Edge of Body OK
Note:
An elliptical dimension cannot be measured when the type of scan pair is probe point data.
Options
0.8
-0.8~0.8
-0.8, 0.8
-0.8/0.8
-0.8:0.8
Note:

properties of a target edge.
<Actual Mating>
Note:
In Space

In Material
Radius – Measures half of the distance of an elliptical feature
Major / Minor Axis – Measures the longest or shortest distance of an elliptical feature.
Fitting Options
Fitting Type – Chooses a fitting type to create a geometry from target entities.
Best Fit – Finds best-fitted geometry from target entities using the least squares fitting
method.
Min. Bound – Finds minimum-fitted geometry that contacts the nearest target entities in
Max. Bound – Finds maximum-fitted geometry that contacts the farthest target entities in

Squares Fitting
The N*Sigma method requires an N value and excludes data that is larger than N times the
standard deviation, also known as the sigma.
The Ratio method requires a ratio value and only data that falls into the selected value will be used.
The Absolute Distance method requires a distance and the fitting will be done by excluding any

data outside of that distance.
N Sigma
Constraint Options
Project On Plane – Projects a circle onto a selected plane. Select either the Specific Plane or Fit
Plane From Scan Pair methods. The Specify Plane method projects scan pair geometry onto a
specified plane. The Fit Plane From Scan Pair method projects scan pair geometry onto a plane
fitted from scan pair points.
Specify Plane
More Options

See Also
Tools > GD&T Tools > Bore Depth
What
The Bore Depth command inspects the depth of a cylindrical flat-bottomed holes or pockets and is
available for Solid or Surface faces only.
Symbol:
Aligned Nominal and Scan Measured Bore Depth of Features
Why
The Bore Depth command is useful for:
• Measuring the depth of holes or pockets
How to Use

How to measure the depth of holes or pockets
2. Go to Tools > GD&T Tools > Bore Depth or click the icon in the toolbar.
Options in Details
Target Entities
Target – Selects a target entity to measure a bore depth.
Note:
A Face, Region, or Composite Selection can be a target entity and applicable entities will be
The following table shows where bore depth can be applied:

Target Entity
Cone
Cylin
der
Face of Body OK OK
Options

0.8
-0.8~0.8
-0.8, 0.8
-0.8/0.8
-0.8:0.8
Note:
Note:
In cylindrical faces, the In-Space mating option is used for finding maximum-inscribed geometry
of a slab-like or a tube-like geometric volume that encloses scan pair points using the minimum
Note:
In cylindrical faces, the In-Material mating option is used for finding minimum-circumscribed
geometry of a slab-like or a tube-like geometric volume that encloses selected entities using the

<Actual Mating>
Direction – Defines a measuring direction.
Note:
If cylindrical face is set as the target entity, its axis is automatically determined as the measuring direction
according to the normal direction of scan pair geometry extracted from the top face. To manually set the
measuring direction, click the Direction button and then select an entity which has an axis or normal
property such as Ref. circle, Ref. slot, Ref. rectangle, Ref. polygon, Ref. plane, Ref. torus, or Planar
Face.

More Options
See Also
Tools > GD&T Tools > Counterbore
Tools > GD&T Tools > Countersink
What
The Counterbore command inspects the diameter of a cylindrical flat-bottomed holes and pockets
and is available for Solid or Surface faces only.
Symbol:
Aligned Nominal and Scan Measured Counterbore of Features
Why
The Counterbore command is useful for:
• Measuring the diameter of holes or pockets

How to Use
How to measure the diameter of holes or pockets
2. Go to Tools > GD&T Tools > Counterbore or click the icon in the toolbar.
Options in Detail
Target Entities
Target – Selects a target entity to measure a counterbore.
Note:
The following table shows where counterbore can be applied:

Target Entity
nde
Cyli

Face of Body OK
Feature Region OK
Options
0.8
-0.8~0.8
-0.8, 0.8
-0.8/0.8
-0.8:0.8
Note:
In Space – Finds maximum-inscribed geometry of a tube-like geometric volume that

In Material – Finds minimum-circumscribed geometry of a tube-like geometric volume that

encloses selected entities using the minimum separation fitting method.

<Actual Mating>
Note:
If cylindrical face is set as the target entity, its axis is automatically determined as the measuring direction
according to the normal direction of scan pair geometry extracted from the bottom face. To manually
set the measuring direction, click the Direction button and then select an entity which has an axis or
normal property such as Ref. circle, Ref. slot, Ref. rectangle, Ref. polygon, Ref. plane, Ref. torus, or
Planar Face.
More Options

See Also
What
The Countersink command inspects the maximum diameter and the apex angle of conical pockets
and is available for Solid or Surface faces only.
Symbol:
Aligned Nominal and Scan Measured Countersink of Features
Why
The Countersink command is useful for:
• Measuring the maximum diameter and apex angle of conical pockets
How to Use

How to measure the maximum diameter and apex angle of conical
pockets
2. Go to Tools > GD&T Tools > Countersink or click the icon in the toolbar.
3. Select a cylindrical face and specify an Apex Tolerance of ±90° then place the resulting
annotation onto the Model View.
Options in Detail
Target Entities
Target – Selects a target entity to measure a counterbore.
Note:
The following table shows where countersink can be applied:

Target Entity
Cone

Face of Body OK
Feature Region OK
Options
0.8
-0.8~0.8
-0.8, 0.8
-0.8/0.8
-0.8:0.8
Note:

<Actual Mating>
Note:
When a cylindrical face is set as a target entity, its axis is automatically determined as the measuring
direction according to the normal direction of scan pair geometry extracted from the top face. To
manually set the measuring direction, click the Direction button then select an entity that has an axis or
a normal property such as a Ref. circle, Ref. slot, Ref. rectangle, Ref. polygon, Ref. plane, Ref. torus, or
Planar Face.
Apex Tolerance – Specifies a tolerance value of an apex angle.
More Options

See Also
Tools > GD&T Tools > Thickness
What
The Thickness command inspects the thickness of a cylindrical tube or planar slab. It automatically
finds an opposite face when a face is selected on a model and measures the thickness between them.
The command is available for Solid or Surface faces only.
Symbol:
Aligned Nominal and Scan Measured Thickness of Features
Why
The Thickness command is useful for:
• Measuring the thickness of cylindrical tubes and planar slabs

How to Use
How to measure the thickness of cylindrical tubes and planar slabs
2. Go to Tools > GD&T Tools > Thickness or click the icon in the toolbar.
3. Select a planar face then place the resulting annotation onto the Model View.
Options in Detail
Target Entities
Target – Selects a target entity to measure thickness.
Note:
The following table shows where thickness can be applied:

Target Entity
Plan
Con
nde
Cyli
e
e
r

Options
0.8
-0.8~0.8
-0.8, 0.8
-0.8/0.8
-0.8:0.8
Note:
Note:
In planar and cylindrical faces, the In-Space mating option is used for finding maximum-inscribed
geometry of a slab-like or a tube-like geometric volume that encloses scan pair points using the

Note:
In planar and cylindrical faces, the In-Material mating option is used for finding minimum-
circumscribed geometry of a slab-like or a tube-like geometric volume that encloses selected
entities using the minimum separation fitting method.
<Actual Mating>
More Options

Tools > GD&T Tools > Position
What
The Position command verifies how much the location of a feature can deviate from its exact true
position in relation to datums or not. Position tolerance is a Geometric Dimensioning and
Tolerancing (GD&T) location control used to describe the perfect or exact location of a feature in
relation to datum references or other features.
Symbol:
Aligned Nominal and Scan Verified Position Tolerance of Features
Why
The Position command is useful for:
• Verifying how much a feature can deviate from its exact true position
• Controlling the location of a feature in relation to datum references or other features
How to Use
A. How to verify the location of a feature from its exact true position

2. Go to Tools > GD&T Tools > Position or click the icon in the toolbar.
4. Specify a Tolerance value and enable the Material Condition option.
5. Choose either MMC or LMC as the Material Condition type and specify a Dimension
Tolerance.
6. Set Datum A and Datum B.
B. How to control the location of a feature from its exact true position

Note:
This example assumes that a reference feature with size defined by a radial dimension exists
in the model and a datum has been defined on the feature.
2. Go to Tools > GD&T Tools > Position or click the icon in the toolbar.
4. Specify a Tolerance value and enable the Material Condition option.
5. Choose either MMC or LMC as the Material Condition type and specify a Dimension
Tolerance.
6. Set Datum A, Datum B, and Datum D then check the Material Condition For Datum
option.
7. Choose either MMC or LMC as the Material Condition type.

How to Inspect Pass/Fail Results
A position tolerance controls how much the location of a feature can deviate from its exact true
position with relating to datum or not. It can be applied to cylindrical or conical features such as a
hole or a boss as well as two mating planar features and spherical features.
Note:
from scan pair points and aligned according to the Datum Reference Frame. Otherwise, scan pair geometry
will be aligned so that the deviation is minimized to the nominal feature. This measurement can also be
done without the internal optimization and re-orientation of searched scan pair geometry.
How to inspect position tolerance for cylindrical or conical features

such as a hole and a boss
For cylindrical or conical features, a tolerance zone is formed with cylindrical range at the
central axis of nominal feature. The pass/fail inspection judges whether the location of a
smallest cylinder that encloses extremities of an axis of cylindrical scan pair geometry extracted
from scan pair points belongs into the tolerance zone.
How to inspect position tolerance for two mating planar features

For two parallel planar features, a tolerance zone is formed with bidirectional slab-like range at
a middle plane of two parallel planar features. The pass/fail inspection judges whether an
averaged plane of two planar scan pair geometries created scan pair points belongs into the
tolerance zone.
How to inspect position tolerance for spherical features

For spherical features, a tolerance zone is formed with spherical range at the center of spherical
feature. A position tolerance is inspected by the deviation between the position of the center
point of a nominal sphere and the position of the center point of a spherical scan pair geometry
created from scan pair points. The pass/fail inspection judges whether the deviation is within a

given tolerance.
Options in Detail
Target Entities
Target – Selects a target entity or two opposing planar entities to verify a position tolerance.
Note:
A Ref. circle, Ref. slot, Ref. rectangle, Ref. polygon, Ref. plane, Ref. cylinder, Ref. cone, Ref. sphere, Ref.
torus, Boundary, Edge, Section Vertex, Section Edge, Region Edge, Face, Region, or Composite Selection
can be a target entity and applicable entities will be determined according to the geometry type of the
target entity.
The following table shows where position tolerance can be applied:
Line (Vector)
Rectangle
Cylinder
Polygon
Regular
Target Entity
Sphere
Circle
Plane
Torus
Cone
Slot
Boundary Edge
OK OK OK OK
of Body
Boundary Edge
of Feature OK OK OK OK
Region
Ref. Geometry OK* OK*, ** OK*, ** OK* OK* OK* OK* OK* OK*
Options
Tolerance – Specifies tolerance ranges.
Use Projected Modifier – Projects a tolerance zone in a specified distance outside the physical
limits of a feature. It can be applied to a feature that has an axis, such as a cylindrical feature or a
conical feature.
Symbol:

Note:
A projected tolerance zone helps to ensure that mating parts can fit during assembly.
For example, if the size of a boss is longer than the depth of a hole while assembling the boss into the
hole, the projected tolerance zone enables the extension of the tolerance zone outside of the feature.
The following figure shows that the actual axis to the right side of the figure is within the tolerance zone
despite lying outside of the feature. As well, the actual axis shown at the left side of the figure is out of
tolerance.

annotation.
Pattern – Verifies the position of multiple patterned feature profiles at the same time.
SEPREQT – Separates a feature from a requirement group and evaluates the feature regardless
of other geometric tolerances.
Use Datum Reference Frame - Calculate a position tolerance by optimizing and re-orientating
Note:
Datum Actual Mating – Defines a mating method for datums to find a scan pair geometry
from scan pair points and set it as a Datum.
In Space – Finds minimum-fitted geometry that contacts the nearest scan pair

Note:
In planar and cylindrical faces or in circular edges, the In-Space mating option is used for
finding maximum-inscribed geometry of a slab-like or a tube-like geometric volume that
Note:
In planar and cylindrical faces or in circular edges, the In-Material mating option is used
for finding minimum-circumscribed geometry of a slab-like or a tube-like geometric
volume that encloses selected entities using the minimum separation fitting method.
in the properties of a target face or edge.
<Actual Mating>
Note:
defining a Datum for measuring GD&T, the As Nominal option uses a fitting method

Datum – Specifies datums
Note:
When a circular feature profile has been defined as a datum feature with size, a position
tolerance can be used on the datum and a material condition can be set.
Material Condition Type – Chooses a material condition type, from either

MMC also known as a Maximum Material Condition, or LMC, also known as
Least Material Condition.
Use Current Alignment – Calculate a position tolerance as the scan data is positioned, without
optimizing and re-orientating searched scan pair geometry per the datum reference frame.
Material Condition
Note:
known as a Maximum Material Condition, or LMC, also known as Least Material Condition.
Note:
input box such as:
0.8
-0.8~0.8
-0.8, 0.8
-0.8/0.8
-0.8:0.8

More Options
See Also
Tools > GD&T Tools > Flatness
Tools > GD&T Tools > Straightness
Tools > GD&T Tools > Circularity
Tools > GD&T Tools > Cylindricity
Tools > GD&T Tools > Concentricity
What
The Flatness command verifies the flatness of a planar entity. Flatness is the condition of a surface
that has all elements in one plane.
Symbol:
Aligned Nominal and Scan Verified Flatness of Features

Why
The Flatness command is useful for:
• Verifying how much a feature can deviate from the perfect form of a planar surface
How to Use
How to verify the location of a feature from its exact true position
2. Go to Tools > GD&T Tools > Flatness or click the icon in the toolbar.
4. Specify a Tolerance value.

A flatness controls how much a feature can deviate from the perfect form of a planar surface. It can
be applied to a planar face of a body or to a region. A datum is not used in this measurement.
How to inspect flatness tolerance for planar features

When flatness is measured on a planar feature, scan pair points are gathered within a slab-like
thickness zone that is formed by a Min. and Max. size on target entity. Two parallel plans that
can enclose scan pair points are constructed and its minimum thickness is defined as an actual
value.
The pass/fail inspection judges whether the minimum thickness is in the given tolerance.
Options in Detail
Target Entities
Target – Selects a target entity or two opposing planar entities to verify a position tolerance.
Note:
The following table shows where flatness can be applied:

Target Entity
Plane
Face of Body OK
Feature Region OK
Ref. Geometry OK

Options
Pattern - Measures the flatness of patterned feature profiles at the same time.
More Options
See Also
What
The Straightness command verifies the straightness of an entity that is a cylindrical, conical, or
planar geometric shape. Straightness is a condition where an element of the surface of an axis is a
straight line.
Symbol:

Aligned Nominal and Scan Verified Straightness of Features
Why
The Straightness command is useful for:
• Verifying how much a feature can deviate from a straight line
How to Use
How to verify the straightness of a feature
2. Go to Tools > GD&T Tools > Straightness or click the icon in the toolbar.
5. Select the By Section method and specify the No. Of Sections.


A straightness controls how much a feature can deviate from a straight line. It can be applied to a
planar, cylindrical, or conical face of a body or region as well as the linear boundary edge of a body
or region. A datum is not necessary in this measurement.
This measurement uses two different methods, By Section and By Median Geometry to accurately
verify straightness based on a feature shape.
How to inspect straightness tolerance for 3D features by using

sections
This method verifies surface straightness by generating sections.
When straightness is measured on a planar feature, scan pair points are gathered within a slab-
like thickness zone that is formed by a Min. and Max. size on target entity. Scan sections are
defined along a user-defined direction and all points enclosed in the section are used for
finding the minimum thickness of two parallel lines. The thickest of the minimum thicknesses
calculated on each section is defined as an actual value.
When straightness is measured on a cylindrical or conical feature, scan pair points are gathered
within a tube-like Thickness Zone that is formed by a Min. and Max. size on target entity. Scan
sections are defined along a measuring direction automatically detected from the target entity.
All points enclosed on the section are used for finding the minimum thickness of two parallel
lines. The thickest of the minimum thicknesses calculated on each section is defined as an
actual value.
The pass/fail inspection judges whether a maximum thickness is within a given tolerance.

The following figures show the definition of the By Section method on a cylinder face and a
planar face.
On Planar Face On Cylinder Face
How to inspect straightness tolerance for 3D features by using median

geometry
This method verifies surface straightness by generating Median Geometry.
When straightness is measured on a cylindrical or conical feature, scan point are gathered
within a tube-like Thickness Zone that is formed by a Min. and Max. size on target entity. Scan
sections are defined along a measuring direction automatically detected from the target entity.
The minimum cylindrical thickness of a medial line is calculated by connecting the center
points of section circles is defined as an actual value.
The pass/fail inspection judges whether the minimum cylindrical thickness is within a given
tolerance.
This method enables the use of the Material Condition option.
Note:
A Median Line is defined as a set of center points of a sectional circle and a Center Line is defined as a
connecting line between a starting point and an ending point of entity.
Options in Detail

Target Entities
Target – Selects a target entity to measure the straightness of a feature.
Note:
A Ref. plane, Ref. cylinder, Ref. cone, Ref. vector, Boundary, Edge, Section Edge, Region Edge, Face,
The following table shows where straightness can be applied:

Target Entity
Plane Cylinder Cone Line (Vector)
Boundary Edge of Feature
OK
Region
Ref. Geometry OK OK OK OK
Note:
A straightness cannot be measured when the type of scan pair is probe point data.
Options
Surface Straightness Median Geometry Straightness
Pattern – Verifies the straightness of patterned features at the same time.
By Section - Verifies surface straightness by generating sectional lines on a face of a target entity.
Specify sections by choosing either the No. Of Sections or the Distance Between options.

Note:
When a planar face is selected as a target entity, a measuring direction needs to be manually defined.
Note:
The following images show how sections are defined according to the geometric type of a target entity
when the method is set to By Section.
On Cylinder Face Surface Straightness
By Median Geometry – Verifies straightness of axis of the target entity by generating median
geometry.
Note:
The following images show how median geometry is generated from scan pair points when the method
is set to By Median Geometry.
Material Condition – Defines the material condition of a feature.
Note:

When Geometric Tolerance is defined on a feature that can be controlled by a size, the Material
Condition can be defined onto the feature within the Geometric Tolerance together with the
Dimension.
Material Condition Type – Chooses a material condition type, from either MMC also known
as a Maximum Material Condition, or LMC, also known as Least Material Condition.
Note:
input box such as:
0.8
-0.8~0.8
-0.8, 0.8
-0.8/0.8
-0.8:0.8
More Options
See Also

What
The Circularity command verifies the circularity of an entity that is a cylindrical or conical geometric
shape or a circular hole. Circularity is a condition where a feature other than a sphere has all of its
surface points intersected by any plane perpendicular to an axis that is equidistant from that axis.
Symbol:
Aligned Nominal and Scan Verified Circularity of Features
Why
The Circularity command is useful for:
• Verifying how much a feature can deviate from the perfect form of a circle
How to Use
How to verify the circularity of a feature
2. Go to Tools > GD&T Tools > Circularity or click the icon in the toolbar.

5. Select the No. Of Sections method and specify the number of sections.

A circularity controls how much a feature can deviate from the perfect form of a circle. It can be
applied to a cylindrical or conical face of a body or region as well as a circular boundary edge of a
body or region. A datum is not necessary in this measurement.
How to inspect circularity tolerance for cylindrical or conical features

When circularity is measured on a cylindrical or conical feature, it is verified by user defined
sections along the direction of scan pair geometry. Scan pair points are gathered within a tube-
like thickness zone that is formed by a Min. / Max. size on target entity. Scan sections are defined
along a measuring direction automatically detected from the target entity. All points enclosed
in the section are used for finding the minimum thickness of two concentric circles. The thickest
of the minimum thickness candidates calculated on each section is defined as an actual value.

How to inspect circularity tolerance for circular boundary edges
When circularity is measured on a circular boundary edge, scan pair points are gathered within
a doughnut-like thickness zone that is formed by a Min. and Max. size on target entity. Scan pair
points are used for finding the minimum thickness of two concentric circles and its minimum
thickness is defined as an actual value.
Options in Detail
Target Entities
Target – Selects a target entity to measure the circularity of a feature.
Note:
A Ref. cylinder, Ref. circle, Boundary, Edge, Section Edge, Region Edge, Face, Region, or Composite
Selection can be a target entity and applicable entities will be determined according to the geometry
type of the target entity.
The following table shows where circularity can be applied:

Cylinder Cone Circle
Face of Body OK OK
Ref. Geometry OK OK
Note:
A circularity cannot be measured when the type of scan pair is probe point data.
Options
Pattern – Verifies the circularity of patterned features at the same time.
No. Of Sections – Specifies a total number of sections.
Note:
The No. Of Sections option is set to 5 in the following example.
Distance Between – Specifies the distance between sections.
Note:
The Distance Between option is set to 2mm in the following example.

More Options
See Also
What
The Cylindricity command verifies the cylindricity of an entity that is a cylindrical geometric shape.
Cylindricity is a condition of the surface of a revolution that has all of its surface points equidistant
from a common axis.
Symbol:

Aligned Nominal and Scan Verified Cylindricity of Features
Why
The Cylindricity command is useful for:
• Verifying how much a feature can deviate from the perfect form of a cylindrical feature
How to Use
How to verify the cylindricity of a feature
2. Go to Tools > GD&T Tools > Cylindricity or click the icon in the toolbar.

A cylindricity controls how much a feature can deviate from the perfect form of a cylindrical feature.
It can be applied to a cylindrical face of a body or region. A datum is not necessary in this
measurement.
How to inspect cylindricity tolerance for cylindrical features

When cylindricity is measured on a cylindrical feature, scan pair points are gathered within a
tube-like cylindrical thickness zone that is formed by a Min. and Max. size on target entity. Two
coaxial cylinders that can enclose scan pair points are constructed and its minimum thickness
is defined as an actual value.
Options in Detail
Target Entities
Target – Selects a target entity to measure the cylindricity of a feature.
Note:
A Ref. cylinder, Face, Region, or Composite Selection can be a target entity and applicable entities
will be determined according to the geometry type of the target entity.
The following table shows where cylindricity can be applied:

Target Entity
Cylinder
Face of Body OK
Feature Region OK
Ref. Geometry OK
Options
Pattern – Verifies the cylindricity of patterned features at the same time.
More Options
See Also

What
The Concentricity command verifies the concentricity of an entity that is a cylindrical or conical
geometric shape. Concentricity is a condition where the median points of all diametrically opposed
elements of a figure of a revolution (or correspondingly-located elements of two or more radically
disposed features) are congruent with the axis (or center point) of a datum feature.
Symbol:
Aligned Nominal and Scan Verified Concentricity of Features
Why
The Concentricity command is useful for:
• Verifying how much the median points of multiple diameters can deviate from a specific datum
of an axis
How to Use
How to verify the concentricity of a feature
3. Define Datum A by selecting a cylindrical face.

4. Go to Tools > GD&T Tools > Concentricity or click the icon in the toolbar.

A concentricity controls how much the median points of multiple diameters can deviate from a
specific datum axis. It can be applied to a cylindrical, conical, spherical, or torus face of a body or
region as well as a circular boundary edge of a body or region, ref. cylinder, ref. circle, ref. cone, ref.
sphere, or ref. torus. This measurement requires one axis-type datum.
How to inspect concentricity for cylindrical features

When concentricity is measured on a cylindrical feature, scan pair points are gathered within a
tube-like thickness zone that is formed by a Min. and Max. size on target entity. Scan pair points
are used for finding scan pair geometry. The location of scan pair geometry will be optimized
to the nominal geometry according to the optimizing position and orientation method so that
the deviation between them can be minimized. The deviation between the axis of scan pair

geometry and a datum axis is defined as an actual value.
The pass/fail inspection judges whether the deviation is within a given tolerance.
Note:
Optimizing Position and Orientation method
When Geometric Tolerance is measured with specific datums on a feature in 3D scan-based inspection,
corresponding scan pair geometry is extracted from qualified scan pair points and its location is optimized
to the position and the orientation of the nominal geometry so that the deviation between them is
minimized to accurately analyze feature based on the specified datums. This is referred to as the Optimizing
Position and Orientation method. This method is used when the Orientation-type Geometric Tolerance
(Perpendicularity, Angularity, Parallelism) and Location-type Geometric Tolerance (Position Tolerance,
Concentricity, Symmetry) are measured.
The following figures show how the position and orientation of extracted scan pair geometry are optimized
while measuring Orientation-type Geometric Tolerances and Location-type Geometric Tolerances.
Step State Operation
Coordinates of a Datum Reference Frame (DRF) of

nominal geometry and scan pair geometry are
composed of datums.
1 Pn : Position of Nominal Geometry
Ps : Position of Scan Pair Geometry
Tn : Nominal DRF
Ts : Scan DRF

The coordinates of scan pair geometry defined by DRF
moves to the coordinate of nominal geometry.
2
Ps’ : Moved Position of Scan Pair Geometry
Degrees of freedom with no constraints (residual DOF)

is defined according to a combination of datums and
the position and the orientation of scan pair geometry
is optimized using the residual DOF so that the
deviation between them can be minimized.
3 The deviation between the positions of those
geometries is calculated as actual value.
If the Material Condition for Datum has been defined in

a datum, the position and the orientation of nominal
geometry will be optimized according to the Material
Condition for Datum and the deviation between the
positions of those geometries will be calculated as an
4
actual value.
Pn’ : Optimized Position of Nominal Geometry
Options in Detail
Target Entities
Target – Selects a target entity to measure the concentricity of a feature.
Note:
A Ref. circle, Ref. cylinder, Ref. cone, Ref. sphere, Ref. torus, Boundary, Edge, Section Edge, Region Edge,
Face, Region, or Composite Selection can be a target entity and applicable entities will be determined

The following table shows where concentricity can be applied:

Target Entity
Cylinder Cone Sphere Torus Circle
Face of Body OK OK OK OK
Feature Region OK OK OK OK
Ref. Geometry OK OK OK OK OK
Options
Use Projected Modifier – Projects the tolerance zone over a specified distance outside the
physical limits of a feature. It can be applied to the feature which has axis such as cylindrical feature
and conical feature. Specify the projection distance.
Symbol:
Note:
Projected tolerance zones help to ensure that mating parts can fit during assembly.
hole, the projected tolerance zone enables extending the tolerance zone outside of the feature.
The following figure shows that the actual axis shown at the right side of the figure is within a required
tolerance zone in spite of lying outside of the feature. As well, the actual axis shown at the left side of the
figure is out of tolerance.

annotation.
Pattern – Verifies the concentricity of patterned features at the same time.
Note:

Note:
More Options
See Also

Tools > GD&T Tools > Parallelism
What
The Parallelism command verifies the parallelism of an entity that is a planar or cylindrical
geometric shape. Parallelism is a condition where a surface or center plane is equidistant at all points
from a datum plane, which is considered as a special case of angularity.
Symbol:
Aligned Nominal and Scan Verified Parallelism of Features
Why
The Parallelism command is useful for:
• Verifying how much a feature can deviate from an orientation parallel to a specific datum
How to Use
How to verify the parallelism of a feature from a specific datum

3. Define Datum A by selecting a planar face.
4. Go to Tools > GD&T Tools > Parallelism or click the icon in the toolbar.

A parallelism controls how much a feature can deviate from an orientation parallel to a specific
datum. It can be applied to a planar, cylindrical, or conical face of a body or region as well as a circular
boundary edge of a body or region, ref. vector, ref. cylinder, or ref. cone. This measurement requires

one datum.
How to inspect parallelism tolerance for 3D features

When parallelism is measured on a target feature, scan pair points are gathered within a
thickness zone that is formed by a Min. / Max. size on target entity. Scan pair points are
constrained by the defined datum. Two parallel planes that can enclose scan pair points are
constructed and its minimum thickness is defined as an actual value.
Options in Detail
Target Entities
Target – Selects a target entity to measure the parallelism of a feature.
Note:
A Ref. plane, Ref. vector, Ref. cylinder, Ref. cone, Boundary, Edge, Section Edge, Region Edge, Face,
The following table shows where parallelism can be applied:

Target Entity Line

Plane Cylinder Cone
(Vector)
Ref. Geometry OK *
OK *
OK *
OK*

Options
Note:
The following figures show how parallelism sets a tolerance zone based on the geometry type of target
features and reference datums.
Axial Features to an Axial Datum
Planar Features to an Axial Datum
Axial Feature to a Planar Datum
Planar Features to a Planar Datum

Symbol:
Note:

annotation.
Pattern – Verifies the parallelism of patterned features at the same time.
Material Condition For Datum – Defines the material condition for a feature.
Note:
When geometric tolerance is defined on a feature that can be controlled by size, the material condition
can be defined for the feature by combining the geometric tolerance with the dimensions.
Material Condition Type – Choose either MMC (Maximum Material Condition) or LMC
(Least Material Condition) types for datum.
Note:
Maximum Material Condition (MMC) – The condition in which a feature of size contains the
maximum amount of material within the stated limits of size (e.g., minimum hole diameter,
maximum shaft diameter)
Least Material Condition (LMC) – The condition in which a feature of size contains the least
amount of material within the stated limits of size (e.g., maximum hole diameter, minimum shaft

diameter)
input box such as:
0.8
-0.8~0.8
-0.8, 0.8
-0.8/0.8
-0.8:0.8
Note:
When a circular feature profile has been defined as a datum feature with size, a position tolerance
can be used on the datum and a material condition can be set.
More Options
See Also
Tools > GD&T Tools > Perpendicularity
Tools > GD&T Tools > Angularity
Tools > GD&T Tools > Runout
Tools > GD&T Tools > Total Runout
Tools > GD&T Tools > Line Profile
Tools > GD&T Tools > Surface Profile
Tools > GD&T Tools > Symmetry

What
The Perpendicularity command verifies the perpendicularity of an entity that is a planar or
cylindrical geometric shape. Perpendicularity is a condition where a surface, center plane, or axis is
at a ninety degree right angle to a datum plane or axis.
Symbol:
Aligned Nominal and Scan Verified Perpendicularity of Features
Why
The Perpendicularity command is useful for:
• Verifying how much a surface, axis, or plane can deviate from a ninety degree angle
How to Use
How to verify the perpendicularity of a feature from a specific datum

4. Go to Tools > GD&T Tools > Perpendicularity or click the icon in the toolbar.

A perpendicularity controls how much a surface, axis, or plane can deviate from a ninety degree
right angle. It can be applied to a planar, cylindrical, or conical face of a body or region as well as a
linear boundary edge of a body or region, ref. vector, ref. cylinder, or ref. cone. This measurement
requires one datum.
How to inspect perpendicularity tolerance for 3D features

When perpendicularity is measured on a target feature, scan pair points are gathered within a
Options in Detail
Target Entities
Target – Selects a target entity to measure the perpendicularity of a feature.
Note:
The following table shows where perpendicularity can be applied:

Target Entity Line

Plane Cylinder Cone
(Vector)
Ref. Geometry OK *
OK *
OK *
OK*
Options

Note:
The following figures show how perpendicularity sets a tolerance zone based on the geometry type of
target features and reference datums.
Axial Features to a Planar Datum
Axial Features to an Axial Datum
Symbol:
Note:


annotation.
Pattern – Verifies the perpendicularity of patterned features at the same time.
Note:
Note:
maximum shaft diameter).
diameter).
input box such as:
0.8
-0.8~0.8

-0.8, 0.8
-0.8/0.8
-0.8:0.8
Note:
When a cylindrical or conical feature profile has been defined as a datum feature with size, a
position tolerance can be used on the datum and a material condition can be set.
More Options
See Also
What

The Angularity command verifies the angularity of an entity that is a planar or cylindrical geometric
shape. Angularity is a condition where a surface, center plane, or axis is at an angle other than a
ninety degree angle from a datum plane or axis.
Symbol:
Aligned Nominal and Scan Verified Angularity of Features
Why
The Angularity command is useful for:
• Verifying how much a surface, axis, or plane can deviate from an angle described in nominal
specifications
How to Use
How to verify the angularity of a feature from a specific datum

4. Go to Tools > GD&T Tools > Angularity or click the icon in the toolbar.

An angularity controls how much a surface, axis, or plane can deviate from an angle that is not a
ninety degree angle as described in nominal specifications. It can be applied to a planar, cylindrical,
or conical face of a body or region as well as a linear boundary edge of a body or region, ref. vector,
ref. cylinder, or ref. cone. This measurement requires more than one datum.
How to inspect angularity tolerance for 3D features

When angularity is measured on a target feature, scan pair points are gathered within a

Options in Detail
Target Entities
Target – Selects a target entity to measure the parallelism of a feature.
Note:
The following table shows where angularity can be applied:
Target Entity Line

Plane Cylinder Cone
(Vector)
Ref. Geometry OK *, **
OK *, **
OK *, **
OK*, **
Options

Note:
The following figures show how parallelism sets a tolerance zone based on the geometry type of target
features and reference datums.
Axial Feature to a Axial Datum
Axial Feature to a Planar Datum
Axial Feature to an Axial Datum and Planar

Datum
Axial Feature to dual Planar Datums

Planar Features to an Axial Datum and Planar

Datum
Planar Features to dual Planar Datums

Symbol:
Note:

annotation.
Pattern – Verifies the angularity of patterned features at the same time.
Note:
Note:
maximum shaft diameter).
diameter).

input box such as:
0.8
-0.8~0.8
-0.8, 0.8
-0.8/0.8
-0.8:0.8
Note:
When a cylindrical or conical feature profile has been defined as a datum feature with size, a
position tolerance can be used on the datum and a material condition can be set.
More Options
See Also

What
The Runout command verifies the runout of an entity that is a planar or cylindrical geometric shape.
Runout is a composite deviation from a desired form and orientation of a part surface during a
sectional revolution when performing a full 360-degree rotation of the part on a datum axis.
Symbol:
Aligned Nominal and Scan Verified Runout of Features
Why
The Runout command is useful for:
• Verifying normal distances for all points on circular sections of the surfaces of a revolution
relative to a specified datum axis
How to Use
How to verify the runout of a feature from a specific datum

4. Go to Tools > GD&T Tools > Runout or click the icon in the toolbar.

A runout controls the relative normal distances for all points on circular sections of the surfaces of a
revolution relative to a specified datum axis. It can be applied to a planar, cylindrical, or conical face
of a body or region. This measurement requires one axis-type datum.
How to inspect runout tolerance for revolved features

When runout is measured on a revolving feature, scan pair points are gathered around sections
within a ribbon-like thickness zone that is formed by a Min. / Max. size on target entity. All scan
pair points enclosed in the sections will be used for calculating the deviation along the datum

axis. The maximum deviation is defined as an actual value.
The pass/fail inspection judges whether a maximum deviation is within a given tolerance.
Note:
When a top or bottom face of a cylindrical feature is selected as a target entity, scan points will be
gathered on the cylindrical sections within a cylindrical ribbon-like thickness zone that is formed by
defining a Min. / Max. size. Deviation will be calculated on each section along the datum axis. The
maximum deviation is defined as an actual value.
Coaxial section cylinders to datum direction
When a conical feature is selected as a target entity, scan points will be gathered on the conic sections
within a conical ribbon-like thickness zone that is formed by defining a Min. / Max. size. Deviation will be
calculated on each section along the datum axis. The maximum deviation is defined as an actual value.

A section cone with 90 degrees on the surface
Options in Detail
Target Entities
Target – Selects a target entity to measure the runout of a feature.
Note:
A Ref. Plane, Ref. Cylinder, Ref. Cone, Face, Region, or Composite Selection can be a target entity and
The following table shows where runout can be applied:

Target Entity
Plane Cylinder Cone
Note:
A runout cannot be measured when the type of scan pair is probe point data.

Options
Pattern – Verifies the runout of patterned features at the same time.
Note:
The No. Of Sections option is set to 5 in the following example.
Distance Between – Specifies the distance between sections.
Note:
The Distance Between option is set to 2mm in the following example.
More Options
See Also
What
The Total Runout command verifies the total runout of an entity that is a planar or cylindrical
geometric shape. Total runout is a composite deviation from a desired form and orientation of a part
surface during a sectional revolution when performing a full 360-degree rotation of the part on a
datum axis. Total runout inspects a whole surface.
Symbol:
Aligned Nominal and Scan Verified Total Runout of Features
Why
The Total Runout command is useful for:
• Verifying normal distances for all scan pair points of a specified nominal face or region of a
revolution, relative to a specified datum axis
How to Use
How to verify the total runout of a feature from a specific datum
4. Go to Tools > GD&T Tools > Runout or click the icon in the toolbar.

A total runout controls the relative normal distances for all scan pair points of a specified nominal
face or region of a revolution relative to a specified datum axis. It can be applied to a planar,
cylindrical, or conical face of a body or region. This measurement requires one axis-type datum.
How to inspect total runout tolerance for revolved features

When total runout is measured on a revolving feature, scan pair points are gathered within a
tube-like thickness zone that is formed by a Min. and Max. size on target entity. All scan pair
points enclosed in the thickness zone will be used for calculating the deviation along the datum
axis. The maximum deviation is defined as an actual value.
The pass/fail inspection judges whether a maximum deviation is within a given tolerance.
Note:
When a top or bottom face of a cylindrical feature is selected as a target entity, scan points will be
gathered on the flat face within a slab-like thickness zone that is formed by defining a Min. / Max. size.
Deviation will be calculated along the datum axis. The maximum deviation is defined as an actual value.
When a conical feature is selected as a target entity, scan points will be gathered on the conical face
within a conical tube-like thickness zone that is formed by defining a Min. / Max. size. Deviation will be
calculated on each section along the datum axis. The maximum deviation is defined as an actual value.

Options in Detail
Target Entities
Target – Selects a target entity to measure the total runout of a feature.
Note:
A Ref. Plane, Ref. Cylinder, Ref. Cone, Face, Region, or Composite Selection can be a target entity and
The following table shows where total runout can be applied:

Target Entity
Plane Cylinder Cone
Options
Note:
The tolerance for total runout is similar to cylindricity, but its tolerance zone is determined by a Datum.
The following figures compare the tolerance zone of cylindricity to total runout and show how total
runout sets a tolerance zone according to the combination of measuring features and a datum when a
cylindrical feature is selected as the target entity.

Tolerance Zone of Cylindricity Tolerance Zone of Runout
Pattern – Verifies the runout of patterned features at the same time.
More Options
See Also
What
The Line Profile command verifies the line profiles of entities. The Line Profile command specifies a
uniform boundary along a true sectional profile that the elements of the surface must lie upon.

Symbol:
Aligned Nominal and Scan Verified Line Profile of Features
Why
The Line Profile command is useful for:
• Verifying how much a sectional line can deviate from the size, form, orientation, and location of
planar sections of surfaces that are linear, rotational, or extruded
How to Use
How to verify the line profile of a feature from specific datums
3. Define Datum A, B, and C by selecting a planar faces.

4. Go to Tools > GD&T Tools > Line Profile or click the icon in the toolbar.
5. Select a freeform face then place the resulting annotation onto the Model View.
Specify a Tolerance value for Datums A, B, and C.
Select a Ref. Plane as a Base Plane to define a measuring direction.

A line profile controls how much a sectional line can deviate from the size, form, orientation, and
location of planar sections of surfaces that are linear, rotational, or extruded. It can be applied to a
planar, cylindrical, conical, freeform, spherical, or tori face of a body or region. This measurement can
have up to three datums.
Note:
from scan pair points and aligned according to the Datum Reference Frame on a sectional profile.

This measurement can also be done without the internal optimization and re-orientation of searched scan
pair geometry.
How to inspect line profile tolerance for 3D features

When a line profile is measured without datums, scan points are freely aligned on a target entity.
When a line profile is measured with datums, scan points are aligned by constraining to the
defined datums. After aligning scan points, scan pair points are gathered within a tube-like
thickness zone that is formed by a Min. and Max. size on the target entity. Scan sections are
defined along a measurement direction and all points enclosed on the section are used for
finding the minimum thickness of two offset lines. The thickest of the minimum thicknesses
calculated on each section is defined as an actual value.
Options in Detail
Target Entities
Target – Selects a target entity to measure a line profile of a feature.
Note:
A Ref. plane, Ref. cylinder, Ref. cone, Ref. sphere, Ref. torus, Face, Region, or Composite Selection
target entity.
The following table shows where line profile can be applied:

**) Available only for an extrusion shape and a revolution shape
Target Entity
Plane Cylinder Cone Sphere Torus Freeform
Face of Body OK OK OK OK OK OK**

Feature Region OK OK OK OK OK OK**
Ref. Geometry OK* OK* OK* OK* OK*
Options
Pattern – Verifies the line profile of patterned features at the same time.
Use Datum Reference Frame - Calculate a line profile by optimizing and re-orientating searched
scan pair geometry per the datum reference frame.
Note:
In Space – Finds minimum-fitted geometry that contacts the nearest scan pair points
in the normal direction from the center point of the best-fitted geometry that was
found using the least square fitting method.
Note:
In planar and cylindrical faces, the In-Space mating option is used for finding maximum-
inscribed geometry of a slab-like or a tube-like geometric volume that encloses scan pair
Note:

circumscribed geometry of a slab-like or a tube-like geometric volume that encloses
<Actual Mating>
Note:
Note:
Condition.

Use Current Alignment – Calculate a line profile as the scan data is positioned, without optimizing
and re-orientating searched pair geometry per the datum reference frame.
Material Condition
Note:
Note:
input box such as:
0.8
-0.8~0.8
-0.8, 0.8
-0.8/0.8
-0.8:0.8
Extrusion Shape – Defines a measuring direction when a target feature is an extrusion shape.
Revolution Shape – Defines a measuring axis when a target feature is a revolution shape.
Add Section Of Peak Position – Adds a section at a peak position of a deviation.
Direction – Defines a custom measuring direction.
Note:
When a directional feature is not selected, the application will automatically calculate an extrusion
direction or a revaluation axis by analyzing the geometric shape of the target feature.

Unidirectional Tolerance Zone – Defines a unidirectional tolerance zone. Positive or Negative
directions are used to define a single direction for a measurement.
Note:
The tolerance zone is applied to the single direction from the face according to the definition.
Without Unidirectional Positive Tolerance Zone Negative Tolerance Zone

Tolerance Zone
Display Option
Whisker Multiplier – Specifies a whisker multiplier or set whisker size by adjusting the slider
between x1 to x1000.
Whisker Display Ratio – Specify the whisker display ratio or set the whisker display ratio by
adjusting the slider between from 1% to 100%.
More Options

See Also
What
The Surface Profile command verifies the surface profiles of entities. The Surface Profile command
specifies a uniform boundary along a surface that the elements of the surface must lie upon.
Symbol:
Aligned Nominal and Scan Verified Surface Profile of Features

Why
The Surface Profile command is useful for:
• Verifying how much a face can deviate from the size, form, orientation, and location of planar
and compound curve surfaces described in nominal data specifications
How to Use
How to verify the line profile of a feature from specific datums
3. Define Datum A, B, and C by selecting a planar faces.
4. Go to Tools > GD&T Tools > Surface Profile or click the icon in the toolbar.
5. Select a freeform face then place the resulting annotation onto the Model View.
Specify a Tolerance value for Datums A, B, and C.

A surface profile controls how much a face can deviate from the size, form, orientation, and location
of planar and compound curve sections of surfaces described in nominal data specifications. It can
be applied to a planar, cylindrical, conical, freeform, spherical, or tori face of a body or region. This
measurement can have up to three datums.
Note:
from scan pair points and aligned according to the Datum Reference Frame. Otherwise, scan pair geometry
will be aligned so that the deviation is minimized to the nominal feature. This measurement can also be
done without the internal optimization and re-orientation of searched scan pair geometry.
How to inspect surface profile tolerance for 3D features

When a surface profile is measured without datums, scan points are freely aligned on target
entity. When a surface profile is measured with datums, scan points are aligned by constraining
to the defined datum. After aligning scan points, scan pair points are gathered within a tube-
like thickness zone that is formed by a Min. and Max. size on the target entity. Offset surfaces
that enclose scan pair points are constructed and its minimum thickness is defined as an actual
value.

Options in Detail
Target Entities
Target – Selects a target entity to measure a surface profile of a feature.
Note:
A Ref. plane, Ref. cylinder, Ref. cone, Ref. sphere, Ref. torus, Face, Region, or Composite Selection
target entity.
The following table shows where surface profile can be applied:

Target Entity
Plane Cylinder Cone Sphere Torus Freeform
Face of Body OK OK OK OK OK OK
Feature Region OK OK OK OK OK OK
Ref. Geometry OK* OK* OK* OK* OK*
Options
Pattern – Verifies the surface profile of patterned features at the same time.
Use Datum Reference Frame - Calculate a surface profile by optimizing and re-orientating
Note:

In Space – Finds minimum-fitted geometry that contacts the nearest scan pair points
in the normal direction from the center point of the best-fitted geometry that was
found using the least square fitting method.
Note:
In planar and cylindrical faces, the In-Space mating option is used for finding maximum-
inscribed geometry of a slab-like or a tube-like geometric volume that encloses scan pair
Note:
circumscribed geometry of a slab-like or a tube-like geometric volume that encloses
<Actual Mating>
Note:

Note:
Condition.
Use Current Alignment – Calculate a surface profile as the scan data is positioned, without
optimizing and re-orientating searched pair geometry per the datum reference frame.
Material Condition
Note:
Note:
input box such as:
0.8
-0.8~0.8

-0.8, 0.8
-0.8/0.8
-0.8:0.8
More Options
Use Tolerance Color – Displays tolerance colors defined by a color map (default green) that helps
to verify areas that are within a tolerance zone.
See Also
What
The Symmetry command verifies the symmetry of entities that face each other. Symmetry is a three-
dimensional geometric tolerance that controls how much the median points between two features
can deviate from a specified axis or center plane.
Symbol:

Aligned Nominal and Scan Verified Symmetry of Features
Why
The Symmetry command is useful for:
• Verifying how much a feature can deviate from the form, orientation, and location of a derived
median plane of slab and slot-like features relative to a nominally coplanar datum plane
How to Use
How to verify the symmetry of a feature from a specific datum
1 Prepare a ref. plane to be used as a datum plane in the middle of a slab-like feature.
.
Note:
For more information about creating Ref. planes, go to Insert > Ref. geometry > Plane.
2 Go to Insert > 3D GD&T or click the icon in the toolbar in the 3D GD&T mode.
.
3 Go to Tools > GD&T Tools > Datum or click the icon in the toolbar.
.
4 Define Datum A by selecting the previously created ref. plane.
.

5 Go to Tools > GD&T Tools > Symmetry or click the icon in the toolbar.
.
6 Select two planar faces then place the resulting annotation onto the Model View.
. Specify a Tolerance value for Datum A.

.

A symmetry controls how much a feature can deviate from the size, form, orientation, and location
of a derived median plane of slab and slot-like features relative to a nominally coplanar datum plane.
It can be applied to a planar face of a body or region or linear boundary edges of a body or region.
This measurement requires one datum.
How to inspect symmetry tolerance for 3D features

The actual value is the thickness of the thinnest slab-like zone that has a center plane that
coincides with a referenced datum plane, and contains all scan pair points in the derived
median plane.
The pass/fail inspection judges whether a minimum thickness of two parallel planes is within a
given tolerance.

Options in Detail
Target Entities
Target – Selects two opposable entities to measure the symmetry between them.
Note:
A Ref. plane, Boundary, Edge, Section Edge, Region Edge, Face, Region, or Composite Selection can
be a target entity and applicable entities will be determined according to the geometry type of the
target entity.
The following table shows where symmetry can be applied:

Target Entity
Plane Line (Vector)
Face of Body OK
Feature Region OK
Ref. Geometry OK
Options

Note:
In planar, the In-Space mating option is used for finding maximum-inscribed geometry of a slab-
like or a tube-like geometric volume that encloses scan pair points using the minimum separation
fitting method.
Note:
In planar, the In-Material mating option is used for finding minimum-circumscribed geometry of
a slab-like or a tube-like geometric volume that encloses selected entities using the minimum
<Actual Mating>

Note:
from scan pair points and aligned according to the Datum Reference Frame, or DRF, on a sectional profile.
More Options
See Also
7.5.7. Tools > Regroup 3D GD&Ts
What
The Regroup 3D GD&Ts command classifies existing GD&Ts and generates new groups.

Aligned Nominal and Scan Regrouped 3D GD&Ts
Why
The Regroup 3D GD&Ts command is useful for:
• Classifying existing GD&Ts
How to Use
How to classify existing GD&Ts
1 Go to Tools > Regroup 3D GD&Ts or click the icon in the toolbar.
.
2 Click the Add New GD&T Feature button to add a new GD&T feature.
.
3 Select GD&Ts in the Model View to register a second group, 3D GD&T2.
.

.
5 Check that the classified GD&Ts are registered in the new 3D GD&T2 inspection feature
. in the Inspection Feature tree.
Options in Detail
Auto Regroup GD&Ts – Automatically regroups GD&T according to its viewpoints.
Add New GD&T Feature – Creates a new GD&T group.
Merge This Feature and Upper Feature – Appends a current group of GD&Ts to an upper
group.
GD&Ts To Exclude – Removes selected GD&Ts.
7.5.8. Tools > Organize Dimensions
What
The Organize Dimensions command enables users to automatically organize result annotations of
linear dimensions to the outside of the model in order not to be overlapped each other in the view.
Overlapped Dimension Annotations Organized Dimension Annotations
Note:
This command works in both 2D section view and 3D model view.
Why
The Organized Dimensions command is useful for:
• Organizing dimension annotations to the outside of model

• Rearranging the postion of dimension annotations not to be overlapped each other
How to Use
A. How to rearrange annotations of Linear Dimensions in 2D section
view
1. Go to Section mode.
2. Measure a linear dimension between section polylines then place the annotation on 2D
section view.
3. Repeat the above processes.
4. When the measurements are finished, go to Tools > Organize Dimensions.

5. Select the created annotations.
6. Check the preview results then click the OK button to confirm the results.
Overlapped Annotations Organized Annotations
B. How to organize dimension annotations that were imported with

PMI
1. Go to File > PMI Import Wizard > Siemens NX.
2. Import Siemens NX file with PMI into the application and check the results.
3. Go to Tools > Organize Dimensions to organize the imported annotations in 3D Model

View.
4. Select the annotations.

5. Check the preview results then click the OK button to confirm the results.
Overlapped Annotations Organized Annotations
Options in Detail
Linear Dimensions – Shows the selected target annotation list.
Note:
The selected target annotations can be removed from the list by pressing “Del” key on your keyboard.
Distance Between Annotations – Specifies a distance between annotations. The distance can
be expanded by controlling the slider.

Minimum Distance Maximum Distance
Note:
While the Enable Realtime Preview button is working, the preview results will be displayed in real
time when the slider is moved.
7.6. LiveInspect
LiveInspect enables real-time inspection. Probed points can be used to inspect a model by aligning
it, measuring dimensions, as well as other functions.
• Play LiveInspect Process

Performs streamlined inspections based on pre-planned inspection requirements.
• LiveAlign
Aligns a hardware coordinate system to a part being measured.
• LiveCapture
Captures measurement data by using a scanning and probing device.
• LiveDimension
Creates dimensions from a physical part in real-time by using a probing device.
• LiveGeometry
Creates geometries from a physical part in real-time by using probing device.
• Settings
Modifies the settings for capturing data, controlling views, etc.
• Position Device
Maintains a coordinate system after moving a device.
Supported Devices in LiveInspect

LiveInspect supports various measurement devices in multiple operating system versions.
Manufacturer Measurement Device 32bit 64bit Web Site

AICON MoveInspect ✔ ✔ www.aicon3d.com
Creaform Optical CMM ✔ ✔ www.creaform3d.com
FARO FaroArm/ScanArm ✔ ✔ www.faro.com

Kreon Zephyr/Aquilion/Solano ✔ ✔ www.kreon3d.com
LDI SLP Series ✔ ✔ www.laserdesign.com
metrology.leica-
Leica T-Scan TS50 ✔ ✔
geosystems.com
NDI ScanTRAK ✔ ✔ www.ndigital.com
Nikon
Handheld ✔ ✔ www.nikonmetrology.com
Metrology
Perceptron ScanWorks ✔ ✔ www.perceptron.com
Absolute ✔ ✔
Romer Infinite/Stinger ✔ ✔ www.romer.com
Sigma/Omega ✔
Steinbichler T-Scan 3/CS ✔ ✔ www.steinbichler.de
How can LiveInspect control a scanner?

LiveInspect technology uses three function controls. The functions of the buttons will vary between
different types and manufacturers of scanners.
Button on
Function
LiveInspect
Laser Scanning - Resumes and pauses scanning.
A
Probing – Picks a point.
Laser Scanning - Stops scanning.
B
Probing - Creates a probe point entity.
Laser Scanning - Not Available
C Probing – Cancels the creation of a probe point or a probe
session.
To perform the A, B and C functions of LiveInspect as described above, use the buttons on each
scanner device specified in the following table.
Manufacturer Measurement Device Button
There are Three buttons on the hardware.
Probing
Function A: Click the middle button.
AICON MoveInspect
Function B: Click the buttons on the left side.
Function C: Press the buttons on the right side.
There are Three buttons on the hardware.

Probing
Creaform Optical CMM
Function B: Click the buttons on the left side.
Function C: Press the buttons on the right side.
FARO FaroArm Scanning

ScanArm Function A: Click the green button.
Function B: Click the red button.
Probing
Function A: Click the green button.
Function C: Press the red button for a few
seconds.
The function control varies according to the arm

type. For a Cimcore arm, the function control is
same with that of a Perceptron arm.
Scanning
Zephyr Function A: Click the middle button.
Kreon Aquilion Function B: Click the buttons on both sides.
Solano Probing
Function B: Click the buttons on sides.
Function C: Press the buttons on the sides for a
few seconds.
The function control varies according to the arm
type.
Scanning
LDI SLP Series
Probing
Function C: Press the red button for a few
seconds.
There is a single button on the hardware.
Scanning
Leica T-Scan TS50
Function A: Hold the button to resume and
release the button to pause.
There is a single button on the hardware.
Scanning
LDI ScanTRAK Function B: Click the middle button.
Probing
Function A: Stay on a physical part for a few
seconds.
Nikon Handheld There are Three buttons on the hardware.

Metrology Scanning
Function B: Click the buttons on both sides.
Probing
Function A: Click one of the four buttons on the
inside.
Function B: Click the button on the outside.
For a Cimcore arm, the function control is as

follows:
Scanning
Function A: Click the middle button
Perceptron ScanWorks
Probing
Function C: Press the buttons on both sides for a
few seconds.
Absolute There are three buttons on the hardware.

Probing
Romer Infinite/Stinger
Function C: Press the buttons on both sides for a
Sigma/Omega few seconds.

Scanning
Function A: Hold the button to resume and
release the button to pause.
Probing
Steinbichler T-Scan 3/CS
Function A: Click the button on the application
screen.
Function B: Click the button on the application
screen.
7.6.1. LiveInspect > Play LiveInspect Process
What
The Play LiveInspect Process command performs streamlined inspections based on pre-planned
inspection requirements. It is only available when nominal data exists with probable inspection
features.
Why
The Play LiveInspect Process command is useful for:
• Inspecting features using pre-defined inspection in real-time.
How to Use
A. How to inspect using pre-defined datum alignment and GD&T of
nominal data
2. Select a device and click the Connect button.
3. Go to LiveInspect > Play LiveInspect Process, or click the Inspect button.
4. Datum Alignment will begin. Probe points on the physical part to measure points on
the first planar face.

Note:
This process assumes that the Datum Alignment and GD&Ts are already defined with nominal
data in the Inspection Feature Tree.
5. Press the B button on the probing device to confirm the first face.
6. Repeat to measure points on the second and third planar faces.
7. After measuring the third face, probe points to validate the alignment.
8. Press the B button on the probing device and click the Next Inspection Features
option.
9. The remaining faces to be probed will be displayed in blue. Probe points using the A
button on the probing device while following the on-screen guidance arrow, and press
the B button to confirm.
10. As the blue faces are probed, the pre-defined GD&T will solve.
B. How to place another physical part to the previous measuring

position

Note:
This process begins by assuming that a LiveInspect process with a physical part has been
completed.
1. Replace the measuring part with another part and position it on the same position.
2. Check the Inspection Feature Tree.
Note:
When restarting the LiveInspect with another part, all definitions of coordinate axises and the
direction of each coordinate axis will be reused the same as previous process. For more
information about the Coordinate Alignment feature, go to Insert > Align > Coordinate.
3. Go to LiveInspect > Play LiveInspect Process, or click the Inspect button.
4. Select the Reset Inspection Data option to reset all data acquired from the previous
process.
5. Select the Do Not Save option.
Note:
All results in the previous inspection need to be saved, select the Save Inspection And
Report or Save Inspection Only option.
6. Probe points on the physical part to create the first plane and assign its direction to the
first coordinate axis.

7. Press the B button on the probing device to confirm the results.
8. Repeat the Step 6 to 7 to create the other planes and assign their directions to the
second and third coordinate axises.
9. After measuring the third face, the LiveInspect will ask you to go to the next stage to
measure other inspection features. Select the Next Inspection Features option to
continue.
Options in Detail
Note:
The InfoCenter for the Play LiveInspect Process is the same as the InfoCenter of a pre-defined inspection. Refer
to other chapters of LiveInspect for more details.
7.6.2. LiveInspect > LiveAlign
What
The LiveAlign command aligns a hardware coordinate system to a part being measured. It features
various alignment methods such as Interactive alignment and advanced alignment for inspection
without nominal data as well as Auto, Best-Fit, Adaptive, Datum, RPS, 3-2-1, and Transform. It can
utilize both scan data and contact measurements for inspection with nominal data.
Why
The LiveAlign command is useful for:
• Aligning a hardware coordinating system to a part in real-time.
How to Use
A. How to align a hardware coordinate system to a part using Datum
Alignment with nominal data
3. Go to LiveInspect > LiveAlign, or click the Align button.
4. Click Datum for datum alignment.
5. Select three planar faces of nominal data as Datum Pair.
7. Measure three points for the first datum pair.
8. Press the B button on the probing device to confirm the first datum pair.
9. Measure points for the second and the third datum pairs the remaining highlighted
faces on the nominal data.
10. Press the B button on the probing device to validate the alignment.
11. Probe points to check deviation results.
12. Press the B button on the probing device to exit LiveInspect.

14. Check the Datum Alignment inspection feature on the Inspection Feature tree.
B. How to align a physical model to global coordinates using the

Interactive 3-2-1 alignment without nominal data
3. Go to LiveInspect > LiveAlign, or click the Align button.
4. Select the Interactive Method for interactive 3-2-1 alignment.
5. Probe points on the top planar face of the physical model to create a Z-axis.
6. Press the B button to confirm the first plane.
7. Click the Z-axis button.
8. Click the Plus button to determine the positive direction of the Z-axis.
9. Probe points on the second planar face of the physical model to create the Y-axis.

10. Press the B button to confirm the second plane.
11. Click the Y-axis button.
12. Click the Plus button to determine the positive direction of the Y-axis.
13. Probe points on the third planar face of the physical model to create the X-axis.
14. Click the OK option.
Options in Detail (InfoCenter)

The InfoCenter for the Alignment process
1. Process Info – Displays the current process.
2. Step Info – Shows the name of an alignment.

3. Current Target Info – Indicates the current measurement target.
4. Total Target Info – Indicates the total measurement target.
5. H/W Coordinates Info – Shows current position of a probing device

.
The InfoCenter of Validation after aligning
2. Step Info – Indicates the current inspection step.
3. Deviation Info – Shows deviation results in the X, Y, Z, and minimum distance (3D) axes.
4. H/W Coordinates Info – Shows the current position of a probing device.
7.6.3. LiveInspect > LiveCapture
What
The LiveCapture command captures measurement data by using a scanning or probing device.
Why
The LiveCapture command is useful for:
• Scanning physical parts using a laser scanner when there is nominal data.
• Probing points on a physical part when there is no nominal data.

How to Use
A. How to capture scan data using a laser scanner without nominal
data
3. Go to LiveInspect > LiveCapture, or click the Capture button in the LiveInspect

mode.
4. Before scanning, check scanning conditions.
5. Press the A button on the scanning device to scan. To pause scanning, press the A
Button again.
6. Scan a physical model.
7. The scanning data will be displayed in the application in real-time.
8. Check scanning results.

B. How to capture probed scan data points with nominal data

3. Go to LiveInspect > LiveCapture, or click the Capture button.
4. Before probing, check the device.
5. Go to LiveInspect > Settings to set probing settings.
6. Click the Probe tab of the Settings.
7. Check the ProbeScan option.
8. Set the Time to 100 msec.
9. Click the OK button to confirm the settings.
10. Press the A button on the probing device to measure points.
11. Measure points on the physical model.

12. Measured points will be displayed in the application.
13. Press the B button to confirm measurements.
14. Press the B button to exit LiveCapture.
15. Click the Exit LiveCapture button.
16. Check the results of the Probe Sessions in the Model tree.
Options in Detail
Operation – Switches operations between laser scanning and probing.
Real Time Deviation – Shows deviation between nominal data and scan data. It is only activated
when there is nominal data.
Use Tolerance Color – Shows deviation with the tolerance colors set in the color bar.
Smart Display – Makes nominal data transparent while scanning.
The InfoCenter for laser type measurements

1. Type Info – Shows the type of scanner.
2. Status Info – Shows the status of a scanner.
3. Input Info – Shows how many points have been measured.
The InfoCenter for probing type measurements
2. Step Info – Indicates the current inspection step.
4. Status Info – Indicates the current status.
7.6.4. LiveInspect > LiveDimension
What
The LiveDimension command creates dimensions from a physical part in real-time by using a
probing device.
Why

The LiveDimension command is useful for:
• Measuring dimension and GD&T by probing points in real-time.
How to Use
A. How to measure angularity between two faces with nominal data
1. Go to LiveInspect > LiveDimension, or click the Dimension button in the LiveInspect
mode to measure dimensions.
2. Measure points for the first planar face.
3. Press the B button to confirm the first face.
4. Measure points for the second planar face.
Note:
If there is a pair geometry assigned on the target face of the nominal data, the pair geometry
can be used during the measurement by probing it only with the “A” button on the
measurement device.
5. Press the B button to confirm the second face.
6. The annotation of the angularity will be displayed.

7. Click the Confirm button to exit the mode.
B. How to measure cylindricity without nominal data

1. Go to LiveInspect > LiveDimension, or click the Dimension button in the LiveInspect
mode to measure dimensions.
2. Probe points on a cylindrical geometry of a physical part.
3. Press the B button on the scanning device to confirm the cylindrical geometry.
4. The annotation of the cylindricity will be displayed.
Options in Detail (Geometry Tool Palette)

Note:
The Geometry Tool Palette is displayed only when a real-time inspection that has geometric features
that can be used as nominal information is being performed in LiveInspect without any imported
nominal data.
1. AutoCreation – Automatically creates ideal ref. geometry by analyzing the RMS (Root Mean
Square) values of geometry candidates that can be created from picked probe points. A
dimension is automatically measured from itself or from the last created ref. geometry according
to the geometry type.
Note:
The InfoCenter lists up geometry candidates with RMS values calculated from picked probe points and
highlights the most satisfactory geometry within a specified tolerance. For more information, go to
LiveInspect > Settings > Inspect Tab.
2. Point Creation – Creates a ref. point at a picked probe position. A dimension will be
automatically measured from the last created ref. geometry.
3. Plane Creation – Creates a ref. plane from picked probe points. A ref. plane requires at least
three probe points in order to be fitted. A dimension will be automatically measured from the
last created ref. geometry.
Probing Points Ref. Plane
Note:
The minimum number of probe points that is required for fitting geometry can be manually edited in

the Geometry Tab of the LiveInspect Settings. For more information, go to LiveInspect > Settings >
Geometry Tab.
4. Sphere Creation – Creates a ref. sphere from picked probe points. A ref. sphere requires at
least four probe points in order to be fitted. A dimension will be automatically measured from
the last created ref. geometry.
Probing Points Ref. Sphere
5. Cylinder Creation – Creates a ref. sphere from picked probe points. A ref. sphere requires at
least seven probe points in order to be fitted. A dimension is automatically measured from itself
and from the last created ref. geometry.
Probing Points Base Plane Probing Points Ref. Cylinder
Note:
It is recommended to first create a ref. plane to obtain better results. However, a ref. cylinder can be
created without creating a ref. plane first, by switching to the geometry creation mode by pressing the
B button.
6. Cone Creation – Creates a ref. cone from picked probe points. A ref. sphere requires at least
eight probe points in order to be fitted. A dimension will be automatically measured from the
Probing
Probing Points Base Plane Ref. Cone
Points
Note:
It is recommended to first create a ref. plane to obtain better results. However, a ref. cone can be created
without creating a ref. plane first, by switching to the geometry creation mode by pressing the B button.
7. Torus Creation – Creates a ref. torus from picked probe points. A ref. torus requires at least
eight probe points in order to be fitted. A dimension will be automatically measured from the
Probing Points Ref. Torus

8. Vector Creation – Creates a ref. vector from picked probe points. A ref. vector requires a base
plane that it can be projected onto. A ref. vector can be created on a pre-defined ref. plane by
probing more than two points. A dimension will be automatically measured from the last created
ref. geometry.
Switching to 2D View
Probing Points Base Plane Probing Points Ref. Vector
Note:
When measuring 2D geometry types such as vector, circle, rectangle, and slot, LiveDimension provides
the 2D view mode so that 2D feature shape can be easily recognized and measured. After creating a ref.
plane or selecting the existing ref. plane, the view mode will be automatically switched to 2D view
mode for creating 2D geometries.
9. Circle Creation – Creates a ref. circle from picked probe points. A ref. circle requires a base
plane that it can be projected onto. A ref. circle can be created on a pre-defined ref. plane by
probing more than three points. A dimension will be automatically measured from itself and
from the last created ref. geometry.
Switching to
2D View
Probing Points Base Plane Probing Points Ref. Circle
10. Single Point Circle Creation – Creates a ref. circle on a pre-defined ref. plane by picking a
single probe point only. This method enables the quick creation of a circle geometry when using
a probe measurement device that has a probe ball bigger than radius of a target circular feature.
A dimension will be automatically measured from itself and from the last created ref. geometry.
Switching to
2D View
Probing Points Base Plane Probing a Single Point for Ref. circle
11. Rectangle Creation – Creates a ref. rectangle from picked probe points. A ref. rectangle
requires a base plane that it can be projected onto. A ref. rectangle can be created on a pre-
defined ref. plane by probing more than five points. A dimension will be automatically measured
from the last created ref. geometry.
Switching to
2D View
Probing Points Base Plane Probing Points Ref. Rectangle
12. Slot Creation – Creates a ref. slot from picked probe points. A ref. slot requires a base plane

that it can be projected onto. A ref. slot can be created on a pre-defined ref. plane by probing
more than six points. A dimension will be automatically measured from the last created ref.
geometry.
Switching to
2D View
Probing Points Base Plane Probing Points Ref. Slot
2. Target Info – Indicates a measurement target.
7.6.5. LiveInspect > LiveGeometry
What
The LiveGeometry command creates geometries from a physical part in real-time by using a
probing device.
Why
The LiveGeometry command is useful for:
• Creating geometries by probing points.

How to Use
A. How to create a spherical geometry with nominal data
1. Go to LiveInspect > LiveGeometry, or click the Geometry button in the LiveInspect
mode.
2. Click the AutoCreation button in the Geometry Tool Palette.
3. Measure points on the physical part to detect spherical geometry.
4. When the InfoCenter shows Sphere RMS among candidates, press the B button on the
probing device to confirm the sphere.
5. Select the Sphere option.
7. Check the sphere inspection feature in the Inspection Feature tree.
B. How to create a planar geometry without nominal data

1. Go to LiveInspect > LiveGeometry, or click the Geometry button in the LiveInspect
mode.
2. Click the AutoCreation button in the Geometry Tool Palette.
3. Measure points to detect spherical geometry.

4. When the InfoCenter shows a Plane RMS among candidates, press the B button on the
probing device to confirm the plane.
5. Select the Plane option.
7. Check the plane inspection feature in the Inspection Feature tree.
Options in Detail (Geometry Tool Palette)
1. AutoCreation – Automatically creates ideal ref. geometry by analyzing the RMS (Root Mean
Square) values of geometry candidates that can be created from picked probe points.
Note:
The InfoCenter lists up geometry candidates with RMS values calculated from picked probe points
and highlights the most satisfactory geometry within a specified tolerance. For more information, go
to LiveInspect > Settings > Inspect Tab.

2. Point Creation – Creates a ref. point at a picked probe position.
3. Plane Creation – Creates a ref. plane from picked probe points. A ref. plane requires at least
three probe points in order to be fitted.
Probing Points Ref. Plane
Note:
The minimum number of probe points that is required for fitting geometry can be manually edited in
the Geometry Tab of the LiveInspect Settings. For more information, go to LiveInspect > Settings >
Geometry Tab.
4. Sphere Creation – Creates a ref. sphere from picked probe points. A ref. sphere requires at
least four probe points in order to be fitted.
Probing Points Ref. Sphere
5. Cylinder Creation – Creates a ref. sphere from picked probe points. A ref. sphere requires at
least seven probe points in order to be fitted.
Probing Points Base Plane Probing Points Ref. Cylinder
Note:
It is recommended to first create a ref. plane to obtain better results. However, a ref. cylinder can be
created without creating a ref. plane first, by switching to the geometry creation mode by pressing the

B button.
6. Cone Creation – Creates a ref. cone from picked probe points. A ref. sphere requires at least
eight probe points in order to be fitted.
Probing
Probing Points Base Plane Ref. Cone
Points
Note:
It is recommended to first create a ref. plane to obtain better results. However, a ref. cone can be created
without creating a ref. plane first, by switching to the geometry creation mode by pressing the B button.
7. Torus Creation – Creates a ref. torus from picked probe points. A ref. torus requires at least
four probe points in order to be fitted.
Probing Points Ref. Torus
8. Vector Creation – Creates a ref. vector from picked probe points. A ref. vector requires a base
plane that it can be projected onto. A ref. vector can be created on a pre-defined ref. plane by
probing more than two points.
Switching to
2D View
Probing Points Base Plane Probing Points Ref. Vector
Note:
When measuring 2D geometry types such as a vector, circle, rectangle, or slot, LiveDimension provides
a 2D view mode so that 2D feature shape can be easily recognized and measured. After creating a ref.
plane or selecting an existing ref. plane, the view mode will be automatically switched to the 2D view
mode for creating 2D geometries.
9. Circle Creation – Creates a ref. circle from picked probe points. A ref. circle requires a base
plane that it can be projected onto. A ref. circle can be created on a pre-defined ref. plane by
probing more than three points.
Switching to
2D View
Probing Points Base Plane Probing Points Ref. Circle
10. Single Point Circle Creation – Creates a ref. circle on a pre-defined ref. plane by picking a
single probe point only. This method enables the quick creation of a circle geometry when using

a probe measurement device that has a probe ball bigger than radius of a target circular feature.
Switching to
2D View
Probing Points Base Plane Probing a Single Point for Ref. circle
11. Rectangle Creation – Creates a ref. rectangle from picked probe points. A ref. rectangle
requires a base plane that it can be projected onto. A ref. rectangle can be created on a pre-
defined ref. plane by probing more than five points.
Switching to
2D View
Probing Points Base Plane Probing Points Ref. Rectangle
12. Slot Creation – Creates a ref. slot from picked probe points. A ref. slot requires a base plane
that it can be projected onto. A ref. slot can be created on a pre-defined ref. plane by probing
more than six points.
Switching to
2D View
Probing Points Base Plane Probing Points Ref. Slot
2. Target Info – Indicates the current measurement target.
3. Candidates Info – Lists searched geometry candidates. A dominant candidate will be

highlighted.

7.6.6. LiveInspect > Settings

The Settings command consists of six tabs:
• General
Controls options for displays and views.
• Probe
Controls options for probing and compensation methods.
• Scan Data
Controls options for scan data processing and scanning result types.
• Inspect
Controls options for result types and tolerances to be used when calculating inspection results.
• Geometry
Specifies options for geometry fitting methods and the minimum number of probe points that
are required for geometry fittings.
• Device
Changes settings for a measurement device.
• Hotkey
Specifies hotkeys to be used during an inspection.
Each tab typically has six buttons:
• Export
Exports settings in the .INI file format.
• Import
Imports existing .INI files.
• Default
Returns all values to their default settings.
• OK
Applies modified settings to the application and closes the LiveInspect Settings.
• Cancel
Cancels modified settings.

• Apply
Applies modified settings to the application while keeping the LiveInspect Settings window
open for further modifications.
General Tab
The General tab controls options for displays and views for LiveInspect.
Options in Detail
Viewing Methods
Zoom Fit – Displays an entire model so that it can be zoomed and fit in the Model View
during scanning.
Dynamic Panning – Dynamically moves the viewpoint of a model during probing by view
panning according to the position of the probe tip so that a target feature can be closely viewed.

Zoom Fit Dynamic Panning
None – Displays a model on the Model View without any view changes.
View Direction
Fixed Top View – Fixes the top view direction by using hardware information. The Set button
defines the Top view direction.
Smart View – Intelligently recognizes a scanning direction within a system-defined view

range and dynamically adapts the view direction to a proper viewpoint.
Free View – Freely sets the view direction according to a scanning direction.
Sound and InfoCenter

InfoCenter Size – Enlarges or reduces the size of the InfoCenter. Large and Small can be selected.
Sound While measuring – Enables sounds while measuring.
Probe Tab
The Probe tab controls options for probing and compensation methods.
Options in Detail

Auto Probing
SteadyPoint – Acquires a probe point automatically without using the A button when the probe
tip is held still near a target position. Pressing the A button changes the acquisition status
between Pause and Resume. In the Pause state, no probe points are acquired, even if the probe
is held at a position. In the Resume state, the auto probing scheme will be used. The current
status will be displayed at the bottom of the InfoCenter.
Time – Defines the time a probing device needs to be stationary in order to collect a probe
point.
Range – Defines the tolerance a probing device needs to be stationary in order to collect
a probe point within the set time limit.
Probe Scanning
ProbeScan – Captures multiple points while pushing the A button.
Note:
LiveInspect enables the switching of the probing mode to Probe Scanning by using a Hotkey. Hotkeys
can be edited in the Hotkey tab. The default hotkey is “D”.
Time – Defines the time between probe measurements.
Distance – Defines the physical distance in between measurements.
AutoProbeScan – Switches the probing mode to Probe Scanning automatically when the
criteria specified by start time, end time, and measurement range is satisfied.
Start Time – Defines the time a probing device needs to be stationary in order to
start collecting a probe point.
End Time – Defines the time a probing device needs to be stationary after collecting
probe points in Probe Scanning mode in order to stop collecting probe points.
Range – Defines the range a probing device needs to be stationary in order to start
or stop collecting probe points within a set time limit.
Probe Compensation
Ref. Geometry – Determines a compensation direction for Ref. Geometry.

Last Point – Compensates the center position of measured probe points according to the
position of the last input point. For example, When a last point is picked inside measured
features, the center position of measured probe points will be compensated outward.
When the last point is a point picked outside a measured feature, the center position of
the measured probe points will be compensated inward.
When the last point is picked inside When the last point is point is picked
measured features outside a measured feature
Initial Probe Direction – Compensates the center position of measured probe points
along an initially approached probe direction.
Ref. Point – Compensates the center position of measured probe points using the X, Y, and Z
global axes directions or the probe axis.
Without Compensation Compensation to -Z Compensation to Probe Axis
Scan Data Tab
The Scan Data tab controls options for scan data processing and scanning results.

Options in Detail
Generate
Point Cloud – Leaves acquired scan data as point cloud.
Mesh – Generates meshes after scanning.
Sampling
Grid Size – Defines a grid resolution that can be used for generating grid-type uniform scan data.
The higher the resolution of a grid, the denser the scan data will be.
Max. Point Distance – Sets limits for applying grid sampling by a maximum point
distance. This option is useful for preserving inner hole features during sampling.
Remove Outliers – Ignores data outside of a set average.
Noise Reduction – Reduces noise by calculating the maximum deviation between scan data.
Max. Deviation – Defines the maximum deviation between scan data in order to
distinguish scan data from noise data.
Backup
Backup LSF(LiveScan File) – Saves files in the .LSF(LiveScan File) format for backing up data. The
file can be imported by going to File > Import Scan data. When the application has troubles
with a scanning process due to a lack of available memory, scanning can be restored with the

saved LSF file.
Data Display Mode

Raw Data Mode – Displays all raw scan data acquired from a scanning device in the Model View
without any sampling.
Trouble Shooting Mode – Displays a sampled raw scan data acquired from a scanning device in
the Model View without losing original raw data. This mode can be useful when scanning is
performed on lower-end PC that could have trouble with handling a large point cloud.
Sampling Ratio – Specifies a sampling ratio in order to effectively handle large point
clouds in the application.
Inspect Tab
The Inspect tab controls options for results and tolerances to be used when calculating inspection
results.
Options in Detail
SmartSelect
3D Geometry – Selects a 3D Geometric shape that a probing device is pointing at within a
specified selection zone.

2D Geometry – Selects a 2D Geometric shape that a probing device is pointing at within a
specified selection zone.
Note:
When a probing device is closer on a target face, the section of face and the acquisition of probe point
will be performed at the same time.
SmartSelect Zone
Edge – Determines the range of edge selection.
Face – Determines the range of face selection.
2D Geometry – Determines the range of pre-measured 2D geometry selections.
3D Geometry – Determines the range of pre-measured 3D geometry selections.
LiveDimension
Min. Angle – Determines a minimum angle between target faces.
Ang. Tolerance – Specifies angle tolerance between measured geometries. The specified angle
tolerance will be used to determine pass or fail results.
Creation Method
Individual – Measures dimensions by selecting target entities one by one.
Note:
The Individual creation method can be used for all dimension types.
Continue – Continuously measures multiple dimensions by placing end to end.

Baseline – Measures multiple dimensions from the same baseline.
Note:
The Continue and Baseline creation methods can be used when measuring linear and radial dimensions.
Note:
When applying the dimension creation method, the selected method will be shown up in the
InfoCenter.
Deviation/Validate
Show Whisker – Shows a solid line between a probing device and a projected point on nominal
data while validating after an alignment. The line is only displayed when the length of the line is
within the value that is set as the Range.

Unchecked Checked
Show Arrow – Shows a guiding arrow that directs to a projected point on nominal data while
validating after an alignment. The arrow is only displayed when the deviation is within the value
that is set as the Range
Unchecked Checked
Range – Sets the maximum distance that will be displayed as a whisker or an arrow.
Tolerance
Edit Table – Enables the use of the Tolerance tab in the Preferences to change tolerances directly
for the LiveInspect Settings.
Geometry Tab
The Geometry tab specifies options for geometry fitting methods and the minimum number of
probe points that are required for geometry fittings.

Options in Detail
Options for Geometry Creation
RMS Warning – Sets an RMS warning value and displays any value outside of the value as red
during probing.
Nominate Geometry Candidate within Tolerance – Sets a RMS tolerance to select geometry
while probing points.
Note:
When there are no candidates that can satisfy a specified RMS tolerance value, candidates that are less
than two times the RMS value of the top candidate will be listed in the Overlay UI and the best candidate
can be selected using a probing device.
Allow FreeFlow Ref. geometry – Enables the probing of size-limited Ref.Geometries such as
Spheres, Tori, Circles, Slots, and Rectangles without a fixed order. After all geometries whose sizes
are not limited are measured, this option enables the free selection and measurement of size-
limited geometries without a fixed order.
Ruled Fitting – Enables fitting Plane or Cylinder geometries by using one or three probe points
and the normal information of nominal data without the probing points required for geometry
fittings. This option can be useful when measuring the position and size of target geometry
when only its orientation is assumed to be same as that of a nominal geometry.

Ruled Fitting for Plane Geometry (One Ruled Fitting for Cylinder Geometry (Three
Point required) Points required)
Note:
When an alignment is assumed to be satisfied within allowable tolerance, this option can be used for
fitting Plane and Cylinder geometries while extracting geometries in the Play Inspect, LiveCapture, and
LiveDimension stages.
The required minimum number of probe points is:
• One point for fitting a plane geometry

• Three points for fitting a cylinder geometry
Minimum Number of Points for Geometry Fitting

Minimum Probe Points – Specifies the minimum number of probe points that are used for
fitting target geometry.
Device Tab
The Device tab changes settings for a measurement device.

Options in Detail
Calibration – Used for the calibration of a scanning device.
Laser Settings – Changes the settings for a scanning device.
Select Probe – Changes the settings for a probing device.
Hotkey Tab
The Hotkey tab specifies hotkeys to be used during an inspection.

Options in Detail
Scanner Hotkeys
A Button – Defines a keyboard hotkey for the A button for scanning device.
B Button – Defines a keyboard hotkey for the B button for scanning device.
Probe Hotkeys
A Button – Defines a keyboard hotkey for the A button for probing device.
B Button – Defines a keyboard hotkey for the B button for probing device.
C Button – Defines a keyboard hotkey for the C button for probing device.
Hotkeys for ProbeScan

ProbeScan – Defines a keyboard hotkey for the probe scanning feature of LiveInspect.
7.6.7. LiveInspect > Position Device
What
The Position Device command enables to reset the position of a device coordinate system to
another target coordinate system.
Why
The Move Device command is useful for:
• Maintaining a device coordinate system when moving a part or a measurement device

• Maintaining a coordinate system when a part is flipped to inspect the back of the part.
• Maintaining a coordinate system when scanning a large object that requires multiple scans due
to the single scan size limitations of a scanning device.
How to Use
A. How to maintain a coordinate system of moved device using

nominal data
1. Go to LiveInspect > Position Device to move a device coordinate system.
2. Set the Method to Pick the Nominal Points for Reference.
Note:
Picked points will be used as reference positions for transformation of a device coordinate
system.
3. Pick points on nominal data and then click the OK button to start probing.
4. Probe points on a physical part.
5. When the probing is completed for all points, press the B button on the probing device
to complete the transformation of a device coordinate system.
B. How to maintain a coordinate system of moved device without

nominal data
1. Go to LiveInspect > Position Device to move a device coordinate system.
2. Set the Method to Probe Reference Geometries to transform a device coordinate

system by using reference geometries.
3. Click the OK button to start probing for creation of reference geometries from a
physical part on an original position.

4. Probe points on a physical part using the AutoCreation.
Note:
The created geometries will be used as reference datums for a transformation of a device
coordinate system. Point type geometries such as Point, Sphere, and Circle can be used as
reference datums for the transformation.
5. When probing is finished for creating a geometry, press the B button on the probing
device to complete the creation.
6. Probe points on the physical part for creating the other geometries.
7. When the creation of all geometries for setting reference position is completed, the
Reference Position (OK) will be displayed in the InfoCenter.
Note:
The created reference geometries will be displayed in Red and target geometries will be
displayed in Blue.
8. Move the physical part onto a desire position and then press the B button on the
probing device to start probing for creating target geometries.

9. Repeat the steps from 4 to 6 on the moved physical part.
10. Press the B button on the probing device to complete the command.
Options in Detail
Pick the Nominal Points for Reference – Maintains a device coordinate system by using
reference positions specified on nominal data.
Probe Reference Geometries – Maintains a device coordinate system by using reference

geometries.
By Matrix – Resets the position of a device coordinate system using a transformation matrix.
7.7. Report
The Report menu features commands for generating a report from inspection results within the
application. Reports can be made on an existing template or automatically generated in HTML.
Generate Report
• Generate Report
Creates an inspection report from selected features.
Sharing
• Export 3D HTML Report
Exports inspection results to an HTML file that includes 3D model data.
Trend Analysis
• Trend Report
Analyzes variation trends of inspection results.

7.7.1. Report > Generate Report
What
The Generate Report command creates an inspection report from selected features in the
Generate Report dialog box either manually or automatically.
How to Use
A. How to generate a report
1. After inspection with nominal and scan data, go to Report > Generate Report or click
2. Check features under the Model Tree section what you want to generate a report.
3. Click the New Report button.
B. How to predefine a report layout

1. Customize the layout of the report by clicking the Report tab then the Layout button
in the Default menu.
2. Click the Layout button to edit the layout of a report. Once a feature is edited, its page
structure can be seen in the main window of the Report tab.
3.
Go to the Comparison Point page and click the Image button to import an
image. Align the image to the right by clicking the Set Align Object In Line button
and choose the Align Right In Line method .

4.
Add texts by clicking the Text button and drag a box to where a desired
location. Text can be input directly into the text box or in the Format menu in the
Reports tab. The Overlay option can be unchecked to prevent the text box from being
overlapped by a table.
5.
Align text to the left and use the Field button to add a field. The Entity Properties
field can be used to add values that can be drawn in a table automatically. Choose
6 Sigma.
6. To add preset images of the model click the Capture Image button and add the images.
For a more detailed description on the Capture Image function, see Report.

7. Uncheck features that will be omitted from the report. Click New Report and a new
report will be generated. If there is an existing report open it will be deleted and
replaced by the new report.
8. Click OK to complete the command. The Report tab will be displayed with images,
tables, and histograms of the inspection results.
Note:
Changes are automatically saved to the autoreporttemplate.xml file that can be found at
C:\Documents and Settings\user name\My Documents\Product Name\Configure.
C. How to save and load a layout template

1. After a layout is edited it can be managed in the Edit Template dialog box that can be
displayed by clicking the Manage button in the Layout menu. Type the name of
a template and click the Add button or import templates by using the Manage
Templates dialog box. To edit a template while preserve an unaltered copy, use the

Duplicate button and copy it. To delete all template settings and restore the default
template click the Restore Preset button.
2. To change the current template of a report layout, select an existing template under the
Select Template menu.
D. How to edit a table

1. To add or remove fields in a table, select a table and click the Field Chooser button
in the Format menu. Check fields that will be displayed in the table and
arrange the order of the fields.
2.
To add a defined table, click the Tabular View button in the Layout menu as well
as an additional table related to the selected feature.
E. How to add a chart

1. Select a table in the report. Click Insert New Chart in the Default menu.
2. Select a chart type and check values in the Legend display.
3. Click the OK button the complete the command.
F. How to edit an image

1. Drag and drop an image from the Viewpoint and Image Folder panels.

2. When an image is selected in a report the Format menu will be displayed. It contains
various tools to edit images.
G. How to edit text

1. Add text by clicking the Insert New Text button . To change font size, color, size, etc.,
use the tools under the Format menu.
2.
To align a text box use the Arrange button .
To place an image anywhere in the report use the Overlay button.
To change border thickness use the Line Weight button .
To change border color use the Specify Line Color button .
3. Click the OK button the complete the command.
Options in Detail
Model Tree, Generate Target – Used to generate reports. The left list box, Model Tree, shows
all the features that can be added into a report. Items of checked features will be shown in the
right list box, Generate Target, and these entities will be published in the report. To change the
page order of items, select the items and move them up or down using the up and down arrow
buttons. Groups can be made from multiple features such as groups of sections, 3D GD&Ts,
comparison points and ref. geometries.
Custom Field Information – Defines report information for each custom field. This custom field
can be inserted into report page by the Custom Field command in the default report mode and
layout mode. For more information about Custom Field, go to Tools > Docking Bars > Report.
Update – Adds an appended report to an existing report.
New Report – Creates a new report.
Cancel – Cancels the Generate Report operation.

Generate Cover Page – Creates a cover page for a report.
Remove Empty Object – Removes unnecessary tables that have empty values.
See Also
Tools > Docking Bars > Report
7.7.2. Report > Export 3D HTML Report
What
The Export 3D HTML Report command exports inspection results to an HTML file that includes 3D
model data.
How to Use
How to generate a 3D HTML report
1. Go to Report > Export 3D HTML Report or click the icon in the toolbar.
2. Select entities to be exported in the left panel.

3. Select a folder to save the report to.
4. Select the Launch Internet Explorer option to view the report after it is generated.
5. Click the OK button to generate the report. Install any necessary ActiveX controllers and
the report and 3D model will be displayed in Internet Explorer.

Options in Detail
Select Entities To Be Exported – Chooses items will be exported into the HTML report.
Information – Used to put any information desired.
Cover Image – Sets the cover image for 3D HTML report. Images that have been captured
using Add Viewpoint command in the Viewpoint tab or using File > Capture Screen
command can be used as a cover image.
Note:
If there are no images that can be used as a cover image, a default image will be used for 3D
HTML report.
Remarks – Used to put any remarks desired.
ICF View Size – Sets the ICF view size using Width and Height value boxes.
Property, Value – Sets the value of properties of a file.
Select Folder For Backup HTML Files – Specifies a folder to store a HTML report.
Launch Internet Explorer – Opens and loads a report into Internet Explorer after it is generated.
7.7.3. Report > Trend Report
What
The Trend Report is a utility that works independently from the application that analyzes variation
trends of inspection results that have been reported from the application. The trend report is created
in the XML format.
How to Use
How to generate a trend report
1. Go to Report > Trend Report or click the icon in the toolbar.
2. Click the Import Source Reports button and select report files in the .xml format.

3. The sample reports will be listed in the File List panel. To add more reports, click the
Open button and select more files to import. The order of imported reports can be
changed using the Move Selection Up/Down buttons . Reports can be deleted
using the Trash button .
4. Click the Generate button in the Default menu. Check entities that will be reported
in the trend report.
5. Click the Confirm button at the bottom right hand corner of the screen to generate
the report.
6. The trend report will be generated. It can be saved as a .pdf, .ppt, .xls, and .txt file
formats.
7.8. Measure
The Measure menu features commands to measure distances, angles, radii, etc., between entities.
Distance, Angle and Radius fitting geometries created for measurement can be reused while in the
command. When the command is exited the fitting geometries will no longer be available.

The Measure menu provides tools used to:
• Distance
Measure the distance between entities.
• Angle
Measure the angle between two edges or three picked points.
• Radius
Measure the radius of an edge or three picked points.
• Section
Temporarily create sections on a mesh and body to measure the deviation between them.
• Area
Measures the area of a selected entity.
• Volume
Measures the volume of a selected entity.
• Mesh Deviations
Show the deviation between point clouds and meshes using a defined color map.
• Virtual Caliper
Simulates virtual calipers that can measure the distance of features in scan data in virtual space.
7.8.1. Measure > Distance
What
The Distance command measures the distance between entities.
Why

The Distance command is useful for:
• Comparing distances between plane-plane

• Comparing distances between plane-line
• Comparing distances between plane-point
• Comparing distances between line-line
• Comparing distances between line-point
• Comparing distances between point-point
Note:
Plane-plane, line-line and plane-line measurements should be parallel.
How to Use
How to find the distance between two edges
1. Go to Measure > Distance or click the icon in the toolbar.
2. To measure the distance between two cylinders, click the cylinder edges. When doing a
mouse-over a measurement the measured entities will be shown.
Note:
To pick a position on a line or a plane, hold down the Ctrl button on the keyboard while clicking.
Options in Detail
Measure Distance – Selects two entities to measure the distance between.
Method – Selects a measuring method for analytic features.

No Align – Measures a direct distance between entities with no alignment.
X Axis Align – Measures a distance in the X direction.
Y Axis Align – Measures a distance in the Y direction.
Z Axis Align – Measure a distance in the Z direction.
Fitting Geometry – Selects poly-vertices from scan data and fits a primitive feature to them.
Fitting geometry can be directly created from scan data by selecting poly-vertices and using the
right mouse button.
To preview the results, click the Preview button .

To apply the results, click the Accept button .
To cancel the selection, click the Cancel button .
To expand the current geometry and create new fitting geometry, click the Expand Selection
For Fitting Geometry button . This function works for Plane, Cylinder, Cone, Sphere, and
Torus fitting geometries.

Clicking on the Annotation Display Control option will open a window where the properties of
measured entities as well as the selection mode can be changed.
When measuring, a pass or fail constraint can be added by entering a nominal value and
tolerance value in the properties window of a created entity.
Fitting Options
fitting method.
Min. Bound - Finds minimum-fitted geometry that contacts the nearest target
Note:
When circle is selected as target fitting geometry, the Min. Bound option is used for
finding maximum-inscribed geometry of a tube-like geometric volume that encloses
Note:
finding minimum-circumscribed geometry of a tube-like geometric volume that encloses
Projected Hole – Finds minimum-fitted geometry that contacts the nearest of

boundary points projected on a plane that was constrained to the normal direction
and the position of the best-fitted geometry that was found using the least square
fitting method.
Best Fit Min. Bound

Max. Bound Projected Holes
The N*Sigma method requires an N value and excludes data that is larger than N
times the standard deviation, also known as the sigma.
The Ratio method, requires a ratio value and only data that falls into the selected
value will be used.
Use Normal – Excludes points that have a normal angle larger than the
normal of fitted ref. geometry. After removing points, the application will
internally generate fitted ref. geometry again from the refined points.
used.
See Also
Measure > Angle
Measure > Radius
Measure > Section
Measure > Area
Measure > Volume
7.8.2. Measure > Angle
What
The Angle command measures the angle between two edges or three picked points.

Why
The Angle command is useful for:
• Comparing angles between plane-plane

• Comparing angles between plane-line
• Comparing angles between plane-point
• Comparing angles between line-line
• Comparing angles between line-point-point
• Comparing angles between point-point-point
Note:
Angles between parallel entities cannot be measured.
How to Use
How to find the angle between two edges
1. Go to Measure > Angle or click on the icon in the toolbar.
2. Select two edges to measure the angle. Click OK to finish the command. When doing a
mouse-over a measurement the measured entities will be shown.

Note:
To pick a position on a line or a plane, hold down the Ctrl button on the keyboard while
clicking.
Options in Detail
Measure Angle – Selects entities to measure the distance between.
right mouse button.
To preview the results click the Preview button .

To apply the results click the Accept button .
Fitting Options

fitting method.
Note:
Note:

fitting method.
Best Fit Min. Bound

value will be used.
used.
See Also
Measure > Distance
Measure > Radius
Measure > Section
Measure > Area
Measure > Volume
7.8.3. Measure > Radius
What
The Radius command measures the radius of an edge or three picked points.

Note:
To select a point on a line or a plane hold the Ctrl button while picking the point.
Why
The Radius command is useful for:
• Finding the radius of a circle

• Comparing angles between point-point-point
How to Use
How to find the radius of an edge
1. Go to Measure > Radius or click the icon in the toolbar.
2. Select an edge to measure a radius from. Click OK to finish the command. When doing
a mouse-over a measurement the measured entities will be shown.

Options in Detail
Measure Radius – Selects entities to measure the radius.
right mouse button.
To preview the results click the Preview button .

To apply the results click the Accept button .
Fitting Options
fitting method.

Note:
Note:

fitting method.
Best Fit Min. Bound
value will be used.

used.
See Also
Measure > Distance
Measure > Angle
Measure > Section
Measure > Area
Measure > Volume
7.8.4. Measure > Section
What
The Section command temporarily creates sections on a mesh and body to measure the deviation
between them.
Why
• Checking the deviation between reverse engineered models and original mesh
How to Use
How to find sectional differences between a body and a mesh
1. Go to Measure > Section or click the icon in the toolbar.
2. Select a mesh and a solid body as the Target Entity and click the Next Stage button.
3. Choose the Select Plane option and select a base plane.
4. Choose the Min Distance option under Measure Method to find the minimum
distance between the body and mesh. Select a point on the body section and then pick
the scan section to get the distance.

Options in Detail
Select Entities
This tool consists of two stages :
• Target Entity
Selects an entity to section.
• Section Type
Chooses a candidate coordinate.
Stage 1/2 – Target Entity

Target Entity – Selects a target entity to measure.
Stage 2/2 – Section Type

Creation Method – Selects a creation method. Go to Tools > Curve Tools > Section for more
information.
Options – Is changed depending on the Creation Method. Go to Tools > Curve Tools > Section
for more information.
Measure Method – Selects a measurement method.
Distance By Picking – Measures distance between two picked points.
Min. Distance – Measures the minimum distance from a selected point to a section
between CAD data and a scan section. This option is available only when both CAD and
scan data are selected as targets in first stage.
Normal Distance – Measures the normal distance from a selected point to a section
between CAD data and a scan section. This option is available only when both CAD and
scan data are selected as targets in first stage.
Section Property – Displays the properties of a selected section in the Properties panel.
Only a scan section can be selected.

Create Ref. Plane – Creates a temporary sectional plane as a ref. plane.
See Also
Measure > Distance
Measure > Angle
Measure > Radius
Measure > Area
Measure > Volume
7.8.5. Measure > Area
What
The Area command measures the area of a selected entity.
Why
The Area command is useful for:
• Quickly finding the total area for an entity
How to Use
How to measure the area of an entity
1. Go to Measure > Area or click the icon in the toolbar.

2. Select an entity to measure the area of.
3. Enter an annotation name such as Cylinder 1.
See Also
Measure > Distance
Measure > Angle
Measure > Radius
Measure > Section
Measure > Volume

7.8.6. Measure > Volume
What
The Volume command measures the volume of a selected entity.
Why
The Volume command is useful for:
• Quickly finding the volume for a selected entity
How to Use
How to measure the volume of an entity
1. Go to Measure > Volume or click the icon in the toolbar.
2. Select a mesh and uncheck the Use Projection Plane option.
3. Enter an annotation name such as Measurement 1.
Options in Detail
Name – Selects a name of an annotation.
Entities – Selects a mesh or poly-faces.

Projected Volume – Calculates the volume of a mesh.
Enclosed Volume – Calculates the volume created by two parallel planes.
The plane direction can be a user-defined value. The View Align button changes the
normal of a plane to the screen view direction. A distance can be selected between two
planes by using the Depth option in the Normal Direction section.
Use Projection Plane – Calculates the volume of an open mesh or poly faces by
projecting poly-faces on a plane. In projected volume calculation if a face normal and a
projection direction are different a plus volume will be created. If a face normal and a
projection direction are the same, a minus volume will be created.
For example, the volume of a closed shell will be the same with or without a plane.
The volume of an open shell will be measured using a projection plane results similar to
the following image:
Reset– Resets Projected Volume and Enclosed Volume to default.

Plane Options – Selects a measurement method.
Position – Sets the position of the plane by using the X, Y, and Z directions.
Normal Direction – Sets the normal direction by using the X, Y, and Z directions.
See Also
Measure > Distance
Measure > Angle
Measure > Radius
Measure > Section
Measure > Area
7.8.7. Measure > Mesh Deviations
What
The Mesh Deviations command shows the deviation between point clouds and meshes using a
defined color map.
Why
The Mesh Deviations command is useful for:
• Checking the deviation between many meshes and point clouds
How to Use
How to find deviation between meshes
1. Go to Measure > Mesh Deviations or click the icon in the toolbar.

2. Select all meshes as Target Entities. Click the Next Stage button.
Note:
Histogram and Entity Thumbnails View windows will automatically open. Check the results
in the windows.
The results will be recorded in the Console window. If needed, copy the results and paste it
into other applications. For more information, go to Console page.
3. Multiple results will be shown in the Entity Thumbnails panel.
Options in Detail
Stages
This tool consists of two stages:
• Target Entities and References

Selects an entities and References for deviation analysis.
• Deviation Analysis
Chooses a candidate coordinate. The ideal coordinate is listed at the top of the list box.
Stage 1/2 – Target Entities and References

Target Entities – Chooses target entities.
References – Chooses reference entities.

Max.Deviation– Specifies the maximum distance for ignoring features when calculating
deviation. This option can be useful for filtering noisy and irregular data.
Signed – Displays positive and negative distance values.
Unsigned – Displays absolute distance values.
Use Tolerance Color – Displays defined tolerance colors on the color map.
Stage 2/2 – Deviation Analysis

Deviation between entities is shown as a color map. If necessary, the Use Tolerance Color option
can be used in this step.
See Also
Measure > Distance
Measure > Angle
Measure > Radius
Measure > Section
Measure > Area
Measure > Volume
7.8.8. Measure > Virtual Caliper
What
The Virtual Caliper command simulates virtual calipers which can measure the distance of a feature
in scan data in virtual space.
How to Use
How to measure using virtual calipers
1. Go to Measure > Virtual Caliper or click the icon in the toolbar.
2. Select Outside Caliper for Caliper Type and Ray-Intersection For Searching Method.
3. Select a point on scan data. The selected point will be marked with a cone-shape and
the opposite direction will be marked by two cylinder shapes.

4. Select one of the cylinder shapes on the position. The caliper will measure the distance
from the cone shape to the selected cylinder shape.
Options in Detail
Caliper Type – Selects a caliper type.
Outside Caliper – Measures the outline distance of a cylinder or boundary of a

feature.
Inside Caliper – Measures the distance between the area inside a feature or the
diameter of a hole.
Depth Caliper – Measures the depth of a feature or a hole.

Measuring Direction – Selects a measurement direction.
Auto – Sets the measuring direction automatically by searching for the reverse direction
of the normal direction.
Custom – Sets a measurement direction by measuring the distance to a user-selected

direction.
Parallel to Measuring Plane – Sets a measurement direction parallel to a specified

measuring plane. The Front, Top and Right planes can be used.
Tip Option – Selects a tip type.
Searching Method – Sets the searching method type.
Ray Intersection – Finds a pair point by intersecting virtual rays and poly-vertices.
Disk Contact – Finds a pair point by the contact position of a disk.
Search Radius – Sets the radius of the searching tip.
Searching Depth – Sets the depth of the searching tip.
See Also
Measure > Distance
Measure > Angle
Measure > Radius
Measure > Section
Measure > Area
Measure > Volume

7.9. View
The View menu features commands to change how a model is displayed, change and split
viewpoints, as well as other viewing related functions.
The View menu provides tools used to:
Manage Visibility
• Visibility
Select different entity types to display or hide.
Zoom
• Zoom
Zoom an area of interest, fit a model to a screen, or use the picture-in-picture (PIP) function.
Manage Mesh Display Mode

• Mesh Display Mode
Set how meshes are displayed in the model view.
Manage Body Display Mode

• Body Display Mode
Set how solid surfaces and bodies are displayed in the model view.
Manage Viewpoints
• Viewpoint
Sets how a model is displayed in the model view.
Manage Viewports
• Viewport
Set the number of viewing windows and how they are displayed.
Manage Light Properties

• Light Properties
Set the global lighting properties such as color and point of origin within the model view.
Clip a View
• View Clip
Cut away a part of a model using cutting planes or a box to view inside of it.
Manage Annotation
• Annotation Alignment
Selects an annotation display method.
• Annotation Display Control

Manages how annotations are displayed.
Manage Screen
• Maximize View Area
Enlarges the Model View area.
7.9.1. View > Visibility

The Visibility menu features methods to show or hide entities in the Model View.
Global Control
• Show Selected Only
Displays only selected entities.
• Show All
Shows all entities.

• Hide All
Hides all entities.
Partial Control
• Show Pass Only
Displays entities that pass deviation parameters.
• Show Fail Only

Displays entities that fail deviation parameters.
• Show Warning Only

Displays entities that are within warning deviation parameters.
• Show No Result Only

Displays entities that have no deviation results.
• Show Pass & Warning Only

Displays entities that pass and are within warning deviation parameters.
• Show Fail & Warning Only

Displays entities that fail and are within warning deviation parameters.
Individual Control
• Point Clouds
Shows or hides point clouds.
• Meshes
Shows or hides meshes.
• Surface Bodies
Shows or hides surface bodies.
• Solid Bodies
Shows or hides surface bodies.
• Curves
Shows or hides curves.
• Sections
Shows or hides sections.
• Ref. Points
Shows or hides reference points.
• Ref. Vectors
Shows or hides reference vectors.
• Ref. Planes
Shows or hides reference planes.
• Ref. Circles
Shows or hides reference circles.
• Ref. Cylinders
Shows or hides reference cylinders.
• Ref. Coordinates
Shows or hides reference coordinates.
• GD&Ts
Shows or hides GD&Ts.
• Deviations
Shows or hides deviations.
• Measurements
Shows or hides measurements.
View > Visibility > Show Selected Only
What
The Show Selected Only command displays only selected entities in the Model View.
Why
The Show Selected Only command is useful for:
• Focusing on only specific entities

Note:
This command will be unavailable and dimmed if no entities have been selected.
How to Use
How to show or hide selected entities
1. Select entities. Go to View > Visibility > Show Selected Only or click the icon in the
toolbar.
See Also
View > Visibility > Show All
View > Visibility > Hide All
What
The Show All command shows all entities in the Model View.
Why
The Show All command is useful for:
• Quickly showing all hidden entities

How to Use
How to show all entities
1. Go to View > Visibility > Show All or click the icon in the toolbar.
See Also
What
The Hide All command hides all entities in the Model View.
Why
The Hide All command is useful for:
• Quickly hiding all visible entities
How to Use
How to hide all entities
1. Go to View > Visibility > Hide All or click the icon in the toolbar.

See Also
View > Visibility > Show Pass Only
What
The View > Visibility > Show Pass Only command displays entities that pass deviation parameters
in the Model view.
Why
The Show Pass Only command is useful for:
• Showing only entities that pass deviation parameters
How to Use
How to show only passing entities
1. Go to View > Visibility > Show Pass Only or click the icon in the toolbar.
See Also
View > Visibility > Show Fail Only
View > Visibility > Show Warning Only
View > Visibility > Show No Result Only
View > Visibility > Show Pass & Warning Only
View > Visibility > Show Fail & Warning Only

What
The Show Fail Only displays entities that fail deviation parameters in the Model view.
Why
The Show Fail Only command is useful for:
• Showing only entities that fail deviation parameters
How to Use
How show only failing entities
1. Go to View > Visibility > Show Fail Only or click the icon in the toolbar.
See Also
What
The Show Warning Only command displays entities in the Model View that are within warning
deviation parameters. Warning deviation parameters are determined by the Warning Ratio option
in the Properties of the Nominal Data.
For more information, go to Properties.
Why

The Show Warning Only command is useful for:
• Showing only entities that are close to failing deviation parameters
How to Use
How show warning entities
1. Go to View > Visibility > Show Warning Only or click the icon in the toolbar.
See Also
What
The Show No Result Only displays entities that have no deviation results in the Model view.
Why
The Show No Result Only command is useful for:
• Showing only entities that have no deviation results
How to Use
How show or hide entities that have no deviation results
1. Go to View > Visibility > Show No Result Only or click the icon in the toolbar.
See Also

What
The Show Pass & Warning Only displays entities that pass and warning deviation parameters in the
Model view.
Why
The Show Pass & Warning Only command is useful for:
• Showing entities that pass and come to close to failing deviation parameters
How to Use
How show passing and warning entities
1. Go to View > Visibility > Show Pass & Warning Only or click the icon in the toolbar.
See Also
What
The Show Fail & Warning Only command displays entities that fail and warning deviation

parameters in the Model view.
Why
The Show Fail & Warning Only command is useful for:
• Showing entities that fail and come to close to failing deviation parameters
How to Use
How show failing and warning entities
1. Go to View > Visibility > Show Fail & Warning Only or click the icon in the toolbar.
See Also
View > Visibility > Point Clouds
What
The Point Clouds command displays or hides all point clouds in the Model View.
Why
The Point Clouds command is useful for:
• Viewing all point clouds at one time

• Hiding all point clouds at one time
How to Use
How show or hide all point clouds

1. Go to View > Visibility > Point Clouds, click the icon in the toolbar, or use the Ctrl + 1
keyboard shortcut.
See Also
View > Visibility > Meshes
View > Visibility > Surface Bodies
View > Visibility > Solid Bodies
View > Visibility > Curves
View > Visibility > Sections
What
The Meshes command displays or hides all meshes in the Model View.
Why
The Meshes command is useful for:
• Viewing all meshes at one time

• Hiding all meshes at one time
How to Use
How to show or hide all meshes

1. Go to View > Visibility > Meshes, click the icon in the toolbar, or use the Ctrl + 1
keyboard shortcut.
See Also
What
The Surface Bodies command displays or hides all Surface Bodies in the Model View.
Why
The View Surface Bodies command is useful for:
• Viewing all Surface Bodies clouds at one time

• Hiding all Surface Bodies at one time
How to Use
How show or hide all surface bodies

1. Go to View > Visibility > Surface Bodies, click the icon in the toolbar, or use the Ctrl +
3 keyboard shortcut.
See Also
What
The Solid Bodies command displays or hides all Solid Bodies in the Model View.
Why
The View Solid Bodies command is useful for:
• Viewing all Solid Bodies at one time

• Hiding all Solid Bodies at one time
How to Use
How show or hide all solid bodies
1. Go to View > Visibility > Solid Bodies, click the icon in the toolbar, or use the Ctrl + 4

keyboard shortcut.
See Also
What
The Curves command displays or hides all curves in the Model View.
Why
The Curves command is useful for:
• Viewing all curves at one time

• Hiding all curves at one time
How to Use
How show or hide all curves
1. Go to View > Visibility > Curves, click the icon in the toolbar, or use the Ctrl + 5
keyboard shortcut.
See Also

What
The Sections command displays or hides all sections in the Model View.
Why
The Sections command is useful for:
• Viewing all sections at one time

• Hiding all sections at one time
How to Use
How show or hide all sections
1. Go to View > Visibility > Sections, click the icon in the toolbar, or use the Ctrl + 6
keyboard shortcut.
See Also
View > Visibility > Ref. Points
What
The Ref. Points command displays or hides all Ref. Points in the Model View.

Why
The Ref. Points command is useful for:
• Viewing all Ref. Points at one time

• Hiding all Ref. Points at one time
How to Use
How show or hide all ref. points
1. Go to View > Visibility > Ref. Points, click the icon in the toolbar, or use the Ctrl + 7
keyboard shortcut.
See Also
View > Visibility > Ref. vector
View > Visibility > Ref. planes
View > Visibility > Ref. circles
View > Visibility > Ref. cylinders
View > Visibility > Ref. coordinates
View > Visibility > GD&Ts
View > Visibility > Ref. Vectors
What
The Ref. Vectors command displays or hides all Ref. Vectors in the Model View.

Why
The Ref. Vectors command is useful for:
• Viewing all Ref. Vectors at one time

• Hiding all Ref. Vectors at one time
How to Use
How show or hide all ref. vectors
1. Go to View > Visibility > Ref. Vectors, click the icon in the toolbar, or use the Ctrl + 8
keyboard shortcut.
See Also
View > Visibility > Ref. points
View > Visibility > Ref. Planes
What
The Ref. Planes command displays or hides all Ref. Planes in the Model View.

Why
The Ref. Planes command is useful for:
• Viewing all Ref. Planes at one time

• Hiding all Ref. Planes at one time
How to Use
How show or hide all ref. planes
1. Go to View > Visibility > Ref. Planes or click on the icon in the toolbar.
See Also
View > Visibility > Ref. vectors
View > Visibility > Ref. Circles
What
The Ref. Circles command displays or hides all Ref. Circles in the Model View.

Why
The Ref. Circles command is useful for:
• Viewing all Ref. Circles at one time

• Hiding all Ref. Circles at one time
How to Use
How show or hide all ref. circles
1. Go to View > Visibility > Ref. Circles or click on the icon in the toolbar.
See Also
View > Visibility > Ref. vector
View > Visibility > Ref. Cylinders
What
The Ref. Cylinders command displays or hides all Ref. Cylinders in the Model View.
Why
The Ref. Cylinders command is useful for:
• Viewing all Ref. Cylinders at one time

• Hiding all Ref. Cylinders at one time
How to Use
How show or hide all ref. cylinders
1. Go to View > Visibility > Ref. Cylinders or click on the icon in the toolbar.
See Also
View > Visibility > Ref. Coordinates
What
The Ref. Coordinates command displays or hides all Ref. Coordinates in the Model View.
Why
The Ref. Coordinates command is useful for:
• Viewing all Ref. Coordinates at one time

• Hiding all Ref. Coordinates at one time
How to Use
How show or hide all ref. coordinates
1. Go to View > Visibility > Ref. Coordinates or click the icon in the toolbar.

See Also
What
The GD&Ts command displays or hides all GD&Ts in the Model View.
Why
The GD&Ts command is useful for:
• Viewing all GD&Ts at one time

• Hiding all GD&Ts at one time
How to Use
How show or hide all GD&Ts
1. Go to View > Visibility > GD&Ts or click the icon in the toolbar.
See Also

View > Visibility > Deviations
What
The Deviations command displays or hides all deviations in the Model View.
Why
The Deviations command is useful for:
• Viewing all deviations at one time

• Hiding all deviations at one time
How to Use
How to show or hide all deviations
1. Go to View > Visibility > Deviations or click the icon in the toolbar.
See Also
Insert > Deviation
View > Visibility > Measurements
What
The Measurements command displays or hides all measurement entities in the Model View.

Why
The Measurements command is useful for:
• Viewing all measurement entities at one time

• Hiding all measurement entities at one time
How to Use
How show or hide all measurements
1. Go to View > Visibility > Measurements or click the icon in the toolbar.
See Also
Measure
7.9.2. View > Zoom

The Zoom menu features methods to control zooming entities on Model View.
The Zoom menu is divided into 2 groups used to:
Zoom View
• Area
Zooms in on a specific area.

• Previous Area
Displays a previous area.
• Fit
Fits all entities into the model view.
Create Picture-In-Picture
• PIP
Creates a zoomed view within the model view.
View > Zoom > Area
What
The Area command zooms into a manually selected rectangular area.
Why
The Area command is useful for:
• Zooming in on specific areas of a model
How to Use
How to zoom in on an area
1. Go to View > Zoom > Area or use the Shift+Z keyboard shortcut.

2. Drag-select a rectangular region over the model.
Note:
The Zoom Area command is active until another command runs or the command is ran
again. To go back to a previous viewing area use the View > Zoom > Previous Area
command.
See Also
View > Zoom > Previous Area
View > Zoom > Fit
View > Zoom > PIP
What
The Previous Area command restores the viewing window to the previous view.

Why
The Previous Area command is useful for:
• Zooming to a previous view
How to Use
How to zoom to a previous area
1. Go to View > Zoom > Previous Area or click the icon in the toolbar. The Shift + X
keyboard shortcut can also be used.
Note:
The history of the Zoom Previous Area command is stacked when the Zoom Area command
is executed: however it is unavailable until the Zoom Area command has been executed first.
See Also
View > Zoom > Area
View > Zoom > Fit
View > Zoom > PIP
View > Zoom > Fit
What
The Fit command fits a model into the viewing window.

Why
The Fit command is useful for:
• Zooming a model to fit to the viewing window
How to Use
How to fit a model to the model view
1. Go to View > Zoom > Fit or click the icon in the toolbar. The Ctrl + F keyboard shortcut
can also be used.
Note:
The history of the Zoom Previous Area command is stacked when the Zoom Area command
is executed: however it is unavailable until the Zoom Area command has been executed first.
See Also
View > Zoom > Area
View > Zoom > PIP
View > Zoom > PIP
What

The PIP command creates a pop-up window that zooms onto a specific position.
Event Short Cut / Action

Window Toggle Ctrl + W
Close Window Esc
Move Ctrl + Left Mouse Button
Window Size Ctrl + Mouse Wheel
Magnification Mouse Wheel
Fix Center of Window
Compensate Center (Click and drag the position that you want to
set the center of the window)
Close Window
Edit Window Size
Why
The PIP command is useful for:
• Zooming into precise areas without zooming the entire entity
How to Use
How to zoom using the PIP function
1. Go to View > Zoom > PIP or click the icon in the toolbar. The Ctrl + W keyboard shortcut
can also be used.

See Also
View > Zoom > Area
View > Zoom > Fit
7.9.3. View > Navigate Sections
What
The Navigate Sections command navigates features by utilizing the Back and Forth buttons
. Section appearance options, display options and mode can be changed for selected
sections.
Why
The Navigate Sections command is useful for:
• Navigating through sections
How to Use
How to navigate selections
1. Go to View > Navigate Sections or click the icon in the toolbar.
2. Use the Back and Forth buttons to navigate through the sections of a model.
Options in Detail
Section – Selects a section feature.
Edit Current Section – Enters the Section mode for the currently navigated section.
Appearance Options
Show Deviation – Shows or hides deviation for a current section.
Show Nominal Geometry – Shows or hides a current nominal section.
Show Scan Geometry – Shows or hides a current scan section.

Show Tags – Shows or hides tags on a current section.
Show Ref. Geometries – Shows or hides ref. geometries for a current section.
Show GD&Ts – Shows or hides GD&T for a current section.
Display Options
Use Tolerance Color – Displays a green tolerance color on a section deviation.
Whisker Multiplier – Adjusts the length of a whisker for deviation.
Whisker Display Ratio – Adjusts the display ratio of a whisker for deviation.
7.9.4. View > Mesh Display Mode
What
The Mesh Display Mode sets the display mode of a mesh by utilizing the following mode types:
• Point Set – Draws only poly vertices.

• Wireframe – Draws only the edges of faces.
• Shaded – Draws shaded faces.
• Shaded With Edges – Draws shaded faces with edges.
• Texture – Draws textures.
• Region – Draws regions.

Point Set: F5 Wireframe: F6
Shaded: F7 Shaded With Edges: F8
Why
The Mesh Display Mode is useful for:
• Displaying mesh using one of the available display filters
How to Use
How to select a mesh display mode
1. Go to View > Mesh Display Mode > Point Set / Wireframe / Shaded / Shaded With
Edge or click the icon in the toolbar.
7.9.5. View > Body Display Mode
What
The Body Display Mode sets the display mode of a surface or solid body by utilizing the following
mode types:
• Wireframe – Draws only the edges of bodies.

• Hidden Line – Draws all hidden lines on a body as dotted lines.
• Shaded – Draws all shaded faces.

• Shaded With Edges – Draws shaded faces with edges.
Wireframe Hidden Line
Shaded Shaded With Edges
Why
The Body Display Mode is useful for:
• Displaying bodies using one of the available display filters
How to Use
How to select a body display mode
1. Go to View > Body Display Mode > Wireframe / Hidden Line / Shaded / Shaded With
Edge or click the icon in the toolbar.

7.9.6. View > Viewpoint
What
The Viewpoint commands set the view direction as one of seven pre-defined views and can also be
used to rotate, flip and align a model’s view.
Add
Captures a custom viewpoint.
Viewpoint
Viewpoints
Controls preset views of a model.

Front Back
Left Right
Top Bottom
Isometric Bottom
Rotate CCW

Rotate CW
Flip
Align View
Sets the view direction in the Model View by aligning to an entity.
Before Align View After Align View
Note:
The Align View function can be reversed by holding the Ctrl button on the keyboard while using the
function.
Why
The Viewpoint command is useful for:
• Setting the viewpoint of a model in the model view

How to Use
How to select a viewpoint
1. Go to View > Viewpoint > Front / Back / Left / Right / Top / Bottom / Isometric or click
See Also
7.9.7. View > Viewport
What
The Viewport commands set the viewing window a pre-set view layout, each having its own
properties.
1 View – Displays one view.
2 Vertical Views – Displays the view into two vertical panes.

2 Horizontal Views – Displays the view into two horizontal panes.
3 Left – Horizontal Views – Displays the view into three panes: two split panes on the left
side and one full horizontal pane on the right side.
3 Right – Horizontal Views – Displays the view into three panes: two split panes on the
right side and one full horizontal pane on the left side.

3 Top–Vertical Views – Displays the view into three panes: two split panes on the top half
and one full horizontal pane on the bottom half.
3 Bottom–Vertical Views – Displays the view into three panes: two split panes on the
bottom half and one full horizontal pane on the top half.
4 Views - Displays the view into four equal sized panes.

Why
The Viewport command is useful for:
• Setting the viewport window mode in the model view
How to Use
How to select a viewport
1. Go to View > Viewport > 1 View / 2 Vertical Views / 2 Horizontal Views / 3 Left –
Horizontal Views / 3 Right – Horizontal Views / 3 Top – Vertical Views / 3 Bottom –
Vertical Views / 4 Views or click the icon in the toolbar.
7.9.8. View > Light Properties
What
The Light Properties command enables changing of the direction or the color of a light source.

Why
The Light Properties command is useful for:
• Customizing the lighting conditions of the viewing area
How to Use
How to set light properties
1. Go to View > Light Properties or click on the icon in the toolbar.
2. Drag light sources to desired positions in the model view. The shadow will change while
the light source is altered.

Options in Detail
Methods
Light – Sets the color of each light source.
Light 1 – Sets the color of light 1.
Reset – Resets all light settings back to default.
See Also
7.9.9. View > View Clip
What
The View Clip command enables viewing of a model by clipping away a part of it.

Why
The View Clip command is useful for:
• Clipping away an area of a model to inspect it
How to Use
How to clip a view
1. Go to View > View Clip or click the icon in the toolbar.
2. Select the Inside Box option and a bounding box used to select the clipping area will
appear.
3. The dimensions of the box can be adjusted by dragging the blue arrows or the green
points.

Options in Detail
Methods
Use View Clip – Toggles the view clip on or off.
Below Plane – Defines a cutting plane and clips all model data above it. The Position and
Normal Direction options of the plane can be defined unless the View Align option is used, in
which case the normal of the plane aligns to the screen direction.
Between Two Planes – Defines two cutting planes and clips all model data outside of the two
planes. The Position or Normal Direction options of the plane can be defined unless the View
Align option is used, in which case the normal of the plane aligns to the screen direction. The
Depth option can be used to set the distance between two preview planes.
Inside Box – Defines a cutting box and clips all model data outside of the box. The box can be
resized in the Model View.
Reset – Resets view clipping to default.
Plane Options
Position – Sets the position of the view clip plane.
X – Sets the X position.
Y – Sets the Y position.
Z – Sets the Z position.
Normal Direction – Sets the direction of the normal.
X – Sets the X position.
Y – Sets the Y position.

Z – Sets the Z position.
View Align – Aligns the normal direction to the global coordinates.
See Also
7.9.10. View > Annotation Alignment
What
The Annotation Alignment command selects a method of annotation display in the Model View.
There are three different types of annotation alignment:
• Snapped: Aligns annotations without overlapping and can be repositioned.

• Automatic: Aligns annotations near the border of the Model View and cannot be repositioned.
• Close To Object: Aligns annotations that cannot be repositioned near a model which might
cause overlapping.
Why
The Annotation Alignment command is useful for:
• Setting an annotation display method
How to Use
How to select an annotation display method
1. Go to View > Annotation Alignment > Snapped / Automatic / Close To Object or click
the desired icon in the toolbar.
See Also
View > Annotation Display Control
7.9.11. View > Annotation Display Control
What
The Annotation Display Control command controls items in annotations such as fonts and item
visibility. This command can be directly accessed in the pop-up menu or by right clicking on an entity
in the Model View.
Why
The Annotation Display Control command is useful for:
• Setting control items in annotations
How to Use
How to change annotation display controls
1. Create a comparison point.
2. Go to View > Annotation Display Control or click the icon in the toolbar.
3. Select Comparison Point in Annotation Types. Change the font color to red and
uncheck the Shadow option.
Uncheck Nominal Pos. and Dir. in Property Visibility.

Click the Apply button.
4. The display of the annotation will be changed.
Options in Detail
Annotation Types – Selects a type of annotation to edit.
Format – Changes font type and color.
Preset Management – Edits default annotation and simple annotation properties or adds a new
preset. To remove all existing presets click the Clear All button. To generate a default and simple
annotation click the Get Defaults button.
Default Preset Simple Preset
Property Visibility – Displays selected items in annotations.

Arrangement For – Sets the display order of items using the up and down arrows buttons. To
make a group select vector-type items that have X, Y and Z values or scalar-type items that have
a gap distance and click the button .
Ungrouped Grouped
Result Color From Colorbar– Applies the background color of tags from a position’s deviation
color defined by the colorbar. If this option is not checked, the pass or fail color will be applied.
Color from Colorbar Color from Pass / Fail
Hide Property Name – This option is activated when only one option except name is checked
in the Property Visibility list. This option hides property name and show only value.
Show Property Name Hide Property Name
Use Label Instead of Annotation – This option displays only the name of geometry. This option
is available only for ref. geometries which have its scan pair geometry.
Show Property Name Hide Property Name
See Also
View > Annotation Alignment
7.9.12. View > Maximize View Area
What
The Maximize View Area command maximizes the viewing area in the Model View by hiding other
menu items such as menu bars, tool palettes and toolbars. When the Report tab is selected only the
menu for generating reports will be displayed and all others will be hidden. The keyboard shortcut
for this command is F12.
Why
The Maximize View Area command is useful for:
• Maximizing viewing space in the Model View
How to Use
How to maximize the viewing area
1. Go to View > Maximize View Area or click the icon in the toolbar.
Note:
Once the Maximize View Area button is clicked, the name will change to Restore View Area. Click the
Restore View Area button to return back to the original area size.

7.10. Add-Ins
The Add-Ins menu has various functions that are used to handle point clouds and polygons and
generate complete polygon data.
The Add-Ins menu is divided into five tool groups used to:
Import and Register Scan Data

• Import Large Data
Imports large scan files using the Suppress option to manage data and memory.
• Import & Split

Splits ASC, STL, OBJ, and PLY scan data file formats by the number of vertices or number of meshes
when importing.
• Global Register
Aligns scan data files globally.
• Register Target
Aligns target scan data files automatically using alignment spheres.
Triangulate and Merge Scan Data

• 2D Triangulate
Creates a polygonal mesh from scan points.
• 3D Triangulate
Converts a full 3D point cloud to a polygonal mesh.
• Triangulate/Merge Large Data

Triangulates and merges meshes or point clouds.
• Surface Merge
Creates a single mesh from several scan shots.
• Volume Merge
Creates a single mesh from several scan shots by utilizing a volumetric method.
• Combine
Joins selected point clouds or meshes together into a single point cloud or mesh.
Control Normal
• Find Scan Direction
Finds and shows the scan directions of a selected scan data.
• Generate Vertex Normal

Creates normal information for a point cloud without creating polygonal meshes.
• Reverse Normal
Flips the normal direction of point clouds or meshes.
Modify Scan Data

• Delete Poly-Faces
Removes poly-faces without entering the Mesh mode.
• Trim Mesh
Cuts off regions surrounded by reference curves on a mesh or aligns poly-edges along reference
curves.
Deviation
• Contour Curve From Whole Deviation
Converts the color map where a Whole Deviation is applied to a contour curve type.
7.10.1. Add-Ins > Import Large Data
What
The Import Large Data is similar to File > Import Scan Data. Differences between the two
commands are Run Inspection Process and Suppress. In Import Large Data, there is no Run
Inspection Process option and there is Suppress option to manage data and memory by swapping
the data dynamically between in physical memory and in hard disk.
Why
The Import Large Data command is useful for:
• Importing large scan files with Suppress option which manages data and memory

Options in Detail
Unit – Displays a dialog box to select a proper unit if the size of imported data is too large.
7.10.2. Add-Ins > Import & Split
What
The Import & Split command splits scan data by the number of vertices or number of meshes while
importing ASC, STL, OBJ, and PLY file formats. If data files are too large to import at one time this
command features the Suppress option in the Import dialog box which separates the file and loads
them onto the hard disk drive one at a time.
Why
The Import & Split command is useful for:
• Importing large scan files as split vertices or meshes
Options in Detail
Split By Number Of Vertices – Splits scan data as specified value. If it is set to 1000, every scan
data will contain 1000 vertices.
Split By Number Of Meshes (or Point Cloud) – Divides a mesh as specified value. If it is set to
3, the input data is divided into three meshes.
Overlap Ratio Among Meshes (or Point Cloud) – Makes overlap region by specified ratio
among split meshes.

7.10.3. Add-Ins > Global Register
What
The Global Register command aligns selected scan data globally like Global And Fine of Align.
Note:
The command is activated when there are two data at least.
Why
The Global Register command is useful for:
• Aligning scan data
How to Use
How to align multiple scans globally
1. Go to Add-Ins > Global Register or click on the icon in the toolbar.
2. Select all meshes as Moving.

Options in Detail
Reference / Moving – To fix the position of scan data click the Reference button and select scan
data. If the position does not matter, click the Moving button and select scan data. All scan data
can be included in the Moving group.
Sample Ratio – Large data sets can be sampled using 1/1, 1/4, 1/9, 1/16, 1/25, 1/36, 1/49 and
1/64 sampling ratios. This will not affect registration result but will greatly decrease processing
time.
More Options
Max. Iteration Count – Specifies the number of times a registration iterates.
Max. Average Deviation – Judges if registration results are good enough based on deviation
criteria. The system will try to make the average deviation of a final model less than the value
specified as the Max. Iteration Count.
Apply Only Small Transform – Considers an entire overlapped region well aligned and only
makes a small transformation. It is recommended to check this option if there are few geometric
features in the overlapped region.
Use Only Reliable Scan Data – Leaves boundary vertices out of consideration when a
registration is performed and doesn't regard vertices as noise.
Do Not Align Between Moving Object – Performs an alignment between the Reference group
and Moving group only.
Update View & Histogram – Updates the Model View and Histogram in real-time during
calculation and displays registration results. This option lengthens the operation time.
See Also
7.10.4. Add-Ins > Register Target
What
The Register Target command roughly aligns meshes by matching target alignment spheres.
Note:
The command is activated when history of Inspection Feature is rolled to Scan Data inspection feature. To
make the rolled status, go to Edit > Roll To Start.
Why
The Register Target command is useful for:
• Combining multiple scans that are too large for one scan
• Combining multiple scans that require the use of target alignment spheres
How to Use
How to align multiple scans by matching target alignment spheres
1. Go to Add-Ins > Register Target or click on the icon in the toolbar.
2. Select all meshes as Meshes targets.

3. Click the Estimate button to automatically get the ball size. When scan data is rough,
the tolerance value can be increased. When scan data is smooth, the tolerance value can
be decrease to help accurately find spheres.
Options in Detail
Selection Methods
Scan Data – Select meshes or point clouds.
Shared Scan Folder – Selects a folder to align files from.
Select Share Folder – Chooses a designated shared scan folder.
Ball Radius
Acceptable Tolerance – Specifies the allowable tolerance for the radius of target spheres.
Min. Size Of Cluster – Specifies the minimum number of poly-faces/vertices of a target sphere.
Max. Size Of Cluster – Specifies the maximum number of poly-faces/vertices of a target sphere.
More Options
Ignore Spike Faces – Ignores spiky faces on targets.
Use Curvature – Separates regions by curvature.

Note:
Target spheres must be disconnected from the rest of the scan to be found automatically, or manually
located.
See Also
Edit > Roll To Start
7.10.5. Add-Ins > 2D Triangulate
What
The 2D Triangulate command creates a polygonal mesh from scan points. First, the scan vertices in
three dimensional space are projected onto a two dimensional plane specified by a user. Then a
triangulation process is applied to the projected points and triangular faces are created. This
command can be applied to only point clouds. Triangulation of mesh is tried is not enabled for this
command.
Note:
If this command is applied to a PTS formatted point cloud, the triangulation process will be performed in
its local coordinate system and all scan vertices will be projected onto the local XY plane before
triangulation.
After projection if overlapping areas remain, change the projection direction or triangulation method.
Note:
The command will be activated when the history of an Inspection Feature is rolled to Scan Data inspection
feature using the Edit > Roll To Start command.
Why
The 2D Triangulate command is useful for:
• Creating a polygonal mesh from scan points
How to Use
How to create a polygonal mesh
1. Go to Add-Ins > 2D Triangulate or click the icon in the toolbar.
2. Select a point cloud and choose the Planar method.
3. Click the Estimate button next to the Maximum Edge Length Is Larger Than
option to automatically estimate the average distance among points.
Options in Detail
Point Clouds – Selects point clouds.
Projection Method
Planar – Projects scan vertices onto a plane and triangulates them. The Projection Direction is
the direction scan points are projected onto a plane. When -Z is selected, points are projected
along the negative Z direction. This is useful for scan data that is located entirely in front of the
XY plane and generates non-overlapped projected points. When +Z is selected, points are
projected along the positive Z direction. This is useful for scan data that is located entirely behind
the XY plane and generates non-overlapped projected points. When Current Viewing Direction
is selected, the vertices are projected along the current view direction. This is useful for scan data

that can generate non-overlapped projected points along the view direction, but not in the -Z
or +Z directions.
Spherical – Used to triangulate spherical scan data obtained by certain types of scanners such
as long range scanners. When selected, a Center node will be displayed in the dialog tree. It is
used to decide the scanner position. Normally the default values (X - 0, Y - 0, Z - 0) can be used
because in most situations the scanner's position is the origin in the world coordinate system.
However, when scan data was transformed before triangulation, new X, Y, Z values may be
necessary.
Cylindrical – Used to triangulate cylindrical scan data obtained by certain types of scanners.
When selected, a Center node and an Axis Direction node will be displayed in the dialog tree.
The Center node is used to decide the scanner position. Normally the default values (X - 0, Y - 0,
Z - 0) can be used because in most situations the scanner's position is the origin in the world
coordinate system. However, when scan data was transformed before triangulation new X, Y, Z
values may be necessary.
Face Removal Criteria

Maximum Edge Length Is Larger Than – Removes faces that have abnormally long edges by
inputting a value or using the down and up arrows to adjust the default value to a proper one.
Any faces that have a longest edge length bigger than this value will be removed. Clicking the
Estimate button will average the distance between points.
Area Is Larger Than – Removes faces with large area values by inputting a value or use the down
and up arrows to adjust the default value. Any faces that have an area value that is bigger than
this value will be removed.
Max/Min Edge Length Ratio Is Larger Than – Removes faces that have unbalanced edges by
inputting a value or using the down and up arrows to adjust the default value. Any faces that
have a ratio between the longest edge and the shortest edge larger than this value will be
removed.
Angle Between Projection Direction And Face Normal Direction Is Larger Than – Removes
faces that have normal directions with large angles values in the projection direction by
inputting a value or using the down and up arrows to adjust the default value.
More Options
Suppress Mesh After Triangulation – Automatically unload shells after triangulation. When
working with large data sets, it is recommended to check this option.
See Also

7.10.6. Add-Ins > 3D Triangulate
What
The 3D Triangulate command converts a full 3D point cloud to a polygonal mesh. This command
can be applied to only point clouds. Triangulation of a mesh is not allowed in this command.
Note:
Why
The 3D Triangulate command is useful for:
• Creating a polygonal mesh from a 3D point cloud
How to Use
How to create a polygonal mesh
1. Go to Add-Ins > 3D Triangulate or click the icon in the toolbar.
2. Select a point cloud and choose the Planar method.
3. Click the Estimate button next to the Distance Criteria Connect To Vertices

option to automatically estimate the average distance among points.
Options in Detail
Point Clouds – Selects point clouds.
Distance Parameters
Distance Criteria Connect To Vertices – Automatically calculates the distance criteria for
connecting to vertices by clicking the Estimate button. Values will be standard distances for
connecting vertices.
More Options
Assume Vertices Are Densely Placed Along A Direction – Triangulates scan-line type point
clouds.
Crease Angle – Specifies the smallest angle between the normal vectors of to-be-generated
polygonal faces. For polygonal model created by triangulation, there should be no polygonal
faces with angles smaller than the angle between its normal and the normal of its adjacent faces.
Large Data Mode – Helps for working with large data. If point cloud is too large to be handled
by current physical memory, use this option.
Suppress Scan Data After Triangulate – Automatically suppresses point clouds after
triangulation. When working with large data sets, it is recommended to use this option.

See Also
7.10.7. Add-Ins > Triangulate/Merge Large Data
What
The Triangulate/Merge Large Data command triangulates and merges meshes or point clouds. For
processing large data, suppressed meshes or point clouds can be selected in the command. The
textures on meshes or point clouds will be converted to colored points after merging and
triangulation.
Note:
Why
The Triangulate/Merge Large Data command is useful for:
• Triangulating and merging large data
How to Use
How to triangulate and merge large data
1. Go to Add-Ins > Triangulate/Merge Large Data or click the icon in the toolbar.
2. Select the meshes or point clouds. If using large data files, suppress them first.

3. Move the slider of the Mesh Density option towards Dense.
4. Click the OK button. A merged single mesh will be created.
Options in Detail
Mesh / Point Cloud – Selects meshes or point clouds. Suppressed meshes or point clouds can
be selected.
Mesh Density – Determines the density of the mesh when creating poly-faces.
Sparse Dense
Remove Original Data – Removes original data.
Reduce Noise – Removes noisy poly-faces.
Disable Reduce Noise Enable Reduce Noise
Remove Redundant Points – Removes redundant poly-vertices for better triangulation results.

Use Original File Data – Removes an original point cloud after triangulation.
See Also
7.10.8. Add-Ins > Surface Merge
What
The Surface Merge command creates a single mesh from several scan shots. During the merging
process, overlapped regions are removed and neighboring boundaries are stitched together.
Note:
The command is activated when there are at least two meshes.
Why
The Surface Merge command is useful for:
• Merging several scan data
How to Use
How to merging scan data by using the Surface Merge command
1. Go to Add-Ins > Surface Merge or click the icon in the toolbar.
2. Select desired meshes as Meshes.

Options in Detail
Meshes – Selects meshes.
Output Resolution Control

Estimated Num. Of Face – Calculates and displays the rough count of total faces when the
Estimate button is clicked.
Ratio – Sets the Reduction Ratio to reduce the total number of faces from original data.
100% 50%
Moving the slider of the Preserve High Curvature Regions option towards More will generate
more poly-faces in highly rounded areas than in flat areas.
Less More

Allowable Deviation – Sets the allowable deviation when performing a surface merge.
More Options
Scale Of Overlap Region Deviation Criteria – Creates better merged results when mesh size is
very small and there are not many overlapping regions.
Use Original File Data – Used to specify a new Sampling Ratio even if a different sampling ratio
was used when importing the file. This option is enabled when importing grid type data.
See Also
7.10.9. Add-Ins > Volume Merge
What
The Volume Merge command creates a single mesh from several scan shots. It merges meshes by
utilizing a volumetric method.
Note:
This method can generate smoother results at overlapping regions than surface merges with meshes
that have complex boundaries or meshes that were poorly registered.
When meshes have complex boundaries, the processing speed can be faster than that of surface
merging, but for simple meshes, it can take more time.
Note:
The command will be activated when there are at least two data files.
Why
The Volume Merge command is useful for:
• Merging several scan data by volumetric method
How to Use
How to merging scan data by using the Volume Merge command
1. Go to Add-Ins > Volume Merge or click the icon in the toolbar.
2. Select desired meshes as Meshes.
Options in Detail
Meshes – Selects meshes.
Output Resolution Control

Scale Of Average Edge Length – Sets the ratio of edge lengths of a merged mesh. If a number
larger than 1 is used, the edge length of the merged mesh will be larger than the edge length of
the original meshes. If it is set as 1.0, the number of faces created from volume merging will be
similar with that from surface merging.
Estimated Num. Of Face – Calculates and displays a rough count of total faces.
Ratio – Reduces the total number of faces from the original data by setting the Reduction Ratio.

100% 50%
Moving the Preserve High Curvature Regions slider towards More, will generate more poly-
faces in highly rounded areas than in flat areas.
Less More
Allowable Deviation – Sets the allowable deviation when performing a volume merge.
More Options
Fast Volume Calculation – Projects meshes without overlapping to speed up volume
calculation.
Optimize Face Shape – Applies decimation and constraint smoothing to meshes, automatically
deleting erroneous faces such as spikes.
Large Data Mode – Helps for working with large data. If point cloud is too large to be handled
by current physical memory, use this option.
Suppress Mesh After Merging – Internally suppresses divided sub models individually. This
helps when working with very large data files.
Use Original File Data – Used to specify a new Sampling Ratio even if a different sampling ratio
was used when importing the file. This option is enabled when importing grid type data.
See Also

7.10.10. Add-Ins > Combine
What
The Combine command joins selected point clouds or meshes together into a single point cloud or
a mesh without removing overlapping areas.
Note:
The command is activated when there are at least two data files.
Why
• Combining several point clouds or meshes into a single point cloud or mesh
How to Use
How to combine meshes
1. Click Add-Ins > Combine.
2. Select point clouds or meshes.
3. Click the OK button. Meshes will be combined.

Options in Detail
Type To Combine – Chooses the entity type to combine.
Remove Overlap Region – Creates a combined point cloud or mesh after removing overlapped
regions.
Before Combining Combine Without Remove Combine With Remove

Overlap Region Overlap Region
7.10.11. Add-Ins > Find Scan Direction
What
The Find Scan Direction command finds and shows the scan directions of selected scan data.
Note:
When applying the 2D Triangulate operation to create polygons from point clouds that do not include
scan directions, the normal direction of each shell may be different from the direction anticipated. In this
situation it is better to apply the Find Scan Direction operation to the point clouds before triangulating.

Note:
feature by going to Edit > Roll To Start.
Why
• Combining several point clouds/meshes into a point cloud/mesh
How to Use
How to find the direction of scan data
1. Go to Add-Ins > Find Scan Direction or click the icon in the toolbar.
2. Select desired point clouds as Entities.
4. Click arrows to reverse their direction in the Model View.
Options in Detail
Entities – Selects point clouds or meshes.
Except Entities With Scan Direction – Prevents the selection of entities that already have a scan
direction.
Point Arrange Type – Specifies whether scan data is Grid type or Random type. The point type
helps you to find the scan direction more precisely.
See Also
7.10.12. Add-Ins > Generate Vertex Normal
What
The Generate Vertex Normal command creates normal information for a point cloud without
creating polygonal meshes.
Note:
When a point cloud has normal information, it will be displayed more realistically no matter what Shading
Method is used. If a point cloud does not have normal information, pseudo vertex rendering using depth
information will be applied.
Note:
This command will be activated when the history of an Inspection Feature is rolled to Scan Data inspection

Why
• Generating the normal information of a point cloud
How to Use
How to generate normal information
1. Go to Add-Ins > Generate Vertex Normal or click the icon in the toolbar.
2. Select all point clouds.
3. Click the Next Stage button. The normal of two point clouds is not correct.
4. Click the Point Cloud button and select two point clouds.
5. Click the Reverse Normal button then click the OK button.
Options in Detail
Points Clouds – Selects point clouds.

Except Entities With Scan Direction – Prevents the selection of point clouds that already have
vertex normals.
See Also
7.10.13. Add-Ins > Reverse Normal
What
The Reverse Normal command flips the normal of point clouds or meshes.
Note:
This command will be activated when the history of an Inspection Feature is rolled to Scan Data inspection
Why
• Flipping the normal of point clouds/meshes
How to Use
How to flip a normal
1. Go to Add-Ins > Reverse Normal or click the icon in the toolbar.
2. Select point clouds as Entities. In the image below the left entity is the point cloud.

Options in Detail
Entities – Selects point clouds or meshes.
Selection Type To Reverse Normal – Selects an item type to reverse.
See Also
7.10.14. Add-Ins > Delete Poly-Faces
What
The Delete Poly-Faces command quickly removes poly-faces.

Why
The Delete Poly-Faces command is useful for:
• Deleting individual irregular poly-faces from multiple meshes at one time

• Deleting extraneous poly-faces from scan data
How to Use
How to delete poly-faces from scan data
1. Go to Add-Ins > Delete Poly-Faces or click the icon in the toolbar.
2. Select poly-faces to remove.
3. Click the Delete Selected Entities button or press the Delete key.
Options in Detail

Deleting
Select Poly-Faces – Selects poly-faces to delete.
See Also
Edit > Delete
7.10.15. Add-Ins > Trim Mesh
What
The Trim Mesh command cuts off regions surrounded by reference curves on a mesh and aligns
poly-edges along reference curves.
Why
The Trim Mesh command is useful for:
• Deleting unwanted areas of mesh

• Deleting extraneous mesh from scan data
• Using child curve features to cut a mesh
How to Use
A. How to trim meshes from scan data using the By Curve method
1. Go to Add-Ins > Trim Mesh or click the icon in the toolbar.

2. Select the By Curve method. Choose a Mesh and Curves. Set the Method to Split Poly-
Faces.
B. How to trim meshes from scan data using the By Custom Path
method
1. Go to Add-Ins > Trim Mesh or click the icon in the toolbar.
2. Select the By Custom Path method. Created a desired path.

.
4. Select the remaining Region and click the OK button to complete the command.
Options in Detail
Methods
By Custom Path – Trims a mesh using a custom path.
Drawing Custom Path Undo Path Close Path
By Curve – Trims a mesh using existing closed curves.
Trim Path – Undoes, closes and discards paths.

Curve Options
Mesh – Selects mesh.
Curves – Selects Curves.
Method – Selects a method.
Rearrange Poly-Vertices – Trims by projecting nearby poly-vertices onto selected curves.
Split Poly-Faces – Trims by dividing poly-faces with selected curves at intersecting

positions between poly-edges and curves.
Max. Curve To Poly-Vertex Distance – Sets the maximum allowable distance from
a curve to a poly vertex.
Max. Edge Splitting Ratio – Sets the maximum allowable splitting ratio of edges.
Remaining Region
Remaining Region – Selects what regions will remain.
7.10.16. Add-Ins > Contour Curve From Whole

Deviation
What
The Contour Curve From Whole Deviation command converts a color map where Whole Deviation
is applied to a contour curve type. It also extracts the boundary of a deviation map to curves. The
created curves can be exported using the File > Export command and can be used to compare and
analyze results in another programs.

Why
The Contour Curve From Whole Deviation command is useful for:
• Converting deviation from the Whole Deviation to the contour curve type
How to Use
How to convert Whole Deviation to contour curve type
1. Go to Add-Ins > Contour Curve From Whole Deviation or click the icon in the toolbar
2. Select the desired whole deviation in the Select Whole Dev Entity option.
3. Click OK. The contour curves will be created.
Options in Detail
Select Whole Dev Entity – Selects a desired Whole Deviation entity. If the Whole Deviation
command has been performed several times, one entity should be selected from them.
Min. Curve Length – Specifies the length of curves to be displayed in the Model View. When set
to a small value, the displayed contour curves will be more detailed.

10mm 50mm
Smoothness – Smooth curves. When it is set to a value closer to Min, curves will be less rounded.
When it is set to a value closer to Max, curves will be more rounded.
Max Min
7.11. Help
Context
The Help > Context menu loads the contents and index table of the help file into the Help
window. When a specific item is double-clicked, the context will appear in the Help tab of the
working window. To access documentation on a specific operation while a dialog tree is floating,
press the F1 key while in that operation.
Quick Start Guide

Going to Help > Quick Start Guide loads the quick start guide into the Help window. The purpose
of the quick start guide is to give a “quick start” understanding of the inspection processes in the
application. By working through the tutorial procedures, the fundamentals of the application can
be learned.
Tutorial
Going to Help > Tutorial loads the Tutorial that is installed with software.
Release Note
Going to Help > Release Note loads the release note for that version of the application that shows
the new and enhanced functions and fixed bugs in the current version and previous versions.
Check For Update

Going to Help > Check For Update checks the version of the application installed on your
machine and downloads the latest patch files if any exist.
Note:
There are two methods to update the application:
1. Letting the application automatically check when it is started.
2. Manually using the Help > Check For Update command.
License Information
Going to Help > License Information displays the current license information, like license type
and expiry date.
Activate License
The Help > Activate License command activates a current license. Follow the on screen
instructions to complete the activation.
Activate Maintenance
The Help > Activate Maintenance command activates a maintenance license.
Deactivate License
The Help > Deactivate License command can be used to deactivate your current license. Follow
the on screen instructions to complete the deactivation.
Launch Performance Profiler

Going to Help > Launch Performance Profiler runs a utility which analyzes the graphic driver,
memory, processor speed, etc. of a PC and sets the best values in the Hardware tab in the
Preferences. After performing the Performance Profiler the resulting file will be saved as an .htm
document in the installation folder with the name of the PC. This document contains the hardware
specifications of your system.
Note:

The Performance Profiler can also be found in the Windows’ Start menu, but this command doesn’t save
the results as an .htm file and its calculation speed is quicker than in the version found in the Help menu.
If a system setting, for example a new graphic card has been installed, use the Performance Profiler in
the Windows’ Start menu to get the system information and register changed settings to the application.
When running the Performance Profiler, it is better to close all other applications for accurate results. The
profiler takes about 2 or 3 minutes to complete the performance evaluation.
Support
Going to Help > Support loads the Support tab which connects to the solution center. The Online
Support Page in the Support tab can be searched for information. The support tab provides helpful
information such as the latest tutorials, FAQs, and technical tips. As well, feedback for Geomagic
products can be sent.
The Online Support Page can be accessed by going to:
https://rapidform.zendesk.com/home
About
The Help > About menu displays a window including information about the application, such as
the version of the product, the product ID and copyright information. Click the window to close it.

8. Glossary
This chapter explains the definition of terms used in Geomagic Verify. The following sections define
many of the basic terms and concepts you should know in order to use Geomagic effectively.
ACIS
A standard computer file format for exchanging CAD data, usually from Auto CAD.
Actual Size
A general term for the size of a produced feature. This term includes the actual mating size and the
actual local sizes.
Actual Mating Envelope
This term is defined according to the type of feature, as follows"

a) For an external feature. A similar perfect counterpart of smallest size that can be circumscribed
about the feature so that it just contacts the surface at the highest points. For example, a smallest
cylinder of perfect form or two parallel planes of perfect form at minimum separation that just
contact(s) the highest points of the surface(s).
b) For an internal feature. A similar perfect counterpart of largest size that can be inscribed within
the feature so that it just contacts the surface at the highest points. For example, a largest cylinder
of perfect form or two parallel planes of perfect form at maximum separation that just contact(s)
the highest points of the surface(s).
For features controlled by orientation or positional tolerances, the actual mating envelope is
oriented relative to the appropriate datum(s), for example, perpendicular to a primary datum plane.
ASME Y14.5M-1994
The national standard for dimensioning and tolerancing in the United States. ASME stands for
American Society of Mechanical Engineers. The Y14.5 is the standard number. "M" is to indicate the
standard is metric, and 1994 is the date the standard was officially approved.
ASCII
American Standard Code for Information Interchange (ASCII). Typically a representation of text files,
as opposed to binary files.
Aspect Ratio
Geomagic Verify | Glossary 1174

Ratio of width to height.
Axis
A straight line that can be used to create model geometry, features, or patterns. An axis can be made
in a number of different ways, including using the intersection of two planes. See temporary axis,
reference geometry.
Accuracy
The accuracy is the closeness of a measurement to the actual feature. The opposite of accuracy is
uncertainty, which is an inverse perspective of the same value.
Alignment
The process of aligning two objects in a common coordinate system. Commonly refers to aligning
scan data to reference objects in inspection applications.
Basic Dimension
A numerical value used to describe a theoretically exact size, true profile, orientation, or location of
a feature or datum target.
Bitmap
A Bitmap is a pixel by pixel image.
Boundary
A series of poly-edges that form the borders of a model or an internal hole
Bounding Box
A bounding box is a rectangular box that fully encloses mesh data. It is oriented to the world
coordinate system.
Body
A 3D object. It is composed of one or more components. When a body contains more than one
component, it is a disjointed body.

CAD
Computer Aided Design.
CAM
Computer Aided Manufacturing. CAM is a set of technologies that convert designs into data used to
run the manufacturing process.
CAI
Computer Aided Inspection. CAI is a set of technologies that convert designs into data used to run
the inspection process.
CMM
Coordinate Measuring Machine (CMM). A contact 3D scanner using physical touch used mostly in
manufacturing and can be very precise. CMMs require contact with the object being scanned which
is a disadvantage when touching the object may modify or damage it. Compared to non-contact
optical laser scanning, scanning within a touch CMM is relatively slow.
Calibration
The process of verifying that a measuring instrument is within its designated accuracy. Calibration
usually consists of formal comparison with a standard traceable to national standards (NIST in US)
and certified references.
Control Points
A set of points that parameterize and control the shape of a NURBS curve or surface.
Curvature
This is a geometricaly-defined term which refers to the amount of roundness located at a point on a
curve or surface. If a curve is flat, then its curvature is zero. As the curve becomes more rounded, the
radius of curvature goes down and the curvature goes up. Curvature 'k' = 1 / rho, where rho is
defined as the radius of curvature. These two values ('k' and 'rho') are inversely related.
Curve
A curve is a geometric function that describes the path of a point moving through space. In the
application, curves are displayed by sampling the geometric description of the curve at specified
intervals, then drawing line segments between these sample points.
Continuity
The continuity between the patches of a B-surface or segments of a B-surface can be of various levels:

‘C' Continuity for curves and surfaces:
C0 means that the positions are continuous in both magnitude and direction.
C1 means that the positions and first derivatives are continuous in both magnitude and direction.
C2 means that the positions and first and second derivatives are continuous in both magnitude and
direction.
'G' Continuity for curves:

G0 means that the positions are continuous in direction but not necessarily in magnitude.
G1 means that the positions and first derivatives are continuous in direction but not necessarily in
magnitude.
G2 means that the positions and first and second derivatives are continuous in direction but not
necessarily in magnitude.
'G' Continuity for surfaces:

G0 means that the positions are continuous in direction but not necessarily in magnitude.
G1 means that the positions and surface normals are continuous in direction but not necessarily in
magnitude.
G2 means that the positions, surface normals, and curvatures are continuous in direction but not
necessarily in magnitude.
Color Map
A color plot visually representing deviations from actual to theoretical.
Datum
A theoretical exact point, axis, or plane derived from the true geometric counterpart of a specified
datum feature. A datum is the origin from which the location or geometric characteristics of the
features of a part are established.
Situation features are used to define the position and/or orientation of a tolerance zone, or to define
the position and/or orientation of the virtual conditions (in the case of complementary requirements,
e.g. maximum material requirement).
Datum System
Ordered list of at least two datums and at most three datums, which may be single or common
datums. A set of symbols and rules that communicate to the drawing user how dimensional
measurements are to be made.
Datum Feature
A feature of a part that is used to establish a datum.

Datum Reference Frame
A datum system is an ordered list of at least one datums and at most three datums, which may be
single or common datums. They are a set of symbols and rules that communicate to the user who is
drawing on how dimensional measurements are to be made.
Datum Target
A specified point, line, or area on a part used to establish a datum. It can also be a portion of an
integral feature (surface) which can be a point, a line or an area.
Decimation
An operation that reduces the number of entities in an object. It attempts to preserve the object's
overall shape and sharp features while simplifying it.
Degrees of Freedom
Describes the numbers of directions of movement and refers to how the position and orientation of
an object is described relative to a coordinate system. In 3D scanning it usually consists of three
linear translations (X, Y, and Z) and three rotations about the three axes (pitch, yaw, and roll).
Deviation
As typically applied to 3D scanning, deviation refers to the difference in the size and shape of a
manufactured part versus its design specifications. Deviation is easily discovered by quality
inspection with the use of color maps and cross-sectional analysis found in CAI applications.
Dimension
A numerical value expressed in appropriate units of measurement and used to define the size,
location, orientation, form, or other geometric characteristics of a part.
Drag-select
The selection of entities by moving the mouse while holding down the left mouse button.
Draft
Draft is incorporated into the wall of a mold so that the opening of the cavity is wider than its base.
Draft allows for easier ejection of the part from the mold.
Extrude

An extrude is the shape created by moving a profile along a path that is line.
Entity
An entity is an item in the model which can be accessed by the application.
Features
A general term applied to a physical portion of a part, such as a surface, pin, tab, hole or slot.
Fillet
A fillet is an operation that rounds a corner of a profile or an edge of a solid / surface to a specified
radius.
Geometries
Geometries are the points, curves and surfaces which specify the shape and position of an element.
Geometric Dimensioning & Tolerancing (GD&T)
Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing is a standard used to define the nominal geometry of
parts and assemblies, to define the allowable variation in form and possibly size of individual
features, and to define the allowable variation between features.
Healing
A series of functions whose purpose is to correct geometric abnormalities contained within a model.
Common functions may include: surface simplification (mapping spline surfaces to analytic shapes
such as planes, cylinders, cones, etc.), poly-face stitching, and poly-edge gap repair. More advanced
functions may include the ability to merge coincident vertices, repair self-intersections, and reduce
and/or redeploy curve and surface control nodes. Programs typically perform healing on geometry
that you import through neutral formats such as IGES, STEP, and SAT with problems caused by
conditions ranging from imprecise geometric definitions to poor entity mapping to poorly written
translator code.

I
IGES
Initial Graphics Exchange Specification, a standard for exchanging geometric information
Inspection
A methodical examination or evaluation of a part to compare it to a set standard or set of

specifications, such as a 3D model, by taking measurements or performing tests on an item of
interest to analyze for inherent flaws or wear from use. Inspection is one of the main applications of
non-contact laser scanning technologies. Types of inspections include First Article Inspection, Last
Article Inspection, In-Line Inspection, In-Process Inspection, etc.
Interpolation
The process of defining a curve (or surface) that passes through a set of points.
ISO
International Standards Organization. Standards are being developed for the specification of
dimensioning and tolerancing annotation in the 3D space.
ISO 1101- 1983
Geometrical tolerancing. Tolerancing of form, orientation, location and run-out.
ISO/FDIS 1101-1998
Geometrical product specification (GPS). Geometrical Tolerancing - Generalities, definitions,

symbols, indication on drawings.
Final Draft International Standard (FDIS). Revision of ISO 1101:1983.
Least Material Condition (LMC)
The condition in which a feature of size contains the least amount of material within the stated limits
if size -- for example, maximum hole diameter, minimum shaft diameter.
Light
A source used to illuminate a model. In the application, there are 4 lights you can use. They are used

to display mesh data with Shaded or Transparent rendering modes. The position of each light source
is shown in the following picture.
LMB
Left Mouse Button.
Loop
A fundamental item of topology representing one boundary of a face as a closed and connected set
of edges.
Maximum Material Condition (MMC)
The condition in which a feature of size contains the maximum amount of material within the stated
limits if size -- for example, minimum hole diameter, maximum shaft diameter.
Merge
Combining two or more scan data sets into one larger data set.
Mesh
A wireframe model showing a 3D digital representation of a physical object. Specifying each edge
of the physical object where two mathematically continuous smooth surfaces meet or by
connecting an object's constituent vertices using straight lines or curves creates the mesh.
Mouse Drag
Moving the mouse while pressing and holding a mouse button.

Mirror
A mirror feature is a copy of a selected feature, mirrored about a plane or planar face.
Multi-Thread
Multithreading computers have hardware support to efficiently execute multiple threads. These are
distinguished from multiprocessing systems (such as multi-core systems) in that the threads have to
share the resources of single core
Noise
Noise is erroneous data resulting from the scanning process, is usually represented as unnecessary
points in point cloud.
Normal
A surface normal at a point on a surface is a vector which is locally perpendicular to the surface.
Normal describes a unit vector.
NURBS
Non-Uniform Rational B-Spline. This is a type of spline where curves pass close to, but not through
control points or knots and is used in spline-based modeling. Also commonly used to describe
NURBS surfaces; which are surfaces comprised of a number of splines in two directions (U and V).
OBJ
An open and widely adopted simple data-format that represents 3D geometry alone, e.g., the
position of each vertex, the texture coordinate associated with a vertex, the normal at each vertex,
and the faces that make each polygon.
Parallel Projection view
Parallel Projection view shows a model without any parallax.

Parallelism
Parallelism is the condition that results when a surface, axis or center plane is exactly parallel to a
datum.
Point Cloud
A point cloud is the computer visualization of the XYZ coordinates that describe a physical object or
environment. Each point represents an actual point on the object or in the environment, and
collectively describes its shape and measurements. Points can be captured individually, such as with
a CMM, or thousands at a time, such as with a 3D laser scanner that captures multiple point sets from
different perspectives that can be merged into a cloud. Point clouds are typically represented by an
unorganized STL file.
Point
A point is a single point construction geometry, which can be used to create other objects.
Poly-edge
A line connecting two adjacent vertices on a polygon.
Polygonal model
A model composed of polygonal faces.
Poly-face
A poly-face is a flat N-sided face composed of N vertices. The application only allows 3-sided faces
which are three poly-edges connected by vertices.
Polyline
A collection of line segments, connected end to end.
Poly-Vertex
A point at which two or more lines or poly-edges intersect. Vertices can be selected for dimensioning,
and many other operations.
Primitives
Pre-defined basic objects, either 2D or 3D, i.e., circle, square, arc, plane or sphere, cube, cylinder, cone,
torus, and various polyhedrons.

Regardless of Feature Size (RFS)
The term used to indicate that a geometric tolerance or datum reference applies at any increment
of size of the feature within its tolerance.
Region
A region is a user-selected set of poly-vertex or poly-face, which is just a temporary set in the job
process. A region is released after the corresponding job is finished.
RMB
Right Mouse Button.
Reference Geometry
Basic geometrical elements, such as planes, axes, and coordinate systems. Reference geometry is
not a body but used to assist in creating features.
Rollback
Enables a model to be returned to a previous point in a construction history. Changes made to a

feature are reflected in subsequent features once Rolled Forward. This command is commonly used
to change the parameters of previous features.
SAT
A file format for 3D solid geometry that is native for any ACIS modeling software developed by
Spatial Technology Corp.
Six sigma
A quality management program to achieve "six sigma" levels of quality. Six Sigma aims to have the
total number of failures in quality, or Customr satisfaction, occur beyond the sixth sigma of
likelihood in a normal distribution of Customrs. Here sigma stands for a step of one standard
deviation; designing processes with tolerances of at least six standard deviations will, on reasonable
assumptions, yield fewer than 3/4 defects in one million.
STL
Stereo Lithography file format. Contains polygonal mesh data defined by vertex, and connections
between them. Can be written in ASCII (text) or binary.

Surface
A surface is used to describe the skin of a 3D geometric element.
Spline
A 2D or 3D curve consisting of several control points.
Silhouette edge
A curve the represents the extent of a cylindrical or curved face when viewed from the side.
Tessellation
Tessellation is the process of subdividing a surface into smaller shapes. Tessellation is used to convert
a Solid, Surface, or Reference object into a polygonal mesh. To create object surface patterns,
tessellation breaks down the surface of an object into manageable polygons. Triangles are
frequently used in drawing graphical objects because computer hardware can easily manipulate
and calculate them.
3-2-1 Rule
A rule that defines the minimum number of points of contact required for a part datum feature with
its primary, secondary, and tertiary datum planes.
Toggle
To switch from one setting to another. The term toggle implies that there are only two possible
settings and that you are switching from the current setting to the other setting.
Tolerance
The value that features of a part are permitted to vary from the specified dimension.
Toolbar
Movable palette of tools that performs operations.
Touch Probe
A Coordinate Measuring Machine (CMM) that requires physical contact with the part to measure it.
Transformation
A change in the size, location, or orientation of an object.

U
UV
Instead of X and Y coordinates, the U and V coordinates are used as a base coordinate system for
representing a 2D-based work space or entity.
Viewports
Windows that display 3D views of models.
Wireframe
One of the display methods for solid and surface bodies. In this mode only the body edges are
displayed and the faces are hidden.
World Coordinates
In 3D space, World Coordinates are a rectangular Cartesian coordinate system used to define the
location of models, lights, cameras, etc. It is independent of viewpoint and display. The origin of the
world coordinate system is (0, 0, 0).
x86
The x86 series of processors includes the Pentium, Pentium Pro, Pentium II, Pentium III, Celeron, and
Athlon as well as the 786, 686, 586, 486, 386, 286, 8086, 8088, etc. It is an exceptionally popular
design (by far the most popular CISC series) in spite of the fact that even its fastest model is
significantly slower than the assorted RISC processors. Many different OSes run on machines built
around x86 processors, including MS-DOS, Windows 3.1, Windows '95, Windows '98, Windows ME,
Windows NT, Windows 2000, Windows CE, Windows XP, GEOS, Linux, Solaris, OpenBSD, NetBSD,
FreeBSD, Mac OS X, OS/2, BeOS, CP/M, etc. A couple different companies produce x86 processors,
but the bulk of them are produced by Intel. It is expected that this processor will eventually be

completely replaced by the Merced, but the Merced development schedule is somewhat behind.
Also, it should be noted that the Pentium III processor has stirred some controversy by including a
"fingerprint" that will enable individual computer usage of web pages etc. to be accurately tracked.

9. Index
Basic Inspection Workflow...........................................45
Basic Knowledge for 3D Scan-based Inspection
2 Process............................................................................72
Batch Process ................................................................. 269
2D Angular Dimension ............................................... 723 Benefits ............................................................................ 202
2D Angularity ................................................................. 761 Best Fit .............................................................................. 342
2D Circularity .................................................................. 744 Body Display Mode ...................................................1121
2D Concentricity ........................................................... 747 Bore Depth...................................................................... 911
2D Elliptical Dimension .............................................. 732 Boundary Curve ............................................................ 838
2D Linear Dimension................................................... 716 Boundary Deviation .................................................... 515
2D Parallelism................................................................. 753 Boundary Entities ......................................................... 311
2D Perpendicularity ..................................................... 757 Breuckmann ................................................................... 567
2D Position ...................................................................... 736 By Color ............................................................................ 320
2D Radial Dimension ................................................... 727 By Criteria ........................................................................ 319
2D Smart Dimension ................................................... 710
2D Straightness ............................................................. 741
2D Symmetry ................................................................. 764 C
2D Triangulate............................................................. 1146
Cache Disk Indicator ................................................... 194
Capture Screen .............................................................. 283
3 Checking Deviations ......................................................84
Circularity ........................................................................ 945
3-2-1 ................................................................................... 354 Client ................................................................................. 224
3D GD&T........................................................................... 496 Color Bar .......................................................................... 159
3D Mouse......................................................................... 200 Combine .............................................................. 634, 1158
3D Triangulate............................................................. 1149 Comparison Point ........................................................ 507
Components .................................................................. 201
Concentricity.................................................................. 952
A Console ............................................................................ 187
Contour Curve From Whole Deviation............... 1169
Adaptive ........................................................................... 364 Convert Current Selection ........................................ 317
Add-Ins .......................................................................... 1139 Convert Curve Entities ............................................... 852
Adjusting the Color Bar and Checking Go / No Go Convert to Mesh ........................................................... 608
Results .......................................................................... 102 Convert XDL ................................................................... 230
Align......................................................................... 338, 623 Coordinate ...................................................................... 356
Aligning Scan Data to Nominal Data ...................... 47 Copy .................................................................................. 327
Alignment .......................................................................... 78 Counterbore ................................................................... 915
All ........................................................................................ 306 Countersink .................................................................... 919
Analyzing ........................................................................... 83 Creaform Portable 3D Scanners ............................. 559
Analyzing Scan Data...................................................... 50 Curve ................................................................................. 384
Angular Dimension ...................................................... 893 Curve Deviation ............................................................ 521
Angularity ........................................................................ 970 Curve Tools ..................................................................... 822
Annotation Alignment ............................................ 1134 Curves .............................................................................1104
Annotation Display Control ................................... 1135 Custom Region.............................................................. 309
Application of 3D Scan Data ...................................... 58 Cut ...................................................................................... 326
Area ................................................................................. 1114 Cylindricity ...................................................................... 949
Assign Tolerance ........................................................... 611
Auto ................................................................................... 340
Auto Segment ................................................................ 689 D
Datum ......................................................................350, 708
B Datum ............................................................................... 874
Decimate ......................................................................... 674
Basic Concept of User Interface ................................ 28 Defeature......................................................................... 669
Basic Entity Terminology ............................................. 20 Delete ............................................................................... 328
Geomagic Verify | Index 1188

Delete Faces .................................................................... 596 H
Delete Poly-Faces....................................................... 1164
Deviation ......................................................................... 497
Healing Wizard .....................................................603, 649
Deviations..................................................................... 1112
Help ....................................................................... 136, 1171
Device Setting Tab .................................................... 1050
Hide All ...........................................................................1095
Dialog Tree ...................................................................... 190
Homing ............................................................................ 366
Dialog Tree Convention................................................ 36
Hotkey Setting Tab ....................................................1051
Display .............................................................................. 129
Docking Bar Convention.............................................. 40
Docking Bars .................................................................. 120 I
ICF ...................................................................................... 278
E Image Folder .................................................................. 185
Import & Split...................................................1140, 1141
Edit ..................................................................................... 323
Import CATIA file with PMI ....................................... 242
Edit Boundaries ............................................................. 656
Import Creo(PRO/E) file with PMI........................... 254
Edit Section Deviation ................................................ 707
Import Nominal data .................................................. 237
Elliptical Dimension ..................................................... 905
Import Scan Data ......................................................... 259
Enlarge .................................................................... 314, 700
Import Siemens NX file with PMI ........................... 248
Entities Around Edges/Faces.................................... 312
Importing Data ................................................................46
Error List ........................................................................... 187
Index ...............................................................................1188
Esc Key .............................................................................. 194
Insert ........................................................................337, 697
Exit ...................................................................................... 300
Insert Node ..................................................................... 867
Export ................................................................................ 271
Inspect Setting Tab ........................................1045, 1048
Export 3D HTML Report .......................................... 1062
Inspection Scenario........................................................69
Extend Curve .................................................................. 858
Inspection using Probe Measurement Devices 108
Exterior Poly-Face ......................................................... 322
Installation .........................................................................18
Intersection Curve ....................................................... 835
Introduction ........................................................................ 1
F
Inverse .............................................................................. 308
Feature .............................................................................. 336
Features of Geomagic Verify ......................................... 6 K
File ...................................................................................... 225
Fill Holes ........................................................................... 665
Key Themes of Geomagic Verify .................................. 4
Filter Noisy Poly Vertices .................................. 639, 641
KODEN OCM-A .............................................................. 571
Find Defect ............................................................ 605, 645
Konica Minolta VIVID .................................................. 562
Find Scan Direction ................................................... 1159
Fit ..................................................................................... 1116
Fit From Points ............................................................... 841 L
Fix Normal ............................................................. 599, 652
Flatness ............................................................................. 935
Light Properties ..........................................................1129
Line Profile ...................................................................... 987
Linear Dimension ......................................................... 883
G LiveAlign ........................................................................1019
LiveCapture ..................................................................1023
GD&T ................................................................................... 89
LiveDimension ............................................................1027
GD&T Tools ...................................................................... 871
LiveGeometry ..............................................................1033
General Setting Tab .................................................. 1040
LiveInspect....................................................................1012
Generate Report ........................................................ 1056
LiveInspect Settings ..................................................1039
Generate Vertex Normal ................................644, 1161
Generating and Exporting Reports ......................... 54
Generating Reports ..................................................... 105 M
Geomagic Capture ....................................................... 554
Geomagic Verify Automation .................................. 201
Match Curve ................................................................... 861
Geometry Deviation .................................................... 540
Maximize View Area ..................................................1138
Getting Help ................................................................... 111
Measure .........................................................................1065
Getting Started ................................................................ 14
Measure Angle ............................................................1070
Global Register ........................................................... 1142
Measure Area ...............................................................1081
Glossary ......................................................................... 1174
Measure Dimensions using Virtual Caliper ...... 1087

Measure Distance ...................................................... 1066 Previous Area ...............................................................1115
Measure Mesh Deviations ...................................... 1085 Print ................................................................................... 285
Measure Radius .......................................................... 1074 Print Preview .................................................................. 286
Measure Section ........................................................ 1078 Print Setup ...................................................................... 286
Measure Volume ........................................................ 1083 Probe Setting Tab .......................................................1041
Measurements ............................................................ 1112 Progress Bar .................................................................... 193
Memory Usage Indicator ........................................... 194 Project Curve.................................................................. 848
Menu ................................................................................. 224 Properties ........................................................................ 138
Menu Bar .......................................................................... 114 Publish .............................................................................. 274
Merge ................................................................................ 694
Merge Curve ................................................................... 864
Mesh Buildup Wizard .................................................. 617 R
Mesh Display Mode .................................................. 1120
Mesh vs. Point Cloud ..................................................... 67 Radial Dimension ......................................................... 898
Meshes ........................................................................... 1101 RANGE5/RANGE 7 ........................................................ 574
Mirror................................................................................. 598 Rebuild ............................................................................. 329
Mirror Curve.................................................................... 850 Rebuild Current Mode Only ..................................... 330
Mode ................................................................................. 303 Recent Files ..................................................................... 299
Mode Convention........................................................... 40 Redo .................................................................................. 325
Model View ..................................................................... 189 Ref Coordinate .............................................................. 491
Monitoring Bars............................................................. 193 Ref Sphere ....................................................................... 480
Mouse Control ............................................................... 194 Ref Torus .......................................................................... 485
Multiple Sections .......................................................... 377 Ref. Circle ................................................................431, 798
Multiple Source Mode ................................................ 211 Ref. Circles .....................................................................1108
Ref. Cone .......................................................................... 474
Ref. Coordinates ..........................................................1110
N Ref. Cylinder ................................................................... 467
Ref. Cylinders................................................................1109
Navigate Sections ...................................................... 1119 Ref. GD&Ts .....................................................................1111
Navigating Entities ......................................................... 41 Ref. Geometry ................................................................ 385
New .................................................................................... 227 Ref. Plane ......................................................................... 418
Nominal Tools ................................................................ 582 Ref. Planes .....................................................................1107
None .................................................................................. 307 Ref. Point .................................................................387, 769
Note ................................................................................... 580 Ref. Points ......................................................................1105
Ref. Polygon ...........................................................458, 816
Ref. Rectangle .......................................................449, 811
O Ref. Slot ...................................................................441, 805
Ref. Vector ..................................................407, 789, 1106
Offset ....................................................................... 591, 680 Region Tools ................................................................... 686
Offset Curve .................................................................... 846 Register Target.............................................................1144
Open .................................................................................. 228 Regroup 3D GD&Ts ....................................................1006
Organize Dimensions ............................................... 1008 Remove Constraint ...................................................... 869
Remove Marker ............................................................. 672
Remove Node ................................................................ 868
P Repeat Last Command ............................................... 326
Replace Scan Data ....................................................... 265
Parallelism ....................................................................... 959 Report ................................................................... 162, 1055
Paste .................................................................................. 328 Reporting ...........................................................................96
Perpendicularity ............................................................ 965 Resegment ...................................................................... 692
PIP .................................................................................... 1117 Reverse Normal ...........................................................1163
Play LiveInspect Process ......................................... 1016 Roland LPX ...................................................................... 571
Plot ..................................................................................... 545 Roll Forward ................................................................... 332
PMI Import Wizard........................................................ 241 Roll To End....................................................................... 334
Point Clouds ................................................................ 1100 Roll To Next Alignment .............................................. 333
Point Stream ................................................................... 274 Roll To Start ..................................................................... 332
Pop-up Menus ............................................................... 197 Rollback............................................................................ 331
Position ............................................................................. 927 RPS ..................................................................................... 346
Position Device ........................................................... 1052 Runout .............................................................................. 978
Power of 3D Scan Data ................................................. 57
Preferences...................................................................... 287
Preparing ........................................................................... 73

S TeamPlatform ................................................................ 233
Thicken ....................................................................594, 683
Thickness ......................................................................... 923
Save .................................................................................... 230
Time Indicator ............................................................... 193
Save As .............................................................................. 232
Title Bar ............................................................................ 114
Scan Data ......................................................................... 551
Tool Palette ..................................................................... 115
Scan Data Setting Tab .............................................. 1043
Toolbar ............................................................................. 116
Scan Tools ........................................................................ 613
Tools .................................................................................. 581
Scanner Direct Control ............................................... 553
Total Runout ................................................................... 983
Section .............................................................................. 369
Transform ...............................................................360, 588
Section Curve ................................................................. 830
Transform Scan Data ................................................... 635
Section Tools .................................................................. 703
Tree .................................................................................... 122
Sections ......................................................................... 1105
Trend Report ................................................................1064
Select ................................................................................. 301
Triangulate/Merge ....................................................... 630
Selection Convention ................................................... 39
Triangulate/Merge Large Data ..............................1151
Separate ........................................................................... 699
Trim Curve ....................................................................... 855
Separate Thickened Body .......................................... 606
Trim Mesh ......................................................................1166
Server ................................................................................ 218
Types of 3D Scan Data ...................................................59
Setting up Automation .............................................. 204
Sew ..................................................................................... 583
Sew Boundaries............................................................. 654
U
Shining3D ........................................................................ 574
Shortcut Keys ................................................................. 196
Understanding Inspection ..........................................68
Show All ........................................................................ 1094
Understanding Mesh .....................................................63
Show Fail & Warning Only ...................................... 1099
Understanding Point Clouds ......................................59
Show Fail Only ............................................................ 1097
Understanding Scan Data ............................................56
Show No Result Only ................................................ 1098
Understanding User Interface Philosophy ............ 36
Show Pass & Warning Only .................................... 1099
Undo ................................................................................. 324
Show Pass Only .......................................................... 1096
Unsuppress ..................................................................... 335
Show Selected Only.................................................. 1093
User Interface................................................................. 113
Show Warning Only .................................................. 1097
User Interface Overview ...............................................28
Shrink ...................................................................... 316, 702
Silhouette Deviation ................................................... 527
Simple Measuring .......................................................... 92 V
Simulated CMM Point ....................................... 398, 780
Single Source Mode..................................................... 205
Verifying Geometric Features .....................................75
Smart Dimension .......................................................... 876
View .................................................................................1090
Smooth Curve ................................................................ 854
View Clip ........................................................................1131
Solid Bodies ................................................................. 1103
Viewpoint ............................................................ 137, 1123
Spline................................................................................. 825
Viewport ........................................................................1126
Split .......................................................................... 677, 696
Virtual Edge Deviation ............................................... 534
Split Curve ....................................................................... 860
Visibility ..........................................................................1091
Split Face .......................................................................... 585
Visualizing Results by Color Map ..............................96
Status Bar ......................................................................... 193
Visualizing Results by Tagging ................................ 100
Straightness .................................................................... 938
Volume Merge .............................................................1155
Summary Info................................................................. 298
Support............................................................................. 184
Suppress ........................................................................... 334 W
Surface Bodies ............................................................ 1102
Surface Merge ............................................................. 1153 What Can Geomagic Verify Do? .................................19
Surface Profile ................................................................ 995 Whole Deviation ........................................................... 498
Surface UV Curves ........................................................ 837 Why 3D Scanning? ..........................................................56
Symmetry ..................................................................... 1001 Working with Large Scan Data...................................73
System Requirements ................................................... 14
Z
T
Z Corporation ZScanner ............................................ 577
Tabular View ................................................................... 188 Zoom ...............................................................................1113

User Guide: Geomagic Verify - November, 2013

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

User Guide: Geomagic Verify - November, 2013

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

User Guide

Geomagic Verify | November, 2013

Correspondence regarding this publication should be directed to:

Geomagic Verify | Table of Contents i

1.1. Welcome to Geomagic Verify.........................................................................................2

1.2. Key Themes of Geomagic Verify ....................................................................................4

1.3. Features of Geomagic Verify..........................................................................................6

2. GETTING STARTED ................................................................................................ 14

2.1. System Requirements ................................................................................................. 14

2.2. Installation ................................................................................................................... 18

2.3. What Can Geomagic Verify Do? .................................................................................. 19

2.4. Basic Entity Terminology ............................................................................................ 20

2.5. Basic Concept of User Interface .................................................................................. 28

2.6. Basic Inspection Overview.......................................................................................... 45

3. UNDERSTANDING SCAN DATA ............................................................................. 56

3.1. Why 3D Scanning? ....................................................................................................... 56

3.2. Types of 3D Scan Data ................................................................................................. 59

Geomagic Verify | Table of Contents i

4.2. Basic Knowledge for 3D Scan-based Inspection Process ......................................... 72

5. GETTING HELP ..................................................................................................... 111

6. USER INTERFACE ................................................................................................. 113

6.1. Title Bar ...................................................................................................................... 114

6.2. Menu Bar .................................................................................................................... 114

6.3. Tool Palette ................................................................................................................ 115

6.4. Toolbar ....................................................................................................................... 116

6.5. Docking Bars.............................................................................................................. 120

6.6. Model View ................................................................................................................ 189

6.7. Dialog Tree ................................................................................................................. 190

6.8. Monitoring Bars......................................................................................................... 193

Geomagic Verify | Table of Contents ii

6.10. Mouse Control ........................................................................................................... 194

6.11. Shortcut Keys ............................................................................................................. 196

6.12. Pop-up Menus............................................................................................................ 197

6.13. 3D Mouse ................................................................................................................... 200

6.14. Geomagic Verify Automation ................................................................................... 201

7. MENU ................................................................................................................... 224

7.1. File .............................................................................................................................. 225

7.2. Select .......................................................................................................................... 301

Geomagic Verify | Table of Contents iii

7.3. Edit ............................................................................................................................. 323

7.4. Insert .......................................................................................................................... 337

Geomagic Verify | Table of Contents iv

7.5. Tools ........................................................................................................................... 581

Geomagic Verify | Table of Contents v

Geomagic Verify | Table of Contents vi

7.6. LiveInspect............................................................................................................... 1012

7.7. Report ...................................................................................................................... 1055

7.8. Measure.................................................................................................................... 1065

Geomagic Verify | Table of Contents vii

7.9. View .......................................................................................................................... 1090

7.10. Add-Ins ..................................................................................................................... 1139

Geomagic Verify | Table of Contents viii

7.11. Help .......................................................................................................................... 1171

8. GLOSSARY ......................................................................................................... 1174

9. INDEX ................................................................................................................. 1188

Geomagic Verify | Table of Contents ix

Geomagic Verify | Introduction 1

The Most CAD Friendly Point-Cloud Inspection Software

Compare Manufactured Parts to CAD Models in Minutes

• Compatible with Siemens NX, CATIA, Creo(Pro/ENGINEER) and SolidWorks

Geomagic Verify | Introduction 2

Geomagic Verify | Introduction 3

The Most CAD Friendly Point-Cloud Inspection Software